The combined Spanish method ; a practical and theoretical system for learning the Spanish language, embracing the most advantageous features of the best known methods ; with a pronouncing vocabulary

IN MEMOmAJA

George Holmes howison

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2007 with funding from

IVIicrosoft Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/combinedspanishOOtornrich

THE

COMBINED SPANISH METHOD

^A PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL SYS'i'E)i;F<)Sl Li^ARNII^O ly

THE SPANISH LA>TGrAaE/,,;^.,/.\\',

EMBRACING THE MOST ADVAN-fAGEOaS 'Fi]ATi:jKES > - ' ^
OF THE BEST KNOWN METHODS

WITH A PEONOUNCING VOCABULARY

CONTAINING ALL THE WORDS USED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK, AND

EEFERENCES TO THE LESSONS IN WHICH EACH ONE IS EXPLAINED,

THUS ENABLING ANY ONE TO BE HIS OWN INSTRUCTOR

BY

ALBERTO DE TORNOS, AM.

FORMERLY DIRBCTOR OP NORMAL SCHOOLS IN SPAIN, AND TBACHBR OP SPANISH

IN THB NEW YORK MERCANTILE LIBRARY, NEW YORK EVENING HIGH SCHOOL,

AND THB POLYTECHNIC AND PACKER INSTITUTES, BROOKLYN

REVISED EDITION

:N"EW YORK

D. appleton and company

1910

••••••• «

• •.•.••••.•.• ••..-.«

Copyright, 1867, 1907,
By D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.

Copyright, 1895,
By MANUEL DE TORNOS.

Copyright, 1899,
By FRANCISCA DE TORNOS.

•J

EEVISER'S PKEFACE.

Professor De Tornos's Combined Spanish Method, first
published thirty years ago, has won for itself an established
position among students of the Spanish language. After
the test of use and competition for a quarter of a century,
it still continues to be the most satisfactory book of the
kind in the hands of the public. Nevertheless, the exten-
sive modification of Spanish orthography by the decrees of
the Real Academia Espanola^ enacted some years ago, has
necessitated further revisions in accordance with these
changes. The object of the present edition is to preserve
the unquestioned advantages possessed by the original
work, and at the same time to make it conform entirely
to the rulings of the Academy, in order to meet the
demands of the modern student.

Since many of those who are to use the method will
do so with the view of travel or residence in some of the
Spanish- American countries, special attention has been de-
voted to a consideration of the American variations from
Castilian Spanish in the matter of pronunciation. How-
ever, there has been no departure from the grammatical
principles laid down by the Academy.

861169

iv REVISER'S PREFACE.

The written language is the same everywhere, save that
the speech and literature of each country have adopted
many words of native origin. It will be found expedient
to acquire first the true Spanish word, and afterward to
take up the native variant.

June, 1899,

PKEFACE,

It is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan-
guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor
can be, any other method than that of uniting theory with
jpractice; and the various modes of applying the one to the
other, the extent of the application, and the time at which
it should be commenced, have produced the great number
of methods hitherto published.

This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each
new author proclaims himself to be the only one who has
put it into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-
book does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it
combines theory and practice; and grammars containing
nothing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one
upon another, are entitled '-^ Theoretical ^rAPracticalP It
is admitted on all hands that much progress has been made
within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ;
and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the
excellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca,
Ollendorff, Boulet, Eobertson, and others who have followed
in their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have
done much good in their way. But each one of the gram-
marians referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked

vi PREFACE.

with disdain upon that of his predecessor. Hence the en-
mity and the almost unaccountable diversity of opinion
which we observe amongst them. Had they studied each
other with impartiality, and .endeavored to profit by the
experience, and even the defects of the several systems,
their labors would certainly have been attended with still
more favorable results, and of course more considerable
benefit would have accrued thereby to the science in gen-
eral. Numberless points of excellence are to be found,
scattered here and there, throughout the various ancient
and modern systems, and chiefly those already alluded to ;
and it has been taught that, if carefully sifted out and
judiciously combined, they would form a new method
which would be in details essentially superior to any of the
old ones.

This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience in
teaching the Spanish language, sometimes through the me-
dium of one, sometimes of another of the systems mentioned
above, has led the author to prepare and publish the Com-
bined Method, which he now offers to those desiring to
learn the noble language of Cervantes.

Whether he hae successfully attained his object the
public will decide.

OBSERVATIONS

ON SOME OP THE ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES OF THE
"DE TORNOS'S COMBINED METHOD."

1st. The advantage of presenting the verb as the first and
principal part of speech, which serves as the axis upon which
all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced
in their turn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance,
but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in
discourse, whether written or spoken.

2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order
just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to
form a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learn-
er will have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative
to the use of each one of them respectively, as often as occa-
sion may require.

3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory,
and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate
from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com-
posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying
each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with
grammar in general, and those who have no desire to enter
into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too
young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough
conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing
to memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and
carefully writing the Exercises.

4th. From this arrangement arises another great advan-
tage, namely, that all the elements are found in the vocabu-
lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples
and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student
to see at one glance all that he has to commit to memory for
each recitation.

viii OBSER VA TIONS,

5th. And this division of the lessons into Elements, Com-
position, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the
teacher to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four
parts, according to the age and capacity of the student.

6th. Repetition^ and constant repetition^ is indispensable
in acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be
understood the simple reiteration of single words and easy
phrases ; but repetition of the idioms, and of those forms of
expression differing most widely from the idiomatical con-
struction of the learner's native tongue. It is true, that
though this is the proper plan for acquiring a thorough
knowledge of a language, that feature might tend to make
the present work appear, at first sight, more difficult than
the books hitherto used ; but such will not be found the case ;
for when there is frequent change of matter there cannot be
monotony ; and variety renders study at the same time easy
and agreeable. This repetition, then, of useful forms of ex-
pression and contrast of style will be found on every page of
our " CoMBii^ED Method," in which it has been our endeavor
to introduce gradually, and with the necessary explanations
of each, the most important idioms of the Spanish language.

7th. Although we are of opinion that to learn a language,
and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable
to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who
speaks the language with purity and correctness ; yet, as it
is not always possible to procure such, we have placed at the
end of the Method a Vocabulary, containing all the words
used in the course of the work, and the pronunciation of
each, so that nothing may be wanting to second the efforts of
those who, from choice or necessity, may be their own in-
structors.

8th. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation
and meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the
explanation of each has been given in the Grammar. By
this means the learner can with ease refer to the explanation
of all those words of which it has been deemed essential
to give one.

CONTENTS.

PAGE

Reviser's Preface, iii, iv

Preface, v, vi

A FEW Remarks on the Combined Method, vii, viii

Contents, • ix-xviii

Preliminary Lesson on Orthography and Pronunciation, . . .xix-xxix

LESSON I.

RULE

1. Regular verbs, classified in three conjugations, 1

2. Stems, ,2

3. Terminations of the three model verbs, corresponding to all the regular

verbs, 2

— . Suppression of the nominative pronouns, 2

4. F. (CTsfed) requires the verb in the third person, 3

5. Position of subject and predicate, 3

6. Use of do and did as auxiliaries, 8

LESSON II.

7. Seflor, seflorito, seHora, seHorita, use of these words, 4

8. Don and Dona, use of these words, 5

9. No, placed before the verb, 6

LESSON III.

10. The conjunction y changed into e, 8

11. Qu4, interrogative pronoun, 8

12. Pero and Sino, 8

13. Espanol, ingUs, &c., one word may be classed with different parts of

speech, 8

LESSON IV.

A, preposition to, used after active verbs, when the object is a person,
De, used to express position or the material of which anything is made
El, the article the, used to determine a noun masculine singular, .
Contraction of the article el and the prepositions d and de into el, del,
Un, the indefinite pronoun used before masculine nouns,
Uno is only used as a numeral adjective,

11
11
11
11
11
11

LESSON V.

18. Gender, how ascertained, , . . 14

— . Una, used before feminine nouns, 15

19. Your, how translated, . . . . • . 15

CONTENTS,

LESSON VI.

RULE PAGK

20. The terminations of the persons of the present indicative ; how they differ

in the three conjugations, * . , . .18

21. Muy^ how translated, 18

22. Nouns ending in o change that vowel into a for the feminine, . . .19

23. Usted and Ustedes abbreviated into V. and Vds., 19

24.

LESSON VII.

Adjectives ending in o, an, or on, form their feminine in a, . . . ,22
Adjectives signifying nationality and ending in a consonant .

Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns, 23

Adjectives used metaphorically are always placed before the nouns.
Some adjectives drop their last letter or syllable, ....

LESSON VIII.

25. The endings of the second and third conjugations ; how they differ, . . 26

26. The conjunction 6 changed into w, 26

27. Ni, how translated 26

28. The plural of nouns, 26

29. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and number .... 27

The article agrees also, 27

Feminine nouns that take the masculine article, 27

The neuter article Zo, 27

LESSON IX.

32. Papa, mama, pie, are exceptions, 31

33. Nouns of more than one syllable, and ending in s, form their plural, . . 31
— . Words ending in z, their plural, 31

34. Words which are compounds of two nouns, their plural, .... 31

35. The days of the week, when they take the article, 31

36. Donde, adonde, cuando, placed before the verb, 31

37. Donde, adonde, cudndo, in interrogations require an accent, .... 32

LESSON X.

Irregular verbs, 35

Tener not included in the seven verbs, 35

39. Personal pronouns as direct or indirect objects, 35

Position of objective pronouns with regard to the verb, 35

It and so are translated sometimes by Zo, 36

40. Quien, cual, que, de quien, used interrogatively do not take the article, . 37

41. When the interrogative is governed by a preposition, the same preposition

must be repeated in the answer, 37

42. El as a definite pronoun, 37

LESSON XI.

43. Alguien, alguno, the difference between them 40

— . Any one or anybody, when translated by cualquiera, 40

44. Nadie^ ninguno, their distinction, 40

CONTENTS. xi

RULE PAGB

45. Alguno and ninguno, when they lose the o, . . • . . . .40

46. AlgOy alguna cosa, used aflarmatively, 40

47. Nadn, ninguna cosa, used negatively, 40

48. Negatives, when placed before the verb, 40

— . Two negatives render the negation more emphatic than one, ... 41

49. A or an^ when not translated, 42

LESSON XII.

59. Tener and haber, their distinction, 44

— . To have and to be, followed by an infinitive, how they are translated, . . 44

51. Perfect 45

LESSON XI.II.

52. Mio, tuyo, &c., change the o into a for the feminine, 49

53. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the name of the thing

49

54. As pronominal adjectives, mio, tuyo, suyo precede the noun and drop their

final syllable, . . . ' 49

55. JIfio, when placed after the noun, 49

56. Possessives used as pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns

they represent, and take the article, 49

57. When used indefinitely they take the neuter article, 49

58. When connected with the verb to be, the article is omitted, .... 49

59. Vv^tro, vuestra, when used, 50

LESSON XIV.

60. Formation of compound numbers, 54

61. Numbers are indeclinable, except uno and the compounds of cienfo, . . 54

62. Uno, Its agreement ; when it loses the o, 54

63. Ciento, its agreement ; when it loses the last syllable, 54

LESSON XV.

64. Ordinals, their agreement and place, 58

— . Primer o and tercero, when they drop their final letter, 58

65. Ordinals, when used 59

— . N. B.— When ordinals do not require the definite article, 59

LESSON XVI.

66. Preterit, . 64

67. Ante, its meaning, 64

68. Mds and menos, how used, 65

LESSON XVII.

69. Quien, how used, 68

70. Who, when translated by que, and when by quien, 68

71. Cual and que relate to persons and things, 69

72. Cuyo refers to persons and things : its agreement 69 •

■— . It partakes of the nature of the relatives and of the

xii CONTENTS.

RULE PAGE

73. The preposition placed before the relative, 69

74. Relative pronoung can never be suppressed in Spanish, .... 69

LESSON XVIII.

75. Declension of the demonstrative pronouns este, cse, aquel^ .... 75

76. Este, how used, 75

77. Use of the adverb ahi, 75

78. Este, ese, forming one word with the adjective otro, 75

79. The demonstrative pronouns used as neuter, 76

80. The former a.nd the latter, tTELnslatedhj aquel and este, .... 76

81. That of or that which, translated hy el de, el qtie 76

82. English personal pronouns rendered in Spanish by demonstrative pro-

nouns, 76

83. Aqui, alii, acd, alia, how employed, 76

LESSON XIX.

85. Para and por, how they differ, 81

86. Entre, its meaning, 8fc

87. Hasta, its meaning, 88

LESSON XX.

88. Tanto and cuanto, when they lose the last syllable, 87

89. Comparison of equality, how formed, 87

90. Cuan may be employed, 87

91. Comparison of superiority, how formed, 87

92. Comparison of inferiority, 87

93. Mayor, menor, wejor, peor, are already in the comparative degree, . . 88

94. Than, translated by de and que, 88

95. Comparison relating to nouns, verbs, and adverbs, 88

100.
101
102.
103,
104,

105,

LESSON XXI.

Superlatives ending in est, or formed by most, how translated, ... 93

Most, or viost of, when translated by la mayor parte, or by mAs, . . 93

In, preposition, when translated by de 93

Superlatives formed by very, most, &c., when formed in Spanish by muy

and when by isimo, 93

Adjectives drop the last vowel on taking the termination isimo, ... 94

Other superlatives ending in errimo, 94

Adjectives which change their endings before the termination isimo, . 94

Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed, 94

Irregular comparatives and superlatives, 94

These make also a superlative in isimo, 95

Also with muy, and a comparative with mas or menos, 95

Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of comparison, ... 95

LESSON XXII.

106. Ser and estar, the distinction between them, ' . .100

107. " " their employment 100

. N. B.— Use of either ser or estar, but with different meaning, . . .101

108. Present participles, 102

CONTENTS. xiii

LESSON XXIII.

RULB PAG"

109. Future tense, 108

110. The definite article used with numerals, indicating the hour of the day, . 108

111. Evening and night, translated by noche, 108

112. The conjunction si, when it governs the subjunctive, and when the indica-

tive 108

LESSON XXIV.

113. Future perfect, 113

114. Acabar de, its meaning, 113

115. How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no difla-

culty, 113

— . Nouns ending in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into c, 113

116. The days of the month are counted by the cardinal numbers, preceded by

the article, 113

LESSON XXV.

117. Saber and conocer, how they differ, 1 19

118. Aun, ya, todavia, their diflPerent meaning and uses, 120

— . Once, twice, &c., translated by wna vez, dos veces, &c., 120

— . Miedo, valor, &o., take the preposition de after them, 120

119. To be afraid, to be thirsty, &c., how translated, 120

120. Jamas and nunca, how used, 120

LESSON XXVI.

121. Pronoun subject, or nominative, 126

122. Two objective cases of the personal pronouns, how used, . . . .126

123. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is aflflxed to infini-

tives, present participles, &c., 126

124. When the verb drops the final letter followed by nos or os, . . . . 126
— . The reason of this, 127

125. When the objective case may follow the verb, 127

126. When the objective may be placed before the first verb, or after the

second, 127

127. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case, . 127

128. ilfi, iti, si, when preceded by con, 127

129. Entre, how used 127

130. The second objective case is used after comparatives, 127

131. When the first objective case is used, 128

132. The objective case of the third person is rendered by le, les, if the preposi-

tion to govern it in English, - . . 128

LESSON XXVII.

133. The third person rendered in Spanish by se 133

134. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases

occur in the sentence 134

135. Placed first when the object of the verb is the reflexive pronoun, . . 135

136. Both of the objective cases belonging to the same person used together, . 136

xiv CONTENTS,

RULE PAGB

137. The expressions d el quiero, a ti amo, are incorrect, 137

138. Use of le and les with second objectives, 134

139. The pronouns el, la, lo, los, and las, how distinguished from the articles

el, la, lo, lo8, las, 135

— . The adjective mismo, how used, 136

LESSON XXVIII.

140. Wnen the imperfect is used, 141

141. When the pa«f per/ecf is used, 142

142. How the expressions to have just and to he just are translated before a

past participle, 143

LESSON XXIX.

143. The preterit perfect, its use, 147

144. Derivation of adverbs of manner and quality, 147

145. How adverbs are formed from adjectives, 147

146. Adverbs terminating in mente admit, like adjectives, the degrees of com-

parison, 147

147. How these adverbs can be substituted, 147

148.
149,
150.
151
152.

153.

LESSON XXX.

What impersonal verbs are, 153

Amanecer and anochecer, used in the three persons, 153

Haber and hacer, and other verbs used impersonally, 153

The pronoun it, accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated, . . 154

The article.— Nouns taken in a definite sense require it, .... 154

Nouns used in their most general sense take the article, .... J54

Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article, . . . 154
Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not

take the article, 155

Names of some places that always take the article, 155

LESSON XXXI.

154. Gustar, signifying to give pleasure to, how used, 161

155. Gustar, followed by the preposition de, 161

156. Gustar, used as an active verb, 161

157. Verbs that require the same idiomatic construction as th«,t of the verb

gustar, ... 161

158. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, .... ... 161

LESSON XXXII.

159. How the passive voice is formed, 167

160. When the passive form is used with the verb ser in the present and imper-

fect tenses of the indicative 167

161. When the preposition de or por is to be used after passive verbs, . . 167

162. Passive voice formed by se, 167

163. When the passive, formed with se, is to be preferred, 168

CONTENTS, 'XV
LESSON XXXIII.

RULK PAOB

164. Reflexive verbs, what they are, 174

165. When are the v.erbs made reflexive ? 174

166. When a verb denotes reciprocity^ how it is conjugated, , . . .174

LESSON XXXIV.

167. Which are the irregular verbs, 180

168. Verbs which, although they undergo slight changes in their radical let-

ters, are not to be considered as irregular, 180

169. Verbs which change i into y, 181

170. Verbs ending in uir, 181

171. Regular irregular verbs, 181

172. Whatistobeobservedrelativeto the object of the verb payar, . . 182

LESSON XXXV.

173. Irregularity of the verb acosiar, 187

174. Imperative mode, when used, 187

175. The s of the first person jrtural, and the d of the second, suppressed be-

fore nos and os, 187

176. The subjunctive, used with the negative imperative, 188

177. The future indicative, used for the imperative, 188

178. Adjectives ending in ous, how rendered into Spanish, 188

179. Nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic or ical^ how rendered into

Spanish, ' 188

LESSON XXXVI.

180. Irregularity of the verb mover, 193

181. Se, as the Spanish indefinite personal pronoun, 193

182. The pronoun se, in its four functions, . . . . . . . .193

183. Nouns ending in English in ty, how rendered into Spanish, . , . .194

184. Doler, how used, 194

LESSON XXXVII.

185. Irregularity of the verb atender, 199

186, 187, 188, 189. Subjunctive Mode, when used in Spanish, 200

190. Present tense of the subjunctive, 201

191. Perfect tense, 202

LESSON XXXVIII.

192. Active Participles, 207

193. Present Participles, 207

194. The verb estar used with the gerund in Spanish, 207

195. When in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used,

how rendered into Spanish, 207

196. The infinitive used as a verbal noun, 207

197. The infinitive governed by another verb, how rendered into English, . 208

2

XVI

CONTENTS.

LESSON XXXIX.

BTTT^ PAGB

198. Irregularity of the verb pedir, 213

199. The usual forms of salutations, 213

LESSON XL.

200. Conducir, its irregularity, 219

201. Segun as a preposition and adverb, 220

202. Collective nouns, 220

LESSON XLI.

203. Defective verbs. Placer, 225

204. Yacer, its use, 225

205. Soler, its use 226

206. Desde, its meaning and use, 226

207. Contra, rendered into English by against, 226

208. Sobre, its signification, 226

209. Tras, its meaning, 226

210. The conjunction pues, its use, 227

211. Pues, meaning well, 227

LESSON XLII.

212. Conjunctions, their classification, 232

213. What is to be observed in relation to the government of conjunctions, . 232

214. Some conjunctions that govern the subjunctive mode, 233

215. Compound conjunctions which require the infinitive mode, . ... 233

216. Compound conjunctions which require the indicative, .... 233

LESSON XLIII.

217. Imperfect and past perfect subjunctive, 238

218. How to render into Spanish the auxiliaries may, might, can, could, will,

would, and should, 240

219. What the imperfect subjunctive denotes, . 240

220. What the past perfect denotes, 240

LESSON XLIV.

221. Augmentative and diminutive nouns, 246

222. Irregular terminations of certain diminutives, 247

223. Diminutives may be formed from adjectives participles, gerunds, and

adverbs, 248

224 Some of the primitive words do not admit all the diminutive termina-
tions, 248

225. There are derivatives which, although they appear to be augmentatives

or diminutives, are not so, 248

LESSON XLV.

226. The future of the subjunctive, 254

227. How the present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the future, . 254

228. The future perfect subjunctive, 254

CONTEm^S, xvii

RULE PAGE

229. The perfect subjunctive may be substituted by the future perfect sub-

junctive, 355

230. What is to be observed in order not to misapply the imperfect and past

perfect, 255

231. The future and future perfect subjunctive as determining verbs, . . 255

>^ LESSON XLVI.

232. 233. Interjections, 261

LESSON XLVII.

234. Use of the article, 268

235. The definite article used with common nouns taken in a general sense, . 268

236. The article before the names of the four parts of the globe, names of em-

pires, kingdoms, &c 268

237. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when they require the article, . . .268

238. The article repeated before every noun enumerated, 269

239. The definite article used before nouns indicating rank, office, &c., . . 269

240. Used instead of the possessive adjective, 269

241. Used as in English, before nouns, taken in a particular or definite sense, . 269

LESSON XLVIII.

242. Correspondence of the tenses with each other, 276

243. When the determined verb is put in the infinitive, 276

244. When the determining verb is ser^ or any impersonal verb, and the govern-

ing verb has no subject, 277

245. Put in the subjunctive when the determining verb has a nominative, . . 277

246. When the governing verb is put in the present or future of the subjunctive, 277

247. When there are different subjects of determining and determined verbs, . 278

248. The nominative being the same for both verbs and the governing one in

the indicative, in what mode the determining verb is put, . . . .278

LESSON XLIX.

249. 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259. Derivative nouns, .... 284

LESSON L.

260. Compound nouns, 291

LESSON LI.

261. The natural construction, 297

262. ^63. Figurative construction, 297

264. Which of the two constructions is preferable, 298

LESSON LII.

265. Past Participles 304

266. Agreement of past participles 304

267. When a verb has two past participles, one regular and the other irregular,

how they are used, 304

268. Irregular past participles that may be used with the verb haber, . . 305

269. Extraordinary irregularity of the verb morrr^ 30^

xviii CONTENTS.

RULE PASS

270. Some past participles take an active signification, ...... 305

271. Past participles may sometimes take the place of substantives, . ^ .306

272. Other tenses in the infinitive mode, c . . 306

LESSON LIII.

273. Idiomatic expressions, in which the English preposition differs in meaning

from that which most generally constitutes its proper signification, . 312

LESSON LIV.

274. Conjunctions in English that are frequently used as substitutes for other

words, how rendered into Spanish, 318

275. Spanish conjunctions used as substitutes for other words, . . . .318
— . Different uses of the conjimction si, 318

LESSON LY.

276. Some of the principal uses of the conjunction gwc, 324

LESSON LVI.

277. Epistolary correspondence, 330

LESSON LVII.

278. Observation in regard to verbs that change their meaning according to the

preposition by which they are followed, 339

LESSON LVIII.

279. The verbs to he glad and to he rejoiced, how translated, .... 344

280. The verbs to he sorry and to grieve, how translated, 844

281. How the verb caber is used, 345

LESSON LIX.

282. Idioms with the verbs caer, dar^ decir, echar^ 351

LESSON LX.

283. Idioms with the verbs entrar, fuicer, ir, llevar, mandar, oler d, saber d,

salir, servir, tardar, and volver, 358

LESSONS LXI TO LXV.
On the Principal Idioms of the Spanish Language, 360 to £88

General observations on some grammatical and idiomatical peculiarities of the

Spanish language, not hitherto treated of in the Grammar, . . . .389
Complete list of the conjugations of all the Spanish verbs, . . . 400 to 451

List of all the irregular verbs 455, 456

Vocabulary, containing all the Spanish words used in the Grammar, . 459 to 496

INTKODUCTION.

OETHOGRAPHY AND PEONUNCIATIOK

THE ALPHABET.

The Spanish Alphabet contains twenty-eight letters,
exclusive of Tf, which is used in foreign words only, and ifc^
pronounced as in English. (7A, ??, ^, and rr are single let-
ters, although double in form. The alphabet is as follows :

A,

a,

ah^

M,

m,

em'-may.

B,

b,

lay.

N,

n,

en' -nay.

c,

c,

thay^ or

say A

\

fi,

en'-yay.

CH,

ch,

chay.

0,

0,

0.

D,

d,

day.

P,

P,

'pay.

E,

e,

ay.

Q,

q,

Tcoo,

F,

f,

ef-M^

E,

r,

eh' -ray.

(>,

g,

hay.

8,

s,

es'-say.

H,

h,

at'-ckay.

T,

t,

tay.

I,

i,

e.

u,

u,

00,

J,

3,

Tio'-tah,

V,

V,

my.

K,

k,

Mh,

X,

X,

eh'-lcees.

L,

1,

el'-Uy.

Y,

y,

e-gree-ay'-gah.

LL,

11,

eV-yay,

or W-yay. f

z,

z,

thay-tali^ or say'-tah.ji

* The pupil should not try to learn the Spanish names of the letters
immediately, as they are confusing ; but only their sounds, or orthograph-
ical force.

t This is the American variation, now used by the many millions who
speak Spanish as their native tongue in Mexico, Cuba, and South America.

XX INTRODUCTION,

A number of the letters are invariable in sound, as will be
seen in the proper place ; and every letter is pronounced in
all positions, except the A, which is always silent, and the u^
without the dieresis, in the syllables gue^ gui^ and que^ qui.

With a few exceptions, the Spanish language is pro-
nounced exactly as it is written, and does not present those
difficulties met with in the orthography and pronunciation of
most other languages. The method of representing, in each
lesson, the pronunciation of every word by an incorrect or-
thography only augments the labor and doubts of the learner,
besides increasing unnecessarily the size of the work. A few
lessons with a wise teacher who speaks Spanish accurately
will do more to further the acquisition of a correct pronuncia-
tion than all the works that could be written on the subject.

As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all
other languages, great care ought to be taken to learn the
true sound of the Spanish vowels. They are :

a,

e,

1,

o,

u.

ah.

ay^

e,

0,

oo.

A has an invariable sound, like a in father-^ as, parte^
part, arte^ art, carta^ letter, carne^ meat, hotica^ drug-store.

E has the sound of e in they\ as, cera, wax, madera^
wood.

I is invariable, and has the sound of i in machine ; as, si^
yes, sino^ but, alli^ there.

0 is invariable, and has the sound of o in Lord — neither
the 0 of note nor that of top ; todo, all, amo, I love.

TJ is invariable, and sounds like u in rule ; as, puro, pure,
tuna, prickly pear ; it is silent in the syllables gue,gui,guerra,
except it have a dieresis marked over it ; as, vergiienza, shame.
In the syllables que^ qui, it is always silent.

INTRODUCTION. xxi

SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS.

B has nearly the same sound as in English ; but in Castile,
and wherever the Castilian language is most purely spoken,
they do not press the lips quite as closely together as those
who speak English do, and this causes it to be very fre-
quently confounded with the v^ although they are distinct
letters.

C, when followed by a, o, w, or any consonant, sounds
like k. Before e and i it sounds like th in thanks ; as, cecina^
gracias, leccion,

CH is not a double consonant, but a letter which, although
of a double form, has by itself a particular denomination and
sound ; it is pronounced like ch in chess ; as, chico^ chocolate.
Formerly, in words of Hebrew and Greek origin, it had the
sound of ^, when the vowel following it was marked with
the circumflex accent ; as, archangel^ chimica : but this prac-
tice is obsolete, and such words are now written arcdngel^
quimica.

D has two sounds ; between two vowels, and at the end of
words, it has the sound of th in that ; as, ido^ amad ; but care
must be had not to give this d the sound of th in thin. Every-
where else it has the sound of d in English ; as, de^ divino^
duro.

F is always pronounced like the English /, and is now
used instead of ph ; as, Filosofia^ Filadelfia^ instead of Fhilo-
sophia^ Philadelphia,

G has two distinct sounds : one, before a^ o, u^ or a conso-
nant, is the same sound as in English go^ good ; as, gato^ gra^
cias ; before e and i it has a strong, guttural, aspirated sound,
for which the English has no equivalent, and which even a
very strongly aspirated h^ as in the words hot^ holy,, does not
represent ; as, gente^ people ; gesto,, gesture ; general,, general.

xxii INTRODUCTION,

H is always silent ; as, hace^ Mgo^ pronounced as if no such
h were there. It is preserved only as a sign to indicate the
etymology of words, and is now omitted in many words in
which it was formerly used; as, Cristo, Filosofia, Teatro^
Pitdgoras^ Filadelfia,

H is always written before words beginning with ue and
ui^ and, with three exceptions {uardnido, uarano, uatita)^
before ua,

J has always an aspirated guttural sound, like that which
the g has before e and i,

L always sounds as in English.

LL is a single letter, and may not be divided at the end
of a line. It has a liquid sound, resembling that of the
English II in William^ brilliant ; as, Guillermo^ hrillante ;
but in the Americas it has the sound of y with a slight
rough breathing ; as, Saltillo, pronounced Sal-ti'-yo.

M, N, and P have the English sound.

N is always pronounced like ni in the English word
pinion ; as, canon, pronounced can-yon' .

Q, is pronounced like the English k before ue and ui, in
which combination alone it is now used ; in all other posi-
tions it has been replaced by c ; as, cuando, cama, corner^
quien, querer.

E, between two vowels is like the English r, only it is
softer, and it requires a nice perception to catch the dif-
ference ; as, pero. At the beginning or end of a word, or
when it follows Z, ?i, 5, it is pronounced with a strong trill,
produced by breathing out through the mouth while the
tongue is being vibrated against the upper gums ; as, reloj\
malrotar^ enriquecer, Israel, prerrogativa, manirroto, cari*
rredondo, &c.

INTRODUCTION, xxiii

RE is a single letter, and must be treated as such. It
has the rough, trilled sound just described ; as, tierra^ hurro^
perro,

S is pronounced like the English s in say ; as, salio, solo.
Great care must be taken not to give the Spanish s the
sound of sh^ or z which it often has in English — as in sion^
or these. There is no sh or z sound Jn Spanish.

T is pronounced as in English.

V has the sound of the English v, (See letter B.)

X, at the end of a syllable, has the sound of the x in the
English word tax ; as, examen^ extranjero. At the beginning
of a word or syllable x has the sound of the Spanish /, that
is, a very strong guttural ; as, Mexico, Oaxaca. (See letter
J,) Some replace it by the letter 5, when it comes before a
consonant, and write estranjero instead of extranjero. The
grammar of the Spanish Academy does not authorize this
practice.

Y, at the beginning of a word or syllable, is like the
English y in the same position ; as, yegua^ Yucatan, It
stands alone in the conjunction y, as a vowel, and was for-
merly used as a vowel at the beginning of certain words ;
as, Yglesia^ Yrapuato ; but it has given place to t, and it
never stands at the beginning of a word as a vowel in mod-
ern Spanish. It is used instead of i at the end of words in
the combinations a% ei, oi, ui ; as, verdegay, rey, soy, muy.
These, and many similar words, are often met with in old
Spanish terminating in i,

Z has the sound of fh in thistle. Z never has the sound
of English 2;, or the English s in has.

XXIV

INTR OB UCTION,

SYLLABLES.

Such syllables only will be noted
to doubt as to the pronunciation and

here as may be subject
orthography.

ca,

que,

qui,

CO,

cu,

hah.

Tcay.

;fce^.

A».

^<x?.

za,

ce, ►

ci.

zo.

zu,

thah.

thay.

thee.

«Ao.

thoo.

az,

ez,

iz,

oz.

uz,

ath.

eth.

e^^A.

oth.

ooth.

ga,

gue,

gui,

go,

g^»

gah.

^«y.

ghee.

i7^.

^0^.

ja,

ge,

gi,

3*0,

jii,

Mh.

A«y.

;^e^.

A^.

A<?(?.

ya.

ye.

yi.

yo.

yu.

cha,

che,

chi,

cho.

chu,

tchah.

tcAay.

tehee.

Uho.

tchoo.

Ua,

He,

lli,

Uo,

Uu,

lyaK

lyay.

lyee.

lyo.

lyoo.

lla,

fie,

fii,

fio,

fiu.

nydh.

nyai.

nye.

nyo.

nyoo.

cua,

cue,

cui.

cuo.

hwaK

Tcway,

^2^?e«.

hwo.

goa,

gne,

g^.

guo.

gwah.

^t/jay.

gwee.

gwo.

DIPHTHONGS.

a%

as in dabais,

dah'-lxih-eesa.

You gave

«y,

hay,

ah'-e.

There is.

au,

** pawsa,

pah'-oo-sa.

Pause.

ei,

** V^iS,

vai'-eess.

You see.

«y,

" 1^2^,

Ui'-e.

Law.

eo,

** linea,

le'-nai-a

Line.

INTRODUCTION. XXV

eo^ as in virgin^^?, veer-he' -nai-o. VirginaL

eUy " d^i^da, dai'-oo-da. Debt.

ia, ** gracm, grah' -the-a. Grace.

*€, ^* cielo^ the-ai'-lo. Heaven.

preci(?, prai'-the-o. Price,

cmdad, the-oo-dath' . City.

iu^ **

<>^, ** h^r^^, ai'-ro-ai. Hero.

<>i, ** so^s, so'-eess. You are.

oy, ** VM/, W-^. I go.

t^a, ** frskgua, frah'-gwa. Forge. _

-i^e, ** dt/ello, doo-ain'-yo. Owner.

1(1, ** rwido, roo-e'-do. Noise,

i^y, ** mwj^, moo'-e. Very.

1^, " ardi^<?, ar'-doo-o. Arduous.

TRIPHTHONGS.

iai, as in precmis, prai-the-ah'-eess,

iei, ** vaci^is, va7i-tjie-ai' -eess.

uai^ ** santigt^ais, aan-te-gwah' -eess.

ua/y^ ** 'PsLTSigudy, pah-rah-gwah'-e.

uei, ** averigweis, ah-vai-re-gwai'-eess.

uey, ** b'w^, Iwai'-e.

Whenever one of the vowels is accented, these combina-
tions do not form diphthongs, because each vowel then be-
comes a separate syllable ; as, leia^ varia^ efectua^ &c. In
poetry the diphthongs as well as the triphthongs may be
divided into different syllables by a dieresis, when the verse
requires an additional syllable, as :

" 6 si rodeo tal vez,
Por el Istmo de Siiez."

SYLLABICATION.

Accuracy in pronunciation depends largely on the man-
ner of dividing words into syllables, and on a certain nicety
in severing or isolating these, by means of precision in vocal

XX vi INTRODUCTION,

utterance. This is especially true of certain combinations
of letters. Let the following rules be observed :

1. When a consonant is preceded and followed by a
vowel, it forms a syllable with the following vowel ; and in
writing or speech all words must be so divided as to con-
form to this law ; as, se-nor, and not seft-or ; a-dios^ and not
ad-ios ; Jia-cia^ and not hac-ia ; ce-rd^ and not cer-a,

2. LI, ch, and rr, as has been said, must never be divided
in writing ; and diphthongs and triphthongs never have
their vowels separated at the end of a line.

3. The groups U, Ir, cl, cr, dr, /, /r, gl, gr, ^Z, jf?r, tr^
are never separated.

4. A special effort should be made to have the stress of
voice fall sharply on the accented syllable. Certain vowel
combinations must be carefully severed in pronunciation;
as, d/a, patio, hacz«, o^do, c^e^ble ; and when two consonants
come together, one at the end of one syllable, and the other
at the beginning of the next, they must be scrupulously
separated by the voice ; as, men-te, es-te, pruden-te, ausen-te.
To overlook this is to abandon all hope of a correct and
delicate Spanish pronunciation.

ACCENTUATION.

Attention to these rules is necessary for correctness in
this branch of Spanish orthography, and their mastery will
save endless confusion and worry.

By a revision of the rules governing the placing of the
written accent upon words irregularly accented, made some
years ago by the Spanish Academy, the whole system of
accentuation was changed. The following are the modern
rules :

1. Words ending in unaccented vowels receive the in-
flection on the next to the last syllable ; as, hlanco^ white ;
mesa, table ; caballo, horse.

2. Unaccented words ending in consonants (except n or s)

INTRODUCTION, xxvii

receive the inflection on the last syllable; as, haUar^ to
speak ; unidad^ unity ; virtud, virtue ; querub^ cherub ; reloj\
watch ; marfil^ ivory ; arroz^ rice.

3. Any departure from these rules must be indicated by
placing an accent upon the syllable which is irregularly
accented ; as, prdctico^ practical ; Jiuerfano, orphan ; alii,
there ; mier coles, Wednesday ; Idj^iz, pencil ; drlol, tree ;
mdrtir, martyr.

4. Since n and s are used constantly as the final letters
of verbs under inflection, they are excepted from the gen-
eral rule, so that any word ending in either of these letters,
and accented on any other than the next to the last syllable,
must have a written accent ; as, inter es, interest ; ingles,
English ; corazon, heart ; hahlards, thou wilt speak ; compo-
sicion, composition ; regimen, regimen ; haUdhamos, we were
speaking ; and this rule is invariable. Therefore, it is almost
needless to add that words ending in n and s, and accented
on the next to the last syllable, do not take a written accent ;
as, Carlos, Charles ; antes, before ; examen, examination.

5. For purposes of accent, certain diphthongs, when at
the end of words of more than one syllable, are treated as a
single vowel ; viz., io, ia, no, ua, ie, etc., so that when words
ending in any of these combinations are accented on the
next to the last syllable, the accent is not written ; as, hacia,
toward ; continuo, continuous ; especie, sort.

6. Words ending in io, ia, uo, ua, ie, &c., and accented
on the first of these vowels, have the accent written ; as,
dia, day ; mio or mia, mine ; hacia, I was making ; eyivio,
I send ; continuo, I continue.

7. The accent is frequently placed on one of the vowels
of a diphthong or triphthong to indicate that that partic-
ular vowel is accented, and not another, on which it would
regularly fall ; as, oido, heard ; puntapie, kick ; pais, coun-
try ; leido, read ; haul, trunk.

8. The written accent is used to distinguish from each
other certain monosyllabic words, which are similar in form,
but different in meaning; as, mds, more, and mas, but;

xxviii INTRODUCTION,

e7, he, and el^ the ; que^ what or which (interrogative), and
que^ that or which (relative) ; si^ yes, and si^ if.

9. When the vowels «, e, o, u stand alone, as words, they
are always accented.

10. All unnecessary accents are to be avoided ; and all
words must be pronounced according to their accent, whether
regular and unwritten, or irregular and written. Many
words formerly accented are not now accented; as, antes^
before ; fe^ faith ; ^^, thee ; liacia^ toward.

It was formerly the custom to accent all the first persons
plural of the preterite indicative of verbs of the first and third
conjugations ; as, haUamos^ we spoke ; escrihimos^ we wrote ;
to distinguish them from the same forms of the present
indicative ; as also the same person and number of the future
indicative of all verbs ; as, hablaremos^ we shall speak ; ajpren-
deremos^ we shall learn ; escrihiremos^ we shall write ; but
this has been abandoned, as being contrary to rule of accent
number 4.

11. When adverbs ending in -mente are formed from ad-
jectives which have a written accent, the written accent is
preserved in the adverbs; as, comodo^ convenient; comoda-
mente^ conveniently ; prdctico^ practical ; prdcticamente^ prac-
tically.

12. Words ending in n and 5, and accented on the last
syllable of their masculine singular form, drop the written
accent in their masculine plural and in their feminine sin-
gular and plural ; as ingles^ Englishman ; ingleses^ English-
men; inglesa^ an Englishwoman; inglesas, Englishwomen;
alemdn, a German ; alemanes^ Germans ; alemana^ a German
woman ; alemanas^ German women.

The one word car deter ^ character, has an irregular accent
in the plural, caracteres^ which is accented on the next to
the last syllable, while it ought to fall on the third from the
last, if it followed its singular.

13. When a pronominal suffix is attached to the end of a
verb which has a written accent on the last syllable, the
accent is preserved to show the nature of the word, even

INTRODUCTION.

XXIX

though this be an apparent violation of rule 1 ; as, hahU^
he spoke ; lidbUle^ he spoke to him ; also, when a verb is
accented on the next to the last syllable, and a pronominal
suffix is added, thus throwing the accent on the third syl-
lable from the last, the word must have a written accent ;
as, tenga^ let him have ; Ungalo^ let him have it ; so also when
there are two such suffixes, and the accent is thrown still
further from the end of the word ; as, ^^^a,tell (subjunctive);
digalo^ tell it ; digaselo^ tell it to him.

PUNCTUATION AND CAPITALS.

Spanish is not so profuse as English in its use of either
punctuation marks or capital letters. The punctuation
marks are the same as those used in English, with the addi-
tion of the inverted signs of interrogation and exclamation,
which stand at the beginning of interrogatory and exclama-
tory sentences, phrases, and words ; as, '^ Donde vive usted 9
Where do you live ? and / Oh^ que yo siipiera! Oh! that I knew!

Proper nouns begin with capitals ; but proper adjectives,
such as americano^ the American (man), alemana^ the Ger-
man woman, do not. The names of the months and the
names of the days of the week begin with small letters.

DE TOENOS'S
SPANISH GEAMMAJR..

LESSON i;, ''>'.;„*

REGULAR yERB.— First Conjugation.

TERMINATIONS OP THE

INDICATIVE PRESENT.

Singular.

Plural.

1. O.

1. amos.

2. as.

2. ais.

3. a.

3. an.

HablsLT. (Infinitive.)

To speak.

INDICATIVI

] PRESENT.

Yo hablo.

I speak.

Tii hablas.

Thou speakest.

El or ella habla.

He or she speaks.

Usted habla.

You speak, i.e., your

speaks.

Nosotros, or 1 - , ,
Nosotras, [ hablamos.

We speak.

Vosotros, or ) - . ^ , .
Vosotras, \^^^^^'^-

You speak.

Ellos, or ellas, hablan.

They speak.

Ustedes hablan.

You speak.

Si (adverb).

Yes.

No "

No, or not.

Senor.

Sir.

COMPO

SITION.

^ Habla usted?

Do you speak f

Si, senor, yo hablo.

Yes, sir, I speak.

i Hablan ustedes 1

Do you speak ?

3

1

honor

LESSON I.

No, senor, ellas hablan.

i Hablais vosotras f

No, senor, ellos hablan.

iHablaella?

No, senor, ella no habla.

I Hablas tu ?

No, senor, el habla.

i Habla usted ?

Si, senor, hablo.

I Hablaii el-as ?

No senor, no habJan.

4 Hablamcs no9o|;f ^ys ?

Si, senor, hablamos.

I Hablais vosotras f

Nosotras no hablamos.

No, sir, they speak.

Do you speak f

No, sir, they speak.

Does she speak ?

No, sir, she does not speak.

Dost thou speak ?

No, sir, he speaks.

Do you speak ?

Yes, sir, I speak.

Do they speak f

No, sir, they do not speak.

Do we speak ?

Yes, sir, we speak.

Do you speak?

We do not speak.

EXPLANATION.

1. Eegular Verbs. — All the verbs of the Spanish lan-
guage have their infinitive endings in either «r, er, or ir ;
hence their classification in three conjugations ; 1st, those
ending in ar ; 2d, those ending in er ; and 3d, in ir ; as hor
hlar^ aprender, escribir,

2. Stems. — The letters before the terminations ar^ er, ir,
in the preceding verbs, habl, aprend, escrih, are called the
stems.

3. Terminations. — All regular verbs of the first conju-
gation vary the endings in their respective modes and tenses,
80 as to correspond with those of the verb liablar ; all those
of the second conjugation correspond to the terminations of
aprender ; and all those of the third correspond to escribir.

AYhen therefore the student has learned to conjugate one
of the regular verbs of each conjugation, he can conjugate
all the regular verbs of the Spanish language (about 8,000).
For this reason we recommend the pupils to devote their at-
tention, in the/r5^ place, to committing to memory the differ-
ent forms of these three model verbs. They will be found
complete near the end of the book.

As the terminations of the verbs are different for each
person, both in the singular and plural, the nominative pro-

LFSSON I. 3

nouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and are only used to
avoid ambiguity, or for the sake of emphasis ; except the
pronoun listed^ which is usually expressed. — Usted, meaning
You, is a contraction from vuestra merced^ Your Honor;
and, being a title, its omission would be considered impolite.
It is usually abbreviated to V. or Ud. for the singular, and
Vds. or Uds. for the plural ; but in order not to perplex the
beginner, we shall use the full word for the present.

4. You. — In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third
person of the verb is used with the pronoun Usted : as, Usted
habla^ you speak ; the second person singular is employed only
in addressing the Deity, and in conversation between relatives
and intimate friends, and in speaking to children and ser-
vants. The second person plural is used as the second person
singular when addressing more than one person, and in ad-
dressing audiences — where ustedes would be inappropriate —
and kings or persons in very exalted station, and, in old
Spanish and in certain exalted discourse, the Deity.

5. In a declarative sentence, where a statement is made,
the subject, whether noun or pronoun, precedes the verb ; as,
Usted kahla^ you speak ; in interrogative sentences the verb
precedes the subject; as, ^Habla el? does he speak? (liter-
ally, speaks he^),

6. The Spanish language has no auxiliary corresponding
to do or did\ so all these interrogative sentences must be
reduced to a form similar to the Spanish ; as speah you^ in-
stead of, do you speah ; then it is easy to translate this by
^ Hdbla usted ?

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Hablan ellas ? Si, seiior, ellas hablan.

2. I Hablais vosotros ? No, senor ; alios hablan.

3. I Hablamos nosotras ? No, seiior ; ella habla.

4. I Hablais vosotros ? No, senor ; el habla.

5. I Habla ella ? Si, seiior, habla.

6. i Habla el ? No, seiior, no habla.

7. i Hablas tii ? Si, senor, yo hablo.

8. e Hablais vosotras ? Si, senor, nosotras hablamos.

4 LESSON 11.

9. I Hablo yo ? Si, senor, usted habla.

10. i Habla el ? No, senor, no habla.

11. I No hablan ellos ? Si, seiior, ellos hablan.

12. I Habla usted ? No, senor, yo no hablo.

13. I No habla usted ? No, senor, yo no hablo.

14. i No hablan ellas ? Si, senor, hablan.

15. I No hablais vosotras ? No, senor, nosotras no hablamos.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you speak ? I speak.

2. Do they speak ? Yes, sir, they speak.

3. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, he speaks.

4. Do you speak ? No, sir, 'we do not speak.

5. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, I do not speak.

6. Does he not speak ? Yes, sir, he speaks.

7. Do you not speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.

8. Does she not speak ? No, sir, she does not speak.

9. Do we not speak ? Yes, sir, we speak.

10. Do they (/em.) not speak ? No, sir, they {fern.) do not
speak.

11. Do we {fern.) not speak ? Yes, sir, we {fern.) speak.

12. Do you speak ? No, sir, I do not speak ; they {fem.) speak.

LESSON II.

MASCULINE NOUNS.

Senor (Sr.). Sir, Mr., or Lord.
Caballero. Gentleman, Sir.

Senorito. Young gentleman.

Don. (Dn., or D.). Mr., Esq.

Manuel.

Emanuel.

Espaiiol.

Spanish.

Ingles.

English.

Frances.

French.

Aleman.

German.

FEMININE NOUNS.

Senora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs.
" " Lady, or My

lady.
Senorita (Srita.). Miss, or young

lady.
Dona (Da.) Mrs.

Luisa.

Louisa.

LESSON 11.

COMPOSITION.

Sefiorita, % habla usted espanol ?

Si, senor, hablo espanol.

Luisa, I hablas f ranees ?

No, senor, no hablo frances.

^ Hablan ustedes ingles ?

Hablamos ingles.

I Hablan ellos, 6 ellas, frances ?

Seiiora, ^ habla usted espanol !

Don Manuel, ^ habla usted aleman^

Caballero, i habla usted espanol ?

Sefiorita Luisa, |, habla usted frances?

Do you speak Spanish, Miss?
Yes, sir, I speak Spanish.
Louisa, dost thou speak French ?
No, sir, I do not speak French.
Do you speak English ?
We speak English.
Do they speak French ?
Madam, do you speak Spanish ?
Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German?
Sir, do you speak Spanish ?
Miss Louisa, do you speak French ?

EXPLANATION.

7. Se:S^or. — This word, used alone, i. e., as a vocative, was
originally supposed to imply inferiority on the part of the
speaker, and corresponded to the English word master^ as used
by slaves or servants ; and it is so used to-day by the same
classes ; but it is also used in addressing the Deity, or Jesus
Christ, and the king or any person in very high position.
Theoretically, the proper term of address among equals is
caballero^ gentleman or sir ; but 8enor is very commonly used
in this case at the present time, and especially with the words
5^, yes, no., no ; as, 5^, sefior ; no^ senor. It is used with the
surname, and means Mr., as, Senor Gomez^ Mr. Gomez.

Seftora, Senorita. — In addressing married ladies, the word
Senora, Madam or Mrs., and Senorita, Young (unmarried)
lady or Miss, may be used alone; as, Sefiora, or Senoritay
SJiaUa usted espanol? Madam, or Young lady, or Miss, do
you speak Spanish ?

Senorito, like Senor, usually implies inferiority on the
part of the speaker, for which reason it is seldom used, except
by servants, though it is sometimes applied to boys in play-
fulness, like the English, " My little man," " Young sir."

8. Don, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Bona, Mrs., to la-
dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the
Christian names; as, Bon Manuel, Bona Luisa, and still
more respectfully, Senor Bon Manuel, Senora Bona Luisa.

6 LESSON IL

This title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of
noble families, is now used in addressing all persons, except
those of very humble station, and is thus abbreviated, Dn., Da.

9. The negative no^ is always placed immediately before
the verb.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Habla usted espaiiol ? Hablo espanol.

2. Luisa, I hablas f ranees ? Hablo frances.

3. I Habla Manuel ingles ? Habla ingles.

4. Cabal lero, i habla usted aleman ? Si, senor, hablo aleman.

5. i Hablan ustedes frances ? Hablamos frances.

6. I Hablan ellos ingles ? No, senor, no hablan ingles.

7. i Hablan ellas espanol ? No, senor, no hablan espanol.

8. i Habla Luisa frances ? No, senor, no habla frances ; ella
habla espanol.

9. e No habla Manuel aleman ? No, senor, no habla aleman ;
el habla ingles.

10. I Habla usted espanol ? No, senor, no hablo espaiiol.

11. I Habla Manuel espaiiol ? Si, seiior, el habla espanol.

12. Don Manuel, i habla usted frances ? No, seiior, no hablo
frances.

13. Senora Da. Luisa, i habla usted espanol ? No, senor ;
hablo ingles.

14. Senorita Da. Luisa, i habla usted frances ? Yo hablo
frances.

15. Caballero, i habla usted aleman ? No, senorita, hablo
espanol.

EXERCISE.

1. Do they speak French ? They speak French.

2. Do you speak English ? We speak English.

3. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not speak
Spanish.

4. Sir, do you speak German ? Yes, madam, I speak German-

5. Does Emanuel speak French ? No, sir ; he speaks English.

6. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish.

7. Does not Louisa speak German ? No, sir, she does not
speak German ; she speaks French.

8. Emanuel, dost thou speak English ? I speak Enp^lish.

9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks Spanish.

LJESSOJSr IIL ff

10. Do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak English.

11. Sir, do you speak French ? No, sir.

12. Miss Louisa, do you speak Spanish ? Yes, madam.

13. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English ? Yes, sir, I speak
English.

14. Do we speak Spanish ? We do not speak Spanish ; we
speak French.

LESSON III.

Estudiar, (Infinitive. )

To Study.

Estudio.

I study.

Estudias.

Thou studiest.

Estudia.

He studies.

Estudiamos.

We study.

Estudiais.

You study.

Estudian.

They study.

El (masc, sing.).

The.

Y or e.

And.

Que (interrog. pronoun).

What or which

Pero, sino.

But.

Bien (adverb).

Well.

Mai

Badly.

ADJECTIVES.

Espanol.

Spaniard.

Ingles.

Englishman.

Frances.

Frenchman.

Aleman.

German.

Americano.

American.

MASCULINE NOUNS.

Alejandro. Alexander.

FEMININE NOUNS.

Margarita. Margaret.

COMPOSITION.

I Estudia usted espanol ?
No, senor, el frances estudia espa-
nol ; pero yo estudio ingles.
4 Que estudia el americano ?

Do you study Spanish ?
No, sir, the Frenchman studies Span-
ish ; but I study English.
What does the American study ?

8

LESSON III.

Estudia espanol y frances.
Alejandro, 4 estudias frances y ale-
man ?
No, senor, estudio espanol e ingles.
Manuel no estudia sino frances.
j, Que hablan ellos sino espanol ?
4 Habla bien ingles el espanol ?

No, senor, el habla el ingles mal,
pero habla bien el espanol.

He studies Spanish and French.
Alexander, do you study French and

German ?
No, sir, I study Spanish and English.
Emanuel studies but (only) French.
What do they speak but Spanish f
Does the Spaniard speak English

well?
No, sir, he speaks English badly, but

speaks Spanish well.

EXPLANATION.

10. Y. — The conjunction y is changed into e when the
following word begins with i or hi ; as, espanol e ingles^ Span-
ish and English ; algodon e Jiilo^ cotton and thread.

11. Que, interrogative pronoun^ is written with an ac-
cent, to distinguish it from que^ relative pronoun, or con-
junction.

12. Peeo and Sing. — When we translate hut into Spanish,
we must first ascertain its meaning ; because this conjunc-
tion is used in English in various senses. Peeo is used
adversatively, where one sentence or phrase or word is set
over against another ; as, Hahlo espanol^ pero no Jiahlo ingles :
I speak Spanish, but I do not speak English. Sino is used
in the sense of exception, as but, when it means nothing but,
besides, else, except, only, no more than ; as, Bl no hahla sino
espanol^ He speaks naught but (except) Spanish. Pero is 1
much more common than sino.

13. We have again introduced the words espanol., ingles^
frances., and alemdn into this lesson, because, while they
were given before as substantives, they are now employed
as adjectives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in
English, some words are, at different times, different parts of
speech ; as, El espanol habla Men frances. The Spaniard
speaks French well. Here the word espanol is used as an
adjective, meaning Spaniard., and the word frances as a
substantive, meaning the French language ; Men is employed
as an adverb, meaning tvell^ and it will appear later as a

Lussojsr III. 9

substantive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, be-
fore translating a word, must first ascertain what part of
speech it is.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Habla espanol Margarita ? Margarita no habla espanol,
pero habla ingles.

2. I Habla usted espanol ? No, senor, hablo frances y ale-
man.

3. Alejandro, l hablas ingles ? Si, senor, hablo ingles.

4. I Hablan ustedes espanol ? Hablamos espanol e ingles.

5. I Que hablan ellos ? Hablan aleman.

6. Caballero, i estudia usted espanol ? Si, senor, estudio es-
panol e ingles.

7. I Que estudia el aleman ? Estudia espanol.

8. I Estudian ustedes espanol ? Estudiamos frances y ale-
man.

9. e Habla bien Luisa el ingles ? Habla bien espanol e
ingles.

10. i Habla bien Manuel el aleman ? No, seiior, habla mal el
aleman, pero habla bien el frances.

11. I Habla bien ingles el americano ? Habla bien ingles, pero
habla mal el espanol.

12. Seiiora, e estudia usted frances ? No, seiior, estudio es-
paiiol.

13. « Que estudia Alejandro ? El no estudia sino frances.

14. e Que hablan ellos sino espanol ? Ellos hablan frances.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you study German ? V^e study French and Spanish.

2. Does Alexander speak Spanish? Alexander does not
speak Spanish, but he speaks English.

3. Margaret, do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak Ger-
man and Spanish.

4. What do they speak ? They speak Spanish and German,
but do not speak French.

5. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish,
but I speak English.

6. Does Louisa speak French well ? She speaks French bad-
ly, but speaks German well.

10

LESSON IV.

7. What do you study ? We study Spanish, and Alexander
studies French.

8. What does the German study ? He studies Spanish.

9. Does he study well ? No, madam, he studies badly.

10. Do you speak Spanish, madam ? No, sir, I do not speak
Spanish, but I speak English and German.

11. Does the Frenchman speak English well ? No, madam,
he speaks English badly, but the Spaniard speaks English well.

12. What does the German study ? He studies English, and
the Englishman studies German.

13. What does Alexander study ? He studies French only.

14. What do they speak but Spanish ? ) They speak
What else do they speak but Spanish ? ) French.

LESSC

Comprar.* (Infinitive.)
Compro.
Compras.
Compra.

Compramos.

Comprais.

Compran.

Buscar.

)N IV.

To buy.
I buy.

Thou buyest.
He buys.

We buy.
You buy.
They buy.

To look for, to seek.

A.

De.

Al.

Del.

Un {masc. sing.).

To.

Of, or from.

To the.

Of the, or from the.

A, or an.

Libro. Book.
Cuaderno. Copy-book.
Papel. Paper.
Caballo. Horse.
Tintero. Inkstand.

Madera. Wood, lumber.

* Comprar, to buy, takes the preposition d before the person from
whom something is bought ; as, Compre seda al comerciante^ I bought
silk of the merchant.

LESSON IV. 11

COMPOSITION.

4 Que compra usted f

Compro un libro.

4 Compran ustedes papel ?

No, senor, no compramos papel,

compramos un cuaderno.
Busco al americano.
ifil busca el libro.
El caballo del f ranees.
El tintero de madera.

What do you buy t

I buy a book.

Do you buy paper ?

No, sir, we do not buy paper, we

buy a copy-book.
I look for the American.
He looks for the book.
The Frenchman's horse.
The wooden inkstand.

EXPLANATION.

14. A. — The preposition a, to. When the direct or in-
direct object of a verb is a person, it is preceded by the prep-
osition a ; as, Busco al {a el) americano^ I seek the Ameri-
can ; otherwise it is not ; as, Busco el libro, I seek the book.

15. De. — The preposition de, of, or from, is used to ex-
press possession, being always placed before the possessor ;
as, Ul caballo del f ranees: The' Frenchman's horse. Since
there is no possessive case in Spanish, corresponding to the
English '5, all such ideas must be rendered by means of the
preposition de preceded by the thing possessed and followed
by the possessor ; and since Spanish nouns cannot be used as
adjectives, a qualifying phrase, composed of de and a noun,
must be substituted ; as, Bl tintero de madera, The wooden
inkstand, literally, the inkstand of wood.

16. El. — The article el, the, is used to determine a noun
masculine singular ; as, el libro, the book.

:N". B. — When the article el comes after the preposition a
(to), or de (of, or from), the e is dropped, and the two words
become one ; thus, al, del, instead of a el, 4e el', but this does
not take place when el is a pronoun ; as, a el, de el ; though
it was common in old Spanish.

17. Un. — The indefinite article tm, shortened from uno, is
used before masculine nouns ; as, un ingles, an Englishman ;
un caballo, a horse.

^N". B. — Uno is used only as a numeral adjective, or as an
indefinite pronoun, as will be explained later.

12 LESSON IV.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Que compra el frances ? Compra el caballo del ingles.

2. e Que comprais vosotras ? Compramos un cuaderno.

3. I Que compra usted ? Com pro un libro.

4. I Compran ustedes un cuaderno ? No, senor, compramosr
un tintero de madera.

5. e Que buscas tii ? Busco un libro espanol.

6. I Que buscais vosotros ? Nosotros buscamos un tintero.

7. e Que buscan ellas ? Buscan el papel.

8. Alejandro, i buscas el papel ? No, senor, busco el cua-
derno.

9. I Estudia Margarita ingles ? No, senor, estudia frances.

10. e Que estudia el americano ? Estudia espaiiol.

11. e Estudian ustedes frances ? No, seiior, estudiamos ingles.

12. I Que estudia ella ? Estudia aleman.

13. e Que compra usted ? Compro el caballo del espanol.

14. I Que compran ellos ? Compran un tintero de madera.

15. 2 Buscais vosotros al aleman ? No, senor, buscamos al
frances.

16. I Hablais vosotros aleman ? Si, senor, hablamos aleman.

17. I Hablan ellas espanol ? No, senor, hablan frances.

18. I Que estudia usted ? Estudio ingles y espanol.

19. I Compra ella un libro ? Si, seiior, compra un libro.

20. I Busca el al frances ? No, seiior, busca al aleman.

21. I Que habla el americano ? Habla espanol.

22. Manuel l que estudias tii ? Estudio aleman.

23. t Que compran ellos ? Compran un caballo.

24. i Que buscan ustedes ? Buscamos el libro espanol.

EXERCISE.

1. What do they look for ? They look for an inkstand.

2. What does she look for ? She looks for a book.

3. Do you look for 'a copy-book ? Yes, sir, we {fern.) look
for a copy-book.

4. Do they (fern.) buy a wooden inkstand ? Yes, sir, they
buy a wooden inkstand.

5. What do you buy ? We buy the Frenchman's horse.

6. Do you buy paper ? No, sir, I buy a book.

7. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book.

8. What does the Frenchman study ? He studies G-erman.

LESSON V.

13

9. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, I study French.

10. What does she study ? She studies English.

11. What do they (fern.) study ? They study Spanish.

12. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.

13. Does she speak English ? No, sir, she speaks German.
14 Do you speak German ? No, sir, we (fern.) speak English.

15. Do you look for the Frenchman ? Yes, sir, I look for the
Frenchman.

16. Do you look for paper ? No, sir, I look for a copy-book.

17. What do they look for ? They look for a book.

18. Do you look for the German ? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for
the German.

19. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.

20. What does Margaret speak ? She speaks English.

21. What do they buy ? They buy a wooden inkstand.

22. What dost thou look for ? I look for a horse.

23. What do you study ? We (fern.) study Spanish.

24. What do you speak ? I speak English.

LESSON Y.

(Infinitive.)

Necesitar.
Necesito.
Necesitas.
Necesita.

Necesitamos.

Necesitais.

Necesitan.

Mi.

Su.

Su (n) de usted, or

El (n) de usted.

El papa. The papa.

El abogado. The lawyer.
El comerciante. The merchant.
El lacre. The sealing-wax

To need, or to be in want of.
I need.

Thou needest.
He needs.

We need.
You need.
They need.

My.

His, her, its, their.

Your.

GENDER.

La mama.
La pluma.
La tinta.
La gramatica.

The mamma.
The pen.
The ink.
The grammar.

14

LESSON V.

El polio. The chicken.

El algodon. The cotton.
El jabon. The soap.

El panuelo. The handker-
chief.
El zapatero. The shoemaker.

La gallina.

La seda.

La lavandera.

La camisa.

The hen.
The silk.
The washer*

woman.
The shirt.

COMPOSITION.

I Necesita el abogado la pluma ?

Si, senor, necesita la pluma y el tin-
tero.

i Que necesita comprar la lavandera?

Necesita comprar jabon.

i Necesita el comerciante mi algo-
don?

Necesita comprar el algodon de us-
ted y la seda del f ranees.

I Necesita usted su pauuelo de algo-
don?

No, senora, necesito su panuelo de
seda de usted.

I Que necesitan ustedes ?

Necesitamos un polio y una gallina.

Does the lawyer want the pen f

Yes, sir, he wants the pen and the
inkstand.

What does the washerwoman want
to buy ?

She wants to buy soap.

Does the merchant want my cotton I

He wants to buy your cotton and
the Frenchman's silk.

Do you want your cotton handker-
chief?

No, madam, I want your silk hand-
kerchief.

What do you want ?

We want a chicken and a hen.

EXPLANATION.

18. Gender. — In Spanish all nouns are either masculine
or feminine ; the neuter gender is only applied to those
things so indefinitely used that their gender cannot be de-
termined.

The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their
signification or their termination.

Xouns which signify males, or which denote titles or pro-
fessions, &c., common to men, are masculine ; and those
which signify females, or professions, &c., associated with
women, are feminine, without regard to their terminations :
so that, Jiomlre^ man ; caballero^ gentleman ; pollo^ chicken ;
zapatero^ shoemaker ; abogado^ lawyer, are masculine ; and
mujer^ woman ; senora^ lady ; galli^m^ hen ; lavandera^ wash-
erwoman, are feminine.

LESSON V.

15

IN'ouns ending in a, d, ion, or U7nl?re are generally femi-
nine, and those ending in other letters are masculine ; as,

Papel.

Paper.

Leccion.

Lesson

Tintero.

Inkstand.

Pluma.

Pen.

Billete.

Billet.

Ciudad.

City.

Xouns ending in ema are masculine. Only one common
noun in the Spanish language ending in o is feminine —
mano, hand. The letters of the alphabet are all feminine,
as letra, letter, is feminine.

]^. B. — Una {indefinite article), a, is used before feminine
nouns in the singular.

To facilitate the pupils in the distinction of gender, the
left-hand side, in the vocabulary, is reserved for masculine,
the right for feminine nouns.

19. When your is preceded by you, and there is no pos-
sibility of ambiguity, it is translated by su ; otherwise, it is
generally rendered by el — de usted, or su — de usted ; as.

listed necesita su carta.

^ Que necesita el papa de usted f

Necesita su lilro de usted.

You need yoiir letter.

What does your father need ?

He needs your book.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Necesita usted mi gramatica ? No, seiior, no necesito su

gramatica de usted. ^

2. h Necesita ella el panuelo de seda ? Si, senor, ella necesita

el panuelo de seda.

3. I Necesita usted comprar un libro ? Necesito comprar un

cuaderno.

4. I Necesitan ellas el lacre ? No, senor, necesitan el panue-
lo de algodon.

5 i Que necesita comprar el abogado ? Necesita comprar

una pluma.

6. i Que necesita comprar la lavandera ? Necesita comprar

jabon.

7. I Busca usted su paiiuelo ? Si, seiior, busco mi panuelo.

8. I Busca usted el cuaderno de Manuel ? No, senor, busco el
cuaderno de usted.

16 LESSON F.

9. i Habla usted bien el aleman ? No, senorita, hablo mal el
aleman.

10. I Estudian ustedes frances ? No, senor, estudiamos espanol.

11. I Compra usted un caballo ingles ? Si, senor, compro un
caballo ingles.

12. I Que compran ellos ? Compran una plum a j tinta.

13. I Que comprais vosotras ? Nosotras compramos un pa-
nuelo de seda.

14. e Que compra la lavandera ? Compra jabon.

15. e Busca usted a mi abogado ? Si, sefLor, busco al abogado
de usted.

16. I Compra la lavandera un polio ? Compra una gallina.

17. I Compra jabon el comerciante ? No, senor, el comer-
ciante compra algodon.

18. e Buscan ellas el panuelo de usted ? Buscan el panuelo
de usted.

19. I Necesita usted hablar al abogado ? Si, senora, necesito
hablar al abogado.

20. e Necesita usted comprar un libro ? No, senor, necesito
comprar una pluma y papel.

21. I Necesita usted estudiar ingles ? Si, senor, necesito estu-
diar ingles.

22. I Que necesitais vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre.

23. I Necesita usted hablar al frances ? No, senor, necesito
hablar al aleman.

24. i Que necesita usted ? Necesito un panuelo de algodon.

EXERCISE.

1. What do you need ? I need a book and paper.

2. What does she need ? She needs your handkerchief.

3. Do you need a horse ? Yes, sir, I need an English horse.

4. What do you need ? I need soap.

5. Does the American need the Spanish book ? Yes, sir, he
needs the Spanish book.

6. Do they need a lawyer ? Yes, sir, they need a lawyer.

7. Do you buy a silk handkerchief ? No, sir, we {fern.) buy
a cotton handkerchief.

8. Do you look for the Frenchman's horse ? No, sir, I look
for the Englishman's horse.

9. Dost thou study German ? No, sir, I study English.

LESSOJSr VI.

17

10. What does the merchant buy ? He buys cotton.

11. What does the washerwoman buy ? She buys a hen and
a chicken.

12. Does the lawyer buy a book ? No, sir, he buys paper.

13. Do they (fern.) speak well ? No, sir, they speak badly.

14. Do you speak French, sir ? No, sir, I speak English.

15. Do you study much (mucho) ? No, sir, we study very
little (poco).

16. Do you study fast (aprisa) ? No, sir, I study slowly {des-
pacio).

17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant ? No, sir, I buy
silk from your brother (hermano).

18. What does your papa need ? He needs the lawyer's book.

19. What are they looking for ? They are looking for paper.

20. Do you need a copy-book ? No, sir, I need a book.

21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I study Spanish.

22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper
and pen.

23. What do they need ? They need a silk handkerchief.

24. What do you need ? I need an English horse.

LESSON

YI.

REGULAR VERB.— Second Conjugation,

INDICATIVE PRESENT —

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

1. o.

2. es.

3. e.

Plural.

1. emos.

2. eis.

3. en.

Aprender. (Infinitive.)
Aprendo.
Aprendes.
Aprende.

To learn.
I learn.
Thou learnest
He learns

Aprendemos.

Aprendeis.

Aprenden.

We learn.
You learn.
They learn.

Vender.
4

To sell.

18

Muy.

Mucho.

Poco.

Aprisa.

Despacio.

Man.

Boy.

Father.

Son.

Brother

(

LJSSSOJV

VL

Very.
Much, a c
Little.
Quickly.
Slowly.

Studious.
Idle.

Mujer.

Muchacha.

Madre.

Hija.

Hermana.

ION.

p:*eat de^l.

Estudioso.
Holg-azan.

Hombre.

Muchacho.

Padre.

Hijo.

Hermano.

:^OUPOi

m

Woman.

Girl.

Mother.

Daughter.

Sister.

j, Aprende muy aprisa el muchacho ?

El muchacho estudioso aprende muy
aprisa ; pero el muchacho holga-
zan aprende muy despacio.

I Aprenden ingles su padre y su her-
mano de usted ?

Si, senor, y mi madre y mi hermana
aprenden frances.

^ Aprende mucho la muchacha ?

No, senor, aprende poco.

I Aprenden aprisa su hijo y su hija
de usted ?

No, sefior, aprenden despacio.

Does the boy learn very fast ?
The studious boy learns very fast ;
but the idle one learns very slowly.

Do your father and brother learn

English ?
Yes, sir, and my mother and sister

learn French.
Does the girl learn much ?
No, sir, she learns little.
Do your son and daughter learn

fast?
No, sir, they learn slowly.

EXPLANATION.

20. The termination of the first person in the indica-
tive present of all the conjugations is always o, with the ex-
ception of the following six verbs : dar, to give — indie, pres.,
first singular, doy ; esfar^ to be — estoy ; Jiaher^ to have — he ;
tV, to go — voy^ saber ^ to know — se-^ ser, to be — soy. The
only difference between the termination of the first and
second conjugations is the changing of the a into e in the
second and third persons singular, and in all the plural.

21. Muy is generally translated by very or very much ; as

LESSON VL 19

muy Men^ very well ; muy lueno^ very good, &c. ; but it can
never qualify a verb nor stand alone in discourse ; as, Does
he speak very well ? Yes, very. ^ Hahla el muy Men 9 8i^
mucho. Muy must not be used before mucho ; instead, there-
fore, of saying muy mucho^ the form is mucJiisimo^ very much.
22. Most masculine nouns ending in o change this letter
into a for the feminine ; as,

Hermana. Sister.

Hija. Daughter.

Muchacha. Girl.

Hermano. Brother.

Hijo. Son.

Muchacho. Boy.

23. The words usted and ustedes, you, singular and plural,
have been written in full up to this point, so as not to con-
fuse the student ; but after this the capital V. will be used,
according to custom, for usted, and Vds. for the plural. It
is very common at the present time to use Ud. and Uds. as
the abbreviations in letter writing or business papers.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Aprende V. bien el frances ? No, senor, aprendo muy
mal el frances.

2. I Aprenden ellas aprisa ? No, seiior, aprenden despacio.

3. i Aprende mucho el muchacho holgazan ? No, seiior,
aprende muy poco.

4. e Aprendeis vosotros aprisa ? Si, seiior, aprisa y bien.

5. I Que vende el hermano de su padre de V. ? Vende algodon.

6. e Venden ellas papel ? No, senor, venden plumas y lacre.

7. t Que vende Margarita ? Vende una gallina.

8. t Vende lacre el comerciante ? No, seiior, vende papel.

9. i Necesita V. el paiiuelo de su hermana ? No, senor, nece-
sito el paiiuelo de su hija de V.

10. I Busca su mama de V. el paiiuelo de seda ? No, senor,
busca el paiiuelo de algodon.

11. I Que necesita su hija de V. ? Necesita hablar al herma-
no de V.

12. g Necesita la muchacha comprar papel ? No, seiiora, nece-
sita comprar un cuaderno.

13. I Habla V. del frances ? No, senorita, hablo del aleman.

14. 2 Que compra su padre de V. ? Compra el caballo del hijo
del abogado.

20 LESSON VL

15. I Que busca V. ? Busco un libro y una plumar

16. i Que busca la muchacha ? Busca el jabon de la hermana
deV.

17. e Aprende mucho el muchacho estudioso ? Si, senor,
aprende mucho.

18. I Aprende V. su leccion de frances ? No, senor, aprende
mi leccion de aleman.

19. I Habla bien Don Manuel el espanol ? Si, senor, habla
muy bien el espanol.

20. I Estudia V. gramatica inglesa ? No, seiior, estudio gra-
matica francesa.

21. I Compra Y. un tintero y papel ? No compro sino un tin-
tero.

22. I Busca Y. a mi padre ? Si, senorita, busco a su padre
deY.

23. i Necesita Y. comprar un tintero ? No, senora, necesito
hablar a mi hermana.

24. I Necesitamos nosotras aprender espaiiol ? Si, senor, nece-
sitamos mucho aprender espanol.

EXERCISE.

1. Does your sister learn English ? Yes, sir, she learns Eng-
lish.

2. What does your brother learn ? My brother learns Spanish.

3. Do you learn quickly ? No, sir, we learn very slowly.

4. Does the studious boy learn well ? Yes, sir, he learns very
well.

5. What does your brother sell ? He sells cotton and silk.

6. Do you sell paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax and ink.

7. Do they {fem.) need a French book ? No, sir, they need
a copy-book, a pen, and ink.

8. Do you need the English grammar ? No, sir, I need the
Spanish grammar.

9. Do you want to speak to my father ? Yes, sir, I want to
speak to your father.

10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sir, I want
to speak to the Frenchman.

11. Does he want to buy a horse ? Yes, sir, he wants to buy
a horse.

12. Do you need my book ? No, madam, I need your wooden
inkstand.

LESSON VIL

21

13. Do you look for the merchant ? No, sir, I look for your
father.

14. Do they look for papa ? No, sir, they look for the lawyer.

15. Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book and
paper.

16. Do they study English ? Yes, sir, they study English.

17. Do you study German, sir ? No, I study Spanish, madam,

18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English
badly.

19. Does your sister speak French very well ? No, sir, she
speaks very little French.

20. What does your father speak ? He speaks but (only)
English.

21. Does he not speak German ? No, sir, he does not speak
German.

22. Does your daughter speak to your sister ? Yes, sir, she
speaks to my sister.

23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I learn very quickly.

24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper.

LESSON YII.

ieer.

(Infinitive.)

To read.

Leo.

I read.

Lees.

Thou readest.

Lee.

He reads.

Leemos.

We read.

Leeis.

You read.

Leen.

They read.

Comer.

1 To eat, to dine.

Beber.

To drink.

MASCULINE ADJECTIVES.

Bueno. Good.
Hermoso. Handsome.
Feo. Ugly.

Pequeno. Little or small.
Grande (m. &/.). Large.
Espaiiol. Spanish, also Spaniard.
Americano. American.

FEMININE ADJECTIVES.

Buena. Good.

Hermosa. Handsome.

Fea. Ugly.

Pequena. Little or small.

Espaiiola. Spanish.

Americana. American.

LESSON VII.

Pan.

Bread.

Carne.

Meat.

Pescado.

Fish.

Leche.

Milk.

Queso,

Cheese

Agua.

Water.

Yino.

Wine.

Cerveza.

Beer.

Billete.

Billet or note.

Cai'ta.

Letter.

COMPOSITION.

4 Lee V. un billete f

No, senor, leo una carta.

I, Que come el espafiol I

Come buen pescado, pero come mala

carne.
j, Beben Vds. vino bueno ?
Bebemos buen vino y buena cerveza.
I Que compra el americano ?
Compra un caballo pequeno.
i Habla V. al gran hombre 1
No, senor, hablo al hombre grande.
J Que vende la francesa?
Vends seda hermosa.

Do you read a note f
No, sir, I read a letter.
What does the Spaniard eat f
He eats good fish, but bad meat.

Do you drink good wine ?

We drink good wine and good beer.

What does the American buy?

He buys a small horse.

Do you speak to the great man ?

No, sir, I speak to the large man.

What does the French woman sell f

She sells handsome silk.

EXPLANATION.
24. Adjectives terminating in o, an, or on, form their
feminine termination in a. Those terminating otherwise are
common to both genders ; as,

El muchacho holgazan.
La muchacha holgazana.
El hombre comil6n.
La mujer comilona.
El hombre feliz.
La mujer feliz.
La gallina buena.

The idle boy.

The idle girl.

The gluttonous man.

The gluttonous woman.

The happy man.

The happy woman.

The good hen.

Adjectives signifying nationality, and ending in a conso-
nant, take an a to form their feminine terminations ; as,

Espafiol.
Espanola.
Libro ingles.
Gramatica inglesa.

Those ending in o change this letter into a ; as,
Americano. j American.

Americana* I American.

Spaniard.
Spanish.
English book.
English grammar.

LESSON VII.

23

Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns \ but in
poetry, or in an elevated style, and even in conversation,
many are placed before the noun. This is especially true of
'certain short adjectives. Eeading and practice will give the
pupil the idea as to their proper use.

Adjectives used metaphorically, or with a signification
different from their proper one, are placed before ; as,

Un gran caballo. | A great horse.

Some adjectives lose their last letter, or syllable, when
they precede the masculine singular noun ; as,

Mai muchacho.
Buen libro.
Gran caballo.

Primer hombre.
Tercer paso.
Cien arboles.

Bad boy.
Good book.
Great horse.

First man.
Third step.
Hundred trees.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Lee Y. un buen libro ? Si, seiior, leo un libro bueno.

2. I Leemos nosotros bien el ingles ? No, senor, leemos mal
el ingles, pero leemos bien el espanol.

3. I Bebe V. vino ? No, senor, yo bebo agua.

4. I Que beben ellos ? Beben cerveza.

5. I Comeis vosotros queso y pan ? No, senor, comemos pes-
cado.

6. I Que com en los ingleses ? Los ingleses comen buena
carne.

7. I Que bebe el espafiol ? Bebe buen vino y cerveza mala.

8. e Que lee la americana ? Lee un libro de mi hermana.

9. ^ Que estUdia el hi jo pequeno de V. ? Estudia gramatica.

10. e Que necesita la muchacha hermosa ? Necesita un peque-
no panuelo de seda.

11. I Necesita Y. un caballo grande ? No, senor, yo no nece-
sito un caballo grande, sino un gran caballo.

12. I Que estudia la espanola ? Estudia ingles.

13. I Estudia Y. la gramatica francesa ? No, seiior, estudio la
gramatica inglesa.

14. I Come pan la inglesa ? Si, seiior, come pan y carne.

15. I Que beben Yds. ? Bebemos leche.

24 LEJSSON VIL

16. I Lee V. un libro ingles ? No, seiior, leo un libro frances.

17. I Que lee la americana ? Lee su leccion.

18. i Que vende la inglesa ? Vende un panuelo.

19. I Compra Y. algodon al comerciante americano ? Si, se-
nor, compro algodon al comerciante americano.

20. I Necesita la francesa un paiiuelo grande ? No, senor, ne-
cesita un paiiuelo hermoso.

21. i Que busca el muchacho ? Busca a su hermana.

22. I Que compra V. ? Compro un paiiuelo feo, pero bueno.

23. i Necesita V. seda ? No, seiior, necesito algodon.

24. I Que lee Y. ?* Leo el libro de mi padre.

25. I Que comeis vosotros ? Comemos pan y pescado.
2^. I Que bebe el aleman ? Bebe vino j cerveza.

EXERCISE.

1. What do you read ? I read a great book.

2. Do you read English well ? Yes, sir, I read English very
well.

3. Does the German drink wine ? No, sir, he drinks beer.

4. What do they (fern.) drink ? They drink water.

5. Do you eat meat ? No, sir, I eat fish.

6. What does the Englishman eat ? He eats bread and meat.

7. What does your daughter buy ? She buys a silk hand-
kerchief from the American woman.

8. Does the studious boy buy a book ? Yes, sir, he buys a
French grammar.

9. Does the handsome American woman buy a large book ?
No, sir, she buys a little book.

10. Does your mamma want a large handkerchief ? No, sir,
she wants a handsome handkerchief.

11. Do you need your book ? No, sir, I do not need my book.

12. Do they need a Spanish grammar ? Yes, sir, they need a
Spanish grammar.

13. Does the woman sell bread ? Yes, sir, she sells bread and
fish.

14. What do you read ? I read my letter.

15. What does your brother read ? He reads a note.

16. Does the girl sell soap ? No, sir, she sells milk.

17. Does the Jazy boy learn well ? No, sir, he learns badly.

18. Do you learn much ? No, sir, I learn little.

19. Do you read the book ? No, sir, I read the letter.

LUSSON VIIL

25

20. Do you buy cheese ? Yes, sir, I buy cheese.

21. Do they buy bread ? No, sir, they buy meat and beer.

22. Do you need a handkerchief ? No, sir, I need soap.

23. Do you read your father's letter ? No, sir, I read my
brother's letter.

24. Does your father buy an English grammar ? No, sir, he
buys a French book.

25. Does your brother read my note ? No, sir, he reads my
sister's letter.

LESSON YIII.

Third

Conjugation.

INDICATIVE

PRESENT-

-TERMINATIONS.

Singular.
1. O.

Plural.
1. imos.

2.

es.

2. is.

3.

e.

3. en.

Escribir.
Escribo.
Escribes.
Escribe.

(Infinitive.)

To write.
I write.
Thou writest.
He writes.

Escribimos

Escribis.

Escriben.

We write.
You write.
They write.

Eecibir.

ing.).
:ng.).
).

plural),
olural), .

1

To receive.

En.

Ni.

In, into, or at.
No, neither, nor.

El (masc. s
La (fern, si
Lo (neuter
Los (masc.
Las (fem. j

The.

ADJECTITES.

Mucho.
Muchcs.

Much.
Many.

Poco. Little.
Pocos. Few.

LESSON VIIL

SUBSTANTIVES.

Periodico.

Newspaper.

Leccion.

Lesson.

Periodicos.

Newspapers.

Lecciones.

Lessons.

Ejercicio.

Exercise.

Ley.

Law.

Ejercicios.

Exercises.

Leyes.

Laws.

Zapatero.

Shoemaker.

Plata.

Silver.

Sombrerero.

Hatter.

Semana.

Week.

Semanas.

Weeks.

COMPOSITION.

4 Escribe V. las lecciones 6 los ejerr

cicios f
No escribo ni las lecciones ni los

ejercicios.
i Escriben las senoritas muchos bi-

lletesf
Ellas escriben muchos.
4 Recibe el comerciante plata li oro f

fel recibe oro y plata.

I Escribe V. la carta en ingles ?

Si, senor, escribo la carta en ingles.

Do you write the lessons or the ex-
ercises I

I write neither the lessons nor the
exercises.

Do the young ladies write many
notes I

They write many.

Does the merchant receive silver or
gold?

He receives gold and silver.

Do you write the letter in English f

Yes, sir, I write the letter in Eng-
lish.

EXPLANATION.

25. The endings of the third conjugation and those of
the second are the same, except in the first and second per-
sons of the plural ; in which the e of the second conjugation
is changed into i in the third, as must have been observed.

26. The conjunction 6 is changed into u when the fol-
lowing word begins with o or ho ; as,

Plata u oro. I Silver or gold.

27. Ni. — Neither and nor are rendered by ni ; and it is
common to use two negatives in Spanish ; as,

El no necesita ni la came ni el pes- I He wants neither the meat nor the
cado. I fish.

28. The plural of nouns is formed by adding s to those
terminating in an unaccented vowel ; as,

Ejercicio. Exercise. J Ejercicios. Exercises,

LESSON VIIL

27

And adding es —

1st. To those ending in an accented vowel ; as,

Aleli. Gilliflower. | Alelies. Gilliflowers.

2d. To those ending in a consonant ; as,

Leccion. Lesson. | Lecciones. Lessons.

3d. To those ending in y ; as,

Ley. Law. | Leyes, Laws.

Words ending in z form their plural by changing z to c
(since z seldom stands before e or i), and adding es ; as,
Luz. Light. I Luces. Lights.

29. Ai!^ ADJECTIVE agrees with its noun in gender and
number, and forms the plural according to the rules laid
down for nouns ; as,

Buen hombre.
Buenos hombres.
Buena mujer.
Buenas mujeres.

Good man.
Good men.
Good woman.
Good women.

30. The article also must agree with the noun to which
it refers, in gender and number ; as,

El libro.
Los libros.
La pluma.
Las plumas.
Lo bueno.

The book.
The books.
The pen.
The pens.
"What is good.

bmgular feminine nouns beginning with an accented a
or lia take the masculine article el, instead of the feminine
la, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two ac-
cented ^'s ; as.

El alma.
El agua.
El alba.
El hambre.

The soul.
The water.
The dawn of day.
The hunger, &c.

31. The i^euter article lo has no plural number, and
is placed only before adjectives used as substantives in an
abstract sense ; as,

Lo bueno. 1 The good, i. e., that which is good.

Lo malo. I The bad, i. e., that which is bad.

28 LESSOJV VIIL

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. e Escribe V. a su padre ? No, senor, escribo a mi her-
mano.

2. I Que escribe Y. ? Escribo una carta a la muchacha.

3. e Escribe V. muchos billetes ? No, senor, escribo muy
pocos.

4. ^ Escriben ellos bien los ejercicios ? Si, senor, ellos escri-
ben bien los ejercicios.

5. e Recibe V. libros ingleses ? No, senor, recibo libros fran-
ceses.

6. i Que reciben ellos ? Reciben plata y oro.

7. I Reciben mucho oro ? No, senor, reciben muy poco.

8. Lee V. sus cartas 6 sus billetes ? No leo ni mis cartas, ni
mis billetes ; leo mis ejercicios.

9. I Necesita V. muchos panuelos ? No, senor, necesito muy
pocos.

10. e Estudia Y. muchas lecciones ? No, senor, estudio
pocas.

11. I Busca Y. una pluma ? No, senor, busco una gramatica.

12. I Que busca su hermana de Y. ? Busca los ejercicios en
ingles.

13. I Estudia Y. f ranees 6 aleman ? No estudio ni f ranees, ni
aleman ; estudio espanol.

14. e Necesita Y. mi ejercicio ? Si, senor, necesito su ejercicio
ingles.

15. t Escribe Y. al comerciante 6 al abogado ? No escribo al
comerciante, ni al abogado ; escribo a su padre de Y.

16. I Escriben ellas los ejercicios de ingles ? No, senor, escri^
ben los ejercicios de espanol.

17. I Recibe Y. muchas cartas de su padre ? No, senor, recibo
muy pocas.

18. I Recibe el comerciante mucho algodon ? Si, senor, recibe
mucho.

19. i Compra Y. muchos panuelos ? Si, senor, compro muchos.

20. I Compra su padre de Y. muchos caballos ? No, senor,
compra pocos.

21. I Compra Y. la gramatica del muchacho ? No, senor, com-
pro el cuaderno de la muchacha.

22. e Habla mucho el f ranees ? No, seiior, habla poco.

23. I Escribe Y. bien el ingles ? No, senor, escribo mal el in-
gles, pero escribo bien el espanoL

LESSOI^ YIIL

EXERCISE.

1. Does your brother write English well ? Yes, sir, he writes
English wejl.

2. Do you write to my brother ? No, sir, I write to my father.

3. Do you write in English or in Spanish ? I write in English.

4. Do they (fern.) write the lessons or the exercises ? They
write neither the lessons nor the exercises ; they write letters.

5. Do you receive many notes ? No, sir, I receive but few.

6. Do they receive gold ? No, sir, they receive silver.

7. Do you receive many letters from your father ? Yes, sir,
I i^ceive many.

8. Do you eat fish ? No, sir, I eat bread and cheese.

9. Do the Germans drink water ? No, sir, they drink beer.

10. Do you read your brother's letter ? No, sir, I read my sis-
ter's letter.

11. Does the merchant sell French paper ? No, sir, he sells
English paper.

12. Does your brother learn German and English ? No, sir,
he learns neither German nor English ; he learns Spanish.

13. Do you need silver or gold ? I need neither gold nor
silver.

14. Do you look for my father ? No, madam, I look for the
lawyer.

15. Do you buy a grammar from the merchant ? Yes, sir, I
buy a grammar from the merchant.

16. Do they study their lessons well ? Yes, sir, they study
their lessons well.

17. Do you speak much to your sister ? Yes, madam, I speak
much to my sister.

18. Do you speak Spanish or English ? I speak English.

19. Do you receive French books ? No, sir, I receive English
books.

20. Does the merchant receive silver or gold ? He receives
gold and silver.

21. Do you write your exercises ? No, sir, I write my letters.

22. Do you write a letter to your father ? No, sir, I write to
my sister.

30

LESSON IX.

LESSON IX.

Vivir. (Infinitive.)

To live.

Vivo.

I live.

Vives.

Thou livest.

Vive.

He lives.

Vivimos.

We live.

Vivis.

You live.

Viven.

They live.

Residir.

1 To reside.

Mis (plural)

.

~ My.

Sus {plural)

Your.

Cuando.

When.

Donde {without motion). )
Adonde {with motion). )

Where.

Campo, pais.

Country.*

Flores. Flowers.

Dia.

Day.

Casa. House, or home.

Dias.

Days.

Nueva York. New York.

Lapiz.

Pencil.

Francia. France.

Lapices.

Pencils.

Espaiia. Spain.

Aleli.

Gilliflower.

Inglaterra. England.

Alelies.

Gilliflowers.

Alemania. Germany.

Cortaplumas.

Penknife.

Tienda. Store.

Hotel.

Hotel.

Ciudad. City.

Flor.

Flower.

Fonda. Restaurant

Dias de la semana.\

Days of the week.

Lunes.

Monday.

Martes.

Tuesday.

Miercoles.

Wednesday.

Jueves.

Thursday.

Viernes.

Friday.

Sabado.

Saturday.

Sabados.

Saturdays.

Domingc

>.

Sunday.

Domingos.

Sundays.

* Campo refers to the country, as distinguished from the city ; as, ^l
vive en el campo, He Hves in the country. Pais refers to one country as
opposed to another ; as, Los Estados Unidos es el pais de los americanos.
The United States is the country of the Americans.

f All of the masculine gender.

LESSON IX.

31

COMPOSITION.

^ Vive V. en el campo 6 en la ciudad ?
Vivo en la ciudad.
I En donde residen sus papas de V. ?
Papa reside en Francia, y mama en

Nueva York.
I Cuando come V. en casa de sus

hermanos de V. f
Los doraingos, martes y jueves como

en casa de mis hermanos.
^Y en donde come V. los lunes,

miercoles, viernes y sabados ?
Como en casa.

Do you live in the country or in the
I live in the city. [city *?

Where do your parents reside ?
Father resides in France, and motn-

er in New York.
When do you dine at your brothers' ?

On Sundays, Tuesdays knd Thurs-
days I dine at my brothers'.

And where do you dine on Mondays,
Wednesdays, Fridays, and Satur-

I dine at home. [days ?

EXPLANATION.

32. Papd^ papa ; mama, mamma ; pie, foot ; are excep-
tions to the general rule, and form the plural by the addition
of s ; as, papas, papas ; mamas, mammas ; pies, feet.

33. Nouns of more than one syllable, ending in s, and not
accented on the last syllable, are the same in singular and
plural ; as, lunes, Monday, or Mondays ; martes, Tuesday, or
Tuesdays.

34. Words which are compounds of two nouns differ so va-
riously that it is not possible to give rules for the formation
of their plurals ; but compounds of a verb and a noun in the
singular number form the plural in the same manner as sim-
ple nouns ; and compound words of a verb and a noun in the
plural are the same in both numbers ; as, cortaplumas, pen-
knife, or penknives.

35. The days of the week always take the article when
they are employed to mark, or express time ; as,

Estudio espaSol el lunes y el vier- 1 1 study Spanish on Monday and
nes. I Friday.

36. Donde, where (without motion) ; adonde, where (with
motion) ; cuando, when. These adverbs are always placed be-
fore the verb ; as,

% Donde reside V. % I Where do you reside %

% Cuando escribe V. ? j When do you write I

32 ^ LESSON IX.

37. Donde^ adonde^ and cuando^ when used interrogatively
require an accent ; thus, ^ Donde vive ? Where does he live ?
^ Cudndo lee F. ? When do you read ?

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i En donde vive V. ? Vivo en Nueva York.

2. e Donde viven sus padres de V. ? Mi padre vive en la
ciudad y mi madre en el campo.

3. I Donde viven sus hermanos ? Viven en Francia.

4. I Donde come V. los sabados y los domingos ? Como en
el hotel de los franceses.

5. e Y donde come V. los lunes y los martes ? Como en el
hotel americano.

6. i Donde reside V. ? Resido en el campo.

7. ^ Y donde reside su mama de V. ? Reside en los Estados
Unidos (United States).

8. i Cuando estudia V. sus lecciones de frances ? Los mier-
coles y los jueves.

9. I Y que estudia V. los viernes ? Los viernes estudio una
leccion de frances.

10. e Cuando lee V. los periodicos ? Yo leo los periodicos los
domingos.

11. I Compran alelies sus hermanas ? Si, senor, ellas compran
alelies.

12. I Estudia V. las leyes de Inglaterra ? No, senor, estudio
las de los Estados Unidos.

13. I Aprende bien la muchacha el ingles ? Si, senor, aprende
bien el ingles.

14. I Que beben los espanoles y los alemanes ? Los espaiioles
beben buen vino, y los alemanes buena cerveza.

15. I Donde compra el comerciante el algodon ? Compra el
algodon en los Estados Unidos.

16. I Y donde vende el oro y la plata ? En Inglaterra.

17. I Cuando necesita su hermano de V. la gramatica ? Mi
hermano necesita su gramatica el lunes.

18. I En que hotel come V. ? Como en el hotel de Inglaterra.

19. I Que compra el comerciante, plata li oro ? El comer-
ciante no compra ni oro ni plata, compra seda.

20. I Que estudia V. ? Estudio los dias de la semana en ingles.

21. i Escribe V. a Francia ? No, senor, escribo a Inglaterra.

LESSO]^ IX. > 33

22. I Que escribe Y. ? Escribo los ejercicios de la semana en
ingles.

23. I Donde reside su hermana de V. ? Eeside en el campo.

24. i En que pais vive su papa ? Yive en Alemania.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you live in the country ? No, sir, I live in town.

2. Where does your sister live ? She lives in New York.

3. Where do your parents {padres) live ? They live in
France.

4. Where does your brother reside ? He resides in Eng-
land.

5. Do you not reside in the United States ? No, sir, in
Spain.

6. In which country does your mother live ? She lives in
the United States.

7. Do you write to your father in Spanish or in English ?
I write in English.

8. Where does the merchant buy cotton ? He buys cotton
in England.

9. Which do you sell, silver or gold ? I sell gold.

10. Where do you dine on Sundays and Mondays ? I dine
in the French hotel.

11. And where on Wednesdays, Fridays, and Saturdays ? In
the German hotel.

12. When do they study their lesson ? On {los) Tuesdays.

13. Does the lawyer study the laws of England ? No, sir, he
studies the laws of the United States.

14. Where does your mother reside ? She resides in Germany,

15. When do you need your grammar ? On Friday.

16. When do your sons study the French lessons ? They
study the French lessons on Mondays and Saturdays.

17. Where does the merchant buy the good penknives ? In
England.

18. What day do you {fern) leceive the newspapers ? We
receive the newspapers on Sundays.

19. Does your sister buy gilliflowers ? Yes, sir, she buys gilli-
flowers.

20. Where do you buy your pencils ? In the French store.

21. What do you study ? I study the days of the week in
Spanish.

5

34

LESSON X.

22. Where do your parents reside ? My mother resides in
Spt in, and my father in Germany.

23. Where does your sister reside ? She resides in the country.

24. Do you need my books ? Yes, sir, I need your books.

lesso:n^ X.

Tener.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Tiene.
Tenemos.
Teneis.
Tienen.

Lo, le, los (masc. pi.).
La, las {fern. pi.).
Lo {neuter).

I To have.

I have.
Thou hast.
He has.
We have.
You have.
They have.

OBJECTIVE CASE.

It, him, them.

It, her, them.

It, (sometimes) so.

I Quien, quienes {pi.) ?

i Cual, cuales {pi.) ?

^Que?

i De quien, de quienes {pi.) ?

Con.

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

Who?

Which one, vsrhich ones !
What, or vrhich ?
Whose ?

Zapato.
Chaleco.
Baston.
Sombrero.

Shoe.
Vest.
Cane.
Hat.

With.

Botas.

Casaca.

Corbata.

Medias.

Boots.
Coat.
Cravat.
Stockings.

COMPOSITION.

I Quien tiene mi bast6n ?

Yo lo tengo.

i Que corbata tiene V. %

Tengo la bonita.

I Tienen ellos mi chaleco ?

No, senor, tienen la corbata de V.

4 De quien habla V. f

Who has my cane f

I have it.

Which cravat have you f

I have the pretty one.

Have they my waistcoat ?

No, sir, they have your cravat.

Of whom do you speak I

Hablo de los franceses.
^ Teneis vosotros casacas ?
Si, senor, las tenemos.
I Quien tiene sombreros ?
Los tiene el comerciante.
I Necesita V. a mi padre ?
Si, senor, lo necesito.
^ Tiene V. mi casaca ?
Si, senor, la tengo.
I Que botas tiene V. ?
4 Que tiene v.?

Lussojsr X 35

I speak of the Frenchmen.

Have you coats ?

Yes, sir, we have (them).

Who has hats?

The merchant has (them).

Do you need my father ?

Yes, sir, I need him.

Have yiou my coat ?

Yes, sir, I have it.

Which boots have you ?

What is the matter with you 1

EXPLANATION:

38. Irregular verbs are those which vary from the
model regular conjugations, either in terminations or root
letters. The verb tener, to have, to possess, is the first of
the irregular verbs introduced, and its variations are so nu-
merous that it must be learned independently.

A complete list of the irregular conjugations will be found
near the end of the book.

39. Personal Pronouns as Direct and Indirect Ob-
jects.— While there is still some uncertainty in the Spanish
language as to the use of the pronouns of the third person,
when they are either the direct or indirect object of the verb,
the general rules are as follows : The direct forms correspond-
ing to him, her, and it (this last a peculiar neuter whose use
will be explained later), are lo, la, lo, Le is the indirect form,
corresponding to to or for him, and to to or for her. The mas-
culine plurals are los for the direct, and les for the indirect
object, and for the feminine, las direct, and les indirect.

All these pronouns usually precede the verb in all the
tenses of the indicative mode, in all the tenses of the sub-
junctive mode, except the present used hortatively, and the
past participle. They follow the infinitive, and the pres-
ent participle, and the hortative subjunctive*, in which
cases they are appended to the verbs, and form one word

* The hortative subjunctive is the subjunctive of command or exhor-
tation ; that is, the subjunctive used as an imperative.

36

LESSON X

with them, causing a change of accent, as will be seen
later; as,

PRONOUNS AS DIRECT OBJECTS.

!6l lo busca.
Ella la busca.
fil lo necesita.
EUos lo8 aman.
Nosotros las necesitamos.

He looks for him.
She seeks her.
He needs it.
They love them.
We need them.

PRONOUNS AS INDIRECT OBJECTS.

Yo le hablo. I I speak to him or her.

El les habla. I He speaks to them (masc. or f em.).

Certain variations from these rules occur in poetry and
very elevated prose.

Lo is sometimes employed to avoid the repetition of a
whole or part of a sentence, and then it is equivalent to 50, or
it Of this, however, more will be said when treating of the
regimen of verbs.

40. The interrogative prokouxs quien^ cudl^ que^ de
quien^ who, which, what, and whose, do not require the ar-
ticle; as,

^ Quien habla ?
I Cual tengo yo ?
I Que escribe V. ?

j, De quien son los caballos ?

Who speaks ?
Which one have I ?
What do you write f
Whose are the horses ?

41. When, in a question, the interrogative pronoun is
governed by a preposition, that preposition must also be re-
peated in the answer ; as.

i Con quien vive Y. ?
Con mi amigo.
4 De quien es el caballo ?
De mi amigo.

With whom do you live ?
With my friend.
Whose is the horse ?
My friend's.

42. El is frequently used as a definite pronoun, meaning
the one^ referring to a noun already expressed or understood ;
as, ^ Que sombrero tiene V. 9 Which hat have you ? Teiigo el
de F., I have the one of you, i. e., yours. ^ Que clase de pa-
nuelo tiene V. 9 Tengo el de seda. What kind of handker-
chief have you ? I have the one of silk, or the silk one.

Lussojsr X 87

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Que tiene V. ? Tengo un hermoso baston.

2. e Tienes tii un buen sombrero ? Si, seiior, lo tengo.

3. i Que paiiuelo tiene ella ? Tiene el de seda.

4. ^ Cual tiene V. ? Tengo mi panuelo.

5. I Teneis vosotros buenos chalecos ? Si, senor, los tenemos.

6. e De quieti hablan ellos ? Hablan de las americanas.

7. ^ Tiene V. las corbatas ? Si, senor, las tengo.

8. I Tienen ellos los hermosos paiiuelos de seda ? Si, senor,
los tienen.

9. I Quien tiene las medias ? Yo las tengo.

10. I Tiene Y. mi chaleco ? Si, senor, lo tengo.

11. i Quien tiene mi baston ? Su hermano lo tiene.

12. I Habla V. a su hermana ? Si, seiior.

13. I Busca V. a su hermana ? Si, senorita, la busco.

14. ^ Estudia V. su leecion ? Si, seiior, la estudio.

15. e Necesita V. a su papa ? Si, senor, lo necesito.

16. I Que sombrero tiene V. ? Tengo el de V.

17. I Que botas busca V. ? Busco las buenas.

18. I Con quien aprende V. el ingles ? Con un americano.

19. I A quien busca V. ? Busco al abogado.

20. I Que compra V. ? Compro lapices ingleses.

21. I Tiene V. una buena gramatica ? Si, senor tengo una
muy buena.

22. I Tiene V. muchos libros ? No, senor, tengo pocos.

23. I Tienen ellas mucha seda ? No, seiior, tienen muy poca.

24. I Donde reside V. ? Resido en el campo.

25. I Donde vive su abogado de V. ? Vive en la ciudad.

26. ^ Vive en Francia su hermano de V. ? No, seiior, vive en
Espana. • •

EXERCISE.

1. Who has the stockings ? I have them.

2. What has he ? He has my grammar.

3. Have they my vest ? Yes, sir, they have it.

4. Which books have they (fern.) ? They have yours.

5. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of the Frenchman.

6. Who has my coat ? They have it.

7. Have you my cravat ? No, sir, I have it not.

8. Have we very good coats ? Yes, sir, we have.

38 LESSON XL

9. Who has the handsome stockings ? They {fern,) have
them.

10. Do you speak to the Frenchman ? Yes, sir, I speak to the
Frenchman.

11. Do you need my hat ? No, sir, I have my hat.

12. Whom do you look for ? I look for your father.

13. What do you buy ? I buy English books.

14. Which shoes do you buy ? I buy the handsome shoes.

15. Which hats have you ? I have the merchant's hats.

16. With whom do you learn English ? I learn with an
American.

17. Have you good coats ? Yes, sir, I have good coats.

18. Have they many grammars ? No, sir, they have very few.

19. Where do you live ? I live in the country.

20. Does your father reside in France ? No, sir, he resides in
England.

21. Does your mother live in Germany ? No, sir, she lives in
the United States.

22. Do you buy many books ? No, sir, I buy very few.

23. Who has my handsome boots ? I have them.

24. Which hat have you ? I have yours.

25. What have you ? I have my stockings.

2^. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of your father ?

LESSON XI.

lEREGULAR AUXILIARY VERB OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION,

Ser^

(Infinitive.)

To be.

Soy.

I am.

Eres.

Thou art.

Es.

He is.

Somos.

We are.

Sois.

You are.

Son.

They are.

* One of the six verbs whose indicative present first singular does not
end in o.

LESSON XI.

3»

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

Alguien.

Alguno.

Nadie.

Ninguno.

Algo, alguna cosa.

Nada, ninguna cosa.

Todo.

Todos.

Some one, somebody, anybody^

any one.
Some, any, somebod^?-, anybody.
No one, nobody.
None, no one, nobody.
Something, anything.
Nothing, not anything.
All, everything.
Every one, everybody.

Librero. Bookseller.

Panadero. Baker.

Carnicero. Butcher.

Sastre. Tailor.

Libreria. Bookstore.

Panaderia. Bakery.

Carniceria. Butcher's shop

Sastreria. Tailor's shop.

COMPOSITION.

j, Son Vds. carniceros f

No, senor, somos panaderos.

^ Es V. carnicero ?

No, senor, yo soy sastre.

J Tiene V. algiin pan ?

No, senor, no tengo ninguno.

^ Tienen Vds. algo f

No, senor, no teneraos nada.

^ Quien tiene el sombrero ?

El americano lo tiene.

I Donde compra V. pan ?

En la panaderia.

^ D6nde compra V. sus libros ?

En la libreria.

I Eres tu muy estudioso ?

No, seiior, no lo soy.

^ Tienen todos Vds. buenas grama-

ticas ?
Si, seiior.

^ Quien tiene papel ?
Nadie lo tiene.

Are you butchers f

No, sir, we are bakers.

Are you a butcher ?

No, sir, I am a tailor.

Have you some bread 1

No, sir, I have none.

Have you anything ?

No, sir, we have nothing.

Who has the hat?

The American has it.

Where do you buy bread ?

In the bakery.

Where do you buy your books t

In the bookstore.

Art thou very studious f

No, sir, I am not <so).

Have you all good grammars ?

Yes, sir.

Who has paper ?

Nobody has (it).

40 LESSON XL

EXPLANATION.

43. Alguien, alguno. — Alguien refers to persons only,
and is always used in the singular number ; as,

Vivo con alguien. l I live with some one.

Escribo a alguien. | I write to somebody.

When some one^ any one is followed by the preposition o/,
dlguno is used, and not alguien ; as, alguno de ellos escribe
en el periodico, Some of them writes in the newspaper.

Any one or anybody^ not used interrogatively, is translated
by cualquiera^ as will be seen when we introduce the indefi-
nite pronoun.

Alguien may not be used in the negative. Alguno may,
on the contrary, be employed either in affirmative or negative
sentences ; in the afiBrmative it always precedes the noun to
which it refers, and in the negative it invariably comes after
it; as.

No estudian leccion alguna. i They study no lesson (or do not

I study any lesson).

44. ^N'adie, iq^iNGUNO. — Niyiguno relates to persons and
things, and is used in the negative in the same manner as al-
guno in the affirmative ; nadie relates to persons only, and is
used in the negative in the same way as the pronoun alguien
in the affirmative. In a word, nadie and ninguno are merely
the negative forms of alguien and alguno.

45. Alguno and ninguno lose the o when they come im-
mediately before a masculine noun ; as, ^ No tiene V, algun
lapiz ? Have not you any pencil ?

46. Algo and alguna cosa are used in the affirmative;
as,

Como algo, or alguna cosa. I I eat something.

^Recibe V. algo, or alguna cosa 9 I Do you receive anything!

Anything, when not used interrogatively, is translated
cualquiera cosa^ as will be seen in its proper place.

47. Nada, ninguna cosa are used in the negative form.

48. Nada, I5-INGUN0, NADIE, the adverb no, as well as
any other words expressing negation, are placed before the

LESSON XL

41

verb ; but when no precedes the verb, another negative may
be placed after it, as has been stated already, and the two
negatives serve to strengthen each other, contrary to the
practice of the English language ; as,

No estudio nada. I study nothing. ^

No hablo a nadie.
No recibo ninguno.

I speak to nobody, or no one.
I receive none.

But in omitting the negative no, the words which express
the negation must be placed before the verb ; as,

Nada estudio. I study nothing.

A nadie hablo. I speak to nobody.

Ninguno recibo. I receive none.

The two negatives are always preferable.

49. The indefinite article a or an is not translated into
Spanish when accompanied by a noun which expresses na-
tionality, profession, &c. ; as,

^EsV. ingles?

No, sefior, soy espanol.

I Es el sastre ?

No, senor, es zapatero.

Are you an Englishman ?
No, sir, I am a Spaniard.
Is he a tailor ?
No, sir, he is a shoemaker.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Es Y. frances ? No, sefior, soy americano.

2. I Son Vds. alemanes ? No, senor, somos ingleses.

3. i Eres (vl buen muchacho ? Si, senor, lo soy.

4. I Sois vosotros sastres ? No, sefior, somos panaderos.

5. e Es bueno el libro de su hermano de V. ? Si, sefior, lo es.

6. I Son buenos sus zapatos de V. ? No, sefior, son muy
malos.

7. I Tiene alguno mi sombrero ? Si, sefior, alguien lo tiene.

8. I Tiene alguien papel ? No, sefior, ninguno tiene papel.

9. e Tiene V. alguna cosa ? No, senor, no tengo nada.

10. 8 No tiene Y. cosa alguna ? Si, sefior, tengo alguna cosa.

11. I Compran pan todos Yds. ? Si, sefior, todos compramos
pan.

12. i Donde compran Yds. todo su pan ? Lo compramos en
la panaderia.

13. e Son Yds. panaderos ? No, senor, nosotros somos zapa-
teros.

42 LESSON XL

14. e Tiene alguien mi sombrero bueno ? Si, senor, alguien
lo tiene.

15. e No compra V. algo ? Si, Senor, compro alguna cosa.

16. g Escribe V. algo ? No, senor, no escribo nada.

17. e Necesita V. todo el papel ? Si, senor, lo necesito todo.

18. I Necesita V. todas las plumas ? Si, seiior, las necesito
todas.

19. I Es V. sastre ? Si, senor, yo soy sastre.

20. i Donde tiene V. su sastreria ? La tengo en Nueva York.

21. I Es su padre de V. librero ? Si, senor, lo es.

22. I Vende muchos libros ? Si, senor, vende muchos.

23. e Donde tiene el su libreria ? La tiene en Francia.

24. I Tiene V. una panaderia ? No, senor, tengo una carni-
ceria.

25. I Habla V. a alguien ? No, senor, no hablo a nadie.

EXERCISE.

1. Are you an Englishman ? No, sir, I am an American.

2. Are you good boys ? Yes, sir, we are very good boys.

3. Is Louisa a good girl ? Yes, sir, she is a very good girl.

4. Art thou a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German.

5. Is yours a good book ? Yes, sir, mine is a very good one.

6. Are they {fern.) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very stu-
dious.

7. Have you anything ? No, sir, I have nothing.

8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something.

9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman
has one.

10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French.

11. Do you write an exercise ? Yes, sir, I write an exercise.

12. Where do you buy all your books ? I buy them in the
bookstore.

13. Are you a bookseller ? No, sir, I am a baker.

14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York.

15. Where do you buy your coats ? In the tailor's shop.

16. Have you all of your books ? Yes, sir, I have all.

17. Do you all reside in the United States ? Yes, sir, we re-
side in the United States.

18. Have you any bread ? No, sir, I have none.

19. Do you speak to anybody ? Yes, sir, I speak to the
Americans.

LESSON XII.

43

20. Do you buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing.

21. Are you a baker ? No, sir, I am a tailor.

22. Are they French ? No, sir, they are English.

23. Art thou a Spaniard ? No, sir, 1 am an American.

24. Who is studious ? Emanuel is very studious.

LESSON XII.

IRREGULAR AUXILIARY OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.

Haber. (Infinitive.) |

To have.

He.

I have.

Has.

Thou hast.

Ha.
Hemos.

He has.
We have.

Habeis.
Han.

You have.
They have.

PAST

PARTICIPLES.—

-First Conjugation.

Hablado.

Spoke.

Estudiado.

Studied.

Comprado.

Bought.

Buscado.

Looked for, sought.

Necesitado.
Aprendido.

Second oa

Needed.

rid Third.

Learned.

Vendido.

Sold.

Leido.

Read.

Bebido.

Drunk.

Comido.

Eaten, dined.

Eecibido.

Received.

Vivido.

Lived.

Residido.

Resided.

Escrito (irregular in this

Written.

participle

only).

Hoy.

To-day.

44

LESSON XII.

Paris.

Londres.

Madrid.

Pano.

Paris.
London.
Madrid.
Cloth.

Habana.
Viena.
Filadelfia.
Esquela.

Havana.
Vienna.
Philadelphi,
Note.

COMPOSITION.

I Cuando ha escrito V. a su padre ?

He escrito hoy a mi padre.

4 Ha recibido V. sus cartas ?

Si, seSor, las he recibido.

I Ha vivido V. en Paris ?

Si, senor, he vivido una semana.

^ Ha residido V. en Londres ?

Si, senor, he residido algunos dias.

^ Han comido ellos 1

Si, senor, ban comido.

I Hemos leido bien nosotros I

Si, senor, Vds. han leido muy bien.

^Habeis vendido vosotros muchos

panuelos?
Hemos vendido muy pocos.
^Cuando habeis aprendido vuestra

leccion ?
La hemos aprendido hoy.
I Habeis comprado pan ?
Si, senor, lo hemos comprado.
^ Ha estudiado V. aleman ?
No, senor, no lo he estudiado.
j, Ha hablado V. con el f ranees ?

Si, sefior, he hablado con el.

When have you written to your

father ?
I have written to my father to-day.
Have you received your letters 1
Yes, sir, I have received them.
Have you lived in Paris ?
Yes, sir, I have lived a week.
Have you resided in London ?
Yes> sir, I resided some days.
Have they eaten (or dined) ?
Yes, sir, they have eaten.
Have we read well ?
Yes, sir, you have read very well.
Have you sold many handkerchiefs ?

We have sold very few.

When have you learned your les-
son?

We have learned it to-day.

Have you bought bread I

Yes, sir, we have bought it.

Have you studied German ?

No, sir, I have not studied it.

Have you spoken with the French-
man?

Yes, sir, I have spoken with himo

EXPLANATION.

50. Tenek and Habek. To have, used as a principal
verb, is translated by tener, as an auxiliary, by haber ; as,

Tener caballos.
Tengo oro.
Haber hablado.
Hemos hablado.

To have horses,
I have gold.
To have spoken.
We have spoken.

"When the auxiliaries to have and to be, followed by an in^

LESSON XIL 45

finitive, denote some future action, to have is rendered by
tener que^ and to be by haber de ; as,

Tenemos que escribir. I We have to write.

Hemos de recibir dinero. | We are to receive money.

51. Perfect. — The action of the verb in this tense is
viewed at the close of its progress, as concluded in the present
time, without reference to introduction or continuance ; as,
Alejandro ha estudiado el espaSol. . | Alexander has studied Spanish.

It must also be used when we speak indefinitely of any-
thing past, as happening or not happening in the day, year,
or age, in which we mention it ; as.

He escrito hoy muchas cartas. | I have written many letters to-day.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Ha escrito V. sus cartas ? No, seiior, he escrito los ejer-
cicios de la leccion.

2. I Ha recibido Y. su dinero ? Si, senor, lo he recibido.

3. I Ha escrito V. a su hermana ? Si, seiior, he escrito hoy a
mi hermana.

4. I Cuando ha recibido V. los periodicos de Paris ? Los he
recibido hoy.

5. I Ha leido V. mi libro ? Si, senor, lo he leido.

6. I Han vivido Yds. en Londres ? Si, seiior, hemos vivido
una semana.

7. I Ha comido Y. ? Si, senor, he comido.

8. ^ Ha leido Y. la carta de mi hermano ? Si, senor, la he
leido.

9. I Ha vendido Y. su baston ? Si, senor, lo he vendido hoy.

10. I Ha necesitado Y. el libro de mi hermana ? No, seiior, no
lo he necesitado.

11. I Ha buscado Y. bien el panuelo ? Si, senora, lo he bus-
cado bien.

12. I Ha comprado Y. pan ? No, senor, he comprado vino.

13. I Ha aprendido Y. su leccion de espanol ? La he estudia-
do, pero he aprendido muy poco.

14. e Ha hablado Y. con mi padre ? Si, senor, he hablado con el.

15. I Ha estudiado Y. el aleman ? Si, senor, lo he estudiado
con un frances.

46 l:esson XII.

16. e Ha vivido V. en la Habana ? No, senor, he vivido en
Filadelfia.

17. I Ha vendido V. muchos lapices ? No, senor, he vendida
muy pocos.

18. e Ha recibido V. sus cartas ? No, senor, he recibido los
periodicos del jueves.

19. g Ha leido V. mi esquela ? No, senor, no la he leido.

20. I Ha buscado V. bien mi baston ? Si, senor, lo he buscado
bien.

21. e Ha comprado V. un sombrero ? Si, senor.

22. e Han hablado ellos a su padre ? No, senor.

23. g Ha aprendido V. el ingles ? No, senor, lo he estudiado
un poco ; pero no lo he aprendido.

24. I Ha leido V. el periodico de hoy ? Si, senor, lo he leido.

EXERCISE.

1. Have you received your letters ? Yes, sir, I have received
them to-day.

2. Have you read the newspapers ? Yes, sir, I have read them.

3. Have you written to my sister ? No, sir, I have not writ-
ten to her (Ze).

4. Have you received your letters from Vienna ? I have
received them.

5. Have you read the English newspapers ? Yes, sir, I have
(read them).

6. Have you dined with your sister ? I have dined with her.

7. Have you bought your hat ? I have bought it to-day.

8. Have you looked for my father in Paris ? Yes, sir, I have
looked for him.

9. Have you spoken with him ? Yes, sir, I have spoken
with him.

10. Where have you spoken with him ? I have spoken with
him at his house.

11. Have you studied your Spanish lesson ? Yes, sir, I have
studied it.

12. Have you learned it well ? No, sir, I have learned it little.

13. Have the bakers sold much bread ? No, sir, they have
sold very little.

14. Has the tailor bought much cloth ? Yes, sir, he has
(bought).

LESSON XIIL

47

15. Have they (fern.) dined with your sister ? Yes, sir, they
have dined with my sister.

16. Have they dined with your brother ? Yes, sir.

17. What have they eaten ? They have eaten bread and
meat.

18. What have they drunk ? They have drunk water, wine,
and ale.

19. Have you spoken with the Spaniard ? Yes, sir, I have
spoken with him.

20. Have you spoken with him in Spanish or English ? I
have spoken with him in English.

21. Have you received your letters from Philadelphia ? Yes,
sir, I have received them.

22. Have you received them all ? I have received them
all?

23. Have you lived in London ? No, sir, I have lived in
Vienna.

24. Have you lived with your father ? No, sir, I have lived
with my brother.

LESSON XIII.

Querer. (Irregular.)

To wish, to be willing, to love.

Querido.

Wished, loved, dear.

Quiero.

I wish, or am willing.

Quieres.

Thou wishest.

Qui ere.

He wishes.

Queremos.

We wish.

Quereis.

You wish.

Quieren.

They wish.

Desear.

To desire.

POSSESSIVE

PRONOUNS.

Mio.

My, or mine.

Tuyo.

Thy, or thine.

Suyo.

His, hers, or its.

Nuestro.

Our, or ours.

Vuestro.

Your, or yours.

48

LUSSON XIIL

Util.

Useful.

Caro.

Dear.

Barato.

Cheap.

Viejo.

Old.

Joven,

Young.

Eico.

Rich.

Pobre.

Poor.

Amigo.

Friend.

Amiga.

Friend.

Primo.

Cousin.

Prima.

Cousin.

Dinero.

Money.

Moneda.

Coin.

COMPOSITION.

I Quiere V. un sombrero f

No, senor, quiero un baston.

I Quiere V. mucho a su primo I

Si, senor, lo quiero mucho.

4 Quiere V. escribir ?

No, senor, quiero leer.

I Quiere V. hablar con mi hermana ?

Si, sefior, quiero hablar con ella.

J Quiere V. comprar el caballo de
nuestro amigo ?

Si, senor, quiero comprar el caballo
del amigo de V.

I Quieres escribir a mi hermano ?

Si, senor, quiero escribirle.

J Tiene V. mi baston ?

No, senor, tengo el mio.

4 Tienen ellas nuestros libros ?

Si, senor, tienen los de Vds.

4 Es viejo su padre de V. ?

Si, senor, es un poco viejo.

I Es joven su hermana de V. f

Si, senor, es muy joven.

I Es pobre el comerciante ?
1 No, seiior, es muy rico.
I 4 Ha escrito V. a su amigo ?

Si, senor, he escrito hoy a mi amigo.

I Ha hablado V. con su prima ?
No, senor, he hablado con mi amigo.

jDonde vive su primo de V.I
Vive en Filadelfia.

Do you wish a hat I

No, sir, I wish a cane.

Do you love your cousin much t

Yes, sir, I love him much.

Do you wish to write ?

No, sir, I wish to read.

Do you wish to speak to my sister f

Yes, sir, I wish to speak to her.

Do you wish to buy our friend's

horse?
Yes, sir, I wish to buy your friend's

horse.
Do you wish to write to my brother t
Yes, sir, I wish to write to him.
Have you my cane ?
No, sir, I have mine.
Have they our books ?
Yes, sir, they have yours.
Is your father old ?
Yes, sir, he is rather old ?
Is your sister young ? '

Yes, sir, she is very young.
Is the merchant poor ?
No, sir, he is very rich.
Did you write to your friend ?
Yes, sir, I have written to my friend

to-day.
Have you spoken with your cousin f
No, sir, I have spoken with my

friend.
Where does your cousin live f
He lives in Philadelphia.

ZESSOJS' XIIL 49

EXPLANATION.

52. Mio, TUYO, SUYO, NUESTRO, YUESTRO, change the final
0 into a^ to form the feminine termination.

63. The possessive pronouns agree with their nouns in
gender and number ; as,

Nuestra gramatica. I Our grammar.

Nuestros libros. I Our books.

54. When used as pronominal adjectives, they precede the
noun with jvhich they agree ; and it is to be observed that, in
this case, mio^ tuyo^ and suyo drop their final syllable ; as,

Nuestros caballos. , Our horses.

Mi pluma. My pen.

Tu papel. Thy paper.

Su cuaderno. His copy-book.

Mis plumas. My pens.

Tus papeles. Thy papers.

Sus cuadernos. His copy-books.

55. Mio, when used in the vocative case — that is, in ad^
dressing persons — is placed after the noun governing it ; as,

Escribe, hijo mio. | Write, my son.

56. When possessives are used in an absolute sense, for
nouns not repeated, they agree with them in gender and
number, and are preceded by the definite article ; as,

Tu gramdtica y la mia.
Be mis muchachos y los iuyos,
Su hermano y el nuestro.
Sus zapatos y los nuestros,
Tus caballos y los suyos.

Thy grammar and mine.
Of my boys and thine.
His brother and ours.
His shoes and ours.
Thy horses and theirs^ &c.

57. Possessives are preceded by the neuter article, when
they are indefinitely used ; as,

Lo mio, lo tuyo, lo suyo. I That which is mine, that which is

I thine, that which is his.

58. When the possessive pronoun is connected with the
noun by the verb to he^ the article is omitted ; as,

Este billete es mio.
Esa carta es tuya.
El caballo es suyo.
Muchachos, i es este vuestro libro ?
6

This note is mine.
That letter is thine.
The horse is his.
Boys, is this your bookl

50 LESSON XIIL

59. VuESTRO, VUESTRA, is also used in addressing a single
person in very high position, and in public speech ; as,
Sefior, vuestra patria lo exige. 1 Sir, your country demands it.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Quiere V. vino ? No, senor, quiero agua.

2. ^ Quieren Yds. mis libros ? No, senor, queremos los nues-
tros.

3. i Tienen alios nuestros periodicos ? No, senor, ellos tie-
nen los suyos.

4. e Tiene V. nuestro libro ? No, senor, yo tengo el mio.

5. i Teneis vuestros ejercicios ? Si, senor, tenemos los nues-
tros.

6. e Es vieja su amiga de Y. ? No, sefior, es joven.

7. g Es rico el comerciante ? Si, senor, es muy rico.

8. I Yende barato ? No, senor, compra barato ; pero vende
caro.

9. I Es litil la gramatica ? Si, senor, es muy litil.

10. I Quiere Y. mucho a su hermana ? Si, senor, la quiero
mucho.

11. I Quiere Y. beber vino ? No, senor, quiero beber agua.

12. e Quiere Y. comprar un panuelo de algodon ? No, senor,
quiero comprar uno de seda.

13. I Quiere Y. vivir en nuestra casa ? No, senor, quiero vivir
en la mia.

14. e Quiere Y. estudiar espanol ? Si, senor, quiero estudiarlo.

15. I Que quieren ellos ? Quieren hablar con Y.

16. I Quiere Y. ir (to go) a mi casa el martes ? No, senor,
quiero ir hoy.

17. I Necesita Y. un libro ? Si, senor, necesito el mio.

18. I Desea Y. hablar con el abogado ? No, senor, deseo
hablar con el comerciante.

19. I Necesita su prima un lapiz ? No, senor, ella no lo nece-
sita.

20. I Ha querido Y. mucho a su padre ? Si, senor, lo he que-
rido mucho.

21. e Ha necesitado Y. dinero ? No, senor, he necesitado
amigos.

22. I Ha escrito Y. sus cartas ? Si, sefior, las he escrito.

23. I Ha leido Y. los periodicos ? Si, sefior, los he leido hoy.

24. e Quiere Y. aprender espanol ? Si, senor, quiero aprenderlo.

LBSSON XIIL 51

EXERCISE.

1. Do you wish to eat anything ? No, sir, I wish to drink.

2. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink water.

3. Do you wish to speak to your brother ? Yes, sir, I wish
to speak to him (le).

4. Do you wish to learn Spanish ? No, sir, I wish to learn
French.

5. Do they wish to live in New York ? No, sir, they wish
to live in Philadelphia.

6. Have you read your note ? Yes, sir, I have read it.

7. Do you want some wine ? No, sir, I want some water.

8. Do they want my book ? Yes, sir, they want your book.

9. Does your brother want to speak to my father ? No, sir,
he wants to speak to the lawyer.

10. Did you want my father's letter ? No, sir, we did not
want your father's letter.

11. Did you want any money ? Yes, sir, I wanted some.

12. Do you wish to live in France ? No, sir, I wish to live
in the United States.

13. Do you wish to speak French ? No, sir, I wish to speak
Spanish.

14. Do they wish to buy a grammar ? No, sir, they wish to
buy newspapers.

15. What do you wish to buy? I wish to buy a handker-
chief.

16. What do you wish to read ? I wish to read the English
newspapers.

17. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink some wine
and water.

18. What do they want to sell ? They want to sell their
horses.

19. When did you receive your letters from England ? We
have received them to-day.

20. When did you dine with your friends ? I have dined
with them to-day.

21. Have you a useful book ? Yes, sir, I have a Spanish
grammar.

22. Does the merchant sell his hats dear ? No, sir, he sellar
them very cheap.

23. Is your friend young ? No, sir, he is old.

24. Are you rich ? No, sir, I am poor.

52

LFSSON XIV,

25. Do you wish to have money ? Yes, sir, I wish to have it.

26. Do your friend and cousin live in New York ? No, sir,
they live in Philadelphia.

LESSON XIY.

Llevar, llevado.

Carry, carried.

Enviar^ enviado..

To send, sent.

Tomar, tornado.

To take, taken.

Pagar, pagado.

To pay, paid.

Traer, traido.

Bring, brought.

Cuanto.

How much.

Cuantos.

How many.

Bastante.

Enough.

Dollar.
Centavo. Cent.
Cafe. Coffee.

Chocolate. Chocolate.

CARDINALS — USED AS

Uno, una.

Dos.

Tres.

Cuatro.

Cinco.

Seis.

Siete.

Ocho.

Nueve.

Diez.

Once.

Doce.

Trece.

Catorce.

Quince.

Diez y seis.

Diez y siete.

Diez y ocho.

Diez y nueve.

Silla.
Mesa.
Cama.

Chair.
Table.
Bed.

SUBST-^TIVES AND ADJECTIVES.

One.

Two.

Three.

Four.

Five.

Six.

Seven.

Eight.

Nine.

Ten.

Eleven.

Twelve.

Thirteen.

Fourteen.

Fifteen.

Sixteen.

Seventeen.

Eighteen.

Nineteen.

LUSSON XIV.

53

CARDINALS—USED AS SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIY^S— Continued.

Yeinte.

Veinte y uno, etc.*

Treinta.

Cuarenta.

Cincuenta.

Sesenta.

Setenta.

Ochenta.

Noventa.

Ciento.

Doscientos.

Trescientos.

Cuatrocientos.

Quinientos.

Seiscientos.

Setecientos.

Ochocientos.

Novecientos.

Mil.

Dos mil.

Mil ciento.

Cien mil.

Un millon.

Twenty.

Twenty-one, &c.

Thirty.

Forty.

Fifty.

Sixty.

Seventy.

Eighty.

Ninety.

A or one hundred.

Two hundred.

Three hundred.

Four hundred.

Five hundred.

Six hundred.

Seven hundred.

Eight hundred.

Nine hundred.

A or one thousand.

Two thousand.

Eleven hundred.

A or one hundred thousand.

A or one million.

COMPOSITION.

I Han llevado mi sombrero al som-

brerero ?
Si, seiior, lo han Uevado.
I Ha enviado V. la carta a su primo ?

La he enviado.
i, Ha tornado V. cafe ?
No, senor, he tornado chocolate.
^ Cuanto dinero tiene V, ?
Tengo bastante.
^ Cuanto tiene V. ?
Tengo diez pesos.

jHa comido V. con su hermano
hoy?

Have they taken my hat to the

hatter?
Yes, sir, they have taken it.
Have you sent the letter to your

cousin ?
I have sent it.
Have you taken coffee ?
No, sir, I have taken chocolate.
How much money have you?
I have enough.
How much have you ?
I have ten dollars.
Have you dined with your brother

to-day?

' The forms veintiuno and veintiun are sometimes used.

54

LESSON XIV.

No, senor, no he comido con el.
iCuanto ha pagado V. al sombre-

rero?
Ocho pesos y seis centavos.
4 Cuantas sillas ha comprado V. ?
He comprado seis.

No, sir, I have not dined with him.
How much have you paid to the

hatter?
Eight dollars and six cents.
How many chairs have you bought I
I have bought six.

EXPLANATION.

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

60. In the formation of compound numbers, the same
order is observed in Spanish as in English, except as to the
place of the conjunction ; as,

Mil ochocientos sesenta y seis. j 1866.

61. All these numbers, except u7io^ one, and the com-
pounds of ciento^ one hundred, are indeclinable.

62. Uxo agrees in gender with the noun to which it
refers, but drops the o when it comes immediately before a
masculine noun, and is sometimes used in the plural, to
mean some or any ; as.

Uno de los hombres.
Una mujer.
Tin hombre.
Un gran caballo.
Unos zapatos.

One of the men.

A woman.

A man.

A great horse.

Some or any shoes.

63. CiENTO drops the last syllable when it comes immedi-
ately before a noun of either gender. Its compounds agree
in number and gender with the nouns which they qualify ; as,

Cien hombres y cien mujeres.

Ciento veinte y tres caballos.

Doscientos libros.
HxQ^cientas cajas.

One hundred men and one hundred

women.
One hundred and twenty-three

horses.
Two hundred books.
Three hundred boxes.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Ha escrito V. sus cartas ? Si, seiior, las he escrito.

2. I Las ha enviado V. al correo * ? Si, seiior, las he enviado

hoy.

Correo, post-office.

LESSO]^ XIV, 55

3. I Ha tornado V. cafe 6 chocolate ? He tornado cafe.

4. e Tiene V. bastante dinero ? Si, senor, tengo bastante.

5. e Cuanto tiene V. ? Tengo veinte pesos y treinta cen-
tavos.

6. I Cuanto ha pagado V. a su sastre ? He pagado a mi sas-
tre veinte y cinco pesos y cuarenta centavos.

7. l Cuando ha comido V. con su amigo ? He comido con
el hoy.

8. e Cuantos caballos ha comprado V. ? He comprado
ocho.

9. I Ha comprado V. sillas ? Si, seiior, he comprado docei

10. I Tiene V. mucho dinero ? Tengo cien pesos y cincuenta
centavos.

11. e Cuanto tiene su hermano ? Tiene quinientos (500)
pesos.

12. I Donde vive V. ? Vivo en Nueva York.

13. I Que niimero (number) tiene la casa de V. ? Tiene el nii-
mero trescientos treinta y ocho (338).

14. ^ Ha recibido V. sus periodicos de Paris ? Si, senor, los he
recibido.

15. I Que niimeros ha recibido V. ? He recibido el once, doce,
trece, catorce, y diez y ocho.

16. I Los ha leido V. ? No, senor, no los he leido.

17. I Cuantos anos (years) ha vivido V. en Paris ? He vivi-
do cinco.

18. e Cuantas lecciones ha aprendido V. ? He aprendido
trece.

19. I Cuantas gramaticas tiene V. ? No tengo mas que una.

20. e Quien ha recibido hoy periodicos ? Nadie los ha recibi-
do hoy.

21. i Es rico el amigo de V. ? Si, senor, tiene quinientos mil
(500,000) pesos.

22. I Ha llevado V. mis cartas al correo ? No he llevado mas
que dos.

23. I Ha enviado V. mis zapatos al zapatero ? Si, senor, los
he enviado hoy.

24. e Ha tomado V. muchas lecciones de espanol ? He toma-
do doce.

25. e Cuanto ha pagado Y. a su amigo ? Tres mil ochocientos
cuarenta y cuatro pesos (3,844).

56 LESSON XIV.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you wish to send anything to your cousin? Yes, sir, I
wish to send money to my cousin.

2. How much money do you wish to send ? I wish to send
$317.

3. Who has taken the money to the tailor ? My cousin
(fern.) has taken it.

4. Where have you sent the horses ? I have sent them to
Paris.

5. How many have you sent ? I have sent two very good
ones.

6. My son, have you taken the $31.50 to the baker ? Yes, sir,
I have taken it.

7. Has your brother sent some chairs to your house ? No,
sir, but he has sent some to his own.

8. How many has he sent ? He has sent ten chairs and
three tables.

9. Has the woman bought no chairs ? Yes, sir, she has bought
twenty-six.

10. How many letters have they written this (esta) week ?
They have written three hundred and ten letters, and one thou-
sand and one notes.

11. Which newspapers have you sent to your father ? I have
sent him numbers three, fifteen, and eighteen.

12. Has he read them all ? He has read only number fifteen.

13. Has the butcher much money ? He has $1,000.

14. How much have you sent to jour friend (fern.) ? I have
sent $111.17.

15. Whom do you wish to pay ? I wish to pay my tailor.

16. Where does your tailor reside ? He resides in Vienna.

17. When have you written to Alexander ? I have written
to Alexander to-day.

18. Have you received a letter from him to-day ? Yes, sir, I
have received six.

19. What day do you receive letters from France ? I receive
them on Tuesdays and Saturdays.

20. How many has your cousin written to you ? None.

LESSON XT.

57

LESSON XV.

Pronunciar, pronunciado.
Tocar, tocado.

Cantar, cantado,
Beinar, reinado.

To pronounce, pronounced.
To touch, touched ; to play,

played.
To sing", sung.
To reign, reigned.

Como.

How, like, as.

ORDINALS.

Primero, (primer

before a mas-

First.

culine noun).

Segundo.

Second.

Tercero (or tercer before a mas-

culine noun).

Third.

Cuarto.

Fourth.

Quinto.

Fifth.

Sexto.

Sixth.

Septimo.

Seventh.

Octavo.

Eighth.

Noveno, or nono.

Ninth.

Decimo.

Tenth.

Piano.

' Piano.

Cancion.

Song.

Violin.

Violin.

Palabra.

Word.

Miisico.

Musician.

Gruitarra.

Gruitar.

Pianista.

Pianist.

Historia.

History.

Cantor.

Singer.

Arpa.

Harp.

Tomo or volumen

Volume.

Obra.

Work.

Carlos.

Charles.

Miisica.

Music.

Luis.

Louis.

Cantora, cantatriz.

Singer.

Enrique.

Henry.

Calle.

Street.

Key.

King.

Avenida.

Avenue.

Trabajo.

Work, labor.

58

LUSSON XV.

COMPOSITION.

iComo pronuncia Manuel el espa-

fioll
Lo pronuncia bien,
J Toca V. la guitarra 1
No, senor, toco el violin y el piano.

4 Canta V. canciones espanolas f

No, senor, canto canciones inglesas.

j, Quien reina en Rusia 1

Alejandro Segundo.

J En que calle vive V. I

Vivo en la calle Once.

|Y v., donde vive?

Yo vivo en la calle Veinte y tres.

j, Que toca el miisico ?

Toca el arpa, el violin y el piano.

jTiene V. el primer tomo de mi

libro ?
No, senor, tengo el segundo.
4 Ha leido V. el tomo tercero ?
No, senor, he leido el cuarto.
4 Cuantos afios tiene V.

How does Emanuel pronounce Span-
ish!

He pronounces it well.

Do you play the guitar ?

No, sir, I play the violin and the
piano.

Do you sing Spanish songs ?

No, sir, I sing English songs.

Who reigns in Russia ?

Alexander the Second.

In which street do you live f

I live in Eleventh street.

And where do you live ?

I live in Twenty- third street.

What does the musician play 1

He plays the harp, violin, and piano.

Have you the first volume of my
book?

No, sir, I have the second.

Have you read the third volume ?

No, sir, I have read the fourth.

How old are you ?

EXPLANATION.

64. The ordinals always agree in gender and number with
the noun, expressed or understood, to which they refer, and
may be placed either before or after that noun ; as.

El primer tomo (or el tomo primero).

El primer buen libro.

Los primeros cuadernos.

Las primeras lecciones.

El segundo tomo.

Las segundas intenciones.

The first volume.
The first good book.
The first copy-books.
The first lessons.
The second volume.
The second intentions.

It has been seen, in the list of ordinal numbers at the
opening of the present lesson, that primero and tercero lose
the final letter when they immediately precede their noun,
if it be masculine, or if they are separated from it only by
an adjective. We may observe here, that tercero is by some

LESSON XV. 59

written entire ; the contracted form, however, is much to be
preferred; as,

El tercer tomo. | The third volume.

65. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as
in English ; and, except primero^ first, their place is generally
supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speak-
ing of the days of the month, which are expressed by el dos,
tres^ cuatro^ etc.^ the second, third, fourth, &c. The follow-
ing are the principal cases in which the ordinals are em-
ployed : 1st, with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in
the enumeration of books, chapters, lessons, &c., and in a few
others ; but, even in these cases, after decimo^ tenth, they are,
by reason of their great length, generally replaced by the
numerals; as,

Charles the Fifth.

Carlos Quinto.
Pio ]*Cono.
Capitulo decimo.
Calle Veinte y tres.
Luis Catorce.

Pius the Ninth.
Chapter tenth.
Twenty-third street.
Louis the Fourteenth.

N. B. — The definite article is not required in the above
examples.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Pronuncia V. bien el ingles ? No, seiior, lo pronuncio
mal.

2. I Es V. cantor ? No, senor, pero toco.

3. ^ Que toca Y. ? Toco el violin.

4. I Canta bien su hermana de V. ? No, senor, ella canta
mal ; pero toca bien el piano.

5. I Que leccion estudia V. ? Estudio la cuarta.

6. I En que calle vive su padre de V. ? Vive en la calle
Catorce.

7. h Que tomos ha leido Y. ? He leido el primero, segundo,
tercero y cuarto.

8. I Cuantos tomos tiene la obra ? Tiene seis.

9. e Que libro lee Y. ? Leo la historia de Carlos Quinto.

10. i Ha leido Y. la historia de Enrique Octavo de Inglaterra ?
Si, seiior, la he leido.

11. e Que tomo lee su hermana de Y. ? Lee el noveno.

60 LESSOJSr XV,

12. I Cuanto dinero ha recibido V. hoy ? He recibido cin-
cuenta y un pesos.

13. e Cuantos hermanos tiene V. ? Tengo cinco.

14. i Cuantos anos tiene su hermana de Y. ? Tiene quince.

15. I Cuanto tiempo ha vivido V. en Paris ? He vivido seis
anos.

16. I Que niimero tiene su casa ? El doscientos seis (206).

17. I Que dia de la semana es hoy ? Hoy es miereoles.

18. e Que hora tiene V. ? Las diez.

19. e Cuantos dias tiene una semana ? Tiene siete.

20. Ocho y doce l cuantos son ? Son veinte.

21. e Cuantos aiios tiene su papa de Y. ? Tiene sesenta.

22. I Cuantos dias tiene el ano ? Tiene trescientos sesenta y
cinco (365).

23. I Como ha leido Y. ? He leido despacio.

24. I Ha llevado Y. mi piano al pianista ? Si, senor, lo he
llevado.

25. I Ha cantado Y. mucho hoy ? Hoy he cantado poco.

2^. I Cuando ha vendido Y. su caballo ? Lo he vendido hoy.

EXERCISE.

1. What book have you ? A music-book.

2. How many volumes has it ? Three.

3. Which volume have you read ? The first.

4. Has not your father read the second volume ? No, sir ;
but my cousin has read it.

5. What are you reading, miss ? I am reading the History
of Charles the Fifth.

6. Who has sold your sister's History of England ? She has
sold it.

7. Who has bought the violin ? The pianist.

8. Where does he live ? In Seventeenth street.

9. In what street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue.

10. Have you bought good meat in the butcher's shop ? The
meat that I have bought is very bad.

11. What things have you sent to the tailor ? I have sent
stockings, vests, and pocket-handkerchiefs.

12. What day of the week is to-day ? Monday.

13. Is Monday the first day of the week ? No, sir, it is the
second ; Sunday is the first.

LESSON XVL

61

14. How much money does the merchant require ? He re-
quires $1,500.

15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend ?
I wish to send my friend $50.

16. Does he need much money ? Yes, madam, he is very poor.

17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel ?
Very few.

18. How do your sisters pronounce Spanish ? They pronounce
it well when they read, but not when they speak.

19. When do they write their exercises ? When they have
studied their lessons.

20. And you, when do you write yours ? When my broth-
ers write theirs.

21. How do the poor buy ? The poor buy dear, and the rich
buy cheap.

22. Has your father sold his old horse ? He has sold it.

23. Have you read the History of Louis XVI. ? I have read
volumes first, second, and third.

LESSON XVI.

First Conjugation — Preterit.

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

Plural.

1. e.

1. am OS.

2. aste.

2. asteis.

3. 6.

3. aron.

Hable.

I spoke.

Hablaste.

Thou spokest.

Hablo.

He spoke.

Hablamos.

We spoke.

Hablasteis.

You spoke.

Hablaron.

They spoke.

Second Conjugation.

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

Plural.

1. i.

1. imos.

2. iste.

2. isteis.

3. io.

3. ieron.

62

LUSSOJV XVL

Aprendi.

I learned.

Aprendiste.

Tbou learnedst

Aprendio.

He learned.

Aprendimos.

We learned.

Aprendisteis.

You learned.

Aprendieron.

They learned.

Third Conjugation,

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

Plural.

1. i

1. imos.

2. iste.

2. isteis. '

3. io.

3. ieron.

Escribi.

I wrote.

Escribiste.

Thou wrote.

Escribio.

He wrote.

Escribimos.

We wrote.

Escribisteis.

You wrote.

Escribieron.

They wrote.

Pasar.

To pass, to spend (in rela-

tion to time).

Ayer. Anocbe.

Yesterday. Last night.

Antes de ayer, or anteayer.

The day before yesterday.

El ano pasado.

Last year.

El mes pasado.

Last month.

La semana pasada.

Last week.

Ante (prep.).

Before, in the presence of.

Ante todas cosas.

Before all things.

Ante todo.

Above all.

Ajites (ad.).

Before (refers to time).

Delante (ad).

Before (refers to place).

Despues (ad.).

Afterward, after.

Mas (ad.). Mas (conj.).

More. But.

Menos (ad.).

Less, fewer.

Que (conj.).

That, than.

LESSON XVI.

COMPOSITION.

4 Hablo V. con mi padre ?

Si, seiior, hable con el antes de ayer.

j, Han aprendido Vds. su leccion ?

Si, senor, la hemos aprendido hoy.

^ Cuando escribio V. a su hermana ?

Escribi la semana pasada a mi her-
mana.

j, Ha recibido V. sus periodicos del
mes pasado ?

Si, senor, los he recibido hoy.
^ Cuando vendio Y. su caballo ?
Lo vendi el afSo pasado.
^Estudia Y. antes 6 despues de

comer ?
Estudio antes de comer.
I Hablo Y. mucho ante el juez f

No, senor, hable muy poco.
I Que libro tiene Y. delante ?
Tengo la gramatica espanola.
j, Escribio Y. sus cartas ?
Si, senor, las escribi el domingo pa-
sado.
^ Come Y. menos que yo ?
No, seiior, como mds que Y.
^ Ha visto Y. a su amigo I
Si, seiior, lo vi ayer.
i Donde lo vio Y. ?
Lo vi delante de la iglesia.

g, Hablo Y. con el?

Si, seiior ; pero muy poco.

^ Ha comido V. ?

&i, seiiora, he comido pan y he be-

bido vino.
^ Ha leido Y. y estudiado sus ejer-

cicios ?
Si, seiior, los he leido y estudiado.

i Ha escrito Y. a su padre ?
Si, seiior, escribi ayer.

Hid you speak with my father!
Yes, sir, I spoke with him the day

before yesterday.
Have you learned your lesson I
Yes, sir, we have learned it to-day.
When did you write to your sister!
I wrote to my sister last week.

Have you received your newspapers
of last month (last month's news-
papers) f

Yes, sir, I have received them to-day !

When did you sell your horse !

I sold it last year.

Do you study before or after din-
ing (or dinner) !

I study before dining.

Did you speak much before the
judge?

No, sir, I spoke very little.

What book have you before you !

I have the Spanish grammar.

Did you write your letters!

Yes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday.

Do you eat less than I !

No, sir, I eat more than you.

Have you seen your friend !

Yes, sir, I saw him yesterday.

Where did you see him !

I saw him before (in front of) the

church.
Did you speak with him !
Yes, sir ; but very little.
Have you dined !
Yes, sir, I have eaten bread and

drunk wine.
Have you read and studied your

exercises !
Yes, sir, I have read and studied

them.
Have you written to your father!
Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday.

64 LESSON XVI.

^Cuando ha recibido V. las cartas

deeU
Las he recibido hoy.
4 Ha enviado V. mis cartas despues

de las suyas ?
Las he enviado antes.
I Hablo V. ante el rey ?
No, seiior, hable ante el juez.
4 Cudnto tiempo ?

When have you received the letters

from him ?
I have received them to-day.
Have you sent my letters after

yours ?
I (have) sent them before.
Did you speak before the king ?
No, sir, I spoke before the judge.
How long ?

EXPLANATION.

66. The Preterit, one of the oldest and most common
forms of the verb, is used in narrating past actions, when
thought of merely as events or single facts^ without reference
to the time they occupied, or to other actions going on at
the same time ; as, Alejandro compro un caballo^ Alexander
bought a horse. If there is any limitation of a verb in this
tense, it grows out of the context of the sentence ; as, EscriM
a mi padre en el afLo 186Jf^ I wrote to my father in the year
1864. This tense has no suggestion of continued^ repeated^
JiaMtual^ or attempted action, as we shall see to be the case
with the imperfect^ or of completed action, as we have seen in
the perfect.

In colloquial language the perfect (which has been treated
of in Lesson XII) is sometimes, though incorrectly, substi-
tuted for the preterit. The following example will show the
impropriety of such a substitution :

He escrito a mi padre ayer. 1 1 have written to my father yester-

I day.

Nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past, and has no
connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen
that the perfect implies that the action of the verb is con-
cluded at the present time, the incorrectness of the foregoing
example is at once apparent.

67. Ante. — This preposition means before^ or in the pres-
ence of\ as,

Hablo ante el juez. ] He spoke before the judge.

And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, &c. ; as,
Ante, todas cosas. | Before all things.

LUSSON XVL gg

68. Mas, more ; Menos, less, fewer.-^Them two adverbs
are used to form the comparative degree of several adjec-
tives, which last they always precede in the sentence ; as,
El vino es mds caro que la cerveza. I Wine is dearer than beer.
Yo soy mds rico que V. 1 1 am richer than you.

When mds means more, it must always have a written
accent. When used to express some degree respecting verbs,
their usual place in the sentence is immediately after them ;
as,

Yo escribo mds. 1 1 write more.

Tii hablas menos. \ Thou speakest less.

It is well to observe here that mds and menos are them-
selves the comparatives of mucho and poco, respectively.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Cuando hablo Y. con el abogado ? Hable con el an-
teayer.

2. ^ Ha hablado V. con mi hermana ? No, senor, hable ayer
con su ami go de V.

3. e Ha hablado V. con el pianista ? Si, senor, le hable ayer.

4. i Ha aprendido V. su leccion ? No, senor ; pero he escrito
el ejercicio.

5. ^ Han aprendido ellos sus lecciones de frances ? Si, seiior,
han aprendido las de frances y de espanol.

6. I Cuando aprendio su hermana a tocar el piano ? Apren-
dio el alio pasado.

7. i Ha leido V. la historia de los Estados Unidos ? He leido
el tomo primero y el segundo.

8. I Ha leido V. la carta de su hermana y la de su amiga ?
He leido la de mi hermana ; pero no la de mi amiga.

9. I Que ha leido V. hoy ? He leido los ejercicios de la se-
mana pasada.

10. I Cuando compro V. su caballo ? Lo compre el mes pa-
sado.

11. I Donde hablo V. con mi padre ? Delante de su casa de V.

12. I Leyo Y. la carta de su padre antes que la de su hermano ?
No, senor, la lei despues.

13. I Cuando residio Y. en Paris ? Residi antes que Y.

14. I Cuantos anos tiene su hermana ? Tiene veinte.

7

ee LJSSSON XVL

15. e Cuantos pesos pago V. el mes pasado al comerciante ?
Quinientos.

16. I Ha llevado V. mis zapatos al zapatero ? Si, senor, los
lleve ayer.

17. I Cuando ha recibido Y. su dinero ? Lo recibi anteayer.

18. I Ha escrito V. despues que escribio mi padre ? No, seiior,
escribi antes.

19. I Escribio V. su carta despues que recibio la de su her-
mano ? Si, senor, la escribi mucho despues.

20. i Ha hablado V. con la mad re antes que con la hija ? No,
senor, hable antes con la hija que con la madre.

21. I Estudio V. su leccion de ayer ? No, senor, estudie la de
antes de ayer ; pero no he estudiado la de ayer ni la de hoy.

22. i Hablo V. ante el juez ? Si, senor, hable ante el juez y
ante el rey.

23. e Habla V. mas que yo ? No, senor, hablo menos ; pero
escribo mas.

EXERCISE.

1. Did you speak more yesterday than to-day ? I spoke less ;
but I read more.

2. How many newspapers did your father read yesterday ?
Very few.

3. How old is your sister ? She is nineteen.

4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year ? The baker
took it.

5. How much did the tailor pay to the baker afterward ?
$59.10.

6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat ? He re-
ceived it after.

7. Did your sisters sing yesterday ? Yes, sir, they sang and
played.

8. What did they sing ? They sang Spanish songs and
played on the piano.

9. Have you {plural) played to-day ? No, madam, we have
not played ; but we have written our French exercises.

10. How many words have your brothers written in Spanish
to-day ? Fewer than last Thursday.

11. Do they speak more English than Spanish ? No, madam,
they speak more Spanish.

12. What have the singers received from Paris ? They have
received some good songs and French music.

LUSSON XVII.

67

13. Have the singers (fem.) enough Spanish music ? Yes,
sir, they have received some to-day.

14. Did they sing well last month ? Not very well.

15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday ? No-
body sang.

16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Five years, six
months, and thirteen days.

17. How many churches has Paris ? Paris has many churches.

18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yester-
day ? Very well.

19. Are you a musician ? Yes, madam.

20. Is your sister a pianist or a singer, or does she play on the
guitar ? She sings and plays on the piano.

21. When did you speak before the judge ? The day before
yesterday and last week.

22. Do you sing much with the musicians ? I sing a little ;
but before all things I study my Spanish lessons.

LESSON XYII.

Trabajar.
Mandar.

(^uien, quienes.
A quien, a quienes.
I Que ? Que.

Cual, cuales.

Cuyo (mdsc. sing.), cuya (fem.

sing.).
Cuyos (masG. plural), cuyas

(fem, plural).
Varios. Algunas veces.

To work.

To command, to send.

Who.

Whom, to whom.

What (inter.), who, that, or

which.
Which one, which ones (inter,).

Whose, which, or of whom.

Several. Sometimes.

Retrato.

Portrait.

Ultimo (a).

Last.

Pantalones.

Pantaloons.

Criada.

Servant.

Concierto.

Concert.

Iglesia.

Church.

Teatro.

Theatre.

Plaza.

Square, market

Mercado.

Market.

Compania.

Company.

Parque.

Park.

Juana.

Jane.

Trabajador.

Workman.

Cosa.

Thinff.

68

LFSSON XVIL

COMPOSITION.

jEs viejo el caballero a quien V.

hablo en el concierto 1
No, senor, pero lo es la senora que

ha hablado con V. en el teatro.
I A quien busca V. ?
Busco a la senorita a quien V. busca.

i Quien es el joven que ha hablado

con V. 1
Es un criado del hotel.
El muchacho que lee, j al cual V.

mando trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica que el tiene, y en la

cual estudia, es mia.
El caballero cuya casa V. compro es

amigo mio.
El comerciante cuyo vino V. com-

pr6, vende muy barato.
El libro en que leemos.

La senora d quien hable es mi madre.
/ Manda V. sus nifios al Parque

Central?
J A quien manda V. trabajar!
A mis criados.
; Juan !

; SeSor ! i que manda V. ?
Quiero la comida.
% En donde trabajan hoy los traba-

j adores ?
Trabajan en la calle.

Is the gentleman to whom you spoke

at the concert old I
No, sir ; but the lady who spoke to

you at the theatre is (so).
For whom do you look i
I am looking for the young lady

that you look for.
Who is the young man that has

spoken with you f
He is a servant in the hotel.
The boy that reads, and whom you

commanded to work, is my brother.
The grammar which he has, and in

which he studies, is mine.
The gentleman whose house you

bought is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you

bought sells very cheap.
The book in which we read (or

which we read in).
The lady I spoke to is my mother.
Do you send your children to the

Central Park?
Whom do you command to work f
My servants.
John !

Sir ! what do you wish!
I wish my dinner.

Where do the workmen work to-
day?
They work in the street.

EXPLANATION.

69. Quien. — The relative pronoun quien refers to persons
only, and is always preceded by the preposition d^ when gov-
erned by a verb ; as,

El hombre a quien V. quiere.

I The man whom you love.

70. Who, coming immediately after its antecedent, is
translated by que ; when it stands alone, or is governed by

ZFSSON XVIL

69

a preposition, or is used interrogatively, it is rendered by
qiiien\ as.

El muchacho que estudia.

La muchacha con quien hablas.

I Quien busca el jabon ?

The boy who studies. .

The girl with whom you speak.

Who seeks the soap f

71. CuAL and que relate to persons and things; as.

El muchacho que lee, y al cual V.

raando trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica qite el tiene, y en la

cual estudia, es mia.

The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work, is my brother.

The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.

Cual may be regarded as slightly more delicate and indi-
rect than que^ and is more specific, answering somewhat to
wliich^ while ^^^ewDorresponds more nearly to what\ as,

^ Cual es el nomhre de V. f I What is your name %

^ Cual de sus criados trdbaja mas f \ W^hichof your servants works morel

72. CuYO also refers to persons and things, but agrees
with the word by which it is immediately followed ; as.

El caballero cuya casa V. compro es The gentleman whose house you

amigo mio. bought is my friend.

El ccmerciante cuyo vino V. compro The merchant whose wine you

vende muy barato. bought sells very cheap.

This pronoun partakes of the nature both of the relatives
and the possessives.

73. In English the preposition does not always precede
the relative pronoun ; but in Spanish it is indispensable to
place the preposition before the relative ; as.

El libro en que leemos. I The book which we read in (or, in

I which we read).

74. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span-
ish ; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to,
but, in full ; as,

La senora a quien hable, es mi i The lady to whom I spoke is my
madre. I mother.

70 LESSOJ^ XVII.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. e A quien mando Y. ayer al mercado ? Mande a mi criado
Juan.

2. i Cual de sus criados trabaja mas ? Juan trabaja mas que
todos.

3. I Quien es el hombre a quien V. busca ? EI hombre a
quien busco es trabajador.

4. I Quien es el caballero con quien hablo V. ayer en el con-
cierto ? Es un discipulo mio.

5. ^ A quien quiere V. hablar ? Quiero hablar a la senorita-
que toca el piano.

6. e Como pasaron Vds. el tiempo en el campo ? Lo pasamos
muy bien en compania de nuestros amigos.

7. I Es frances el comerciante a quien compro V. el caballo ?
Si, senor, es el frances cuya casa compro Y.

8. I Manda (en via) Y. sus ninos al Parque Central (Central
Park) ? Si, senor, los mando al Parque Central.

9. I Con quien los envia Y. ? Con sus primos.

10. I Que libro quiere Y. leer ? Quiero leer el de Manuel.

11. I No quiere Y. leer el que yo tengo ? No, seiior, quiero
leer el de Alejandro.

12. I A quien manda Y. trabajar ? A mis criados.

13. i Juan ! j Seiior ! i Que manda Y. ? Quiero la comida.

14. e Canta Y. bien ? No, seiior ; pero la seiiorita que reside
en su casa de Y. canta muy bien.

15. I Estudia Y. mucho ? No, seiior, pero trabajo mucho.

16. I Ha estudiado Y. hoy su leccion ? No, senor, la estudie
ayer ; hoy he escrito los ejercicios.

17. I Como pronuncia su maestro de Y. el espaiiol ? Lo pro-
nuncia bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el ingles.

18. I Toco Y. ayer el piano en casa de sus amigos ? Si, senor,
tocamos y cantamos.

19. I Que cantaron Yds. ? Cantamos canciones espanolas y
la cancion americana llamada, "The Star-Spangled Banner."

20. I Caballeros ! i Quieren Yds. tomar chocolate 6 cafe ?
Queremos beber vino.

21. I Cuantos dias paso Y. en el campo ? Pase toda una
semana.

22. i Por que no pasa Y. un mes en el campo con nosotros ?
Porque necesito residir en la ciudad.

LESSOJSr XYIL 71

23. I Cual de sus amigos liabla bien espanol ? El que estudia
mucho habla bien.

24. I Cual de sus hermanos estudia mas ? El mas pequeno.

25. I De quien recibe V. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanos.
2^. I Es de V. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? No,

seiior, es suyo.

27. h Trabajo V. mucho ayer ? No, senor ; pero he trabajado
mucho hoy.

28. I Cuando estudia V. sus lecciones ? Las estudio los mier-
coles y los sabados.

EXERCISE.

1. Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It
is the portrait of my brother who lives in Germany.

2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles ? I have sent
no portrait to Charles ; but I have sent mine to the musician.

3. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week
with my cousin John.

4. In which city of France does the pianist's brother live ?
He lives in the city in which your sister Jane resides.

5. To whom did you send the first volume of your work ?
I sent it to Louis.

6. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John.

7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother
of the singer {fern.) whose piano Charles bought last year.

8. With whom did you send your children to the concert
last night ? I sent them with a servant.

9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of
mine (my own).

10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing ? She sings in
Twenty-eighth street church.

11. How did you (plural) pass the time in Philadelphia?
Very well.

12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and
neither read nor wrote our exercises.

13. How much did you write the day before yesterday ? I
studied a good deal, but wrote little.

14. Which volumes of Robertson's History has your son ?
He has received the first, second, third, and fourth.

15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street ?
Yes, madam, I bought the History of Charles V. and some musio
books.

72 LESSON XVI IL

16. Whom have you paid with the money I sent you ? I
have paid the man who worked in my house yesterday.

17. Does your servant work much ? No, sir ; but she reads a
great deal.

18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive
letters from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, and
from my father on Tuesdays.

19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue ?
John has taken them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia.

20. Has your servant bought any good meat in the market ?
He has not bought any to-day.

. 21. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have
received several from Spain and two from England.

22. Have you suug any of them ? None ; but my sister sang
t)ne or two last night at the concert.

23. Are they very good ? One of them is very good, and my
cousin {fern.) sings it very well.

24. How many pencils does the hatter wish ? He wishes
twelve pencils and three penknives.

25. Does Louisa play much on the piano ? No, sir ; she is very
lazy, and will neither play nor study.

26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy
it ? I do not wish to buy a vest ; but I wish pantaloons.

27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none ; he sold them all
last week.

LESSON XVIII.
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

Ir. (Infinitive.)

To go.

PRESENT.

Voy.
Vas.
Va.

I go (or, am going)
Thou goest.
He, or she, goes.

Vamos.

Vais.

Van.

We go.
You go.
They go,

LUSSOJSr XVIIL

73

PRETEEIT.

Fui.

I went.

Fuiste.

Thou wentest.

Fue.

He, or she, went.

Fuimos.

We went.

Fuisteis.

You went.

Fueron.

They went.

PRESENT.

Venir. (Injanitive.)

To come.

Vengo.

I come (or, am coming)

Vienes.

Thou comest.

Yiene.

He, or she, comes.

VeDimos.

We come.

Venis.

You come.

Vienen.

They come.

PRETERIT.

Vine.

I came.

Viniste.

Thou camest.

Vino.

He, or she, came.

Vinimos.

We came.

Vinisteis.

You came.

Vinieron.

They came.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

Singular,

Masculine. Feminine.

Neuter.

Este. Esta.

Esto.

This.

Ese. Esa.

Eso.

That.

Aquel. Aquella.

Aquello.

That (yonder).

Plural.

Estos. Estas.

No neuter.

These.

Esos. Esas.

u

Those.

Aquellos. Aquellas.

u

Those (yonder).

Ella

It.

Aqui, aca.

Here.

Ahi. )
Alii, alia, aculla. \

There.

74

LESSON XVIII.

I Por que ?

Porque.

Lejos.

Cerca.

Otro. Ambos.

Ni uno ni otro (ind. pro.).

Why.

Because.

Far.

Near.

Another. Both.

Neither.

Profesor. )

Catedratico.* f

Diseipulo.

Lado.

Jardin.

Estudiante.

Professor.

Pupil.
Side.
Garden.
Student.

Juana. Jane.

Discipula. Pupil.

Zapateria. Shoemaker's shop.

,^ ^ \ Butter (in Spain).

Manteca. i ^ j r k • ^
( Lard (in America).

Mantequilla. Butter (in Amer.)

COMPOSITION.

|De quien es este libro que tengo

aq^ii f
Ese que tiene V. ahi, y este que yo

tengo aqui^ son del profesor.

4 Quien es aquel caballero que reside
alii del otro lado de la calle I

Aquel caballero es mi diseipulo.

i Adonde va V. f

Voy alia, al otro lado del parque.

4 No quiere V. venir aca de este lado I

No, senor, voy alia del otro lado.

i Quiere V. comprar aquel libro I

No, senor, quiero comprar ese otro.

^ Quiere V. ir al'teatro con nosotros ?

Eso quiero.

4 Llevo V. aquello a la sastreria f

Lo lleve.

J Manda V. algo mas f

No, eso es todo.

4 Envio V. el chaleco a la sastreria, y

las botas a la zapateria f
Envie ambos.

Whose book is this which I have

here?
That one which you have there and

this one which I have here are

the professor's.
Who is that gentleman who resides

there on the other side of the

street f
That gentleman is my pupil.
Where do you go f
I go there to the other side of the park.
Will you not come here to this side f
No, sir, I go there to the other side.
Do you wish to buy that book ?
No, sir, I wish to buy that other one.
Will you go to the theatre with us ?
That (is what) I wish.
Did you take that (thing) to the tai-
lor's?
I did (or I took it).
Do you command anything more (or

have you any more commands) ?
No, that is all.
Did you send the vest to the tailor's,

and the boots to the shoemaker's ?
I sent both.

Much used in Mexico.

LESSON XVIII.

76

^ Fueron a su casa de V. el medico

f ranees y el profesor aleman ?
Fue aquel, pero no f ue este.

I Habl6 V. de aquello a mi madre ?
No, senor, pero hable de ello a su

padre de V.
En mi casa y en Za de su hermano

de V.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la que

V. compro.
Este caballo y el de mi amigo.

Did the French physician and the

German professor go to your house!

The former came, but the latter did

not come.
Did you speak of that to my mother !
No, sir, but I spoke of it to your

father.
In my house and in your brother's.

The garden of this house and that
of the one you bought.

This horse and my friend's (that of
my friend).

EXPLANATION.

75. The demonstrative pronouns este^ this, ese^ aquel, that,
are thus declined :

Este, ese, aquel {masc. sing.). 1 Estos, esos, aquellos (masc. plural).

Esta, esa, aquella (fern. sing.). \ Estas, esas, aquellas (fern, plural).

Esto, eso, aquello (neuter).

76. Este is used to point out that which is near to us, and
corresponds to the meaning of the adverb here ; ese points out
that which is at some distance, and corresponds to the adverb
there ; and aquel denotes remoteness, and corresponds to the
adverb yonder ; as.

Uste libro que tengo aqui.
^se que tiene V. ahi.
Aquel que llevo V. alia.

This book which I have here.
That one which you have there.
That one which you took there.

77. The adverb ahi, which is not so commonly used as
aqui and alii, stands intermediate between them as to re-
moteness ; as, aqui, here ; ahi, there ; alii, yonder. Ahi is
much used in the phrase, / Ahi vaf There he goes !

78. When the pronouns este, ese precede the adjective o/fro,
another, they may be written together, so as to form a single
word, in the following manner :

Estotro. ^

Estotra. | This other.

Esotro. I That other.

Esotra. J

Estotros.
Estotras.
Esotros.
Esotras.

I These others.
Those others.

These forms, however, are now rarely used.

76 LUSSON XVIIL

79. The demonstrative pronouns, in their quality of adjec-
tives, are used also as neuter. Bso, that, is the most used of
the three, and almost as much as the personal pronoun Zo,
and in the same manner ; as,

Fso se hara. I That will be done.

/ Uso es ! I That is it !

80. The former and the latter is translated in Spanish by
aquel and este ; thus.

La aplicacion y la pereza hacen al
hombre muy diferente ; aquella
lo eleva y esta lo rebaja.

Industry and sloth fulness have a
very different effect upon man ;
the former elevates him, the lat-
ter lowers him.

81. When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is
followed by the preposition o/, or either of the relatives who^
which^ expressed or understood, referring to a noun already
mentioned, the definite article, in the corresponding number
and gender, is employed in Spanish ; as.

En mi casa y en la de su herma-

no de V.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la

que V. com pro.
Este caballo y el de mi amigo*

In my house and in your brother's.

The garden of this house and that
of the one (which) you bought.

This horse and my friend's {i. e.,
that of my friend).

82. English personal pronouns, followed by a relative not
agreeing in case, are generally rendered in Spanish by the
demonstrative; as,

Quiero comprar a aquellos que I I want to buy from them who sell
venden barato. | cheap.

83. Aqui, alli, aca, alla. — Although the adverbs aquiy
here, alli^ there, are employed as synonyms of acd^ here, and
aMd^ there, respectively, we must observe that aqui and alli
refer to a place more circumscribed or determinate than acd^
alld, and that they suggest the idea of resting in a place ;
while acd and alia convey the idea of motion to or from a
place ; for the same reason we may say, mas acd^ mds alldj
nearer, farther ; and we may not say, mds aqui^ more here,
mds alliy more there.

LESSON XVIIL

77

84. Vei^ir e ir.— The various modes and tenses of ir are
used as auxiliaries, just as in English; as, Voy d hablar, I
am going to speak. In many cases where in English the
verb to come is employed, the Spanish verb ir, to go, must be
used ; as. Will you come to my house to-morrow ? when both
the persons are elsewhere, is rendered thus : ^ Va Yd. mafla-
na a mi casa? When the speaker alludes to motion from
some other place to the place where he is, the verb venir is
used ; but in the case of motion from where he is to some
other place, the verb is ir,

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Viene V. del campo ? No, senor, voy alia.

2. i De donde viene su amigo de V. ? Viene de Espana.
% I Adonde va V. este ano ? Este ano quiero ir a Paris.

4. I De quien es ese retrato que tiene V. ahi ? Este que tengo
aqui es el de mi padre, y aqu^l que tiene su amigo de V. alii, es
de mi madre.

5. I Es discipulo de V. el caballero que reside en aquella her-
mosa casa ? No, senor ; pero su prima, que reside de este otro
lado de la calle, es mi discipula.

6. I Va V. a su casa todos los dias ? No, senor, voy alia los
lunes, miercoles y viernes.

7. I Cuantas lecciones toma el caballero que vino ayer a su
casa de V. ? Toma dos a la semana.

8. I Quien trabaja mas, el profesor 6 el discipulo ? El uno y
el otro trabajan mucho.

9. ^ Es este nino su hijo de V. ? Si, senor, es mi hijo Manuel.

10. j Manuel ! i quieres venir aqui a mi lado ? No, senor, no
quiero ir.

11. I Por que ? Porque quiero ir con mi padre.

12. t Cuantos ninos tiene V. ? Tengo cinco, tres niiias y dos
ninos.

13. ^ Quiere V. ir con nosotros al Parque Central ? No, senor,
porque tengo que ir con mis niiios al campo.

14. I Ha de ir V. (tiene V. que ir) hoy ? Si, senor, tengo que
ir hoy.

15. I No quiere V. venir aca de este lado ? No, senor, voy alia
del otro lado.

16. I Llevo V. aquello a la sastreria ? Si, senor, lo lleve.

78 LESSON XVI I I.

17. I Manda V. algo mas ? No, eso es todo.

18. I Hablo V. de aquello a mi amigo ? No, senor ; pero hable
de ello a su hermano.

19. i En donde trabajo V. aver ? Trabaje en la casa de V. y
en la de su hermano.

20. i Trabajo V. en mi jardin 6 en el de mi amigo ? Trabaje
en el uno y en el otro.

21. I Adonde va V. a trabajar hoy ? Voy a trabajar en el jar-
din de esta casa y en el de la que V. compro el ano pasado.

22. I Llevo V. mis botas a la zapateria, y compro V. el pan que
necesitamos ? Lleve las botas ; pero no he comprado el pan.

23. e Que llevas ahi, Alejandro ? Llevo mis libros.

24. I Que quiere tu hermano ? Quiere pan y manteca (or man-
tequilla).

25. i Pago V. al sastre ? Si, senor, ayer pague al sastre, y hoy
he pagado al zapatero.

2^. i De quien son esos caballos ? Este es el de mi padre, y
aquel es el de mi hermano.

27. i Cual es el de V. ? Yo no tengo ninguno.

28. e Quiere V. tener uno ? Quiero tener muchos.

29. ^ Escribio V. la carta y la leccion ? Escribi aquella, pero
no he escrito esta.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you go to church every day ? I only {solo) go on Sun-
days.

2. Where is your servant Jane going ? She is going to the
bakery to buy bread.

3. Do your music teacher {maestro) and your Spanish pro-
fessor come to your house every day ? The former comes every
day, but the latter only comes on Tuesdays and Saturdays.

4. Which of the two works the more ? Both have to work
much.

5. Which of the two horses is the older, this one here or that
one there f This one here is the younger.

6. Have you that letter which you received last Monday ? I
have not that one ; but I have here the one * I received the day
before yesterday.

7. Who wrote these two histories, that of France and that of
America ? Rollin wrote the former, and Robertson the latter.

* La que.

LESSON XIX.

79

8. Does the piano teacher live far from here ? The piano
teacher does not live far from here ; but the French professor
lives very far.

9. Is that all (lo que) your brother has studied ? Yes, sir,
that is all.

10. Which lesson have you studied ? I have studied the one
(la que) we read the other day.

11. Which did we read, the fifteenth or the sixteenth ? We
read both.

12. Which one do you wish to read first ? I have to read the
former.

13. Why do you have to read the former ? Because I have
not studied it well.

14. Which exercise have you there ? I have mine and my
brother's.

15. Is not your brother coming to take his lesson to-day ? No,
sir, he has to take his music lesson to-day.

16. John ! Sir !

17. Have you taken my coat to the tailor's ? Yes, sir, I took
it last nig'ht.

18. Have you paid that man ? Yes, sir, I paid him to-day.

19. How much did you pay him ? I paid him three dollars
and seventy-five cents.

20. Why did you pay him three dollars and seventy-five cents ?
Because he worked one day in this garden, and two in that of the
Twenty-third street house.

21. How many pupils have you ? I have thirty : seventeen
learn Spanish and the thirteen others French.

22. Do they study well ? Some of them study very well ; but
none w^rites his exercises well.

23. When do you sing and play on the piano ? I study my
lessons before singing and playing.

24. Who is that gentleman that came from Vienna last month ?
That gentleman is the one to whom I spoke last week at the
concert.

Hacer. (Infinitive.)
Haciendo {present participle).
Hecho {past participle).

LESSON XIX.

To do, or to make.
Doing, making.
Done, made.

80

LESSON XIX.

PRESENT.

Hago.

I do, or make.

Haces.

Thou doest, or makest

Hace.

He does, or makes.

Hacemos.

We do, or make.

Haceis.

You do, or make.

Hacen.

They do, or make.

PRETERIT.

Hice.

I did, or made.

Hiciste.

Thou didst, or madest.

Hizo.

He did, or made.

Hicimos.

We did, or made.

Hicisteis.

You did, or made.

Hicieron.

They did, or made.

Partir.

.

To set out, to depart, to divide.

Marchar.

To go, set out, set off, to march

Cambiar.

PREPOS

Change.

ITIONS.

Para.

For, or in order to.

Asi.

So, thus.

Por. •

By, for, through.

Entre.

Between, among.

Hasta.

Until, even.

Hacia.

Toward.

Sin. Hasta donde.

Without. How far.

Pedro.

Peter.

Helena. Helen.

Escritor.

Writer.

Escritora. Writer (female).

Escribano.

Notary.

Tienda. Store, shop.

Estado.

State.

Provincia. Province.

Medico

^ Physician.
( Doctor.

Manera. Manner.

^l.L V/V4.X Vf'X^*

Escritura. Writing, convey-

Cuarto.

Poom.

ance.

Aragon.

Aragon.

Comida. Dinner.

Tio.

Uncle.

Pieza. Room.*

* Much used in the Americas.

LESSON XIX.

81

COMPOSITION.

i Que hizo V. ayer en su cuarto ?

Estudie mi leccion.

^ Que ha hecho V. hoy ■?

He escrito los ejercicios.

^Que hace el zapatero en la zapa-
teria ?

Hace zapatos y botas para V.

^ Tiene V. papel para escribir una
carta ?

Si, senora, lo tengo.

^ Quiere V. escribir una carta por mi
hermano ?

^ Para quien es la carta ?

Es para Manuel.

Yo parto para Madrid.

S Para donde parte V. ?

Parto para los Estados Unidos.

j, Hablo V. a su padre por mi her-
mano?

Hable por el a mi padre y a mi tio.
»-

^ Habla V. bien el f ranees ?

Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por

frances.
S Por cudnto vendio V. el caballo ?

Lo vendi por doscientos cincuenta

pesos.
^ Necesita V. enviar por algo ?
Necesito enviar joor el medico.
S Por que envia V. ?
Envio por vino.
^ Vive V. para comer ?
No, senor, como j!?ara vivir.
4 Marcho ayer mucho el regimiento

Septimo 1
Marcho hasta el Parque Central.

What did you do yesterday in your

room?
I studied my lesson.
What have you done to-day t
I have written my exercises.
What does the shoemaker do in the

shoe-shop ?
He makes shoes and boots for you.
Have you paper to write a letter t

Yes, madam, I have.

Are you willing to write a letter for

my brother ?
For whom is the letter?
It is for Emanuel.
I set out for Madrid.
Where do you go ?
I set out for the United States.
Did you speak to your father for my

brother?
I spoke for him to my father and to

my uncle.
Do you speak French well I
I speak it very well, and I even pass

for a Frenchman.
For how much did you sell the

horse ?
I sold it for two hundred and fifty

dollars.
Do you want to send for anything!
I want to send for the physician.
What do you send for ?
I send for wine.
Do you live to eat ?
No, sir, I eat to live.
Did the Seventh Regiment march

far yesterday ?
They marched to Central Park.

EXPLANATION.
85. Para and Por.— As both these prepositions very fre-
quently answer to the English for, they are apt to be con-
8

82

LESSON XIX.

founded by foreigners. Such confusion may, however, be
avoided by bearing in mind the following rules :

Para expresses aim, object, destination.

Por conveys the idea of want or requirement, substitu-
tion, favor, duration of time, direction, and frequently takes
the place of the English word through, &c. Examples :

WITH PARA.

Papel para escribir.
Paper for writing.
Este libro es para V.
This book is for you.
Parto para Nueva York.
I start for New York.
Comer para vivir.
To eat to live.

Trabajo para ganar la vida.
I work in order to earn a living.

Para el domingo.

For Sunday.

Este caballo es para su padre de V.

This horse is for your father.

Jjo hare para tu hermano.

I shall do it for thy brother.

WITH POR.

Escribo por mi hermano.

I write for my brother.

Gamble mi sombrero por el suyo.

I changed my hat for his.

Pasa por docto.

He passes for a man of learning.

Vendera la casa por diez mil pesos.

He will sell the house for ten thou-
sand dollars.

Trabajo por ganar la vida.

I work to (endeavor to) earn my liv-
ing.

Hable por tu amigo.

I spoke for (in favor of) thy friend.

Envio por pan.

I send for bread.

Lo hare por tu hermano.

I shall do it for thy brother (for thy
brother's sake).

86. EiS'TRE. — The general meaning of this preposition is
hetvjeen and among^ and it is followed by the nominative case
of the pronoun, and not by the objective, as is the case with
between and among in English ; as,

Entre los dos. Between the two.

Entre V. y yo. Between you and me.

Entre todos. Among all.

87. Hast A signifies till^ until, even, to, as many as, as far
as ; as,

Hasta el domingo. Till (or until) Sunday.

Pasaron hasta mil. As many as a thousand passed.

Voy hasta el Parque Central. I go as far as Central Park.

Estudio el espanol hasta que lo He studied Spanish till he learned it.
aprendio.

LESSON XIX. 83

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Escribio Y. la carta para su padre, y los ejercicios de la
leccion de espafiol ? Hice aquello ; pero no he hecho esto.

2. i Tiene V. papel para escribir una carta ? Si, senor ; pero
tengo que escribir antes mis ejercicios.

3. I Hizo el sastre mi casaca ? La hizo.

4. e Que ha hecho el zapatero ? Ha hecho unas botas para
V. y unos zapatos para Manuel.

5. I Para donde parte V. ? Parto para los Estados Unidos.

6. ^ Quiere V. escribir una carta por mi hermano ? Si, seiior,
I para quien es la carta ? Es para Dn. Manuel.

7. i Hablo V. a su padre por mi hermano ? Hable por el a
mi padre y a mi amigo.

8. I Habla V. bien el frances ? Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta
paso por frances.

9. ^ Por cuanto vendio V. la casa ? La vendi por ocho mil

10. I Por que envia V. ? Envio por mis libros.

11. I Vive V. para comer ? No, senor, como para vivir.

12. I Marcho V. ayer con el regimiento Septimo ? Marche
hasta el Parque Central.

13. e Es Dn. Pedro escritor ? No, senor, Dn. Pedro es escri-
bano.

14. I De que manera hace V. eso ? Lo hago asi.

15. I Que hizo V. ayer ? Estudie la leccion de espanol, y hoy
he escrito los ejercicios.

16. I Tiene V. que trabajar mas que yo ? Tengo que escribir
mas que V. ; pero no tengo que trabajar mucho.

17. I Hacia donde van Vds. ? Vamos hacia la iglesia.

18. I En donde vive V. ? Vivo en la Cuarta avenida, niimero
trescientos treinta y ocho, entre las calles Veinte y cinco y Veinte
y seis.

19. l Para que quiere V. mi libro ? Para leerlo.

20. I Quien pago la comida ? La pagamos entre todos.

21. i Marchan bien estos hombres ? Marchan muy bien.

22. I Por donde pasaron Vds. cuando fueron a la iglesia ? Pa-
samos por la calle Veinte y tres.

23. h Es esa seiiora escritora ? Si, seiior, y escribe muy
bien.

24. I De que pais es V. ? Soy de Espaiia.

25. I De que provincia ? De Aragon.

84 LESSON XIX.

26. e Pronuncian bien el espanol en Aragon ? Lo pronuncian
muy bien.

27. I Hablan bien el ingles en los Estados Unidos ? Lo ha-
blan bien.

28. I Quiere Y. ir a mi casa para comer con nosotros ? No,
senor, porque tengo que ir a comer a casa de mi amigo.

EXERCISE.

1. How far did the Seventh Regiment march yesterday ?
They (it) marched to Central Park.

2. Did your sister set out yesterday for Philadelphia ? No,
madam, she did not set out yesterday.

3. When does she start ? She starts to-day.

4. What does your servant look for ? He looks for my cou-
sin's (fern.) letter.

5. What do you do to learn Spanish ? I study the lessons of
my Spanish grammar and read good writers.

6. To whom did you speak last night at the concert ? I spoke
to the physician for Peter.

7. Who is that man who came to your house last night ? He
is my brother's servant.

8. Do you speak Spanish well ? No, sir ; but I speak Italian
very well, and I even pass for an Italian (italiano).

9. How did your uncle spend the day yesterday ? Studying
his lessons and writing to Madrid.

10. Is your uncle willing to write a letter for (in favor of)
Charles ? He is willing to write it.

11. Do the young ladies want to send for anything ? They
want to send for the physician.

12. Why do they send for the physician ? To speak for their
servant (fern.).

13. Where does he live ? In Fifth avenue, between Twenty-
fourth and Twenty-fifth streets.

14. Where do you send ? I send to the shoemaker's.

15. What do you send there for ? For some boots and shoes
for Emanuel.

16. How do you write your exercises without ink ? I write
them with a pencil.

17. How did Louis write his exercise the other day ? He and
his sister wrote it between them.

LFSSON XX.

86

18. Have you sold your old hat ? I changed it for Peter's
new one.

19. Will you pass me that paper to write a letter for my
brother ? This paper is not for letters.

20. What is it for ? It is for my exercises.

21. Whose letter is that ? This letter is for your mother.

22. Where did the singer go last year ? He went to Aragon,
a province in Spain.

23. What have you sent for ? I have sent for nothing.

24. Will you go for wine ? I do not wish wine, but bread
and meat.

25. Do you live to eat ? No, sir, I eat to live.

26. Have you read the newspapers to-day ? No, sir ; but I
marched with my regiment.

27. Has the tailor made my vest ? Yes, sir, he made it last
week.

28. Will you go to the pianist's for my piano ? No ; I have
to study my lessons.

29. Do you write before studying ? No ; I study first and
write afterward.

LESSON XX.

Salir.
Saliendo (pres. part)
Salido (past. part).

To go out, to leave.

Going out.
Gone out.

PRESENT.

Salgo.
Sales.
Sale.

I go out.
Thou goest out.
He goes out.

Salimos.

Sails.

Salen.

We go out.
You go out.
They go out.

PRETERIT.

Sail.

Saliste.

Salio.

I went out.
Thou wentest out.
He went out.

86

LESSON XX.

Salimos.
Salisteis.
Salieron.

Mexico.

Mexico.

We went out.
You went out.
They went out.

Tanto.

So, so much, as much.

Cuanto.

How much.

Como.

As, how.

Presto.

Soon, speedily.

Pronto.

Promptly, quickly.

Temprano.

Early.

Tarde.

Late.

Mejor.

Better.

Peor.

Worse.

Mayor.

Greater, larger, older.

Menor.

Smaller, younger.

Mejor.

Better.

Peor.

Worse.

Prudente.

Prudent.

Imprudente.

Imprudent.

Pronto.

Prompt, quick, ready.

Presto.

Ready, prepared.

Callado.

Silent, taciturn.

Hablador.

Talkative.

Limpio.

Cleanly, clean.

Vivo.

Lively, alive.

Situado.

Situated.

Cansado.

Tiresome, tired.

Fecha.

Date.

COMPOSITION.

jEs Alejandro tan prudente como
su hermano ?

No, senor, Alejandro es muy impru-
dente. Es tan imprudente como
hablador.

I Son los comerciantes mas ricos que
los medicos ?

Algunos son mds ricos; pero otros
lo son menos que los medicos.

I Es Xue va York mayor que Madrid ?

Madrid es menor que Nueva York.

Is Alexander as prudent as his
brother ?

No, sir, Alexander is very impru-
dent. He is as imprudent as
talkative.

Are merchants richer than physi-
cians ?

Some are richer; but others are less
rich than physicians.

Is New York larger than Madrid I

Madrid is smaller than New York.

LESSON XX.

87

J Que caballo es mefor^ el de V. 6 el

miof
El de V. es mayor ; pero es peor que

el mio.
^ Tiene V. mas de cincuenta pesos ?
No tengo mas que veinte y tres,
fil tiene tanto dinero como V.
Yo estudio tanto como V. ; pero no

aprendo tanto.
El habla espanol tan bien como V. ;

pero no lo escribe tan bien.
!6l tiene tanto cuanto quiere.
Tengo tantos libros y tanto papel

como el.
Yo escribo mds que V. ; pero V. lee

mas que yo.
fil habla menos que V.

Which horse is the better, yours or

mine ¥
Yours is larger ; but it is worse than

mine.
Have you more than fifty dollars t
I have not more than twenty-three.
He has as much money as you.
I study as much as you ; but I do

not learn as much.
He speaks Spanish as well as you ;

but he does not write it as well.
He has as much as he wishes.
I have as many books and as much

paper as he.
I write more than you ; but you read

more than I.
He speaks less than you.

EXPLANATION.

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.

88. The adverbs tafito and cuanto lose the last syllable,
to^ before an adjective or another adverb.

89. The comparative of equality is formed by placing the
adverb tan^ so or as, before, and como, as, after the adjec-
tive; as,

Alejandro es tan prudente como su 1 Alexander is as prudent as his sis-
hermana. I ter.

90. CuAN may be employed, if the comparative is followed
by an adjective instead of a noun ; as,

Es tan hablador cuan imprudente. | He is as talkative as imprudent.

However, como is more frequently used.

91. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing
the word mds, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after
it; as,

tl es mds rico que V. I He is richer than you.

92. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing
the word menos, less, before, and que after; as,

tl es menos rico que V. I He is less rich than you.

88 LESSON XX.

93. Mayor, greater or larger; me]N"OR, smaller; mejor,
better, and peor, worse, are already in the comparative de-
gree, and do not take 7nds or menos before them ; as.

This house is larger or smaller than

that one.
This horse is better or worse than
mio. mine.

Esta casa es mayor 6 menor que esa.
Este caballo es mejor 6 peor que el

94. Than^ after comparatives coming before numeral ad-
jectives, is generally translated by de in the affirmative, and
que in the negative ; as,

Tengo mas de cincuenta libros. 1 1 have more than fifty books.

No tengo mas que veinte pesos. 1 1 have not more than twenty dollars.

96. Comparison may also take place in the case of nouns,
verbs, and adverbs ; but its form is so similar to that laid down
for the adjectives that the student will not require any other
explanation than the examples given in the Composition.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. t Sale' V. tanto como su hermano ? No, senor, mi hermano
sale mas que yo.

2. t Cuando salimos nosotros ? Nosotros salimos muy pronto.

3. I Salio su hermano temprano de casa ? No, senor, salio
tarde.

4. I Salieron Yds. pronto del teatro ? Si, seSor, salimos muy
pronto.

5. I Sale V. presto a la calle ? Si, senor, salgo muy presto.

6. i Salieron Vds. temprano de la iglesia ? Salimos tarde.

7. I Cual de estas dos gramaticas es mejor ? La que V. tiene
delante es mejor que la otra.

8. i Es malo este caballo ? Es peor que el de V.

9. I Es buena la pluma de su hermano de V. ? Es mejor que
la mia y peor que la de V.

10. I Cuanto dinero tiene Y. ? Tengo cuarenta pesos.

11. I Cuantos libros tiene su hermana ? Tiene tantos como
su prima.

12. i Cuanto tiempo vivio Y. en Paris ? Yivi euatro anos.

13. I Es su hermano mayor 6 menor que Y. ? Es mayor.

14. e Quien de su familia de Y. habla mejor el ingles ? Mi
hermano menor lo habla mejor que todos.

LESSON XX,

89

15. I Donde lo aprendio ? En Londres.

16. e Cuanto tiempo vivio alia ? Seis anos.

17. e Cuando vino de alia ? Vino el ano pasado.

18. ^ Cual de Yds. dos estudia mas ? El estudia menos que
yo ; pero aprende mas.

19. e Cual de sus hermanos de V. es mas prudente ? El mayor
es muy callado y prudente ; pero el menor es vivo e imprudente.

20. t Salieron Yds. del concierto antes que nosotros ? No,
senor, salimos despues.

21. I Cuando salio su amigo de Vds. de Nueva York ? Salio
el mes pasado para Paris.

22. i Cuando sale V. para Filadelfia ? No salgo hasta la
semana que viene.

23. I Hacia donde vive su amigo de V. ? Vive haeia la plaza.

24. I Por donde vino V. de Paris ? Vine por Inglaterra.

25. ^ En donde vive V. ? En la Quinta avenida entre las
calles Treinta y Treinta y una.

26. I Que caballo es mejor, el de V. 6 el mio ? El de V. es
mayor ; pero no tan bueno como el mio.

27. I Tiene V. mas de cien pesos ? Tengo mas de ciento.

28. I No tiene V. mas que tres pesos ? No, senor, no tengo
mas que dos.

29. t Habla V. espanol mejor que Luisa ? No, senor, lo hablo
peor ; pero lo escribo mejor que ella.

30. I Salio V. ayer temprano ? Sali temprano ; pero hoy he
salido muy tarde.

EXERCISE.

1. Have you written your letter ? Yes, sir, I have written it.

2. What is the date of it (what date has it) ? The first of this
month.

3. Do you (plural) go out much ? We go out this year as
much as last year.

4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yours ? Yours is
better than mine, but not so large.

5. Which of you two goes out earlier, you or your cousin ?
I go out earlier than he.

6. Are merchants as rich as singers ? Some singers are richer
than merchants.

7. Is not this horse as lively as that one ? That one is a little
more lively than this one.

90 LESSON XX

8. Is Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the
latter is much larger than the former.

9. When do the musicians leave for Havana ? They leave
next week (the week that is coming).

10. When did you take your music lesson ? I took it the day
before yesterday, early.

11. Did your brothers take theirs as early as you ? No, sir,
they took theirs very late.

12. Which of you two speaks Italian better ? He speaks it
better than I ; but I write it better than he.

13. Do you sing much every day ? I do not sing as much as
I did last month.

14. Does the notary write as well as the physician ? The
former writes better than the latter.

15. Is not that man very tiresome ? He is very talkative and
very tiresome.

16. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle ? He is more prudent
than he ; but not so taciturn.

17. Are you less tall (alto) than Louisa ? No, she is less tall
than I.

18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father ? No,
sir, my father is richer than he.

19. When do your cousins leave for Paris ? They leave very
soon.

20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours ? Ours is more cleanly
than yours, but not so talkative.

21. Have you any writing paper ? I have as much paper and
as much ink as I wish.

22. Is Henry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative.

23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John ? Nobody
goes as quick as he.

24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to
Spain ? They have sent more to France.

25. Did the shoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor
made the coat ? The former made the shoes quicker, because he
worked more than the latter.

2Q. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker ? The
latter does not work so late as the former.

27. Are your father's books larger than ours? Yours are
smaller than his.

28. Are those horses bad ? They are worse than the others.

LESSON XXL

91

29. Will you go with your friend {fern.) to the concert ? I
shall not go.

30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have
to play on the piano.

31. Where did your mother learn Spanish ? She learned it
here.

32. And does she speak it well ? She does not speak it as well
as she writes it.

33. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven
dollars.

34. Has your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ;
he has received more than two hundred dollars from Spain.

LESSOIS^ XXI.

Saber.
Sabiendo.
Sabido.

To know.
Knowing.
Known.

Se.

Sabes.

Sabe.

I know.
Thou knowest.
He knows.

Sabemos.

Sabeis.

Saben.

We know.
You know.
They know.

Supe.

Supiste.

Supo.

I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.

Supimos.
Supisteis.
Supieron.

We knew.
You knew.
They knew.

Amar.
Viajar.

To love.
To travel.

Trinidad (fem.).

1 Trinity.

92

LESSON XXL

Sabio, sapientisimo.

Habil, habilisimo.
Dificil, dificilisimo.
Facil, facilisimo.
Corto, cortisimo.
Alegre, alegrisimo.
Triste, tristisimo.
Feliz, felicisimo.
Largo, larguisimo.
Fuerte, fortisimo.
Nuevo, novisimo.
Fiel, fidelisimo.
Alto, altisimo.

Wise, learned ; very, most or ex

tremely wise.
Clever, skilful ; very clever.
Difficult : very or most difficult.
Easy ; very or most easy.
Short ; very or most short.
Cheerful ; very or most cheerful.
Sad ; very or most sad.
Happy ; very or most happy.
Long ; very or most long.
Strong ; very or most strong.
New ; very or most new.
Faithful ; very or most faithful.
Tall ; very or most tall.

IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

Bueno, mejor, optimo.
Malo, peor, pesimo.
Grande, mayor, maximo.
Pequeiio, menor, minimo.

Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, infimo.

Good, better, best.
Bad, worse, worst.
Great, greater, greatest.
Small, smaller, smallest

High, \ ^i^^^i'' liighest.

( superior, supreme.

Low, ^^^r":- [lowest
( inferior, )

Combinado.

Combined.

COMPOSITION.

Es el mas sabio de mis discipulos.
Esta senorita es la mas amable.
La mayor parte del regimiento.
La mayor parte^ 6 los mds, de los

soldados.
La mejor casa de la calle.
Manuel, | cuales son los profesores

que saben mas en tu escuela ?
El profesor de aritraetica sabe mu-

cho, el de frances sabe mas ; pero

el profesor de historia es el que

mas sabe.

He is the wisest of my pupils.

This young lady is the most lovable.

The greater part of the regiment.

The greater part, or the most, of the
soldiers.

The best house in the street.

Emanuel, which are the professors
in your school who know the most?

The professor of arithmetic is
learned, the French professor is
more learned ; but the professor
of history is the most learned.

Lussojsr XXI.

93

4 Es bueno este caballo I

Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el

de V. es mejor, y el mio es el me-

jor de los tres.
^ Es esta leccion muy f acil ?

i Es su casa de V. tan alta como la

mia?
La raia es mas alta que la de V., y

la de su hermano de Y. es la mas

alta.
Ese frances es muy caballero,

i Es alegre 6 triste su amigo de Y. ?
Es alegrisimo ; pero es muy niSo.

^ Es muy joren f
No, seSor, es viejo.

Is this horse good I

This horse is very good ; but yours

is better, and mine is the best of

the three.
Is this lesson very easy f
It is most, or very easy.
Is your house as high as mine!

Mine is higher than yours, and your
brother's is the highest.

That Frenchman is very gentle-
manly.

Is your friend cheerful or sad t

He is most cheerful ; but he is very
childish.

Is he very young ?

No, sir, he is old.

EXPLANATION.

96. English superlatives ending in esty or formed by most,
are rendered by placing the definite article before the Span-
ish comparative ; as,

El mas sabio.
La mas amable.

The wisest.

The most lovable.

97. Most, or most of, when followed by a noun (singular),
is translated by la mayor parte ; as,

La mayor parte del regimiento. | Most of the regiment.

But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated
by mdsy with the corresponding article ; as.

La mayor parte, 6 los mas, de los I Most of the soldiers,
soldados. I

98. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is
translated by de in Spanish ; as.

La mejor casa de la calle. I The best house in the street

99. Those superlatives which in English are formed with
the aid of very, most, &c., may in Spanish be formed either

94 LESSON XXL

with the use of muy before the adjective, or by adding to the
latter the termination isiyno ; as,

Muy habil, or habilmmo. i Very clever.

Muy facil, or faciKsimo. I Very, or most easy.

The termination isimo is, however, more expressive of the
absolute superlative degree than the adverb muy.

100. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that
vowel on taking the termination isimo ; as.

Corto, covlisimo.
Alegre, alegrmmo.
Triste, tristismo.

Short, very short.
Cheerful, most cheerful.
Sad, very sad.

101. There are other superlatives ending in errimo ; as,
Celebre, celeherrimo. | Celebrated, most celebrated.
Salubre, salubcVrimo. I Salubrious, very salubrious.

These forms, however, are seldom used.

102. Adjectives ending in the following letters change
them before taking the termination isimo :

Co becomes qu ; as, rico, rigwisimo.
Go " gu ; as, largo, lar^wisimo.
Ble " bil ; as, amable, amaJi'Zisimo.
Z " c; as, feliz, felicisimo.

103. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed :

BuenOf good, makes bonisimo, very good.
Euerte, strong, makes fortisimo, very strong.
Nuevo, new, makes novisimo, very new.
Sdbio. wise, makes sapientisimo, very wise.
SacrOj sacred, makes sacratisimo, very sacred.
Eiel, faithful, makes fidelisimo, very faithful.

104. Irregular comparatives and superlatives :

Bueno, mejor, optimo.

Malo, peor, pesimo.

Grande, mayor, maximo.

Pequeno, menor, minimo.

Alto, superior, supremo.

Bajo, inferior, infimo.

Mucho, mas, lo mas.

Poco, menos, lo menos.

LUSSOJV XXL 95

All these adjectives form also a superlative in isimo, ac^
cording to the rules already given ; ^s, maUsi7no, poquisimo,
muchisimo.

They admit also a comparative formed with mas or menos,
and a superlative with muy ; as,

Menos malo.
Los mas grandes.

Muy pequenos.

Less bad.
The largest.
Very small.

105. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of
comparison; as,

Es mas caballero que tii,
Es muy hombre.

Este hombre es muy nino.

He is more gentlemanly than thou.
He is very much of a man, or very

manly.
This man is very childish.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Supo V. su leccion antes de ayer ? La supe muy bien,
y la se todos los dias.

2. I Ama V. a su hermano ? Lo amo.

3. i Le ama a V. su hermano ? No lo se.

4. ^ A quien ama V. ? Amo a mis papas.

5. I Ha viajado V. mucho ? He viajado mucho en Europa ;
pero he viajado muy poco en America.

6. I Sabe V. el espanol ? Muy poco, senorita ; pero lo aprendo.

7. Y v., senorita, e lo sabe V. ? No, senor, no lo se, ni lo
aprendo.

8. i Por que no estudia V. el espanol ? Porque aprendo la.
miisica, y no tengo tiempo para estudiarlo.

9. i Es muy habil su profesor de miisica de V. ? Es habili-
simo.

10. i Sabe V. cantar ? No, senora, pero se tocar un poco el
piano.

11. I No sabe V. tocar la guitarra ? No, senora, toco el violin.

12. i Aprende bien ese caballero el espanol ? Estudia mucho
y lo aprende muy bien.

13. I Quien aprende mas pronto el espanol, las senoras 6 los
caballeros ? Las sefioras aprenden mucho mas pronto.

14. i Quien es el mas sabio de sus discipulos de V. ? La seno-
rita N., es la mas sabia de todos mis discipulos.

96 LESSON XXL

15. e Cual de estos niiios es el mejor ? El que ama a sus pa-
dres, y estudia mas sus leceiones, es el mejor.

16. I Marcho todo el re^imiento septimo por Broadway hasta
el Parque Central ? No, seiior, pero la mayor parte de el.

17. I Fueron al campo los soldados ? Los mas de los soldados
fueron alia.

18. I Es esta la mejor casa de la calle ? No, senor, esta casa
es muy buena ; pero la de Astor es mejor y la de Stewart es la
mejor de la ciudad.

19. I Sabe V. quien paso por aqui anoche ? No, seiior, pero se
quien paso por la Quinta avenida.

20. I Es bueno este caballo ? Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero
el de V. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de los tres.

21. I Es caballero ese frances ? Si, senor, es muy caballero.

22. i Es ese hombre alegre 6 triste ? Es muy alegre ; pero es
muy nino.

23. i Fue V. al concierto la semana pasada ? Fui antes de ayer.

24. I Quiere V. tocar el piano ? Quiero, pero no se.

25. I Ha venido su amigo de V. ? Ha venido.
2^. i Cuando vino ? Vino antes de ayer.

27. I Cuando sale V. ? Quiero salir la semana que viene.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you know French ? No, sir, but my brother knows it.

2. Is that physician clever ? He is most clever.

3. Which is the most skilful physician ? Ours is the most
skilful in the city.

4. Is Miss Louisa very amiable ? Yes, she is very amiable.

5. Alexander, which is the most learned teacher in your
school ? The English teacher is learned, the teacher of arith-
metic is more learned ; but the Italian teacher is the most
learned of all.

6. Is your schoolmistress cheerful, Louisa ? Yes, mamma,
she is most cheerful and very happy.

7. Did you know your lessons well yesterday ? Yes, I knew
them very well, better than to-day's, for I have not had time to
study them.

8. Does your brother know his every day ? I do not know ;
but he works very little.

9. Is he taciturn ? No, sir, he is very talkative.

LESSON XXL

or

10. Which is the largest church in New York? Trinity
Church is the largest and the handsomest in the city.

11. Whose is that handsome house there ? It is my uncle's.

12. Is it not the finest in the street ? No ; Mr. Emanuers is
the finest in the city.

13. Did the 12th Eegiment go out to march yesterday ? Not
all, but the greater part went out.

14. Did not all the soldiers march through Fourteenth street
last Thursday ? The most of them marched through Fourteenth
street, but not all.

15. Is your Spanish lesson for to-day difficult ? Yes, it is the
most difficult (that) I have had this month.

16. Is your French lesson very difficult, Charles ? No, sir ;
my French lesson for to-day is the easiest one in the grammar.

17. Which is the best Spanish grammar ? The Combined
Spanish Grammar is the best and the easiest.

18. Is not your table very low for writing ? Yes, it is very
low ; I write better on a higher one.

19. Will you take this small pen to write your exercise ? No ;
I do not write well with my own, which is very small, but larger
than yours.

20. Have you travelled much in Europe ? I have travelled
very much in America, but very little in Europe.

21. Which is the longest street in New York ? Broadway is
the longest in the United States.

22. Do you love your parents ? Yes, I love them very much.

23. Why does not Margaret love her cousin ? She does not
love him because he is very taciturn.

24. Which of your pupils is the wisest ? Henry and Louisa
are the wisest of all my pupils.

25. Who reads the most newspapers in your house ? I do not
know ; but papa reads a great many.

2Q. To whom have you paid the most money to-day ? I have
paid most to the tailor, because he has worked most for me.

27. Does not your washerwoman work very much ? Yes, she
works very much, but earns (ganar) very little money.

28. Whose horse is the most lively, yours, Charles', or mine ?
Charles' is lively, mine is more lively, but yours is the liveliest
of the three.

29. On what street do you live ? I live on Twenty-third street.

30. Is that a fine street ? Yes, it is one of the finest streets
up-town (of the upper part (parte alto) of the city).

9

98

LESSON XXIL

lesso:n- XXII.

Estar,

To be (in a certain place,

state or condition).

Estoy.

I am.

Estas.

Thou art.

Esta.

He is.

Estamos.

We are.

Estais.

You are.

Estan.

They are.

Prestar.

To lend.

PRESENT PAETICIPLES.

Hablando.

Speaking".

Estudiando.

Studying.

Comprando.

Buying.

Buscando.

Looking for.

Necesitando.

Needing, wanting, requiring.

Aprendiendo.

Learning.

Vendiendo.

Selling.

Leyendo.

Reading.

Bebiendo.

Drinking.

Comiendo.

Eating, dining.

Escribiendo.

Writing.

Eecibiendo.

Receiving.

Viviendo.

Living.

Eesidiendo.

Residing.

Teniendo.

Having, holding..

Siendo.

Being.

Queriendo.

Wishing, desiring, loving.

Llevando.

Carrying, taking.

Enviando.

Sending.

Tomando.

Taking.

Pagando.

Paying.

Pronunciando.

Pronouncing.

Cantando.

Singing, chanting.

Tocando.

Touching, playing.

Haciendo.

Doing, making.

Pasando.

Passing.

LUSSOJH XXII.

99

Trabajando.

Mandando.

Yendo.

Viniendo.

Estando.

Norte, sur, este, oeste.

Working.

Sending, commanding.

Going.

Coming.

Being (in a certain state Sec),

North, south, east, west.

COMPOSITION.

^Es grande su casa de V. ?

Us grande ; pero estd en mal estado.

^ En que calle estd la casa de su her-

mano de V. ?
Ustd en la Cuarta'ayenida.
^ Es Luisa bonita ?
Es muy bonita.
^ Estd ella contenta ?
No estd contenta, porque estd enf er-

ma.
^ Es enf ermiza ?
Lo es mucho.
^ De quien es esta casa ?
Es de mi hermano.
Estd muy bien situada.
Esta carta es para Margarita.
Nueva York estd entre el rio del

Norte y el del Este.
El senor Walker es pintor.
La mesa es de madera.
Estuve en casa hasta que V. llego.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
Estoy sin comer.
^ Que estd V. haciendo ?
Estoy escribiendo.
l De quien es V. amado ?
Soy amado de mis ninos.
Manuel es bueno.
Manuel estd malo.
4 Estd Pedro cansado ?
Estd cansado y es cansado.
I, Por que estd tan callado Alejandro?
Porque es callado.

Is your house large ?

It is large ; but it is in bad condition.

On what street is your brother's

house %
It is on (the) Fourth avenue.
Is Louisa pretty ?
She is very pretty.
Is she contented ?
She is not contented, because she is

sick.
Is she sickly ?
She is very much so.
Whose house is this ?
It is my brother's.
It is very well situated.
This letter is for Margaret.
New York is between the North and

East rivers.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
The table is of wood.
I was at home until you arrived.
My friend is about to set out.
Ihavenotdined(Iamwithouteating).
What are you doing?
I am writing.
By whom are you loved f
I am loved by my children.
Emanuel is good.
Emanuel is ill.
Is Peter tired ?

He is tired, and he is tiresome.
Why is Alexander so silent I
Because he is taciturn.

100 LESSON XXII.

EXPLANATION.

106. See and Estar. — These two verbs have in English
but one equivalent — to be ; but their respective significations
and uses are so materially different as to constitute one of
the chief diflSculties of the Spanish language. By careful
observation, however, of the following simple rule the learn-
er will, we are assured, be enabled to overcome that difficulty,
and know exactly when to use the one and when the other of
these two verbs.

107. Whenever we wish to express what persons or things
are^ and their mode of being, in their essence, see is the verb
to be employed ; but if we desire to express the state, condi-
tion, or location of persons or things, and the mode of that
state, condition, or location in a relative manner, then estar
must be used.

The following examples will serve to render the applica-
tion of this rule more clear :

1st. Esta casa es grande.

2d. Esta casa esid limpia.

3d. Esta casa eatd en Broadway.

4th. Luisa es bonita.

5th. Luisa es feliz.

6th. Luisa esta contenta.

7th. Luisa esta enferma.

8th. Luisa es enfermiza.

This house is large.
This house is clean.
This house is on Broadway.
Louisa is pretty.
Louisa is happy.
Louisa is content.
Louisa is sick.
Louisa is sickly.

In the first example we use ser to express what kind of a
house the one referred to is — i. e. large ; in the second, estar,
inasmuch as we desire to express hozo, or in what state the
house is, i, e. in a clean state ; estar is also employed in the
third, sixth and seventh examples, the object being to make
known respectively where the house is, and in what state or
condition Louisa is or finds herself', while in the fourth, fifth
and eighth ser again comes into play, seeing we wish to desig-
nate Louisa's mode of being in an essential mariner ,

From the above general rule may be deduced the follow-
ing observations :

1st. That SER must be used whenever we wish to express

LESSON XXII

101

possession, use, purpose or destination ; to point out the na-
tionality, profession or calling of persons ; the place of pro-
duction of things or the materials of which they are com-
posed ; the simple fact of existence, and the occurrence of
events.

2d. That estar is to be employed in speaking of situa-
tion or position, place, state or condition, in making the pro-
gressive form in ndo (corresponding to the English mg) of
other verbs ; and, lastly, to govern verbs in the infinitive
mode with the aid of a preposition, or past participles with-
out such aid. '] ' ^ , ^ ^

Examples of the uses of ser and estar i

E'teTAR.

Esta casa estd bien situada.
This house is well situated.
Nueva York estd entre el rio del

Norte y el del Este.
New York is between the North and

East rivers.
Estuve en casa hasta que Uego.
I was at home until he arrived.
fil estd escribiendo.
He is writing.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
My friend is about to set out.
Estoy por no hacerlo.
I am inclined not to do it.
Estamos sin comer.
We have not dined (or eaten).
Esta carta estd fechada en Madrid.
This letter is dated from Madrid.
Estoy am ado.
I am loved.

N. B.— As it frequently occurs that, in perfect accord-
ance with the rules of grammar, the same sentence may be
construed with either ser or estar, though conveying en-
tirely different ideas, it is essential to inquire thoroughly into
the respective meaning of these two verbs, in order to avoid
the confusion which must necessarily arise from their misap-

La casaca es de mi hermano.

The coat is my brother's.

La carta es para Margarita.

The letter is for Margaret.

El senor Walker es pintor.

Mr. Walker is a painter.

Este vino es de Espana.

This wine is from Spain.

La mesa es de madera.

The table is of wood.

Has sido prudente en hacerlo asi.

Thou hast been prudent in so doing.

Hoy es la celebracion.

The celebration is to-day.

Son las diez.

It is ten o'clock.

Fue el caso como yo escribi a V.

The case was as I wrote to you.

102

LESSON XXII.

plication. The importance of this remark may be seen from
the following examples :

WITH ESTAE.

Manuel estd bueno.

Emanuel is well.

Juan estd malo.

John is sick.

Pedro estd cansado.

Peter is tired.

Juana estd viva.

Jane is alive.

Alejandro estd callado.

Alexander is silent.

Este nino estd limpio.

This child is clean.

Esta naranja estd agria.

This (particular) orange is sour.

WITH SER.

Manuel ea bueno.
Emanuel is good.
Juan es malo.
John is bad (or wicked).
Pedro es cansado.
Peter is tiresome.
Juana es viva.
Jane is lively. - "
Alejaadn» ea C-ECllddo.
Alexander is taciti^m.
^Este nino»e5 lirppjo. c
driiis child is cleanly.
Esta naranja es agria.
This is a sour orange (i. e. of the
sour species.

What is said in the course of the present lesson relative
to SER and estar, being all that is requisite to enable the
student to determine which of the two is to be used in any
ordinary case, his attention will not be again called to them
until we come to treat of their idiomatic uses.

108. The PRESENT PARTICIPLES are used with auxiliaries
to express an existing state or condition, or a continued ac-
tion. They are usually regular ; there being a few irregu-
lar^ ones, which are as follows : diciendo^ from decir^ to say ;
durmieiido^ from dormir, to sleep : irguiendo^ from erguir^ to
hold upright ; oyendo^ from oiV, to hear ; pidiendo^ from pe-
dir^ to request ; pudiendo^ from poder^ to be able ; riendo^
from reir^ to laugh ; trayendo^ from traer, to bring ; vinien-
do^ from venir, to come ; yendo, from iV, to go ; the com-
pounds of these and of verbs on pages 413, 414.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Que esta haciendo el muchacho ? Esta estudiando su
leccion.

2. I Ha estudiado V. la suya ? La estudie aver.

3. t De quien es V. amado ? Soy amado de mis ninos.

LJEJSSON XXII.

103

4. i Esta V. escribiendo sus ejercicios ? No, senor, estoy escri-
biendo una carta.

5. eEsta Margarita cansada ? Margarita no esta cansada;
pero es cansada.

6. I Por que esta Pedro tan callado ? Porque es callado.

7. e Para quien es esta carta ? Es para V.

8. I En donde esta situada Nueva York ? Esta situada entre
el rio del Norte y el del Este.

9. e Es Y. espanol ? No, senor, soy americano.

10. I Es ese caballero abogado ? No, senor, es medico.

11. I Como esta Alejandro ? Esta bueno.

12. g Es Alejandro buen muchacbo ? Es bueno.

13. I Estuvo Y. ayer en mi casa ? Estuve alii hasta que su
padre de Y. vino.

14. e De que es este tintero ? Es de madera.

15. I Es grande su jardin de Y. ? Es grandisimo ; pero esta
en mal estado.

16. I En que calle esta su casa de Y. ? Esta en la Cuarta
avenida.

17. I Es hermosa la casa de su amigo de Y. ? Es hermosisima.

18. e Es Luisa feliz ? Luisa es muy feliz ; pero no esta con-
ten ta, porque no vino Y. a verla (to see her),

19. I Es Y. enfermizo ? No, seiior ; pero estoy enfermo.

20. g De quien es aquella casa tan alta ? Es de un amigo
mio ; pero quiere venderla porque esta mal situada en esta calle
tan fea.

21. h Cuando parte Y. ? No se, quiero partir hoy, porque
tengo mucho que hacer.

22. I Partio su amigo de Y. ayer ? No, senor, ha partido hoy.

23. I Fue Y. a la iglesia el domingo pasado ? Si, senor, voy a
la iglesia todos los domingos, cuando no estoy enfermo.

24. I Yive su amigo de Y. en el campo ? No, senor, reside en
la ciudad.

25. I Que hace en la ciudad ? Trabaja de abogado.

2Q. e Que hace Y. ? Yo vendo y compro : soy comerciante.

27. g Paso Y. por Paris, cuando fue a Madrid ? Si, seiior, y
por otras muchas ciudades de Francia y Espana.

28. t Yiaja Y. mucho ? He viajado mucho ; pero no viajo
mas,

29. i Yiajo Y. en Mexico ? Si, seiior, estuve alii el ano pasado.
80. I Es bonito pais ? El pais es hermosisimo.

104 LESSON XXlL

EXERCISE.

1. Where is your house situated ? On Eleventh street.

2. Is it very large ? No, sir, it is not as large as my uncle's.

3. Which of the three languages* English, French or Span-
ish, is the richest ? The Spanish is much richer than the other
two.

4. Do you speak Spanish ? No, madam ; but I am learn-
ing it.

5. Do you and your sister take a lesson to-day ? No, our
teacher is not coming (does not come) to-day ; he is sick.

6. What lesson are you at (in). We are at the twenty-
second, one of the most difficult in the grammar.

7. Is Louis very taciturn ? he speaks very little. No, sir, he
is not taciturn ; but he is silent to-day, because he is unwell.

8. Why is Henry so cheerful to-day ? He is cheerful be-
cause he has received letters from his father and mother.

9. Is he a good boy ? He is a very good boy ; he is studying
his Italian lesson.

10. How is your friend to-day ? He is much better than yes-
terday.

11. Where is that wine from which Charles is drinking ? It
is from Spain.

12. Has your father been prudent in selling his horse ? He
has been most imprudent in selling it.

13. Whom do you love ? I love my father and mother, and
I am loved by them.

14. Where is that letter from ? It is {comes) from Paris.

15. Have you {plural) dined to-day ? No, sir, we have not
dined ; our servant is very ill.

16. What do you do every day to pass the time ? Sometimes
I sing and play on the piano, and at others I read the newspapers
and go out to walk {pasear).

17. What does Mr. Emanuel do ? He is a merchant.

18. For whom is that letter that Louisa is writing ? It is for
her cousin {fern.).

19. Is Alexander a tiresome boy ? No, madam, but he went
to walk very early, and he is tired.

20. Was Louis at your house yesterday ? Yes, sir, he was
there until my uncle came.

* Lenguas.

LESSON XXIIL

105

21. How is your uncle to-day ? He is very well ; lie is about
to set out for Paris.

22. Is Henry tired ? No ; but he is very tiresome.

23. Whose book is that ? It is my friend's ; but he wants to
sell it, because it is very badly written.

24. How much does he want for it ? He wants five dollars
and a half.*

25. Is it in French ? No, sir, it is in Spanish.

2^. When do you {plural) leave for Europe ? We leave
very soon.

27. Have you a garden at your house ? Yes, sir, I have a very
fine garden.

28. Is it very large ? It is very large.

29. What is your friend doing in Paris ? He is studjdng law
(for a lawyer).

30. And you, what do you do in Philadelphia ? I work as a
notary.

31. From whom is this letter ? It is from the pianist, and
for you.

LESSON XXIII.

FUTURE.

First Conjugation.

TERMINATIONS.

Stng.

PluraL

1. e.

1. emos.

2. as.

2. eis.

3. a.

3. an.

Hablare.

Hablaras.

Hablara.

I shall speak.
Thou wilt speak.
He will speak.

Hablaremos.

Hablareis.

Hablaran.

We shall speak.
You will speak.
They will speak.

* Medio.

106

LUSSOJ!^ XXIIL

Second Conjugation.

Aprendere. I shall learn.

Aprenderas. Thou wilt learn.

Aprendera. He will learn.

Aprenderemos. We shall learn.

Aprondereis. You will learn.

Aprenderan. They will learn.

Third Conjugation.

Escrihire. I shall write.

Escribiras. Thou wilt write.

Escribira. He will write.

Escribiremos. We shall write.

Escribireis. You will write.

Escribiran. They will write.

Desear.

To desire.

Practicar.

To practise.

Bailar.

To dance.

Principiar.

To commence, to begin.

Acabar.

To finish.

Medio.

~~ Half.

Proximo.

Next.

Entonces.

Then.

Anoche.

Last night.

Antes de anoche.

The night before last.

Mariana.

To-morrow.

Pasado manana.

The day after to-morrow.

La manana.

The morning.

Si ""

~~If.

Gusto. .

Deseo.

Negocios.

Oficio.

Minuto.

Segundo.

Vals.

Idioma.

Lenguaje,

Taste, pleasure.
Desire, mind.
Business, occupa-
tion.
Office.
Minute.
Second.
Waltz.

\ Language.

Noche.

Gracias.

Familia.

Practica.

Teoria.

Hora.

Polca.

Lengua.

Tarde.

Night.

Thanks.

Family.

Practice.

Theory.

Hour.

Polka.

Tongue, language.

Afternoon.

LESSON XXIIL

107

COMPOSITION.

4 Estudiara V. maSana su leccion de

espanol !
Si, seiior, la estudiare maSana por la

ma&ana.
4 A que hora principiara V. ?
Principiare a las tres de la maSana.

SeSorita, 4 quiere V. bailar un vals ?
Gracias, caballero, no se bailar vals.

I Bailara V. una polca ?
Si, senor, con mucho gusto.
Hablo mal el espanol, porque no lo

practico,
V. necesita practicar mucho para

aprender una lengua.
Practicare en Espana, porque ire

alii muy pronto.
4 Que dias toma V. sus lecciones de

piano ?
Las tomo los lunes y los viernes, a

las once de la maSana.

4 A que hora tomara V. las lecciones
de f ranees ?

Las tomare a las diez.

I, Que hora es ?

Es la una.

Son las once y cuarto.

Son las tres menos diez minutos.

MaSana ire al campo, y pasado ma-
Sana tendre el gusto de pasar el
dia con V.

Gracias ; entonces sere muy feliz.

4 Bailaremos en su casa de V. ?

Si, seSor, bailaremos, cantaremos,

tocaremos y practicaremos el es-

paSol toda la noche.
Muy bien, muy bien ; entonces se-

remos mas que felices, seremos f e-

licisimos.

Will you study your Spanish lesson
to-morrow ?

Yes, sir, I shall study it to-morrow
morning.

At what hour will you commence t

I shall commence at three o'clock in
the morning.

Will you (dance a) waltz, Miss f

Thank you, sir, I do not know how
to waltz.

Will you dance a polka I

Yes, sir, with great pleasure.

I speak Spanish badly, because I do
not practise it.

You need to practise a great deal in
order to learn a language.

I shall practise in Spain, because I
shall go there very soon.

On what days do you take your pi-
ano lessons ?

I take them on Mondays and Fri-
days, at eleven o'clock in the
morning.

At what hour will you take your
French lessons !

I shall take them at ten (o'clock).

What o'clock is it ?

It is one (o'clock).

It is a quarter past eleven.

It is ten minutes to three.

I shall go to the country to-morrow,
and shall have the pleasure of
spending the day after to-morrow
with you.

Thank you; then I shall be very
happy.

Shall we dance at your house 1

Yes, sir, we shall dance, sing, play
and practise, Spanish all the even-
ing (the whole night).

Very well, very well ; then we shall
be more than happy; we shall be
most happy.

108

LESSON XXIIL

I En donde paso V. ayer la noche ?

La pase con mis amigos los senores

Martinez y su familia.
^Cuanto tiempo estuvo Y. en su

casa?
Fui a las siete de la noche y sali a

los ouce V media.

Where did you spend the evening

yesterday ?
I spent it with my friends, Mr. and

Mrs. Martinez and (their) family.
How long were you at their house I

I went at seven in the evening and
left (went out) at half -past eleven
o'clock.

EXPLANATION.

109. The Future Tense.— This tense affirms what is yet
to be or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as,
Sere comerciante. I I sliall he a merchant.

Joan estiidiard manana. I John will study to-morrow.

It is also used as a softened imperative, as will be seen
when that mode is introduced.

The future of all conjugations is formed by adding the
one set of terminations to the infinitives ; and it is therefore
very regular. There are a few irregular features, and these
add the regular endings to the stems given below in connec-
tion with the first person. They are as follows :

Future.

Infinitive

Future.

Infinitive.

Cabre,

caber.

to contain.

Querre,

querer.

to wish.

Dire,

decir.

to say.

Sabre,

saber,

to know.

Habre,

haber,

to have.

Saldre,

salir.

to go out.

Hare,

hacer,

to do.

Tendre,

tener.

to have.

Podre,

poder.

to be able.

Valdre,

valer.

to be worth.

Pondre,

poner,

to place, to

put.

Vendre,

venir,

to come.

110. The definite article must be used before numer-
als indicating the hour of the day. It is always feminine,
agreeing with hora, hour. The word o'clock is never trans-
lated into Spanish ; as,

A las tres de la tarde. | Three o'clock in the afternoon.

111. Noche (evening or night) begins at sundown ; so
that evening and night are both noche in Spanish.

112. The conjunction si, when conditional, does not re-
quire a subjunctive in Spanish as it does in English, unless

LESSON XXIU. 109

the latter be followed by should^Si^ will be seen by the proper
place ; in all other cases, si is followed by the present indica-
tive ; as,

Si V. tiene papel, 4 escribird f | If you have paper, will you write!

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Cuando principiara V. a escribir sus ejercicios 'i Prin-
cipiare manana.

2. I A que hora acabara V. ? Acabare a las diez y media.

3. Alejandro, i que quieres ser, abogado 6 escritor ? No ser6
ni abogado ni escritor, sere comerciante.

4. Senorita, i quiere V. bailar una polca ? Gracias, caballero,
no bailare, porque estoy muy cansada.

5. I Bailara V. la proxima ? Si, senor, con mucho gusto.

6. I Practicara V. el piano hoy ? No, senor, hoy no tengo
tiempo ; pero practicare manana por la manana.

7. I Que hara V. manana ? Maiiana por la manana escribire
mis ejercicios y practicare el espaiiol con mi hermano.

8. I Que dias toma V. leccion de piano ? Los lunes y viemes.

9. ^ A que hora tomara V. su leccion manana ? A las once
y cuarto.

10. I Ira V. a mi casa en el campo ? Ire pasado manana y
tendre el gusto de pasar el dia con V.

11. I Bailaremos en su casa de V. ? Si, seiior, bailaremos, can-
taremos y practicaremos el espanol toda la noche.

12. i En donde pasara V. manana la noche ? La pasare con
mis amigos los senores Martinez y su f amilia.

13. i A que hora iran Vds. alia ? Iremos a las siete de la
noche.

14. I Hasta que hora estaran Yds. ? Hasta la una y media.

15. I Estara V. maiiana por la manana en su cuarto ? Estare
hasta las nueve y diez minutos.

16. I Es triste su hermano de V. ? No, senora, no es triste ;
pero esta triste.

17. t Es V. f eliz ? Soy felicisimo ; pero no estoy contento esta
tarde.

18. I Es V. mayor que su hermano ? No, senora, soy el menor
de toda la familia.

19. I Quien es el mayor ? Juan es el mayor.

20. t Sale V. de casa temprano ? Salgo tempranisimo.

110 LESSON XXIIL

21. i A que hora ? Salgo a las ocho y media.

22. i Salio V. ayer tan temprano ? No, senor, ayer sali mas
tarde ; pero hoy he salido temprano.

23. I A que hora saldra V. manana ? Manana saldre a la una
de la tarde.

24. I Para quien escribe V. una carta ? Escribo al abogado,
por el pobre Juan, que lo necesita para un negocio.

25. i Partira V. mafiana para la Habana ? No, seiior, no par-
tire hasta la semana proxima.

2^. h Es este caballo muy fuerte ? Es fortisimo ; pero ese que
esta ahi es mas fuerte y el que esta alii al otro lado es el mas
fuerte.

EXERCISE.

1. When will you commence to study music ? I desire to
commence next month.

2. Do you know how * to dance ? I do not dance very well ;
but I am going to take lessons soon.

3. Do you study in the morning or in the afternoon ? I
study in the morning.

4. At what o'clock do you take your lessons ? At a quarte^f
to three in the afternoon {tarde).

5. Does your teacher come so late ? Yes, he has a great
many pupils this year.

6. Will you dance a waltz, Miss ? Thank you, sir, I danced
so much the night before last that I am tired.

7. Then it will be better to talk. I shall talk with much
pleasure.

8. When will your cousin write his exercise ? He will
write it to-morrow morning.

9. At what time do you receive your newspapers ? I receive
them every day at eight o'clock in the morning.

10. Mr. Louis, will you come and dine at my house ? I shall
be very happy to go with you.

11. How did you spend the evening at your friend's ? Very
well ; his wife (lady) is most amiable.

12. Has not she travelled in Europe ? No, sir ; but they spoke
last night of travelling very soon.

13. Is their family large ? No, they have no children.

14. Does not your friend speak Spanish very well ? Yes, sir,
he sometimes even passes for a Spaniard.

* How is not used in Spanish in such cases.

LESSON XXIV.

Ill

15. Did you practise much with him ? No ; his cousin speaks
French very well, and so we spoke that language all the evening.

16. Where will you spend this evening ? I do not know ; but
the day after to-morrow we shall go to your house.

17. Thank you ! then I shall be more than happy ; I shall be
most happy.

18. How many seconds make a minute ? Sixty.

19. How many minutes make an hour ? Sixty minutes ?

20. And how many hours has a day ? A day has twenty-four
hours, a week seven days, a month four weeks, and a year twelve
months.

21. Peter, what o'clock is it ? It is half -past two.

22. Then I am going to take my lesson : will you come ? No,
thank you ; I wish to read this morning's paper.

23. Until what hour will you be engaged ? I shall finish at
one.

24. Peter! Sir!

25. Has the tailor finished my vest ? Yes, sir, here he is with
the vest and the coat.

26. When will the shoemaker make my boots ? He. will make
them by next Tuesday.

27. Have you any business in Philadelphia ? Yes, sir, I am
writing the history of Louis XVI., for a gentleman of that city.

28. Mr. Henry, are you happy ? Yes, sir, thank you, I am
very happy; but I am not very contented this evening.

29. Why are you not contented ? Because my father has not
written to me this week.

LESSON XXIV.

FUTURE PERFECT.

Habre escritb.

Habras escrito.

Habra escrito.

Habremos escrito.

Habreis escrito.

Habran escrito.

Coser.

Lavar.

Barrer.

Pasearse.

I shall have

Thou wilt have

He will have

We shall have

You will have

They will have

To sew.

To wash.

To sweep.

To walk (take a walk)

written.

written.

112

LEssoir xxir.

Dedal.

Thimble.

Aguja.

Needle.

Hilo.

Thread.

Primavera.

Spring.

Verano.

Summer.

Accion.

Action.

Invierno.

Winter.

Nacion.

Nation.

Otono.

Autumn (Fall).

Afectacion.

Affectation.

Enero.

January.

Navegacion.

Navigation.

Febrero.

February.

Agitacion.

Agitation.

Marzo.

March.

Aprobacion.

Approbation.

Abril.

April.

Aceptacion.

Acceptation.

Mayo.

May.

Atraccion.

Attraction.

Junio.

June.

Conversacion.

Conversation.

Julio.

July.

Direccion.

Direction.

Agosto.

August

Circunspeccion. Circumspection

Septiembre.

September.

Clasificacion.

Classification.

Octubre.

October.

Coleccion.

Collection.

Noviembre.

November.

Combinacion.

Combination.

Diciembre.

December.

Comparacion.

Comparison.

Composicion.

Composition.

Reputacion.

Reputation.

COMPO*

3ITI0N.

Habre escrito mi leccion antes de ir

a casa del profesor.
Habre acabado a las diez.
El abogado acaba de hablar.
Yo acabo de estudiar mi leccion.
La lavandera habra acabado de la-

var a las euatro.
I A cuantos estamos ?
Estamos a seis.
4 Que dia del mes es hoy ?
Es el primero.
4 Que f echa tiene esa carta 1
El primero de Enero de mil ocho-

cientos sesenta y seis.
j. En que afio f ue V. a Mexico 1
Fui en Septiembre de mil ochocien-

tos cincuenta y dos.
I Ira Y. este verano a Europa ?
No, senor, ire en el invierno.
4 Paseara V. mucho esta primavera ?
No, senor, trabajare mucho.

I shall have written my lessons be^
fore going to the professor's.

I shall have finished at ten o clock.

The lawyer has just spoken.

I have just studied my lesson.

The washerwoman will have finished
washing at four o'clock

What day of the month is it I

It is the sixth.

What day of the month is to-day f

It is the first.

What is the date of that letter f

January 1st, 1866.

In what year did you go to Mexico!
I went in September, 1852.

Will you go to Europe this summer f
No, sir, I shall go in the winter.
Will you walk much this spring f
No, sir, I shall work a great deal.

LUSSON XXIV. 11^

EXPLANATION.
113. The FUTUKE PERFECT affirms something future that
will have taken place before or at the time of some other
future action or event or state expressed in the sentence ;
and is composed of the future of the verb haber, to have, and
the past participle of another verb ; as,

Habre escrito mi ejercicio antes de

ir a casa del profesor.
Habre acabado a las diez.

I shall have written my exercise be-
fore going to the professor's.
I shall have finished at ten o'clock.

114. AcABAR DE is employed before an infinitive in the
sense of to have just, and the infinitive is translated in Eng-^
lish as a past participle ; as,

Acaba de hablar. I He has just spoken.

Acabo de estudiar. I • I have just studied.

115. In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we
shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which
the learner will be enabled to convert several thousand Eng-
lish words into Spanish; and, although we have proposed
not to introduce many new words or elements at one time,
these observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater
number of words with little or no difficulty at all, from the
striking resemblance that those words bear to the English
ones.

The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are ren-
dered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c ; as, appro-
bation, aprobacion. Those ending in sion do not undergo
any orthographical change ; as, provision, provision ; those
ending in ssion, drop one s to form the Spanish word ; as,
possession, posesion. Those which end in ction, change the
t to c, thus leaving double c; as diction, diccion. It is to be
observed that the only consonants that can be doubled in
Spanish are c, n and r. All nouns of the above termina-
tion are feminine, and their last syllable must have a written
accent.

116. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by
the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first

10

114

LESSON XXIV,

What day of the month is it f

day ; and there are several forms of asking the day of the
month ; e, y.,

^ Que dia del mes tenemos f ^
^ Que dia es hoy ? /

I A cuantos estamos del mes ? -

There is no preference between these ; but the answer
must be made in the same form as the question ; as,

What day of the month is it ?

It is the sixth.

What day of the month is it f

It is the second.

What day of the month is to-day I

It is the first.

^ Que dia tenemos f

Tenemos el seis.

^ A cuantos estamos ?

Estamos a dos.

^Que dia del mes es hoy?

Es el primero.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Habra V. acabado de escribir su leccion a las diez y me-
dia ? No se ; pero la habre acabado antes de ir a casa del pro-
fesor.

2. i Ha hablado aquel abogado ? Si, senor, acaba de hablar
este.

3. I Ha hablado bien ? Muy bien, pero con afectacion.

4. I Hara V. una buena composicion para la leccion proxima ?
Si, senor, si tengo tiempo, la hare.

5. I Lava bien su lavandera de V. ? Lava muy bien.

6. i Adonde en via V. sus ninos ? Los envio a pasearse con
la criada.

7. I Adonde ? A la plaza de Madison.

8. I Esta cerca de su casa de Y. ? Esta muy cerca.

9. I Barrio el criado ayer mi cuarto ? No, senor, no lo barrio
ayer pero lo ha barrido hoy.

10. i Lo barrera manana ? Lo habra barrido antes de las
nueve.

11. I Muchacho, l esta el sastre en la sastreria ? No, senor,
acaba de salir.

12. I A que hora principiaron Vds. a bailar ? Principiamos a
las diez de la noche.

13. I Desea V. practicar el ingles ? Si, senor, si tengo tiempo
principiare pasado manana.

14. i Donde esta su amigo ? Esta viajando por Francia.

LESSON XXIV.

115

15. I Ama su hermana de V. mucho a sus hijos ? Si, senor, los
ama muchisimo.

16. e Saldra V. muy pronto para Europa ? Quiero salir ma-
nana.

17. g Sabe V. bailar el vals ? No, senor, pero se bailar el rigo-
don y la polca.

18. i De donde vienen Vds. ? Venimos de Francia, y vamos
para Filadelfia.

19. e Quiere V. salir a pasear ? Muy bien, iremos al Parque
Central.

20. e Quien lavo estos panuelos ? Estan muy mal lavados.
Su lavandera de V. los lavo.

21. I Donde paso Y. el verano ? Lo pase en el campo. i Y el
invierno ? En la ciudad.

22. I Cuales son los meses mas alegres del ano ? Los de la
primavera.

23. i Sabe V. la direecion de la casa de su hermano de V. ? Si,
senor, calle Catorce, niimero ciento veinte y cinco.

24. e A que hora comen Vds. ? Comemos a las tres de la
tarde.

25. I (^ue hora tiene V. ? Tengo las dos y veinte.

26. t A que hora salieron sus hermanas. para el parque ? Sa-
lieron a las seis y media de la maiiana.

27. g Y a que hora volvieron ? A las once menos cuarto.

28. i Buenos dias ! — Buenos dias.—g Esta V. bueno ? Muy
bueno, gracias. ^ Y su familia de Y. ? Muy buena, gracias.

29. e Baila Y. la polca ? No, senor, estoy principiando a
aprenderla.

EXERCISE.

1. When will your uncle have finished his letter ? He will
have finished it at eight o'clock.

2. When will you have your letter written ? I shall have it
written before going to the professor's.

3. When will the notary make the conveyance (writing) ?
He has just made it.

4. Will your servant have swept my room before the lesson
hour to-morrow ? Yes, sir, she will have swept it at six o'clock.

5. What day of the month is it ? It is the thirteenth.

6. Does your washerwoman come to wash in your house ?
She does not, but she washes very well.

116 LESSON XXIV.

7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ?
They take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month.

8. Which are the best months for walking ? The three
months of spring, and the three of autumn.

9. Where are you coming (do you come) from ? I am come
from walking.

10. Will you give * me a needle and thread and a thimble to
sew ? Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and
thimble.

11. In what year did your sister Margaret go to England ?
She went in June, 1865.

12. What is the date of that letter ? Madrid, 7th July, 1866.

13. Will you go to Europe this summer ? No, madam, I shall
not go before next spring.

14. Is December a good month for travelling ? No, it is one
of the worst in the year.

15. How did you {plural) spend the day yesterday ? We
walked in Central Park.

16. Did you walk the whole day ? No, we walked until twelve
o'clock, and then we read and played on the piano.

17. Did not you pass the afternoon at Mr. Martinez's ? No,
we did not go out all (in all) the evening, Margaret was a little
sick.

18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they
are January, March, May, July, August, October, and Decem-
ber.

19. And which are the shortest ? A pril, June, September, and
November.

20. But what do you do with February ? February is the
shortest of all ; it has but twenty-eight days.

21. Will you walk much this spring ? No, miss, I shall work
a great deal.

22. When will the tailor sew my vest ? He will sew it to-
morrow evening.

23. Has not the lawyer spoken ? He has just spoken.

24. Until what hour did he speak ? Until half -past one.

25. Did he speak in Spanish ? No, he spoke in French to-day ;
but to-morrow he will speak in Spanish.

2Q. Do you not wish to practise Italian ? Yes, sir, and I shall
practise the day after to-morrow, if I have time.

LESSON XXY,

117

27. If your teacher comes to-day, will you take a lesson ? I
shall take it if he comes.

28. Does he pronounce well ? He pronounces very well, but
with some aflPectation.

29. How many Spanish words do you know that end in cidn ?
I know very many.

30. Which are they ? Conversation, approbation, agitation,
complication, classification, intention, desertion, circumspection,,
nation, navigation, and very many others.

Conocer,

Conozco.

Conoces.

Conoce.

Conocemos.

Conoceis.

Conocen.

Conoci.

Conociste.

Conocio.

Conocimos.

Conocisteis.

Conocieron.

Conocere.

Conoceras.

Conocera.

Conoceremos.

Conocereis.

Conoceran.

He conocido.

LESSON XXY.

1 To know, to be acquainted with.

PRESENT INDICATIVE.

I know.
Thou knowest.
He knows.
We know.
You know.
They know.

PRETERIT.

FUTURE.

PERFECT.

I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.
We knew.
You knew.
They knew.

I shall know.
Thou wilt know.
He will know.
We shall know.
You will know.
They will know.

I have known.

118 LESSON XXV.

FUTURE

PERFECT.

Habre conocido.

I shall have known.

Gozar.

To enjoy.

Prometer.

To promise.

Una vez.

Once.

Dos veces, &c.

Twice.

Alto.

High, loud.

Bajo.

Low.

Siempre.

Always.

Nunca.

Never.

Jamas.

Never.

Ya.

Already, yet (interrogatively)

Ya (with a negative).

No longer.

Aiin. Aun.

Still, yet. Even.

Todavia.

Still, yet, even.

A menudo.

Often.

Demasiado.

Too, too much.

Bastante.

Enough, pretty.

Frio. Cold (the).

Vergiienza. Shame.

Calor. Heat.

Razon. Eeason.

Miedo. Fear.

Sed. Thirst.

Sueno. Sleep.

Lastima. Pity.

Dolor. Pain.

Salud. Health.

Valor. Courage, worth, value.

Moda. Fashion.

Maestro. Master, teacher.

Maestra. Mistress (school).

Un catarro. A cold.

Hambre. Hunger.

COMPO.

3ITI0N.

^ Conoce V. a ese hombre I

No lo conozco ; pero se quien lo co-
noce.

I Por que no aprende V. sus leccio-
nes?

Conozco que he hecho mal en no
aprendsrlas ; pero prometo saber-
las para manana.

4 Sabe V. f ranees ?

No, senor, pero voy a aprenderlo;
I conoce V. un buen maestro ?

Do you know that man!

I do not know him ; but I know who

knows him.
Why do you not learn your lessons I

I know that I have done wrong in
not learning them ; but I promise
to know them for to-morrow.

Do you know French ?

No, sir, but I am going to learn it ;
do you know a good teacher ?

LMiSISON XXV.

119

^Estudia V. aiin (todavia) el espanol ?

Ya no lo estudio.

i, Sabe Y. hablarlo ya ?

Todavia no.

I Ha principiado ya su hermano de

Y. sus lecciones ?
Ya ha principiado ; pero no las

aprendera jamas, porque no es-

tudia bastante.
^Cuantas veces ha estado Y. este

mes en el teatro ?
He estado una vez ; pero el mes pa-

sado estuve tres veces.
I Tiene Y. miedo de su maestro ?
No tengo miedo de el; pero tengo

vergiienza de el.
I De quien tiene Y. lastima ?
Tengo lastima de ese pobre hombre.
^ Tiene Y. calor 6 frio ?
No tengo ni calor ni frio ; tengo

hambre y sed.
I Tiene razon el abogado ?
El abogado no tiene razon.
I Tiene el razon alguna vez ?
Tiene razon algunas veces, pero no

siempre.
^ Hara Y. eso otra vez ?

No lo hare jamas (nunca).

^ Amara Y. a su amigo %

Lo amare por siempre jamas.

^ Ha leido Y. jamas ese libro ?

Nunca jamas lo hare.

I Tiene su madre de Y. buena salud?

Si, senor, goza de muy buena salud.

I Tiene Y. hambre 6 sed ?

No tengo ni hambre ni sed, tengo

Do you still study Spanish!

I study it no longer.

Do you know how to speak it al-
ready I

Not yet.

Has your brother commenced his
lessons yet ?

He has (already) commenced; but
he will never learn them, for he
does not study enough.

How many times have you been in
the theatre this month ?

I have been once ; but last month I
was there three times.

Are you afraid of your master ?

I am not afraid of him ; but I am
ashamed before him.

On whom do you take pity?

I take pity on that poor man.

Are you warm or cold ?

I am neither warm nor cold ; I am
hungry and thirsty.

Is the lawyer right ?

The lawyer is not right.

Is he right sometimes ?

He is right sometimes, but not al-
ways.

Will you do that again (another
time)?

I will never do it.

Will you love your friend ?

I shall love him always (for ever).

Have you ever read that book ?

I shall never do it.

Is your mother in good health (has
your mother good health) ?

Yes, sir, she enjoys very good health.

Are you hungry or thirsty %

I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I
am sleepy.

EXPLANATION.
117. Saber, to know, and conocer, to be acquainted with.
—It must be observed, in order not to confound these two

120 LESSON XXV.

yerbs, that saher is employed to signify the act of knowing,
heing informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of
something ; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of
"being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distin-
guish persons or things ; as,

i Sahe V. quien conoce a este horn- 1 Do you know who knows that man I
bre! I

118. Auiq", YA, Tod A VIA. — The adverb aun indicates that
the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be-
fore ; quite the reverse with the adverb ya^ which always sig-
nifies discontinuance^ completion of a former state (expressed
or understood) ; e, g,^

I Escribe Y. aun f I Do you write yet ?

No escribo ya. 1 1 do not write any longer.

Todavia^ yet, still, is synonymous with aun ; as,
Esta trabajando todavia (or aun). \ He is still working.

Once, twice, &c., are rendered in Spanish by una vez, dos
veces^ &c.

Miedo^ valor., vergiienza., Idstima^ tiempo, take the prepo-
sition de after them ; as,

Tengo miedo de salir. 1 1 am afraid to go out.

Tengo verguehza de ese hombre. 1 1 am ashamed of that man.

119. When in English the verb to he precedes the adjec-
tives hungry., thirsty., afraid., ashamed., right., ivrong., ivarm.,
cold., sleepy., it is translated by the Spanish verb tener and the
corresponding substantive ; as.

Are you afraid I
Are you thirsty I
Are you warm ?

I Tiene V. miedo ?
I Tiene V. sed ?
I, Tiene V. calor f
i Tiene V. friof

Are you cold f

120. Jamas and kui^ca may be used indiscriminately, or
one for the other ; as,

Jamas (or nunca) lo he conocido. 1 1 have never been acquainted with

him.

LESSOJSr XXV, ' . 121

Sometimes they are used together, to give more energy to
the expression ; as,
Nunca jamas lo hare. | Never, no never, shall I do so.

But jamas has the peculiarity of being used after the
words jt?or siempre 3>Tid para siempre^ for ever ; where, instead
of being a negative, it affirms, meaning eternally ; as,
Le amare por siempre Jamas. 1 1 will love him forever.

Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning ever ;
as,
i Ha leido V. Jamas ese libro ? I Have you ever read that book f

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Donde conocio V. a su amigo ? Lo conoci en Paris el in-
vierno pasado.

2. I Sabe V. quien conoce a ese hombre ? Mi padre lo conoce
muy bien.

3. e Cuando eonocere a su hermano de V. ? En el otoiio lo
conocera V.

4. I Ha conocido V. en Londres a ese caballero ? Si, seiior,
lo conoci alii el aiio pasado.

5. I Como esta su hi jo de V. ? Malo ; no goza de buena salud.

6. I Bailo Y. mucho en el baile de anoche ? Si, senor, mu-
chisimo.

7. I Quien es ese caballero ? Es uri escritor de gran repu-
tacion.

8. I Tienen mucha aceptacion sus obras ? Tienen muchisima.

9. e Sabe Y. lo que ban prometido sus amigas de Y. ? No lo
se. — Han prometido estudiar sus lecciones.

10. I Yendra Y. mafiana a comer con nosotros ? No, senor, he
prometido comer con mis amigos los alemanes.

11. I Habla ya espanol su primo de Y. ? No lo habla aiin, y
no lo hablara jamas (nunca), porque no estudia bastante.

12. e Barrio Y. mi cuarto ? No, senor, pero prometo barrerlo
mafiana temprano.

13. i Cuantas veces prometio Y. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamas
lo prometi.

14. I No desea Y. ir ya a su pais ? Lo deseo muchisimo.

15. I Sale Y. ya a pasear todos los dias ? No salgo sino algu-
nas veces.

122 LESSON XXV.

16. g Llevo Y. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavia no la he
llevado.

17. e No ha estado V. jamas en Paris ? No, senor, jamas he
estado.

18. e No ha leido V. jamas la historia de los Estados Unidos ?
Si, la he leido una vez.

19. e Habla bien el abogado ? Habla bien, pero muy bajo.

20. I Comprende V. ya el espanol ? Si hablan alto, y despacio,
si, seiior.

21. e Tiene V. bastante que hacer ? Tengo demasiado.

22. I Cuantos anos tiene V. ? Tengo veinte y uno.

23. I Cuando vio V. por ultima vez a su familia ? El dia seis
de Septiembre del ano de mil ochocientos eincuenta y cinco.

24. I Cuando conocio V. al pianista ? Lo conoci ayer por pri-
mera vez.

25. I Han salido sus hermanas para el campo ? Todavia no,
pero saldran muy pronto.

26. I Que hace su padre de Yds. ? Esta gozando del buen
tiempo en el campo.

27. I Que tiene su nino de Y. ? Tiene frio y sueno.

28. I Tienen ellos hambre ? No, senor, tienen sed.

29. I Tiene Y. valor para hacerlo ? Si, senor, pero tengo ver-
giienza.

30. I No tiene Y. lastima de esa mujer ? Si, senor, tengo las-
tima de ella, porque no tiene buen a salud.

31. I Tiene sueno su madre de Y. ? No, senor, pero esta muy
cansada.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you know that man ? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my
uncle.

2. Are you still writing ? No, I am no longer writing.

3. Has Charles come from the country yet ? No, he has not
come yet.

4. Have you (plural) ever read the History of Civilization
by Guizot ? No, but we shall read it next spring.

5. Are not you ashamed of not having read the History of
the United States ? I am not ashamed, because I am too young
to read history.

6. When will you commence to read it ? I shall commence
next year.

7. Yery well ; it is a useful study {estudio).

LESSON XXV. 123

8. Does your aunt enjoy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you,
she enjoys very good health.

9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out
a minute, because I am very warm in this room.

10. Is it ten o'clock yet ? No, it is but a quarter past eight.

11. Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last
night at the concert ? I do not know him.

12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your
house, who is he ? He is a Spanish writer who enjoys a great
reputation.

13. Has he written many works ? He has already written
many books, and he is going to write a history of Spain.

14. Do you know Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read
them all.

15. Are not they much esteemed in Europe (have they not
much estimation) ? Yes, very much.

16. When did your brother become acquainted with his (el)
Spanish friend ? Last year, in London.

17. Are you sleepy, young ladies ? Yes, we are very tired,
thirsty and sleepy (tener sed y sueno).

18. Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never
take wine.

19. Does your mother know Emanuel's address (direction)?
Yes, here it is in this letter.

20. Will you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanuel Mar-
tinez, Esq., 113 Broadway.* A thousand thanks.

21. Did your cousin's (fern.) friends commence their lessons
the other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased
(content) with them.

22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know.

23. Does not he speak as low as his brother loud ? He speaks
low from (by) affectation.

24. Which of your servants (fern.) sews the best ? None of

them sews. . , i o

25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language ?

Three regular (regular) conjugations.

26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia ? I have never been
there yet ; but I shall go next year. ^

* The nearest approach which Spanish offers to the title Esquire is
Seftor Don, before the Christian and surname ; as, Seftor Don Juan Gm^
teras, John Guiteras, Esq.

124

LESSON XX VL

27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No,
but he promised to write it the day after to-raorrow.

28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too
much to do.

29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters ? Yes, I
shall love them forever.

30. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has
nothing to do.

31. Have you money enough to buy a house ? Yes, sir, I have
enough.

LESSON XXVI.

Dar.

Doy, das, da.
Damos, dais, dan.

Di, diste, dio.
Dimos, disteis, dieron.

I To give.

PRESENT INDICATIVE.

I give, thou givest, he gives.
We give, you give, they give.

PRETERIT.

I gave, thou gavest, he gave.
We gave, you gave, they gave.

Dare, daras, dara.
Daremos, dareis, daran.

He dado, has dado, &c.

FUTURE.

I shall give, thou wilt give, he

will give.
We shall give, you will give,

they will give.

PERFECT.

I have given, thou hast given,
&c.

Habre dado, &c.

Ganar.

Sing. Nom. Yo.
1st Obj. Me.
M Obj. A mi.

FUTURE PERFECT.

I I shall have given, &;c.

I To gain, earn, win.
I.
Me, or to me.

LESSOJSr XXVI.

125

Plur. Nom. Nosotros.

1st Ohj. Nos.

2d Ohj. A nosotros.

Sing, Nom. Tii.

1st Ohj. Te.

2d Ohj. A ti.

Plur. Nom. Vosotros.

1st Ohj. Os.

2d Ohj. A vosotros.

Sing. Nom. El.

1st Ohj. Le, lo.

2d Ohj. A el.

PZwr. Nom. Ellos.

isf 06/. Los, les.

2d Ohj. A ellos.

Sing. Nom. Ella.

is/^ 06/. La, le.

2d Ohj. A ella.

Plur. Nom. Ellas.

is^ Ohj. Las, les.

:^c? 06/. A ellas.
Sing, and Plur.

1st Ohj. Se.

2d Ohj. A si.
Neuter Form.

Nom. Ello.

isf 06/. Lo.

:^d: Ohj. A ello.

We.

Us, or to us.

Thou.

Thee, or to thee.

Ye, you.

Ye, you, or to you.

He.

Him, or to him.

They.

Them, to them.

She.

Her, to her.

They.

Them, to them.

' Himself, herself, itself, them-
selves ; or to himself, to her-
^ self, to itself, to themselves.

It.
It.
To it.

COMPOSITION.

I Conoce V. a aquellas seiXoras % De-

seo conocerlas.
Conociendolas las amara V.

i Me promete V. llevarme a su casa?

Doy a V. mi palabra.
i Que le dio a V. mi primo I
Quiso darme unas flores ; pero yo no
quise recibirlas.

Do you know those ladies! I desire

to know them.
On knowing them you will love

them.
Do you promise me to take me to

their house ?
I will give you my word.
What did my cousin give you I
He wanted to give me some flowers;

but I would not receive them.

126

LESSON XXVI.

I Quieres venir conmigo al teatro 1

No ire contigo, porque mi padre

quiere llevarme consigo.
J Son estas flores para ti ?
No son para mi ; son para V.
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos hablo en el teatro.
!6l me amara con el tiempo.
Nosotros le hablamos en el concierto.
Yo le escribi una carta.
Ella les dio un libro.

Wilt thou come with me to the the-
atre?

I will not go with thee, because my
father wants to take ine with him.

Are these flowers for thee ?

They are not for me, they are for you.

I want thee.

She spoke to us in the theatre.

He will love me in time.

We spoke to him at the concert.

I wrote him a letter.

She gave them a book.

EXPLANATION.
121. Subject or Nomii^atiye. — To what has already been
said, in Lesson X, relative to pronouns as subjects or nomina-
tive cases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may
at all times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the
imperative mode, or be used interrogatively ; examples :

Yo estudio.
Tu escribes.
Vengan ellos,
I Lee ella f

I study.
Thou writest.
Let them come.
Does she read.

122. Peesonal Pronouns. — In Spanish there is a pecul-
iarity to be observed among the personal pronouns : that is,
that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never
be used with a preposition, and the other never without one.

123. The Objective Case, when not preceded by a prepo-
sition, is affixed to infinitives, imperatives, and present parti-
ciples; as.

AmarZa.
AmemosZo.
AmandoZo5.
HabiendoZa amado.
CompraZes algo.
HabiendoZos hallado.

To love her.
Let us love him.
Loving them.
Having loved her.
Buy them something.
Having found them.

124. In the imperative mode, and in the subjunctive used
hortatively, the verb drops the final letter in the first and
second persons plural, when followed by nos or os ; as,
Amdmonos instead of amdmosnos, I We loved each other.
Amdos instead of amados. Love each other.

LESSON XXVI. 127

In the first case, this is for the sake of euphony ; and in
the second the d is dropped, in order that the imperative may
not be confounded with the past participle. Nevertheless,
we say idos^ go, and not ios ; but this is the only exception
to the rule.

125. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow
the verb, even when the verb is in the indicative mode ; as,

Llevome al teatro. I He took me to the theatre.

126. When one verb governs another in the infinitive
mode, the objective case referring to the second verb may be
placed either before the governing verb, or after the governed
one; as, i||f?

Quiero llevarlo, or lo quiero Uevar. | I wish to take him.

127. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the
seco7id objective case ; as.

Para mi. For me.

Sin H. Without thee.

Hacia ellos. Toward them.

128. Ml, Ti, SI, when preceded by con, take go after them,

and are joined to the preposition ; as.

With me.

With thee.

With him, her, them, it.

Conmigo.

Contigo.

Coiisigo.

129. Ektre is used with the nominative case of the first
person singular, in this expression,

Untre tii y yo. I Between thee and me ;

but in every other instance it governs the second objective
case y as,

JEntre si. I Between themselves.

Entre nosotros. I Between us.

130. The second objective case is always used after com-
paratives; as,

Te quiero mas que ail | I love thee better than him.

128 LESSON XXVI.

131. When in English the objective case of the first or
second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition
to^ expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as,

Yo te necesito. I want thee.

Ella nos hablo. She spoke to us.

El me amara. He will love me.

132. In Lesson X. we explain the objective case of the
third person when it is the object of the English verb ; but
if the third person in English be governed by the preposition
to^ expressed or understood, we render it by le^ les, for both
genders; as,

Nosotros le hablamos.
Yo le escribi.
Ella les dio.

We spoke to him.
I wrote to her.
She gave them.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. e Que me dara V. ? Le dare a V. las gracias.

2. e Que les dio V. a sus ninos ? Les di veinte centavos.

3. I Me daras algo por mi trabajo ? Algo te dare si lo haces
bien y si no, nada.

4. I Que cosa os dieron en casa de tu primo ? Nos dieron
chocolate.

5. I Que le has prometido a tu prima ? Bailar hoy con . ella.

6. e Como seremos mas felices ? Amandonos los unos a los
otros.

7. I Cuando vendra el con nosotros ? Vendra manana tem-
prano.

8. I Cuando saldra V. conmigo a paseo ? Tendre ese gusto
pasado maiiana.

9. I Quien ira conmigo al teatro esta noche ? Yoire contigo.

10. I Donde hablaste a mis amigos ? Les hable en el Parque
Central.

11. e Les leyo V. mi carta ? No, les lei la de su hermana de V.

12. e Me envio V. los libros ? No, senor, los envie a su her-
mano de V.

13. I Como supo Y. de sus amigos ? Escribiendoles.

14. I Como conocio V. a su amiga ? Bailando con ella en casa
de su hermano.

15. e Que le prometio V. a su prima ? Le prometi llevarla a
la opera.

LUSSON XXVI. ;^29

16. ^ Nos hablaron ellos alguna vez ? Nos hablaron una 6
dos veces en el paseo.

17. e Por que no les hablo V. ? Porque no los conozco bien.

18. 6 Que le ban escrito a V. sus amigos ? Que vendran a ha-
blarnos.

19. e Quieres salir conmigo a paseo ? Si, saldre contigo.

20. I Cuando iremos a casa de tus amigos ? Iremos boy, por-
que ellos tendran mucho gusto en conocerte.

21. I Me pasara V. el pan ? Con mucho gusto.— Gracias.

22. I Que le prometiste a tu prima ? Le prometi ir a su casa
manana y llevarle un panuelo de seda.

23. i Cuando le bablo V. ? Le hable anocbe en casa de su
madre.

24. I Quiere V. venir a pasear ? Mejor sera estarnos aqui.

25. ^ A que vienen Yds. ? Veniraos a hablarle a V.

26. e Cuando iremos al campo con nuestros amigos ? Iremos
manana.

27. I Como les gano a Vds. la lavandera tanto dinero ? Lavan-
donos los vestidos y trabajando mucbo.

28. I Cuantas veces a la semana babla V. con sus amigos ?
Nos bablamos todos los dias.

29. I Vendra boy su primo de V. a comer con nosotras ? Si,
porque quiere conocerlas a Vds.

30. i Le dio V. los buenos dias a su prima ? Le di los buenos
dias ayer en la plaza y le bable de V.

31. Le doy a Y. las gracias. i Tiene buena salud abora ? Si,
seiiora, esta muy buena.

32. I Le dio a V. los periodicos ? No, senora, pero prometio
mandarlos manana.

EXERCISE.

1. Wbat was * that you gave to your friend last night at the
theatre ? I gave him the second volume of Mr. Romanos's new
work.

2. Why do not you give him the first volume ? I have al-
ready given it to my cousin.

3. Did not you promise last week to give me those two vol-
umes ? Yes ; and you shall have them the day after to-morrow.

4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer ?
I will go if you set out on the first of July^ ^^^^

*See the conjugation of the verb Ser, at the end of the book.
11

130

LESSON XXVI.

5. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this after-
noon ? This evening we have to go to the concert.

6. When will you go out with us ? I do not know; but I*
think (that) to-morrow (creo que manana).

7. Have you heard (sabido) from your father this week?
No ; but we heard from our brother John last week.

8. How often has he written to you from Boston ? We have
received seven or eight letters from him.

9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York ?
Which one ? I do not know any singer.

10. Do not you know the singer who spent last week at your
uncle's in the country ? Yes ; but it was in Philadelphia that he
sang, not in New York.

11. Are you cold ? No, sir ; but I am hungry and thirsty.

12. W^hen will you take Emanuel to see your children ? I
shall take him to-morrow.— They will be pleased to make his ac-
quaintance.

13. How many languages does that gentleman speak ? He
speaks only his own ; but his cousin speaks five.

14. Which are they ? He speaks French, German, Spanish,
English, and Italian.

15. How did he learn so many languages ? By studying the
grammar of each one of them {cada una de ellas), reading the
works of the best writers, and practising with the natives (natu-
ral).

16. Does he write all those languages as well as he speaks
them ? He writes them better than he speaks them.

17. Did not I see you {plural) speaking to the notary yester-
day in the park ? No, it was the day before yesterday.

18. What has he done in that afPair (negocio) of your
brother's ? He has done nothing yet ; and as he has to leave
town {la ciudad) this afternoon, he wiU do nothing all this
week.

19. Who is the young lady who danced so well last night at
your house ? Do not you know her ? she is my cousin.

20. When did you see our friend Mr. Perez ? I saw him the
other day on Twenty-sixth street, and we talked for more than
two hours about {de) theatres and concerts.

21. I saw him the night before last ; but we did not talk about
theatres and concerts. In whose house did you see him ? At
Mr. De la Rosa's.

LESSON XXVII. 131

22. At what o'clock did you go there ? I went at a quarter to
eight, and left at half -past ten.

23. Did you see many Mexicans there ? I only saw one : that
Mexican lawyer who has just written a history of his country.

24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next
week.

25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ?
Yes, and he has heard {saber) since that he set out last week foi*
France.

2Q. Has your sister read the books yet which she received
from Louisa last week ? Yes ; and she wishes to read them again
(otra vez) .

27. I shall see her this evening ; and if you wish (it) I shall
take them to her (se los).

28. Thank you. Have you much to do now ? No, I never
have much to do in summer.

29. Is Peter tired ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I
know.

LESSON XXVII.
Decir, I To say, to tell.

PRESENT INDICATIVE.

Digo, dices, dice, decimos, I I say, or tell, &;c.
decis, dicen. J

PRETERIT.

Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, I I said, or told, &;c.
dijisteis, dijeron. |

FUTURE.

Dire, diras, dira, diremos, I I shall or will say, or tell, &c.
direis, diran. I

PERFECT.

He dicho, has dicho, &c. I I have said, or told, &;c.

FUTURE PERFECT.

Habre dicho, &c. 1 I shall or will have said, or

I told, &c.

132

LESSON XXVII.

Dispensar. )

To excuse.

Excusar. )

Perdonar.

To pardon.

Creer.

To believe, to think.

Ofender.

To ofPend.

Llamar.

To call, to knock.

Ensenar.

To teach, to show.

Ahora.

Now.

Mismo {adverb).

Just, very.

Mismo.

Same, self.

Necesario.

Necessary.

Precise.

Precise, needful.

Regular.

Regular, middling.

Ramillete. Bouquet.

Parte. Part.

Parte. Despatch.

Falta. Fault, mistake.

Estudio. Study.

Esperanza. Hope.

Humor. Humor, disposition.

Puerta. Door.

Sujeto. ■ A person, subject.

Noticia. News.

Asunto. Subject, business.

matter.

.

COMPO

3ITI0N.

Le compr6 un ramillete, y se lo

He bought her a bouquet, and sent

mando.

it to her.

Les escribire tres cartas, y se las

I shall write them three letters, and

mandare.

send them to them.

Ella 86 lo ha prometido.

She has promised it to her.

J Que esta V. haciendo con ese librof

What are you doing with that book!

Estoy ensefiandoseZo a Manuel.

I am showing it to Emanuel.

i Le leiste la carta t

Did you read the letter to him ?

Ya 86 la lei.

I did. (I read it to him already.)

Ella me lo dijo.

She told it to me.

Yo 86 lo di.

I gave it to him.

Mi madre me ama a mi.

My mother loves me.

Tu amigo te busca a ti.

Thy friend looks for thee.

Yo les di las noticias d ellos.

I told them the news.

Yo se las dare a V.

I will tell them to you.

A ti te amo, or te amo a ti.

I love thee.

i Que le ha dicho a V. su hermano 1

What has your brother told yout

No me ha dicho nada.

He has told me nothing.

LESSON XXV I I.

133

^ Le dije yo eso a V. 9

V. no me lo dijo.

^ Se lo ha dicho el a V. f

Me lo ha dicho.

^ Quiere V. decir eso a sus amigos ?

Quiero decirseZo a ellos.

I Quien llama a la puerta ?

Soy yo mismo.

I Tiene buen humor su amigo de VJ

Si, senor, tiene buen humor cuando

le van bien los negocios.
^Gana ese sujeto mucho en ese ne-

gocio ?
fil no gana para si mismo; pero

gana para otros.
Tengo esperanza de que me per-

donara.

Did I tell you that?

You did not tell it to me.

Has he told it to you ?

He has told it to me.

Will you tell your friends that f

I will tell it to them.

Who knocks at the door ?

It is I (myself).

Has your friend a good disposition?

Yes, sir, he is good humored when

business goes well with him.
Does that man make (or earn) much

in that business %
He does not make for himself ; but

he makes for others.
I have hopes he will pardon me.

EXPLANATION.

133. Objective Pronouns, continibed. — When two pro-
nouns of the third person, one as direct object and the other
as indirect, come together in the same sentence, the indirect
is translated by se ; as.

Le compro un ramillete, y se lo

mando.
Les escribire tres cartas, y se las

mandare.
Mi criado se lo dara.

He bought her a bouquet, and sent

it to her.
I shall write them three letters, and

send them to them.
My servant will give it to him.

This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of
the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be (/e, la or les)^
into se. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be-
fore the verb ; as,

Ella se lo ha prometido (instead of She has promised it to her.

ella le lo),

Prometiendoselo (instead of prome- Promising it to him.

tiendolelo).

^ Le leiste la carta ? Did you read the letter to him ?

Ya se la lei, instead of ya le la lei. I read it to him (already).

134. When two pronouns of the third person are the ob-

134 LESSON XXYIL

jects of a verb, and one of them is direct and the other indi^
rect, the indirect stands first in order of position ; as,
Ella me lo dijo. I She told it to me.

Yo se lo di. 1 1 gave it to him.

135. But if the object of the verb be the reflexive pro-
noun, it must be placed first ; as,

Luego 86 me excuso. I He excused himself immediately to

I me.

136. The use of a double objective case, one either be-
fore the verb or attached to the end of it, and the other after
it and preceded by the preposition «, is very common in
Spanish, and is used for the sake of clearness or emphasis ; as.

Mi madre me ama d mi.
Tu amigo te busca d ti.
fil se lo dijo d ellas.
Yo les di las noticias d ellos,
Yo se las dare d Yds,

My mother loves me.
Thy friend seeks thee.
He told it to them.
I told them the news.
I will tell them to you.

137. The second objective case of any of the persons
should never be used in a sentence preceded by a, as the
object of the verb, without being accompanied by the first
case (except after comparatives). Therefore, such expres-
sions as these : a el quiero, a ti amo^ are incorrect, and
should be thus :

A el le quiero.

A ti te amo.

A ella le escribi ayer.

A nosotros nos pagaron.

Him I love.

Thee I love.

I wrote to her yesterday.

They paid us.

138. If the first objective case precedes the verb, the sec-
ond may be placed either before the first or after the verb ; as,
A ti te busco ; or te busco d ti. 1 I am looking for thee.

A ella la quiero ; or la quiero d ella. \ I love her.

If the first objective case follows the 'verb, then the
second must be placed after the first ; as.

BuscoZo d el.
EscribiendoZe d el.
AraandoZa d ella.
EscribiendoZe d ella.
Hablando7W)s a nosotros.

I look for him.
Writing to him.
Loving her.
Writing to her.
Speaking to us.

LESSON XXVIL 135

Le^ les, are in the dative case for both masculine and
feminine. Xo, los^ are in the accusative case for masculine ;
la, las, feminine.

139. It may appear that the personal pronouns el, la, lo,
los and las, might be confounded with the articles el, la, lo, '
los, las, having the same form ; but they are easily distin-
guished, since the articles must always be accompanied by
and precede nouns ; as, el tiempo, la salud, los soldados, las
ohras, lo hueno ; while, on the other hand, the personal pro-
nouns are only employed with verbs, and placed before or
after them ; as.

La llevaron, or llevdronla, i They carried her.

Lo huscaron, or huscdronlo. \ They looked for him.

The adjective suffix mismo, self, is placed after nouns or
pronouns for the sake of emphasis ; as.

]&1 no ama a nadie mas que a si mismo.
Este mismo hombre lo hard.
Yo mismo lo hare.

He loves no one but himself.
This very man will do it.
I myself shall do it.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Le dijo V. eso.al ingles ? Se lo dije.

2. i Se lo dijo V. en ingles 6 en espaiiol ? Se lo dije en ingles.

3. I Le comprendio a V. ? Si, senor, muy bien.

4. 2 Y que le enseno a V. ? Me enseiio el retrato de su her-
mana.

5. I Lo tiene V. ? No ; se lo envie ya.

6. I Me lo ensenara V. ? Se lo enseiiare a V. la semana
proxima.

7. I Ha llamado V. a la criada ? La he llamado y no ha ve-
nido.

8. I No le perdonara V. esa falta ? No quiero perdonarsela.
f 9. A quien llama mi padre ? Te llama a ti.

10. I Quieres enseiiarme tu vestido nuevo ? Te lo enseiiare
con mucho gusto.

11. I Vendran tus amigos a darnos los buenos dias ? Creo que
vendran a darnoslos.

12. I Nos han enviado los periodicos ? Os los enviaranmaiiana.

13. I Cuanto le gano V. a ese sujeto ? Le gane dos mil tres-
cientos cincuenta y cuatro pesos.

i

136 LESSON XXVIL

14. I Que les dieron a sus amigas de Y. ? Prometieronles lle-
varlas a paseo ; pero no les dieron nada.

15. I Quien dijo eso ? Yo mismo lo dije.

16. I Para quien son estos libros ? Para ti mismo.

17. I Han mandado mis cartas al correo ? Si, senor, yo mismo
las he mandado.

18. i Quien me ha enviado este ramillete ? Su amiga misma
se lo ha enviado.

19. I Le leiste a tu padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo
las ha leido.

20. i Quieres ensenarme tu reloj ? Quiero ensenartelo.
t 21. i Quien llamo a la puerta ? Yo mismo llame.

22. i Tiene V. esperanza de ver su pais ? Si, senor, tengo espe-
ranza de verlo muy pronto.

23. i Cantaron bien anoche en el concierto ? Cantaron bien
la primera parte ; pero la segunda muy mal.

24. I Como esta su tio de V. ? Esta bueno ; pero de muy mal
humor.

25. i Es h ombre de mal humor ? No, senor, es hombre muy
amable ; pero hoy esta de mal humor por asuntos de familia.

26. e Creen ellos ganar dinero a ese hombre ? Green ganar-
selo.

27. i Necesita V. enviar este periodico a su hermano ? Nece-
sito enviarselo.

28. I Cuando quiere V. mandar su piano al pianista ? Se lo
quiero mandar ahora.

29. I Cuando necesita V. hablar al abogado ? Necesito ha-
blarle ahora mismo.

30. i Es esta la carta que V. recibio ayer ? Es la misma.

31. i A quien ama el mexicano ? No ama a nadie mas que a
si mismo.

32. i Para quien trabaja esa mujer ? Trabaja para si misma.

33. I Que le ha dicho Y. hoy a su padre ? Lo mismo que le
dije ayer.

EXERCISE.

1. Good morning, sir ; how are you ? Yery well, thank you.

2. How is your family ? Yery well, thank you.

3. When did you hear from your cousin Jane ? I received
a letter from her yesterday. But will you excuse me an instant ?
some one is knocking at the door.

4. Have you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her

LESSON XXVII, 137

the other day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow
morning'.

5. Will you write to her at the same time and tell her what
Charles said ? I am going to write to her at once, and I shall
tell her.

6. Do you think my father will pardon us ? I do (I think so),
because Emanuel -showed me a letter he received from him, in
which he says he will pardon both of us.

7. And what does Henry think of the matter ? He thinks
the same.

8. Have the pupils shown their new books to their teacher
yet ? Yes, they showed them to him yesterday.

9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very
good.

10. What else (more) did he say ? He said that if they study
them with attention they will very soon speak Spanish.

11. Is that all * he said ? That is all.

/' 12. Who is knocking at the door ? is it thou, Peter ? Yes,
it is I.

13. Why did you not come earlier ? I was (have been) read-
ing the news from Italy.

14. What is the news (what news have we) ? The papers say
that the Italians have gained another victory (victoria).

15. What did that man promise you last night ? He promised
to bring me some volumes of the History of the United States.

16. Has he brought (traido) them to you yet ? Not yet.

17. When do you think he will bring f them ? He has to
come to our house this evening, and I think he will bring them
with him.

18. What do you wish to see ? I wish to see your new dress,
if you will have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me.

19. Will you tell the Englishman what I have told you ? I
shall not tell it to the Englishman; but I shall tell it to the
Frenchman this very day.

20. Will he believe it ? Yes, he will (believe it) ; he believes
everything I tell him.

21. Have they taken my letters to the post-office ? I took
them myself, sir.

22. Who is my father calling ? He is calling you to send
you to the bookstore for a book.

* Lo que. t Traera.

138

LESSON XXVIII.

23. Do you know why Louis does not send us the papers any
more (yd) ? He promised to send them ; but you know that no
steamer (vapor) has arrived * this week yet.

24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He
wants to see him just now.

25. There he is talking to a gentleman ; will you go and tell
him that my father wishes to speak to him a moment (momento) ?

26. Good morning, sir ; father wishes to tell you something ;
will you come now ? Yes, I shall go at once.

27. How is your son, Mr. Alexander ? He is much better,
thank you ; but he would not come out this morning, because
he has to study his lesson.

28. What language is he learning ? He is not learning any
now ; he commenced to learn Spanish in the winter.

29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of)
writing, history, and music.

30. What part of the grammar art thou in now, Peter ? I
have just reached (arrived at) f the twenty-seventh lesson.

31. Do you have to send this paper to your brother ? I have
to send it to him this very day.

LESSON XXYIII.
IMPERFECT AND PAST PERFECT TENSES.

IMPERFECT.

First Conjugation,

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

1. aba.

2. abas.

3. aba.

Hablaba, hablabas, hablaba.

Hablabamos, hablabais, habla-
ban.

Plural.

1. abamos.

2. abais.

3. aban.

I spoke, was speaking, or used

to speak, &c., &c.
We spoke, &c.

^ Llegar.

f Acabo de.

LESSON XXVIII.

139

Second Conjugation,

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

Plural.

1. ia.

1. iamos.

2. ias.

2. iais.

3. ia.

3. ian.

Aprendia, aprendias, aprendia.
Aprendiamos, aprendiais, apren-
dian.

I learned, was learning, or used
to learn, (fee, &c.

Third Conjugation,

TERMINATIONS.

Singular.

Plural.

1. ia.

1. iamos.

2. ias.

2. iais.

3. ia.

3. ian.

Escribia, escribias, escribia.
Escribiamos, escribiais, escri-
bian.

I wrote, was writing, or used to
write, (Sec, &c.

PLUPERFECT.

Habia

Habias

Habia

Habiamos

Habiais

Habian

I hablado.
■ aprendido.

• escrito.

I hablado.

• aprendido.
> escrito.

I had

Thou hadst
He had
We had
You had
They had

^ spoken.
>• learned.
) written.
\ spoken.
>• learned.
) written.

Acabar.

To finish.

Entrar.

To enter, come in, go in.

Deber.

To owe.

Deber.

Should, ought, must, to be to, to

be one's duty to.

Dudar.

To doubt.

Temer.

To fear, be afraid of.

Abrir, abierto (irregular in this

To open, opened.

past participle only).

Ambos.

I Both.

140

LESSON XXVIII.

Cuidado.

Care.

Cabeza.

Head.

Deber.

Duty.

Mano.*

Hand.

Projimo.

Neighbor.

Ropa.

Clothes.

Vecino.

Neighbor.

Ventana.

Window.

Reloj.

Clock, watch.

Visita.

Visit.

Cuenta.

Bill, account

Marido, esposo.

Husband.

Esposa.

Wife.

COMPOSITION.

Yo escribia cuando V. vino.

£l estudiaba sus lecciones todos los

dias.
Margarita bailaba mucho cuando era

joven.
Yo acababa de salir cuando V. entro.

i Abria V. la puerta 6 la ventana en
el invierno I

En el invierno no abria ni la una ni
la otra; pero en el verano abria
arabas.

I Habia V. escrito los ejercicios an-
tes de dar su leccion ?

No los habia escrito ; pero habia es-
tudiado la leccion.

Debe V. tener cuidado no solo de
estudiar la leccion, sino de escribir
los ejercicios, porque si no V. no
aprendera nada.

i En donde esta su vecino de V. I

Acaba de entrar.

i Que hora tiene su reloj de V. ?

Son las doce y cuarto.

i Tenia su vecino de V. cuidado de
su ropa f

Debia hacerlo, pero no lo hacia.

Debemos amar al projimo tan to co-
mo a nosotros mismos ; pero mi
vecino no me ama a mi ni yo le
amo a el.

No dudo lo que V. dice.

I was writing when yoii came.

He used to study his lessons every

day.
Margaret used to dance much when

she was young.
I had just gone out when you came

in.
Used you to open the door or the

window in winter ?
In winter I used to open neither ; but

in summer I used to open both.

Had you written your exercises be-
fore taking your lesson I

I had not written them ; but I had
studied my lesson.

You must take care, not only to
study your lesson, but (also) to
write your exercises ; for if not,
you will learn nothing.

Where is your neighbor ?

He has just come in (entered).

What o'clock is it by your watch
(what hour has your watch) ?

It is a quarter past twelve.

Used your neighbor to take care of
his clothes I

He should have done so, but did not.

We should love our neighbor as our-
selves ; but my neighbor does not
love me, nor do I love him.

I do not doubt what you say.

Mano is the only feminine Spanish common noun ending in o.

LESSON XXVIII. 141

EXPLANATION.

140. The IMPERFECT is used (1) especially where differ-
ent past actions are conceived of as going on at the same time ;
(2) also in reference to past SLction^ frequently repeated, and
in reference to continuing past states or conditions ; (3) it
represents action as attempted merely, and not as accom-
plished ; (4) habitual, or customary past action or state ; as
may be seen by the following examples :

Yo escribia cuando V. vino.

fil estudiaba sus lecciones todos los

dias.
El hombre vendia un caballo.

Y un vapor subia de la tierra.

/ was writing when you came.
B^e studied his lessons every day.

The man was selling (went trying to

sell) a horse.
And a vapor used to go up from the

earth.

JS'ext to the infinitive the imperfect is the most regular
form of the verb, there being only three verbs which are
irregular in this tense ; viz., iba, from ^V, to go, era, from
ser, to be, and veia, from ver, to see.

141. The PAST PERFECT is used to express what is past,
and took place before some other past action, event, or state,
expressed or understood ; as,

Yo habia leido ya los periodicos 1 1 had already read the newspapers
cuando V. me los dio. I when you gave them to me.

142. AcABAR DE. — The English expressions, to have Just,
and to be just, before a past participle, are translated into
Spanish by acabar de, preceding an infinitive ; as,

Acaho de entrar. 1 1 have just come in.

fel acaba de abrir la ventana. I He has just opened the window.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Ha hablado V. con la seiiorita ? No, ella acababa de
s^lir cuando yo toque a la puerta.

2. I Dudaba V. entrar ? Si, porque temia ofender a V.

3. No senor ; i que hora es ? Mi reloj tiene las once y cuarto.
4.^ ^ y que hora tiene V. ? Yo tengo las once y media.

5. « Sabe V. que hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? Cuando
yo'pasaba estaban dando las once.

142 LESSON XXVIII,

6. i Entonces ahora no deberan ser mas que las once y veinte
6 veinte y cinco minutos ? Creo que seran un poco menos.

7. I Ha hablado V. con mi vecino ? He ido a hacerle una
visita, pero habia salido.

8. I No hablo V. con la senora ? Si, estaba en la ventana
cuando yo pase.

9. I Tiene una mano muy hermosa ? Si, pero los ojos son
mas hermosos.

' 10. I Que tenia en la cabeza ? Dos flores.

11. I Quien llama a la puerta ? La lavandera, que viene a
buscar la ropa.

12. I Cuanto le debo a V. ? Me debe V. veinte y cinco cen-
tavos de la ropa de la semana pasada.

13. I No se los ha pagado a V. mi marido ? No, senora, no
tenia dinero.

14. I Duda V. lo que le digo ? No, senora, lo creo.

15. I Esta bien lavada la ropa ? Muy bien ; yo misma la lave.

16. -i Hizo V. la visita a su vecino ? Fui a su casa ; pero habia
salido.

17. I Va V. muchas veces al teatro ? Cuando vivia en Paris
iba a menudo ; pero aqui voy muy pocas veces.

18. I Como debemos amar al projimo ? Tanto como a noso-
tros mismos.

19. I Quien es el projimo ? Todos los hombres son nuestros
projimos.

20. I Esta mala su hermana de Y. ? Si, senora, y de cuidado
(seriously).

21. I Cuantas visitas le ha hecho el medico ? Muchisimas.

22. I Deben Yds. tener mucho cuidado de ella ? Si, senora,
ya lo tenemos.

23. I Cuantas visitas le debo yo a V. ? Con esta son tres.

24. ^ No vendra V. a comer manana con nosotras ? Maiiana
ire al campo con mis vecinos.

25. I Habia V. recibido la carta del f ranees cuando recibio la
mia ? La recibi despues.

26. I Por que trabaja V. tanto ? Porque es mi deber.

27. I Vendran V. y su hermana a pasar una semana con noso-
tros ? Si, seiiora, la semana proxima vendremos ambos.

28. i Quien abrio mi ventana, Juan ? Seiior, yo mismo la abri.

29. I Hablo V. con e] sastre ? Fui alia, pero habia salido.
SO, I Cunado vino V. ? Ahora mismo acabo de entrar.

LESSON XXVIII, 143

31. e Donde esta mi padre ? Acaba de salir a la calle.

32. ^ Sabes adonde f ue ? Fue a comprar ropa.

33. i Habra ido a la Cuarta avenida ? No, senor, creo que fue
a Broadway.

34. e Que hora es ? El reloj de su cuarto de V. acaba de dar
las doce.

EXERCISE.

1. What were you doing when Alexander went into your
room ? I was talking to my father.

2. I thought you were writing your exercises. No, I had
written them already.

3. Does the servant take care to sweep your room every day ?
Yes, he knows very well it is his duty.

4. Why did you not come before ? you were to come at nine
o'clock. I know I have done wrong in not coming earlier ; but
I have been writing all the morning.

5. Does your sister Margaret dance now as much as she
used ? When (she was) in the city she used to dance very
much, but now she has no time.

6. When you lived in the country did you open both the
doors and the windows ? I opened neither.

7. Had you finished your work before going to the concert ?
I had (finished it).

8. Do you doubt what I tell you ? No, sir, I never doubted
anything you told me.

9. Is your neighbor afraid to open his windows in winter ?
He is not afraid to open them.

10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'clock ?
No one went out ; my brother came in at that hour.

11. Did Alexander go out when your cousin came in ? He
had already gone out when my cousin came in.

12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk.

13. Will he be out very long (much time) ? He will not be
long ; he is to take his Spanish lesson this evening.

14. Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? 1
went to his house, but he was not at home.

15. When did you see the pianist ? He came to see me the
other day, but I had gone out.

16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before
going to the teacher's ? I think we shall.

144 LESSO^' XXVIIL

17. What o'clock is it by (in) your watch ? It is seventeen
minutes past three by mine ; what time have you ?

18. It must be (deben ser) half-past three; has the music
teacher come ? Not yet.

19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and tell
him I shall not take my lesson this afternoon ? With much
pleasure.

20. So soon ! Well, did you see the teacher ? No, madam,
he had just gone out.

21. How much do you owe the tailor now ? I owe him very
little ; you know I sent him some money last month.

22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in another bill
on Monday ? If he has sent in another I have not seen {visto) it.

23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel ? I was
there last week.

24. Why did you not come yesterday ? I saw you were writ-
ing and I feared to ofPend you.

25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I
wanted you. Well, if you pardon me this time (vez), I shall
come in the next time.

26. How often do you go to the theatre ? Not very often
now ; I used to go every night in the week.

27. How are we to love our neighbor ? As ourselves.

28. Who is our neighbor ? All mankind (men) are our
neighbors.

29. How many visits has the physician made to your uncle ?
He began his visits on the 30th of December, and visited him
twice a week until April 4th.

30. How many visits do I owe you for now ? You owed me
for twelve, but you paid me for nine, and so you only owe for
three now.

31. Whose letter did you receive first, mine or Jane's ? When
yours came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's.

32. Will you take your lesson to-day ? I am to go to the
Central Park this afternoon with my mother, and so I shall not
take my lesson until to-morrow.

LESSOIi XXIX.

145

LESSO]^^^ XXIX.

PRETERIT PERFECT.

Hube

Hubiste

Hubo.

Hubimos.

Hubisteis

Hubieron

hablado.

aprendido.

escrito.

hablado.

aprendido.

escrito.

Yer.

Mirar.
Esperar.

Asi que.

Apenas.

No bien.

Tampoco (conj.).

Tambien (adverb).

Tambien (conj.).

Ademas.

Primeramente, or en primer

lugar.
Segundamente, or en segundo

lugar.
Frecuente.
Free uentemente.
Comodo.
Comodamente.

Incomodo.

Incomodamente.

Probable.

Probablem ente.

Perfecto.

Perfectamente.

Correcto.

Correctamente.

Ojo.
Correo.

Lugar.

Eye.

Post, post-office,

courier.
Place.

I had

Thou hadst
He had
We had
You had
They had

spoken.
■ learned.

* written,
spoken.

• learned,
written.

To see. (See Conjugation, page

Ut)
To look. .
To hope, to wait for.

As soon as.
Scarcely.
No sooner.
Neither, not either.
Also, likewise.
As well, moreover.
Moreover, besides.
Firstly.

Secondly, &c.

Frequent.
Frequently.

Convenient, comfortable.
Conveniently, comfortably.

Inconvenient, uncomfortable.

Inconveniently, uncomfortably.

Probable, likely.

Probably, likely.

Perfect.

Perfectly.

Correct.

Correctly.

Vista.
Comodidad.

Milla.

Sight, view.
Convenience,

comfort.
Mile.

12

146

LESSON XXIX.

COMPOSITION.

Cuando lo hube conocido To ame.
Apenas hubo ealido el cuando yo

entre.
No bien lo hube visto cuando lo co-

noci.
Asi que hube escrito la carta la lleve

al correo.
Cuando lo conoci lo ame.
i Iba V. f recuentemente al teatro el

ano pasado ?
Iba f recuentisimamente, or muy f re-
cuentemente.
]6l vive en esa casa comodamente, or

con comodidad.
J&l escribe correcta y perfectamente ;

pero V. escribe mas facilmente.

When I had known him I loved him«
Scarcely had he gone out when I

came in.
No sooner had I seen him than I

knew him.
As soon as I had written the letter

I took it to the post-office.
When I knew him I loved him.
Did you go often to the theatre last

year?
I went very often.

He lives comfortably, or with com-
fort, in that house.

He writes correctly and perfectly;
but you write more easily.

EXPLANATION.

143. The PRETERIT PERFECT is used to express a past
fiction or event that took place immediately before another
action or event also past. It is never used except after some
of the adverbs of time ; cuando^ when ; asi que^ as soon as ;
no Men, no sooner ; apenas, scarcely ; hcego que, immediately
after ; despues que, soon after ; as,

Cuando lo huhe conocido.

Apenas huho salido cuando yo vine.

No bien lo huhe visto cuando lo co-
nocL

When I had made his acquaintance.
Scarcely had he gone out when I

came.
No sooner had I seen him than I

knew him.

This tense is very little used, not only for the reason al-
ready mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time,
but also because its place may be elegantly supplied by the

PRETERIT ; as,

Oaando lo conoci.

Apenas salio cuando yo vine.

^o bien lo vi cuando lo conoci.

When I had known him.

Scarcely had he gone out when I

came.
No sooner had I seen him than I

knew him.

LUSSON XXIX. 147

144. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as
well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives.

145. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is sufficient
to add mente to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter-
mination in both genders ; as,

Frecuente, f recuentemcTi^e.
Gramatical, gramaticalmen^e.

If the adjective has a different termination for each gen-
der, then me7ite is added to the feminine ; as,

IncopQoda, incomodawen^e.
Perfecta, perfectawe^i^e.

When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only
the last one takes mente^ the others taking the feminine ter-
mination a ; as,

Ciceron hablo sabia y elocuente- 1 Cicero spoke learnedly and elo-
mente, I quently.

146. These adverbs terminating in msnte^ being derived
from adjectives, admit of similar comparison ; as,

Easily.
More easily.
Less easily.

As, or so easily.

Very easily, or most easily.

Facilmente.

Mas facilmente.

Menos facilmente.

Tan facilmente.

Muy facilmente, or facilisimamente.

147. Those adverbs may, without any change in the sense,
be substituted by a substantive governed by the preposition
con ; as,

t\ Vive comodamente, or con como- 1 He lives comfortably,
didad. '

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1 ^ Ve V. aquella fior tan hermosa ? Miro, pero no la veo.

2. I Ye Y. que hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? No, pero

mirare en mi reloj. . ,

3. I Ha visto V. a su hermano ? Si, seiior, lo vi apenas hubo

salido del teatro. r, i.i j^

4. I Le conocio a V. mi vecino ? No bien le hube hablado,

me conocio.

148

LESSON XXIX.

5. I Han venido mis amigos ? Yinieron asi que hubo V. salido.

6. I Lie dieron a V. mis libros ? Me los dieron, no bien les
hube hablado de ello.

7. g Y se marcharon muy pronto ? Se marcharon asi que
hubieron escrito sus cartas.

8. i Que hizo V. despues ? Primeramente {or primero) fui al
correo j despues al mercado.

9. I Que quiere V. hacer ? Primeramente escribir los ejerci-
cios y despues estudiar la leccion.

10. I Por que no lo hizo Y. antes ? En primer lugar porque
no tenia humor j en segundo porque apenas tuve tiempo.

11. e Habla Y. frances frecuentemente ? Si, senor, lo hablo
con f recuencia.

12. I Lo escribe Y. correctamente ? Cuando lo estudiaba lo
escribia con mas correccion que ahora.

13. e Aprende Y. ingles 6 espanol ? Aprendo ambos.

14. ^ Y su hermano de Y. ? Mi hermano los aprende tambien.

15. I Los hablan Yds. con perfeccion ? Si, senor, el ingles lo
hablamos perf ectamente ; pero el espanol ni yo, ni el tampoco.

16. I Ha enviado Y. su carta al correo ? No, senor, la enviare
manana.

17. i La ha escrito Y. ? Tampoco la he escrito, porque quiero
hacerlo con comodidad.

18. I Ha aprendido Y. la leccion de hoy ? He aprendido la
de hoy y la de manana tambien.

19. I Cuando piensa Y. salir para Paris ? Probablemente sal-
dre la semana proxima.

20. e No vive Y. comodamente aqui ? Si, senor, pero vivo mas
comodamente en Francia.

21. I Yivia Y. comodamente cuando estaba en Londres ? No,
senor, vivia incomodamente porque no hablaba ingles.

22. t Tiene Y. otro libro ademas de ese ? Si, senor, tengo
otros dos.

23. i Esta Y. malo de la vista ? Si, senor, tengo malo un ojo.

24. I Por que no ha venido aiin su primo de Y. ? Porque quiere
venir con comodidad.

25. I Tiene Y. buena vista ? Si, senor, pero ahora tengo los
ojos malos.

26. I Cuando estudia Y. sus lecciones ? Las estudio de dia
porque el estudio de noche es malo para la vista.

LFSSOJV XXIX. 149

27. I Donde estan sus hermanos de V. ? Salieron a paseo no
bien hubieron escrito sus ejercicios.

28. 8 Cuando escribieron las cartas ? Asi que hubieron apren-
dido sus lecciones.

29. I Llevo V. mis cartas al correo ? Si, senor, asi que Y.
hubo salido.

30. e Va V. con frecuencia al correo ? Si, senor, voy f recuen-
temente : voy todos los dias.

EXERCISE.

1. Did you go to the lawyer's as I told you ? I went as soo^
as you told me.

•2. Was he at home ? did you see him ? He was not in when
I went ; but I waited until he came.

3. Did you show him the letter ? I opened it and showed it
to him ; but he would * not i-ead it.

4. What did your children do after taking their lesson ?
They had scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed.

5. Did you look at the horses your brother bought on Mon-
day ? I did (look at them), and I think they are very fine.

6. Have you ever taken your family to Italy ? Yes, several
times ; last year we travelled in Italy.

7. Did you spend some time in the principal cities ? Yes ;
but principally in Rome {Roma), Florence (Florencia) and
Milan (Milan).

8. Where were you on the 15th of December, 1865 ? On the
15th we were in Florence in the morning, and in Rome at night.

9. Did you all enjoy good health in Europe ? Yes, all, ex-
cept (menos) Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater
part of the time.

10. Did you go often to the theatre ? We generally went
every evening.

11. Had you any difficulty (diflcultad) in understanding f the
language ? None ; you know Emanuel speaks Italian very cor-
rectly ; he had learned it before setting out for Europe.

12. Did you see many Americans when you were travelling ?
Very many ; some of them we knew very well, and others were
friends of ours.

13. Where is the letter you were writing this morning ? As
soon as I had finished it John took it to the post-office.

* Quiso. t Comprender.

160 LESSON XXIX.

14. Do you ever write to your uncle ? Very little since we
left New York ; but there I used to write to hini very frequently.

15. Which of you three writes French the most correctly * ?
I know it is not I ; and as to (en cuanto d) Peter and Louis, I
think Peter writes best, but Louis writes with more ease (more
easily).

16. Do you see that beautiful flower ? I am looking ; but I
do not see it

17. Will you tell me what time it is by the church clock ? I
am looking at the church ; but I see no clock.

18. Have not you good sight ? Yes, very good ; but I have a
very sore eye.

19. Did not my cousins come ? They came as soon as you
went out.

20. Did you show them my portrait ? I did ; but they scarcely
had time to look at it.

21. Did they say where they were going ? They said they
were going to the country.

22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that.

23. Are not they coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they
are coming for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Penaverde.

24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable little room than
this one ? Besides being comfortable it is very handsome.

25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Riberas ? In
the first place, because I do not speak it well enough ; and in
the second, because he speaks English very correctly.

26. I thought you were studying Spanish ? I am studying
it ; but studying and speaking are two distinct (distinto) things.

27. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take
lessons ? Not yet ; but I shall see him to-morrow and tell him.

28. Why did you not take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick.

29. Have you studied yesterday's lesson, and to-day's ? I have
studied both.

30. Will you come to-morrow at the same hour ? Probably I
shall.

* Mejor^

LESSON XXX.

151

LESSON XXX.

IMPERSONAL VERBS.

Llover. •

To rain.

Lloviendo.

Raining.

Llovido.

Bained.

Indicative,

Present.

Llueve.

It rains.

Imperfect,

Llovia.

It was raining.

Preterit.

Llovio.

It rained.

Future.

Llovera.

It will rain.

Compoun

d Tenses,

Perfect.

Ha llovido.

It has rained.

Past perfect.

Habia llovido.

It had rained.

Preterit perfect

Hubo llovido.

It had rained.

Future perfect.

Habra llovido.

It will have rained.

Amanecer.

To grow light.

Anochecer.

To grow dark.

Diluviar.

To rain like a deluge, to rain in
* torrents.

Granizar.

To hail.

Helar.

To freeze.

Lloviznar.

To drizzle.

Nevar.

To snow.

Relampaguear

,

To lighten.

Tronar.

To thunder.

PERSONAL VERBS U

SED IMPERSONALLY.

Bastar.

To be sufficient.

Haber.

(Signifying) there is, was, etc.

Hacer.

(Signifying) it is, was, etc.

Ser.

To be.

Convenir.

To suit, to be proper.

Parecer.

To seem, to appear.

Brasil.

Brazil.

Habana. Havana.

Menester.

Necessity.

Nieve. Snow.

Hielo.

Ice.

Lluvia. Eain.

162

LESSON' XXX.

Helado.

Ice cream.

Tarde.

Afternoon.

Trueno.

Thunder.

La maiiana.

Morning.

Medio dia.

Noon.

Media noche.

Midnight.

Viento.

Wind.

Especie.

Kind.

COMPOSITION.

•

I Es necesario estudiar mucho para

aprender el espanol ?
Es menester estudiar mucho, pero

no tanto como para aprender el

ingles.
En Nueva York llueve y Uovizna

mucho, pero no diluvia como en

la Habana.
En Madrid amanece muy temprano

y anochece muy tarde en el verano.
En la Habana amanece y anochece

siempre a la misma hora, en todos

los (lias del ano.
En el Brasil no nieva ; pero truena

y relampaguea mucho siempre

que llueve.
En la Habana no hay hielo, porque

no hace bastante f rio para helar ;

yporeso lo llevan de Nueva York.

En Nueva York ha helado y nevado
mucho este ano ; pero en el pasa-
do nevo y helo muy poco.

I Hace mucho calor en este pais ?

En los meses de Noviembre, Diciem-

, bre y Enero hace mucho f rio ; pero
en Junio, Julio y Agosto hace
mucho calor.

i Que tiempo hace ?

Parece que va a Hover, porque hay
mucho viento y hace calor.

Cuatro anos ha, or hay cuatro anos,
que no veo a mi padre.

Pero V. tiene esperanza de verle
pronto, porque llegara hoy a Nue-
va York en el vapor " Etna " que
viene de Europa.

Is it necessary to study much to
learn Spanish ?

it is necessary to study a great deal,
but not so much as to learn Eng-
Ush.

In New York it rains and drizzles a
great deal, but it does not rain in
torrents as in Havana.

In Madrid day breaks very early and
night falls very late in summer.

In Havana day breaks and night
falls at the same hours every day
in the year.

In Brazil it does not snow ; but it
thunders and lightens much when-
ever it rains.

In Havana there is no ice, because
it is not cold enough to freeze ;
and for that reason they take it
from New York.

In New York it has frozen and
snowed much this year ; but last
year it snowed and froze very
little.

Is it very warm in this country ?

In the months of November, Decem-
ber and January it is very cold ;
but in June, July and August it
is very warm.

What kind of weather is it ?

It appears it is going to rain, be-
cause it is very windy and hot.

I have not seen my father for four
years.

But you (have) hope to see him soon ;
for he will arrive to-day in New
York by the steamer " Etna " (that
is) coming from Europe.

LESSON XXX.

153

En verano voy a pasear todos los

dias al amanecer.
^ Ya V. a la cama temprano ?
No, senor, tarde ; a la media noche.
^ Come V. al medio dia ?
No, senor, como al anochecer.
I Va V. a la Habana f
No, senor, voy a Francia.
La Francia es mas alegre que la In-

glaterra.
El muchacho estudia mucho.
El estudio de la gramatica es nece-

sario.
El hombre necesita trabajar.
La conversacion es muy litil para

aprender una lengua.

In summer I go to walk every morn-
ing at daybreak.

Do you go to bed early f

No, sir, late ; at midnight.

Do you dine at noon 1

No, sir, I dine at nightfall.

Are you going to Havana ?

No, sir, I am going to France.

France is more pleasant than Eng-
land.

The boy studies much.

The study of grammar is necessary.

Man needs to work.
Conversation is very useful for learn-
ing a language.

EXPLANATION.

148. Impeksonal verbs are those which are used only in
the infinitive mode and in the third person, singular of all
the tenses, and have no definite subject ; as,

Llueve.

Tronara.

Nevaba.

It rains.

It will thunder.

It was snowing.

149. The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes
used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they are
not impersonal, but neuter ; as,

Yo amaneci en Nueva York, y ano- 1 1 was in New York at daybreak, and
checi en Filadelfia. I ^ Philadelphia at nightfall.

150. Haber and hacer are often used impersonally, anrf^
are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre-
sponding tenses of the verb to be.

The verb haher, when conjugsited impersonally, has the pe-
culiarity of taking e^ y in the third person of the present
indicative ; as.

There is much fruit.

There will be many men.

It was cold.

Hay mucha f ruta.
Habra muchos hombres.
Hizo frio.
Hace muchos anos.

Many years ago.

154 LESSON XXX,

In this case Jidber and its forms correspond to the Eng-
lish there is, there are, there were, there will be, there may
be, &c., and when it has this meaning it is used in the
singular only ; as,

I No hay cartas! I Are there no letters!

\ Haya luz ! I Let there be light.

X. B. — Ha is sometimes elegantly used for hay ; as,
Doce alios ha, or hay doce afios. 1 Twelve years ago ;
but it is to be observed that ha always follows the time, while
hay precedes it.

There are many other verbs which, although not imper-
sonal, are sometimes used as such ; as.

Es muy tarde.
Es preciso.
Es menester,
Parece.
Conviene.
Basta.

It is very late.

It is necessary.

There is necessity.

It seems, it appears.

It suits, it is proper.

It is sufficient, it vrill do.

151. As it may have been observed, the pronoun lY, which
accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated
into Spanish.

152. The Article. — Xouns taken in a definite sense re-
quire the article ; as,

El muchacho estudia. I The boy studies.

El estudio de la gramatica es util. | The study of grammar is useful.

Xouns used in their most general sense are preceded by
the article ; as,

El hombre necesita trabajar.
La conversacion es muy util para
aprender una lengua.

Man needs to work.
Conversation is very useful for learn-
ing a language.

INTames of nations, countries, provinces, mountains, rivers
and seasons, generally take the article ; as.

La Espana.
La Inglaterra.
El invierno.

Spain.

England.

Winter.

LUSSOJV XXX. 155

153. ^Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by
a preposition, do not take the article unless they are per-
sonified; as,

Las provincias de Espana. I The provinces of Spain.

El valor c!e la EspaSa. | The courage of Spain.

Nevertheless, the article is employed under all circum-
stances with the names of some places ; as,

El Brasil.

Brazil.

La Habana.

Havana.

El Ferrol.

Ferrol.

La China.

China.

El Japon.

Japan.

El Peru.

Peru.

Los Estados Unidos.

The United States.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Que tiempo hace ? Ahora hace calor ; antes hacia frio.

2. i Llovera manana ? Creo que nevara.

3. i Llueve mucho en Nueva York ? Llueve y llovizna bas-
tante ; pero raramente diluvia.

4. I Hace mucho frio en la Habana en el mes de Enero ?
Hace alguno, pero nunca nieva ni hiela.

5. I Relampaguea ? Relampaguea j llovizna.

6. I Por que escribe V. tantos ejercicios ? Porque para apren-
der una lengua no basta hablarla, es necesario tambien saber
escribirla.

7. e Nieva mucho en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieva, mas
que en las montaiias, donde hay nieve todo el ano.

8. I Quiere V. tomar un helado ? No, senor, los helados no
son buenos en este tiempo,

9. e Cuanto tiempo hace que no ve Y. a su familia ? El dos
de Septiembre proximo hara once anos.

10. I Por que no vino V. anoche ? Porque llovia y hacia
mucho viento.

11. i Tiene V. miedo de los truenos ? Cuando relampaguea
mucho, si seiior.

12. I Por que no fue V. anoche al concierto ? Porque lloviz-
naba y estaba nevando.

13. I A que horas come Y. ? Al amanecer tomo chocolate ;
al medio dia como, y al anochecer tomo el te.

156 LESSOy XXX.

14. I Se levanta V. al amanecer todos los dias ? Cuando es
menester, si seiior.

15. e AquehorasalioV. delteatroelsabado? A media noche.

16. I Cuando salieron sus hermanas para el campo ? Ayer al
medio dia.

17. t Cuando volveran ? Pasado maiiana por la noche.

18. I A que hora amanece en el verano ? En verano amanece
a las cinco y anochece a las siete y media.

19. I Por que se march a V. tan pronto ? Porque es menester.

20. e Es menester salir al amanecer ? No, basta salir al medio
dia.

21. I Hay muchos alemanes en Nueva York ? Si, senor, hay
muchisimos.

22. I Cuantos dias hace que no lo ve V. ? No hace mas que
uno.

23. e Hay algiin frances en su casa de Y. ? Hay cuatro fran
ceses y una francesa.

24. e Cuando vinieron Yds. ? Ayer al medio dia.

25. I Cree Y. que llovera hoy ? Parece que si, porque hace
mucho viento y mucho calor.

26. h Llovio mucho aqui el ano pasado ? Aqui Uovio mucho,
pero en la Habana llovio mas.

27. I Nieva mucho en este pais ? En el invierno nieva mucho.

28. I Se hiela el agua ? Muchas veces.

29. e Habra mucho hielo el ano proximo ? En el invierno
habra mucho hielo.

30. e Hace mucho f rio ? Si, senor, y al amanecer llovia y gra-
nizaba.

31. I Por que hace tanto frio hoy ? Porque nevo ayer.

EXERCISE.

1. Is it raining ? I do not know.

2. You do not know ? How, are you still in bed ? — Yes, and
I shall be until seven o'clock.

3. At what o'clock did you go to bed ? At midnight.

4. What is it necessary to do in order to learn Spanish ? It
is necessary to study a good grammar, talk a great deal with Span-
iards, and read the works of good authors.

5. What were you doing in the garden this morning at day-
break ? I was walking.

LESSON XXX. 157

6. Have you read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent *
you ? Yes, sir, here it is. Thank you.

7. What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portuguese
{portugues).

8. Do you see that lightning f ? Yes, it is lightening and
thundering very much.

9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders ?
No, it is better to have them shut (cerradas).

10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think
so too ; it is already drizzling.

11. John ! Sir. Is there any water in my room ? — No, sir,
hut if you wish, I shall take some there now.

12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New
York ? During (durante) the months of January and February.

13. I believe there is a great deal of ice used (se usa) in New
York during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap.

14. It appears that there will be little ice next summer. Very
little, the winter has not been cold enough to have much.

15. What watch is that which you have there ? It is the one
I always had.

16. I thought you had given your watch to Charles, and
bought your (the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty
little watch.

17. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock
(son las cuatro en punto).

18. Who knocked at the door just now ? It was Mrs. Mar-
tinez ; it is thundering, and you know she is afraid of the light-
ning.

19. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (would
not) disturb you (molestarle a V.), madam.

20. Do you know whether Alexander has sent the papers to
his brother yet ? I think he has (me parece que si).

21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yester-
day ? I took them to him this morning.

22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he
had just gone out.

23. Will you open that window, if you please ? With
pleasure.

24. And this one also ? No, thank you ; it is better to have
that one shut.

* Prestar. t Kelampago.

158

LUSSON XXXL

25. What kind of weather is it to-day ? Very bad ; it has
been raining and hailing ever since (desde) daybreak.

2Q. Madam, here ai^e two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. Garcia
has sent you from her garden. She is very kind (buena).

27. Who brought them ? Her servant (fern.).

28. When did she bring them ? You had no sooner gone out
than she came.

29. How windy it was last night ! Yes, and it rained in
torrents the whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this
morning.

30. What news is there from Europe ? I do not know ; I
have not yet seen the newspapers.

LESSO]^ XXXI.

Gustar.

To like, to please.

PRESENT.

(A mi) me gusta or gustan.

(A ti) te gusta "

(A el) le gusta ''

(A nosotros) nos gusta, or gustan.

(A vosotros) OS gusta, "

(A ellos) les gusta, "

I like it or them.
Thou likest it or them.
He likes it "

We like it
You like it "

They like it

(A mi) me gustaba or gustaban
(A ti) te gustaba, &c.
Gustar de.

IMPERFECT.

I liked it or them.

Thou likedst it, &c.

To be fond of.

Gusto de.
Gustas de.
Gusta de.
Gustamos de.
Gustais de.
Gustan de.

PRESENT.

I am fond of.
Thou art fond of.
He is fond of.
We are fond of.
You are fond of.
They are fond of.

LESSON XXXI.

159

IMPERFECT.

Gustaba de.

I was or used to be fond of.

Gustabas de

&;c.

Thou wast or used to be fond

of, Sec.

Gustar.

1 To taste.

Placer.

To please.

Pesar {impersonal).

To regret.

Pesar {in all its persons).

To weigh.

Faltar or hacer f alta.

To want.

Faltar.

To fail, to be
ing.

wanting or miss-

Acorn odar.

To suit, to accommodate.

Convenir.

To suit, to be convenient.

Importar.

To be important.

Cerca.

Near.

Lejos.

Far.

Dentro.

Within.

Fuera.

Without.

Bella

Beautiful, fine

.

Posible.

Possible.

Imposible.

Impossible.

Poeta.

Poet.

Poesia.

Poetry, poem.

Pintor.

Painter.

Pintura.

Painting.

Escultor.

Sculptor.

Escultura.

Sculpture.

Placer.

Pleasure.

Prosa.

Prose.

Dios.

God.

Fruta.

Fruit.

Pesar.

Eegret, sorrow.

Manzana.

Apple.

Melon.

Melon.

Naranja.

Orange.

Melocoton. )
Durazno.*^ )

Peach.

Artes {plu.).

Arts.

Arroba.

Arroba.

Arte.

Art, skill.

* Durazno, peach, the word most commonly used in many parts of
the Americas.

160

LESSON XXXL

COMPOSITION.

4 Le gusta d V. la f ruta I

Si, senor, me gustan las naranjas y

los melones.
A mi me gustan los melocotones y

las manzanas.
4 Cual de las bellas artes le gusta a

V. mas?
Me gustan todas, la miisica, la poe-

sia, la pintura y la escultura.
|Va V. a la opera muy a menudof
Voy dos 6 tres veces por semana.
Me parece que llovera pronto, y me

gusta porque tengo un gran placer

en ver Hover.

I Es posible ! A mi no me gusta ver
Hover ; pero me gusta muchisimo
ver nevar.
% Le acomoda a V. ese caballo f
No me conviene, porque es muy
viejo, asi que no lo comprare.

4 Vive V. cerca 6 lejos de aquil
Vivo muy cerca.

4 Vive V. dentro 6 f uera de la ciudad ?
Ahora en la ciudad ; pero en el ve-

rano vivo en el campo.
4 Que le f alta a V. para ser f eliz I

No me falta nada, gracias a Bios.
Deseo conocer al pintor cuya pin-
tura tiene V. en su cuarto.

4 Le pesa k V. no haber estado en

el concierto i
Me pesa mucho no haber estado,

porque no tuve el placer de ver a

su amigo de V.
A mi me pesa tambien.

Do you like fruit f

Yes, sir, I like oranges and melons.

I like peaches and apples.

Which of the fine arts do you like
best ?

I like them all, music, poetry, paint-
ing, and sculpture.

Do you go to the opera very often T

I go two or three times a week.

It appears to me that it will soon
rain, and I am glad of it (I like
it), because I find (have a) great
pleasure in seeing it rain.

Is it possible ! I do not like to see
it rain ; but I like to see it snow.

Does that horse suit you ?

It does not suit (or answer) me, be-
cause it is very old, so that I shall
not buy it.

Do you live near here, or far away ?

I live very near.

Do you live in or out of town ?

In town now, but in the country in
summer.

What do you want (is wanting to
you) to be happy ?

I want nothing, thank God.

I desire (or wish) to know the painter
whose painting you have in your
room.

Do you regret not having been at
the concert ?

I deeply (very much) regret not hav-
ing been there, for I had not the
pleasure of seeing your friend.

I regret it too (also).

LESSON XXXL

161

EXPLANATION.

154. GusTAE, derived from the noun gusto ^ pleasure, and
signifying literally to give pleasure to^ is the verb by which we
translate to like ; but in passing from English to Spanish, the
nominative case or subject becomes the objective, and the
latter is preceded by the preposition d ; as,

% Le gusta a V. la poesia ? I Do you like poetry ?

Me gusta {or a mi me gusta) mucho. 1 1 like it very much.

155. GusTAR, followed by the preposition de^ means to le
fond of and sentences in which it is used are constructed as
in English ; as.

Yo gusto de la musica.
fil gusta de la poesia.

1 1 am fond of music.
I He is fond of poetry.

156. GuSTAR, used as an active verb, means to taste, and
governs the objective, without the aid of any preposition
whatever ; as.

j, Gusta V. la sopa *?

No, senor, gusto la came.

I Do you taste the soup ?
I No, sir, I taste the meat.

157. The verbs pesar, to regret ; faltar, in the sense of
to want, or Jiacer falta, to have need of ; acomodar, to suit ;
convenir, to suit ; importar, to be important ; placer, to please,
and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of
the sentence as that explained in the case of gustar ; as.

Nos falta {or nos hace falta) dinero.
k. V. le importa ese negocio.
Mucho me place.

We want {or are in want of) money.
That business is important to you.
It pleases me much.

This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except
in the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mode, as will
be seen in the proper place.

158. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, sometimes
takes the preposition de after it, when followed by an in-
finitive ; as,

Me pesa de haber venido. | I regret having come.

13

jg2 LESSON XXXL

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Le gusta a V. la opera ? Cuando era joven me gustaba

mas que ahora.

2. i Vendra V. manana a comer con nosotros ? fei, senor, no

faltare. , . ,,

3. ^ Necesita V. hoy su relo j ? Hoy no me h^Q f alta, manana

me con vendra tenerlo.

4. i Quiere V. saber lo que he hecho hoy ? No me importa

saberlo

5. [ Compra V. el cabaUo del ingles ? No, senor, no me con-

viene : es muy caro.

6 Dicen que es muy bueno. No importa.

7. i Por que vive V. tan lejos de la ciudad ? Porque no me
gustan vecinos. .,

8. Antes vivia V. comodamente cerca de la poblacion. bi ;

pero ahora no me gusta.

9. I Cuantas arrobas pesa V. ? Peso ocho arrobas y cinco

libras.

10. I Ha visto V. a su prima ? No, seiior, y me pesa mucho
no haberla visto.

11. I Cuanto pesa su nino de V. ? No se, porque no lo hemos
pesado aiin.

12. i Quiere V. ir a paseo con D. Carlos, nuestro vecino ? No
quiero ir con el porque habla mucho, y no me gustan los habla-
dores.

13. No obstante, el ano pasado estaba V. en buena amistad
con el. Si ; pero ahora me pesa y me pesara siempre.

14. I Nunca seran Vds. amigos otra vez ? Jamas : es im
posible.

15. I Por que ? No puedo decirselo a V.

16. I Eso no le gustara a el ? Nada me importa.

17. I Estan Vds. comiendo pan ? No, senor, estamos comiendo
fruta.

18. I Gusta V. ? * Si, comere una manzana.

19. I No le gustan a V. los melones ? Si, senor ; pero me gus-
tan mas los melocotones y las naranjas.

20. I Quien es aquella senorita tan bella que paseaba ayer con
V. en el parque ? Es una amiga mia.

♦ Literally, do you wish; but it means, would you Uke somef will you
have some f

LESSON XXXI. 163

21. 8 Que son los hombres que vinieron antes de ayer con V. ?
El uno es poeta, el otro pintor y escultor el otro.

22. I Cual de las bellas artes le gusta a V. mas ? Todas me
gustan ; pero la poesia mas que las otras.

23. i Le gusta a V. leer una bella poesia ? Si, senor, me gusta
mucho.

24. g Hace mucho frio hoy ? Fuera hace bastante ; pero den-
tro de casa hace muy poco.

25. I Por que no f ue V. al baile anoche ? Porque no me gus-
tan los bailes.

26. e Es posible que siendo tan joven no le gusten a V. ? A
mi me importa estudiar ; no bailar.

27. e Por que no quiere V. bailar ? Porque estoy cansado.

28. I Que es lo que le hace falta a V. para ser f eliz ? Nada me
hace falta por ahora, gracias a Dios.

29. t Que le falta a V. ? Me falta el sombrero.

30. Aqui esta. i Se marcha V. ? — Si, seiior, si V. no manda
otra cosa.

EXERCISE.

1. Are your brothers and sisters fond of study ? They are
not so fond of it as some children I have known.

2. Do they ever read poetry ? Sometimes, but not very often.

3. Do you understand Spanish poetry ? Not yet ; but I un-
derstand prose perfectly well.

4. Do you ever eat fruit ? Yes, I am very fond of apples,
oranges, peaches and melons.

5. Is that gentleman a sculptor ? No, madam, he is a painter,
and enjoys a high reputation.

6. Do you know that it is raining ? Eaining ! no, I did not
(know it).

7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I
think so).

8. Then it is impossible to go out ? By no means (de ningun
modo) ; we are not afraid of lightning.

9. Does it always lighten when it rains ? Not always.

10. Good morning, Mr. Retortillo, how do you do ? Very
well, thank you ; and how are you (and you) ?

11. What do you wish ? I have come to see if this letter is
correctly written ? It is perfectly correct.

164 LESSON XXXI.

12. Who wrote that letter ? A friend of mine, who writes
Spanish very well.

13. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself ? I have no time,
and I regret it very much.

14. What profession (profesidn) do you like best ? Of all
professions I like that of a physician best.

15. When did you see Miss Melendez ? I had the pleasure of
seeing her the other day.

16. How do you like (que tal) your new piano ? Very much.

17. Who is your music teacher ? I have none just now ; but
I used to have a German teacher.

18. How much do you weigh ? I weigh a hundred and sixty-
five pounds (libras).

19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander ? No, sir,
Alexander weighs twenty pounds more.

20. Is Mr. Martinez at home ? No, sir, he is out.

21. When will he be in ? I do not know ; he did not say (it)
when he was going out (al salir).

22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer he
lives out of town.

23. When he is in town where does he live ? On Twenty-
second street, near Fifth avenue.

24. How did you spend your time when you were in the
country ? I walked morning and evening, and during the day I
read the beautiful poems of Zorrilla and Espronceda.

25. Have you ever read any of Martinez de la Rosa's poems ?
Yes, but I do not like them so well as those of Melendez.

26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter ? Spain has had a
great number of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of all
are Murillo and Velazquez.

27. Are your cousins pleased with their new house ? I believe
so ; but they say they liked the old one better.

28. Where did they live before taking the house in which
they reside now ? On Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue.

29. Are they not comfortable in the new one ? It is not for
that ; but they are very fond of flowers, and they have no gar-
den now.

30. Will you come out and take a walk with me ? Yes, if
Emanuel comes with us ; if not, I shall go and practice on the
piano.

LESSON XXXII.

165

LESSON XXXII.

Poder. {See this verb at the

To be able ; may, Sec.

end of the book.)

Esperar.

To expect, to wait for, to hope.

Castigar.

To punish.

Enganar.

To deceive, to cheat.

Quemar.

To burn.

Tratar.

To treat; to have intercourse

with.

Tratar de.

To endeavor, to try, to treat of.

Tratar en.

To deal in.

Seguir. (See this verb at the

To follow.

end of the book.)

ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL PHRASES.

Casi.

Almost, nearly.

I Cuanto tiempo ?

How long ?

Cuanto antes.

As soon as possible.

De moda.

Fashionable.

De balde. )
Gratis. )

Gratis; for nothing.

De cuando en euando.

From time to time ; now and

then.

De improviso.

Suddenly, unexpectedly, un-

awares.

De veras. ;
Verdaderamente. ) '

Indeed, truly.

En lo sucesivo. i

En el porvenir. "

In future.

En lo future. )

Hasta no mas.

To the utmost, to the extreme.

Poco a poco.

Little by little, by degrees, gen-

tly.

Por supuesto.

Of course.

Tal vez. )
Acaso. )

Perhaps.

Picaro. Eogue (roguish).

Coqueta. Coquette.

Bribon. Kascal.

Sociedad. Society.

Ejemplo. Example; instance.

Politica. Politics.

166

LFSSON XXXIL

COMPOSITION.

Mi hermano esta castigado algunas
veces por no saber sus lecciones.

Y su amigo de V. Alejandro, 4 lo es
alguna vez ?

Lo es de cuando en cuando ; pero
mi hermana no ha sido castigada
jamas, porque sabe siempre sus
lecciones.

I Ha sido V. engaSado alguna vez ?

Hasta no mas, porque hay muchos
picaros en la sociedad.

Esta casa esta bien situada.

La carta estaba mal escrita.

Manuel es am ado de {or por) Mar-
garita.

El libro ha sido escrito por un f ran-
ees.

Se quemo {or fue quemada) la

casa.

Esta casa se hizo en seis meses.

I En cudnto tiempo se hizo la de V. ?

En cosa de tres meses.

I Cuanto tiempo necesita V. para es-

cribir esa carta ?
Esta casi acabada ; estoy con V. en

un minuto.
Poco a poco ; ra V. muy aprisa.
Tal vez ; pero tengo prisa y quiero

acabar pronto.
I De veras ?
Por supuesto : tengo que ir al correo.

Dios estd en todas partes, lo sabe y
lo puede todo, y nos perdonara si
tratamos de hacer nuestro deber.

i Es su reloj de V. de moda ?
Si, se3or ; pero no me gusta, porque
es muy pequeiio.

My brother is sometimes punished
for not knowing his lessons.

And your friend Alexander, is he
ever punished (ever so) ?

He is, now and then ; but my sister
has never been punished, because
she always knows her lessons.

Have you ever been deceived f

To the utmost, for there are a great

many rogues in society.
This house is well situated.
The letter was badly written.
Emanuel is loved by Margaret.

The book was written by a French-
man.
The house was burnt.

This house was built (made) in six
months.

How long was yours in building
(making) ?

About three months.

How long shall you be in writing
that letter?

It is almost finished ; I shall be (am)
with you in a moment (minute).

Gently : you go very quick.

Perhaps so ; but I am in haste, and
I want to get done (finish) soon.

Indeed? .

Of course : I have to go to the post-
ofiice.

(xod is everywhere ; He knows all
things, and nothing is impossible
for Him (can do all) ; and He will
pardon us, if we endeavor to do
our duty.

Is your watch fashionable f

Yes, sir; but I do not like it, be-
cause it is too small.

LJESSON XXXIL 167

EXPLANATION.
159. Passive Voice.— The past tenses of this voice are
usually formed by the different tenses of the auxiliary ser
added to the past participle of the verb, care being taken that
the participle agree with the subject, in gender and number,
like an adjective ; as,

Soy amado.
Hemos sido amados.
Habeis sido amadas.
Seras amada.

I am loved.
We have been loved.
You have been loved.
Thou wilt be loved.

When, however, the action of the verb is conceived of as
in the present, or when allusion is made to a state or condi-
tion, the forms of estar are more common ; as.

La carta estaba mal escrita. I The letter was badly written.

Esta casa estd bien situada. I This house is well located,

160. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in
the present and imperfect of the indicative mode, only when
it is designed to express a mental act ; as,

Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret.

When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb be-
ing in the present or imperfect of the indicative mode, estar
is the auxiliary to be used, and not ser ; as.

El libro ha sido escrito por un Iran- The book was written by a French-
ces, or el libro estd escrito por un man.
frances (instead of es escrito).

161. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the
preposition de or por may be used after the passive verb, be-
fore the agent, and por only, when otherwise ; as,

Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga- 1 Emanuel is loved by Margaret,
rita. I

162. The Spanish language very often makes use of the
reflexive se where in English the passive voice is employed ;
as,

Se quemo la casa. The house was burnt.

Esta casa se hizo en seis meses. This house was built (made) in six

months.

168 LESSOJSr XXXII.

163. This form is preferred when the subject is an inani-
mate thing, or when it is undetermined.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i No puede V. esperar ? Esperai'e un poco.

2. I No me enganara V. ? Por supuesto que no ; yo no soy
ningiin picaro.

3. Buenos dias. l De que estan Yds. tratando ?— Estabamos
hablando de modas.

4. i Puede V. decirme si mi sombrero es de moda ? No es
de la ultima (moda).

5. I Cuanto tiempo hace que paso esta moda ? Habra ya un
mes, poco mas 6 menos.

6. e Quiere V. quemar las cartas de esa senorita ? Si, senor,
porque es una coqueta.

7. I De veras ? Yo creia que era una senorita de mucha cir-
cunspeccion. Hace algiin tiempo lo era; pero poco a poco ha
ido siguiendo el ejemplo de otras.

8. e Tal vez el ser coqueta es de moda en la sociedad del dia ?
Asi lo creo.

9. Y. debe excusar a las niiias ; ellas son inocentes y no creen
hacer mal en eso.

10. I Ha sido Y. enganado alguna vez ? Hasta no mas ; por-
que hay muchos picaros.

11. I Han sido castigados sus ninos de Y. ? Si, senor, ban sido
castigados por no saber sus lecciones.

12. I Y aquel criado tan bueno que Y. tenia ? Es im bribon ;
no lo quiero ni de balde.

13. I De veras ? Y. lo trataba muy bien. Acaso por lo mismo
que yo lo trataba bien, me ha tratado el tan mal.

14. i Le gusta a Y. la sociedad ? Si, senor, de cuando en
cuando.

15. I Por que pues no vive Y., en la ciudad ? Porque se me
quemo la casa.

16. i Cuanto tiempo hace ? Casi un mes.

17. Y ahora, i no va Y. alia nunca ? Yoy de cuando en
cuando.

18. Eso es verdaderamente un gran mal ; pero en lo sucesivo
tendra Y. mas cuidado.— Por supuesto que si.

19. I No pudo Y. saber quien le quemo la casa ? No ; pero
creo que fue im bribon, que me queria mal.

LESSON XXXII. 169

20. i Quiere Y. acabar ya ? Si, cuanto antes ; no puedo espe-
rar mas.

' 21. I Que piensa V. hacer ahora ? Trato de castigar al que me
quemo la easa.

22. I Y despues ? Despues vere si puedo hacer otra.

23. I Y no tiene Y. ahora ninguna alia ? Tengo una hecha
de improviso.

24. Poco a poco ira Y. haciendo otra. Asi lo espero.

25. I Por supuesto que su seiiora vivira en la ciudad ? Si ;
pero va alia de cuando en cuando ; el otro dia llego de impro-
viso, cuando menos la esperaba.

2Q. i No puede Y. volver manana por aqui ? Manana tal vez
no, pero pasado si.

27. Entonces le espero a Y. sin f alta. Puede Y. esperarme ;
no f altare.

28. i Ira Y. hoy a la comedia 6 a la opera ? Tal vez ire a la
opera, porque es mas de moda.

29. I Nunca va Y. a la comedia ? Si ; voy de cuando en
cuando.

30. I Sabe Y. que se ha quemado la Academia {academy) de
Miisica ? Si ; anoche lo lei en los periodicos.

EXERCISE.

1. Papa, may I go out ? Yes, you may go out for half an
hour.

2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three
weeks.

3. Why does that woman punish her children so much ?
She always punishes them when they do wrong (obrar mal).

4. Does she reward (recompensar) them when they do right ?
I believe she does.

5. Why do you burn all that young lady's letters ? Because
she is only a coquette.

6. I think you are wrong ; I have known her a long time,
and I believe she is very circumspect (circunspecta).

7. Why does your family always live in the country ? Be-
cause we do not like society.

8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into
society ? It is impossible.

9. We always live in town, and yet (sin embargo) we never
go into society.

170 LESSON XXXII.

10. Peter, can you write that letter for me now ? I can.

11. When do you want it ? As soon as possible.

12. Have you ever been deceived by that man ? Yes, ve^
often ; he is a rascal.

13. How long have you known him ? Not long ; but each
time I have had business with him, he has deceived me.

14. Indeed ! What business is he in ? I cannot tell you.

15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I
go to the opera now and then.

16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable ? Yes, it
is in the latest fashion.

17. Is Peter's the fashion too ? No, those hats went out of
fashion last year.

18. Where is your old servant ? He lives with us no
longer.

19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for
him ? No, he came for it the other day, but I had not had
time to buy it.

20. Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson ? My
exercise was very difficult, and I could not finish it in time.

21. Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yes, in
future I shall come at four o'clock precisely.

22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ;
I never deceive anybody.

23. Will that young gentleman * be at the concert with you
to-morrow night ? Perhaps he will go with us.

24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know.

25. How long is it since you began to take lessons ? About
{cerca de) four months.

2Q. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the
same hour as you ? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and
my sister at twelve.

27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman
who danced last with your cousin (fern.) yesterday evening ? I
made his acquaintance in Madrid the year before last (hace dos
afios),

28. Has this young man deceived you as often as his father ?
He has ; you know children almost always follow the example
of their parents {padres).

* Caballerito.

LESSON XXXIIL

171

29. Do you think Charles is loved by Louisa ? I think she
loves him as much as it is possible to love.

30. What did you tell the tailor ? I told him you wanted
your coat and vest for the day after to-morrow.

LESSON- XXXIII.

REFLEXIVE VERBS.

INFINITIVE MODE.

Lavarse.
Haberse lavado.
Haberse de lavar.

To wash one's self.
To have washed one's self.
To have to wash one's self.

PEESENT PARTICIPLE.

Lavandose.
Habiendose lavado.
Habiendose de lavar.

Washing one's self.
Having washed one's self.
Having to wash one's self.

INDICATIVE PEESENT.

(Yo) me lavo.
(Tii) te lavas.
(El) se lava.

(Nosotros) nos lavamos.
(Vosotros) OS lavais.
(EUos) se la van.

I wash myself.
Thou washest thyself.
He washes himself.
We wash ourselves.
You wash yourselves.
They wash themselves.

(The other simple tenses are conjugated in like manner,)

(Yo) me he lavado.
(Tii) te has lavado.
(El) se ha lavado.
(Nosotros) nos hemos lavado.
(Vosotros) OS habeis lavado.
(Ellos) se han lavado.

{The other compound tenses

Cortar.

Cortarse.

Afeitar.

I have washed myself.
Thou hast washed thyself.
He has washed himself.
We have washed ourselves.
You have washed yourselves.
They have washed themselves.
are conjugated in like manner.)

To cut.

To cut one's self ; to be ashamed

To shave.

172

LESSON XXXIIL

Afeitarse.

Levantar.

Levantarse.

Cansar.

Cansarse.

Descansar. )

Descansarse. )

Contentar.

Contentarse.

Burlar.

Burlar«e.

Preguntar.
Responder.
Enganar.
Enganarse.
Temer. Reir.

To shave one's self.

To raise, to lift.

To get up, to rise.

To weary, to fatigue, to tire.

To tire one's self, to get tired.

To rest.

To content, to please.

To content one's self.

To mock, to jest.

To jest, to make jest of, to laugh

at.
To question, to ask, to enquire.
To answer.
To deceive.
To deceive one's self.
To fear. To laugh.

Arriba.

Up.

Abajo.
Detras.

Down.
Behind.

Encima.

Upon, above.

Debajo.
Luego.
i Que tal ?

Under.

Presently.

How ; how do you do ?

Descansadamente.

Easily.

De burlas.

In jest.

Descansado.

Rested.

Contento.

Content

Barbero.
Cansancio

Descanso.
Contento.
Respondon.

Cuchillo.
Pelo 6 cabello.

fa-

Barber.
Weariness^

tigue.
Rest.

Contentment.
Ever ready to

reply.
Knife.
Hair.

Pregunta.
Respuesta.

Burla.

Declinacion.

Derivacion.

Disposicion.
Una.

Question, query.
Answer.

Jest.

Declination.

Derivation.

Disposition.
Nail (finger).

LUSSOJS- XXXIIL

173

COMPOSITION.

j, A que hora se levanto V. ayer ?

Me levante temprano ; me levanto

al amanecer todos los dias.
J Que hizo V. entonces f
Me af eite y sali.
i Se lava V. antes de af eitarse I

Me afeito antes de lavarme.

( Son f aciles de aprender las palabras

declinacion, derivaci6n y dispo-

sicion ?
Son facilisimas, porque casi todas

las palabras que acaban en cibn

son lo mismo en ingles, cambiando

la c en t,
Tengo un barbero que afeita muy

bien, pero es carisimo ; j, que tal

afeita el de V. f
El mio no afeita muy bien ; pero es

baratisimo, porque me afeito yo

mismo.
Ahora me afeita el barbero, porque

me he cortado la mano y no pue-

do afeitarme yo mismo.
I, Por que se burla V. de su amigo I
Me burlo de el porque se levanta

muy tarde.
% Se ha cansado V. de estudiar ?
No, seSor, porque cuando me canso

de estudiar, descanso escribiendo.
I Ama V. a su hermano ?
Nos amamos el uno al otro.
J Le gusta a V. mas preguntar que

responder ?
No, senor, yo no soy pregunt6n, y

me gusta hacer ambas cosas.
Yo no trabajo mucho, lo hago des-

cansadaraente.
jSe engaSa V. a si mismo alguna vez?
V. habla de burlas ; ^ puede uno en-

gaflarse a si mismo jamas ?

At what o'clock did you get up yes-
terday ?

I rose early; I rise at daybreak
every morning.

What did you do next (then) %

I shaved myself and went out.

Do you wash yourself before shaving
(yourself) ?

I shave before washing myself.

Are the words declination, deriva-
tion and disposition easy to learn 1

They are very easy, because all words
ending in cion are the same in
English, changing the c into t.

I have a barber that shaves very
well, but he is exceedingly high
(dear) ; how does your's shave %

Mine does hot shave very well ; but
he is very cheap, for I shave my-
self.

The barber shaves me at present
(now), because I (have) cut my
hand, and I cannot shave myself.

Why do you make fun of your friend?

I make fun of him because he gets
up very late.

Have you got tired of studying I

No, sir ; because when I get tired of
studying, I rest myself by writing.

Do you love your brother ?

We love each other.

Do you like to ask questions better
than to answer them f

No, sir, I am not inquisitive; I
like to do both.

I do not work much ; I do it at my
ease.

Do you ever deceive yourself ?

You speak in jest ; can one ever de-
ceive himself i

174

LESSON XXXUL

Por supuesto que si.

I Esta su amigo de V. arriba 6 aba-

jof
4 Est4 mi libro encima 6 debajo de

la mesa?
f Que tal le gusta k V. Nueva York ?

Certainly (so).

Is your friend up-stairs or down-
stairs ?

Is my book upon the table or un-
der it?

How do you like New York ?

EXPLANATION.

164. Eeflexiye Verbs. — Almost all active verbs may be-
come reflexive in Spanish, and be used pronominally. The
objective pronoun must be of the same person as the subject,
and each person is conjugated with a double personal pro-
noun. However, the nominative pronoun is almost always
included in the verb in Spanish, while in English it is ex-
pressed; as,

Infinitive.
Part, Pres,

Am arse.
Amandose.

To love one's self.
Loving one's self.

INDICATIVE PRESENT.

Me amo. I love myself.

Te amas. Thou lovest thyselt

Se ama. He loves himself.

Nos amamos. We love ourselves.

Os amais. You love yourselves.

Se aman. They love themselves.

And in the same manner in all the other tenses.

166. When an agent performs an action upon a part of
himself, the verb is made reflexive ; and the possessive pro-
nouns, my^ Ai5, etc.,are translated into Spanish by the article
cZ, ?a, Zos, las ; as.

Me corto el cabello.
Se corta las unas.

I cut my hair.
He cuts his nails.

166. When the verb denotes a reciprocity of action be-
tween two or more individuals, it is formed, in Spanish, in
the same manner as the plural of reflexive verbs ; as.

Nos amamos.
Os engaftasteis.
Se tem^rdn.

We love one another.
You deceived each other.
They will fear each other.

LESSON XXXIIL 175

CONVERSATION AND VERSION. .

1. I Se ha afeitado Y. ? Ni me he lavado ni afeitado.

2. I Cuantas veces lava la criada a los ninos ? Los lava por
la manana, al medio dia y a la noche.

3. i Cuando les corta las unas ? Se las corta los miercoles y
los sabados.

4. I Se levantan temprano ? A las seis en verano, y a las
siete en invierno.

5. i Por que no se levanto V. hoy mas temprano ? Porque el
criado no me desperto.

6. e No despierta V. temprano ? Cuando estoy cansado, no.

7. I Estaba V. muy cansado ayer ? Si, seiior, el paseo me
canso mucho.

8. Entonces, i querra V. descansar hoy todo el dia ? No, he
descansado ya bastante durante la noche.

9. e Con cuanto dinero se contenta V. ? Yo me contento con
poco.

10. i Se contentara V. con diez pesos ? Se burla V. de mi.

11. No, yo solo pregunto.— V. me pregunta y yo respondo
que no.

12. e Habla V. de burlas 6 de veras ? Hablo de veras ; yo no
me contento con menos de cien pesos.

13. i Se burla V. de mi ? No, seiior, yo nunca hablo de burlas ;
y V. tendra que contentarse con lo que se le ha dado ya.

14. V. es quien se engaiia. — El engaiiado sera V., yo no.

15. e Para que llama V. al barbero ? Para afeitarme.

16. I Por que no se afeita V. mismo ? Porque tengo miedo de
cortarme.

17. i Donde esta el cuchillo ? Esta sobre la mesa.

18. I Adonde va V. ? Voy a cortarme el pelo.

19. I Donde vive su barbero ? Vive detras de la iglesia.

20. i Pregunto V. al criado por mis botas ? Si, seiior, me dijo
que estaban debajo de la cama.

21. I Sale V. ahora a paseo ? No, senor, saldre despues.

22. i Que tal esta su amigo de V. ? Ahora esta mas contento.

23. I Que tal es el criado que tiene V. ahora ? Es muy res-
pondon.

24. i Donde esta su padre de V., arriba 6 abajo ? Antes estaba
abajo, ahora me parece que esta arriba.

25. I Que tal ha pasado V. la noche ? Muy descansadamente ;
he dormido muy bien.

176 LESSON XXXIIL

2^. I Como estan escritos los ejercicios de su gramatica de Y. ?
Estan por preguntas y respuestas.

27. i Hizo Y. la pregunta que le dije ? Si ; pero no me dieron
respuesta.

28. i De que trata la leccion de hoy ? De la declinacion y de-
rivacion de los nombres, y de la disposicion de las palabras en la
composicion.

29. i Que esta Y. leyendo ? Las disposiciones del rey Car-
los III.

30. I Aprende bien el espanol su amigo de Y. ? No, senor,
tiene muy poca disposicion para las lenguas.

31. I Que hizo Y. ayer despues que se levanto ? Me lave y me
afeite.

32. I Se canso Y. mucho ayer ? Si, senor, me canso mucho el
paseo al parque.

33. e Necesita Y. descanso ? Descanso bastante de noche.

EXERCISE.

1. Where do you sleep ? In the small room on the third floor
(piso).

2. What time do you get up every morning ? I generally
rise at six o'clock.

3. At what hour do your children rise in summer ? They
rise at daybreak.

4. At what time do they go to bed ? At nightfall.

5. Where do you wash yourself ? I wash myself in my own
room.

6. Do you wash yourself in hot {caliente) or cold water ? I
wash myself always in cold water.

7. Why do you not wash sometimes with warm water ? Be-
cause cold water is much better for the skin (cutis).

8. Where do you go to be shaved ? I go to the barber's.

9. Where does your barber live ? In Broadway, near Broome
street.

10. Are you tired ? No, sir, I never tire myself writing.

11. Are you speaking in earnest or in jest ? In earnest ; I am
not in a humor to jest.

12. It seemed to me you were in a humor to jest a while ago ?
Not at all ; on the contrary,* it was my brother that was making
fun of me because I had cut my hand.

* De ningiin modo, al contrario.

LEssojsr XXXIII. 177

13. Well, no Inatter ; I know you are fond of jesting and
laughing at everybody. You deceive yourself, my dear sir
(sefior mid).

14. Charles, can you go to the tailor's to tell him I wish to see
him ? It is impossible for me to go out now, I am expecting Mr.
Valero.

15. Do not mind, I shall send John. John cannot go either ;
he has to be here at the same time as I.

16. Will you go to the post-office and ask if there are any let-
ters for me ? I asked this morning when I took father's letters,
and they told me there were none.

17. Did you see the newspaper I was reading when your cousin
came in ? There it is on the table behind the dictionary.

18. Why did you get your hair cut (hacerse cortar) ? Be-
cause it was too long (largo).

19. Indeed ! I thought you liked long hair ? On ladies, yes r
but it is not very suitable for a man.

20. Where is Peter ? I think he is up-stairs.

21. Will you do me the favor to call him ? Certainly (cier^ta-
mente).

22. Was the musician satisfied with what you gave him ? He
did not appear to be content.

23. How do you like the vest that my tailor made for you ?
Pretty (bastante) well ; but I like the work of my own tailor
better.

24. How is your uncle to-day ? The physician came to see
him this afternoon, and he said he was much better.

25. What are those gentlemen doing over there ? Do you pot
see that they are resting ?

26. How do you know they are tired ? They have been walk-
ing all the morning.

27. Then they are very wise (hacer muy bien) to rest. Of
course ; rest is agreeable (grato) when one is tired (se estd^
cansado).

u

178

LESSON xxxir.

LESSON XXXIV,

IRREGULAR VERBS.

Acertar.

To guess, to make out,

hit the mark.

INDICATIVE — Present.

Acierto.

I guess.

Aciertas,

Thou guessest.

Acierta.

He guesses.

Acertamos.

We guess.

Acertais.

You guess.

Aciertan,

They guess.

IMPERATIVE.

Acierta tri.

Guess thou.

Acertad vosotros

Guess.

SUBJUNCTIVE— P!re«en/.

Acierte.

I may guess.

Aciertes.

Thou mayest guess.

Acierte.
Acertemos.

He may guess.
We may guess.

Acerteis.

You may guess.

Acierten.

They may guess.

Verba' conjugated like acertar.

Calentar.

To v^arm, to heat.

Cerrar.

To shut, to close.

Confesar.

To confess.

Despertar.

To awake, to wake.

Gobernar.

Acer

car.

To govern. To approach.

Merendar.

To lunch.

Negar.

To deny.

Pensar.

To think, to intend.

Quebrar.

To break.

Sentarse.

To sit down.

hs that are regular.

although small changes are made to preserve

pronunciation of the infinitive.

Veneer.

To vanquish, to overcome.

Resarcir.

To indemnify.

Pagar.

To pay.

to

LESSON XXXIV,

179

Delinquir.

Escoger.

Poseer.

Proveer.

Huir.

Argiiir.

To commit a fault, to transgress.

To choose.

To possess.

To provide.

To flee, to fly.

To argue.

Aver.

Let us see.

Quiza.

Perhaps.

Delincuente.

Delinquent, offender, transgres-

sor.

Inocente.

Innocent.

Franco.

Frank, open.

Cualquiera.*

Any, any one, some one, what-

ever, whatsoever.

Cualquiera parte.

Any place.

Fuego.
Jardinero.
Motive.
Sofa.

Fire.

Gardener.
Motive.
Sofa.

Consecuencia.

Prudencia.

Verduras.

Deuda.

Consequence,
conclusion.
Prudence.
Vegetables.
Debt.

COMPOSITION.

I Le gusta d. V. calentarse al fuego ?

Si, seiior, me gusta calentarme al
fuego en el invierno cuando hace
mucho frio.

i Que calienta el criado ?

Esta calentaudo el cafe.

^ A que hora desperto V. ayer ?

4 A ver si acierta V. ?

No se, quiza desperto V. a las cinco.

Despierto todas las maflanas a las
cuatro y media.

Do you like to warm yourself at the
fire?

Yes, sir, I like to warm myself at
the fire in winter when it is very
cold.

What is the servant warming?

He is warming the coffee.

At what hour did you awake yester-
day?

Let us see if you can f guess ?

1 do not know ; perhaps you awoke
at five o'clock.

I awake every morning at half-past
four.

* Cualquiera drops the final a when it precedes a masculine singular
noun.

f Words printed in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.

180

LESSON XXXIV,

I Cierra V. la puerta 6 la abre I

He cerrado la puerta y abierto la

ventana.
i Es delincuente aquel hombre I
Lo creo, porque huye.
Niego la consecuencia ; V. no afguye

bien, el puede ser inocente y huir

por prudencia.

I Se proveyo V. de flores I

Me provei de fruta y mi hermana

de verduras.
i Pago V. por ellas al jardinero ?
Yo le pague la fruta y mi hermana

le pago las verduras.
I Piensa V. ir a Europa este verano ?

Deseo irme a alguna parte, porque
confieso que tengo mucho miedo
del colera.

Hay muchos que niegan tener mie-
do ; pero yo tengo el valor de con-
fesarlo francamente.

I A qu6 hora se desayuna V. f

Me desayuno a las ocho, meriendo a
las dos y como a las seis.

I Me promete V. ir a comer conmigo
hoy!

Entre comer 6 merendar con V. es-
cojo el merendar, porque Y. come
demasiado temprano. '

Are you shutting the door or open-
ing it ?

I have shut the door and opened the
window.

Is that man a transgressor ?

I think so, for he flees.

I deny the conclusion ; you do not
argue correctly (well) ; he may be
innocent and flee (or fly) for pru-
dence.

Did you provide yourself with flow-
ers?

I provided myself with fruit, and
my sister with vegetables.

Did you pay the gardener for them ?

I paid him for the fruit, and my sis-
ter paid him for the vegetables f

Do you intend to go to Europe this
summer ?

I wish to go somewhere, for I con-
fess 1 am very much afraid of the
cholera.

There are many who deny being
afraid ; but I have the courage to
confess it freely.

At what hour do you breakfast ?

I breakfast at eight, lunch at two,
and dine at six.

Will you (do you) promise to come
and dine with me to-day ?

Between lunching and dining with
you, I choose lunching, for you
dine too early.

EXPLANATION.

167. Irregtjlae Verbs. — All verbs that are not conju-
gated throughout according to the model verbs already given
{Jiablar^ aprender^ escrihir) are called irregular.

168. It is, however, to be observed, that although some
verbs vary slightly in their radical letters, they are not to be
considered as irregular on that account, inasmuch as those
changes take place in order to preserve throughout the whole

LESSON XXXIV. 181

conjugation the sound of the root consonants. This obser-
vation should be carefully borne in mind, so as not to take
for irregular verbs those which are really not so.

Many verbs ending in car, cer, cir, gar, for instance, un-
dergo respectively the variations mentioned above : those in
car change the c into qu before e ; as,

Tocar. I To touch.

Toque (instead of toce). I I touched ;

those in cer and cir change the c into z before a and o ; as,
Veneer. To vanquish.

Ven^^o (instead of venco). I vanquish.

Resarcir. To indemnify.

Resar2:o (instead of resarco). I indemnify ;

and lastly, those in gar take u after the g before e ; as,
Pagar. i To pay.

Pagwe (instead of page). I I paid.

For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a
and 0 ; as, delinco, delinca, delincamos ; and escoger, to choose,,
changes the g into / before a and o ; as, escojo, escoja,

169. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer, to be-
lieve ; leer, to read ; poseer, to possess ; proveer, to provide,,
in those terminations which contain an i, change it into y
whenever it is to be joined with another vowel ; as, crei,.
creyo ; lei, leyeron ; posei, poseyere ; provei, proveyeremos, &c.

170. The same change is made in the verbs ending in uir,
when the u and the i make a part of two different syllables.
Thus Mdr, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit
definite, huyo ; argilir, to argue, makes arguyo, &c.

171. The regularly irregular verbs, about j^t;^ hundred and
fifty in number, may be divided into seven classes, presenting
each a certain regularity in its irregularity ; that is to say,,
whose irregularities occur in the same persons and tenses,,
so that when the pupil has learned seven verbs, or one of
each of those groups, he will be able to conjugate all the regu-
larly irregular verbs, leaving only the few that confine their
irregularities to themselves and their compounds, the major-
ity of which have already been introduced in previous les-

182

LESSON XXXIV,

sons, such as haher, tener, &c. ; but the student can find them
all conjugated near the end of the book.

Acer tar may serve as a model for the conjugation of the
first of these seven classes of irregular verbs, just as hablar
does for the first conjugation of the regular verbs. The
irregularity of acertar^ and of all those conjugated like it,
consists in its taking an i before the last e of the stem, in the
firsts second and third persons singular, and the third person
plural of the indicative present, of the subjunctive present,
and in the second person singular of the imperative. {See
list of the irregular verbs near the end of the hook,) In all
the other modes and tenses those verbs are regular, and the
pupil can easily form them according to their respective con-
jugations.

172. Pagar may take for its direct object either the value
paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi-
rect object. Por may be used before the thing paid for ; as,

Pago los caballos, or pago por. los

caballos.
Pago mil pesos por los caballos.

Pago al comerciante mil pesos por
los caballos.

I pay for the horses.

I pay a thousand dollars for the
horses.

I pay the merchant a thousand dol-
lars for the horses.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Acertara Y. la casa de su prima ? Si, senor, yo la
acertare.

2. I Podra V. acertar quien estuvo aqui ayer ? No acierto.

3. I No entiende su hermano de V. lo que le digo ? Si, senor ;
pero no acierta a responder.

4. I Se calienta V. al fuego ? Si, senor, porque hace mucho
frio.

5. i Por que no cierra V. entonces la puerta ? Confieso que
no habia pensado en alio.

6. i A que hora desperto V. esta maiiana ? Desperte a las diez.

7. I El que gobierna una casa y una familia, no debe levan-
tarse temprano ? No lo niego.

8. i Piensa V. merendar hoy ? Si, senor, nosotros merenda-
mos todos los dias.

LESSON XXXIV. 183

9. e Por que no se sienta V. en aquella silla, que es mejor ?
Porque tengo miedo de romperla.

10. t Le pago V. a su eriado ? Si, seiior, le pague ayer y hoy
se ha huido.

11. g No le perdonara Y. ? No, seiior, porque quien delinquio
una vez delinquira dos.

12. ^ Y no se resarcio de su trabajo ? Si, seiior, antes se pro-
veyo de ropa en mi casa.

13. i Que lenguas posee el ? El ingles, el frances y el
italiano.

14. I Quien posee ahora la casa de campo de V. ? El ameri-
cano la posee.

15. e Se la ha pagado a V. ? No, senor, no me pago nada.

16. e Compro V. flores al jardinero ? Le compre verduras y
mi hermana le compro flores.

17. I Le pagaron Vds. al jardinero por ellas ? Yo le pague
las verduras y mi hermana pago por las flores.

18. I A quien le gustan mas las flores, a V. 6 a su hermana ?
Creo que a ella le gustan mas las flores ; pero a mi me gusta mas
la fruta.

19. e Que fruta le gusta a V. mas ? Me gustan las naranjas y
las manzanas.

20. I Paga V. siempre sus deudas ? Las pago cuando tengo
dinero.

21. g Piensa V. ir al campo este verano ? Deseo ir a cual-
quiera parte, porque confieso que tengo mucho miedo del
colera.

22. I No tiene V. vergiienza de confesarlo ? Hay muchos que
niegan tener miedo ; pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo fran-
camente.

23. I A que hora desperto V. ayer ? Ayer, creo que desperte
a las cinco. Despierto todos los dias a las cuatro y media.

24. e Y a que hora se desayuna Y. ? Me desayuno a las siete,
meriendo a las dos y como a las seis.

25. I Me promete Y. venir hoy a comer conmigo ? No puedo
prometerselo, porque no se si tendre tiempo.

EXERCISE.

1. How cold it is this morning ! Yes, it is very cold.

2. Will you not come and warm yourself at the fire ? No,
thank you ; I do not like to warm myself at the fire.

184 LESSON XXXIV,

3. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the win-
dows. Perhaps it is.^

4. Do you intend remaining (estarse) here during the win-
ter ? If my uncle remains, I shall too.

5. Will you not choose other rooms if you remain ? Yes, I
intend to do so.

6. Good evening, Charles ; wilt not thou sit down for a few
minutes ? With pleasure.

7. Did you find out (make out) the musician's house yester-
day ? I made out the house without much difficulty, but I did
not see him.

8. How was that ? He must have been out, for I knocked
at his door.

9. At what hour do you dine ? I generally dine at six
o'clock.

10. Then you lunch at noon ? Yes, sir, I generally lunch
about that hour.

11. Do you eat fruit every day at dinner ? Not every day.

12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ?
No ; but he has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and
pay for it.

13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go ?

14. We can go to Central Park. Very well ; let us go there ;
I think it is the finest promenade in the city.

15. At what time do they open the park in the morning ? I
believe it is open in summer at five o'clock.

16. And at what time is it shut ? At eleven o'clock, I believe,
or perhaps a little later.

17. In that case it will be better not to ^o there until to-
morrow ; it is now rather too late (algo tarde).

18. How too late ? It is only half -past seven, so that we have
three hours and a half for walking.

19. Where are they taking that man to ? They are taking
him to prison (la cdrceT).

20. What are they taking him to prison for ? He must be
guilty of some misdemeanor {delinquir).

21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He
took it to him yesterday afternoon.

22. Have you seen the new^s this morning ? No ; what news
is there ?

♦ English words printed in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.

LESSON XXXV, 185

23. There was a great fire last night on Fourth street, and
twelve houses were burned.

24. Where is Alexander ? He is up-stairs.

25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary ? Yes, I
had it this morning in my room.

2^. What were you doing with it ? I was looking for a new
word which I met with * while reading the history you lent me.

27. How did you manage (acertar) to wake so early this morn-
ing ? My brother awoke me by singing in my room, at five
o'clock.

28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one comes
to interrupt (interrumpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine.

29. Is it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainly ;
but then it is necessary to go to bed early also.

30. Why do you not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading
and study, and so I rarely go to bed before two o'clock in the
morning (de la madrugada).

LESSON XXXY.

IRREGULAR VERBS— Continued,

Acostar. I To put to bed.

INDICATIVE — Present.
Acuesto, acuestas, acuesta. I I put to bed, &c.
Acostamos, acostais, acuestan. I We put to bed, &c.

IMPERATIVE.

, , , , J , I J Put (thou) to bed.

Acuesfa tu,acostadvosotros. | | p^t (you) to bed.

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present.

Acueste, acuestes, acuueste, acos-
temos, acosteis, acuesten.

I may, or can, put to bed, &;c.

VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE ACOSTAR.

Acostarse.

Aprobar.

Almorzar.

To go to bed, to lie down.
To approve.
To breakfast.

' English words in italics are not to be translated.

186

LESSON XXXV.

Contar.

Consolar.

Encontrar.

Mostrar.

Probar.

Recordar.

Reprobar.

Rogar.

Sonar.

To count ; to relate, or tell.

To console.

To meet.

To show.

To prove ; to try ; to taste.

To remind ; to remember.

To reprove.

To entreat.

To dream.

Delicioso.

Delicious.

Espacioso.

Spacious.

Industrioso.

Industrious.

Religioso.

Religious.

Aristocratico.

Aristocratic.

Clasico.

Classic.

Fanatico.

Fanatic.

Monarquico.

MonarchicaL

Tiranico.

Tyrannical.

Tragico.

Tragic.

Poetico.

Poetical.

Analitico.

Analytical.

Satirico.

Satirical.

Filosofico.

Philosophical.

Comico.

Comic, comical.

Economic©.

Economical.

Laconico.

Laconic.

Metodico.

Methodical.

Cronico.

Chronic.

Vaso.

Sermon.

Mundo.

Capitulo.

Perro.

Tumbler, glass.

Sermon.

World.

Chapter.

Bog.

Taza. Cup.

Moral. Moral.

Repiiblica. Republic.

Independencia. Independence.

Religion. Religion.

COMPOSITION.

Manuel, acuestate temprano y levan-

tate temprano tambien.
Alejandro, cuentame lo que te dijo

Luisa.

Emanuel, go to bed early and rise

early too.
Alexander, tell me what Louisa told

thee.

LESSON XXXV.

187

Ayudate y Dios te ayudara.

Ama a tu projimo como a ti mismo.
Se religiose, pero no seas fanatico.
Se industrioso y economico y no se-

ras pobre.
Sentemonos, que estoy cansado.
Amaos como hermanos y no hableis

mal uno del otro.
Entre V., Dn. Pedro, y tome V.

asiento, or sientese V.
No puedo, estoy de prisa.
Juan, cierra la puerta, pero no cierres

la ventana.
Caballeros, entren Vds., y les mos-

trare mis libros.
Alejandro, confiesa tu falta y te la

perdonare.
No los ofendamos.
Amigos, cantemos y bailemos y sea-

raos felices.
No tomaras en vano el nombre del

Seiior.tu Dios.

Help thyself, and God will help

thee.
Love thy neighbor as thyself.
Be religious, but not fanatical.
Be industrious and economical and

thou wilt not be poor.
Let us sit down, for I am tired.
Love each other as brothers, and

speak no evil one of another.
Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or

be seated,
I cannot, I am in a hurry.
John, shut the door, but do not shut

the window.
Come in, gentlemen, and I shall

show you my books.
Alexander, confess thy fault, and I

shall pardon thee.
Let us not offend them.
My friends, let us sing, dance and

be merry.
Thou shalt not take the name of the

Lord thy God in vain.

EXPLANATION.

173. The verb acostar is irregular in the same forms as
acertar^ and changes the o of the stem to ue. {See this verb
and those conjugated like it near the end of the book.)

174. The IMPERATIVE MODE is used for commanding or
inciting, and its only true forms are the second persons, sin-
gular and plural. The subjunctive is used to take the place
of the first and third persons, as will be seen more fully later.
The IMPERATIVE may not be used with negatives, but, instead,
the SUBJUNCTIVE ; as,

No lo hagas. )
No lo hagais. f

Do not do it.

175. As has already been said, the s of the first person
plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and
OS ; as.

Amemonos.
Amaos.

Let us love each other.
Love one another.

188 LUSSOj!^ XXXV.

176. When the subjunctive is substituted for the nega«
tive imperative, the objective pronouns are placed before
it ; as,

No lo digas. I Do not tell it.

No los ofendamos. ' Let us not offend them.

177. The future of the indicative is often used as a soft-
ened imperative in stating commands ; as,

No tomaras en vano el nombre del i Thou shalt not take the name of the
Senor tu Dios. ' • Lord thy God in vain.

178. Many English adjectives ending in otcs are rendered
into Spanish by changing this termination into oso ; as,
Delicioso. I Delicious.

Espacioso. I Spacious, &c.

179. Many English nouns and adjectives ending in ic or
ical have in Spanish the termination ico ; as,

Fanatico. I Fanatic, fanatical.

Poettco. I Poetic, poetical.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Luisa, estudia bien tu leceion de espanol y escribe los
ejercicios.

2. e Que me dara V., papa, si la estudio bien y no hago faltas
en los ejercicios ? Te llevare conmigo al Parque Central.

3. Papa, I no lie vara V. a Alejandro y a Manuel con noso-
tros ? Si son buenos muchachos y estudiosos los llevare tambien.

4. Alejandro, ven aca y cuentame que hiciste ayer en el
campo. — Con mucho gusto. Por la maiiana me levante tem-
prano, me lave y almorce y despues fui a pasearme. Volvi muy
cansado y me acoste a las nueve.

5. i Juan ! i Senor ? Manana me despertaras a las cinco,
me limpiaras las botas y me traeras el caballo temprano, porque
quiero ir a dar un paseo y tomar un vaso de leche en el hotel del
Parque Central.

6. Amigo mio, no seas fanatico, pero se religioso. No seas
satirico ni hablador, pero se prudente, economico e industrioso y
seras feliz.

7. Por Dios, Don Pedro, no hable V. mas, le prometo a V.
estudiar y ser buen muchacho.

LESSON XXXV, 189

8. No seas respondon, haz tu deber, ayiidate y Dios te ayu-
dara.

9. Don Pedro, a mi no me gustan los sermones largos, sien-
tese V. y hablemos de otra cosa.

10. Mire V., Dn. Juan, a aquella senorita que esta en la ven-
tana del vecino ; i la conoce V. ? Si, senor, la conoci en Fila-
delfia.

11. I Que tal le gusta a V. ? Muchisimo ; es una senorita per-
f ecta, y habla el espanol tan bien como el ingles.

12. I Quiere V. llevarme a su casa ? Tengo deseo de conocerla.
— Con mucho gusto, pero antes necesito la aprobacion de. ella.

13. I Le aman a V. mucho sus ninos ? Me aman y yo los
amo ; y toda la familia nos amamos los unos a los otros, asi es
que somos felicisimos.

14. i Se aman Vds. los unos a los otros tanto como se aman
Vds. m ism OS ? Creo que si.

15. Hable Y. alto y despacio si V. gusta y entonces entendere
todo lo que V. dice. — Asi lo hare ; pero V. no pensara en otra
cosa que en lo que yo digo, porque si no, no hablare mas.

16. I Le conviene a V. comprar aquella casa ? No me con-
viene, porque es muy cara y esta muy lejos de la ciudad.

17. I Que le parece a V. del tiempo ? Hoy es el cuatro de
Julio de 1866, y por supuesto hace calor ; pero hace muy buen
tiempo para la celebracion de la independencia de esta gran
Repiiblica.

18. I Cuantos aiios hace hoy que los Estados Unidos celebran
su independencia ? Ciento veinte y dos alios.

19. I Parece imposible ! En un poco mas de cien anos ha lle-
gado esta nacion a ser una de las potencias {powers) mas grandes
del mundo.

20. Eso debia ser asi, y no dude V. que llegara un dia en que
la libertad y la religion reinaran en el mundo haciendo felices a
todas las naciones como a otras tantas familias que tienen un
mismo padre.

EXERCISE.

1. Did you get up late to-day ? No ; I got up at daybreak to
go to walk in the country.

2. Where did you walk ? I went first to Central Park, and
then to Harlem.

3. What is the first thing we read in Telemachus ? We read

190 LESSON XXXV.

that Calypso could not console herself for the departure {par-
tida) of Ulysses.

4. Where have you been all this time, sir ? it is more than a
week since you last came to see us ; that is not right {estar hien),
I confess I am rather negligent (negligente) sometimes.

5. You have doubtless already gone to see your old friend ?
Yes, and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his
country house.

6. What part of the country does he live in ? On Long
Island, about ten miles from the city.

7. Was not he glad to see you ? We looked at each other
for about ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last
(en fin) he broke the silence (rompio el silencio), and said to
me: "What! is it you, my dear friend? After seven years'
absence (ausencia) ! How glad I am ! "

8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew
him, though I met him at some distance from his father's house.

9. Doubtless he asked you about your travels ? Of course.
" Where have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ?
what have you seen ? are you rich ? are you happy ? Tell me
all you have done since you went away (irse) ; all your adven-
tures. I wish it ; I desire it ; I beg it of you ; it will give (you
will do) me the greatest pleasure."

10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. Yes, I know that ;
but how many questions !

11. Did he wish an answer to each one of them ? Of course ;
and I answered them as well as I could.

12. What did you tell him ? I told him that after having
left France, I went to Spain, and from there into Portugal (Por-
tugaT), and that after a few months passed in Lisbon (Lishod) I
went on to Italy, where I remained four years.

18. What are the hours for breakfast and dinner among the
Italians ? The Italians, like the French, usually (generally)
breakfast at eleven o'clock, and dine between five to seven in
the evening.

14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast
hour ? Almost everybody takes a cup of cofPee or chocolate
in the morning soon after rising.

15. What kind of governments are there in Europe ? In
Europe we find almost every form (forma) of government,
republican and monarchical.

LFSSON XXX VL 191

16. What is that book you have in your hand ? An analyt-
ical treatise (tratado) on Spanish poetry that I was going to
show to your cousin.

17. Have you seen Boileau's satirical poems ? My uncle has
promised to bring me that work from Paris.

18. Are you fond of reading ? Yes, I take (find) great pleas-
ure in reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religious,
analytical, satirical, philosophical, &c.

19. Do you remember the peaches our friend sent us from the
country last year ? Of course I remember them, and that they
were delicious.

20. Charles, go and have your breakfast ; I wish to take you
to see the fine horse your uncle has bought for Alexander.

21. Will you not buy one for me, too, papa ? If you are a
good boy I probably shall.

22. Do you ever dream ? Very often ; last night I dreamed I
was travelling.

23. Indeed ! Where were you going ? I do not remember
now.

24. What was your father saying to Peter when I came in ?
He was reproving him for not having written his exercise yes-
terday.

25. Can you tell me what day this is ? To-day is Wednesday,
July 4th, of the year 1866, and the ninety-first of the Independ-
ence of the United States.

LESSON XXXYI.

Respetar.

Parar.

Mover.

To respect.
To stop.
To move.

INDICATIVE — Present.
Muevo, mueves, mueve, move- 1 I move, &;c.
mos, moveis, mueven. I

IMPERATIVE.

Mueve tii, moved vosotros. | Move, &;c.

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present.
Mueva, muevas, mueva, mova- 1 I may move, &;c.
mos, movais, muevan. I

192

LESSON XXXVI.

Verbs conjugated

like MOVER.

Llover.

To rain.

Morder.

To bite.

Doler.

To grieve, to ]

3ain, to ache.

Volver.

To turn, to re
Before.

turn.

Antes que.

Aunque.

Although.

Como.

Since, provided.

Para que.
Afinde. '

io.

In order that,
Everybody.

in order to.

Todo el mun<

Principalmei

ite.
Antagonist.

Principally, c
Atrocidad.

hiefly.

Antagonista.

Atrocity.

Artista.

Artist.

Capacidad.

Capacity.

Materialista.

Materialist.

Claridad.

Clearness,

Naturalista.

Naturalist.

light.

Organista.

Organist.

Crueldad.

Cruelty.

Violinista.

Violinist.

Dificultad.

Difficulty.

Purista.

Purist.

Eternidad.

Eternity.

Escritorio.

Office.

Facilidad.

Facility. '

Clima.

Climate.

Noticias.

News.

Dolor.

Grief, pain,

ache.

Guerra.

War.

COMPO

sn

:iON.

Se dice que Maximiliano ha partido

de Mexico.
i Se eree eso ?
Aqui lo eree todo el mundo; pero

en Francia no se eree.
I Cree V. que se podra pagar pronto

la deuda de los Estados Unidos ?
No se hara muy pronto ; pero se

hara.
Aqui se habla espafiol.
Aqui se vende buen vino.
Se perdona algunas veces a los de-

lincuentes, pero no siempre.
El hombre se engana a si mismo.
jEnvio V. el violin al violinista?

Se lo en vie.

It is said that Maximihan has left
Mexico.

Is that believed ?

Here everybody believes it ; but in
France it is not believed.

Is it thought that the United States
debt can soon be paid ?

It will not be done very soon ; but
it will be done.

Spanish spoken here.

Good wine sold here.

Transgressors are pardoned some-
times, but not always.

Men deceive themselves.

Did you send the violin to the vio-
linist ?

I sent it to him, or did send it to him.

LESSOJSr XXXVI.

193

I Tocan bien el piano en Espana ?

En Espana se toca bien la guitarra.
^Se habla bien el espanol en la

America del Sur?
Lo hablan y pronuncian bien.

I, Le duele a V. la cabeza 1

Si, senor, mucho.

^ Como se llama V. ?

Me llamo Juan.

I Como se llama eso en espafiol ?

^ Como se dice eso en espanol ?

Lo mismo qu^ <;n ingles.

Do they play well on the piano in

Spain ?
They play the guitar well in Spain.
Do they speak Spanish well in South

America ?
They speak it and pronounce it

well.
Does your head ache ?
Yes, sir, very much.
What is your name 1
My name is John.
What is that called in Spanish 1
How do you (or, do they) say that

in Spanish ?
The same as in English.

EXPLANATION.

180. MovEE, to move, is irregular in the same forms as
acostar ; i. e., in the first, second, and third persons singular,
and the third person plural, of the indicative and subjunc-
tive modes, and in the second person singular of the impera-
tive. {See this verh^ and those conjugated Mice it^ at the end
of the hooh.)

181. Se is an indefinite personal pronoun referring to a
personal agency in such a manner as to leave undetermined
both the sex and the number of the subject. It corresponds,
in this- respect, to the English we^ they., people^ one or it\ in
fact, with all expressions that mention persons thus vaguely
and indefinitely. It is used with the third person singular
of the verb ; as,

It is said, or they say.

It is believed, or they believe.

They (people) will not do it, or it

will not be done.
Good wine is sold here.
Spanish is spoken here.

Se dice.
Se cree.
No se hard.

Aqui se vende vino bueno.
Aqui se habla espaSol.

182. The four uses of the pronoun se have now been illus-
trated ; and it may be well to state them all again, in order
that its various functions may be well understood so as to
avoid all confusion. They are the following :
15

194 LESSON XXXVI.

1st. As an indefinite subject, as has been seen in the pres-
ent lesson ; as,
Se dice. I They say.

2d. To form the passive voice of verbs (see Lesson
XXXII.) ; as,

Se perdona algunas veces a los de- 1 Transgressors are sometimes par-
lincuentes. I doned.

3d. As a reflexive pronoun ; as,

Manuel se engana. 1 Emanuel deceives himself.

4th, and lastly, the objective pronoun se, for the sake of
euphony, takes the place of the objectives le, la, lo, les (see
Lesson XXVII.) ; as,
Se lo pagare a V. manana. 1 1 will pay it to you to-morrow.

183. Many English nouns ending in ty may be changed
into Spanish by substituting dad for this syllable ; as,

AciiYidad, ('Activity.

CapacicZa^Z. I Capacity.

!N". B. — All nouns of this termination are feminine. Many
English nouns ending in ist, are rendered into Spanish by
adding to these letters an a ; as,

Artista. | Artist.

Organista. I Organist, &c.

184. DoLEK. — This verb is used in the same manner as
the verb gustar, to like (see Lesson XXXI.) ; as,

I, Le duele a V". la cabeza ? | Does your head ache ?

The same may be expressed in the following manner :
i Tiene V. dolor de cabeza ? 1 Have you a headache ?

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Se vende buen vino en Nueva York ? Se vende bueno
y male ; pero muy caro.

2. I Que noticias hay ? Se dice que la Alemania y la Italia
estan en guerra.

3. I Se cree eso ? No solo se cree, sine que se sabe que la
guerra ha principiado ya.

LESSON XXX VL 195

4. i Se habla espanol en Nueva York ? En Nueva York se
hablan todos los idiomas, pero principalmente el ingles, el ale-
man, el frances y el espanol.

5. I Se aman los franceses y los ingleses ? Creo que no se
aman como hermanos ; pero se respetan.

6. ^ A quien se ama mas en este pais, a los franceses 6 a los
ingleses ? Es cosa que no sabre decir.

7. I En los Estados Unidos se respetan las iglesias de todas
las religiones ? Si, senor, porque hay libertad de religion ; es
una cosa muy buena para el pais, y yo la deseo para todas las
naciones del mundo.

8. Hablemos de otra cosa, porque todos no son tan liberales
como V. ; y no se hara Y. amigos si habla tan francamente.

9. Convengo con V. en eso, ademas no se debe decir todo
lo que se piensa ; pero para aprender una lengua se debe prac-
ticar mucho y se debe hablar de todo un poco.

10. Y. tiene razon en eso, y una conversacion en que no se
habla, sino de ** si hace calor 6 frio, si ha estado Y. en el teatro,
en el concierto, 6 en la iglesia, y de si tiene Y. el sombrero y el
fusil, y el vino, y el dinero de Y. 6 del vecino " es muy cansada.

11. Por supuesto ; pero Y. debe saber que lo que se llama en
ingles small talk * es muy de moda. — Lo se, es muy de moda, y
hasta necesario algunas veces.

12. I Le dijo Y. eso a su amigo ? No se lo dije, porque mi
hermana se lo habia dicho ya.

13. I Por que no me lo dijo Y. a mi ? Porque mi hermano
me ha dicho que se lo dira a Y. maiiana.

14. i Toca Dn. Pedro bien el piano ? No, seiior, pero se en-
gaiia a si mismo y cree tocarlo muy bien.

15. Yengase Y. esta tarde por aqui, e iremos a dar un paseo.
— Bien, si Y. me espera hasta las seis, vendre, pero no antes, por-
que no puedo salir del escritorio hasta esa hora.

16. I Que tal tiempo ha hecho hoy en la ciudad ? Hoy ha
hecho buen tiempo y ayer hizo buen tiempo tambien ; pero ma-
iiana hara mal tiempo.

17. I Como sabe Y. que hara mal tiempo maiiana ? Porque
en Nueva York no hace nunca buen tiempo por tres dias.

18. i Y. cree que no hace buen tiempo mas que (sino) en la
Habana ? Perdone Y. no me gusta el clima de la Habana ni el
de Nueva York.

* Charla,

196 LESSON XXXVI.

19. Entonces, ^ que clima le gusta a V. ? El de Espana, por-
que alii tenemos verdaderamente las cuatro estaciones.

20. I Que quiere V. decir ? Quiero decir que en Espana hace
calor en verano aunque no muchisimo ; en invierno hace frio,
pero no nos helamos ; en otono hace un excelente tiempo de
otoiio, y en la primavera tenemos primavera.

21. I Bien, j no es lo mismo en Nueva York ? Dispense V. ;
en Nueva York no he conocido la primavera ; hay muy pocos
dias de otoiio, un invierno larguisimo y un verano calurosisimo.

22. e Y en ]a Habana ? En la Habana hay todo el aiio el
Verano de Nueva York.

23. I Yo pensaba que a V. no le gustaba hablar del tiempo ?
V. no me ha entendido ; creo que debe hablarse de todo, pero no
siempre del tiempo.

EXERCISE.

1. Why do you not come more quickly vrhen I call you ? I
cannot come any more quickly, my head aches.

2. Where do you think Spanish is spoken best ? In Madrid,
and in all parts of Old and New Castile (Castilla).

3. And is it not spoken well in South America ? There is
some difPerence in the pronunciation ; but, in general, people of

. education speak correctly, whether they be * South Americans
or Spaniards.

4. William, will you be good enough to take this letter to
the post-office as you go to take your lesson ? I shall take it in
the afternoon ; I have not time now.

5. Are there many organists in the United States ? Yes ;
and in New York, principally, there are a great many excellent
organists and pianists.

6. Do you like that man's manner of speaking ?. No, I do
not ; he is too much of ai purist.

7. Is your brother studying natural history ? I cannot tell
you whether (si) he is studying it or not ; but I know he has
just bought the complete works of Buffon.

8. Who is Buifon ? A celebrated French naturalist.

9. What did that man do who was taken to prison this
morning ? They say he was arrested (arrestar) for cruelty to
animals.

* Ya sean.

f English words in italics are not to be translated into Spanish.

LESS ON XXX VL ' 197

10. Will he be punished for it ? Of course ; transgressors of
that kind are rarely let off unpunished (pardoned).

11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him on
the hand.

1,2. Come here, Alexander ; show me your hand. Is this the
cne ? No, it is the other.

13. Does it pain you much ? It was very painful (pained)
when I was first bitten, but now it is less so.

14. I have always told you how necessary it is to be careful
with dogs. I know that ; and I shall do so in future.

15. Does your new watch run well ? Not very well ; it stops
three or four times a day.

16. Is your son getting on well in his studies ? Fairly well ;
he has a great deal of ability, and is fond of study.

17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish ?

18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh ! I can do
that with the greatest ease.

19. Well, let us see ? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven,
eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen,
seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty -one, thirty, forty,
fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one,
two hundred, three hundred, four hundred, five hundred, six hun-
dred, seven hundred, eight hundred, nine hundred, a thousand.

20. How do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not
remember.

21. What is that ? you do not remember ! Did you not learn
in the lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the gram-
mar, that in Spanish every word is written just as it is pro-
nounced ? Oh, yes, now I remember.

22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R, is French as easy to pro-
nounce as Spanish ? They say that, on the contrary, it is much
more difficult.

23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ?
I did not say that; I only said that they say it is more difficult
than Spanish pronunciation.

24. How do I pronounce ? Very well ; but, in reading or
speaking, take a little more care with the z.

25. Please pronounce the name of that letter again (to return
to pronounce) ? With the greatest pleasure ; it is called z.

26. What other letter (letra) is pronounced like (the) z ? C,
when it comes (finds itself) before an e or an i.

198

LESSON XXX VIL

lesso:n: xxxvii.

Subir.
Atender.

I To go up, or come up, to ascend.
I To attend.

INDICATIVE — Present,

I attend, &;c.

Atiendo, atiendes^ atiende,
atendemos, atendeis, atien-
den.

IMPERATIVE.

Atiende tii, atended vosotros. | Attend, &;c.

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present.
Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- 1 1 may, or can, attend, &;c.
damos, atendais, atiendan. I

Verbs conjugated like atender.

Ascender.

To ascend, to mount.

Descender.

To descend.

Defender.

To defend.

Entender.

To understand.

Encender.

To light, to kindle.

Perder.

To lose.

Alegrarse.

To be glad, to rejoice.

Charlar.

To prattle, to chat.

Hallar.

To find.

Llegar.

To arrive.

Enviar.

To send.

Preparar.

To prepare.

COXJUN

CTIONS.

Con tal que.

On condition that; provided

(that).

Puesto que.

Since, inasmuch as; supposing

that.

Dado caso que.

In case.

Hasta.

Until, till.

Aun cuando.

Even, although.

Por tanto.

Therefore.

Por cuanto.

Seeing that, for.

A menos de. )
A menos que. )

Unless.

LESSON XXXVII.

199

Tambien.
Ademas.

Also, too.
Moreover, besides.

Ya.

Tampoco.

Whether, either.
Neither.

Ojala.

Would to God, God grant.

Vapor.

^ Vapor.
( Steamer.

Altura. Height.
Friolera. Trifle.

Globo.
Resfriado,

Balloon.
Cold.

Estada, perma-'Stay, pern
nencia. nence.

COMPOSITION.

Deseo que este estudiando su leccion.
Creo que la esta estudiando.
I Piensa V. que tiene razon ?
No pienso que la tenga. '

No lo creere aunque me lo digan

mil.
Lo creo aunque el lo niega.
Dudo que venga hoy.
Dudo que haya venido.
Dado caso que V. no me encuentre

en casa, aguardeme V. hasta que

venga.
Asi lo hare con tal que V. me pro-

meta volver pronto.

Volvere tan pronto com^ pueda.
Temo que no haya recibido mi carta.
; Ojala que no la reciba ! pero yo

temo que la recibira.
A menos que V. venga primero a

verme, yo no ire a verle a V.
Puesto que el haya venido, i le ha-

blara V. ?
Aunque haya venido no le hablare

antes qua el me hable.

I wish him to study his lesson.

I think he is studying it.

Do you think he is right f

I do not think he is.

I shall not believe it though a

thousand tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it.
I doubt whether he will come to-day.
I doubt his having come.
In case you should not find me at

home, wait for me till I come.

I shall do so, on condition you prom-
ise me to come back soon (or
quickly).

I shall return as soon as I can.

I fear he has not received my letter.

God grant that he may not receive
it ! but I fear he will (receive it).

Unless you come first to see me, I
shall not go to see you.

Supposing him to have come, will
you speak to him ?

Although he have come I shall not
speak to him before he speaks to me.

EXPLANATION.

185. Ateistdek, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated
like it, take an i before the last e of the radical letters in the
same form as acertar ; i. e., in the first, second and third per-

200 LESSON XXX VIL

sons singular, and third plural of the present indicative, and
the present subjunctive, and in the second person singular of
the imperative. {See page 394.)

186. The SUBJUNCTIVE mode is that form of the verb by
which are expressed condition^ hypothesis^ contingency^ and
which is generally used in a clause subjoined or subordinate
to another clause or verb, and is preceded by certain conjunc-
tions ; as, que^ aunque^ a fin de que^ con tal que^ antes que^ &c.

As none of the modes of the English verb correspond ex-
actly to the Spanish subjunctive ; and as the tenses of the
latter are often employed to express ideas, which, in English,
are conveyed by those of the indicative or the potential, and
not unfrequently by the infinitive, pupils experience much
difficulty in determining when the subjunctive is to be used.
Were we to give all the rules necessary for the correct use of
this mode, a whole volume might be filled ; we shall therefore
give here those most needed to guide the student in all ordi-
nary cases.

187. The subordinate verb is put in the subjunctive when
the leading verb means admiratio7i^ wish^ willy desire^ consent ^
prohibition^ hinderance, necessity^ command^ douht^ regret^
joy^ usefulness^ contentment^ hope^ fear^ surprise^ ignorance^
prefer ence^ negation^ permission^ sorrotv, &c.

The subjunctive mode is here required because we are
not positive that what we wish, command, &c., will be accom-
plished ; but the same verb which governs the subordinate
one in any of the tenses of the subjunctive, when the accom-
plishment of the action is doubtful, governs it in any of those
of the indicative when the action is regarded as certain to
take place ; as,

Deselo V. a los que )

hayan Tenido. \ doubtful.
Deselo V. a los cuatro )

que/ianyenido. \ Oertain.

In the first example, the verb is put in the subjunctive,
because the speaker is not positive how many have come, or
whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative

Grive it to those who (may) have

come.
Give it to the four who have (or are)

come.

LESSON XXXVII. 201

is employed, because the speaker is certain that the persons
alluded to have arrived, and is also informed as. to their
number.

188. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re-
quire the subjunctive mode after them, on account of the in-
definite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have.
Some of them, however, it will be seen, occasionally occur
with a positive signification, and may, in that case, take the
indicative ; as,

No lo creere aunque ) ^ ,.

, , . ./ y Contingent.

me lo digan mil. ) ^

Lo creo aunque el \

me lo niega.

y Certain.

I will not believe it though a thou-
sand tell it to me.

I believe it, although he denies it
(to me).

189. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even
whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and
doubtful, or contingent, meaning, require the subjunctive
after them.

190. The PEESEN^T TEN^SE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE marks a
contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to
take place at some future time ; as,

Dudo que venga. 1 1 doubt whether he will come.

N. B. — Another use of this mode and tense has been
noticed already in treating of the imperative. (See Lesson
XXXY.)

191. The PERFECT TENSE expresscs a doubtful or contin-
gent action or event, as having been completed some time
past, or that will have taken place before the completion of
another future action or event ; as,

I doubt whether he has come.

I shall give him his book when he

Dudo que haya venido.

!'o le dare su librc

haya dado el mio.

Yo le dare su libro cuando el ^me

will have given me mine.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Espera Y. que Hague hoy el vapor de Europa ? Creo
que ha llegado esta maiiana.

2. Yo dudo que haya llegado todavia. l Quiere V. enviar su
criado para preguntar si ha llegado el vapor ? Con mucho gusto,
porque yo tambien deseo tener noticias de Europa.

202 LESSOJ^ XXXVIL

3. i Cree T. que llegara un dia en que podamos ir a Europa
en globos aereostaticos ? Mucho me alegrare que llegue ese dia,
pero creo que no lo veremos nosotros, porque es muy dificil, j
quiza imposible, el hallar la direceion de los globos.

4. I Suben muy alto los globos ? No creo que suban a mas
de dos 6 tres mil pies, pero si se quiere pueden subir hasta la
altura de quince 6 diez y seis mil pies.

5. Dado caso que llegue hoy el vapor ; g espera V. a su amigo ?
For supuesto que si, puesto que me escribe que llegara en este
mismo vapor.

6. Ojala que llegue, pero temo mucho que haya tornado otro
vapor y que no llegue liasta la semana proxima.

7. I Duda V. que haya estudiado su leccion ? Dudo que la
haya estudiado, porque es muy holgazan.

8. A menos que V. estudie bien las lecciones y haga con
mucho cuidado los ejercicios de la gramatica, no aprendera V.
el espanol.

9. Si, pero yo creia que se podia aprender una lengua con
solo la practica. — Asi es ; pero entonces se necesita practicar
todos los dias con quien la hable muy bien.

10. I En cuanto tiempo piensa V. que hablare yo el espanol ?
V. lo hablara cuando sepa bien todas las lecciones de la grama-
tica, y haya practicado y escrito los ejercicios.

11. Y despues que haya aprendido toda la gramatica, practi-
cado, y escrito los ejercicios, i hablare perfectamente el espanol ?
No, senor; pero hablara Y. bastante correctamente para llevar
una conversacion, escribir una correspondencia, y poder hacer
negocios en esta lengua.

12. Yo pensaba que el espaiiol era una lengua muy facil. —
Verdaderamente lo es para aprender lo que acabo de decirle a
V. ; pero para hablarlo perfectamente como V. quiere, todas las
lenguas son dificiles.

13. Y si V. no lo cree, hagame el favor de decirme si habla
V. su propia lengua y la escribe perfectamente. — Yo confieso que
todavia tengo algo que aprender en el ingles.

14. Creame V., amigo mio, el estudio de una lengua no es
una friolera. — Creo que tiene V. mucha razon ; pero hay muchos
que quieren aprenderlo todo y muy pocos que qfuieran estudiar.

15. i Me promete V. venir a verme cuando venga a la ciudad ?
Aunque venga a la ciudad no podre venir a ver a V. a menos
que acabe temprano mis negocios.

LESSON XXX VIL 203

16. i Sabe V. hacer frases (phrases) en espaiiol con todos los
tiempos del modo indicative ? Si, seiior, y tambien con el im-
perativo, el presente y el perfecto de subjuntivo.

17. Muy bien, entonces hagame V. ocho frases con los ocho
tiempos de indicativo, una con el imperativo y dos con el pre-
sente y perfecto de subjuntivo de cualquier verbo.

18. I Esta V. malo ? i Ha estado V. hoy en el escritorio ?
g Estaba V. en su casa cuando su amigo fue a verlo ? e Habia
V. estado en el teatro antes de ir al baile ? i Estuvo Y. ayer en
la ciudad ? i Que hizo V. asi que hubo estado algiin tiempo en
el hotel ? I Estara V. en casa manana todo el dia ? i Habra
escrito V. su ejercicio antes de las cuatro ? Estudia tus leccio-
nes y escribe los ejercicios. No pierdas el tiempo. i Duda V.
que yo sepa mi leccion ? i Duda V. que yo la haya estudiado ?

EXERCISE.

1. John, there is some one at the door ; go and see who it is.
Yes, sir.

2. Is Mr. Retortillo in ? Yes, sir ; who shall I say wishes to
see him ? Tell him that Mr. Perez wishes to speak to him a
moment.

3. Mr. Perez wishes to see you a moment, sir. Let {que) him
come up.

4. Oh ! I am so glad to see you ! How are you ? how have
you been ? when did you return ? — I arrived by the steamer
Napoleon III., on Wednesday last.

5. Did you receive all the letters I wrote you during {du-
rante) my absence ? I received one in March, dated at Rome.

6. How did you spend the time ? did you pass through Spain,
as you had intended ? No ; while I was still in Paris, and pre-
paring to set out for Madrid, I learned that my brother was very
ill in Florence.

7. Indeed ! I am very sorry to hear that. What was the
matter with him (what had he) ? A heavy (strong) cold, that
he had caught on his way from Turin to Florence.

8. He had not, I believe, enjoyed very good health for a long
time before leaving home ? No, he has always been sickly ; but
principally for about a year before his voyage to Europe, he had
colds almost every month, and I may say that he was never
without headaches, day or night.

9. Had he an Italian physician to attend him ? No, Dr.

204 LFSSO^'' XXX VIL

Perez, his family physician, who was travelling through Italy
that same winter, just arrived at Florence the same day as my
brother, and, hearing of his illness, went at once {inmediata-
mente) to see him.

10. How long was he ill ? Nearly three weeks.

11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let
us chat for half an hour about your family. Thank you ; I can-
not stay any longer now, but I shall have the pleasure of seeing
you again to-morrow.

12. Where are your brothers ? They are gone to see the bal-
loon that is to go up this afternoon.

13. Indeed ? I thought the balloon was not to go up until
Saturday. It was not to have gone up until Saturday ; but, on
account of the fine weather, it is to go up this afternoon.

14. Will many persons go up in it ? Very few, I think ; peo-
ple in general do not like to go to such a height.

15. Do you understand all that is said in Spanish ? I under-
stand more and more every day ; but there are still many words
and constructions that I do not know. •

16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand
all, and speak like a native ? That is a hard question to answer ;
provided you study with attention, read a great deal, and prac-
tice with Spaniards, you will soon understand and speak with
ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner to speak any language ex-
actly like a native.

17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say
it is impossible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not
think it is necessary. All that is required (wanted) is correct-
ness, and the ability to converse with ease.

18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does
not wish it to be lighted until he returns.

19. Well, Charles, have you found out * the meaning of the
word you asked me about yesterday ? No, sir ; I have searched
for it in all the dictionaries, and it is not to be found in any of
them.

20. Why do you not ask your teacher ? he can tell you im-
mediately. Yes, I know that very well ; but I do not like to ask
him so many questions : every day he comes I have a new one
to ask him.

21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind ; your teacher is very

* English words italicized are not to be translated^

LESSON XXXVIIL

205

glad to be able to answer all questions, knowing that by that
means (medio) you will learn better and more quickly.

22. I am very glad to see you defend him, for Alexander
said he was not fond of answering questions, and did not like
inquisitive persons. — Nor does he ; but an inquisitive person is
one thing, and a person who asks questions in order to gain
knowledge is another.

LESSON XXXYIII,

Sentir. {See conjugation of \

To feel, to be sorry for, to re-

this verb near

end of

gram-

gret.

mar.)

Verbs

conjugat

^d like SENTIR.

Arrepentirse.
Consentir.

To repent.
To consent.

Preferir.

To prefer.

Asegurar.
Animar.

To secure, to insure, to assure.
To animate, to encourage, to in-
duce.

Desanimar.

To dishearten, to discourage.

Ayudar.
Lnfermar.

To aid, to help.

To fall (or get) sick, to make
sick.

Exigir.

To exact, to require.

Quedar.
Perfeccionar.

To remain.

To perfect, to finish.

Usar.

To use, to wear.

Generalmente.
De memoria.

Generally.
By heart.

Ambos.

De continuo.

Both.
Continually.

Perezoso.

Exami]
Trade,

Albert.

Lazy.

Examen.

Oficio.

Alberto.

aation.
office.

1 Elena. Ellen.
Persona. Person.
Lectura. Reading, lecture.

206

LESSON XXXVIII.

Norte.

North.

Profesion. Profession.

Sur, or sud

South.

Escuela. School.

Este, oriente. East.

Muerte. Death.

Oeste.

I West.

Vida. Life.

Occidente.

Promesa. Promise.

List of the active participles or verbal nouns and adjectives formed from

the verbs already introduced.

Viviente.

Living being.

Paseante. Walker, passer-by,

Estudiante.

Student.

promenader.

Escribiente.

A lawyer's clerk,

Creyente. Believer.

a writer in a

Conveniente. Convenient, suita-

commercial

ble.

house

Importante. Important.

Residente.

Resident.

Tratante. Dealer.

Tocante (en

Concerning.

Cortante. Sharp, edged.

orden a).

Gobernante. Governing.

Reinante.

Reigning.

Contante. Ready.

Saliente.

Salient.

Doliente. Sad, afflicted,

Amante.

Lover.

mournfuL

Practicante.

Practitioner.

Principiante.

Beginner.

*

COMPO

3ITI0N.

Tocante a lo que V. me dijo el otro

dia, deseo que no se hable mas de

ello.
Entraron cantando.
Lo encontraron leyendo.
4 Que esta V. haciendo ?
Estoy leyendo.
Vengo de^comer.
Trabaja sin descansar.
El trabajar es bueno para muchas

cosas.
El descansar despues de trabajar es

necesario.
La vimos bailar.

Manuel es estudiante industrioso.
^Es V. residente de los Estados

Unidos ?
]fcl es buen creyente.

Concerning what you told me the
other day, I wish no more to be
said about it.

They came in singing.

They found him reading.

What are you doing.

I am reading.

I am coming from dinner.

He labors without resting.

Work is good for many things.

Rest after labor is necessary.

We saw her dancing.

Emanuel is an industrious student.

Are you a resident of the United

States ?
He is a good believer.

LUSSOM XXXVIII. 207

EXPLANATION.

192. Active Participles.— Many Spanish verbs have,
besides the present and past participles, another called the
active participle which is sometimes a verbal adjective and
^gain a verbal noun. Those formed from verbs of the first
conjugation end in aiite ; as, amante^ loving, lover ; and those
formed from the second and third end in iente or ente ; as,
asistente^ assistant, obediente^ obedient.

Participles of this kind cannot be formed from all verbs,
and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as
mere verbal nouns or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep-
tion of a very limited number to be found in use, such as to-
cmite^ they do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which
they are derived.

193. Present Participle. — This form of the verb, cor-
responding exactly to the English participle ending in ing,
never varies its termination in the construction of sentences.
In the first conjugation it ends in ando, and in the second
and third in iefido. It is the best means for conveying the
idea of a progressing action or state ; as,

Entraron cantando. I They came in sinking.

Le encontraron leyendo. | They found him reading.

194. The verb estar^ as has already been mentioned, is
used with the present participle in Spanish, as the verb to be
with the same participle in English ; as,

Yo estoy leyendo. 1 1 am reading.

Ellos estdn escrihiendo. I They are writing.

195. The infinitive is used in Spanish when in English
the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as
Se fue sin verlo, I He went away without seeing him.
Trabaja sin descansarse. I He labors without resting.

196. The INFINITIVE is also used as a verbal noun or pres-
ent participle, in which case it takes the masculine definite
article before it ; as,

El trahajar es bueno para la salud.
'El descansar despues de trabajar
mucho es necesario.

Work is good for the health.
Rest is necessary after much work.

208 LESSON XXXVI I I.

197. The Spanish language has a very peculiar but deli-
cate use of the present participle and the infinitive where
one or the other of these occurs in immediate connection
with a governing verb, corresponding to such English phrases
as, They entered singing^ We saw her dancing. In such a
case, when the subject of the governing verb is represented
as continuing its state or action through the appended clause,
as in the first of these sentences, it is rendered into Spanish
by the present participle; as, Ellos entraron cantando^ They
entered singing ; but if the subject is represented or under-
stood as not continuing its state or action through the ap-
pended clause, but another person or thing is introduced, the
subjoined clause is rendered by the infinitive ; as, La vimos
bailar, We saw her dancing.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Le gusta a Y. mas leer que escribir ? Me gustan ambas
cosas, pero creo que leyendo se aprende mas que escribiendo.

2. I Es estudioso ese muchacho ? No, senor, pero hoy estu-
dia mucho porque manana tienen examenes en su escuela.

3. I Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso
que lo es, pero quiza no lo sea.

4. e Que esta V. haciendo ? Estoy estudiando mi leccion de
espanol.

5. I Sintio Elena mucho la muerte de su amiga ? La sintio
tanto que se enfermo.

6. I Como se siente ahora ? Esta un poco mejor. — Me alegro
que este mejor, porque es muy buena muchacha.

7. I Puede V. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Puede prestar-
selos a v., pero no me gusta prestar dinero (to lend).

8. I Como se aprende a hablar el espaiiol ? Hablando se
appende a hablar ; del mismo modo que bailando se aprende a
bailar y haciendo zapatos se aprende a ser zapatero.

9. I Se arrepintio aquel hombre de su mala accion ? No lo
creo porque es un picaro que vive de enganar.

10. e Qne profesion li oficio tiene ? No tiene ni oficio, ni pro-
fesion ninguna, es un paseante.

11. I De donde viene V. ? Vengo de comer.

12. i I^e donde viene el viento ? Viene del Sur, pero esta ma-
nana venia del Este.

LESSON XXXVIII. 209

13. I Llueve en Nueva York cuando esta el viento al Este ?
No, seiior, generalmente llueve cuando el viento esta al Oeste.

14. Alberto, animate, se estudioso j aprende de memoria la
leccion para manana. Papa, hace mucho calor j estoy can-
sado.

15. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa un poco y vuelve a tra-
bajar despues. — Y. quiere que yo este trabajando continuamente.

16. No, querido, no quiero que trabajes demasiado ; pero
aeuerdate que en este mundo no se logra nada sin trabajar. —
Bien, papa, yo se que V. tiene siempre razon, descansare un
poco ahora y despueS acabare de estudiar mi leccion.

17. I Se quedo mucho tiempo su amigo de V. en el concierto ?
Ambos nos quedamos hasta que se acabo.

18. e Tuvieron Vds. ayer examenes en la escuela ? Ayer tuvi-
mos examen de gramatica, antes de ayer de historia, hoy de espa-
nol y maiiana lo tendremos de aritmetica.

19. Manuel, levantate y vete a la escuela. g No sabes que
hora es ? No, seiior, yo pensaba que era temprano.

20. e Como, temprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavia
tienes que lavarte y almorzar ; \ vamos, vamos, perezoso, arriba !
— Alia voy papa, alia voy; y dispenseme V., no sabia que era
tan tarde.

EXERCISE.

1. Have you heard any more concerning the matter about
which we were speaking the other day ? Nothing further ; but
I expect by to-morrow to be able to tell you something more.

2. When does your friend intend setting out * on his trip to
the South ? Probably by the end {ultimos) of November, or be-
ginning of December.

3. Is he to be long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of
how long he may be absent (ausente).

4. Concerning books to be read in order to perfect one's self
in a language, what kind do you think the best ? There is little
di£Perence in books to be used for that purpose (proposito).

5. Are there not some better than all the others ? Not that
I know of : each student will prefer those that treat of the sub-
ject he likes best.

6. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books
too difficult for them, are there not? Certainly; I thought it

* Emprender,
16

210 LESSON XXXVIIL

needless to say that beginners must needs search for books easy
to be read.

7. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful;
what do you think ? Yes ; and especially for those who take
pleasure in studying politics of the day.

8. Do you think I shall be able to understand Cervantes's
great work after I have gone through (recorrer) the whole of
the grammar ? No, sir, you will not ; you will have to read and
study a great deal before you will be able to understand thor-
oughly the writings of any of the Spanish classic authors.

9. Who is that young man we met while walking, and to
whom you spoke ? He is a lawyer's clerk.

10. Does he make much money at that occupation ? I can
not tell you ; but he is undoubtedly a man of talent {talent o).

11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa ? All but
Henry, who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent
to it.

12. I am afraid he is a very lazy boy ; he is continually ask-
ing not to be sent to school.

13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school
nor studies at home ? He wishes to study at home ; he says that
if you consent to his staying at home, he will study anything
you please.

14. Well, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and
we shall see what he does. — Very well ; but do not give him too
much to do at the beginning, for he is easily disheartened.

15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. —
That is perfectly right.

16. Tell Charles and Albert that I wish to see them, and that
I have two books for them. — I need not go to tell them ; here
they are coming.

17. Come here, boys. — Well, papa, what do you want with us ?

18. To give you these two books : one for each. — How beau-
tiful ! — Yes, that is true ; but they are something more than
beautiful : they are good.

19. What are they about ? This one treats of man in life and
of all living bein^-s ; and that one of man's state after death.

20. Now, I wish you to read a chapter, each one in his book
every day, after your lessons; and then you may go out and
walk for an hour. — Thank you, sir ; and we can assure you that
we shall do so with the greatest pleasure.

LESSON XXXIX,

211

21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat ? That is
one of those hats that were worn three summers ago. I know
that very well, for I bought it at the time they were being worn,
and I have worn it ever since.

22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal; have
you read any of his travels ? Yes, and I like them exceedingly
{muchisimo).

23. I am going to read them, too, as soon as I have time. In
what countries did he travel principally ? He has been in nearly
every country of the globe. East, West, North, and South.

24. What is the trade or profession of that person, just gone
out ? He is a physician ; he has been in this city for nearly five
years. He is an excellent practitioner.

LESSON XXXIX.

Pedir. {See conjugation near I To petition, to ask for.
end of grammar.) I

Verbs conjugated like pedir.

Competii*.

Elegir.

Medir.

Renir.

Seguir.

Rendir.

Repetir.
Servir.
Tenir.
Yestir.

Divertirse.

Casarse.

Besar.

Enamorarse.

Celebrar.

Cenar.

To contend, to compete.

To elect, to choose.

To measure.

To quarrel, to scold.

To follow.

To render ; to exhaust, to do out,

to wear out.
To repeat.
To serve.
To dye.
To dress.

To amuse one's self.

To marry ; to get (or be) married

To kiss.

To fall in love.

To celebrate, to praise, to be

glad.
To take supper.

212

LESSON XXXIX.

Presentar.

Reconocer.

Estimar.

Agradecer.

To present, to introduce one
person to the acquaintance
of another.

To recognize, to examine closely.

To estimate, to value, to esteem.

To thank, to be thankful, to be
obliged.

En hora buena.

It is well, well and good.

Asi asi.

So so.

Tal cual.

Middling, so so.

Hasta la vista.

Till I see you again.

Hasta luego.

Good-bye for a while.

Sin novedad.

Well, in a good state of health.

Medianamente.

Middling.

I Ah! (int.)

Ah!

iOh! (int.)

Oh!

Respetable.

Respectable.

Delicado.

Delicate, weak.

Infinito.

Infinite.

Junto.

Near, close to, together.

Discreto. Encantador.

Discreet. Charming.

Favor.
Beso.

Servidor.

Pie.

Honor.

Vestido.

Esposo.

Asiento.

Capitulo.

Sobrino.

Favor.

Kiss.

Servant.

Foot.

Honor.

Dress.

Husband.

Seat.

Chapter.

Nephew.

Tertulia.

Novedad.

Celebracion.

Servidora.

Ocasion.

Complacencia.

Bondad.

Party, soiree.

Novelty.

Celebration.

Servant.

Occasion.

Complaisance.

Goodness, kind-

ness.
Esposa. Wife.

Orden. Order, command.

Memorias. Regards.
Enhorabuena. Congratulation.

COMPOSITION.

4 Que le pide d V. ese hombref
No me pide nada ; me pregunta que
hora es.

What is that man asking for f
He is asking me for nothing ; he is
asking me what o'clock it is.

LESSON XXXIX.

213

Beso a V. la mano, caballero.

Beso a V. la suya.

% Como esta su f amilia de V. ?
Todos estan bien, gracias; ^y la

deV.?
Asi asi ; los ninos estan muy buenos,

pero mi esposa no se siente bien.
A los pies de V., senora.

Beso a V. la mano, caballero.

A la orden de V., Don Pedro.
Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
Buenos dias, Dofia Luisa, ^ como lo

pasa V. hoy *?
Bien, para servir a V. ; iy V. ?
Sin novedad a la disposicion de V.
Senor D. M., tengo el honor de pre-

sentarle al Sr. D. P.
Caballero, celebro la ocasion de cono-

cer a V.
Tenga Y. la bondad de darme el cu-

chillo.
Con mucho gusto.
Mil gracias.
Hagame V. el favor de decirme,

como se llama esto en espanol.
Sirvase V. tomar asiento.
Lo siento mucho, pero no puedo,

tengo que marcharme.
Tenga V. la bondad de ponerme a

los pies de su esposa de V.

I kiss your hand, sir (a Spanish ex-
pression of courtesy y used on meet-
ing or parting).

And 1 kiss yours {reply to the
above).

How is your family ?

All are well, thank you ; and yours f

So so; the children are very well,
but my wife does not feel Well.

At your feet, madam {Spanish ex*
pression of courtesy, used to

I kiss your hand, sir {ladies'' reply
to the above).

At your service, Mr. Peter.

God be with you, Mr. John.

Good morning. Miss Louisa, how do
you do to-day ?

Well, thank you ; and you I

I am very well too, thank you.

Mr. M., I have the honor to intro-
duce (or present) you to Mr. P.

I am happy to make your acquaint-
ance, sir.

Have the goodness to give me the
knife.

With much pleasure.

Thank you.

Be kind enough to tell me what you
call this in Spanish.

Please to take a seat.

I am very sorry, but I cannot, I
must be off.

Have the goodness to present my
regards to your lady (or wife).

EXPLANATION.

198. Pedir. — A paradigm will be found near the end of
the grammar, showing how this verb, and all those conju-
gated like it, change the e of their stem into i.

199. The USUAL forms of salutations, among gentle-
men in greeting each other, are the following :

214

LESSON XXXIX.

Beso a y. la mano.

Servidor de V., caballero.

A la orden de V.

Vaya V. con Dios.

Servidor de V.

Para servir a V.

Tenga V. muy buenos dias.

I kiss your hand.

Your servant, sir.

Your most obedient.

Adieu, or God be with you.

Your servant.

At your service.

Good day to you.

This last expression is used from the earliest part of the
morning till mid-day ; from which time till dark this expres-
sion is used,

Buenas tardes. | Good afternoon ;

and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting
and taking leave,

Buenas noches. I Good night.

All these expressions are used in the plural number.
In saluting a lady, or on introduction, the expressions
most frequently used are :

K los pies de V., sefiora. I

Para servirle a V., senora. |

The lady's reply is :

Beso a V. la mano, caballero, j

To inquire after another's health :

I Como lo pasa V. ? or coma esta ^

V. ? j- I How do you do f

^ Como le va a V. f

To answer :

Madam, at your feet.
At your service, madam.

I kiss your hand, sir.

Medianamente bien.

Perfectamente bien.

Para servir a V.

Muy bien, gracias.

Asi asi, or tal cual ; y V., i como lo

pasa?
Sin novedad.
A la disposicion de Y.

Fairly well.

Perfectly well.

At your service.

Very well, thank you.

So so ; and how do you do T

Oh ! nothing new.
At your service.

For introducing one person to another :

Seiior Don M., tengo el honor de I Mr. M., I have the honor of intro-
presentarle al Senor Don P. | ducing Mr. P. to you.

LESSOJSr XXXIX. 215

And the reply is :
Caballero, celebro la ocasion de

conocer a V., or
Reconozcame V. por un servidor

suyo.

For asking or requesting :
Tenga V. la bondad de darme.
Hagame V. el favor de decirme.
Sirvase V., or tenga V. la compla-
cencia de.

And for returning thanks :

Mil gracias, or

Muchisimas gracias.

Se lo agradezco d V. infinito.

Sir, I am happy to make your ac-
quaintance.
I am entirely at your service.

Have the goodness to give me.
Do me the favor to tell me.
Have the kindness to.

A thousand thanks.

Many thanks.

I am very much obliged to you.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Senor D. Juan, i que le pide a V. mi muchacho ? No me
pide nada ; me pregunta que hora es.

2. Yo creia que le pedia a V. dinero, porque el esta siempre
pidiendo centavos a todo el mundo. — Vaya ! no lo riiia V. ; a
todos los niiios les gusta que les den centavos. — Verdad es, pero
a mi no me gusta que los mios los pidan.

3. Digame V., D. Pedro, i quien es aquella senorita que esta
sentada en el sofa junto a su esposa de Y. ? Esa es una seiiorita
muy amable, hija del Senor D. Luis Martinez, familia muy res-
petable a quien conoci hace muchos aiios.

4. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de presentarme a ella ? Con
mucho gusto ; pero le advierto que no se enamore de la Seiiorita
Martinez, porque esta para casarse.

5. Pierda V. cuidado ; yo solo deseo conocerla para gozar de
su disereta conversacion. — En hora buena, venga V. y lo pre-
sentare.

6. Senorita Martinez, tengo el honor de presentar a V. el
Sefior Don Juan McLaren. — Caballero, celebro la ocasion de
conocer a V. — Seiiorita, reconozcame V. por su servidor.

7. I Ah ! aqui viene Don Alberto y su esposa.— Sirvanse Vds.
pasar adelante.

8. i Oh ! Sefior Don Pedro, me alegro mucho de encontrar a
V. por aca. Mil gracias, seiiora, soy muy feliz en volver a ver
a Vds.

216 LESSOJ^ XXXIX.

9. A los pies de V., Senorita Martinez. — Beso a V. la mano,
caballero.

10. Dona Margarita, i como esta su f am ilia de V. ? Todos
estan bien, g-racias, g y la de V. ? Asi, asi ; los nifios estan muy
buenos, pero mi esposa esta delicada.

11. Sirvase V. tomar asiento, D. Alberto. — Lo siento mucho,
pero no puedo; he prometido a mi madre volver pronto para
cenar con ella.

12. Seiioras, a los pies de Yds. Beso a Vds. la mano caballeros.

13. A la orden de V., D. Pedro. Vaya V. con Dios, D. Juan.

14. Tenga V. muy buenas noches, Dona Luisa, i como lo pasa
V. hoy ? Bien, para servir a V., e y Y. ? Sin novedad, a la dis-
posicion de Y.

15. Buenas noches, D. Pedro ; hasta manana. Hasta manana,
pongame Y. a los pies de su senora.

16. De Y. memorias de mi parte a toda la familia. — De su
parte de Y. lo estimaran mucho.

17. Adios, Manuel, i adonde vas tan de prisa ? Yoy a acom-
panar a mi hermana al teatro, y desde alii iremos a la tertulia
del Senor Marraci.

18. Celebrare que te diviertas mucho. Yo tambien pienso ir
a la tertulia del Senor Marraci ; con que, asi no te digo adios, ya
nos veremos. — Hasta la vista. — Hasta luego.

EXERCISE.

1. Good morning, Charles ! Are you never going to get up ?
— Why, how late is it ?

2. It is nearly nine o'clock ; but it is nothing new to see you
in bed at that hour. Ah ! you are always making fun of me for
lying in bed so long in the morning, and I think I rise very early.

3. Up, then, and dress yourself as quickly as possible ; I wish
you to come and breakfast with me.

4. Indeed ! What good things are you going to give me ?
You will have a first-rate breakfast, with excellent wine, followed
by delicious chocolate.

5. Tell me, my dear felloiv : I can never remember the name
of that young lady that I met at your sister's party ; what is her
name ? Oh, no matter : my sister has invited * her to dine this
evening, and if you wait for dinner with us I will introduce you
to her.

* Invitar,

LUSSON XXXIX. 217

6. Papa, here is my friend Mr. N., whom I have the pleasure
of presenting to you. I am very happy to know you, sir.

7. Be kind enough to take a seat, and excuse me an instant ;
I shall be back immediately. Certainly, sir.

8. How are your old friends the Retortillos ? They are very
well, thank you ; they are to be here this evening, so you can
have a chat with them.

9. Why did you not introduce me long ago to your father ?
I am very sorry for not having done so, and my father has often
scolded me for my neglect (negligencid).

10. Do you expect your uncle to-day ? I do not ; but if he
comes, well and good ; we shall be glad to see him.

11. Will you be good enough to give me that newspaper that
is on the chair next the window ? With the greatest pleasure.

12. What news is there this morning ? I see that a new presi-
dent (presidente) has been elected in one of the provinces of
South America.

13. They might have chosen another occasion for electing hiiKi,
I think. Ah, of course ; they are at war with Spain.

14. How much do they ask for the hoiise that is for sale on
Fifteenth street ? Father was saying yesterday that they are
asking a very high price.

15. What do you understand by a high price ? More than
the house is worth (valer).

16. You seem greatly dissatisfied at the price ; have you any
intention of buying the house ? Yes, unless it has been sold
already.

17. What news have you from Boston ? is Miss Guevara
married yet ? I have not heard from the family for a month ;
but I suppose she must be married by this time ; she was to have
been married in July.

18. Will you come and take a walk before dinner ? Ah, you
must excuse me ; believe me, I am worn out with fatigue.

19. What is that you said, Emanuel ? I have told you once,
and I shall not repeat it.

20. Do you know that young lady who is sitting on the sofa
beside your niece ? Yes ; I shall introduce you to her, if you
wish.

21. When will you introduce ine ? At once, on condition
that you will not fall in love with her.

22. Well, will you promise ? I will ; you know I am going

218

LUSSON XL.

to get married, and I only wish to enjoy her charming * conver-
sation.

23. Miss Veleta, permit me to have the honor of introducing
to you Mr. Romelio. How do you do, sir ? I am very happy to
know you, miss.

24. Well, John, what do you think of her ? That she is charm-
ing : and I am exceedingly obliged to you for introducing me.

25. Oh, Louisa ! come and look at this beautful dress.— Oh,
how beautiful ! How much did it cost ?— Only a trifle of $120.

26. How much did you pay for that last coat of yours, Alex-
ander ? — Only eighty dollars. — Not so very much {no se me hace
caro).

LESSON XL.

To conduct, to lead, to drive.

Conducir. (See conjugation of
this verb near end of gram-
mar.)

Verbs conjugated like conducir.

Producir.

To produce.

Traducir.

To translate.

Introducir.

To introduce.

Obrar.

To act.

Envidiar.

To envy.

Olvidar.

To forget.

Existir.

To exist.

Segiin (prep.)

According to.

Siquiera (conj.).

At least, even.

Colectivo.

Collective.

Particular.

Private, particular.

COLLECTI^

^E NOUNS.

Ejercito.

Army.

Tropa. Troop.

Gentio.

Crowd.

Gente. People.

Eebaiio.

Flock, herd.

Multitud. Multitude.

Par.

Pair, couple.

Docena. Dozen.

Centenares.

Hundreds.

Centena. A hundred.

Millares.

Thousands.

Mitad. Half.

* Encan

tadora.

LUSSOJSr XL,

219

El tercio.
El cuarto.
El dozavo.
El doble.

Higo.

Caracter.

Habitante.

Gobierno.

Recurso.

Monte.

Bosque.

Rio:

Lago.

Nombre.

Carnero merino.

Rincon, esquina.

The third.
The fourth.
The twelfth.
The double.

La tercera. The third.

La cuarta parte. The fourth, &c.

Una infinidad. An infinity.

Fig.

Character.
Inhabitant.
Grovernment.
Recourse, re-
sources.
Mountain.
Wood (forest).
River.
Lake.

Noun, name.
Merino sheep.
Corner.

Conciencia.

Circunstancia.

Uva.

Especie.

Naranja.

Castana.

Nuez.

Cuestion.

Produccion.

Libertad.

Causa.

Irlanda.

Naturaleza.

Conscience.

Circumstance.

Grrape.

Species, kind.

Orange.

Chestnut.

Nut.

Question.

Production.

Liberty.

Cause.

Ireland.

Nature.

COMPOSITIOlSr.

Obro segun su conciencia.
Habla segun las circunstancias.

Lo cuento segiin me lo han contado.
Entro (or entraron) en la ciudad una

tropa de soldados.
En el eiercito de los Estados Unidos

habia soldados de todas las nacio-

nes.
El tercio (or la tercera parte) de

esos hombres no saben escribir.
El gentio era tan grande que no pu-

dimos pasar.
Un par de caballos americanos vale

por dos pares de caballos mexica-

nos.

He acted according to his conscience.

He speaks according to circum-
stances.

I tell it as it was told me.

A troop of soldiers came into the
city.

In the United States army there
were soldiers of all nations.

The third of those men do not know

how to write.
The crowd was so great that we

could not pass.
A pair of American horses are worth

two pairs of Mexican horses.

EXPLAITATION.

200. CoNDUCiR, to conduct, and the verbs conjugated
like it, take a z before the radical c in the terminations begin-
ning with 0 or a. They also take the terminations je^ Jiste,

220 LESSOJ^ XL,

;o, jimos, jisieis, feron, in the preterit, &e., as may be seen in
the conjugation of conducir^ near the end of the grammar.

201. Segu^^. — We class this word among the prepositions,
in conformity to the general practice among Spanish gramma-
rians, and because it sometimes has the character of such ; as,

Obro segun su conciencia. i He acted according to his conscience.

Habla segun las circunstancias. He speaks according to circum-

I stances.

Nevertheless, in other cases it is employed as an adverb ; as,
Jjo cuento segun me lo han contado. | I tell it as it was told to me.

202. Singular collective nouns usually take a singular
verb; but when the individuals composing the collective
noun are prominent in the mind of the speaker, the verb
may be in the plural ; as,

Entro (or entraron) en la ciudad I A troop of soldiers came into the
una tropa de soldados. I city.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Produce Espana buena fruta ? Espana produce excelente
fruta de todas especies.

2. I Cual es la major fruta de Espana ? No sabre decir a Y.,
porque toda es buena, y hay centenares de especies^ por ejemplo :
las uvas son de las mejores del mundo ; los melocotones y los me-
lones son tambien muy buenos, sin con tar con las naranjas, los
higos, las castaiias, las nueees y otra infinidad de frutas.

3. I Es Espana un pais caro 6 barato ? Es demasiado barato.
Con un peso se puede vivir mejor en Espana que en Nueva York
con cuatro.

4. I Bien, entonces por que vino V. a vivir en los Estados
Unidos ? Esa ya es otra cuestion. Espana no tiene que envidiar
a ningiin pais del mundo en cuanto a su clima ni a sus produccio-
nes, ni menos en cuanto al caracter de sus habitantes ; pero bajo
su gobierno no se goza de la misma libertad que se goza bajo el
de la Republica de los Estados Unidos.

5. e Es esta la causa por la cual V. vino a residir en este pais ?
Hay muchas otras. Por ejemplo, es verdad que en Espana no se
conocen las hambres que hay en Irlanda, Alemania y otros paises,
y que, como he dicho, se vive mejor alii con un peso que aqui con
cuatro ; pero tambien es verdad, que en cualquiera profesion li

LESSON XL, 221

oficio es mas facil ganar cuatro pesos en los Estados Unidos, que
uno en Espana.

6. I Por tanto V. cree que los recursos de los Estados Unidos
son mas grandes que los de otros paises ? Por supuesto que si.
Aqui la nacion es grande ; la libertad es grande : los montes, los
rios, los lagos, los bosques son grandes ; la naturaleza es grande ;
todo es grande ; Nueva York es grande y los hombres mismos
son tambien grandes; pero no mas grandes que los espanoles.

7. Hablando de esto, V. se olvida que en este ejercicio tiene
V. que practicar con los nombres colectivos. — V. tiene razon, se
me habian olvidado los nombres colectivos hablando de las dos
naciones que mas amo en el mundo.

8. En cuanto a los nombres colectivos, su practica es muy
facil J todo se reduce a decir : que en Nueva York hay multitud
de gentes de diferentes naciones, millares de mujeres y cosas
buenas y centenares de hombres y cosas malas.

9. i Pero y que dice V. con respecto a los rebanos, ejercitos,
etc. ? Que en Espaiia hay rebaiios de carneros merinos que, asi
como su ejercito, no tienen superiores en el mundo.

10. i Segiin eso V. cree que todo lo mejor existe en Espana ?
Todo no, puesto que mis niiios son americanos.

11. Yamos, V. se burla. — No, seiior, yo hablo de veras para
practicar el espafiol.

12. V. habla segiin las circunstancias. — No, senor, yo hablo
segun mi conciencia.

13. Acuerdese V. que segun Y. obre con los demas asi obra-
ran ellos con Y. — Muy bien y asi como yo hable de ellos, asi
hablaran ellos de mi ; pero yo no debo hablar de ellos mejor que
de mi mismo.

14. I Quiere Y. pagarme la mitad, el tercio 6 el cuarto de lo que
Y. me debe ? Ni lo uno ni lo otro, porque no tengo dinero ahora.

15. Deme Y. a lo menos un par de pesos. — Manana le dare a
Y. una docena de pesos, pero hoy ni tan siquiera un centavo.

16. Adios, Carlos, me canso de charlar y me voy a acostar.
Buenas noches, Luis, no olvide Y. de pagar sus deudas.

EXERCISE.

1. What is the name given to a large number of sheep to-
gether ? It is called a flock.

2. What were you doing so long in the street ? I went to
see the cause of the great crowd at the corner of the next street.

222 LESSON XL.

3. Well, what was it ? I could not see anything ; but it
seems there was a fire in some of the streets near here.

4. You seem to be very much of a Spaniard ; why did you
ever come to the United States ? I shall not deny that I like
the government ; yet that is not the only reason I had for com-
ing here.

5. Can you tell me some of the others ? Certainly ; although
living is higher here than there, business of all kinds is better,
and it is easier to make money here, not only than in Spain, but
than in any other country in Europe.

6. I am very glad you think so ; how long have you been
here ? It will be four years next September.

7. Will you be good enough to tell me something of your
country ? That will give me much pleasure.

8. You talk so much about Europe in general, and about
Spain in particular, that I cannot help {no puedo menos de)
thinking you intend to go there. You are quite right ; it is pos-
sible that my brother and I shall take a trip (viaje) to Spain next
faU.

9. Well, in order to be able to enjoy yourselves as much as
possible, it will be necessary for you to know how to speak the
language perfectly before starting. We intend to do that.

10. Do you think all the soldiers in the army are Americans ?
No, nor even the half, and perhaps not even the third.

11. How many inhabitants are there in this city ? I am not
able to tell you exactly ; but there cannot be much less than a
million.

12. Which city in the world has the most inhabitants ? Lon-
don ; it has about three millions of inhabitants.

13. Ah ! you are jesting ; or else you are an Englishman. I
am not jesting, neither am I an Englishman, but a Frenchman ;
after London comes New York.

14. By whom is that book ? This is the celebrated Don
Quixote (Quijote), by Cervantes.

15. In how many parts is it ? Two ; the first containing (con-
tener) some fifty-two chapters, and the second about eighty-four.

16. What effect {efecto) does the reading of Don Quixote
produce upon you ? It makes me admire, and even leads me
to envy the genius (genio) of its author.

17. Ah ! I see ; you say that to please me, because you know
that I too admire the grand work of Cervantes. Pardon me, sir ;

LESSON XLL

223

I never speak according to circumstances, but always according
to my conscience.

18. But, have you forgotten your promise already ? What
promise is that ? I do not remember any.

19. No matter ; I see you have completely forgotten it. I am
very sorry.

20. What are the best fruits that Spain produces ? Spain pro-
duces so many kinds of fruit, and such delicious ones, that it is
almost impossible for me to mention them all : you have excellent
grapes, melons, peaches, apples, oranges, and an infinity of others.

21. Have the soldiers that came into the city last night gone
away yet ? They marched this morning at daybreak.

22. How was our old friend Harnero when you last heard
from him ? He was in Boston, entirely without means, having
been deceived by a bad man who took the whole of his money
from him, and from whom he was unable to recover (recobrar)
even the fourth part.

LESSON XLI.

Soler.

To be accustomed to, to do.
or be, usually.

Bendecir.

To bless.

Caer.

To fall, to see (understand).

Dormir.

To sleep.

Morir.

To die.

Errar.

To err.

Jugar.

To play.

Oir.

To hear.

Oler.

To smell.

Contradecir.

To contradict.

Poner.

To put.

Pudrir.*

To rot.

Eeir.

To laugh.

Valer.

To be worth.

Yacer.

To lie.

{See the conjugation of these verbs near the end of the grammar.)

* The verb pudrir was formerly written podrir ; but the Academy
now adopt sthe spelling pudrir: and thus this verb has changed from

224

LESSON XLL

Reposar.
Premiar.
Examinar.

To rest, to repose.
To reward.
To examine.

Desde.

Since, from.

Contra.

Against, toward.

Sobre.

Above, over, about.

Tras.

After, behind, besides.

Pues.

Well, then ; therefore, &c.

Helo aqui.

Here he (or it) is.

Desde ahora.

Henceforward, from now,

just now.

Desde aqui.

From here.

En efecto.

Indeed, in effect, in fact,

really.

Eterno. Eternal.

Afortunado. Fortunate.

Convicto. Convicted.

Desgraciado. Unfortunate.

Infortunio.

Reo.

Grito.

Coche.

Vicio.

Fraile.

Diego.

Verbo.

Principio.

Misfortune.
Criminal.
Cry, scream.
Carriage.
Vice.

Fray, friar.
James.
Verb.

Beginning, prin-
ciple.

Carlota.
Creacion.
Caridad.
Prenda.

Virtud.
Tristeza.
Experiencia.
Pagina.

Charlotte.

Creation.

Charity.

Pledge, quality, ac«=

complishment.
Virtue.
Grief, sorrow.
Experience.
Page.

COMPOSITION.

I Suele V. levantarse temprano f

Suelo levantarme tarde.

j, Soha V. ir a pasearse a caballo el

ano pasado ?
No, senor, solia pasearme en coche.
Plegue a Dios que tengamos pronto

lo que deseamos.

Do you usually rise early f

I usually rise late.

Were you accustomed to ride horse-
back last year ?

No, sir, I used to ride in a carriage.

God grant we may soon have what
we desire.

being one of the most irregular of verbs to an almost entirely regular
verb, being irregular in the past participle only, podrido.

LESSON XLL

225

Desde ahora prometo servirle a V

en lo que pueda.
El hombre ha obrado mal para con

Dios y consigo mismo desde la

creacion del mundo.
Desde Nueva York a Filadelfia hay

ochenta y ocho millas.
Yo juego contra ti.
Esta casa esta contra el Este.
La ciudad esta sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las vir-

tudes.
Voy tras ti.
Sufre la pena pues lo quieres.

Tras la primavera viene el verano.
Tras ser culpado, el es el que levant a

el grito.
Leere este libro pues V. me dice que

es bueno.

Prom this moment I promise to

serve you as far as I can.
Man has acted wrongly before God

and to himself since the creation

of the world.
It is eighty-eight miles from New

York to Philadelphia.
I play against thee.
This house faces the East.
The city is built upon a mountain.
Charity is above all the virtues.

I go after thee.

Suffer the consequences (pain), since

such is thy will.
After spring comes summer.
In spite of his being guilty, it is he

who raises the cry.
I shall read this book since you tell

me it is. good.

EXPLANATION.

203. Defectiye yerbs are those which lack some of their
modes, tenses, or persons. Placer^ to please, and yacer^ to lie,
belong to this class, and are found used in the following
tenses and persons :

PLACER.

Place.

Placia.

Plugo.

Plegue.
( Pluguiera.
\ Pluguiese.

Pluguiere.

These persons of the subjunctive mode in this verb are
only used in the following expressions : plegue, or pluguiera^
or pluguiese a JDios, would to God; and si me pluguiere, if it
should please me.

204. Yacer. — Xo part of this verb is used except the
third persons of the present indicative, yace and yacen, chiefly
at the beginning of epitaphs.

17

Indicat. Pres. 3d person sing.

Imperfect.

Perfect ind.
Subjunc. Present.

Imperfect.

Future imp.

a..

e. S

It pleases.
It did please.
It pleased.
It may please.

It might please.

It may please.

226 LESSON XLL

205. SoLER is used only in the present and imperfect of
the indicative mode. This verb has the peculiarity of never
being employed except as a determining verb, governing the
determined verb without the aid of any preposition, and al-
ways in the present infinitive ; as,

Suelo pasear temprano. 1 I usually go early to walk.

206. Desde, from, points out the source of time or place ;
as,

Desde la creacion del mundo. i From the creation of the world.
Desde Nueva York a Filadelfia. 1 From New York to Philadelphia.

For this reason it forms a part of several adverbial expres-
sions which signify time or place ; as,

Desde ahora. I From this time.

Desde aqui. I From hence.

207. Contra is used in all cases as the English against

208. SoBRE, upon, above, &c., serves to denote the super-
imposition of some things with respect to others, either by
their location or by their excellence or power ; as.

La ciudad esta sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las vir-
tudes.

The city is on a mountain.
Charity is above all virtues.

It has also the signification of ademds, moreover, or ade-
mas de^ besides ; as,

Sobre ser reo convicto quiere que I Besides being a convicted crimi-

le premien. | nal, he wishes to be rewarded.

It also signifies time ; as,

Hablar sobre mesa. I To talk over the table.

Surety; as,

Prestar sobre prendas. 1 To lend upon pledge.

209. Tras, behind, after, &c., signifies the order in which
some things follow others ; as,

Voy tras ti. i I follow thee.

Tras la primavera viene el verano. I After spring comes summer.

It also signifies besides ; as,

Tras ser culpado, el es el que le- 1 Besides being guilty, he remon

vanta el grito. | strates.

LJEJSSON XLI. 227

210. The conjunction pues, since, is used to account for
a proposition brought forward ; as,

Leere este libro pues V. me dice I I shall read this book since you
que es bueno. | tell me it is good.

211. Pues is often used in a sense similar to wM^ or
tJien\ as,

Ya me voy pues. 1 I am going then.

; Pues, si ! | Well, yes !

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. e Sobre que quiere V. que hablemos hoy ? No se ; de cual-
quiera cosa, con tal que practiquemos con los verbos def ectivos y
las preposiciones contra, desde, sobre y tras.

2. Que me place, pero digame V., e cree V. que tenemos mu-
cho que practicar con el verbo yacer f No, senor, puesto que es
un verbo que solo sirve para ponerse en los epitafios.

3. Pues si V. gusta le haremos un epitafio y pasaremos a
practicar con otro verbo que no sea tan triste. — Soy de su opinion
de v., porque no me gustan las cosas tristes.

4. Helo aqui :

" Aqui yace el verbo yacer,
Otra cosa no sabiendo hacer."

5. Ese epitafio me hace recordar a mi otro, oigalo V. :

" Aqui Fray Diego reposa,
Y jamas hizo otra cosa."

6. Hombre, tenga V. caridad de mi y no me haga V. reir
hablando de epitafios, que es cosa mas bien para hacer llorar que
para hacer reir. e Suele V. tener siempre tan buen humor ? No
siempre ; pero no se gana nada con estar triste.

7. En efecto, mas vale estar alegre que triste, pero no siem-
pre se puede estar alegre, i y entonces que hace V. ? Entonces
mando a pasear el mal humor.

8. Eso es mas f acil de decir que de hacer ; i quiere V. decirme
como lo hace Y. ? Convengo con V. ; pero cuando el hombre
quiere verdaderamente una cosa la logra casi siempre.

9. Plegue a Dios que yo logre estar siempre contento puesto
que estar contento es ser feliz. i Que es lo que V. hace para estar
siempre eontento ? Yo no le he dicho a V. que estoy siempre
contento, pero procuro estarlo y asi logro no estar triste.

228 LESSON XLL

10. I Como lo hace Y. ? Obro segun las circunstancias. Exa-
mino la causa de mi tristeza 6 mal humor ; si es mi falta me con-
suelo porque creo que Dios me castiga para que yo me corrija, y
me haga mejor con la experiencia.

11. Bien, i y cuando V. es inocente y le sucede un infortunio ?
Entonces me consuelo tambien, porque creo que todo lo que Dios
nos envia es para nuestro bien.

12. Entonces es V. filosofo. No, senor, mejor que eso ; soy
religioso.

13. i Tiene V. miedo de la muerte ? No, senor, porque se que
todos hemos de morir, y que tras la muerte viene la vida eterna.

14. I Cuantos ninos tiene V. ? Cinco ; dos niiios y tres ninas.

15. I Como se llaman ? El mayor de los ninos se llama Ale-
jandro y el menor Manuel.

16. I Y las ninas ? Las ninas son Luisa, Carlota y Margarita.

17. i Cuanto tiempo hace que no ha estado V. en Espaiia ?
Hace veinte anos que sali de Espana.

18. e Y no ha vuelto V. ? No, senora, y creo que nunca vol-
vere.

19. i Por que ? No porque no lo haya desoado, sino porque
las circunstancias no me lo han permitido.

20. i Por que habla V. tanto de si mismo en sus conversa-
ciones ? e no piensa V. que eso puede cansar a sus oyentes ? Asi
es la verdad, senora ; pero para mi es la materia de conversacion
mas interesante que puedo encontrar.

EXERCISE.

1. James, do you know where Charlotte has gone ? I saw
her going out. but I do not know where she has gone.

2. Can not you help your brother in his misfortune ? you
know he relies (contar) upon your aid. I shall do all in my
power to serve him ; but you know that is not much.

3. Margaret, go and call Charles ; tell him he has played
enough, and that I want him to attend to his music lessons.
Why, he has been at his lessons for the last half hour !

4. Ah ! that is another thing. Where is he then ? Here
he is.

5. Well, Charles, how are you getting on with your music ?
Very well, papa ; but I think Jane will have to help me with my
Spanish exercise.

6. My dear boy, always do your own exercises, then you will

LESSOJSr XLIL

229

be sure they are done. Oh, yes, I know ; as they say : " Help
yourself and Heaven will help you."

7. How beautiful that lady is ! Yes ; but, my dear sir, her
accomplishments far surpass her beauty.

8. I do not doubt it at all ; but how do you know that ? have
you known her long ? Long enough to find out her good quali-
ties, which, in my opinion, are of more value than all the beauty
in the world.

9. Have you found time yet to examine the books I put on
your table the other day ? I have, and the examination caused
(produced) me a great deal of sadness.

10. How so ? From the beginning, page after page, I found
that the author had not the least experience of the world ; and
besides, he contradicts toward the end what he has given as a
general rule at the opening of his work.

11. I am very much grieved (sorry) that such is your opinion,
So am I ; but you know it is better (worth more) to tell the truth,
even though it should offend the author himself.

12. Can you read that epitaph ? I believe it is in English.
Yes ; it says : " Here lies Pedro Gutierrez."

13. Is that all it says ? No, there is a great deal more ; but I
can not read it.

14. Ah, indeed ! I see ; you do not read English as well as
you thought. I do not ; and I promise you that from this mo-
ment I shall study it attentively until I know it thoroughly.

15. What do you smell ? The book that Charles has just
bought.

16. What odor has it ? It smells like new paper.

17. What was that man rewarded for ? For having returned
(devolver) five hundred dollars, which he found in the park, to
the person that had lost it.

18. I am very glad that he has been rewarded ; but virtue is
always rewarded, sooner or later (tarde que temprano).

LESSON XLII.

Adquirir.

To acquire.

Asir.

To seize.

Caber.

To contain,

to hold.

Cocer.

To cook.

230

LUSSOir XLII.

Erguir.

To erect.

Satisfacer.

To satisfy.

Traer.

To bring, to carry.

{See conjugation of these verba near the end of the grammar,)

Conseguir.

To succeed, to get.

Callar.

To be silent, to hold one's
tongue.

Eeprender.

To reprehend, to chide.

Divisar.

To perceive, to descry, to espy.

Fumar.

To smoke.

Establecer.

To establish.

Saber {imp.

verb).

{In the signification of) to
taste, or to savor.

Sorprender.

To surprise.

Entrambos.

Both.

Solo.

Alone.

Ir a caballo.

To ride on horseback.

Ir en coche.

To ride in a carriage.

De todos modos.

At all events, by all means.

De ningun modo.

By no means, not at all.

Manos a la obra.

To work !

Por mi parte.

For my part.

Asi sea.

nt).

So be it, let it be so.

1 Caspita ! {ii

Wonderful ! too bad !

I Vaya ! {int).

Come, now ! indeed ! go away !

CONJUNCTIONS.

They are classified as follows :

Copulative.

Que.

That.

Ademas. Moreover.

Tambien.

Also.

Y or e. And.

Ni. Neither, nor.

Disjunctive.

6, u, ya.

Or, either,

Por cuanto. W hereas.

whether.

Para que. So that, in order

Sea que.

Whether.

that.

Tampoco.

Neither.

A fin de. In order that

LESSON XLIL

231

Adversative,
Mas, pero. But.
Aun cuando. Even.
Aunque. Although,

though.

Causal.
Porque, que. Because.
i Por que ? Why ?
Pues,pues que. Since.
Por. For.

Por tanto. Therefore.

Conditional,
If.

But.
Provided.

Unless.

Si.

Sino.

Con tal que.

A menos de.

Amenosque.

Continuative,
Pues, puesto Since, inas-
que. much as.

Comparative.
Como, asi como. As.
Asi. So.

Antes de.

Before.

Lejos de.

Far from.

En lugar de.

Instead of, in place of.

Por f alta de.

For want of.

De miedo de. )
Por temor de. )

For fear of.

Como quiera que.

However.

Fuera de que.

Besides.

Al instante que, or

luego que,

As soon as.

or tan pronto como.

De manera que.

So that.

Desde que.

Since.

Acuerdo.

Dafio.

Ajedrez.

Cigarro.

Cigarrillo.

Tabaco.

Jaque.

Caso.

Advice, or opin-
ion.
Harm, damage.
Chess.
Cigar.
Cigarette.
Tobacco.
Check.
Case.

Marca.

Fortuna.

Partida.

Opinion.
Pipa.

Compania.

Brand, mark.
Fortune.
Party, game,

departure.
Opinion.
Tobacco-pipe,

pipe.
Company.

COMPOSITION.
Conjunctions governing the subjunctive.
Dado que me escriba no le respon- I Granted that he should write me, I
dere. will not answer him.

232

LESSON XLIL

Con tal que el trabaje.

A menos que me pague.

Sea que se vaya 6 que se quede.

Calie V. no sea que nos oiga.

Provided he work.

Unless he pay me.

Whether he set out or remain.

Be silent lest he should hear us.

Conjunctions governing the indicative.

Al instante que recibi la carta le

respond!.
De suerte que (or de modo que) no

pudo conseguirlo.
De manera que no esta nada satis-

fecho.
4 Que ha hecho Y. desde que le he

visto a V. I
Llegue tan pronto como pude.

Mientras que V. juega el estudia su

leccion.
Yo reprendo a V. sus faltas porque

le quiero.

As soon as I received the letter I

answered him.
So that he could not bring it about.

So that he is not pleased at all.

What have you been doing since I
saw you t

I got here (or there) as soon as I
could.

While you play, he studies his les-
son.

I reprove you for your faults be-
cause I love you.

Conjunctions governing the infinitive.

Yo trabajo a fin de ganar dinero.
No le visitare antes de conocerle.

Lejos de amarlo lo aborrece.

I work in order to earn money.

I shall not visit him before making

his acquaintance.
Far from loving him, he abhors him.

EXPLANATION.

212. Conjunctions. — The student is already acquainted
with the greater part of the conjunctions ; but in this lesson
they are again given, so that he may see how they are classified.
Besides the conjunctions introduced in this lesson, there may
be formed a variety of expressions which answer the same end
as conjunctions ; as,

Como quiera que, I However ;

Fuera de que, | Besides;

and a large number of others.

213. It would require too much space to specify all the
conjunctions that govern verbs in a given mode ; more is to
be learned from the teacher, and by constant practice in
reading and conversation, than from all the rules that could
be given.

LESSON XLIL 233

214. The subjunctive should be used after the following
conjunctive expressions : Dado que, granted that ; co7i tal que,
provided that ; a menos que, unless ; no sea que, lest, for fear ;
antes que, sin que, sea que, &c. ; as,
Dado que me escriba no le respon-

dere.
Con tal que el trabaje.

Granted that he should write to me,

I shall not answer him.
Provided that he work.
Unless he pay me.

A menos que me pague.

215. Other expressions having de, instead of que, require
the verb in the infinitive mood ; such as, a fin de, in order to ;
a menos de, unless, &c.

216. Finally, other compound conjunctions govern the
indicative; as, al instante que, as soon as; de manera que,
so that, &c.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Buenos dias, Don Carlos. — Tengalos V. muy felices, Don
Enrique ; al instante que lo divise desde la ventana lo reconoci.

2. I Como esta toda la familia ? Todos buenos ; acaban de
salir.

3. I De manera que esta V. solo ? Si, seiior, en lugar de salir
quise quedarme a esperar a V. pues sabia que habia V. de venir.

4. I Quien se lo dijo a Y. ? A que no acierta Y. — Yerdadera-
mente no se quien puede haberselo dicho a Y.

5. Fue Elena, su hija de Y., que acaba de salir a pasear con
mi esposa y Margarita, mi hija.

6. Y nosotros, i que haremos ? Lo que Y. guste.

7. Mi opinion es que juguemos una partida de ajedrez, que
fumemos un cigarro, bebamos un vaso de vino de Carinena, y
vayamos despues a sorprender a las senoras al parque. l Esta
Y. de acuerdo ? Perfectisimamente.

8. Pues bien, manos a la obra ; l juega Y. raucho ? Mediana-
mente ; pero como no lo practico temo que me gane Y.

9. i Que hombre ! si hace a lo menos dos anos que no he
jugado, fuera de que jamas he sido muy fuerte.

10. I Cuales quiere Y., las negras 6 las blancas ? Cualesquiera,
de todos modos he de perder.

11. Jaque a la reina Don Enrique.— Pues creo que esta per-
dida.— Si, senor, no puede huir— vaya puesle doy a Y. la partida,
puesto que sin reina es casi imposible ganar.

234 ^ LESSON XLIL

12. I Quiere V. que en lugar de jugar mas vayamos a ver las
senoras ? Si, senor, luego que bebamos del vino de Carinena.

13. I Hombre, si, lo habia olvidado ! aqui esta, y aqui tiene V.
tambien pipas, cigarros de la Habana, cigarrillos de la marca de
la Honradez y tabaco de Virginia para la pipa ; i que prefiere
V. ? Yo prefiero los cigarrillos.

14. A su salud de V., Don Carlos. — A la de V., Don Enrique.
— I Caspita ! i que bien sabe el de Carinena !

15. e Le gusta a V. ? ; Que si me gusta ! desde que vivo en
Nueva York no he probado vino mejor.

16. Puesto que le gusta i por que no repite V. ? Por temor de
que me haga daiio, no suelo beber mucho, y temo que me ponga
un poco alegre.

17. Aqui tiene V. fuego ; I que tal le gustan a V. esos cigarri-
llos ? Excel entes.

18. Senor ; i Que quieres Juan ? Los caballos estan listos.

19. i Que ! i Vamos a caballo ? Si, senor, las senoras ban ido
en coche.

20. I Que camino tomaremos ? Iremos por la Quinta avenida,
. que es la calle mas bermosa de Nueva York.

21. Tenemos buen tiempo, D. Enrique. — Hermosisimo, y con
esto, buena salud, amigos fieles, una larga familia y una buena
fortuna, l que mas podemos desear ?

22. Tiene V. razon, Don Carlos, por mi parte soy feliz y solo
deseo que Dios me de una larga vida para ver a todos mis bijos
bien establecidos. — Asi sea, Don Enrique, lo deseo para entram-
bos.

EXERCISE.

1. Does your brother never go out on horseback ? Some-
times ; but not very often.

2. What can be the reason of that ? I thought he was very
fond of horses and riding on horseback. So he is ; but he does
not often take exercise of that kind for fear of falling off.

3. How does he go to Central Park, then ? Why, in a car-
riage of course.

4. Fie ! What carriage does he go in ? In his cousin's, of
course, for want of one of his own.

5. Who will give me a cigarette ? No one here ; there is
nobody here that smokes any thing but cigars or pipes.

6. Too bad ! May I ask why none of you use cigarettes ?
Certainly ; and we shall tell you with the greatest pleasure : at

LESSON XLIIL 236

one time we all smoked what you call " cigarette," but what we
call a " poor man's cigar," until one day Henry came (you know
Henry is something of a doctor), and, with his head erect, said
with a voice of thunder : " What's this ? smoking cigarettes ? "

7. Well ! what more did he say ? " Don't you know that
what you are smoking there is nothing but paper ? You will
all be sick ! "

8. What did you do then ? We were surprised at first : but
very soon we promised never to smoke such a thing again, as it
was good for nothing, and only tasted of paper.

9. Be that as you please ; for my part I shall always prefer
the cigarette to the cigar (tabaco puro). Perhaps you are right ;
each one has his own liking, and so we shall say no more
about it.

10. What news do you bring from Boston ? Some good, and
some bad : my cousin has been very fortunate in that affair I
spoke of to you ; but he met with an unfortunate accident last
week.

11. Ah ! how was that ? He was out riding in company with
some friends, and in returning home he fell from his horse.

12. I am very sorry indeed ; and I hope he may soon be able
to attend to his business.

13. What do you think of playing a game of chess ? I am
ready to play one, if you wish ; but you will not find my game
very good.

14. Why do not you practise more than you do ? I have
practised very much, with a desire to become perfect in the
game, but have not been able to succeed.

LESSON XLIII.

Advertir.

Conjugar.

Desconfiar.

Cometer.

Distinguir.

Formar.

Devolver.

To take notice, to observe, to

warn.
To conjugate.
To distrust, to mistrust.
To commit.
To distinguish.
To form, to shape.
To return, to give back.

236

LESSON XLIIL

Descuidar. To neglect, to be at ease in one's

mind.

Pertenecer. To belong.

Molestar. To molest, to trouble.

Resultar. To result, to turn out.

{The student ought hy this time to know almost all the conjugations,
hath of the regular and the irregular verbs ; should he at any time be at
a loss for some part of a verb, he may refer to the conjugations near the
end of the grammar.)

Cada. I Every, each.

Sin duda.

Certainly, without doubt.

I Adelante !

Go on ! go ahead ! come in !

En adelante.

Henceforth.

Compuesto.

Compound.

Irregular.

Irregular.

Completo.

Complete.

Yarios.

Various, divers, several.

Simpl

e.

Simple.

Seguro.

Secure, sure.

Obvio

Obvious.

Lo demas.

The rest.

Conoci-

j Bill of lading.

Condicion.

Condition.

miento.

( Knowledge.

Navidad, or )

Nativity, Christ*

Jose.

Joseph.

Natividad. )

mas.

Articulo.

Article, section.

Relacion.

Relation.

Pronombre.

Pronoun.

Duda.

Doubt.

Participio.

Participle.

Ventaja.

Advantage.

Adjetivo.

Adjective.

Frase.

Phrase.

Adverbio.

Adverb.

Prontitud.

Promptitude.

Presente.

Present.

Sentencia.

Sentence.

Imperfecto.

Imperfect.

Conjugacion.

Conjugation.

Perfecto.

Perfect.

Verdad.

Truth.

Futuro.

Future.

Imprudencia.

Imprudence.

Pluscuamper-

Pluperfect.

Preposicion.

Preposition.

fecto.

Conjuncion.

Conjunction.

Infinitivo.

Infinitive.

Interjeccion.

Interjection.

Indicativo.

Indicative.

Paz.

Peace.

Imperativo.

Imperative.

Molestia.

Bother.

Subjuntivo.

Subjunctive.

LESSON XLIIL

237

COMPOSITION.

Descuide V.

I Cuantos tiempos tiene el modo in-
dicative ?

Ocho : cuatro simples y cuatro com-
puestos.

Bueno seria no descuidarse.

Convendria que se hiciese la paz.

Aunque dijeras {or dijeses) la ver-

dad, no te creeria.
\ Ojala que cesara {or cesase) la gue-

rra ! asi serlamos mas felices.

Pense que estudiaras.
No crei que estudiase V.

Juzgue que estudiaria V.
Dije que leyeras.

Dijo que leerias.

Dijimos que leyese.

Deseaba que ganaras {or ganases).

Quiso que te casaras {or casases).

No se si iria 6 no.

Si tuviera {or si tuviese) buenos li-

bros leeria.
Seria imprudencia ir con este tiem-

po.
No quiso ir.
Debemos perdonar a nuestros ene-

migos.
V. puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo.
% Si hubiera {or hubiese) V. recibido

los libros me los habria V. pres-

tado?
Si los hubiera {or hubiese) recibido

se los habria prestado; pero no

los he recibido aiin.
En lugar de venir a verme me escri-

bio.

Make yourself easy (or be at ease in
your mind).

How many tenses has the indicative
mood?

Eight: four simple and four com-
pound.

It were well not to be off one's guard.

It would be well if peace were
made.

Though thou shouldst tell the truth,
he would not believe thee.

Would that the war would come to
an end ! we should then be hap-
pier.

I thought thou wouldst study.

I did not think you would study (or
were studying).

I judged you would study.

I said thou wert to read (or wouldst
read).

He said thou wouldst read.

We said he was to read.

He wished thee to win.

He wished thee to marry.

I do not know whether he would go
or not.

Had I (or if I had) good books I
should read.

It were imprudent to go in this
weather.

He would not go.

We ought to forgive our enemies.

You can speak, but I can not.

Had you received (or if you had re-
ceived) the books, would you have
lent them to me ?

If I had received them I should have
lent them to you ; but I have not
received them yet.

Instead of coming to see me, he
wrote to me.

238

LESSON XLIIL

fil no jugara por temor de perder su

dinero.
; Quiera Dios que se corrija !
\ Asi sea ! Lo deseo para entram-

bos.
Bebo a la salud de V., Don Enrique.
A la de v., Don Carlos.
Senores, manos a la obra, no sea que

no podamos acabar a tiempo.

De todos modos creo que no lo con-
seguiremos.

He will not play, for , fear of losing

his money.
God grant that he may change !
So be it! That is my desire for

both.
I drink to your health, Mr. Henry.
Your health, Mr. Charles.
To work, gentlemen, for fear we

should not be able to finish in

time.
At all events, I do not think we

shall succeed.

EXPLANATION.

217. Imperfect and Past Peefect Subjunctive. —
Although it has been deemed expedient, in the example of
the conjugation of verbs in the subjunctive mood, to give
but one English equivalent for each of the three termina-
tions r^«, ra, se^ it is not to be inferred therefrom that they
may be used indiscriminately. Indeed, the correct applica-
tion of each of these terminations presents as much difficulty
to the student of Spanish as does that of the English signs
mighty could^ should^ would to the foreigner learning Eng-
lish. The following rules will, however, serve as a guide in
all ordinary cases, and enable the pupil to surmount not a
few of the most serious obstacles to the right use of the ter-
minations in question :

1st. When the sentence begins without a conditional con-
junction, the verb may take either the first or the second
termination {ria or ra), though in this case the form ria is
preferable ; as.

It would be well not to be off one's

guard.
It would be well if peace were made.

Bueno seria {or tuera) no descui-

darse.
Convendria {or conviniera) que se

hiciese la paz.

2d. In sentences beginning with si, sino, aunque. Men
que, dado que, &c., or with an interjection expressive of de-
sire, either the second or third termination may be employed
(ra or se) ; and in expressing the fulfilment of the condition

Aunque dijeras (or dijeses) la ver-
dad, no te creeria.

LESSOJSr XLIIL 239

which may have been stated in a prior verb the forms in Ha
are used ; as,

Though thou toldest (or wert to
tell) the truth, he would not be-
lieve thee.

3d. When the imperfect of the subjunctive is preceded
by a verb in the preterit indicative, such as pensar^ to think,
decir^ to say, &c., any of the terminations may be used ; but
it must be observed that the idea conveyed will be different,
according to the termination employed ; as,

Pense que estudiara V., or que estu-

diarm V.
No crei que estudiase V. {or estu-

diara) V.
Juzgue que estudiaria {or estudiara)

V.
Dije que ley era {or leerm) Y.
Dijo que leyese {or leyera) V.
Dijimos que leyera (or leyese).

I thought you might study, or I
thought you would study.

I did not think you were studying,
or I did not think you would study,

I judged you would study, or might
study.

I said you might read, or would read.

He said you were to read.

We said he was to read.

4th. But if this tense be preceded or governed by a verb
in any of the past tenses of the indicative, such as desear^ to
desire, querer^ to wish, then the second termination {ra) or
the third {se) must be used, and never the first (ria) ; as,
Deseaba que ganara {or ganase) V. I He was desirous that you might win.
Quiso que V. se casara {or casase). I He wished you to get married.

A glance at the foregoing rules and examples will suffice
to show that the second and third terminations ra and se
may be used one for the other without any change in the
sense of the phrase. Ria^ on the other hand, is entirely
different from the other two, and may not be substituted for
them, since it alters the meaning of the sentence.

5th. When, in translating into Spanish, whether is to be
rendered by si^ would or should must be rendered by the ter-
mination ria ; as.
No se si iria. I do not know whether he would

go.
No sabia si el vendria. I did not know whether he would

240 LESSON XLIIL

6th. The inverted forms had /, had he^ &c., meaning if I
hady if he had^ &c., are always to be turned into Spanish by
verbs with either of the terminations ra or se^ preceded by
the conjunction si ; as,

Si tuviera {or tuviese) buenos libros, 1 Had I (or if I had) good books, I
leeria. 1 would read.

7th. Were^ used in the place of would he^ is to be trans-
lated by -r/«, occasionally by -ra, but never by -se ; as,
Seria {or fuera) imprudencia ir con I It were imprudent to go in this
este tiempo. j weather.

218. The English auxiliaries may^ mighty can^ could^ will,
would and should are sometimes to be translated into Span-
ish by principal verbs of the same meaning ; as.

No quiso ir. ( He would not go.

V,puede hablar, pero yo no lopuedo. \ You may (or can) speak, but I cannot.

In the first example we see that by would not is conveyed
the idea of the lack of willingness or desire on the part of
the person alluded to, and not the idea that the lack of
action was contingent as an unfulfilled condition. Had the
latter been the sense intended, we should then have ren-
dered would by the form in ria of the verb ir, to go ; thus,
fil no iria. | He would not go ;

for, in that case, the object would have been simply to pre-
dict that he would not go, as dependent on some stlch condi-
tion as, if I did not go too, si yo no fuese tambien. Hence,
the closest attention is required, in order to find the real
meaning of the auxiliaries above mentioned, before attempt-
ing to translate them.

219. The imperfect subjunctive describes a contingent
action that took place some time ago, or that is taking place
at the present time, or that will take place after the com-
pletion of the action expressed by the determining verb.

220. The past perfect subjunctive represents a contingent
action as completed before some period of time already past,
or before some other action which is now also completed,
or which would be now completed had it taken place.

LESSON XLIIL 241

The closest attention to the foregoing remarks is essen-
tial, in order to avoid the improper substitution of the tenses
of the indicative for those of the subjunctive, which all for-
eigners, and especially those of English speech, are liable to
make.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Duda V. que se haga la paz este verano ? Convendrfa
que se hiciese la paz ; pero temo que no se haga.

2. I Iria V. a Europa si tuviera {or tuviese) tiempo ? No iria
aunque tuviera tiempo, si no tuviese dinero.

3. i Ojala ! que tuviera V. {or tuviese) mucho dinero, porque
entonces me prestaria Y. alguno ; ^ no es asi ? Si tuviera mucho
le prestaria a V. alguno ; pero con la condicion de que me lo
devolviese pronto.

4. I Teme V. acaso que no se lo devolviera ? Todo pudiera
suceder, amigo mio.

5. Si V. me hubiera {or hubiese) prestado algo, y yo no se lo
hubiese {or hubiera) devuelto, V. tendria razon en desconfiar.
—Todo eso esta muy bien ; pero si, en lugar de ser V., fuera yo
el que necesitara dinero, y V. el que lo tuviera, i me lo prestaria ?
Por supuesto que si.

6. Pues con todo eso yo no se si Y. lo haria.— e Por que piensa
Y. tan mal de mi ?

7. I Ha olvidado Y. ya que el aiio pasado, por Navidad, fui a.
pedirle a Y. cien pesos y me los nego Y. ? Mal pudiera yo pres-
tarselos a Y. cuando yo no los tenia ; pero este Y. seguro, Don
Jose, que yo hubiera tenido un gran placer en haberselos pres-
tado a Y. si los hubiera {or hubiese) tenido.

8. I Si Y. supiera usar correctamente los tiempos y modos
del verbo, sabria Y. hablar espaiiol ? Si, senor, con los cono-
cimientos que ya tengo de las demas partes de la oracion, creo
que hablaria bien el espaiiol si supiera usar bien los tiempos y
modos del verbo.

9. I Que es lo mas importante al aprender una lengua ? El
conocimiento de todo lo que hace relacion al verbo.

10. I Por que cree Y. que el verbo es lo mas importante? Por-
que sin los verbos no se puede formar una sola sentencia.

11. 8 Luego, segiin eso, bastara aprender la conjugacion de los
verbos regulares e irregulares para hablar una lengua ? No,
Benor, si uno sabe conjugar los verbos como regularmente se

18

242 LESSON XLIII.

conjugan en las gramaticas ; pero si sabiendolos conjugar como
se debe.

12. I Pues que, hay algiin otro modo de conjugar los verbos ?
Los verbos deben conjugarse formando sentencias completas en
todos sus modos y tiempos.

13. I Que ventajas resultan de esto ? Las ventajas son obvias,
pues formando sentencias completas con cada tiempo y modo se
aprende a distinguir estos tiempos y modos, acabando por usar-
los correctamente.

14. e Y cree Y. que hablaria bien el espaiiol si pudiese hacer
sentencias en todos los tiempos y modos del verbo ? Sin duda
alguna, una vez que V. forme estas sentencias con prontitud y
sin cometer faltas, hablara V. espanol.

15. Pues manos a la obra, i quiere V. que haga algunas en el
modo indicativo ? No, senor, en las lecciones pasadas ha prac-
ticado V. bastante con ese modo, haga V. algunas ahora con el
modo subjuntivo.

16. Presente : i Desea V. que yo aprenda el espanol ? i Es
correcta ? Perfectamente ; adelante.

17. Perfecto de subjuntivo : Temo que la guerra no hay a aca-
bado en Europa. l Esta bien ? Si, senor, esta muy bien ; pero
no necesita Y. preguntarme a cada sentencia que haga, si esta
correcta, porque yo tendre buen cuidado de advertirselo a Y.
cuando no sea asi.

18. Pluscuam perfecto : Si yo hubiera creido que esto le moles-
taba a Y. no se lo habria preguntado. — Esto no me molesta de
ningiin modo y espero que Y. no se moleste tampoco por lo que
yo acabo de decir.

19. Imperfecto : i Seria suficiente hacer una frase en cada
tiempo ? Seria suficiente si cada tiempo se usase en un solo
caso ; pero como hay muchos y muy varios, convendria practi-
car en todos tanto como f uese posible.

EXERCISE.

1. Before going out, Henry, I wish to give you a piece of
advice. Well, go on !

2. What is that advice * you have to give me ? Be quiet,
and listen to what I have to tell you.

* Consejo,

LESSON XLIII. 243

3. Did you warn your cousin not to lend his carriage to that
young man who asked him for it ? Yes, but he said he would
do so, and that he did not distrust that young man at all.

4. Do you now know how to conjugate all the verbs in the
Spanish language ? I am not sure ; my memory is not very
good ; and so I always like to look at my grammar, for fear of
making (committing) mistakes.

5. Can you tell me how many conjugations of regular verbs
there are in Spanish ? Yes, sir, there are three.

6. When you see a new verb, how do you know to what con-
jugation it belongs ? By the termination of the infinitive mood.

7. Can you tell me to what conjugation the verb comprar
belongs ? Certainly ; it belongs to the first.

8. How do you know that ? I see the characteristic termi-
nation of the first conjugation, which is ar.

9. And of which conjugation is entender f The second ; its
termination being er.

10. Very well. Now, if I say existio, can you tell me all
about that verb ? Yes, sir, it is a regular verb, third person sin-
gular, of the preterit tense of the indicative mode ; it belongs to
the third conjugation, its infinitive being existir.

11. Are there in Spanish no conjugations other than those
about which you have just told me ? Yes, very many. Those
I have mentioned {mencionar) already are the three regular
ones.

12. What do you understand by " regular verbs " ? Regular
verbs are those which are conjugated in all their modes and
tenses exactly like the models (modelos) given in different parts
of the grammar.

13. And " irregular verbs," what are they ? Those whose con-
jugation is different from the models.

14. If you could speak Spanish as well as English, do you
think you would prefer it to your own language ? I should like
to be able to speak it as well ; but there is no language in the
world that I should prefer to my own.

15. If I were to lend you this phrase book would you return
it to me next week ? I should if you wanted it, and I promised
to return it to you at that time.

^M

LESSON XLIV.

LESSON XLIV.

Aproximar.

To approach, to draw near.

Apurar.

To perplex, to press.

. AuUar.

To howl.

Ladrar.

To bark.

Cuidar.

To take care of.

Dejar.

To leave, to let.

Emplear.

To employ

Matar.

To kill.

Permitir.

To permit.

Robar.

To rob, to steaL

Imponer.

To impose.

Tantico.

Somewhat ; a little.

Yaya de cuento.

To begin my story.

Oomo iba diciendo de mi

As I was saying (in my story).

cuento.

A mi costa.

At my expense, to my cost.

Ta le veo a V. venir.

I see what you are at.

Yenir a pelo.

To suit exactly, to be apropos.

De sopeton.

Unexpectedly.

Cuanto mas.

The more.

\ Por Dios !

For Heaven's sake I

I He!

Ho ! hoa ! What ?

lOiga!

Indeed ! Just listen !

Chico. ,

Little, small.

Revoltoso.

Noisy.

Caliente.

Hot, warm.

Apurado.

Embarrassed.

Burlon.

Jester, scofPer.

Natural.

Natural.

Aumentativo.

Augmentative.

Dim.inutivo.

Diminutive.

Picaro.

Rogue, rascal.

Satisfecho.

Satisfied, contented.

Cuento Tale, story.

Anecdota. Anecdote.

Corro. Group of per-

Casuca. Miserable

sons.

house.

LESSON XLIV.

245^

Cojo.

Lame.

Mosca.

Fly ; tiresome-

Brazo.

Arm.

person.

Ademan.

Attitude.

Necesidad.

Necessity,

Francisco, Paco

Francis,

need.

{dim.).

Frank.

Pierna.

Leg.

Jose, Pepe (dim.)

Joseph, Joe.

Boca.

Mouth.

Caldo.

Broth.

Maria, Mariqui-

Mary.

Calducho.

Poor broth.

ta {dim.).

Pistoletazo.

Pistol shot.

Concepcion,

{No English

Poetastro.

Poetaster.

Concha {dim).

equivalent,.

Lugar.

Place.

Pistola.

Pistol.

Garrote.

Bludgeon.

Estratagema.

Stratagem.

Garrotazo.

Blow of a

Josefa, Pepa

Josephine.

bludgeon.

{dim.).

Canon.

Cannon.

Francisca, Paca

Frances,

Canonazo.

Cannon-shot

{dim.)

Fanny.

Ladron.

Thief, robber.

Costumbre.

Custom.

Clase.

Class.

COMPO

3ITI0N.

Lo aprendi a mi costa.

Antes no le habia comprendido a

v., ahora ya le veo venir.
fil me dio la noticia de sopeton.
i Por Dios ! D. Francisco, no hable

V. de esc.
% Conoce V. a aquel hombron %
Si, senor, es el marido de mi veci-

nita Mariquita.
V. me sorpende. ; Es posible que

sea aquel hombronazo el marido

de esa mujercita !
I Es ese hombre cojo ?
Si, senor ; en la ultima guerra reci-

bio un pistoletazo en una pierna.
I Ha matado V. alguna vez a alguno i
Si, senor, el ano pasado mate de un

garrotazo al perro de mi vecino,

porque no me dejaba dormir, au-

llando todita la noche.
Ese hombre es un picaronazo, que no

hace sino beber y no atiende a las

necesidades de su familia.

I learned it to my cost.

I did not understand you before,.

but now I see what you are at.
He gave me the news unexpectedly.
For Heaven's sake ! Mr. Francis, do

not speak of that.
Do you know that big man ?
Yes, sir, he is the husband of my

little neighbor Mary.
You surprise me. Is it possible^

that that enormous man is that

little woman's husband.
Is that man lame ?
Yes, sir ; in the last war he received

a pistol shot in one of his legs.
Did you ever kill any one ?
Yes, sir ; last year I killed ray

neighbor's dog with a bludgeon,

for he would not let me sleep —

howling the whole night through.
That man is a great rascal who does

nothing but drink, and does not

attend to the wants of his family..

LESSON XLIK

Este perro es chiquito, pero yo tengo

uno chiquitito.
Carlotita, ve a. cuidar de tu her-

manita.
Ese nino es un picarillo.
Esta nina es una coquetilla.
Mi pobrecico hijo esta muy malo.
Pepe, i has visto mi caballito f
Si ; pero yo en tu lugar, Paco, le

llamaria caballejo, porque creo

que no merece el nombre de caba-

Uito.
Pepe vino callandito.
Mi amigo esta apuradillo.
Esa niiia esta muertecita de frio.

Tu casa esta lejitos.

61 no es poeta, sino poetastro.

This dog is pretty small, but I have

a very little one.
Charlotte, go and take care of your

little sister.
This child is a little rogue.
This little girl is a little coquette.
My poor little son is very sick.
Joe, have you seen my pony.
I did ; but if I were you, Frank, I

would call it a nag, for I think it

is not worthy the name of pony.

Joe came in softly.

My friend is a little embarrassed.

That little girl is almost dead with

cold.
Your house is pretty far away.
He is no poet, but a poetaster.

EXPLANATION.

221. Augmentative and diminutive i^ouns are those
derivatives which serve to augment or diminish the significa-
tion of their primitives ; not only in regard to size, but also
esteem, character, dignity, importance, &c.

They are formed by adding various terminations to the
primitive nouns, dropping generally the vowel, if it end in
one. The terminations which are used are very numerous ;
but those most frequently adopted are azo^ on^ ote for the
augmentative masculine, and aza^ ona^ ota for the augmen-
tative feminine nouns. These terminations are equivalent
in their meaning to the English words hig^ large^ stout^ tall^
and such like ; as,

DERIVATIVES.

Hombron, hom- A tall, or large,
br«20, hombro^e. man.

MujeroTia, muje- A tall, or large,
raza, mujero^a. woman.

But the nouns which have those terminations are not always
augmentatives, since the nouns pistoletazo, pistol shot ; cano-
nazo, cannon shot; garrotazo, blow of a bludgeon, do not

PRIMITIVES.

Hombre. A man.

Mujer. A woman.

LESSON XLIY.

247

augment the signification of their primitives, pistola^ canoUy
and garrote^ and consequently are not augmentatives.

Familiar use has introduced many other augmentative and
diminutive terminations ; as,

Hombrona^o. i A very large man.

Picarona^^o. | A very great rascal.

The terminations most used as diminutives are m, illOy
ito, icOy ete^ uelo or ejo^ for the masculine ; the feminine are
formed by adding a to the termination m, and by changing
the final vowel of the others into a.

Many of the diminutive terminations may acquire a still
further diminutive signification by adding other terminations
to them ; thus,

Chtco.

Chiqui^o.

ChiquiU'^o.

Small.
Very small.
Very, very small.

The manner of applying these terminations, as much for
their different meanings as for their various orthographical
accidents, admits of so much variety that practice seems the
only means of acquiring the proper use of them ; as,

Mi herman^7o.

Un hombreci^o.

Un viejeci^o.

!fil es un picart'ZZo.

Coxloiita.

Una pobre viejec^7a.

Ella es una coqueU7/a.

Mi pobrec*co hi jo {or mi pobre

h.\]ito).
Un caballeyo.
Un pobre^e.
Un ladronzt^eZo.
Un vejezuelo.

My dear little brother.

A dear little man.

A dear little old man.

He is a dear little rogue.

Dear little Charlotte.

A poor dear little old woman.

She is a dear little coquette.

My poor little son.

A miserable little horse, a nag.
A poor useless creature.
A petty young thief.
A petty king.

222. Besides the terminations mentioned, there are many
others which may be called irregular, inasmuch as they can
be affixed to certain nouns only, among them the most irregu-
lar are those of persons ; as,

Francisco, Paco, etc. I Francis, Frank.

Concepci6n, Concha, etc. | {No equivalent in English.)

^48 LESSON XLIV.

Jose, Pepe, etc. i Joseph, Joe.

Maria, Mariquita, etc. I Mary.

223. Although the diminutives proceed in general from
substantive nouns, as we see by the preceding examples, they
are also formed, in familiar style, from adjectives, participles,
gerunds, and even from adverbs ; thus we not unfrequently

Revoltost7Zo es el muchacho.
MuertectYo de frio.
Todito el dia.
Pan calenti7o.
. Apuradi7Zo estuvo.
Vino calland^7o.
Leji7os esta tu casa.

The boy is rather turbulent.

Half dead with cold.

The whole day over.

Warm bread (slightly warm).

He was somewhat embarrassed.

He came softly.

Your house is pretty far away.

224. Primitive words, ending of themselves in any di-
minutive termination (such as cept'ZZo, brush ; abanico, fan ;
esp^/o, looking-glass, &c.), cannot take an additional termi-
nation similar to their own, without producing a disagree-
able sound, which ought always to be avoided. Words end-
ing in ito or ifa are excepted.

The same termination may often serve to express affection,
pity^ contempt^ &c., being in this respect like the interjec-
tions, and it is consequently very difficult to classify them.
Very often their real meaning can be distinguished only by
the nature of the conversation and the intonation of the
voice. They are, nevertheless, not to be used too profusely,
because when they come too close together they render the
discourse monotonous, in consequence of the similarity ex-
isting between them.

226. There are in Spanish other derivatives, formed more
or less at fancy, and which are not augmentatives or diminu-
tives, although they may appear to be such ; these might be
called depreciatives (despreciativos)^ because there is always
in them something of censure, maliciousness, or mockery ; as.

Casa, casuca.
Poeta, poetastro.
Caldo, calducho.
Pueblo, poblacho.

House, miserable-looking house.
Poet, poetaster.
Broth, poor broth.
Miserable little village.

LUSSOJSr XLIV, 249

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Tiene V. lastima de aquel pobrete ? No tengo lastima
de el, porque es un ladronzuelo.

2. i Le ha robado a V. algo ? No, senor, el sabe muy bien
que si se atreviese a robarme yo lo mataria de un pistoletazo.

3. Y I por que no de un garrotazo, 6 un canonazo ? i Por
que? No se porque, probablemente he empleado la palabra
pistoletazo porque tengo una pistola j no tengo ni garrote, ni
canon.

4. No, senor, esa no es la razon ; i quiere Y. que yo se la
diga ? Bien, veamos.

5. Y. no tiene valor para matar una mosca cuanto mas a un
hombre ; pero Y. queria practicar eon las palabras matar y pis-
toletazo y esta es la sola razon por la cual Y. iba a cometer un
homicidio.

6. Yaya, Don Francisco, Y. es poeta, hombre de ingenio y
de buen humor y quiere divertirse a costa mia, i no es verdad ?
Ya lo veo a Y. venir, Y. quiere hacerme decir que no soy poeta
sino poetastro introduciendo esta palabrita mas de la leccion.

7. Solo le faltaba a Y. llamarse Quevedo para serle parecido
en todo, hasta en el nombre. — Mil gracias por el honor de la com-
paracion, pero volviendo a lo del pistoletazo.

8. I Por Dios ! D. Francisco, no sea Y. tan burlon y dejeme
Y. estar en paz. — Lo dejare a Y., Don Pepe, si me permite con-
tarle un cuentecito ; y para que le parezca a Y. mas interesante,
se lo contare a Y. introduciendo tantos aumentativos y diminu-
tivos como me sea posible.

9. Con esa condicion le escucho a Y. — Pues bien : vaya de
cuento : Habia un hombrecillo en cierto lugarcillo. — Y observe
Y., D. Pepito, que para el cuentecito lo mismo hubiera dado que
el hombre hubiera sido hombron y el lugar lugaron. — Adelante
con el cuentecillo que me va gustando un tantico. Pues es el
caso que este hombron, hombrecito, hombrecillo, hombrote, hom-
brecico, hombrazo, hombron azo, hombracho, 6 como Y. quiera
llamarle. . . .

10. Yo no quiero llamarle nada, Y. le ha llamado ya sufi-
ciente; pero al cuento, al cuento 6 se acabara el ejercicio sin
que lleguemos al fin.— Pues este hombrezuelo no sabia mas que
un cuentecillo ; pero lo contaba a todo el mundo que encontraba.

11. Pero yo no comprendo como podia hacer que su cuento
viniese a pelo y Y. sabe que no se cuenta un cuento asi de sope-

250 LESSON XLIY,

ton, como se dan los buenos dias. — Al principio, el viejote se en-
contraba apuradillo para conseguirlo ; pero el picaruelo invento
despues una estratagema por medio de la cual hizo que su anec-
dotilla viniera a pelo siempre.

12. I Oiga ! I J que estratagema f ue esa ? Oigala V. ; pero antes
debo advertir a V. que en su anecdota habia algo que bacia rela-
cion a caiionazos y pistoletazos.

13. I Eh ! i Ya vuelve V. a los pistoletazos ! Pues bien, como
iba diciendo de mi cuento, se aproximaba el buen viejecito ca-
llandito a cualquier corrillo que encontrase y poniendose el dedo
indice sobre la boca en ademan de imponer silencio, les pregun-
taba. " i Han oido Vds. un canonazo ? " No, senor, era natural-
mente la respuesta ; pues bien, respondia mi hombre muy satis-
fecho. — Ahora que hablamos de canonazos les contare a Yds. una
anecdota . . . y aqui contaba su cuento.

14. Yo no veo la aplicacion de su cuento de V. todavia, Sr. D.
Francisco. — j Como ! D. Pepe, i no ha oido V. un pistoletazo ?

EXERCISE.

1. How did you like that story by Fernan Caballero which
1 lent you ? Very much indeed ; it gives a very good idea of
the manners, customs, and language of the low classes in Anda-
lusia {Andalucia).

2. What did that man want ? He is a poor lame man ask-
ing for a piece of bread, or a few cents to buy some.

3. He is lame, you say ; how did that happen to him ? He
says he was at the war and received a pistol shot in the leg.

4. What does the physician give to your cousin since he has
been sick ? He has given him some medicine (medicina), and
says he must take broth three times a day.

5. Do you like broth ? Yes, very well ; but not such poor
broth as they make for my cousin.

6. How does that poor man make his living since he lost
both his arms ? He can do nothing in the world, and lives on
what little money he gets from his brother, who is himself rather
embarrassed just now.

7. Come nearer to the fire, Louisa ; it is a little cold this
morning. Thank you, I do not feel the cold much ; but I should
be obliged to you if you would call Fanny in to warm herself ;
she is half dead with cold.

8. Is Henry going to be employed by that merchant to whom

LESSON XLV. 251

you spoke for him some time ago ? Yes, I think it is probable-
and I shall be very glad, for the poor fellow * is a little embar-
rassed, and has been so for a long time.

9. If I were in your place I should not allow that dog to
howl so the whole night through. My father will not let me
speak about it to our neighbor, who lives in that miserable old
house next to ours ; it is his dog, and he ought not to let it
howl in such a manner.

10. Just listen to him ! as if I could not go and kill it with a
bludgeon. — Kill it ! There would be no necessity for killing it ;
just give him one good blow with the bludgeon you talk of and
he would let you sleep in future.

11. Have you ever read Don Quixote ? No ; why ? If you
take the trouble to read it you will find a very good anecdote of
a madman (loco) and a dog, in the first chapter of the second
part of that justly celebrated work.

12. Have you paid attention to what is said in to-day's lesson
on augmentatives and diminutives ? Yes, madam ; and it seems
to me that the proper use of them must make a language expres-
sive and elegant in a high degree (grado).

13. Is Concepcion a very common name for ladies in Spain ?
There are a great many called by that name ; the diminutive is
Concha.

14. Is your mother satisfied with her new servant ? Very
much so.

15. Why did she let the other one go away ? She was very
glad to see her go away, because she used to steal everything
that came to her hand.

16. Is that coffee warm ? No, sir ; but I could warm it in a
few minutes, if you wished.

LESSON XLV.

Avisar.

Admirar.
Aconsejar.

To advise, to notify, to let one

know.
To admire.
To counsel, to advise.

* Remember that English words italicised are not to be translated.

252

LESSON XLV.

Apremiar.

Afectar.

Compadecer.

Convertir.

Desertar.

Empenar.

Explicar.

Fusil ar.

Guardar.

Librar.

Mentir.

Mencionar.

Permanecer.

Relatar.

Santificar.

Suceder.

Sonar.

Volar.

De todo corazon.
En su interior.
Ya caigo.
Bien venido.
A cual mas.
De buena fe.
Esto es.
Ya lo ve V,

To urge, to compel one to do sluj

thing by order of court.
To feign, to affect.
To pity.
To convert.
To desert.

To pledge, to engage.
To explain.
To shoot.

To guard, to observe, to keep.
To free, to liberate, to deliver.
To lie.
To mention.
To remain.
To relate.
To sanctify.
To happen, to succeed.
To sound.
Toflv.

I Ah bah !

Oh, pshaw !

i Toma !

Indeed !

Ancho.

Wide, broad.

Falso.

False.

Calvo.

Bald.

Famoso.

Famous.

Notorio.

Notorious, well known.

Credulo.

Credulous.

Critico.

Critical.

Formal.

Formal, straightforward.

Supersticioso.

Superstitious.

Esceptico.

Skeptic, skeptical.

With all my heart.

In his mind.

I see (or understand).

Welcome.

Yieing with each other.

In good faith.

That is.

So you see.

LESSON XLV,

253

Sol.

Sun.

Oracion.

Prayer.

Amor.

Love.

Tierra.

Earth, land.

Cielo.

Sky, heaven.

Calva.

Baldness, the bald

Reino.

Kingdom.

part.

Fin.

End, purpose.

Ana.

Ann.

Deudor.

Debtor.

Voluntad.

Will, choice.

General.

General.

Profecia.

Prophecy.

Cuervo.

Raven, crow.

Fisonomia.

Physiognomy,

Agiiero.

Omen.

countenance.

Interior.

Interior.

Tentacion.

Temptation.

Espiritu.

Spirit.

Sinceridad.

Sincerity.

Lodo.

Mud.

Injusticia.

Injustice.

El padre nuestro. The Lord's

Ridiculez.

Ridicule.

Prayer.

Compasion.

Compassion.

Tren.

Train.

Materia.

Matter.

Parroquiano.

Parishioner,

Fe.

Faith.

customer.

Bolsa.

Purse.

Lector.

Reader.

Excepcion.

Exception.

Frente.

Forehead.

Formalidad

Formality.

COMPO.

3ITI0N.

Dios te lo premie.

Si para fines de ano no hubiere pa-

gado, lo apremias {or apremialo,

or lo apremiaras).
Si viene {or como venga) sera bien

recibido.
Quien tai diga miente.
Si asi lo haces, Dios te lo premie.
Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar

Cuervos, dejalos volar y mira tii

donde pones los pies.

Todo hombre calvo no tendra pelo ;

y si tuviere alguno no sera en la

calva.
Le perdonaran todo lo que hiciere.

Le escribire a V. lo que me dijere.

Si permaneciere aqui algiin tiempo
se lo avisare.

May God reward you for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.

If he comes, he will be well re-
ceived.

Whoever says such a thing, lies.

If you do so, may God reward you.

If on going out of your house you
should see crows fly, let them fly,
and look where you put your own
feet.

Every bald man is without hair; or
if he should have any, it would
not be on the bald part.

They will forgive him every thing
he may do.

I shall write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.

If I should (or should I) remain here
any time, I shall let you know.

254

LUSSON XLV.

Le escribire d V. lo qae me diga.

Le perdonaran lo que haga.

Si hubiere salido cuando V. llegue.

Aunque hubiere Uegado antes que
reciba la carta.

Aunque haya llegado antes que re-
ciba la carta.

El general mando que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.

El general mando que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusila-
dos.

El general ha mandado que todos
los que desertaren sean fusilados.

El general ha mandado que todos
los que hubieren desertado sean
fusilados. .

Quien lo dijere miente.

Si yiniere, sera bien recibido.

Si asi lo hicieres.

I shall write you what he may say
to me.

They will forgive him every thing
he may do.

If he should have left when you ar-
rive.

Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.

Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.

The general ordered that all those
who might (happen to) desert
should be shot.

The general ordered that all those
who might have deserted should
be shot.

The general has ordered that all
those who may desert {i. e. may
happen to desert) should be shot.

The general has ordered that all
those who may have deserted be
shot.

Whoever should say so would lie.

If he should come, he would be well
received.

If you should do so.

EXPLANATION.
226. The putuke of the subjunctive mode represents a
contingent action to take place some time hence ; as,

I shall write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.

Le escribire a V. lo que me dijere,
Le perdonaran todo lo que Mciere,

Si permaneciere aqui algiin tiempo
se lo avisare.

They will forgive him every thing
he may do in future.

If I should (or should I) remain
here any time I shall let you
know.

227. The peeseis't subjunctive may be substituted for
the foregoing tense, except when the verb is preceded by the
conditional si ; as, Le escribire a V. lo que diga ; Le perdo-
naran lo que haga,

228. The future perfect subjunctive, which is not so

LESSOX XLY.

255

much used as the future subjunctive, describes a contingent
action dependent on a future event ; as,
Si huhiere salido cuando V. llegue.

Aunque huhiere llegado antes que
reciba la carta.

If he should have left when you ar-
rive.

Although he may have arrived be-
fore he receive the letter.

229. The perfect subjuj^ctive may be substituted for
the above tense, except when the verb is preceded by the
conditional si ; as, aunque haya llegado antes que reciba la
carta,

230. In order that the imperfect and past perfect sub-
junctive, which also express a future contingent action or
event, be not misapplied, as too frequently they are, and con-
founded with the future simple and compound future of the
same mode, the following distinction must be attentively ob-
served :

1st. That the imperfect qh^l past perfect may be employed
when the actions or events expressed in the sentence are fu-
ture only in reference to some other time expressed, or merely
implied, in the sentence.

2d. That the subjunctive future and subjunctive future
perfect must be used when the contingent action or event im-
plied in the sentence is future with regard to the action ex-
pressed by the determining verbs ; as.

El general man do que todos los que The general ordered that all those
desertaran fuesen fusilados.

El general mando que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusila-
dos.

El general ha mandado que todos
los que desertaren sean fusilados.

Bl general ha mandado que todos
los que hubieren desertado sean
fusilados.

who should (might happen to) de-
sert should be shot.

The general ordered that all those
who had (might have) deserted
should be shot.

The general has ordered that all
those who desert (^. e. may hap-
pen to desert) shall be shot.

The general has ordered that all
those who have deserted shall be
shot.

231. The future and the future perfect subjunctive also
act as determining verbs ; but they govern the subordinate

256 LIJSSON XLV.

verb only in the present or the future indicative, and in the
imperative ; as,

Quien lo dijere, miente.

Si viniere sera bien recibido.

Si asi lo hiciereSf Dios te lo premie.

Whoever should say so will lie.

If he should come, he will be well

received.
If you do so, may God reward you

for it.
If at the end of the year he has not

paid you, compel him to do so.

Si para fines de ano no te hubiere pa-
gadOy lo apremiaSy or apremialo,
or lo apremiards.

These determining sentences of the future simple of the
subjunctive may be turned to the present indicative in cer-
tain cases, and to the present subjunctive in others ; as.

Si vienej or como venga^ sera bien

recibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo haces, Dios te lo premie,

etc.

If he comes, he shall be well re-
ceived.

Whoever says so lies.

If you do so, may God reward you
for it.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Don Jose, me han dicho que es mal agiiero al salir uno de
su casa ver volar cuervos ; i que piensa V. sobre ello ? Yo pienso
como Don Francisco de Quevedo.

2. e Y que es lo que pensaba ese famoso escritor sobre esta
materia ? Oiga V. lo que el decia.

3. Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar cuervos, dejalos volar, y
mira tii donde pones los pies.

4. i Ah ! i bah ! Quevedo era un criticon que no perdonaba
nada, pero alia en su interior quiza creia un poquito como todo
el mundo en los agiieros ; i no cree V. asi ? i Que si creia ? Por
supuesto que si. Vea V. aqui otro de los a^eros en que creia.

5. Si vas a comprar algo, y al ir a pagar no hallares la bolsa
adonde llevabas el dinero, es agiiero malisimo, y no te sucedera
bien la compra.

6. i Toma ! Esa es una verdad de Perogrullo, y ya veo que
V. no cree en los agiieros pero al menos V. creera en las profecias ;
i no es verdad, Don Jose ? j O ! si, senora, mucho, sobre todo en
las de Perogrullo.

7. I Que profecias son esas, que nunca las he oido ? Senora,
no podre relatarselas a V. todas, pero le dire a V. algunas si V. lo
desea.

LESSON XLV, 257

8. Con mucho gusto, hagame Y. el favor. Pues bien, oiga
V. : " Si lloviere habra lodos." " El que tuviere tendra."

9. i Ah ! ya caigo ; es por esto que se llama cualquiera verdad
que es muy notoria, verdad de Perogrullo. j Vamos ! aqui viene
Don Enrique, puede ser que el crea en algo, porque V. no cree
en nada.

10. A los pies de V., Dona Anita. — Beso a Y. la mano Don
Enrique.

11. A las ordenes de Y., Don Jose. — Bien venido, Don Enri-
que.— Aqui tiene Y. a Doiia Anita empenada en hacerme super-
sticioso.

12. g Y Y. es tambien esceptico ? i No cree Y. en sueiios, en
espiritus, en fisonomias ? e en que cree Y., Don Enrique ? Yo,
senorita, soy un hombre muy credulo, creo en todo, creo hasta
en las mujeres.

13. Mil gracias, Don Enrique ; yo creia que la sinceridad esta-
ba siempre de parte de la mujer y no del hombre, pues son Yds.
tod OS a cual mas falso. — Seiiorita, 6 Y. nos hace una injusticia, 6
yo soy una excepcion ; pero volviendo a lo de las creencias, con-
fieso de buena fe que soy un poco supersticioso. — Me alegro mu-
cho, de ese modo me ayudara Y. a convertir a Don Jose que no
cree en nada.

14. Perdone Y., senorita, yo creo en una de las cosas que Y.
ha mencionado, esto es, en las fisonomias. — j Bien, bien ! expli-
quenos Y., entonces, su significado.

15. El que tuviere la frente ancha tendra los ojos debajo de la
frente, y vivira todos los dias de su vida. — \ Por Dios ! Don Jose,
hable Y. formalmente.

16. Pues bien, con toda formalidad. Todo hombre calvo no
tendra pelo, y si tuviere alguno no sera en la calva.

17. i Ya lo ve ! Y. se burla de todo, y no cree en nada, es un
esceptico completo. Defiendase Y., amigo Don Jose, 6 quiza es
verdad que no cree Y. en nada. Entonces le compadozco a Y. de
todo corazon.

18. i Hombre ! dejeme Y. en paz, y guarde Y. su compasion
para todas esas pobres gentes que creen, 6 afectan creer, todas
esas ridiculeces ; yo creo lo que veo ; creo lo que siento, y creo lo
que mi razon me aconseja creer ; por eso creo en el sol, en el amor,
en Dios. — i Yamos ! ahora va a hacernos creer que es hombre muy
religioso.

19. Senor Don Jose, esta senorita y yo tenemos grandes deseos

19

258 LESSON XLV.

de aprender el Padre nuestro en espanol ; l lo sabe V. ? No sola-
mente lo se, sino que es una oracion que me gusta mucho.

20. I Nos hara V. el favor de decirnosla ? Con mucho gusto,
helo aqui.

21. " Padre nuestro, que estas en los cielos, santificado sea tu
nombre, venga a nos el tu reino. Hagase tu voluntad, asi en la
tierra como en el eielo. El pan nuestro de cada dia danoslo hoy.
Perdonanos nuestras deudas, como nosotros perdonamos a nues-
tros deudores. Y no nos dejes caer en tentacion. Y libranos de
mal.'' Amen.

22. Mil gracias, Don Jose ; voy a aprenderlo de memoria por-
que me suena muy bien en espanol.

EXERCISE.

1. At what time does the sun rise at New York in the month
of September ? The sun rose here this morning at twenty-seven
minutes past five o'clock.

2. What did your teacher say to you to-day when your les-
sons were finished ? Nothing to me in particular ; he spoke to
all of us about reading good books, as very necessary in order to
acquire the love of truth and sincerity in all our actions.

3. Here are the works of Francis de Quevedo ; have you ever
read them ? Yes, very often ; and I very much admire his pro-
found knowledge of the human heart.

4. He is also somewhat of a jester ; is he not ? Yes, but for
a very wise end ; he shows the ridiculousness of belief in augu-
ries, omens — for instance, the flight {vuelo) of crows, &c.

5. What do you think of his prophecies ? The only end of
his prophecies seem to be to divert his readers, telling them that
all bald persons have no hair, or if they should have any, it would
not be on the bald place.

6. Do you know what the general has ordered ? He has
given orders that all soldiers that desert shall be shot.

7. Do you pity that poor soldier who is to be shot ? I did not
know there was one to be shot ; what crime did he commit ? He
deserted.

8. What will they do to that robber if they find him ? He
will be shot.

9. Do you not think he deserves to be shot ? There can be
no doubt of it: he who kills a man must die by the hand of
man.

LESSON XLVL

259

10. Are there still superstitious people in the world ? Yes, a
great many ; and I must say, that, even among the learned, we
find a large number whose education ought to lead * us to have
a higher opinion of them.

11. Has that gentleman yet paid you the money he owed you
such a long time ? Not yet ; indeed I begin to fear he will never
pay me.

12. If he should not pay you before he leaves the country, com-
pel him to do so. So I intend to do.

13. How long does your father intend to remain in Germany ?
Perhaps two or three months ; but should he remain longer, he
will write for me to go to him.

14. Welcome, Mr. Martinez ! how long have you been in town ?
Only a few days ; and I shall return home as soon as I hear from
my brother.

15. What a fine forehead that young lady has ! I have never
seen such a beautiful countenance, with the exception of that of
a lady whom I met in Spain a few years ago.

LESSON XLYI.

Adivinar.

To guess.

Acordar.

To agree, to tune.

Acordarse.

To recollect, to remember.

Colocar.

To lay, to place.

Meter.

To put in, to make (noise).

Peinar.

To comb.

Picar.

To prick, to chop, to hash.

Persistir.

To persist.

Komper.

To break.

Coger.

To take, to catch.

Esconder.

INTERJE

To hide, to conceal.

CTIONS.

lAy!

Ay!

iZape! Heaven pre-

lEal

Cheer up

! come,

serve us !

come!

i Victoria I Victory '

I Eh I

Oh!

ah!

i Como ! How !

*

Deberia

hacernos.

260

LESSON XL VI.

iHuy!

I Ox!

iSus!

iUf (or huf)!

I Hola !

iTate!

iCa!

i Viva !

Whew!
Gret you gone !
Come ! come !
Ugh!
Halloa !
Take care !
Pshaw !
Hurrah !

iDale! Go!

i Que horror ! O horror !

Ah^.

Cambio.

Alfiler.

Atlantico.

Exito.

Buen exito.

Cable.

Peine.

Presidente.

Ruido.

Chasco.

Patio.

Tratado.

Dolor.

Asombro.

Maullido.

Gato.

j Anda !
i Calle !

i Chito (or chi-
ton) !
j Diantre !

i Cuidado !

i Dios nos libre !

i Vamos !
i Vuelta !

Go! go away!
Strange !
Hush!

The deuce !
^ Look out !
( Take care !
Heaven pre-
serve us !
Come !
Turn about
{or round) !

Finalmente.

Finally.

Llevar a cabo.

To accomplish.

Llevarse chasco.

To be disappointed.

Cabal.

Just, exact.

Fresco.

Cool, fresh.

Listo.

Ready, quick.

Restante.

Remaining, remainder.

Telegrafico.

Telegraphic.

Extraordinario.

Extraordinary.

Dichoso.

Happy.

Air.

Change.

Pin.

Atlantic.

Result.

Success.

Cable.

Comb.

President.

Noise.

Disappointment.

Yard, pit (theatre).

Treaty, treatise.

Pain, grief.

Amazement.

Mewing.

Cat.

Camisa.

Cuenta.

Empresa.

Cualidad.

Austria.

Palangana.

Prusia.

Procesion.

Constancia.

Prueba.

Tranquilidad.

Victoria.

Gaceta.

Shirt, chemise.

Account

Enterprise.

Quality.

Austria.

Wash-basin,
wash-bowl.

Prussia.

Procession.

Constancy.

Proof, trial.

Tranquillity.

Victory.

Gazette, news-
paper.

LESSON XL VI.

COMPOSITION.

Ah ! how unfortunate I

Woe is me !

Ah ! how sad !

Ha ! rascal !

Ah ! what joy !

Oh ! wonder !

Let me get hold of him I

Oh ! I shall see you again !

Pshaw ! don't talk that way I

Whew ! I have burned myself with
the cigarette!

Oh ! how warm it, is I

Come to work !

Take care ! don't go that way ; I see
a man hiding !

Heaven preserve us! that con-
founded cat will not let me sleep
with its mewing !

That's all, eh ! I knew that much
myself.

Hurrah for liberty !

Did you ever hear such children?
what a noise they make I

Halloa ! Mr. Francis ! it is good for
sore eyes to see you !

How can I tell ?

The account is exact (correct).

I hope not to be disappointed, and
that I shall carry out my under-
taking.

EXPLANATION.

232. Intekjectioks are words which serve to express the
different emotions and affections of the soul. There should
be a separate interjection to express each passion or emotion ;
but this not being the case, we often use the same ones to ex-
press joy, grief, affright, astonishment, mockery, anger, &c.,
the signification of each interjection changing according to
the voice, gesture, and manner of the speaker.

The exclamations that are properly called interjections in
Spanish, inasmuch as they have no other use, and because

Ah ! que desgracia !

Ay de mi !

Oh ! dolor !

Ah ! bribon !

Ah ! que alegria !

Oh ! asombro !

Ay, si le cojo !

Oh ! ya nos veremos !
I Bah ! no hables de esa manera !
i Huy ! me queme con el cigarrillo !

; Uf ! que calorazo !

i Ea ! a tr aba jar !

i Tate ! tate ! no pase V. por ahi, que

veo un horabre escondido !
; Zape ! ese gatazo no me deja dor-

mir con sus maullidos !

i Toma ! toma ! eso ya lo sabia yo.

; Viva la libertad !

I Diantre de muchachos ! y que rui-

do meten !
I Hola ! D. Francisco ! dichosos los

ojos que lo ven a V !
I Que me se yo ?
La cuenta estd cabal.
Espero no Uevarme chasco, y que

llevare a cabo mi empresa.

262 LESSON XL VI,

they consist of only one word, are the following : Ah, ay, bah,
ca, eh, huy, oh, ox, sus, uf, ea, hola, ojald, tate, zape, and a few
others.

Ah, ay and oh are used indijfferently to express pain, joy,
mockery, surprise, scorn, anger, or admiration ; as.

Ah ! que desgracia I

Ay de mi !

Oh ! dolor !

Ah ! bribon !

Ah I que alegria I

Oh ! asombro !

Ah ! que necio !

Ay si le cojo !

Oh ! j& nos veremos ! &c.

Ah ! what misfortune !

Woe is me !

Ah ! how sad I

Ha ! rascal !

Oh ! what joy I

Oh ! wonder !

Ah ! what a fool !

Let me get hold of him !

Oh ! I shall see you again !

233. / Bah I expresses displeasure, and sometimes wonder
and admiration. / Bh I besides being used to attract the at-
tention, is often employed in the sense of alas ! / Sus I serves
only to encourage. / Huy ! is an exclamation expressive of
pain. / Ea ! serves to encourage, and sometimes to call the
attention. We use / hola ! to call our inferiors, and intimate
friends, and to manifest joy and surprise. / Tate I expresses
surprise, and serves to warn any one of some danger. / Ojald !
serves to manifest ardent desire for something.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION. *

1. i Ea ! ea ! muchachos, arriba ! que ya es hora de levan-
tarse. — i Pues que hora es, papa ? Ya son las seis y quiero que os
vistais, laveis y tomeis el cafe prontito, para ir a tomar el aire
fresco de la manana en la plaza de Madison.

2. I Sus ! arriba ! y el que se me presente primero listo ira a
comprarme el Heraldo y tendra el centavo del cambio. — Elena,
ponme agua para lavarme. — No, Elena, no ayudes a Alejandro
que ese ya puede vestirse solo, ayuda a Carlotita y a Manolito.

3. Luisa, dame mis zapatos y mis medias. — Biiscalos tii mis-
mo, yo no voy a ayudarte para que te vistas antes que yo.

4. i Cuidado ! i no veis que vais a romper esa palangana ?
Es este Manuel que todavia no se ha puesto mas que una media
y un zapato y se quiere lavar antes que yo, que me he puesto ya
la camisa, los zapatos y el pantalon.

LESSON XL VI. ' 263

5. i Ay ! i ay !— ^ Que es eso, Luisa ? Me he picado con el al-
filer que estaba poniendo en mi vestido.

6. I En donde esta el jabon ? Que me se yo.

7. I Carlota, me quieres dar el peine, 6 te vas a estar peinando
todo el dia ? Dejame en paz, ahora acabo de principiar.

8. Mama, mire V. que Alejandro no me deja ayudar a vestir
a Manuel, l Mama, donde esta mi sombrero ?

9. Papa, ya estoy listo, deme V. el dinero para comprar el
Heraldo. — No, no, papa ; mire V. que se ha puesto el sombrero
sin peinarse.

10. i Como ! eso no, Alejandro, no se sale a la calle sin pei-
narse.— Papa, ya estoy listo. — Y yo. — Y yo.

11. I Chiton ! \ Diantre de muchachos y que ruido meten !
Aqui teneis diez centavos, cuatro para el Heraldo y de los seis
restantes uno para cada uno, cuenta cabal, me traeis el Heraldo
y despues os vais a la plaza y no volvais, a lo menos en un par
de horas.

12. Margarita, ahora que tenemos tranquilidad traeme la pipa,
antes de ponerme a escribir, fumare un poco y leere las noticias
en el patio al fresco.

13. i Hola ! grandes noticias ! I Que hay de nuevo ? El Great
Eastern ha llegado, y se dice que el gran cable telegrafico ha sido
finalmente colocado, uniendo asi la Europa y la America.

14. i Es posible ! entonces pronto tendremos noticias todos los
dias de Europa. — Asi lo espero, pero no debemos estar muy segu-
ros de ello, porque ya te acordaras del chasco que llevamos aiios
pasados.

15. i Ah ! si, ya me acuerdo ; en 1858, cuando se celebro el exi-
to del cable telegrafico con aquella grande procesion, y se vendia
por la calle la gaceta extraordinaria con el parte telegrafico de la
Reina Victoria al Presidente de los Estados Unidos.~Espero que
no nos llevemos ahora el misrao chasco.

16. i i La extraordinaria ! ! I i La gaceta extraordinaria I ! j Eh I
muchacho, aqui, aqui.

17. I Cuanto vale ? Diez centavos.

18. I Victoria ! Viva ! Viva ! i Que dice de nuevo ? El ca-
ble del Atlantico ha tenido buen exito, el primer parte recibido
por el es el tratado de paz entre el Austria y la Prusia.

19. Esta es una prueba mas de lo que puede llevar a cabo el
hombre, si tiene constancia y persiste en una empresa. — i Cree V.
que yo tambien tendre buen exito en mi empresa ?

264: LESSON XLVL

20. i Que empresa es esa ? i Como ! e no la adivina V. ? La
empresa de aprender el espanol.

21. i Ah ! No dudo que Y. hablara espanol si persiste y tiene
constancia ; puesto que con estas cualidades se ha logrado que
hable el cable del Atlantico.

EXERCISE.

1. Can you tell me what kind of weather we shall have to-
morrow ? Oh, what a question ! Do you suppose that I can de-
cide as to the weather we shall have before it comes ?

2. Did the pianist say he would come to tune the piano ? He
said he would come to-morrow, but that he could not come to-
day.

3. Have you seen that the Atlantic telegraphic cable is laid
at last ? Yes ; I am glad to see that the undertaking has been so
successful.

4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I
am not sure ; but I remember that the first, at the time of the
former cable, in 1858, was that sent by the President of the United
States to the Queen of England.

5. What was the occasion for laying a second cable ? Ah,
come now ! do you not know that the first one, having broken
shortly after it was laid, became entirely useless (inutil) ?

6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ?
No ; what is the news ? That a treaty of x>eace has been signed
(celebrar) between Prussia and Austria.

7. Charles, go and look for the comb, where you put it when
you finished with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using
it ; and even if I had, I should not tell you where it is.

8. Ah, you little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-
basin. It is not my fault, Henry wanted it first, and I had al-
ready commenced to wash myself ; but he persisted and wished
to take it from me.*

9. O horror ! just see what a state his hair (pelo) is in ! Go
this instant and get the comb and comb your hair before you dare
to appear before me.

10. Have you a pin to give me ? Yes, here is a paper of pins ;
take all you want and give me back the rest.

11. Did you know your lessons well this morning ? Yes, very

♦ Persistio en quitarmela.

LESSON XLVL 265

well, and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the pro-
cession.

12. Why did you kill that poor little fly ? Have I not told
you many times that I don't wish you to catch or kill flies ?

13. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker brought it only a
few minutes ago.

14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o'clock.
You may go now ; but do not make much noise.

15. Where were you going when I met you ? We were com-
ing home to dine.

16. Has the shoemaker sent you his bill ? Yes, but it is not
"correct.

17. Has not your uncle written to you since he went away ?
He has sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on busi-
ness ; but he has not written to us once {una sola vez).

18. Is not there to be a new opera to-night ? No ; but I un-
derstand there is to be a new play (comedia) at the theatre.

19. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very
often now.

20. If Louisa were a little taller would not she be handsomer
than Jane ? She would be at least quite as handsome,

21. Would you desire to have the window open ? I think it
would be much cooler if it were open.

22. Would you not like me to repeat to you that story I told
you the other day ? If you had time I should be much obliged
to you for telling it to me once more.

23. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman
than so much noise ? He could not live without noise.

24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when
you fell out of your carriage ? Yes, if I had not taken care.

25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would
you not have brought me some ? If I could have gotten {conse-
guir) it I would.

26. Would not your aunt have been disappointed if she had
not been in time to take the three o'clock train ? She would have
been terribly disappointed, for she was going to spend the day at
a friend's, about ten miles out of town.

266

LESSON XLVII.

LESSON XLVII.

Acompanar.

To accompany.

Cargar.

To load, to charge.

Curar.

To cure, to attend (as a physi-

cian).

Danar.

To injure, to damage.

Deleitar.

To delight.

Incomodar.

To incommode.

Incomodarse.

To get out of temper.

Equivocar.

To mistake.

Evitar.

To avoid, to shun.

Instruir.

To instruct.

Ocupar.

To occupy.

Padecer.

To suffer.

Solicitar.

To solicit, to apply for, to urge.

Dimes y diretes.

Ifs and ands.

El no se que.

An inexplicable something.

Dolor de cabeza.

Headache.

Masculino.

Masculine.

Amable.

Amiable.

A^adable.

Agreeable.

Extranjero.

Foreign, foreigner.

Interesante.

Interesting.

Moribundo.

Dying.

Valiente.

Valiant, arrant.

Femenino.

Feminine.

Acento. Accent.

Alma. Soul.

Bolsillo. Purse.

Comedia. Comedy.

Autor. Author.

Vara. Rod, yard

Esfuerzo. Effort, bravery.

{measure).

Efecto. Effect.

Libra. Pound.

Fastidio. Unease, uneasiness.

Manteca, or Man- Butter.

Ciudadano. Citizen.

tequilla.*

Hospital. Hospital.

Calidad. Quality.

In the Americas manteca is lard, and mantequilla, butter.

LESSON XLVII.

267

Metodo.

Method.

Cantid

Trabajo.

Labor, work.

Napoles.

Naples.

Eeal.

Real.

Sonido.

Sound.

Chelin.

Shilling.

COMPOSITION.

Quantity.

El porqu6 de todas las cosas.

Los ayes del moribundo.

Los dimes y diretes.

El cuando.

El no se que.

El tener amigos no dana.

Hay hombres de un saber extraor-

dinario.
Una nada le incomoda.
La const ancia y el trabajo son nece-

sarios al hombre en todas sus em-

presas.
La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nacion muy po-

blada.
El clima de Espana.
Los esf uerzos de la Espafla, *
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos veces al dia.
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad.
El Senor de Vargas tiene tres ninos.
La Senora Martinez esmuyprudente.
Ella me dio la mano.
Puso la mano en el bolsillo.
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi

mano.
El caballero a quien vio V. ayer en

mi casa.

The why and the wherefore of all
things.

The groans of the dying.

The ifs and ands.

The time.

I know not what.

It is hurtful to no one to have
friends.

There are men of extraordinary
knowledge.

A mere nothing puts him out.

Constancy and labor are necessary
for mankind in all their enter-
prises (or undertakings).

America is larger than Europe.

France is a very populous nation.

The climate of Spain.

The efforts of Spain.

Four dollars a yard.

Two reales a pound.

Thirty cents a dozen.

Twice a day.

Faith, hope, and charity.

Mr. Vargas has three children.

Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.

She shook hands with me.

He put his hand in his pocket.

Many gentlemen have solicited my
hand.

The gentleman whom you saw yes-
terday in my house.

* The article is here used with the name of a country even though
following the preposition (see § 236), as the noun is personified.

268 LESSON XLVIL

EXPLANATION.

234. Use of the Article. — Any of the parts of speech,
and sometimes even whole sentences, may be used as nouns,
and as such may take the article, as has just been observed
in the Composition of the present lesson, in which we see
examples of verbs, adverbs, and interjections preceded by the
article, and treated in every respect as substantives.

235. The defi^^ite article is to be used before all ab-
stract nouns, taken in a general sense, and in the full extent
of their signification ; as.

La constancia y e? trabajo son nece- Constancy and labor are necessary
sarios al hombre en todas sus em- to mankind in all undertakings.
presas.

236. The article is used before the names of the four parts
of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms, prov-
inces, and countries ; and before the four seasons of the year,
and the days of the week ; as.

La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nacion muy po-

blada.
El invierno en el Sur es mas agra-

dable que el verano.
Yo ire a visitarle k Y. el lunes.

America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.

The winter in the South is more

agreeable than the summer.
I shall come to see you Monday.

But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces,
&c., when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they be
personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as.

El clima de Espafta. I The climate of Spain.

Los esfuerzos de la Espafla. \ The bravery of Spain.

Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not
admit the article ; as, Ndpoles^ Naples.

237. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when preceded by
the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to each^ re-
quire the article ; as,

Cuatro pesos la vara,
Dos reales la libra,
Treinta centavos la docena,
Dos veces al dia.

Four dollars a yard.
Two reales a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.

LUSSOJ^ XL VII.

269

If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as,
cuatro pesos por vara^ &c.

238. The article is generally repeated before every noun
enumerated, especially if they differ in gender ; as.

La fe, la esperanza y la caridad. I Faith, hope and charity.
Los dias y las noches. I The days and nights.

239. The definite article is used before nouns indicating
rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are
spoken of, but not when spoken to ; as.

El General Sheridan es valiente. General Sheridan is brave.
El Senor De Vargas tiene tres ninos.
La Seiiora Martinez, es muy pru-
dente.

Mr. De Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.

Puso la mano en el bolsillo.

240. The definite article is used instead of the possessive
pronoun when the latter refers to parts of our own body ;
as.

Me he cortado la mano, 1 1 have cut my hand.

Me duele la cabeza. \ My head aches.

This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as,
Ella me dio la mano. She gave me her hand (or shook

hands with me).
He put his hand in his pocket.

But the pronoun must be used when the use of the article
would occasion ambiguity ; as,

Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi | Many gentlemen solicited my hand,
mano. j

241. The definite article is also employed, as in English,
before nouns taken in a particular or definite sense ; as.

El caballero a quien vio V. ayer en I The gentleman whom you saw yes-
mi casa. I terday in my house.

We restrain ourselves from adding the many other rules
which we might give, if they were not subject to numerous
exceptions, and, especially, if we were not of the opinion that
practice and reading are of more value to the student than
any rules as to when to employ and when to omit the
article.

270 LESSON XLVIL

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Cual de las partes del mundo es la mayor ? El Asia es
la mayor.

2. e Es Asia nombre masculino ? No, senor, es femenino.

3. Entonces, l por que le pone V. el articulo masculino ? Por
evitar el mal sonido que resultaria de poner dos aes juntas.

4. I Luego, V. pone siempre el articulo masculino delante de
todo nombre femenino que empieza por a ? No, senor ; esto solo
sucede en singular, y cuando sobre dicha vocal carga el acento
de la palabra.

5. I Ha leido V. el " Si de las Ninas " de Moratin ? Si," senor,
lo lei hace muchos anos ; pero a mi me gusta mas la " Comedia
Nueva " del mismo autor.

6. Que tal le gusta a V. su nueva vecinita ? Dicen que es
muy bonita. — En efecto lo es ; pero a mi no me gusta, porque
anda siempre en dimes y diretes, y una nada la incomoda.

7. I Cuales son las virtudes del alma ? La fe, la esperanza y
la caridad.

8. I Tiene V. alguna cosa interesante que decirme hoy ? Mu-

chisimas interesantisimas e importantisimas para practi-

car y aprender el espanol.

9. I Uf ! ya va Y. a principiar con sus adverbios, preposicio-
nes y articulos ; va V. a decirme, por supuesto, que estas partes
de la oracion unas veces se ponen antes las unas que las otras, y
vice versa ; que las unas gobiernan a las otras y las gobernadas
gobiernan a su vez a otras, que se acuerden 6 no entre si. i Cree
V. que todo eso sera interesante para mi con el fastidio que tengo,
y el dolor de cabeza que padezco ? i Calle ! entonces, caballerito,
V. ha equivocado la casa.

10. i Que quiere V. decir con eso de equivocar la casa ? Quiero
decir que, en lugar de venir a la clase, debio V. ir hoy al hospital
y de alii al teatro.

11. I Para que ? Para que le curasen en una parte de sus do-
lores y en la otra del fastidio.

12. Si; pero, Seiior Profesor, yo siempre creia que el mejor
metodo de ensenanza es aquel que "instruye deleitando." V.
tiene mil razones, pero ha olvidado una pequena circunstancia
que requiere su metodo.

13. I Y cual es esa circunstancia ? Que no puede aplicarse
sino con aquellos discipulos que se deleitan aprendiendo.

LESSON XL VIL 271

14. Y ahora volviendo al articulo. — Seiior Profesor, V. me
excusara, pero no volvamos al articulo porque no puedo que-
darme mas aqui hoy.

15. I Como es eso ? el tiempo de la leccion no ha acabado
todavia. — Y. tiene razon ; pero hoy es necesario que me vaya
temprano, porque he prometido acompanar a unas senoritas a
la opera.

16. i Oh ! entonces es necesario no faltar a su palabra. — Senor
Profesor, buenas noches (este buen senor me fastidia con sus ex-
plicaciones). — Diviertase V. mucho, Senor Don Pepito (este ama-
ble joven aprendera espanol, para el tiempo que yo compre una
casa en la Quinta Avenida, enseiiandolo).

EXERCISE.

1. If I should come for you this evening, would you come
with me to see the Martinez family ? I should, with great pleas-
ure, if Charlotte would accompany us.

2. How well does that lady speak French ? They say she
speaks it very correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent.

3. Might he not be cured if he called in a good physician ?
He is of the opinion that physicians do more injury than good
to mankind.

4. Do you know anything of the author of that play ? Yes,
I have read or seen all his plays ; they are very interesting, and
delighted me exceedingly.

5. What is death ? The separation of soul and body.

6. Can one be a citizen of the United States without having
been born (nacer) in the country ? Yes, after having resided in
the United States a certain number of years one may become a
citizen.

7. Where is that poor man going ? To the hospital ; he has
broken his leg.

8. Pardon me, I think you are mistaken ; it is rather his arm
that is broken ; for if his leg were broken he could not walk.

9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of
Naples ? Yes, the name of the principal city is that of the
kingdom also.

10. Did you shake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon
as she saw me she came toward me and gave me her hand.

11. Is that cloth (pano) sold very high ? Not very; it costs
only three dollars a yard.

272

LESSON XL VII L

12. How often dc you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a
week.

13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every
other day (un dia si y otro no) ? My teacher says I should ;
but I have not time to take lessons so often.

14. Would you like the summer to return again ? No, thank
you, I am glad it is past, for I assure you I have suif ered enough
with the heat.

15. How sad it is on the field of battle {campo de batalld) to
hear the groans of the dying ! Yes ; and, notwithstanding, men
will persist in killing each other for a foot* of ground (terreno).

16. How much a pound is butter ? Thirty cents for one kind,
and forty cents a pound for the best.

17. Do you think it can injure any one to have friends ? No,
it can injure nobody to have friends.

18. Is not that man very amiable and agreeable ? Very rarely,
for a mere nothing irritates him.

19. Are there many learned men in that country ? There have
been, and there are at present men of extraordinary learning.

20. Which are the three principal virtues ? Faith, hope, and
charity.

21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet ? Not yet, although a large
number of gentlemen have solicited her hand.

22. I suppose you have all read some Spanish comedies ? Sev-
eral Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists.

23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do
you like best ? Those of Moliere.

LESSON XLVIII.

Afirmar.

Afligir.

Admitir.

Atreverse.

Criticar.

Condescender.

Convencer.

Declarar.

To affirm.

To afflict.

To admit, to accept.

To dare.

To criticise.

To condescend, to consent.

To convince.

To declare.

* Palmo (literally a span).

LESSON XLVIIL

273

Depender.

To depend.

Disponer.

To dispose, to arrange.

Diferenciar.

To differ.

Edificar.

To edify, to build.

Entretenerse.

To amuse.

Fabricar.

To construct, to make, to

build.

Suponer.

To suppose.

Nombrar.

To name, to appoint.

Influir.

To influence, to affect.

Ocultar.

To conceal, to hide.

Observar.

To observe.

Obedecer.

To obey.

Proporcionar.

To proportion, to procure, to

offer, to afford.

Pretender.

To pretend, to lay claim to, to

aspire to, to sue for.

Publicar.

To publish.

Quejarse.

To complain, to moan.

Regularizar.

To regulate.

Refiexionar.

To reflect.

Ridiculizar.

To ridicule.

Reformar.

To reform.

Lo que se decir.

What I can say.

Sin que Y. me lo diga.

Without your telling me.

Yolver a las andadas.

To do so again, to return to

(one's) old habits.

Para mi tengo.

In my opinion.

A trueque.

On condition.

Sin embargo.

Nevertheless, notwithstand-

ing.

Candidamente.

Candidly.

De modo.

In such a manner, that, so

that, therefore.

i Bravo !

Very good ! Bravo I

Bruto.

Brutish.

Cierto.

Certain.

Aereo.

Airy, aerial.

Angelical.

Angelic, angelical.

20

274

LESSON XL V III.

Ideal.

Ideal.

Interior.

Interior.

Incompleto.

Incomplete.

Imperfecto.

Imperfect.

Exterior.

Exterior.

Extrano.

Strange.

Igual.

Equal.

Humano.

Human.

Positivo.

Positive.

Real.

Heal, royal.

Arquitecto.

Architect.

Carrera.

Career.

Anciano.

Old man.

Desgracia.

Misfortune.

Ciego.

Blind.

Diferencia.

Difference.

Cal J canto.

Stone.*

Curiosidad.

Curiosity.

Bruto.

Brute.

Exageracion.

Exaggeration.

Idiota.

Idiot.

Franqueza.

Frankness.

Espacio.

Space.

Juventud.

Youth.

Complemento.

Complement.

Ilusion.

Illusion.

Goce.

Enjoyment.

Felicidad.

Happiness.

Mai.

EvH.

Risa.

Laugh, laughter.

Material.

Material.

Realidad.

Reality.

Objeto.

Object.

Ruindad.

Meanness.

Palacio.

Palace.

Riquezas.

Riches.

Pajaro.

Bird.

Enfermo.

Sick.

Prisionero.

Prisoner.

Pensamiento.

Thought.

Castillos en el

Castles in the

aire.

air.

COMPO

SITION.

Adivino el motivo por el cual nos ha-
bian adulado los mismos que des-
pues nos critican, criticaban, cri-
ticaron, ban criticado, criticaran.

Leiamos una noticia que acababa {or
acaba) de publicarse.

I guess the reason why those same
persons who had flattered us be-
fore, criticise, did criticise, criti-
cised, have criticised, will criticise
us afterward.

We were reading the news just pub-
lished (that had just been pub-
lished, or has just been published).

* Cal y canto, literally, lime (mortar) and stone, comes to mean what
is solid, substantial.

LUSSOJSr XLVIIL

275

Contaba la desgracia que los ailigio.

No sere yo el primero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotros, los que os que-

jais, quejabais, quejasteis, habeis

quejado, quejareis.
El quiers jugar.
Nosotros queremos estudiar.
El hubo de condescender.
Tengo que callar.
Ellos deben estar muy ocupados.
Quiero {or pienso) salir.
Afirmo {or declaro) que saldre.

Digo que saldre.

Es litil estudiar las lenguas.

Conviene a los hombres instruirse.

El estudio de las lenguas es litil.

La instruccion conviene a los hom-
bres.

Conviene que yo estudie.

Es litil que los hombres se instru-
yan.

Les mando callar. )

Les mando que callasen. )

Impedir que se cometan injusticias
es el objeto de las leyes.

Deseo que me comprendas.

No lograras que lo castiguen.

Se le ayudara si f uere necesario.

He sentido que no se convenza (con-

venciera or convenciese).
Habra llamado para que le abran

(abrieran or abriesen) la puerta.
Creo que lo convencere facilmente.
Reflexionare lo que he de hacer.

Pense que el iba a matarla.
Pense que enviara {or enviaria) la
carta.

He was telling the misfortune that
afflicted them.

I shall not be the first to dare.

Know, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had com-
plained, will complain.

He wishes to play.

We will study.

He had to consent.

I have to be silent.

They must be very busy.

I wish (or am minded) to go out.

I affirm (or declare) that I will go
out.

I say that I shall go out.

It is useful to study languages.

It is to man's interest to acquire
knowledge.

The study of languages is useful.

Knowledge is useful to man.

It is to my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.

He ordered them to be silent.

To prevent the doing of injustice,
such is the object of laws.

I wish you to understand me.

You will not succeed in having him
punished.

He shall have help if it be neces-
sary.

I was sorry that he might not be
convinced.

He will have knocked that the door
might be opened.

I think I shall convince him easily.

I shall reflect as to what I shall
do.

I thought he was going to kill her.

I thought he might or would send
the letter.

276

LESSON XLVIIL

EXPLANATION.

242. Correspondence of the Tenses with each
OTHER. — When one verb is connected with another by a
relative, there are many combinations in which the deter-
mining and the determined verbs may be found ; both may
be in the indicative or in the subjunctive mode, or one in
the indicative and the other in the subjunctive; but both
cannot be in the infinitive or in the imperative ; as,

Adivino el motivo por el cual nos
habian adulado los mismos que
nos critican, criticaban, critica-
ron, han criticado, criticardn,

Leiamos una noticia que acahdba

(or acaba) de publicarse.
Contaba la desgracia que los afligib.

No sere yo el primero que se atreva,

Aprended vosotros los que os que-
JdiSy quejabais, quejasteis, habeis
quejadoj quejareis.

243. The determined verb is put in the infinitive when-
ever it has the same subject as the determining verb ; as,

^l quiere jugar. i He wishes to play.

Nosotros queremos estudiar. \ We wish to study.

This is the reason why the auxiliaries haher de, tener que,
deber, always take the governed verb in the infinitive, because
the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as.

I guess the reason why those same
persons who have flattered us be-
fore, criticise, did criticise, criti-
cised, have criticised, will criti-
cise us afterward.

We were reading some news that had
(or has) just been published.

He was telling the misfortune that
afflicted them.

I shall not be the first to dare.

Learn, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had com-
plained, will complain.

fil hubo de condescender.

Tengo que collar.

EUos deben estar muy ocupados.

An exception to this rule occurs when the determining
verb expresses a positive and decided affirmation ; and so we

He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.

Quiero (or pienso) salir. I wish (or intend) to go out.

Afirmo (declaro) que saldre, I affirm (or declare) that I shall go

out.
We must also except the verb decir, which cannot govern
another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ

LESSON XLYIIL 277

it to announce our own actions it is not with the purpose
of relating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute
them; as,
Digo que saldre, 1 1 say I shall go out.

244. When the determining verb is ser^ or any impersonal
verb, and the governed verb has no subject, the latter is
placed in the infinitive ; as,

Es ntil estudiar las lenguas. It is useful to study languages.

Conviene a los hombres instruirse. It is to the interest of mankind to

acquire knowledge.

And such is the natural construction, because the true
subject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which
stands there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed
by the other modes. The above sentences are equivalent to
these :

El estudio de las lenguas es util.
La instruccion conviene a los hom-
bres.

The study of languages is useful.
It is to the interest of mankind to
acquire knowledge.

245. But if the determined verb also has a nominative,
then it must be placed in the subjunctive ; as.

Conviene que yo estudie.
Es util que los hombres se instru-
yan.

It is to my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.

Those verbs that express command, govern either of the
two forms, since we say equally well :

Les mando callar, ) I g^ ordered them to be silent.

Les mando que callasen, ) 1

246. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in
the present or future of the indicative, or in the imperative,
connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this lat-
ter verb is put in the subjunctive mode, ordinarily in the
present or in the future ; as,
Impedir que se cometan injusticias To prevent the doing of injustice,

es el objeto de las leyes. such is the object of the laws.

Deseo que me comprendas. I wish you to understand me.

No logrards que le castiguen. You will not succeed in having him

punished.
Se le ayudard si fuere necesario. He shall have help if it be necessary.

278 LUSSON XLYIIL

247. When the governing verb in the indicative has one
subject, and the determined verb another, the latter may not
be in the infinitive, but must take some form of the subjunc-
tive; as.

He senfido que no se convenza {con-

venciera or conveiiciese).
Habra llamado para que le dbran

(abrieran or ahriesen) la puerta.

I was sorry he should not be (or was

not) convinced.
He knocked, of course, in order that

the door may (or might) be opened.

248. When the determining verb is in the indicative, it
generally governs the determined one in the same mode, if
the nominative is the same for both verbs ; as,

Creo que le convencere facilmente. 1 1 think I shall convince him easily.
Reflexionare lo que he de hacer. 1 1 shall reflect on what I have to do.

But if each verb has a different nominative, the second
verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as.

Pense que iha a matarla.
Pense que me enviara (or enviaria)
la carta.

I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send me the
letter.

Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not
fear to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the
present work.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Dona Luisita, i Le gusta a V. formar castillos en el aire ?
Mucho ; pero creo que f ormo demasiados.

2. Me alegro mucho que, como a mi, le guste a V. el mundo
de las ilusiones, y tambien apruebo su franqueza de V. en confe-
sarlo. — Y i por que lo habia de ocultar ? i Que mal hay en eso ?

3. No se si hay mal 6 no, lo que se decir es, que todo el mundo
afecta no f ormarlos y con cierta risita burlona pretenden ridicu-
lizar a los que, como V. y yo, confesamos candidamente que los
hacemos.

4. I Y cree V., D. Jose, que esas gentes vivan sin ilusiones
de ninguna especie ? No, senorita, no lo creo. Dios ha dado a
todo hombre, a diferencia del bruto, un mundo ideal interior
ademas del mundo positivo exterior, a excepcion de los idiotas.

5. I Cuanto me alegro de oirlo ! j porque yo tenia tanta ver-
giienza de mis pobres castillos en el aire ! i De modo es que V.

"*^ LESSON XLVIIL 279

cree que yo no soy sola ? De ningiin modo, todo el mundo los
forma, la diferencia solo existe en la manera.

6. I Ah ! Don Jose, V. me va pareciendo un buen arquitecto
de castillos en el aire y uno de estos dias voy a pedirle que me
muestre uno de los muchos que habra edificado. — Con mucho
gusto, senorita, a trueque, sin embargo, de que Y. me admita en
uno de sus palacios aereos.

7. No, eso no, jamas podria yo poner en evidencia mis cas-
tillos ; pero- Y. dice que la diferencia solo existe en la manera de
formarlos; expliqueme Y. esto, quiza asi lograre reformar los
mios, porque lie observado que son incompletos; siempre les
falta algo. — Pues es extraiio, senorita, porque yo creia que solo
las cosas humanas eran imperfectas y sus ilusiones de Y. sien-
do. . . .

8. Por supuesto, \ angelicales ! \ Yamos ! dejese Y. de cum-
plimientos, ya sabe Y. que no me gustan, y respondame Y. a mi
pregunta si Y. gusta, porque tengo curiosidad de saber como for-
man otros sus castillos. — Obedezco, senorita, y para principiar,
debo decir que yo me equivoque cuando dije que solo se diferen-
ciaban en la manera, porque tambien influye mucho el material.

9. I Como el material ? i si se f abrican en el aire ! i Espero
que no los fabrique Y. de cal y canto ! — No, senorita, no de cal y
canto ; pero se f abrican ; y si se f abrican, de algo se f abrican.

10. I Pero de que, senor, de que ? Yo formo castillos, pero no
necesito nada para hacerlos ; vuelo mas que los pajaros, mando
hasta en las voluntades de los otros, hago volver al tiempo en su
carrera, dispongo del espacio, de la fortuna, y hago que me obe-
dezca hasta el amor. — Eso lo creo sin que Y. me lo diga, senorita.

11. jDale! no vuelva Y. a las andadas, y cuenteme Y. que
materiales son esos de que Y. me hablaba. — Y. misma acaba de
nombrar algunos.

12. I Cuales ? i Como ! l que mas materiales quiere Y. para
formar un castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como Y. dice
que puede, de las voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio,
de la fortuna y hasta del amor ?

13. i Toma ! Pero yo no poseo ninguna de esas cosas en reali-
dad, y sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mu-
cho.— Perdone Y., seiiorita, Y. las posee y con ellas forma Y. ese
bonito mundo interior, que le proporciona a Y. los goces que no
le da el exterior.

14. Y en eso tiene Y. razon, que mis ilusiones, 6 sea como Y.

280 LESSON XLVIIL

las llama, mi mundo interior, me consuelan mucbas veces de la
ruindad del mundo exterior. — Eso sucede a todo el mundo, de
ese modo, el ciego ve, el enfermo goza de salud, el prisionero de
libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y el anciano de la juventud, las
ilusiones bacen los males menores. En este mundo ideal es en
donde los bombres son verdaderamente iguales, y para mi tengo
que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de el depende nuestra
felicidad.

15. i No cree V. que bay alguna exageracion en lo que V.
dice ? No, senora, pero si, creo, que debemos tener buen cui-
dado de regularizar nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre
nuestros castillos en el aire en la virtud y la religion.

16. I Bravo ! bravo ! muy bien, asi me gustan a mi los castillos
en el aire.

EXERCISE.

1. Wbo built tbe bouse in wbicb you are living at present ?
An excellent architect, a friend of my father's.

2. Are you certain it was an old man tbat was suing for her
hand ? I cannot affirm that it was an old man.

3. What a misfortune that he will not study ! It would be
a real misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true.

4. Do you ever build castles in the air ? Seldom ; for, in
my opinion, real castles, built of stone, are to be preferred to
the aerial ones of which you speak.

5. What a pretty bird you have there ! does it sing ? It
sings the whole day long.

6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he
appears to be ? No, there must be some exaggeration in what
he says.

7. In what respect do these two authors dijffer from each
other ? Read the works of both, and you will observe for
yourself.

8. Do they both write equally well ? No, one of them
arranges his thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is
sometimes impossible to understand his meaning,* and it is at
all times disagreeable to read him.

9. Is Peter now punished in school as often as formerly ?
As often as ever ; but it is useless to punish him ; for though he
is good for a few days, he always goes back to his old habits.

* Lo que quiere decir.

LESSON XLIX.

281

10. Does that man always say what he thinks ? I am sure
I cannot say; but it seems to me that there is in his manner
of speaking a something I cannot explain that hides his real
thoughts.

11. Is he generally liked by those who know him ? On the
contrary, everybody hates him and ridicules him for his mean-
ness.

12. Have you any curiosity to see the interior of a royal
palace ? If the occasion offered (presented itself), I should like
to see it; otherwise I am perfectly content with the interior of
my own house.

13. You are wise in that ; happiness is not always to be found
in palaces. Ah ! I see you are * something of a philosopher.

14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess
that had I wished I might have finished it ; but you will find
that, as far as it goes, it is not imperfect.

15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the
quantity. Precisely so; you may complain of my not having
done the whole of the exercise, but I do not think you can criti-
cise the part I have brought to you.

16. What size f is the book your friend has just published ?
The same size as the one he published before.

Acudir.

Sumar.

Agregar.

Anadir.

Componer.

Contener.

Incluir.

Facilitar.

Ofrecer.

LESSOlSr XLIX.

I To hasten (to a place), to refer.
To add up.
To add.
To add.

To compose, to mend, to fix.
To contain.
To include.
To facilitate.
To offer.

Por instruido que sea.

Anteriormente.
Comparativamente.

However learned he may be.

Formerly, previously.
Comparatively.

* Tiene V.

\ Tamaflo,

282

LESSON XLIX.

Corri entemente.

Fluidamente.

Suficiente.

En general.

Generalmente.

Considerablemente.

Particularmente.

En cuanto a.

Artificial.

Anterior.

Aborreeible.

Celeste, azul celeste.

Celestial.

Celico.

Chinesco.

Creible.

Despreciable.

Familiar.

Gigantesco.

Terrestre.

Territorial.

Terroso.

Terrado, terrero.

Terrenal.

Terron.

Ricacho.

Picaresco.

Patronimico.

Propio.

Mudable.

Verbal.

Arenal.

Ascenso.

Alvarez.

Calvinista.

Catolicismo.

Diccionario.

Escobajo.

Sandy (ground).

Promotion.

Alvarez.

Calvinist.

Catholicism.

Dictionary.

A bad broom.

Currently, fluently.

Fluently.

Sufficient.

In general.

Generally.

Considerably.

Particularly, privately.

As to, as for.

Artificial.

Anterior, previous.

Hateful.

Celestial, sky-blue.

Celestial, heavenly.

Celestial, heavenly.

Chinese.

Credible.

Despicable.

Familiar.

Gigantic.

Terrestrial, earthly.

Territorial.

Terreous, earthy.

Terrace.

Terrestrial, earthly.

Lump (or clod) of earth.

Very rich.

Roguish.

Patronymic.

Proper, own.

Changeable.

Verbal.

Arboleda.

Ascension.

Carnuza.

Creencia.

Ciencia.

Gentualla.

Madrastra.

Grove-
Ascension.
Bad meat.
Belief, credence.
Science.
Rabble.
Step-mother.

LESSON XLIX.

283

Boticario.

Druggist, apothe-

Terminacion.

Termination.

cary.

Dicha.

Happiness.

Dominguez.

Dominguez.

Isla.

Island.

Fernandez.
Idiotismo.

Fernandez.
Idiom.

Educacion.

Education, rear-
ing.
Broom.

Filosofastro.

Philosophaster.

Escoba.

Hijastro.

Step-son.

Excusa.

Excuse.

Hermanastro

. Step-brother.

Explicacion.

Explanation.

Hombracho.

Corpulent.

Espada.

Sword.

Libraco.

A contemptible

Exclamacion.

Exclamation.

book.

Firma.

Signature.

Pajarraco.

An ugly bird.

Gota.

Drop.

Latinajo.

Dog Latin.

Figura.

Figure, appear-

Manzanar.

Apple orchard.

ance.

Pinar.

Pine grove.

Faccion.

Feature.

Protestante.

Protestant.

Factura.

Invoice.

Padrastro.

Step-father.

Facultad.

Faculty, power.

Significado.

Signification,

Adquisicion.

Acquirement.

meaning.

Astronomia.

Astronomy.

Vinacho.

Bad wine.

Afluencia, flui

- Fluency.

Protestantis-

Protestantism.

dez.

mo.
Habanero.

Havanese.

Madrileno.

Madrilenian.

Rodriguez.

Rodriguez.

Sanchez.

Sanchez.

Amante.

Lover, sweet-
heart.

Arbol.

Tree.

Amador.

Lover.

COMPOS

5ITI0N.

I Por que lee V. ese libraco ?

Porque no tengo otro ; pero V. se

equivoca, es un libro clasico exce-

lente.
I Conoce V. a aquel ricacho ?
Lo conozco ; pero no lo trato, porque

es un hombracho que solo le gusta

tratarse con gentualla.

Why do you read that miserable
book?

Because I have no other ; but you
are mistaken, it is an excellent
classic (book).

Do you know that rich man f

I know him ; but I have no inter-
course with him, because he is a
low man, whose taste it is to asso-
ciate with the rabble only.

284

LESSON XLIX.

Juan, no barras con ese escobajo,
que ensucia mas que limpia.

La came buena se vende a treinta
centavos la libra ; la carnuza a
veinte.

Ese estudiante suele decir latinajos,
pero no sabe latin.

En la America del Norte hay mas
protestantes que catolicos.

Los boticarios en los Estados Unidos
no solo venden medicinas, sino
perfumeria, cigarros y otras mu-
chas cosas.

j,Vive el Senor Fernandez con su
padre ?

No, senor, porque no quiere vivir
con su madrastra y hermanastros.

I Es V. madrileno ?

No, senor, soy Habanero.

Aquel filosofastro es despreciable.

Esa senorita es muy am able ; pero
muy mudable.

John, do not sweep with that stump
of a broom ; it dirties more than
it cleans.

Good meat sells at thirty cents a
pound, poor (bad) meat at twenty.

That student is in the habit of re-
citing dog Latin, but he does not
know Latin.

There are more Protestants than
Catholics in North America.

In the United States the druggists
sell not only medicines, but per-
fumery, cigars, and many other
things.

Does Mr. Fernandez live with his
father?

No, sir, because he does not wish to
live with his step-mother and
step-brothers.

Are you a Madrilenian ?

No, sir, I am a Havanese.

That philosophaster is a despicable
(man).

That young lady is very amiable,
but very changeable.

EXPLANATION.

249. Deeivative Xouns. — These nouns constitute one
of the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ;
we have already introduced some of them in previous lessons,
when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations.

These terminations are very numerous, both for the sub-
stantives and adjectives, and each one of them determines
the general signification of the derivative noun. As it would
be impossible to give in this case a complete list of all these
terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student
such of them as are to be found in most common use.

250. The terminations aco^ acho^ alia, and uza, denote in-
feriority ; as,

Libraco. I A contemptible old book.

Pajarroco. I An ugly bird.

LESSON XLIX,

285

Yinac^o.
GentuaZZa.

Bad wine.
Rabble.
Bad meat.

The termination acho is sometimes augmentative ; as,
RicacAo. l Very rich.

HombracAo. I A big (or corpulent) man.

261. Ajo implies meanness, and the consequent contempt
inspired by it ; as,

Escoba/o. I An old stump of a broom.

Latina/o. | Dog Latin. .

252. The terminations aZ, ar^ ego^ ico, il, isco^ in adjec-
tives, commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as,

Artificial.

Familiar.

Gigantesco.

Picaresco.

Clasico.

Chinesco.

Artificial.

Familiar.

Gigantic.

Roguish,

Classic.

Chinese.

253. In substantives the same terminations, al^ ar^ and
also eda and edo^ serve to form collective nouns ; as.

Axboleda.
ArenaZ.
Manzanar.
Pinar.

Grove.

Sandy ground.
Apple orchard.
Pine grove.

254. The terminations ante, ario, ente, ero, ista and or are
for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or
occupation ; as,

EstudiaTi^e.

Student

Boticano.

Druggist.

Zapatero.

Shoemaker.

Organ^'s^a.

Organist.

Protestaw^e.

Protestant.

Calvini^^a.

Calvinist.

Pintor.

Painter.

255. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super-
lative degree ; as, /Zo50>5/^ro, a despicable philosopher; poetas-
tro, poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves

286 LESSON XLIX,

to express the degrees of relationship existing between those
persons who more generally hate than love each other ; as,

Hermanas/ro.

Step-brother.

Rijastro.

Step-son.

F&diastro.

Step-father.

Madiastra.

Step-mother.

256. Ble corresponds to the same termi

lish; as,

AborreciZ>Ze.

Hateful.

Creible.

Credible.

Mndsible,

Changeable.

AmMe.

Amiable.

257. /5mo corresponds to the English termination t5^; as,

Catoliczsmo. i Catholicism.

Protestantismo. | Protestantism.

258. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and
have their terminations in ero, es^ eno ; as,

Habanero.

Frances.

Madrile7?;o.

Havanese.

French, Frenchman.

Madrilenian.

259. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva-
tives; for instance, Alvarez^ Dominguez^ Fernandez^ Rodri-
guez^ Sanchez^ &c., were the names that were given to the
sons of the Alvaros, Domingos, Eernandos, Kodrigos, San-
chos, &c., changing the final o in ez,

CONVERSATION AND VEESION.

1. I Es necesario para hablar una lengua aprender todas las
palabras que contiene dicha lengua ? De ningiin mode, ademas,
yo no creo que exista un hombre, per instruido que sea, que las
sepa todas.

2. I Cuantas palabras piensa V. que sean suficientes para po-
der hablar el espanol corrientemente ? De tres a cuatro mil
palabras primitivas con sus derivados es todo lo que se requiere,
para hablar una lengua fluidamente.

3. Si, pero probablemente los derivados seran en tanto 6 ma-
yor mimero que los primitives. — Asi es, pero una vez que se cono-

LESSON XLIX. 287

cen las terminaciones, es muy facil el formarlos, aunque nunca
se hayan visto anteriormente.

4. I Es posible ! entonces esto debe facilitar mucho el estudio
de la lengua.— Muchisimo, porque, como ya hemos dicho, sabien-
do los primitivos no hay mas que anadirles las terminaciones,
segiin el significado que quiera darseles.

5. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de formar algunos deriva-
dos ? Si, senor, con mucho gusto ; deme V. los primitivos.

6. I Cuales son los derivados de cielo ? Celeste y celestial.

7. I De tierra ? Terrestre, terrenal, y otros.

8. i Por que no me los da V. todos ? Porque me parece mejor
que aprenda V. primeramente los de mas uso, pues sobre haber
muchos, los hay de poco uso comparativamente.

9. i Cuales otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra ? Celi-
co, terroso, terron, y otros muchos.

10. i Se pueden formar derivados de los verbos ? Si, senor, y
a estos se les da el nombre de verbales.

11. i Cuales se derivan del verbo amar ? Amador, amante,
amado, amable.

12. i De ascender ? Ascenso, ascension.

13. I De creer ? Creyente, creencia, creible, credulo, credito.

14. I De estudiar ? Estudiante, estudio ; pudiendo agregar
ademas los aumentativos y diminutivos que tambien son deriva-
dos, como estudiantillo, estudianton, &c.

15. I De que se derivan los nombres de familia Gonzalez, Do-
minguez, &:c. ? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo,
Domingo, &c.

16. I Cuantas palabras cree Y. que contendra esta gramatica ?
Mas de tres mil palabras primitivas y un gran mimero de deri-
vadas.

17. I En acabando la gramatica podre traducir y hablar sobre
cualquiera materia que se ofrezca ? Podra V, hablar de todo y
seguir una conversacion en general como V. ve que ya lo hace-
mos ; pero para traducir y hablar de cualquiera ciencia, arte u
oficio en particular, tendra V. que acudir al diccionario, porque
es imposible introducir en una gramatica todas las palabras nece-
sarias para poder hacer esto.

18. Y en cuanto a los idiotismos de la lengua, l se hallaran
todos en esta gramatica ? Tampoco, puesto que se podrian com-
poner tres 6 cuatro voliimenes como este y quiza no incluirian
todos los de la lengua.

288 LESSON XLIX.

19. i Como los aprendere entonces ? En la conversacion de
personas instruidas y en la lectura de buenos libros.

EXERCISE.

1. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his pro-
motion ? Yes, he left the 71st and went to the 7th.

2. What do you know about the names Sanchez, Dominguez,
and all those ending in ez ? That they mean son of Sancho, son
of Domingo, and are formed from those names by adding the
termination you have just mentioned.

3. To whom does that magnificent pine grove belong ? To
the step-son of the gentleman who owns that pretty little house
you see over there in the distance (d lo lejos).

4. What miserable book is that you are reading so atten-
tively ? It is no miserable book at all {ninguno), it is the diction-
ary ; I always go to the dictionary for a word the meaning of
which I do not know.

5. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? No,
nor you either ; the science of astronomy is still imperfect, and
there are besides many of the heavenly bodies hidden from hu-
man sight.

6. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ?
Yes, but most particularly of the exact sciences.

7. Why do you sweep with that stump of a broom ? It is
the best I have.

8. Did you say he was a philosopher ? No, on the contrary,
I said he was but a philosophaster.

9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself ? Eeading his-
tory in general, and that of his own country in particular.

10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now ;
have you changed your book ? No, I have the same one still,
but I myself study more than I did formerly.

11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as
your sister ? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation
they speak equally fluently.

12. Do you write any compositions ? Yes, our father requires
us to write two compositions a week on the idioms of the lan-
guage.

13. Is it not a despicable habit to ofi'er to do things we never
intend to perform (llevar a cabo) ? I should say it is more than
despicable, it is even hateful.

LESSON L.

289

14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the
acquisition of a language ? Yes, but that alone is not siifficient :
something more is required.

15. Have you much fruit at your home in the country ? We
have a very fine orchard of apples.

16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a
moment ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in
reality anything but dog Latin.

17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not
aaded that last word ? It appeared to me to be necessary to add
that to what I had already said, so that the meaning might be
more easily understood.

LESSON L.

Amenazar.

To threaten, to menace.

Apoyar.

To lean upon, to support.

Disgustar.

To displease, to disgust, to
grieve.

Eecurrir.

To recur, to have recourse.

Sacar.

To take out.

A pesar de.

In spite of.

Y diciendo y

haciendo.

And suiting the action to the
word.

i Todo sea por

Dios!

I hope all will be for the best I

Tomar las de villadiego.

To take to one's heels, to

make off.

Sobre todo.

Above all.

Desproporcionadisimamente.

Without any proportion.

Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antepeniiltima.
Iniitil.

Componente.
Izquierdo.
Derecho.
Penultima.
Superlativo.
21

Adverbial.

Antisocial.

Antepenultimate.

Useless.

Component.

Left.

Eight.

Penultimate.

Superlative.

290

LESSON L,

Anteojos.

Aguardiente.

Barbilampino.

Correveidile.

Bienhechor.

Director.

Dolor de mue-

las.
Dentista.
Disgusto.
Hazmereir.
Condiscipulo.
Pisaverde.
Pormenor.
Puntapie.
Parasol.
Paraguas.
Quitasol.
Socialismo.
Sacamuelas.
Pueblo.
Vicerector.

Spectacles.

Brandy.

Beardless.

Tell-tale.

Benefactor.

Director.

Toothache.

Dentist.

Disgust, grief.

Laughing-stock.

Schoolmate.

Fop, coxcomb.

Detail.

Kick.

Parasol.

Umbrella.

Parasol.

Socialism.

Tooth-drawer.

People, town.

Vice-rector.

Equivocacion.
Ganapierde.

Barberia.
La derecha.
La izquierda.
Sinrazon.
Particula.
Quidjada.
Las damas.

Mistake.

A game in check-
ers.
Barber-shop.
The right hand.
The left hand.
Injustice.
Particle.
Jaw.
Draughts, check-

COMPOSITION.

No le esta bien a un anciano el ser
pisaverde, eso es propio de barbi-
lampinos.

\ Quien ha dado un puntapie a aquel
muchacho %

Yo se lo he dado, porque es un corre-
veidile.

Este hombre juega muy bien a las
damas, sobre todo a la ganapierde.

I Tiene V. un quitasol 6 un paraguas %

Tengo ambos.

Ese ]oven bebe mucho aguardiente
y no hace caso de los consejos de
su bienhechor.

fisa es la razon porque es el haz-
mereir de todo el mundo.

4 Tiene V. buena vista t

It is not becoming to an old man to
be a fop ; that belongs to beard-
less boys.

Who gave that boy a kick f

I did, for he is a teU-tale.

This man plays very well at
draughts, and especially at gana-
pierde (give away).

Have you a parasol or an umbrella ?

I have both.

That young man drinks a great deal
of brandy, and gives no heed to
the admonition of his benefactor.

That is the reason why he is the
laughing-stock of every one.

Have you good sight t

LESSOir L.

291

No, senor, y esta es la razon porque

uso anteojos.
Mi condiscipulo Manuel me ha ayu-

dado a hacer la composicion.
Es iniitil que me cuente Y. los por-

menores.
El director y el vicerector de la es-

cuela son hombres excelentes.
Me disgustan las sinrazones.
El socialismo, a pesar de la opinion

de los que lo apoyan, es antisocial

e imposible.

No, sir, and that is the reason why I

use spectacles.
My school- fellow Emanuel has

helped me to do my composition.
It is useless for you to tell me the

details.
The director and sub-rector of the

school are excellent men.
Unreasonableness disgusts me.
Socialism, in spite of the opinion of

those who support it, is antisocial

and impossible.

EXPLANATION.
260. Compound !N"ouns. — These are very numerous in the
Spanish language ; some are formed of two nouns, as barbi-
lampinOy beardless ; puntapie, a kick ; aguardierite^ brandy ;
others are formed of a noun and a verb, as quitasol^ parasol ;
sacamuelas^ tooth-drawer ; others of an adjective and a verb,
as pisaverde^ coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb, as
hienhecJior^ benefactor ; others of a noun and a preposition,
as anteojos^ spectacles ; others of two verbs, as ganapierde^ a
mode of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pro-
noun, as Jiazmereir^ laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun
and a conjunction enter into the formation of correveidile^
tale-bearer ; and, finally, others are composed of a noun and
some one of the following component particles : a^ ab^ abs^ ad^
ante^ ant% circum or circun^ cis^ citra^ co, com^ con, contra^
de, des, di, dis, e, em, en, entre, equi, es or ex, extra, im, in,
infra, inter, intro, o, ob, per, por, pos, pre, preter, pro, re,
retro, sa or za, se, semi, sesqui, sin, so, sobre, son, sos, su, suh
super, sus, tra, trans or tras, ultra, and vice or vi ; as,

Antisocial.

Composicion.

Condiscipulo.

Z)^rector.

Z)^sgusto.

Jmposible.

Iniitil.

Pormenor.

Antisocial.

Composition.

School-fellow.

Director.

Displeasure.

Impossible.

Useless.

Detail.

292 LESSON L.

Pospuesto.

/Smrazou.

Ficcrector.

Post-fixed.

Unreasonableness.

Vice-rector.

We call them component particles^ because the majority
of them — although they are true Latin and Greek preposi-
tions— have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes,
in which case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the
signification of the simple word in proportion to the strength
or value they have in the languages from which we have
taken them.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Don Jose, g sabe Y. el significado de las palabras pemiltima
y antepenultima ? Si, senor, porque corresponden a las palabras
inglesas penultimate y antepenultimate.

2. Pues bien, ahora, que hablamos de " canonazos," quiero
deeir, ahora que hablamos de estas palabras, le contare a V. un
cuentecito. — Muy bien, a mi me gustan mucho los cuentos, sobre
todo cuando no son largos y vienen a pelo.

3. Pues este viene a pelo y no es largo. — Entonces cuente-
melo v., Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atencion.

4. Pues vaya de cuento : Un caballero tenia un f uerte dolor
de muelas, y f ue a un sacamuelas para que le sacase una.

5. i Hombre ! e y por que no fue a casa de un dentista ? Por-
que en aquel pueblecito no habia dentistas y tuvo que ir a una
barberia, cuyo barbero unia a su oficio el de sacamuelas.

6. I Pobre hombre ! adelante. — Este barbero, 6 sea sacamuelas,
pero que de ningun modo era dentista, le pregunto :

7. " I Que muela le duele a V. ? " " La penultima del lado
izquierdo de la quijada inferior."

8. " Muy bien," y diciendo y haciendo le saco, no la pemil-
tima, sino la ultima.

9. " I Huy ! I que ha hecho V., hombre ? yo le dije a V. que
me sacase la penultima, y Y. me ha sacado la ultima." — " i Calle !
pues yo creia que penultima y ultima era todo una misma cosa."

10. " No, hombre, no ; la penultima es la que esta antes de la
ultima." — " i Diantre ! Mil perdones, y sientese Y. que esta vez no
me equivocare."

11. "jYamos, y todo sea por Dios!" "lAy! ay! hombre
dado a Barrabas ! "

LESSON L. 293

12. " i Toma ! i j ahora por que se queja ? i no acabo de sacarle
la que estaba antes de la ultima ? " *' Si ; pero V. olvido contar la
que me saco anteriormente, de modo que ahora me ha sacado la
antepenultimay—Lai ante . . . . i que ? Pero no importa, deje-
mos estos malditos nombres, que han sido causa de mi equivoca-
cion, J sientese V. que yo le aseguro a V. que. ..."

13. Pero el parroquiano, dandolo a todos los diablos, tomo las
de villadiego, y se cree que nunca mas recurrio a un sacamuelas
para que le saease la peniiltima muela.

14. e Cual es la palabra compuesta mas larga en espanol ?
Desproporcionadisimamente.

15. ^ De que palabras se compone ? De la particula compo^
nente des, el nombre proporcion, la terminacion superlativa
sima y la terminacion adverbial mente.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you use spectacles because it is fashionable with some
people to wear them, or because you cannot see without them ?
Because I cannot see without them.

2. My toothache is not any better yet. Then you had better
go to the dentist's and get him to extract (sacar) the tooth.

3. Do you often see the beardless youth who came to walk
with us without being asked * last evening ? Not often, nor do
I care to see him very often, he is too much of a fop for my taste.

4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn
to the right ; it is not more than two squares to the hotel.

5. What did he do when you said that ? He took to his
heels, and I have neither heard of nor seen him since.

6. What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a
few minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mis-
take in the other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish
him for his trouble (molestia) ; so, suiting the action to the
word, he gave him a kick, and called him a despicable tell-tale.

7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended
to buy ? No ; when he came to examine the details he found
the price of the house entirely out of proportion to the value.

8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I sel-
dom use an umbrella ; when it rains I never go out, if I can
avoid it.

* Invitasen.

294

LESSON LI.

9. What a strange man that is! Yes, he is the laughing-
stock of every one who knows him.

10. What kind of wine do they give you in your hotel ?
They give us very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it ; I
prefer water.

11. Do you often play at draughts (or checkers) ? Very
often ; but I prefer the give-away game.

12. What is that man's business ? He keeps a barber's shop
in Sixth or Seventh avenue.

13. I wish you to be good enough to translate this letter for
me. Oh ! it is useless to talk to me of translating anything just
now {por ahora), for I have a headache.

14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in
the western part of the state.

LESSOR LI,

Atravesar.
Atropellar.

Causar.

Correr.

Calcular.

Dividir.

Exponer.

Extranar.

Hospedar.

Incendiar.

Llorar.

Manifestar.

Ordenar.

Oponer.

Proponer.

Parar.

Procurar.

Resistir.

Rivalizar.

Simpatizar.

Ni con mucho.
A decir verdad.

To traverse, to cross. ,

To run over, to hurry one's self

too much.
To cause.
To run.
To calculate.
To divide.
To expose.
To wonder at.
To lodge and entertain.
To set fire to.
To cry, to weep.
To manifest, to show, to inform.
To order, to arrange.
To oppose.
To propose.
To stop.

To procure, to try.
To resist.
To rival.
To sympathize.

Far from, far from it
To tell the truth.

LESSON- LL 29f

En lo que respecta.

With respect to.

En marcha.

Let us go, let us start.

A lo largo.

Lengthwise.

A esta parte.

Within the last.

A pie.

On foot.

En frente.

In front, opposite.

Continuamente.

Continually.

Perpendicularmente.

Perpendicularly.

Alrededor. )
Alderredor.

Around.

Admirable.

Admirable.

Apto.

Apt.

Curioso.

Curious.

Desocupado.

Disengaged, unoccupied.

Directo.

Direct.

Indirecto.

Indirect.

Figurado.

Figurative.

Inepto.

Inapt, unsuitable.

Gramatical.

Grammatical.

Complemento. Complement.

Academia. Academy.

Cosmopolita. Cosmopolite.

Admiracion. Admiration,

Carruaje. Carriage.

wonder.

Delito. Crime.

Arquitectura. Architecture.

Dibujo. Drawing.

Construccion. Construction.

Individuo. Individual,

Belleza. Beauty.

member.

Frase. Phrase.

Literato. Man of letters.

Distancia. Distance.

Grozo. Enjoyment.

Esquina. Corner.

Museo. Museum.

Lagrima. Tear.

Paseo. Promenade.

Laboriosidad. Industry.

Punto. Point, place.

Marcha. March.

Edificio. Edifice.

Metropoli. Metropolis.

Peligro. Danger.

Madurez. Eipeness, matu-

Omnibus. Omnibus.

rity, prudence.

Soltero. Bachelor.

Permanencia. Permanence,

Publico. Public.

stay.

Trascurso. Course of (time).

Sorpresa. Surprise.

Rincon. Corner.

Vista. Sight, view.

Tablero de da- Checker-board.

Orilla. Bank, border.

mas.

Batalla. ' Battle.

Remuneracion. Remuneration.

296

LESSON LI.

COMPOSITION.

Oriente y Occidente.

Cielo y tierra.

El hombre discrete ordena siempre

las cosas con madurez.
La casa de Juan se ha incendiado.
Un individuo inepto para escribir

puede ser apto para otras cosas.
El reo, a quien se castiga, ha come-

tido grand es delitos.
Un hombre pobre es muy diferente

de un pobre hombre.
Hemos dado un gran paseo.
Hemos dado un paseo grande.
Lo que V. dice es una cosa cierta.
Yo he observado cierta cosa.
Madrid, a 23 de Agosto de 1866 {or

Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or

Madrid y Agosto 23 de 1866).
Yo soy quien probare que tii te

equivocas.
Dios es admirable en todos sus obras,

pues todas ellas raanifiestan su

poder y su bondad {or admirable

se muestra Dios en todas sus obras ;

su poder y su bondad manifiestan

todas ellas).
Solo Dios es grande, hermanos mios.
Buenos dias, Juan ; |, que tal ?

Hasta maiiana. Adios.

Nueva York, ciudad de los Estados

Unidos.
Yo mismo le vi Uorar lagrimas de

gozo.
Pronto se calmaran las borrascas

que agitan la nave del estado.

I Ha estado V. alguna vez en el Mu-
seo de Nueva York ?

East and West.

Heaven and earth.

The sensible man always arranges

his affairs with prudence.
They have set fire to John's house.
An individual that is unsuited for

writing may be apt at other thing^^
The culprit that is being punished

has committed great crimes.
A poor man (a man in poverty) is

very different from a poor fellow.
We have had an excellent walk.
We have taken a long walk.
What you say is certain.
I have observed a certain thing.
Madrid, August 23d, 1866.

It is I who shall prove that you are

mistaken.
God is wonderful in all His works,

for they all set forth his power

and His goodness.

God only is great, my brethren.
Good morning, John; how do you

do?
I shall see you to-morrow.
New York, a city of the United

States.
I myself saw him shed tears of joy.

The tempests by which the ship
of state is tossed shall soon be
calmed.

Have you ever been in the New
York Museum ?

EXPLANATION. ^

Notwithstanding the fact that we have already made
some general observations relative to the place each part of

Li;ssoN LI. 297

speech occupies in sentences, we deem it expedient to add
here a few rules which the student will find of considerable
service in composition.

261. The i^ATURAL construction^ demands that the
substantive be placed before the adjective ; that the govern-
ing word precede the one governed ; that the subject p;re-
cede the verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it
is modified ; that the complement come after the verb and
the adverb, if there be one ; and that when two or more
things are to be expressed, of which one, from its nature,
comes before the other, this order be preserved ; as,

Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo J tierra.
Norte y Sur.
Este y Oeste.

East and West.
Heaven and earth.
North and South.
East and West.

262. Figurative Construction. — The genius of the
Spanish language permits us to depart in some cases from
the above rules ; thus avoiding the monotonous uniformity
which would otherwise exist, and leaving the writer more
latitude for the construction and arrangement of his periods.
So long as sense and perspicuity do not sujffer, there is ordi-
narily no fixed position for any of the parts of speech.
Therefore :

1st. Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few
exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at will.

2d. When the pronominal subject is expressed, it may
be placed either before or after the verb.

3d. The same liberty may be taken with the verb, adverb
and complement.

4th. :Nrevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sen-
tences, it is essential that certain words which together form
a whole (such as adjectives with the substantives they qual-
ify, or parts of sentences, acting the part of subject or com-
plement) should be arranged in the same order as that in
which the ideas they express are naturally presented to the
mind.

5th. There are also certain words which, when placed

298 LESSON LI.

before certain others, have a signification very different from
that which they have when placed after them.

Of all the modern languages the Spanish is certainly the
most flexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex-
pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con-
structions.

Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth
of this assertion :

Esta senorita era hija de Don Ma- 1 This young lady was the daughter
nuel Sanchez. | of Mr. Emanuel Sanchez.

263. Words which, from their nature, cannot be separa-
ted : Esta senorita. De Don Manuel Sanchez.

Natural Construction. Esta sefiorita era hija de Don Manuel Sdnchez.

Ifi^ inversion. Era esta sefiorita hija de Don Manuel Sdnchez.

2d " Era hija esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.

Zd " Era de Don Manuel Sanchez hija esta senorita.

4th " De Don Manuel Sanchez era hija esta senorita.

5^^ " Hija era esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.

^th " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez era esta sefiorita.

11th " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez esta senorita era.

8/^ " De Don Manuel Sanchez hija era esta senorita.

264. The natural construction is, of course, the most gram-
matical, but the best writers generally seek for rhetorical
rather than grammatical effect, and this is often achieved by
inversion, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at
the same time more freedom to imagination and genius.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Oh ! amigo mio, V. por Nueva York ! \ Cuanto lo cele-
bro ! Si, senor, aqui me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido
resistir la tentacion de venir a ver la America.

2. i Me alegro infinite ! i Pero por que no vino V. a hospe-
dar a mi casa ? En primer lugar, porque llegue anoche muy
tarde ; y en segundo, porque a los solteros nos gusta la libertad y
la vida del hotel.

3. Bien, no me opongo, a condicion de que vendra V. a pasar
con nosotros algunos dias. — Lo hare asi con mucho gusto, ade-
mas, Don Fernando, que, como no se hablar ingles y esta ciudad

LESSON LI,

299

es tan grande, tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y quisiera
que, durante mi permaneneia en ella, tuviese V. la bondad de ser
mi cicerone, de modo es que me propongo, pasar la mayor parte
del tiempo en su compania.

4. En eso me dara V. mucho placer, ademas de que yo goza-
re tanto como V. con la sorpresa y admiracion que le causaran a
V. las vistas de esta metropoli. i Ha estado V. jamas en Londres
6 en Paris ? No, senor, jamas he salido de Espana hasta ahora.

5. e Cuando quiere V. que principiemos nuestros paseos ?
Cuando V. guste ; ahora mismo si esta V. desocupado, porque, a
decir verdad, tengo una gran curiosidad.

6. I Quiere V. que vayamos a pie 6 en coche ? A pie, si V.
gusta; me parece que podremos ver mas comodamente; pero
tomaremos un coche cuando haya que salir de la ciudad.

7. Pues en marcha, venga el brazo. — Yo temo que voy a mo-
lestar a V., Don Fernando, porque soy muy curioso, como dicen
los franceses, soy un fldneur^ y me llaman la atencion hasta las
cosas mas pequenas.

8. Entonces simpatizaremos, porque a mi me gusta obser-
yarlo y criticarlo todo. — i Que calle es esta en que estamos ahora ?
Esta es la Cuarta avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la calle
Veinte y tres.

9. I Como es eso ? Las calles en Nueva York estan divididas
en avenidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad a lo largo, y en
calles, que la atraviesan de occidente a oriente, cortando las ave-
nidas en angulos rectos y formando toda la ciudad como un ta-
blero de damas, de modo que sabiendo el niimero de la calle
6 avenida y el de la casa adonde se va, puede calcularse facil-
mente la distancia.

10. Y este edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina,
I que es ? Esta es la nueva academia de dibujo, donde se exponen
al publico muy buenas pinturas.

11. i Hay aqui tan buenas pinturas como en el museo de Ma-
drid ? No, ni con mucho ; este pais es aiin nuevo, y aunque pue-
dan hacerlo en otras cosas, toda via no pueden rivalizar en lo que
respecta a las bellas artes en Europa.

12. I Hombre, que hermosa plaza I Esta es la plaza de Madi-
son y todos estos bellos edificios que V. ve a su alrededor, y
la plaza misma, han sido hechos de veinte anos a esta parte.

13. i Que edificio es aquel de enf rente que es tan grande como
un palacio ? fise es el hotel de la Quinta avenida, y en efecto

300 LESSON LI.

V. tiene razon en compararlo a un palacio, porque los hoteles son
en realidad los palacios de los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son
los me j ores del mundo.

14. I Cuidado ! hombre, por poco se deja^V. atropellar por el
omnibus. — \ Caspita ! j que mu'jer tan hermosa !

15. Si ; pero no debe V. pararse a admirar las bellezas, en me-
dio de Broadway en su punto de reunion eon la Quinta avenida,
porque corre V. peligro de ser atropellado por los earruajes de
todas especies que continuamente lo atraviesan.

16. Don Fernando, i son todas las senoras en Nueva York tan
hermosas como esa que acaba de pasar ? No se, porque yo solo
mire donde ponia los pies, procurando escapar al mismo tiempo
de los earruajes ; pero si pod re deeirle a V. que mujeres mas her-
mosas que las que he visto yo en Nueva York no creo que se en-
cuentren en ninguna parte del mundo.

17. I Oiga V. ! e no hablan espanol esos que van delante de
nosotros ? Eso no debe V. extraiiarlo ; esta es una ciudad cosmo-
polita ; en ella hay gentes de todas las naciones y V. oira en el
trascurso de poco tiempo hablar aleman, espafLol, frances y otras
muchas lenguas.

EXERCISE.

1. What do you understand by the complement of a verb ?
It is a phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the
idea expressed by the verb.

2. Can you tell me what a cosmopolitan is ? A cosmopoli-
tan is one who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the
world.

3. Where does that gentleman live ? On Fifth avenue, at
the corner of Twenty-second street.

4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Eoyal
Academy of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Acade-
my of Madrid ; but he has been a member of the Academy of
Sciences for the last ten years.

5. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I shall
give him some other book, because if I took that one from Charles
he would cry.

6. Is your friend married ? No, sir, he is a bachelor.

7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated painting, " The
Last Supper"?* No; but I have seen the engraving of that

* La cena.

LESSON LIL

301

painting, made by Morghen, and it is a fact admitted by every
one, that, notwithstanding the absence of color, that engraving
is a true reproduction of the original.

8. How long does it take to go from here to Central Park ?
But a short time ; the distance is not very great.

9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in
a carriage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the
same place and at the same time as the carriage.

10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into
Northern, Southern, Eastern, and Western.

11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen ? Far from
it ; I have seen several much taller.

12. Have they been able to fill that position yet ? I believe
not ; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for
it (pretenderlo), but his father was opposed to his doing it, and
so he would not persist.

13. How far did you go before finding him ? I walked about
half an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met,
whether he had seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an
old man told me that he had seen him cross the river, nearly
opposite the new building which they are putting up (erecting)
at a short distance from the entrance to the public promenade.

14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis ? Some
seven or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made
within the last five years.

LESSON LII.

Aconsejar.

Aprovechar.

Consistir.

Colorir.

Citar.

Costar.

Comunicar.

Demostrar.

Deteriorar.

Expresar.

Freir.

Grabar.

To counsel, to advise.
To profit, to embrace (profit by)
To consist.
To color (paintings).
To quote, to cite.
To cost.

To communicate.
To demonstrate, to point out.
To deteriorate.
To express.
To fry.

To engrave, to impress on the
mind.

302

LESSON LIL

Tomarse (el trabajo).

Prender.

Perfeccionar.

Merecer.

Reiinir.

Remunerar.
Visitar.

To take the trouble.
To take up, to arrest.
To perfect.
To merit, to deserve.
To gather, to assemble, to re-
unite.
To remunerate.
To visit, to search.

Por ejemplo.

For instance.

Que yo sepa.

For all I know.

List of the Irregular Past Participl

es and Participial Adjectives of all

the Verbs already introduced.

Abierto. Opened.

Frito.

Fried.

Bendito. Blessed.

Hecho.

Done.

Contradicho. Contradicted.

Impuesto.

Imposed.

Convicto. Convicted.

Muerto.

Died.

Compuesto. Composed.

Manifiesto.

Manifested.

Dicho. Said, told.

Oculto.

Hidden, con-

Devuelto. Given back, re-

cealed.

turned.

Opuesto.

Opposed.

Dispuesto. Disposed.

Preso.

Taken, arrested.

Escrito. Written.

Puesto.

Placed, put.

Electo. Elected.

Provisto.

Provided.

Expreso. Expressed.

Koto.

Broken.

Expuesto. Exposed.

Satisfecho.

Satisfied.

Visto. Seen.

Yuelto.

Returned.

Amplio.

Ample.

Actual.

Present.

Antiguo.

Ancient, old

Contemporaneo.

Contemporary.

Enemistado.

At variance,

on bad terms.

Dramatico.

Dramatic.

Moderno.

Modern.

Honroso.

Honorable.

Politico.

Political.

Cocinero.
Capitan.
Acierto.
Colorido.

Cook.
Captain.
Success.
Coloring.

Amenidad. Agreeableness,

amenity.
Biblioteca. Library.
Cena. Supper.

LESSOJS' LIL

302

Grabado.

Engraving.

Comedia.

Comedy, play.

Fresco.

Cool, refreshing

Costumbre.

Custom, habit.

air.

Erudicion.

Erudition.

Empleo.

Employment.

Fuente.

Fountain, source.

Drama.

Drama.

Existencia.

Existence.

Estilo.

Style.

Elegancia.

Elegance.

Joven.

Youth.

Instriiccion.

Instruction, learn-

Mercader.

Dealer.

ing.

Paisano.

Countryman.

Ignorancia.

Ignorance.

Hecho.

Action, fact.

Mencion.

Mention.

Siglo.

Century.

Literatura.

Literature.

Verso.

Verse.

Mediania.

Moderation, me-

Soldado.

Soldier.

diocrity.

Prosa.

Prose.

Novela.

Novel.

Politica.

Politics.

Tragedia.

Tragedy.

Vasija.

Vase, vessel.

COMPOS

5ITI0N.

Esta enemistado con su primo.
Colocado en vasijas.
Ha cantado una cancion espanola.
Los caballos que han comprado los

mercaderes no son buenos.
Los caballos que fueron comprados

por los mercaderes son buenos.
Estan {or quedan) demostradas estas

verdades.
La cocinera habia f rito {or f reido) el

pescado.
Han prendido {or preso) al culpable.
No se si habran ya proveido {or pro-

visto) el empleo.

Has roto el vaso.

i Ha visto V. un caballo muerto f

No, pero he visto un caballo matado.

% Quien ha muerto a ese caballo ?
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fue muerto por sus sol-
dados.

He is on bad terms with his cousin.

Placed in vases (or vessels).

He has sung a Spanish song.

The horses that the dealers have
bought are not good.

The horses that were bought by the
dealers are good.

These truths are (or stand) demon-
strated.

The cook had fried the fish.

They have arrested the offender.

I do not know whether they have
already arranged for (a person to
fill) the position.

You have broken the glass.

Have you seen a dead horse ?

No, but I have seen a horse with a
sore back.

Who killed that horse ?

A countryman killed it.

The captain was killed by his sol-
diers:

304

LESSON LIL

]&1 se ha matado.
£l se ha muerto.

Ese es un joven muy leido, muy apro-
vechado y muy callado.

Es un hecho que la Cena de da
Vinci esta felizmente expresada
en el grabado de Morghen, no
obstante que le falta el colorido
de la pintura.

Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho
por da Vinci, esta mal colorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grabado con
acierto por Morghen.

He killed himself.

He died.

That young man is well read, makes
the most of his opportunities, and
talks little.

It is a fact that Da Vinci's " Last
Supper" is happily represented
in Morghen's engraving, notwith-
standing the fact that the latter
lacks the coloring of the painting.

Although the fresco of the "Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored, and time worn, it
has been engraved with success
by Morghen.

EXPLANATION.

265. Past Participles. — Some past participles retain the
regimen of their verbs ; as,

Enemistado con su primo. 1 On bad terms with his cousin.

266. The past participle must agree in gender and num-
ber with its subject, except when used in a compound tense
with the verb haber alone, in which case it is unchangeable ;
as.

Ha cantado una canci6n.
Los caballos que han comprado los
mercaderes.

He has sung a song.
The horses that the dealers have
bought.

But the past participle, if it comes after the verbs seVy
estar, quedar^ or any other, except haber, agrees with the
subject in gender and number ; as,

Los caballos que fueron comprados

por los mercaderes.
Estan (or quedan) demostrados estas

verdades.

The horses that were bought by the
dealers.

These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.

267. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and
the other irregular. These are used quite differently, since
the irregular one, regarded as a substantive, is employed in
an absolute sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in
the active or in the passive form. For this reason the ir-

LUSSON LIL 305

regular participles may be accompanied by the verbs 9er,
estar^ quedar^ and others, but never by the auxiliary haber ;
inasmuch as it would be improper to say : Jiuho convido^ he
contractor instead of, Jmho convencido^ he contraido,

268. The irregular participles frito^ fried ; preso^ taken
prisoner; provisto^ provided, and roto^ broken, may be
used with the verb haher^ to form the compound tenses;
as,

La cocinera habia frito (or freido)

el pescado.
Han prendido (or preso) al culpable.

No se si habrdn ya proveido (or pro-
visto) el empleo.

Has roto el vaso {sounds better than
has rompido el vaso).

269. The verb matar, in the sense of to take away life,
has the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its
past participle that of the verb morir ; the participle matado
being used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting
from the rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment ; as,

The cook had fried the fish.

They have taken (or arrested) the

offender.
I do not know whether they have

already provided (a person to fill)

the office.
You have broken the glass.

Un caballo matado.
Un caballo muerto.
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fue muerto por sus sol-
dados.

A horse with a sore back.
A dead horse.
A countryman killed him.
The captain was killed by his sol-
diers.

But in speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we
must say :

Se ha matado (and not Se ha muer- 1 He has killed himself.
to), I

270. Many past participles are used as adjectives in con-
nection with persons ; as,

Un joven leido, aprovechado, calla- 1 A well read, thrifty and silent youth.
do. I

271. Past participles are sometimes used as substantives,
and the difference can be known only by the context, as seen

in this sentence :
23

306

LESSON LIL

Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci
esta felizmente expresada en el
grahado de Morghen, no obstante
que le f alta el colorido de la pin-
tura.

It is a fact, that " The Last Supper"
by Da Vinci is happily expressed
in the engraving of Morghen, not-
withstanding the latter lacks the
coloring of the painting.

Where the words hecho ^ grahado and colorido^ are substan-
tives, the same words appear as participles in the following
phrases ;

Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho
por da Vinci, estd mal colorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grahado con
acierto por Morghen.

Although the fresco of " The Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored and deteriorated, it
has been engraved with success by
Morghen.

272. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini-
tive mood ; as,

Haber de amar. I To have to love.

Habiendo de amar. » Having to love.

Such a classification, however, is no longer essential, nor even
correct. In early Spanish literature that form frequently oc-
curred, performing the office now almost exclusively filled by
the regular terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of
the future indicative and the imperfect subjunctive.

COXVERSATIOX AND VERSION.

1. i Que le gusta a V. mas, la conversacion 6 la lectura ?
Ambas cosas me gustan mucho.

2. I Que genero de lectura le gusta a Y. mas ? La historia,
la comedia, y la novela.

3. i Prefiere V. la prosa al verso ? No, seiior, la poesia me
gusta mas ; pero ha de ser muy buena, porque en poesia no me
gusta la mediania.

4. i Que autores, en la literatura moderna, me aconseja V.
que lea para perfeccionarme en el espanol ?— En historia y po-
litica lea V. a Lafuente, y a Minano.

5. i Y para la comedia ? A Moratin, Breton de los Herreros
y Don Ventura de la Vega.

6. I No tienen Yds. otros ? Si, senor ; pero yo le cito a V.
solamente los mejores y solamente a los contemporaneos.

LESSON LIL 307

7. I Y poetas ? Zorrilla, Espronceda, Hartzenbusch, y otros
muchos.

8. I Tienen Vds. algiin buen critico contemporaneo por el
estilo del antiguo Quevedo ? Yo creo que no pueden encon-
trarse dos Quevedos ; pero, sin embargo, tenemos criticos de cos-
tumbres muy buenos, tales como Larra (Figaro), Don Ramon de
Mesonero Romanos, Pelegrin, y otros.

9. e Tienen Vds. buenos autores para la tragedia y el drama ?
Si, seiior, muy buenos, por ejemplo, Martinez de la Rosa, Garcia
Gutierrez, Gil y Zarate, &c.

10. Yo no sabia que tuviesen Yds. tantos autores buenos en la
literatura actual. — Yo pudiera citarle a V. otros muchos ; pero si
V. reune las obras de los catorce mencionados lograra V. tener
una pequeiiita biblioteca de literatura moderna, que le ensenara
a V. mas espanol que todas las gramaticas y metodos que se ban
compuesto para enseiiar esta lengua hasta el dia, y que le remu-
neraran a Y. ampliamente por el trabajo que le ha costado el
aprenderla, con el placer y la instruccion que le comunicaran.

11. I Es posible ! Yo habia oido decir, y asi lo habia llegado
a creer yo mismo, que Espaiia no poseia nada que mereciese men-
cion en su literatura moderna, y a decir verdad, los linicos libros
buenos que creia que Vds. poseian eran el Don Quijote de Cer-
vantes y las obras dramaticas de Calderon de la Barca. — Asi lo
he oido yo decir tambien, y en verdad que es una cosa que no
puedo comprender, esa general ignorancia de la existencia de
una literatura espanola contemporanea, que ha producido mas
y mejores obras que las que se ban producido en algunos siglos
no solamente en Espaiia sino en otras naciones.

12. I Se conocen en Espaiia nuestros autores ingleses contem-
poraneos ? Se conocen mucho mas de lo que aqui son conocidos
los espaiioles ; la prueba es que la mayor parte estan traducidos
al castellano, y Vds. no tienen ninguna traduccion, que yo sepa,
de todos esos autores que acabo de citarle a V.

13. Probablemente consiste en que los americanos e ingleses
no aprenden mucho el espaiiol.— Entre los americanos debo hacer
tres honrosas excepciones, que son : Washington Irving, Prescott,
y Ticknor. Estos distinguidos escritores no solo aprendieron el
espanol, sino que viajaron en Espaiia, visitaron nuestras mejores
bibliotecas y quiza adquirieron en aquellas fuentes mucho del
saber, la erudicion, el gusto y la elegancia en el decir que comu-
nican a sus obras tan to in teres y amenidad.

308 LESSON LIL

EXERCISE.

1. Ought we not to make the most of (profit by) every occa-
sion that offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way
to arrive at the possession of knowledge.

2. Tell the cook that I wish that fish not to be fried. It is
too late to tell her so ; she has already fried it.

3. Has that work been translated into Spanish ? Not that
I know of ; but it was finely translated into French, by M. de
rOrme, a few years ago.

4. Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short
time since a dramatist ? He is, and his plays might serve as a
model of elegance for many dramatists of greater pretensions
{pretensiones).

5. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's
house ? Yes ; and the offender has been arrested and convicted
of the crime.

6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel a
chapter of which you read me the day before yesterday ? I
should with great pleasure if it were mine; but it belongs to
Alexander ; and, as we are on bad terms at present, I should not
like to ask any favors of him.

7. Would that painting be injured * by being exposed to the
heat of the sun {sol) ? Certainly ; and the heat of a strong fire
would produce the same effect upon it.

8. Did your friend, the captain, return with his regiment
from the war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took
place after his arrival at the seat (teatro) of war.

9. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers.
No : I believe his name did not appear in the list (lista) of the
killed; but the sad news was communicated to his brother by
an oflftcer of the same regiment.

10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before
breakfast ? I generally go to the garden every morning and
evening to read and smoke in the cool air.

11. I wish you had bought that work on English literature.
So do I ; it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so
desirous of becoming perfect in that language.

12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he
received ? I do not know whether he did or not ; but, at all

* Deteriorar,

LESSON LIIL

309

events, Peter must have merited some remuneration, or other-
wise he would not have gotten any.

13. Are you going to have your name engraved on your
watch ? I shall have only my initials {inicial) engraved on it.

14. What kind of literature does your aunt like best ? Ha I
you ask me more than I can tell you ; I really cannot say whether
she has any opinion in the matter ; for the fact is, that never hav-
ing regarded her as a woman of much erudition, I have not
taken the trouble to ask her.

LESSOR LIII.

Agradar.

To please.

Aguantar.

To bear with, to put up with, to

suffer.

Alcanzar.

To reach, to overtake, to catch.

Alimentar.

To feed.

Armar.

To arm.

Bajar.

To go (or come) down.

Corretear.

To run about.

Conceder.

To concede, to grant.

Distar.

To be distant.

Descomponer.

To decompose, to put out of

order.

Determiner.

To determine, to induce.

Echar.

To throw, to put (in).

Exceder.

To exceed.

Hinchar.

To swell.

Nadar.

To swim.

Prohibir.

To prohibit.

Qui tar.

To take off, to take away.

Contrario.

Contrary.

Descompuesto.

Decomposed, out of order.

Dotado.

Endowed, gifted.

Excelente.

Excellent.

Indigno.

Unworthy.

Improviso.

Improvised, unexpected.

Terrible.

Terrible.

310

LESSON LIIL

Antojo.

Desire, longing,

Alabanza.

Praise.

whim.

Apariencia.

Appearance.

Alcance.

Reach.

Estocada.

Thrust.

Consejo.

Counsel.

Busca.

Search.

Discurso.

Speech, discourse.

Comida.

Dinner.

Gatillo.

Pincers (dentist's).

Custodia.

Keeping.

Juicio.

Judgment, trial.

Edad.

Age.

Juramento.

Oath, affidavit.

Hermosura.

Beauty.

Mar.

Sea.

Obligacion.

Duty.

Navio.

Ship.

Vela.

Sail, candle.

Piso.

Floor, story.

Travesura.

Trick, pertness.

Tiro.

Shot.

Corrida de toros. Bull-fight.

Precepto.

Precept.

Oposicion.

Opposition.

Torero.

Bull-fighter.

Toro.

Bull.

Tribunal

Tribunal, court.

COMPO

SITION.

Correr por las calles.

Hablo de {or sobre) ese negocio.

I Que esta V. haciendo f

Estaba para decirselo a V.

No aleanzo a comprenderlo.

Hace las cosas a su antojo.

Iba en busca de un amigo.

Me opuse a ello.

A lo largo del rio.

Venga V. conmigo.

No se que determinar.

De ningun modo.

Esta comiendo.

Entro por la ventana.

Delante de mi ventana.

Ante el juez.

Antes de ahora.

Tales acciones son indignas de

caballero.
Parecia fuera de si.
Excede a toda alabanza.
Sin duda alguna. •

De dia.
Uno a uno.
I Por donde le vino d V. f

To run about the streets.
He spoke about that affair.
What are you doing f
I was about to tell you.
It is above my comprehension.
He does things after his own fancy.
I was in search of a friend.
I set my face against it.
By the river side.
Come along with me.
I am at a loss how to act.
Not at all.
He is at dinner.
He came in by the window.
Before my window.
Before the judge.
Before now.

Such actions are beneath a gentle-
man.
He appeared to be beside himself.
It is beyond all praise.
Beyond all doubt.
By day.
One by one.
i How did you come by it f

LESSON LIU.

«11

Luego.

Por mar.

k. la mano.

]&chelo V. en tierra.

En cuanto a mi.

Digaselo V. de mi parte.

A consecuencia de eso.

De acuerdo con.

Tenia esperanza de que serviria.

Bajar al jardin.

Todos nosotros.

Le pido a V.

t Cuanto distaf

De improviso.

Quitese V. el sombrero,

Se la llev6.

Le deje ir,

Por ese motive.

Adelante.

Sobre mi palabra.

Al contrario.

No se tratan.

Les impuso esa obligacion.

Alimentarse de esperanzas.

Venga V. el doce de Mayo.

Al (or del) otro lado.

Se acab6.

Vuelva V. a leerlo.

De miedo.

Fuera de peligro.

Fuera de casa.

Esta sin dinero.

Descompuesto.

Perdio el juicio.

Por curiosidad.

Estar de mal humor.

Pasare a su casa de V.

Pasamos por Francia.

Le atraveso de parte a parte,

Por el.

Por medio de el.

De dia en dia.

Segun las aparienciar.

By and by.

By sea.

At hand.

Throw it down.

As for me.

Tell him that for me.

In consequence of that.

In accordance with.

I was in hopes it would do.

To go down to the garden.

All of us.

I beg of you.

How far is it ?

Off-hand.

Take off your hat.

He carried her off.

I let him off.

On that account.

Go on.

On my word.

On the contrary.

They are not on good terms.

He imposed that obligation upon

them.
To live on hope.
Come on the 12th of May.
Over the way, on the other side.
It is all over.
Read it over again.
From fear, for fear.
Out of danger.
Out of doors.
He is out of money.
Out of order.
She is out of her mind.
Out of curiosity.
To be in bad humor.
I shall go to your house.
We passed through France.
He ran him through.
Through {i. e., on account of) him.
Through (*. e., by means of) him.
From day to day.
According to appearances.

312

LESSON LIIL

Eso esta aun por venir.

Diez contra uno.

Hasta hoy.

El navio esta a la vela.

Es menor de edad.

Bajo juraraento.

Hacia alia.

4 Estan levantados f

Al segundo piso.

Que suban la comida.

Le pusieron en custodia.

Hincharse de soberbia.

No la puedo agnantar.

Armese V. de paciencia.

Su hermosura me sorprendio.

No la conozco.

Dotado de virtudes.

Me agrado su discurso.

A tiro de pistola.

A mi alcance.

No hay nadie en casa.

Asomado a una ventana.

That is yet to come.

Ten to one.

To this day.

The ship is under sail.

He is under age.

Under oath.

Up that way.

Are they up ?

Up two flights of stairs.

Let them bring up the dinner.

He was taken into custody.

To be puffed up with pride.

I cannot put up with her.

Arm yourself with patience.

I was struck with her beauty.

I am not acquainted with her.

Endowed with virtues.

I was pleased with his discourse.

Within pistol-shot.

Within my reach.

There is nobody within.

At a window.

EXPLANATION.

273. Idioms are certain peculiar modes of expression
which cannot be translated literally into another language.
We have already introduced some Spanish as well as English
idioms ; but they are very numerous in all languages, and it
would be as unnecessary to give within the compass of a
grammar all those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it
would be to introduce all its words. The student will find
them in the several dictionaries, and principally in the works
of good writers.

However, we have introduced in the "Composition" of this
lesson as many as the limits of this book would permit ; giving
examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs
in meaning from that which most generally constitutes its
proper signification, and consequently must be translated by
words correspondingto those in the place of which it stands; as,

No se que determinar. i I am at a loss how to act.

De ningiin mode. I Not at all.

LESSON LIIL 313

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. e Donde esta Alejandro ? Esta corriendo por las calles. .

2. i Por que no me lo dijiste antes ? Estaba para decirselo
aV.

3. Yo no quiero que ande correteando calles. — Creo que iba
en busca de su amigo.

4. Se lo tengo prohibido ; pero el no me obedece, y hace las
cosas a su antojo. — Yo me opuse a ello, y le dije que V. queria ir
a paseo con todos nosotros.

5. Don Carlos, si V. desea, ire a buscarlo. — De ningiin modo,
V. no lo encontraria ; lo que temo es que haga alguna travesura
que le cueste cara.

6. Yo creo que subiendo a lo largo del rio lo encontrare, por-
que si no me engano le oi decir que queria ir a nadar. — No se que
determinar, pero no, mejor sera dejarlo, vamonos nosotros a paseo
(or vamos).

7. Su hermano Manuel es muy diferente, excede a toda ala-
banza y siempre obedece los preceptos de su papa. — Sin duda
alguna Manuel es un mucbacho excelente.

8. i Hola ! aqui viene Juanito. l Va Y. al campo con noso-
tros ? Con mucho gusto ; pero antes tengo que pedir a V. un
favor.

9. Delo V. por concedido.— ^ Palabra de honor ?— Sobre mi
palabra. e Que es ?

10. Que perdone V. a Alejandro.— I Vaya ! sea asi, puesto que
di mi palabra ; i pero donde esta ? Se escondio y no se atreve a
presentarse de miedo, pero ahora lo veo asomado a una ventana
en el segundo piso de su casa de Y.

11. Yo creo que ha perdido el juicio ese muchacho ; venga Y
aca, senor mio, y cuentenos que ha hecho en todo este tiempo
que ha estado fuera de casa.— Papa, perdoneme Y., que no lo vol-
vere a hacer otra vez.

12. Bien, bien, dejemoslo asi por esta vez.

13. i Don Jose, como esta su hermana de Y. ? Esta mejor y
esperamos que ya esta fuera de peligro.

14. ^ Mato el torero al toro a la primera estocada ? Si, seiior,
a la primera estocada lo atraveso de parte a parte.

15. i No se trata Y. con su vecino ? No, seiior, es un hombre
lleno de soberbia, a quien no puedo aguantar.

16. i Se dio el navio a la vela para la Habana ? Si, senor, el
navio esta a la vela.

314 LESSON LIIL

17. I Pusieron al culpable en custodia ? No, seiior, le dejaron
bajo juramento de que se presentaria en el tribunal.

18. i Conoce V. a la Senorita Sanchez ? Hace poco tiempo
que hice su conocimiento, su hermosura me sorprendio y es una
senorita dotada de grandes virtudes.

19. e Viajo V. el verano pasado por mar 6 por tierra ? Por
supuesto por mar, puesto que fui a Europa.

20. i Pasaron Yds. por Francia ? Si, senor, pasamos por Fran-
cia, y el doce de Mayo entramos en Paris.

21. i Esta Y. de mal humor ? Si, senor, malisimo, porque
tengo un terrible dolor de muelas.

22. Le aconsejo a V. que se arme de paciencia.— Mil gracias,
por su buen consejo, pero creo que sera mejor armarse de un
buen gatillo.

EXERCISE.

1. How does that man spend his time ? He seems to do
nothing but run about the streets.

2. Is not your uncle's sight good ? No, sir ; and that is the
reason why he wears spectacles.

3. Is that the way you spell (escribir) that word ? Oh, no,
of course not ; I must take out one of the e's.

4. Does your watch keep good time (andar bien) ? Yes,
when it goes, which occurs very rarely * ; it gets out of order
about twice a month.

5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that
came into port (puerto) last month ? Yes, I saw it the day it
set sail {darse d la vela) to return to Spain.

6. Did you go to see a bull-fight during your stay at Madrid ?
I did; and although I do not like it myself, I could not help
(no poder menos de) admiring the amazing dexterity of the men
(bull-fighters) who dared to expose their lives in attacking the
furious animal.

7. How many stories are there to the house in which you
live ? Three ; I generally sleep on the third floor.

8. Cannot you induce him to stay at home ? No, he wishes
to go ; it is a whim of his, and he will not bear any opposition.

9. Were you in court at the time of the trial ? No, I could
not go down town that day.

* Mara vez.

LESSON LIV,

315

10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught
tip with him at the corner of the street.

11. How is your cousin getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm
is still swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very much.

12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much suffering*
He lives in the hope of getting better one day or other.

13. Did that man swear he had not been there ? He made
(prestar) affidavit that he had never set (put) his foot in the
house.

14. What a beautiful young lady that is ! That is true ; but
her learning by far exceeds her beauty.

LESSON LIV.

Apegarse.

To adhere to, to be attached.

Criar.

To raise (breed), to bring up.

Concebir.

To conceive.

Continuar.

To continue.

Encerrar.

To shut up.

Guardar.

To guard, to take care, to keep.

Pintar.

To paint.

Presidir.

To preside.

Ponderar.

To make much of, to praise.

Combatir.

To combat.

Peducir.

To reduce.

Rodar.

To roll.

Sacudir.

To shake, to shake off.

Tirar.

To pull, to draw, to throw, to

throw out (or away).

Llenar.

To fill.

Entusiasmar.

To render enthusiastic.

Al cabo.

After all, finally, at the end.

De repente.

Suddenly, on a sudden.

No obstante.

Notwithstanding.

Si acaso.

If at all, in case.

Si bien.

Although.

Amarillo.

Yellow.

Azul.

Blue.

316

LESSON LIV.

Anaranjado.

Orange.

•

Atento.

Attentive.

Confuso.

Confused.

Feroz.

Fierce.

Bondadoso.

Kind.

Favorite

Favorite.

Griego.

Greek.

Anil.

Indigo.

Ligero.

Light, slig

ht, speedy.

Lleno.

Full.

Montaraz.

Mountaineer, wild.

Vistoso.

Conspicuous, showy.

Colorado, rojo.

Red.

Eomano.

Roman.

Particular.

Particular

, private, rare.

Picante.

Pungent.

Temerario.

Daring, rash.

Violado.

Violet (color).

Verde.

Green.

Prismatico.

Prismatic.

Cabo.

End.

Algazara.

Shouts (of joy).

Circo.

Siege, circus.

Autoridad.

Authority.

Color.

Color.

Confusion.

Confusion.

Bullicio.

Purapus, noise,

Carcajada.

Burst of laughter.

bustle.

Corrida.

Fight (bull), race.

Ceremonial.

Ceremony.

Violeta.

Violet (flower).

Espectro solar.

Solar spectrum.

Diversion.

Diversion.

Goce.

Delight, joy.

Clase.

Class.

Dicho.

Saying.

Infancia.

Infancy.

Desierto.

Desert.

Idea.

Idea.

Interes.

Interest.

Fiesta.

Feast, festival.

Guante.

Glove.

Guinada.

Wink.

Leon.

Lion.

Ocupacion.

Occupation.

Local.

Situation.

Corrida de

Bull-fight

Entusiasmo.

Enthusiasm.

toros.

Enemigo.

Enemy.

Pelota.

Ball.

Lloro.

Tears, cry.

Plaza de

Arena.

Paso.

Step, pace.

toros.

Prisma.

Prism.

Proeza.

Prowess, exploits.

Rumor.

Rumor.

Sonrisa.

Smile.

LESSON LIV,

Ser.

Being.

Valentia.

Bravery.

Traje.

Dress, costume.

Jaula.

Cage.

Recibimiento.

Reception.

Suelo.

Ground.

Grito.

Shout, cry.

COMPOSITION.

317

Los vimos cuando entrabamos.

Si no hubiera sido por mi, lo habrian

matado.
Yo iria si no creyera que f uese

iniitil.
Diga V. si vendra 6 no.
Que venga 6 que no venga.»
Dudo que lo sepa.
Por atentos y bondadosos que sean

{or no obstante lo atentos que son)

y por bondadosos que sean.
Es raenester que se cuide V., porque

si no se enfermara.
Es menester que obedezca V. las 6r-

denes ; de lo contrario suf rira las

consecuencias.
6 yo tengo razon 6 el la tiene.
Ni prometas ni obres sin pensar.

No lo haria si me iraportara la vida
{i. 6., aunque, or por mas que me
importara la vida.

Valiente, si los hay.

Tuvo el valor, si tal nombre merece
una accion temeraria de combatir
solo contra tantos enemigos.

Quiero saber si emplea bien el tiem-
po.

^ Si habra Uegado el correo ?

Mira si viene.

No se si lo hago.

Si (es que) acabo de entrar.

Si (cuando) el al cabo ha de venir.

Si (es que) no es eso.

Si (ya) lo dije.

We saw them as we were entering.

But for me, they would have killed
him.

I should go, did I not think it use-
less.

Say whether you will come or not.

Whether he come or not.

I doubt whether she knows it.

However attentive they are, and
however kind they may be.

You must take care of yourself, for

if you do not you will be ill.
You must obey the orders ; for if you

transgress them, you will suffer

the consequences.
Either I am right or he is.
Neither promise nor act without

thinking.
I would not do it, though my life
were at stake.

A valiant man, if there are any in

the world.
He had the courage, if the rash action

of fighting alone against so many

enemies is worthy of such a name.
I wish to know whether he employs

his time profitably.
If the mail should have arrived ?
See if he is coming.
I do not know whether to do it or not.
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so.

318 LESSON LIY,

Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga. I For I do nothing at all.

Apenas si se ola el confuso rumor
de los pasos.

The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be heard.

EXPLANATION.

274. There are several conjunctions in English that are
frequently used as substitutes for other words ; these conjunc-
tions are generally rendered in Spanish by the words which
they stand in the place of ; as,

Los vimos cuando entrabamos. i We saw them as we were going in,

Diga V. si quiere venir 6 no. | Say whether you will come or not.

275. The Spanish conjunctions are also often used as
substitutes for other words of very different meanings. Let
si and que serve as examples :

Si^ as an adverb, is, as we have already observed, affirma-
tive, except when employed ironically.

/SV, as a conjunction, may be employed in a variety of sig-
nifications. The following are some of its principal uses :

1st. To denote the condition on which depends the accom-
plishment of an action ; as,

Si quieres acompafiarme, voy a sa- 1 If you will accompany me, I am
lir. I going out.

2d. To express indispensable conditions ; as,

Tendras el caballo si lo pagas. I You will have the horse if you pay

I for it.

3d. In the sense of although, or even though ; as,
No lo haria si me importara la vida
{i. e., aunqtie or por mas que, me
importara la vida).

I should not do it, even though my
life were at stake.

4th. In familiar conversation this conjunction is oftex
employed in meanings very different from those we have just
explained. For instance, it is often used instead of es que, it
is because ; cuando, when ; porque, because ; and not unfre-
quently instead of ya, already, as we read in one of Moratin's
comedies :

Si (es que) acabo de entrar. 1 1 have just entered.

Si (cuando) el al cabo ha de venir. I For, after all, he must come.

LESSOJS LIV, 319

But that is not it.

But I said so (or did say so).

For I do nothing at all

Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.

Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo
haga.

5th. It is often used redundantly ; as,
Apenas si se oia el confuso rumor de | The confused tramping of feet could
los pasos. I scarcely be heard.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. ^ Iria V. a ver a su hermano si tuviera^tiempo ? Yo iria si
no creyera que fuese iniitil.

2. Diga V. si vendra 6 no. — Amigo mio, temo salir, porque
hace mal tiempo, y es menester que me cuide porque si no enfer-
mare.

3. i Estuvo V. ayer a ver el recibimiento del Presidente ?
No, seiior, mis ocupaciones no me lo permitieron.

4. I Cuales son los colores en que se descompone el espectro
solar ? Viol ado, anil, azul, verde, amarillo, anaranjado y rojo.

5. ^ De que color tine V. sus guantes ? Los tiiio de amarillo.

6. I Que tal le gusta a V. este ejercicio ? No me gusta de nin-
giin modo, y si continua tan interesante como hasta aqui, creo
que me hara dormir.

7. ^ Que costumbres le gustan a V. mas, las de Espana 6 las
de los Estados Unidos ? Naturalmente, como espanol, me gustan
mas las de Espana.

8. Pero i cuales son las mejores ? No sabre decirselo a V.,
cada nacion tiene las suyas y cada individuo se apega desde su
infancia a las de su propio pais.

9. I Cual es la diversion favorita del pueblo espanol ? Las
corridas de toros ; esto se entiende hablando del pueblo en gene-
ral y aun de muchos caballeros de la primera clase de la socie-
dad ; pero no de todos, porque hay muchos, principalmente,
seiioras, que jamas han visto una corrida de toros.

10. Debe ser una diversion muy cruel y muy peligrosa. — No
deja de ser peligrosa, pues los toros de Espana son mas feroces y
ligeros que los de ninguna parte del mundo, criados con este ob-
jeto montaraces, de modo que cuando de improviso se encuen-
tran en la plaza muestran una ferocidad y una valentia en nada
inferior a la de un leon de los desiertos del Africa, que se encon-
trase de repente en estos circos llenos de seres humanos.

11. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de relatarme una corrida de

320 LESSON LIY.

toros ? Lo haria con mucho gnsto ; pero se que no podria hacerlo
como merece esta antigua diversion, en algo semejante a los cir-
cos de los griegos y romanos.

12. i Vamos ! prnebe V. — Pero si es imposible, y aunque
llegara a pintarle a V. el local, los vistosos trajes, tan to del
pueblo como de los toreros, los curiosos ceremoniales de la fiesta,
las autoridades que la presiden, las tropas que la guardan ; la
miisica, el bullicio, los dichos picantes, las sonrisas, las guinadas,
los lloros y carcajadas, todo esto no serviria de nada para ha-
cerle a V. concebir una pequena idea del gozo y entusiasmo que
anima al pueblo espanol en una corrida de toros.

13. I Es posible I i Con que todo eso hay ! pues yo creia que
se reducia a una carniceria de vacas y caballos. — Pues si V. estu-
viera en Madrid le sucederia como a todos los extranjeros, que a
pesar de criticarnos esta diversion, jamas pierden una corrida de
toros.

14. Pero I en que puede consistir esegoce que Y. me pondera?
i Goce ! hombre, he visto yo tirar a la plaza el baston, el bolsillo
y hasta el reloj, entusiasmado de la proeza de algiin toreador.
Eso era lo que yo le decia a V. que no era facil de pintar, porque
no consiste en la cosa misma por mas interes que tenga sino en
la disposicion particular y el entusiasmo de cada uno. Y si no,
digame V. en el juego del fragata * americano en que no se ve
otra cosa que una pelota que rueda por el suelo, 6 se eleva por el
aire, despedida por un garrote. . . . j j j Que es lo que mueve toda
aquella algazara y ruido y confusion y gritos de, Hola ! ! ! Wil-
lie !! ! Charley ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Kun ! ! ! James ! ! ! Hurra I ! I
Hurra ! ! !

15. Ha, ha, ha ; V. me hace reir con su corrida de toros.
I Vaya ! me alegro, algo se ha ganado, porque al principio yo
creia que V. se iba a dormir.

EXERCISE.

1. Had not you better leave a line for him in case he should
come ? I think it would be better ; notwithstanding the fact
that it seems impossible for him to reach here to-night.

2. Do the boys still continue to take lessons ? One of them
still continues, although he is the least studious of the three ; the
other two gave up all of a sudden last month.

* Base ball.

LESSON LIV, 321

3. What shouts are those I hear up-stairs ? Charles has
some friends with him, and they are getting enthusiastic on the
occasion of the President's visit to the city.

4. Do you know how to keep a secret ? I wish to know that
before I tell you this one.— I do. — Well, so do I.

5. I suppose * they gave the General a grand reception when
he returned from the war ? A magnificent f one, fit for a king ;
it was Peter's uncle that presided at it.

6. Can you tell me how many prismatic colors there are,
and what are their names ? I shall try ; let me see : Green,

' blue, violet, red, orange, yellow, indigo.

7. What is the best time for learning a language with the
least trouble ? During childhood ; at that age the study of lan-
guages is reduced to its simplest expression.

8. What would the earth be without the light and heat
which we receive from the sun? A complete desert; neither
man nor any living being could exist, and there would be no
vegetation ; for all animated nature is sustained by the vivify-
ing {vivificador) effects of the sun.

9. What is the use of the prism ? It possesses the power of
decomposing a sunbeam {rayo del sol), thus enabling (poder) ug
to see separately the rays of the different colors which unite to
form what is called light.

10. Where are you going now ? it is not yet time for the
theatre. Why, it is half-past seven, and the play begins at eight
sharp.

11. If my friend should have come while I was out ? Oh, I
imagine that if he had come he would have left some word
(dejar dicho) for you.

12. What is that confused tramping of feet I that I hear in the
street ? A crowd of people running to see a fire in the next
street.

13. Do you hear how that lady praises * the courage of the
man who has just gone into the lion's cage (jauld) ? I do, and
I was just thinking that she might find an occupation of more
interest ; besides, I do not see any proof of courage in such a rash
action as that of shutting one's self up with a ferocious animal
like the lion.

* Suponer. f Magnifico.

X Rumor de pasos. * Aplaudir.

23

822

LESSON LV.

14. What sort of dress did Miss H. wear at the ball ? A blue
silk dress, with violet and orange trimmings {guarniciones). Can
you conceive of anything more detestable ?

LESSOR LY.

Afianzar.
Conquistar.
Construir.
Fundar.

Medir.

To secure, to fasten, to prop.
To conquer.
To construct, to build.
To found, to go upon (a prin-
ciple).
To measure.

Portarse.

To conduct one's self, to be-

have.

Tirar.

To throw.

Desigual.
Extremado.

Unequal.
Extreme.

Horrendo.

Horrific.

Distinto.

Distinct.

Ridiculo.

Ridiculous.

Inmemorial.

Immemorial.

Recto.

Right, straight.

Auxilio.

Castellano.

Arabe.

Crimen.

Catalan

Cimiento.

Dialecto.

Fulano.

Gallego.

Modelo.

Defecto.

Merito.

Reino.

Terreno.

Titulo.

Help.

Castilian.

Arab.

Crime.

Catalonian.

Foundation.

Dialect.

Such a one,

and so.
Galician.
Model.
Defect.
Merit.
Kingdom.
Ground.
Title.

so

Andalucia.

Castilla.

Cataluna.

Corona.

Avila.

Galicia.

Isabel.

Imperfeccion.

Irregularidad.

Guipiizcoa.

Igualdad.

Medida.

Pesa

Nobleza.

Andalusia.

Castile.

Catalonia.

Crown.

Avila.

Galicia.

Elizabeth, Isa-
bella.

Imperfection.

Irregularity.

Guipuzcoa.

Equality.

Measure.

Weight (for
weighing).

Nobility.

LESSON LV,

323

Vascuence.

Zutano.

Escritorio.

Basque.
Such a one.
Office.

Persona.

Regularidad.

Valencia.

Vizcaya.

Universidad.

Person.

Regularity.

Valencia.

Biscay.

University.

COMPOSITION.

Tratemos ahora de descansar, que

sera lo mejor.
Si no hay virtudes, que son el ci-

miento de la libertad, no se afian-

zara esta en los pueblos.
I Que hermosa que estas !
Ese si que es un modo de portarse

con honor.
Que llaman.
Que me deje en paz.
J Que me matan !
En much as obras no se encuentra

otro (or mas) merito que el estilo.
Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningiin

auxilio.
Con la perdida de su madre esta

todo el dia llora que llora.
; Que no lo hubiera yo sabido !
j, Que siempre has de ser un holga-

zanf
Que hermoso cielo !
Que horrenda noche !
Que cielo tan hermoso I
A que si.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
; Que de crimenes se vieron !
i Que de injusticias no se cometen !

I Que ! ^ no vienes ?
I Fulano !— ^ Qu6 ?
Ire a paseo, que no estare siempre

metido en casa.
Que quiera que no quiera.
No es hi jo mio, que si lo fuera . . .

Let us try to rest now ; that will be

best.
If there be no virtues, which are the

foundation of liberty, it will have

no firm foothold among nations.
How beautiful you are !
That, now, is an honorable way of

acting.
Some one is calling (knocking).
Let him leave me alone.
Murder !
Many works are void of all merit

save that of style.
Well, but I am busy.
Well, but he is entirely forsaken.
She does nothing the whole day

through but lament the loss of

her mother.
Ah ! could I but have known it !
Are you always to be a sluggard ?

What a beautiful sky !

What a horrible night !

What a beautiful sky I

I wager it is.

I wager it is not.

I wager I can say it.

I wager I can do it.

How much crime there was !

How much injustice is not there

committed !
What ! are you not coming ?
Such a one! What?
I shall go and take a walk, for I will

not be always stuck in tl;ie house.
Whether he will or not.
He is no son of mine, for if he were . . .

S2J: LESSON LV.

EXPLANATION.

276. Que, as a conjunction, is employed in so many dif-
ferent ways and meanings, tending to perplex the learner,
that we deem it essential to mention here some of its prin-
cipal uses :

It is employed as a copulative ; as,

Tratemos ahora de descausar, que I Let us go to rest now ; that will be
sera lo major. | best.

It sometimes serves to introduce an incidental proposi-
tion dependent on the principal one ; as,

.Si no hay virtudes, que son el ci-
miento de la libertad, no se afian-
zara esta en los pueblos.

If there are no virtues, which are
the foundation of liberty, the lat-
ter will have no firm foothold
among nations.

It is employed instead of sino^ but, after either of the
adjectives otro or mas ; as.

En muchas obras no se encuentra I Many works are void of all merit
otro (or mas) merito que el estilo. I except the style.

It is employed instead of pero^ but, in the phrase es que^
ivith which we convey the reason why something is or is not
done ; as.

But I am busy.

But he is entirely forsaken.

Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningiin
auxilio.

The conjunction que^ placed between two words of the
same meaning, besides uniting them as a conjunction, gives
more energy to the expression ; as.

Con la perdida de su madre esta 1 She is the whole day over lamenting
todo el dia llora que llora. | the loss of her mother.

At other times it serves to confirm more and more the
expression; as.

/ Que hermosa que estas ! {instead
of, I Que hermosa estas !)

I Ese si que es un modo de portarse
con honor ! {instead of^ \ Ese si es
un modo de portarse con honor !)

How beautiful you are !

That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting !

Some one is calling.
Let him leave me alone.
Murder !

LESSON LV, 325.

The conjunction que, at the beginning of a sentence, im-
plies a word or clause going before it ; as,

Que llaman.

Que me deje en paz.

/ Que me matan !

In all these examples a word or clause is understood be-
fore the que ; as, mirad^ in the first ; deseo or quiero, in the
second ; and reparad or sabed, in the third.

When the sentence is interrogative or exclamatory, que
denotes desire and expostulation ; as.

Ah ! could I but have known it !
Are you always to be a sluggard ?

/ Que no lo hubiera yo sabido !
^ Que siempre has de ser un holga-
zan?

In an exclamatory sentence, and when it precedes a noun
and an adjective, or an adjective alone, it is equivalent to<
cudn; as,

/ Que hermoso cielo I I What a beautiful sky !

/Que horrenda noche I | What a horrible night !

But if in these sentences the substantive comes first, the
particle tan must be put between, because we cannot say ::
/ Que cielo hermoso I but, / Que cielo tan hermoso !

In some sentences a determining verb is understood ; as.

k que si.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
k que lo hago.

I wager it is.
I wager it is not.
I wager I can say it.
I wager I can do it,

in which is understood the present indicative apuesto, I ven-
ture or wager.

In other sentences it is equivalent to a collective noun or
a plural adjective, and must be followed by the preposition
de\ as.

/ Que de crimines se vieron !

/ Que de injusticias no se cometen !

How much crime there was !
How much injustice is there not:
committed !

instead of saying : / Cudntos crimenes ! / Cudntas injusti-
cias I or, / Que multitud de crimenes S injusticias !

326 LESSON L V.

It also denotes surprise, and is used as an interrogative,
and for answering ; as,

/ Que ! 4 no vienes ? I What ! are you not coming f

and is equivalent to an entire proposition answering ; as,.

I Fulano ! s Que 9 (i. e., s Que quie- 1 So and so ! What ? (i. e., What do
res ! I you wish f)

At other times it is employed instead of the adversative
sino^ and the copulative «/, in sentences where the second
member denotes opposition to what is expressed in the
first ; as.

He will not get it, but will remain
with the desire.

I shall go out to walk, for I will not
be always stuck in the house.

No lo conseguira; que se quedara

con el deseo {instead of sino que

se quedara, etc.).
Ire a paseo, que no estare siempre

metido en casa (instead of y no

estare, etc.).

It is not unfrequently used in the place of a disjunctive
conjunction; as,

Que quiera que no quiera {i, e., I Whether he will or not.
quiera 6 no quiera. |

It is sometimes substituted for one or other of the causals,
pues^ porque^ pues que\ as.

No es hijo mio, que si lo fuera ... I He is no son of mine, for if he
(i. e., porque or pues, si lo fuera). | were . . .

In this meaning it is more used in poetry than in prose ;
as,

" Que quien se opone al cielo,
Cuanto mas alto sube, viene al suelo."

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Se habla el castellano en todas las provincias de Espaiia ?
En Ids tribunales, universidades, y oficinas publicas, si senor ;
pero el pueblo habla diferentes dialectos.

2. i Que dialectos son estos ? El Catalan, que se habla en
Cataluna ; el valenciano, en Valencia ; el gallego, en Galicia : y
el vascuence que se habla en las provincias vascongadas, que son
Alava, Guipiizcoa y Yizcaya ; se cree que este ultimo es lengua
madre y una de las mas antiguas de Europa.

LESSON LV. 32 T

3. I En donde se habla el castellano ? En las demas provin-
cias, Castilla, Aragon j Andalucia.

4. I Por que no se habla el espafiol en toda Espana ? Porque
Espaiia estuvo anteriormente dividida en varios reinos ; de estos
algunos fueron conquistados por los arabes, otros pertenecieron
a Francia, y otros finalmente permanecieron independientes por
muchos siglos, hasta que Fernando e Isabel, echando a los
arabes de Espana, reunieron las coronas de Aragon y Castilla.

5. ^ Son diferentes las costumbres de las provincias de Es-
pana ? Mucho ; no sol am en te no se habla la misma lengua en
todas, sino que hasta poco tiempo hace cada provincia tenia leyes
diferentes, y aun hoy dia tienen pesas, medidas, traje y hasta
caracteres muy distintos.

6. Pues eso debe ser muy incomodo ; en los Estados Unidos
tenemos la ventaja de hablar una misma lengua y tenemos las
mismas pesas, medidas y monedas. — Verdad es, pero tambien es
cierto que Vds. han hecho todo esto con la experiencia adquirida
en el antiguo mundo.

7. I Y por que no la hacen Vds. asi en Espaiia ? Porque nos-
otros tenemos ya establecidas estas cosas de tiempo inmemorial^
y no es facil cambiar costumbres arraigadas por tantos siglos.

8. Cuando Vds. fundan una ciudad en este nuevo mundo,
eligen el terreno necesario, tiran Vds. lineas rectas y trazan
calles y plazas ; para esto no siguen el modelo de una antigua
ciudad de Europa, pero las antiguas ciudades de Europa con sus
imperfecciones e irregularidades les han mostrado a Vds. el
modo de construir ciudades, cuyo solo defecto consiste en su ex-
tremada regularidad.

9. g Y no cree V. que de esta igualdad resultan grandes ven-
tajas ? Sin duda alguna, y seria de desear que en todo el mundo
se hablase la misma lengua, hubiese la misma moneda, pesas y
medidas, y, tanto como el clima, las costumbres y otras circuns-
tancias lo permitiesen, las mismas leyes.

10. Tambien me han dicho que hay en Espaiia varias clases
de sociedad ; ^ no es asi ? Si, senor ; pero eso sucede en todas las
naciones del mundo.

11. No en los Estados Unidos. V. ve que aqui no se dan
titulos de nobleza, no hay diferencia en el traje, y decimos Mr.
Johnson, hablando del presidente, and Mr. Johnson, hablando
de un carnicero, y el mismo Presidente Johnson era antes sastre,
de modo que la igualdad existe en las personas como en las cosas.

328 LESSOl\ LV.

12. No olvide Y., sin embargo, que Dios no ha hecho dos
cosas iguales en el mundo, y que los hombres son quiza mas
desiguales entre si que las mismas cosas. — Concedido, y no hay
cosa que mas ridicula me parezca que las lavanderas vestidas de
senoras, y los rowdies del Bowery afectando ser caballeros.

EXERCISE.

1. Did you meet them as you were going in, or as you were
coming out ? As we were entering.

2. What is the name of the province in Spain in which they
speak the Catalonian language or dialect ? Catalonia.

3. In which province do they speak the Basque ? In the
three Basque provinces.

4. And do these dialects differ very materially* from the
Castilian language ? Yes, very materially ; in general they are
more like the French than the Spanish.

5. Have you ever heard the Spanish name for the natives of
Galicia ? Yes, sir, for I am well acquainted with several Gali-
cians living in New York.

6. Can you tell me the weights and measures principally
used in the Peninsula {Peninsula) ? The principal weight, en-
tirely different from all those of the United States, is the arroba.

7. How many Isabellas have there been on the throne of
Spain ? Two ; the first was Isabella the Catholic, and the present
queen is Isabella II.

8. By what event is the reign of Isabella the Catholic dis-
tinguished from all other reigns ? By the discovery of America
by Christopher Columbus {Cristobal Colon), in the year 1492.

9. Was not there some other very important event that
•occurred about the same time ? Ah ! yes ; at the commence-
ment of that queen's reign ; you mean, I suppose, the conquest
of the Arabs, and union of the crown of Castile and Aragon.

10. Are railroads very common in the Peninsula ? Not so
common as in other European countries; but of late years the
spirit of enterprise seems to be revived in Spain, and to the few
which now exist we shall soon see a large number of others
added.

11. Let us sit down and rest for half an hour, for I am very
tired, and you must be so too.

* Mucho.

LESSON LVL

12. How beautiful the sky looks (is) to night ! That is true ;
but how it rained all day !

13. How long has that newspaper been published ? Ten
years, for it was established (founded) in 1856.

LESSOR LYI.

Apreciar.

To appreciate.

Apresurar.

To haste.

Favorecer.

To favor.

Invitar.

To invite.

Apreciable.

Appreciable.

Corriente.

Current, fluent.

Estimado.

Esteemed.

Excel en tisimo.

Very (or most) excellent.

Favorecido.

Favored.

Invariable.

Invariable.

Intimo.

Intimate.

Fino.

Fine.

Servidor.

Servant.

Mercantil.

Mercantile.

Comercio.

Corazon.

Convite.

Formulario.

Eespeto.

Sobrescrito.

Corresponsal.

Giro.

Giros.

Commerce, trade.
Heart.

Invitation, feast,
banquet, party.
List of formulas.
Respect.
Address.
Correspondent.
Draft (money).
Turn.
Manner (of style).

Atencion.
Corresponden-

cia.
Esquela.
Formula.
Expresion.
Estructura.
Intimidad.
Inicial.
Eesidencia.

Attention.
Correspondence

Note.

Form, formula

Expression.

Structure.

Intimacy.

Initial.

Residence.

COMPOSITION.

Senor D. Jose Romero.
Muy Sr. mio.
Muy Sr. nuestro.
Muy Sres. mios.
May Sres. nuestros.

Mr. Joseph Romero.
Dear Sir, My Dear Sir.
Dear Sir.
Sirs; Gentlemen.
Sirs; Gentlemen.

330

LESSON LVL

^

'J

Senora Da. Isabel Jimenez.

Muy Sra. mia.

Muy Sra. nuestra.

Hemos recibido su ap^^*, apreciable

(or su est^*, estimada, or su favoi^*

favorecida).
Las de V. del 2 del corriente {or

cor*®).
4 del pp**o (proximo pasado).
Se repite a las ordenes de V.

s. s. s.

(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
(Que su mano besa).

M. De,
Q. S. P. B.
(To ladies, que sus pies besa).
Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande V. con toda franqueza a su

invariable amigo y S. S.
El Sr. A. De L. presenta {or ofrece)
sus respetos al Sr. D. I. De H., y
le hace saber que.
Sr. D. Jose Martinez,

Del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. D. Francisco Sanchez,

Hermanos y Ca., Cadiz.

Sefiora Da. Teodora Jimenez y
Arteta, Calle Mayor N°. 10,
Zaragoza.
Al Ex"^ (Excelentisimo),

Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta.
B. L. M.,

Al Sr. De V.

s. s. s.,

A. De T.

Mrs. Isabella Jimenez.
My Dear Madam.
Dear Madam.

We have received your favor {or
your esteemed favor).

Your favors of the 2d instant.

4th ult.

Yours very truly, who kisses your
hand, or who kisses your feet.

My Dear Sir and Friend.

My Dear Friend.

Command with freedom your true

friend and faithful servant.
Mr. A. De L. presents his compli-
ments to Mr. I. De H., and begs
to inform him that.
Mr. Joseph Martinez,

Merchant, Madrid.
Messrs. Francis Sanchez Bros. & Co.,
Cadiz.
Mrs. Theodora Jimenez y Arteta,
10 Mayor Street,

Saragossa.
To His Excellency, John Valero y

Arteta.
(Form of addressing letters, notes,
&c., to persons living in the same
place as the writer.

EXPLANATION.
277. Epistolary Correspondence. — We could not, with-
out overstepping the limits of a grammar, give here all the
terms peculiar to mercantile correspondence ; those desirous
to become perfect in that branch may consult the several

LESSON LVI.

331

My Dear Sir.
Sir ; Dear Sir.

Gentlemen.

works written on the subject, among which we particularly
recommend Mr. De Veitelle's " Mercantile Dictionary," pub-
lished by D. Appleton & Co. We merely give here the gen-
eral forms for beginning and ending letters.

In addressing persons of different classes of society, except
those having titles, letters begin as follows :

Muy Senor mio.
Muy Senor nuestro.

»u Muy Senores mios. )
Muy Senores nuestros. J

And to ladies :
Muy Senora mia. 1 My Dear Madam.

These expressions are most generally abbreviated thus : —
Muy Sr, mio ; Muy Sr, W'^ ; Muy Sres, mios ; Muy Sres nX^^ ;
Muy Sra, mia ; Muy Sra. n^^\ Muy Sras, W^^^.

In the body of the letter, su ap^^^ (su apreciable), or su
est^^ (su estimada), or sic favor^^ (su f avorecida) — carta^ letter,
being understood — are equivalent to your favor or your es-
teemed letter.

Such expressions as these are translated thus :

Las de Y. del 2 del cor*« (corriente) ;
4 del pp<^o (proximo pasado) ; 8 de
Mayo, etc.

Yours of the 2d inst. ; 4th ult. ;
8th of May, &c.

The following forms are employed at the end of letters.:

Se repite a las ordenes de Y.,

s. s. s.

(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.

(Que su mano besa).
Manden Yms. cuanto gusten a

s. s. s.,

Q. S. M. B.

To a lady, the form is the same, only changing the letter
M. into P., thus :

I am, Dear Sir,

Yours respectfully.

Command at pleasure your faith-
ful servant.

s. s. s.,

Q. S. P. B.

(Que sus pies besa).

Your faithful servant, who kisses
your feet.

332

LESSON LVL

In a more familiar style :

Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande V. con toda franqueza a su
invariable amigo y S. S.

My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.

Esquelas^ notes, are also written in Spanish, as in English,
in the third person ; as.

Mr. A. De L. presents his respects to
Mr. I. De H., and begs to acquaint
him that, &c.

El Sr. A. De L. presenta (or ofrece)
sus respetos al Sr. Dn. I. De H., y
le hace saber que, &c.

The most usual manner of addressing letters is :
Sr. Dn. Jose Martinez, del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. Dn. Fran*® Sanchez, Hermanos y Ca., Cadiz.
Sra. Dna. Teodora Jimenez y Arteta, Calle Mayor N°. 10.
Al Ex"<> Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta, Madrid.

In the city :

TO A GENTLEMAN. TO A LADY.

B. L. M., B. L. P.,

Al Sr. D. P., k la Sra. Da. F. V.,

s. s. s., s. s. s.,

A. T. A. T.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Le gusta a Y. escribir cartas ? Me gusta escribir a mis
amigos intimos ; pero me gusta mas recibir cartas que escribir-
las.

2. Yo no se bien el ceremonial 6 formulario de cartas, i quiere
Y. hacerme el favor de decirme como se principia una carta ?
Con mucho gusto, pregunteme Y. aquello que no sepa.

3. I Como se principia una carta dirigida a una persona cual-
quiera con quien no tenemos intimidad ? Si es un caballero,
principiamos con la formula de Muy Sr. mio, j si es una senora
con la de Muy Senora mia.

4. e Y para acabar ? Escribiendo a un caballero solemos
decir entre otras muchas expresiones,

"QuedadeY.,

s. s. s.,

Q. S. M. B.,

Fulano de tal."

1 'LESSON LVI. 333

5. I Y si es una senora a quien escribimos ? Lo mismo, solo
" cambiamos la inicial de mano, M., en la inicial de pies^ P., asi,

" Queda de Y.,

s. s. s.,

Q. S. P. B,

Fulano de tal."

6. ^ Y cuando es a un intimo amigo ? Entonces es mas pare-
cido al ingles y principiamos diciendo : " Querido amigo," y para
acabar, cualquiera de las muchas expresiones que se usan, como :

'' Tu amigo que te ama de corazon,

Fulano de tal."

7. e Como se escriben las esquelas de invitacion, &c., a las .
personas que viven en la ciudad ? Se escriben, como en ingles,
en la tercera persona.

8. I Quiere Y. escribirme una esquela invitandome a comer ?
Si, seiior, vea Y. asi : " Los Sres. de Y. presentan sus respetos a
los Sres. de T., y les suplican que les hagan el honor de venir a
comer con ellos el martes a las cinco. Lunes, Abril 8 de 1866."

9. Yeamos si. Y. puede responderme en espanol. — Yea Y.,
*' Los Sres. de T. se apresuraran a acudir al amable convite de
los Sres. de Y., y les presentan sus mas finas atenciones."

10. Muy bien, muy bien, ahora solo falta poner la direccion
(el sobre). — Estando la persona a quien me dirijo en la ciudad,
creo que el sobrescrito debe ponerse asi :

**B. L. M.

Al Sr. de Y.

s. s. s.,

A. de T.^'
11. e Cree Y. que podre ahora traducir una carta mercantil en
ingles ? Si, sefior, y escribirla tambien, puesto que Y. sabe ya la
estructura de la lengua, ademas de poseer un gran numero de
sus giros, idiotismos y palabras mas necesarias ; pero todavia
tendra Y. necesidad de acudir al diccionario, porque no es posible
introducir en una gramatica todas las palabras y f rases que
requiere una correspondencia mercantil.

EXERCISE.

1. Do you ever do any of the correspondence in your office
{escritorio) ? Not often, for I do not know how to write letters
in Spanish, and the greater part of our correspondence is carried
on (Jlevar) in that language.

334 LESSON LVZ.

2. You ought, in that case, to make that branch the ob-
ject of particular study for a time. That is what I desire to
do; and I should be obliged if you would give me some
instruction (instruir) in the forms most observed by Spanish
houses.

3. I shall take much pleasure in teaching you all I know
myself ; but as I have never been in business, there are many
points of which I am ignorant (ignorar).

4. What is the first thing to write in a letter ? In Spanish,
as in English, the date is generally the first thing ; it is written
thus :

Cadiz, Dec. 1, 1898.

5. What comes next ? The name and residence of the per-
son to whom we are writing, thus :

Messrs. Lafuekte, Sons Sc Co., Malaga:

6. So far there is little difference between the two languages.
Very little ; we next go on to say (luego se pone) :

Gentlemen (or Sir, or My dear Sir, or Dear Sirs, or, if we write
to a lady. Madam) :

7. Ah ! there I observe a decided difference : is that the
form always followed in beginning letters ? For business
letters, yes ; but for familiar correspondence we have many
others ; indeed,* they are usually in conformity with the taste
of the writer.

8. Be good enough to tell me one or two. With the greatest
pleasure : My Dear Friend : My Very Dear Alexander : Esteemed
Friend : My Ever Dear Mother, &c.

9. How do you acknowledge (acusar) the receipt of a letter ?
In this manner : I have duly received your esteemed favor (or
letter) of the 17th instant.

10. As for the body of the letter, the form depends entirely
on the nature of the business ; and, in general, all that is required
is to say just what is necessary and nothing more, and to avoid
obscurity (obscuridad) in order that our ideas may be completely
understood by our correspondent (corresponsal).

11. The usual ways to close a letter are :

I am, dear sir,

Your most obd't ser't ; or,

I am, sir,

Yours very truly.

* M hecho es.

LESSON LYIL

12. And for familiar letters :
I am, dear Charles,

Your true friend and loving cousin ; or,
With kindest expressions to your brother.

Believe me to remain your ever faithful and loV'
ing friend.

lesso:n" lvii.

Abalanzar.

To balance, weigh, throw, thrust.

Abalanzarse.

To spring.

Concordar.

To agree.

Cumplir.

To fulfil, to keep, to do (duty).

Conversar.

To converse.

Entregar.

To give, to hand, to deliver.

Escapar.

To escape.

Honrar.

To honor.

Participar.

To participate

, to partake.

Eegir.

To govern.

Auxiliar.

To help.

Honrado.

Honest, honored.

Plural.

Plural.

Singular.

Singular.

Baron. Baron.

Alhaja.

Jewel.

Credito. Credit.

Agudeza.

Wit, witty say.

Encargo. Commission,

ing.

charge, order.

Cocina.

Kitchen.

Genero. Kind, cloth.

Confianza.

Confidence.

Empleo. Employment,

Espada.

Sword.

office.

Fuga.

Flight.

Plato. Plate, dish.

Grracia.

Favor, good

Niimero. Number.

graces.

Regimen. Regimen.

Mania.

Mania.

Tema. Theme, exercise.

Promesa.

Promise.

Diptongo. Diphthong.

Pretension.

Pretension,

Triptongo. Triphthong.

claim.

Varon. Man.

Concordancia.

Concord, agree-

Error. Error, mistake.

ment.

Version.

Version.

Tema.

Whim.

336

LESSON LVIL

COMPOSITION.

Acordarse con alguno.
Acordarse de alguno.
Caer a la plaza.

Caer en la plaza.

Caer de la gracia de alguno.

Caer en gracia a alguno.

Contar una cosa.
Contar con una cosa.
Convenir a uno.

Convenir con uno.
Cumplir con uno.
Cumplir por uno.
Dar algo.
Bar con algo.
Dar en una cosa.
Dar por algo.
Dar credito.
Dar a credito.
Dar la mano.

Dar de mano.

Dar en manos de.

Dar con el pie.

Dar por el pie.

Dar fin [or cabo) a una cosa.

Dar fin de una cosa.

Declararse a alguno.

Declararse por alguno.

Dejar hacer algo.
Dejar de hacer algo.
Deshacerse alguna cosa.
Deshacerse de alguna cosa.

Disponer sus alhajas.
Disponer de sus alhajas.
Echar tierra a una cossu

To agree with any one.
To remember any one.
To front on the square (said of a

house).
To fall in the square.
To fall from any one's favor (or good

graces).
To get into any one's favor (or good

graces).
To relate, to tell a thing.
To count upon a thing.
To suit (to be convenient for) any

one.
To agree with any one.
To do one's duty toward any one.
To act in the place of any one.
To give anything.
To find anything.
To be obstinate.
To give for anything.
To give credit, to believe.
To give on credit.
To give the hand (or to shake

hands).
To lay aside, to abandon.
To fall into the hands of.
To despise, to scorn, to make light of
To overthrow.

To bring to an end, to finish.
To destroy.

To confide one's secrets to any one.
To side with any one, to declare

one's self in favor of any one.
To let anything be done.
To leave anything undone.
(Speaking of things) to be destroyed.
To dispose of (or part with) any-
thing.
To arrange one's jewelry.
To dispose of one's jewelry.
To forget anything, to cast it into

oblivion.

LESSON LVIL

337

Echar un genero en tierra.

Entender una cosa.
Entender en una cosa.
Entregarse al dinero.
Entregarse del dinero.
Escapar a buenas.
Escapar de buenas.
Estar en alguna cosa.
Estar sobre alguna cosa.
Estar a todo.
Estar en todo.
Estar con cuidado,
Estar de cuidado.
Estar en si.
Estar sobre si.
Estar con alguno.

Estar por alguno.

Estar en hacer alguna cosa.

Estar para hacer alguna cosa.
Estar por hacer alguna cosa.
Estar alguna cosa por hacer.
Oustar un plato.

Gustar de un plato.
Hacer confianza a una persona.
Hacer confianza de una persona.
Hacer una cosa con tiempo.

Hacer una cosa en tiempo.

Hacerse a una cosa.
Hacerse con una cosa.
Hacerse de una cosa.
Hallarse algo.
Hallarse con algo.

Ir con alguno,

Ir sobre alguno.
Mayor de edad.
Mayor en edad.
24

To throw anything on the ground

(or down).
To understand a thing.
To be a judge of a thing.
To make a god of one's money.
To receive, to take charge of money.
To make the best of one's escape.
To make a happy escape.
To be aware of anything.
To push an affair.
To be ready for whatever may come.
To pay attention to every matter.
To be anxious, solicitous.
To be dangerously ill.
To be at himself or herself.
To be proud.
To be with any one, to be of any

one's opinion.
To favor any one.
To bjB resolved (or disposed) to do

anything.
To be about to do anything.
To be inclined to do something.
To remain to be done.
To taste a dish (of any kind of

food).
To be fond of a dish.
To make a confidant of any one.
To put confidence in any one.
To do a thing at one's leisure (so as

not to be pressed for time).
To do a thing in time, at a suitable

time.
To get used to a thing.
To get (or procure) a thing.
To provide one's self with a thing.
To find anything.

To be in possession of (or have) any-
thing.
To go with anybody, to be on any

one's side, to listen to any one.
To fall upon (or attack) any one.
To be of age.
To be older.

338

LESSON LVIL

Participar una cosa.

Participar de una cosa.
Poner una cosa en tierra.
Poner una cosa por tierra.
Poner con cuidado.
Poner en cuidado.
Preguntar a uno.
Preguntar por uno.
Quedar en hacer una cosa.
Quedar una cosa por hacer.

Responder una cosa.

Responder de una cosa.
Saber a cocina.
Saber de cocina.

Salir con una empresa.
Salir de una empresa.
Salir a su padre.
Salir con su padre.
Salir de su padre.

Salir por su padre,
Ser con alguno.
Ser de alguno.
Ser para alguno.
Tener consigo.
Tener para si.
Tener de hacer algo.
Tener que hacer algo.
Tirar la espada.

Tirar de la espada.
Tratar de vinos.
Tratar en vinos.
Vender al contado.
Vender de contado.
Volver a la razon.
Volver por la razon.

Volver en razon de tal cosa.

To communicate anything (to an-
other).

To participate in anything.

To lay anything on the ground.

To make little of a thing.

To put (or place, or lay) with care.

To alarm, to give anxiety.

To ask any one (interrogate).

To ask (or inquire) for anything.

To agree to do anything.

To remain to be done (speaking of
things).

To answer something (giving an
answer).

To answer for anything.

To smell (or taste) of the kitchen.

To be skilful in (or to understand)
cooking.

To carry out an enterprise.

To give up an enterprise.

To resemble one's father.

To go out with one's father.

To be released from the wardship of
one's father.

To go bail for one's father.

To be of any one's opinion.

To belong to any one's party.

To be for any one (of things).

To have with (or about) one.

To be persuaded.

To be going to do anything.

To have to do anything.

To throw down (or away) one's
sword.

To draw one's sword.

To talk about wines.

To deal in wines.

To sell for cash.

To sell on the instant.

To recover one's reason.

To stand up for reason (or what is
right).

To return for such a reason (or mo-
tive).

LESSON LVlir 339

EXPLANATION.

278. It is a general custom, amongst authors of Spanish
grammars and Spanish methods, to copy entire the forty-
pages devoted by the Spanish Academy in its Grammar to a
list of verbs requiring certain prepositions after them. But
we, notwithstanding our most profound respect for the body
just mentioned, refrain from following in the footsteps of
our predecessors, and that not merely on account of the use-
lessness of the list, but for the more potent reason that we
believe it likely to misguide the student at every step. An
example : — Any one not thoroughly acquainted with Span-
ish syntax would, on reading the very first article in the
list above referred to, Ahalanzarse a los peligros, natu-
rally conclude therefrom that the verb ahalanzar governs
at all times and under all circumstances the preposition a,
Now that would be absurd, for nothing is more usual than
to see and hear the expressions : — Ahalanzarse contra
{or sobre) su eneniigo^ ahalanzarse con {or sin) juicio^
ahalanzarse para sacudir, de repente, &c. And so of
all the other verbs, each of which may, according to the
idea to be conveyed, govern almost any preposition in the
language.

It would be vain to attempt to give, in a work of the
nature of the present one, a complete set of rules for deter-
mining the various significations of every verb as decided or
modified by the attendant preposition ; but, since much can
be done, even here, toward helping the student through the
most difficult parts, we could not resist giving in this day's
Composition a list composed of those verbs which are at the
same time of most frequent occurrence in general every-day
conversation, and susceptible of the greatest diversity of
meaning, according to the preposition by which they are
followed.

Before dismissing this subject we deem it fitting to re-
mark that a large number of English verbs, to determine the
meaning of which a preposition is indispensable, are ren-
dered in Spanish by a verb alone. For example :

340 LESSON LVIL

Bajar. To go down.

Entrar. To come in.

Salir. To go out.

Subir. To go up.

Sacar. To draw out.

Partir. To set out.

Caer. To fall down.

This may be the reason why many Spanish grammarians
have thought that in Spanish the same thing does not exist.
We regret that the dimensions of our book will not permit
us to give a more complete list in corroboration of the fact
that Spanish verbs too enjoy that transition of signification
which is so frequent in English verbs.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I A que lado caen las ventanas de su cuarto de V. ? Tres
caen a la plaza de Madison y las otras tres caen a la calle Veinte
y cinco.

2. I Le cae a V. en gracia ese muchachito ? Si, seiior, porque
responde con mucha agudeza.

3. I Puedo con tar con su promesa de V. ? Y. puede con tar
con ella, porque yo cumplo siempre lo que prometo.

4. I Da V. credito a todo lo que oye ? No, seiior, a menos
que conozca las personas.

5. i Da V. la mano a aquel pobre ? Si, seiior, porque aunque
pobre es honrado.

6. I Ha dado V. fin a su tarea ? Todavia no ; pero pronto
dare de niano.

7. Si V. deja esos libros en manos de ese muchacho, pronto
dara fin de ellos. — Asi lo creo ; pero es necesario que los ninos
tengan algo para entretenerse.

8. I Como ha dispuesto V. de sus alhajas ? Las he guardado,
porque pude encontrar dinero sin venderlas.

9. I Que se hizo de aquel mal negocio en que se metio su
primo de V. ? Se le ha echado tierra, y nadie se acuerda mas
de el.

10. I En que se ocupa su amigo de V. ? Entiende en vinos ;
pero es cosa que no entiende.

11. I Como esta su esposa de V. ? Ella esta de cuidado, y yo
con cuidado.

12. i Esta V. en hacer aquel negocio ? Estoy para hacerlo.

LUSSOJ^ LVIL 341

13. i Queda V. en hacer ese encargo por mi ? Quedo en ha-
cerlo y pierda V. cuidado, que no se quedara por hacer.

14. I Es V. mayor de edad ? No, senor, todavia no ; pero soy
mayor en edad con respecto a mis hermanos.

15. No ponga V. eso por tierra. — No lo pongo por tierra, sine
en tierra.

16. I Piensa V. salir con su empresa ? No, senor, pero pienso
salir pronto de ella.

17. i Tiro ese hombre de la espada ? Tiro de la espada,
porque la saco ; pero el miedo le hizo emprender la fuga y la tiro.

18. Don Juan, i le gusta a V. vender al fiado ? No, seiior, me
gusta vender al contado y de contado.

19. I Volvio D. Francisco por larazon ? No, senor, D.Francisco
no ha vuelto a la razon, y por.consiguiente no volvio por la razon.

20. I Se acuerda ese hombre con su esposa ? No, seiior, no se
acuerdan. ..^

21. I Se acuerda Y. de lo que le dije a V. ayer ? No, senor, lo
he olvidado.

22. I Conviene V. ahora conmigo en que el espanol es mas
facil que el ingles ? Convengo con Y. en ello.

23. i Le conviene a Y. hacer eso ? No, senor, no me conviene.

24. I Dio Y. por fin con lo que buscaba ? No, senor, todavia
no lo he encontrado.

25. Este hombre ha dado en la tema de querer aprender sin
estudiar ; ^ no le parece a Y. que es una pretension muy ridicula ?
Ridiculisima.

EXERCISE.

1. Has the Baron given up his project ? He told me he
would like to give it up, if he could do so honorably.

2. I understand that he is an honorable man ? Yes, and he
is therefore respected by all who know him.

3. Has your brother come to an agreement with that dealer
for the purchase of the horse about which he was speaking ? It
appears not, and that, on the contrary, he desires to get rid of the
one he has.

4. Did you inform the merchant of the order you received
from the West ? Not yet ; but I intend to let him know of it
this very day.

5. Does that woman understand cooking ? She says she does ;
and she handed me a letter from a lady with whom she lived two
years.

842

LUSSON LVIIL

6. Did the captain draw his sword as soon as he heard his
antagonist's reply ? He had already drawn it ; but when he
heard the reply be threw down his sword, and ran and gave his
hand to the man whom, a few moments before, he was resolved
to kill.

7. Has your brother sent you the books he promised you ?
No, and that need not surprise you, for I can never rely (count)
on him for anything.

8. That is to say, he never keeps his promise ? That is pre-
cisely what I mean to say.

9. Do past participles always agree in gender and number
with the subject of the verb ? Yes, always, except when gov-
erned by the auxiliary to have.

10. Are there not some participles, past and present, that do
not retain the regimen of the verbs to which they belong ? —
There are very many ; and, if you like, I shall mention some of
them. — Be good enough to do so.

11. I hope you have provided yourself with everything ne-
cessary for your journey ? Everything, except one or two arti-
cles which I have been unable to find.

12. How do you advise me to arrange (dispose) all these books ?
I have only one counsel to give you in the matter, and that is, to
dispose of them as quickly as you can.

13. Would you like to taste this dish ? No, thank you, I am
not fond of it.

14. Is he not of your opinion ? Not at all ; he always goes
(sides) with his father.

LESSON LVIII.

Notar.

Cazar.

Chancear.

Combinar.

Concertar.

Concluir.

Enfriarse.

Encargar.

Flotar.
Improvisar.

To note, to observe, to perceive.

To hunt, to chase.

To jest.

To combine.

To concert, to agree.

To conclude, to finish.

To cool, to get (or grow) cold.

To charge, to commission, to

order.
To float.
To improvise.

LESSON LVIIL

343

Inspirar.

To inspire.

Eepartir

To divide.

Saltar.

To leap, to jump.

Trinchar.

To carve, to cut.

Cobrar.

Brindar.

To collect. To toast.

A lo lejos.

At a distance.

in the distance.

A cuestas.

On one's back,

on one's shoulder.

A la espanola.

In the Spanish

fashion.

Atras.

Backward, age

, behind.

Blanco.

White.

Bonito.

Pretty.

Durable,

duradero.

Durable.

Elocuente.

Eloquent.

Galante.

Gallant.

Bello sexo.

Fair sex.

Magnifico.

Magnificent.

Negro.

Black.

Rodeado

.

Surrounded.

Vacio.

Empty.

Abanico.

Fan.

Ala.

Wing.

Apetito.

Appetite.

Botella.

Bottle.

Aficionado.

Amateur, one

Caza.

Hunt.

fond of.

Chanza.

Jest.

Baiil.

Trunk.

Cima.

Top, summit.

Buey.

Ox.

Colina.

Hill.

Brindis.

Toast.

Dama.

Lady.

Carro.

Car, cart.

Imaginacion.

Imagination.

Canasto.

Basket.

Llave, clave.

Key.t

Conductor.

Conductor.

Milla.

Mile.

Pretexto.

Pretext.

Pechuga.

Breast (of fowl).

Penasco.

Rock, cliff.

Fuerza.

Force, strength.

Embarcadero.

Ferry.

Suerte.

Luck, sort.

Piropos {pi.).

Sweet things.*

Tarea.

Task.

Pasaje.

Fare.

Vocal.

Vowel.

Sitio.

Place, spot.

Voz.

Voice, word.

Salon.

Saloon.

Sombra.

Shade, shadow.

Vocabulario.

Vocabulary.

Elocuencia.

Eloquence.

* Piropos. sweet words, honeyed sayings.
f Llave. key to a door ; clave, key to a book, or to an arch, mysterious
writings, or in a figurative sense.

344

LESSO]^ LVIIL

COMPOSITION.

Quedamos en que saldriamos a las

cinco.
Este canasto es superior a mis f uer-

zas.
A la salud de las sefioras.
Decir piropos a las senoritas.

Sirvase V. pagar al conductor.
\ Mire V. que gracia !
i Que tal le gusta a V. I
Pongamos los canastos a la som-

bra.
La subida de la colina con un gran

canasto a cuestas, me ha abierto el

apetito.
Me alegro de ver a V.
Se alegro de la noticia.
Lo siento mucho.

Me pesa mucho saberlo.

jCuantas personas caben en esta

iglesia ?
No cabiamos todos en el salon.
4 Puede caber en tu imaginacion tal

cosa?
Cabe mucho en este baiil.
No caber de pies.
A mi me cupo en suerte venir a la

America.
No caber de gozo.

We agreed to set out (or start) at

five o'clock.
This basket is more than I am able

to manage.
To the health of the ladies.
To say sweet things to the young

ladies.
Please pay the conductor.
Only think !
How do you like it ?
Let us set the baskets in the shade.

Coming up the hill with a large bas-
ket on my back has sharpened my
appetite.

I am glad to see you.

He was rejoiced at the news.

I am very sorry for it {i. e., I regret
it much).

I am very sorry to know it {i. e., it
grieves me much to know it).

How many persons does this church
hold?

The saloon could not hold us all.

Can such a thing enter your imagi-
nation ?

This trunk holds a good deal.

To have no room to stand.

It was my lot to come to America.

To be overjoyed.

EXPLANATION.

IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS.

279. Alegrarse. — The verbs to he glad and to he rejoiced
at are translated by the reflexive verb alegrarse ; as,

Me alegro de ver a V. 1 1 am glad to see you.

Se alegro de la noticia. | He was rejoiced at the news.

280. Sentir and pesar. — To he sorry and to grieve are
translated by these verbs ; as,

LESSON LVIIL

345

Lo siento mucho.

Me pesa mucho saberlo.

I am very sorry for it {i. e., I greatly

regret it).
I am very sorry to know it {i. e., it

grieves me much to know it).

281. Caber, to be capable of containing, &c. — This verb
is employed in different manners in Spanish ; as,

^Cuantas personas
iglesia?

caben en esta

No cabiamos todos en el salon.

i Puede caber en tu imaginacion tal

cosa?
Cabe mucho en este baul.
No caber de pies.
A mi me cupo en saerte venir a la

America.
No caber en si.
No caber de gozo.

How many persons does this church
hold (or is it capable of contain-
ing)?*

The saloon could not hold us all.

Can such a thing enter your imag-
ination ?

This trunk holds a great deal.

To have no room to stand.

It was my lot to come to America.

To be well satisfied with one's self.
To be overjoyed.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Buenos dias, seiiores, i conque ya todos estan listos ? Pues
no habiamos de estar, si son ya las seis y quedamos en que sal-
driamos a las cinco.

2. Habriamos estado aqui de los primeros, si no hubiera sido
que, despues de haber andado dos 6 tres manzanas, echo de ver
mi esposa que habia olvidado la Have del cuarto, el paraguas, el
abanico, y yo no se cuantas otras cosas mas ; pero en fin ya esta-
mos aqui, i cuando partimos ? Estamos esperando el carro que
va al embarcadero de la calle Treinta y tres.

3. Seiioras, esten Vds. prontas, porque veo venir el carro. —
Don Martin, ayudeme V. a llevar este canasto, porque es superior
a mis f uerzas. — Llame V. a Don Pepito, que no hace mas que
decir piropos a las seiioritas, porque yo tengo ya dos paraguas y
tres niiios de que cuidar.

4. Don Pepe, V. que no tiene niiios, ni canastos, etc., sirvase
V. pagar al conductor. — (i El diantre del hombre ! ahora me pesa
no haber tornado un canasto.)

5. i El pasaje caballeros ! l Cuantos somos ? uno, dos, tres,
cuatro, caballeros ; una, dos, tres, cuatro, siete seiioras, esto es :
once personas mayores y catorce niiios.

* Literally, how many persons hold themselves in this church ?

346 LESSON LYIIL

6. Papa, i esta muy lejos el sitio adonde vamos a pasar el
dia ? No, Luisita, solamente unas diez millas.

7. i De este lado 6 del otro del rio ? Del otro, desde aqiii lo
puedes ver.

8. e No ves alia a lo lejos, en la cima de aquella colina, una
casa blanca en donde flota la bandera americana ? Si, seiior, es
muy bonito sitio y debe tener muy buenas vistas.

9. Cuidado con los niiios al saltar en tierra, no se caiga
alguno al agua. — i Estan todos fuera ? e No se ha olvidado
nada ? — No, seiior. — Pues en marcha.

10. Don Pepito, tome V. ese canasto, y cuidado no le deje caer
y rompa las botellas que contiene. — i Hombre, por Dios ! con el
pretexto de que venia con las manos vacias, me ha hecho V.
pagar los carros y el vaporcito por veinte y tres personas, y ahora
me quiere V. hacer cargar con el canasto del vino.

11. Vamos, Don Pepito, llevelo V. ahora hasta la cima de
aquella colina, que a la vuelta a casa yo me encargo de llevarlo.
— ; Mire V. que gracia ! a la vuelta ! que es lo que quedara
de una docena de botellas, despues de beber veinte y tres per-
sonas.

12. Nada ; el que no ayude a llevar los canastos no partici-
para de su contenido. — Seiiores, repartamos la tarea ; que los hom-
bres lleven los canastos, las mamas a los ninos, los ninos los
paraguas, y las seiioritas a Don Pepito.

13. Da. Delfina i que tal le gusta a V. este sitio ? i Oh ! es
delicioso ; \ que vistas tan bonitas !

14. Pongamos los canastos a la sombra de ese hermoso arbol.
—Si, y pongamonos nosotros tambien a la sombra, que al sol
hace calorcito.

15. I No le parece a V., Don Enrique, que es tiempo de poner
la mesa ?— Asi me parece. porque la subida de la colina con un
gran canasto a cuestas me ha abierto el apetito.

16. Senores, la comida esta en la mesa.— Seiioras, e que es lo
que Yds. dicen ? i en la mesa ! I Ah ! si, ya vemos, sobre un gran
peiiasco a la sombra de aquel arbol i magnifica idea !

17. Don Pepito, traiga V. un par de sillas mas, que faltan para
dos sefioras. Alia voy, ; caspita con las sillitas ! cada una pesa
cien libras ; pero, eso si, son durables, no haya miedo de que se
rompan.— Tomen Vds. asiento, sefioras.

18. Pase v., Don Martin, primero. No, senor, despues de V.
—Seiiores sin cumplimientos que se enfria la comida.

LFSSON LVIIL 347

19. h Quieii quiere sopa ? ; Hombre, sopa ! yo, yo, sirvame Y.
un plato, Don Enrique.

20. Poco a poco, Don Pepito, en el campo, no tenemos sopa.
— Pues yo crei que V. me la ofrecia. — Yo pregunte por saber
quien era aficionado a la sopa.

21. Senor Don Pedro i quiere V. hacerme el favor de trinehar
ese polio ? Con mucho gusto.

22. Da. Margarita i voy a mandarle a V. un pedazo de pe-
chuga ? No, seiior, gracias, mandeme V. el ala 6 la pierna, que
me gusta mas.

23. Don Pepito, un brindis, vamos un brindis.— Excusenme
Vds., seiiores, yo no se hacer, y menos improvisar brindis.

24. Pero hombre, i eso dice V. que es tan galante y elocuente
con las damas ! ^ No le inspira a Y. algo el bello sexo de que
se halla Y. rodeado ? Pues bien, a la salud de las senoras. — V
J por que no ?

EXERCISE.

1. Has not the baker come yet ? You are in a jesting mood
(humor) this morning ; he came long before you were up.

2. Never mind; I have change enough to pay for all. —
You are too late, I have already paid ; the conductor has
no time to wait half an hour collecting the fare of each passen-
ger.

3. Your appetite seems to be a little better to-day than usual ;
how do you account for that ? Really you praise my appetite
beyond what it deserves ; I am happy to say that it is at all
times in excellent condition.

4. Do you not find it good exercise to climb to the top of the
hill with that heavy basket on your arm ? The fact is that I
shall have to give it to some one else for a while, for my strength
is not equal to the task.

5. I wonder whom you can give it to ; you see that we have
each of us something to carry. Well, in that case, I must change
with some one that has a lighter burden {cargo) than my own.

6. Does not John intend to become a soldier ? He does,
though entirely contrary to the will of his father, who set his
face against it in the most determined manner.

7. How many trunks is each passenger (pasajero) permitted
to keep with him in his berth (camarote) ? Only one, supposed
to contain the articles he may need to have at hand during the
passage.

348

LESSON LIX,

8. Did you ever go on a lion-hunt while you were in South
Africa ? Several times, and I can assure you it is a most inter-
esting and exciting scene.

9. Did you go entirely for pleasure ? No, I managed to com-
bine business and pleasure, otherwise I should probably never
have seen that country, for you know that such a voyage as that
costs a great deal of money.

10. Did you drink many toasts during the dinner ? A good
many, and the first one I proposed was to the fair sex.

11. Nothing surprising in that ; I know it would scarcely be
possible to surpass you in gallantry. You are flattering me now,
for the ladies on every hand agree in calling you the most gal-
lant young gentleman in the country.

12. Just see if your eloquence will not succeed in persuading
your young friend to come with us to-morrow. With all my
heart; but unfortunately he does not speak French, and you
know how much my eloquence loses in English.

13. Does the art of pleasing depend on what we do and what
we say ? It does not, in my opinion, depend so much on
what we do and say as on how we do things and how we say
them.

14. Is it not surprising that your sister has not yet come ? I
believe she has gone to see her young Spanish friend (/em.),
although she left me but half an hour ago, under pretext of hav-
ing to write a letter.

15. Do you generally dine in the Spanish fashion at home ?
We generally dine in the French fashion, notwithstanding the
fact that we are all very fond of the Spanish way of cooking.

LESSON LIX.

Amenazar.

To menace.

Cojear.

To be lame, to limp.

Colgar.

To hang.

Corregir.

To correct.

Cubrir.

To cover.

Cubrirse.

To put on one's hat, to cover

one's self.

Descubrir.

To discover, to uncover.

LESSON LIX,

349

Descubrirse.

Despedir.

Definir.

Durar.

Eodar.

Prestar.

Yencer.

To take off one's hat, to make

one's self discovered.
To send away, to put away, to

give up.
To define.
To last.

To roll, to run on wheels.
To lend.
To conquer.

Cosa de.

About.

Capaz.

Capable, able.

Condicional.

Conditional.

Carirredondo.

Roundfaced.

Casero.

Household, family, domestic.

Companero.

Companion.

Claro.

Clear.

Copulativo.

Copulative.

Generoso.

Generous.

Defectivo.

Defective.

Libre.

Free, unembarrassed.

Vulgar.

Vulgar, common, usual.

Vistoso.

Showy.

Asesino.
Aumento.

Cerrojo.

Campo.

Corredor.

Dedo.

Dialogo.

Dolor de cos-

tado.
Deseo.
Descuido.
Grito.
Gemido.
Pagare.

Assassin.
Increase, aug-
mentation.
Bolt.

Field, country.
Broker.
Finger.
Dialogue.
Pain in the side.

Desire, wish.
Carelessness.
Shout.

Groan, moan.
Promissory
note.

Barba.

Carcajada.

Decena.

Definicion.

Evidencia.

Espalda.

Gana.

Hoja.

Loteria

Llave.

Pena.

Pera.

Pobreza.

Pascua.

Rodilla.

Vuelta.

Beard, chin.

Burst of laughter.

About ten.

Definition.

Evidence.

Back.

Desire, mind.

Leaf.

Lottery.

Key.

Difficulty, pain.

Pear.

Poverty.

Easter.

Knee.

Turn, change.

350

LFSSON LIX.

Presidio.

State prison.

Posicion. Position.

Peral.

Pear-tree.

Excusa. Excuse, apology.

Pesame.

Condolence.

Premio.

Prize, premium,
reward.

Salto.

Jump, spring.

Semblante.

Look.

Trago.

Draught, drink.

COMPOSITION.

Su pagare de

V. cae el mes que

Your note falls due next month.

viene.
Le ha caido la loteria.
Este edificio cae al (or hacia el)

Norte.
Mis ventanas caen a la mano dere-

cha.
Este vestido te cae bien.
No cayo en la cuenta.

Ya caigo en ello.

Estar al caer.

Caer de pies, de rodillas.

Lo doy por hecho.

Lo dieron por libre.

Me doy por vencido.

Le dio un dolor de costado.

La lectura de ese libro te dara ganas

de dormir.
Al fin dio en la dificultad.
Dar los buenos dias.
Dar las pascuas.
Dar el pesame.
Dar la enhorabuena.
Dar gritos.
Dar gemidos.
Dio una carcajada.
Dar a comprender.
Darse a conocer.
Dar una vuelta.
Dar pena.
Dar gusto.
Dar gana.

He has won a prize in the lottery.
This building looks toward the

North.
My windows are on the right hand.

This dress fits her well.

He did not see the drift (of what

was said).
Ah, now I see !
To be about to take place.
To fall on one's feet, on one's knees,
I take for granted it is done.
They let him go free.
I give up.

A pain struck him in the side.
Reading this book will put you

asleep (or make you sleep).
Finally he fell upon the difficulty.
To wish one a good day.
To wish a happy Easter.
To express condolence.
To congratulate.
To give shouts.
To utter groans.
He burst out laughing.
To give to understand.
To make one's self known.
To take a turn, to go round.
To cause displeasure.
To give pleasure.
To have a mind ; to take a notion.

LESSON LIX.

351

Dar saltos.

Dio que decir.

Esto no dice bien con aquello.

El bianco dice bien con el azul.

Su vestido dice su pobreza.

El serablante de Juan dice bien su

mal genio.
Este peral echa muchas peras.

Esta planta no ha echado hojas.

He echado un trago.

Eche V. la Have a la puerta.

Echar pie a tierra.

Echar el cerrojo.

Echarlo a juego {or chanza).

Hoy echan la comedia nueva.

Ha echado coche.

Echar a presidio.

Echar por los campos.

Echaron a correr.

Lo echo todo a perder.

Echar a rodar.

No echo de ver este defecto.

I Echa V. de menos algo f

No, senor ; echo de menos a alguien.

Me eche a dormir.

Se echo a reir.

Se echo a corredor.

To jump about.

He left room for a talk.

This is not in strict accordance with

that. •

White goes very well with blue.
Her dress declares her poverty.
John's bad temper is pictured on

his countenance.
This pear-tree bears a great many

pears.
This plant has not had any leaves.
I have taken a drink.
Lock the door.
To dismount.
To draw tHe bolt.
To take it in play (or in jest).
The new play comes out to-night.
He has bought a carriage.
To send to prison.
To set out across the fields.
They set out running.
He spoiled all.
To set rolling.

I do not perceive the defect.
Do you miss anything?
No, sir ; I miss some one.
I went asleep.
He began to laugh.
He became a broker.
He threw him into the street.

Lo puso de patitas en la calle.

EXPLANATION.

282. The verbs caer^ to fall ; dar^ to give ; decir ^ to tell,
or to say ; echar ^ to throw ; differ from the English in meaning
as conveyed by the sentences which are given in the Compo-
sition, and to which we refer without putting them here, in
order to avoid repetition.

There they are to be found, with their English transla-
tions, which is the only explanation of which they admit.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Gonzalo, i. le ha caido a V. la loteria ? No, seiior ;
pero mi pagare ha caiao.

352 LESSON LIX.

2. Luisita, i quien ha hecho ese vestido que te cae tan bien ?
Mi mama lo corto y yo lo cosi.

3. I No sabe V. por que me hace ahora tantos cumplimientos
Don Enriqiue ? No, senor, no se que motivo tenga para ser ahora
mas politico con V. que lo ha sido hasta aqui.

4. I No sabe V. que me ha caido el premio de los cien mil
pesos en la loteria de la Habana ? Si, senor ; ya me lo ha dicho
V. antes.

5. Pues bien, i no cae V. ahora en la cuenta ? i Ha ! ya caigo
en ello. Don Enrique quiere pedirle a V. dinero prestado.

6. I Han dado las doce ? Estan al caer.

7. i Dieron garrote a los asesinos ? No, senor, al fin los
dieron por libres, porque no habia evidencia suficiente para sen-
tenciarlos.

8. I Que ha tenido su hermano de V. que no lo he visto por
tanto tiempo ? Le dio un dolor de costado y ha tenido que guar-
dar cam a por una semana.

9. e A que no adivina V. lo que acabo de hacer ? Segura-
mente que no lo adivinare, porque V. es capaz de hacer muchas
cosas buenas y malas.

10. I Se da V. por vencido ? Me doy. — Pues vengo de echar
un trago.

11. I Que comedia dan hoy ? Hoy dan la tragedia de " Me-
dea," en donde representa la Senora Ristori ; l ira V. ?

12. Siendo en italiano no ire, porque no comprendo el ita-
liano y me daria ganas de dormir.

13. Sr. D. Alejandro, vengo a darle a Y. los buenos dias. —
Tengalos V. rauy buenos.

14. I No me quiere V. dar alguna otra cosa ? Si, senor, le doy
a V. la enhorabuena por el aumento que ha tenido V. en su
f am ilia. — Viva V. mil aiios.

15. Todo eso es muy bueno, D. Pepito ; pero sea V. generoso
y deme V. alguna cosita mas. — Hombre, si V. no se da a com-
prender yo no se que mas darle a V. ; Ha ! si, ya caigo ! que
estamos en tiempo de. . . . Doy a V. felices pascuas.

16. Dale, dale, si no es eso, yo hablo del dinero que preste a
V. hace mas de un ano.— jHa! Senor D. Alejandro, no crea V.
que yo lo hay a echado en saco roto.

17. Pues bien ; i por que no me lo da V. ? \ Por que ! hombre,
ahora ha dado V. en la dificultad, y esta es que yo no tengo
dinero, y por consiguiente no puedo darlo.

LUSSOJSr LIX, 353

18. Entonces, l que es lo que V. puede dar ? j Oh ! en cuanto
a eso yo puedo dar muchas cosas.

19. i Ha ! me alegro mucho, veamos lo que V. puede dar. — En
primer lugar puedo dar gemidos.

20. i Puf ! {pshaw). — Tambien puedo dar gritos.

21. i Dale ! — Puedo dar, . . . que decir.

22. No lo dudo. — Puedo dar un pesame.

23. i Dios me libre ! — Puedo dar saltos.

24. Vaya acabe V., hombre, acabe Y. — Puedo dar a com-
prender.

25. Si, eso si, demasiado comprendo. — Puedo darme a conocer.
2^. Ya, ya, conozco de que pie cojea V. — Puedo dar una

vuelta. •

27. Pues vuelvase V., por donde ha venido y nunca de V.
mas vueltas por esta casa. — Y todavia mas, puedo dar una carca-
jada.

28. i Juan ! Juan ! echa a ese hombre de casa, y despues echa
la Have y el cerrojo a la puerta. \ Haya picaro I lo he de echar
a un presidio !

29. i Has echado a ese hombre a la calle ? Si, senor, ya lo
puse de patitas en la calle.

30. Y I que dijo ? Primero se echo a reir, yo le amenace que
lo echaria a rodar y entonces echo a correr.

31. El diantre del hombre siempre esta pidiendo dinero pres-
tado y sobre no pagarlo se viene a reir de uno en su barbas. —
Seiior, i manda V. alguna otra cosa ? No, te puedes ir, yo voy a
echarme a dormir, ese bribon me ha dado un gran dolor de*
cabeza.

EXERCISE.

1. Is tiiere anything in the papers this morning relative to
the trial of the murderer of Smith ? I understand that his trial
will not take place before a month from this time.

2. Why did you not bring your friend with you ? He is not
able to walk very far to-day, owing to a pain in his side, which
has troubled him for the last three days.

3. Did you tell the servant to draw the bolt of the door ?
No, but I told him to lock the door.

4. Who is that I hear groaning ? You hear no one groan-
ing ; it is some one shouting in the distance.

5. How did your cousin lose his situation ? He owes that
misfortune entirely to his own carelessness.

25

354

LUSSON LX.

6. Charles, are you not going to say good morning to that
gentleman ? I need not say good morning to him now, for I have
already wished him a happy Easter.

7. Did that merchant pay his correspondent at Malaga after
all ? He did not pay him ; but he gave him a note at three
months.

8. What do you understand by parlor plays (household com-
edies) in Spain ? They are plays represented by private indi-
viduals * sometimes in private houses, from w^hich circumstance
they take their name.

9. Do you know that round-faced little man who is sitting
next to your uncle ? That is one of the principal actors (actor)
in the parlor plays given at Mr. Gutierrez's.

10. What became of the offender ? The evidence not being
sufficient to prove the crime of which he was accused f he w^as let
go ; otherwise he would have been sent to state prison.

11. Did they refuse to give him the things he wanted on
credit ? Of course they did, because no one can rely on him nor
give credit to anything he says.

12. Will that young man probably obtain the employment
for which he has applied ? Most probably he will, because he
has had the good fortune to get into the president's favor.

13. How ! do you not attend your classes this week ? No, I
am not very well ; and so a friend of mine was good enough to
offer to act in my place.

14. Was the error corrected before the letter was dispatched ?
*No, it was not discovered in time to be corrected.

LESSON LX.

Decidir.

Ejecutar.

Ejercer.

Ensuciar.

Enemistar.

Escuchar.

Exagerar.

Exhibir.

To decide.

To execute.

To exercise.

To dirty, to soil.

To put at enmity.

To listen to, to hearken to.

To exaggerate.

To exhibit.

^ Aficionados.

f Acusar.

LESSON LX,

855

Extranar.
Enfriarse.

Encargar.

Exclamar.

Exceptuar.

Esforzar.

Estrechar.

Sospechar.

Tardar.

Atolladero.

Camino.

Astronomo.

Col era.

Cometa.

Cofre.

Cajon.

Capricho.

Cuello.

Car 0:0.

Exterior.

Ext*'anjero.

Embarcadero.

To wonder at, to find strange.
To grow cold, to get (become)

cold.
To commission, to order, to

give charge.
To exclaim.
To except.

To endeavor, to make effort.
To press.
To suspect.
To delav.

Extra.

Extra.

Empero.

But.

Eliptico.

Elliptical.

Agrio.

Sour.

Estrecho.

Close, narrow.

Preciso.

Essential, indispensable, pre-

cise.

Elocuente.

Eloquent.

Tonto

Foolish, stupid.

Travieso.

Mischievous.

Entrambos.

Both.

Entretanto.

In the mean time.

Excepto.

Except.

Difficulty.

Road, way.

Astronomer.

Cholera.

Comet.

Chest.

Drawer, box.

Caprice.

Neck.

Cargo, charge.

Exterior, outside.

Foreigner.

Landing.

Casaca.

Colocacion.

Civilizacion.

Colera.

Corte.

Cometa.

Cita.

Charla.

Claridad.

Compafiia.

Caja.

Cartilla.

Coat, dress-coat

Situation.
Civilization.
Anger.
Court.
Kite.

Appointment.
Chat.
Clearness.
Company. '
Box, case, cash
(commercial).
Primer.

356

LESSON LX.

Espejo.

Mirror, looking-

Calentura

Fever.

glass.

Casualidad.

Chance.

Estrecho.

Strait.

Cantidad.

Quantity,

Elemento.

Element.

Capa.

Cloak.

Gobernador.

Governor.

Cara. )
Haz. \

Face.

Grado.

Grade, degree.

Horno.

Oven.

Carga.

Charge (of a gun,

Luto.

Mourning.

&c.).

Litro.

Litre.*

Cuchara.

Spoon.

Matematico.

Mathematician.

Culpa.

Fault, blame.

Tonel.

Cask.

Criatura.

Creature, infant.

Termometro.

Thermometer.

Costa.

Cost, coast.

Ferrocarrii.

Railroad.

Disculpa.

Apology.

Fruto.

Fruit (result).

Estacion.

Season, station.

Fondo.

Bottom.

Existencia.

Existence.

Fluido.

Fluid.

Fragata.

Frigate.

■

Mascara.

Mask.

Tontera.

Foolish action.

Pretension.

Pretension,
claim.

Hierba.

Grass.

COMPO

SITION.

Hoy entra la primavera.

Spring begins

to-day.

Manana entra

el mes de Octubre.

The month of October commences

to-morrow.

Entra en el niimero de los sabios.

He is of the number of the learned.

Entro a reinar a los quince anos.

He began to reign at fifteen years

of age.

Este tonel hace cien litros.

This cask holds 100 litres.

No le hago tan tonto.

I do not take him for such a fool.

Yo le hacia raas rico.

I took him to be richer.

Haz por venir.

Try to come.

Hace de gobernador.

He is acting as

governor.

Esa pobre rauchacha esta haciendo

That poor girl i

s acting the part of a

de madre a sus hermanos.

mother to her brothers and sisters.

A eso voy.

That is the point I am coming to.

Voy de paseo.

I am going for

pleasure.

Van de mascara.

They are going in masks.

Va de luto.

He is in mourning.

♦ Equal to 1.056 American quarts.

LESSOJSr LX.

357

Le va en ello la vida.

Vengo en ello.

^ Cuanto me lleva V. por esto *?

Estos dos amigos se llevan muy

bien.
No nos llevamos bien.
Este camino lleva a Madrid.
Le llevo dos anos y medio.

Me lleve chasco. ^

Lleva una casaca a la francesa.

Se hizo a la vela.

Manda que nos traigan el almuerzo.

Hare que nos lo traigan.

i Hace V. tenir su vestido de azul ?

No, senor, lo he mandado tefiir de

verde.
Saldra buen matematico.

Salio muy travieso.

Ya he salido de todos mis granos.
Me salio una buena colocacion.
Este negocio me ha salido bien.

Le salio mal su empresa.

Este nino ha salido a su padre.

Salio de la regla.

Pronto saldre de hijo de familia.

Esta capa me sale en cincuenta

pesos.
Se salio con su pretension.
Sirve al rey.
No sirve para nada.
Sirvase V. admitir mis disculpas.
^il tarda mucho en decidir.
; Cuanto tarda en responder !
; Adios ! Volvere a ver a V., y le

volvere a hablar de eso.
Este vino se vuelve agrio.
Se volvera bueno con el tierapo.
Este melon sabe a melocoton.

His life is at stake.

I agree to that.

How much will you charge me for

this?
These two friends agree Vrjry well

together.
We do not agree well together.
This road leads to Madrid.
I am two years and a hall older

than he.
I was disappointed.
He wears a coat made in the French

fashion.
He set sail.

Order the breakfast to be served.
I shall have it brought to us.
Are you getting your dress dyed

blue?
No, sir, I have ordered it dyed green.
He will turn out (to be) a good

mathematician.
He (or she — the child) turned out

very naughty.
I have gotten rid of all my grain.
A good situation turned up for me.
This business has turned out well

for me.
His undertaking turned out badly.
This child resembles his father.
He departed from the rule.
I shall soon be of age.
This cloak cost me fifty dollars.

He obtained what he desired.

He serves the king.

It is good for nothing.

Please accept my apology.

He is slow in deciding.

How long he is in answering !

Good-by ! I shall see you again, and

talk more to you on the subject.
This wine is turning sour.
It will become good again in time.
This melon has the taste of a peach.

358 Li:ssoN LX.

Este vino haele a vinagre.

D. Juan hace un gran papel en la

corte.
Napoleon III. hace un gran papel en

la politica del mundo.

This wine smells of vinegar.
John makes a great noise at court.

Napoleon III. plays a great part in
the politics of the world.

EXPLANATION.

283. In the Composition of this lesson we give the prin-
cipal idioms with the verbs eiitrar^ to go (or come) in ; hacer^
to do, to make ; iV, to go ; llevar^ to*take, to charge ; mandar^
Jiacer^ in the sense of to order, to cause to be done ; oler a, to
smell of ; and saher a, to taste of ; salir^ servir, tardar and
volver,

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Cuando antra la primavera ? Debo conf esar f rancamente
que no se el dia precise en que entra y sale cada estacion.

2. Entonces V. no entra en el numero de los sabios, puesto
que no sabe cuando estamos en invierno y cuando en verano. —
Poco a poco, senor Don Pedro, eso seria hacerme entrar en el
numero de los idiotas.

3. I Pues no acaba V. de decirlo ? Yo acabo de deeir que no
se el dia precise en que entra cada estacion ; pero cuando veo
crecer la hierba y las hojas de los arboles, y abrirse las flores,
sospecho que estamos en la primavera.

4. I Ha ! V. sospecha ! Vamos, ya es algo. — Si, seiior, y del
mismo modo, cuando veo el termometro en la sombra, que marca
98°, creo adivinar que estoy, una de dos, 6 en un horno 6 en
Nueva York en la estacion del verano.

5. Vamos, yo le hacia a V. mas ignorante de lo que en efecto
es ; e y como adivina Y., 6 sospecha, que se encuentra Y. en el
otofio ? Cuando los melocotones se acaban y las hojas caen.

6. i Bien ! bien ! ^ y el invierno ? Cuando por la manana no
puedo lavarme por hallar que se ha helado el agua en la pa-
langana.

7. Ya veo que es Y. un sabio perfecto. Yeamos en historia
I a que edad entro a reiijar el Rey Pepino ? — ; Caspita ! Seiior
Don Pedro ! es mas facil criticar que ejecutar, y mas facil hacer
preguntas que responderlas, y si no, respond ame Y. que la echa
de sabio.

Lj^'SSOJ^ LX, 359

8. I Cuantos litres hace ese tonel ? i Hombre ! yo i que he de
entender de medir toneles ?

9. Pues cambiare de materia, l quien hace de gobernador en
Manila ? j Y a mi que me im porta !

10. i Vaya ! ese es un buen modo de salir del atolladero. — No,
senor, sirvase V. recibir mis disculpas, tengo que irme ahora,
pero volvere a ver a V., y volveremos a tratar de esa materia.
Adios, senores.

11. I Que le parece a V., Don Enrique, de ese caballero ? Me
parece que este joven saldra buen matematico, porque ha salido
en todo a su padre.

12. I Sabe V. si salio bien 6 mal de su empresa ? Es un nego-
cio que le ha salido muy bien.

13. I Se lleva bien Luisa con sus hermanos ? Si, seiior, y aun-
que no les lleva mas de tres 6 cuatro afios, les sirve de madre.

14. I Cuanto le cuesta a V. esa capa ? Me sale en unos cin-
cuenta pesos.

15. I Cuanto tardara la fragata en hacerse a. la vela ? No se,
creo que el capitan es hombre que tarda eti decidirse.

16. I De que color hace V. tenir su vestido ? Lo mande tefdr
de amarillo.

17. Don Manuel, mande V. que nos suban el almuerzo. — Hare
que nos lo traigan.

EXERCISE.

1. When does Spring begin ? It begins in March and ends
in May.

2. Has your young friend passed his examination yet ? The
examinations have not taken place ; but when thev do, he will
prove to be the best Spanish student in the country.

3. In what month does the cold weather generally commence
in the north of Spain ? Winter usually sets in about the middle
of November.

4. How much does this cask hold ? It holds from 100 to 120
litres.

5. How soon do you set out for Europe ? As soon as the fine
weather begins.

6. Are you going on business, or for pleasure ? For pleasure
only.

7. How are they going to the ball ? They are going in masks.

8. How much did your tailor charge you for that coat ? It
cost me forty-five dollars.

360

LESSON LXL

9. What do you take to be my cousin's age ? I should take
him to be about the same age as his friend.

10. You had better guess again. I give it up.

11. How old is he, then ? He is two years and four months
older than his friend.

12. Do you know whether the pianist's brother succeeded in
obtaining the position he applied for ? He did not ; but an ex-
cellent situation turned up for him a short time after.

13. How long will it take for you to dye this dress for me ?
About a week.

14 What color do you wish it to be dyed ? I wish to have it
dyed blue.

15. Do you think this boy will turn out to be as good a musi-
cian as his father ? I have not the least doubt of it, for he resem-
bles him in every respect {en todo).

16. Have the goodness to accept my apology for not coming
yesterday as I had promised. Certainly, sir ; I know very well
that you have a great deal of business to arrange.

17. For whom is Mr. Terrero in mourning ? For his uncle,
who died about a year ago in Manila.

LESSON LXI.

Felicitar.

Fiar.

Ignorar.

Lastimar.

Improvisar.

Inquietar.

Intentar.

Interrogar.

Invertir.

Interesar.

Invitar.

Imprimir.

Obligar.

Rehusar.

Lisonjear.

Llevar.

To felicitate, to congratulate.

To trust.

To be ignorant of, unaware of.

To hurt, to wound.

To improvise, to do (anything)
offhand.

To make uneasy, to cause anxi-
ety.

To attempt, to intend.

To interrogate, to question.

To invert, to invest.

To interest, to be of interest.

To invite.

To print.

To force, to oblige.

To refuse.

To flatter.

To carry, to take, to charge.

LESSO

N LXL

361

Descuidado.

Careless.

Final.

Final.

Ignorante.

Ignorant.

Impersonal.

Impersonal.

Increible.

Incredible.

Indefinido.

Indefinite.

Inexplicable.

Inexplicable.

Ingenioso.

Ingenious.

Inmediato.

Immediate, close by, next.

Inquieto.

Uneasy, restless.

Justo.

Just, right.

Ultimo.

Last.

Lisonjero.

Flattering.

Especiero.

Spicer, grocer.

Loco.

Mad.

Lento.

Slow.

Solemne.

Solemn, cruel.

De Zeca en Meca.

To and fro.

A ciegas.

With one's eyes shut.

A gatas.

On all-fours.

En el interin.

In the mean time.

Ampo de la nie- W hiteness of

Anchuras (f.pl.)

. Ease.

ve. snow.

Cuba.

Cask, toper,

Asno. Ass.

drunkard.

Descuido. Carelessness.

Cara.

Face.

Hueso. Bone.

Cartilla.

Primer.

Golpe. Blow, stroke.

Calabaza.

Pumpkin, re-

Dares y tomares. Dispute.

fusal.

Indice. Index.

Imaginacion

Imagination.

Ingenio. Genius.

Intencion.

Intention.

Insecto. Insect.

Interrogacion.

Interroga-

Instinto. Instinct.

tion.

Instrumento. Instrument.

Inversion.

Inversion.

Interrogante. Question, note

Justicia.

Justice.

of interro-

Llave.

Key.

gation.

Lluvia.

Pain.

Italiano. Italian.

Lista.

List.

Arco iris. Rainbow.

Lisonja.

Flattery.

Galicismo. Gallicism.

Luna.

Moon.

362

LESSON LXL

Hierro.

Iron.

Luz.

Ligbt.

Juego.

Play.

Latitud.

Latitude.

Loco.

Madman.

Longitud.

Longitude.

Lugar.

Place.

Legua.

League.

Latin.

Latin.

Letra.

Letter.

Sonido. 1

?\CY11T\{\

Limosna.

Alms.

Son. >

VJKJ\XLl.\Xm

Limpieza.

Cleanness.

Pico.

Beak.

Lmea.

Line.

Levita

Levite.

Levita.

Frock-coat.

Uso.

Use. custom.

Rama.

Brancb.

Objeto.

Object.

Teja.

Tile.

Oido

Ear, bearing.

Ocasion.

Occasion.

Olfato.

Smell.

COMPO

Vergiienza.
SITION.

Sbame.

A mas tardax.

A media palabra.

A medida de sus deseos.

A sus anchuras.

Al descuido y con cuidado.

Abrir el ojo.

Alia se las haya.

Andar a ciegas.

Andar a gatas.

A todo coirer.

Vaya V. eon Dios.

fil va de capa caida.

£l va de Zeca en Meca.

Ir de puntillas.

Andar en dares y tomares.

Andarse per las ramas.

De t€jas aba jo.

Asir la ocasion por los cabellos.

Bailar al son que se toca.

Beber los aires or los vientos.

Beber como una cuba.

Blanco como el ampo de la nieve.

Bocado sin hueso.

Burla burlando.
Buscar cinco pies al gato.
Xo caber de gozo.
No caber en si.

At latest.

At the slightest hint.

According to one's wishes.

At one's ease.

Studiously careless.

To be upon the alert.

Let him look to that.

To grope in the dark.

To creep on all-fours.

With all speed.

Go in peace.

He is crestfallen.

He goes roving about, to and fro.

To go on tiptoe.

To quarrel.

Not to come to the point.

Humanly speaking.

To take time by the forelock.

To go with the stream.

To desire anxiously.

To drink like a fish.

White as'the driven snow.

An employment without labor ; a

sinecure.
Between joke and earnest.
To pick a quarrel.
To be overjoyed.
To be bursting with pride.

LESSON LXL

363

No cabe en el.

Caer de su asno.

Caersele a uno la cara de vergiienza.

Callar el pico.

Chanzas aparte.

Con mil amores.

Con su pan se lo coma,

Conque, hasta la vista.

Cosa que no esta en la cartilla.

Dar a alguno con las puertas en la

cara.
Dar i luz.

Dar por supuesto, or por sentado.
Dar chasco.
Dar el si.
Dar golpe una cosa.

Dar calabazas.
No se le da nada.

He is not capable of such a thing.

To acknowledge one's fault.

To blush with shame.

To hold one's tongue.

Jesting aside.

Most willingly.

That is his own business.

I hope we may soon meet again.

Something out of the common way.

To shut the door in one's face.

To publish : to give birth to.

To take for granted.

To disappoint.

To consent.

To strike one with admiration, or

astonishment (said of things).
To give the mitten.
He cares nothing about it.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. i Le salen a V. las cosas a medida de sus deseos ? Chan-
zas aparte, Don Juan, V. sabe bien que de tejas abajo eso nunca
sucede.

2. Si, pero como V. baila al son que se toca y sabe asir la
ocasion por los cabellos, siempre esta a sus anchuras y tiene
siempre al^n bocado sin hueso. — Ami go, caiga V. de su asno y
confiese de buena fe que si anda de capa caida, es porque va
siempre de Zeca en Meca, y porque bebe mas que una cuba.

3. Adios, Don Pedro, me voy, porque no quiero buscar cinco
pies al gato. — Yaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.

4. Don Pedro, me parece que V. ha dado con la puerta en la
cara a Don Juan. — No, seiior, Don Enrique, a otro se le caeria la
cara de vergiienza, pero a el no se le da nada, y pronto lo volvera
V. a ver por aca.

5. Entonces el no entiende a media palabra. — A mas tardar
lo vera Y. aqui otra vez dentro de media bora.

6. El pobre hombre anda a ciegas, y si no abre el ojo, ira a
parar a un hospital. — Con su pan se lo coma, y alia se las hay a ;
yo lo siento solamente por su nina, que es una seiiorita perfecta.

7. Me ban dicbo que V. queria casarse con ella, i es verdad,
Don Enrique ? — Si, seiior, y lo hubiera hecho con mil amores,
porque ademas de ser muy amable e instruida, es muy bonita,

364 LFSSO^'' LXL

tiene ojos negros muy hermosos j es tan blanca como el ampo
de la nieve.

8. Pues I por que no se caso V. con ella ? Por una pequena
dificultad.

9. Quiza V. se andaria por las ramas y no sabria asir la oca-
sion por los cabellos. — No, senor, nada de eso, antes al eontrario
yo lo daba todo por supuesto, porque V. sabe que soy rico, y crei
que la niiia me daria el si sin hacerse de rogar.

10. I Pues que, no se lo dio ? No, senor, no me dio el si, pero
me dio calabazas.

11. i Miren la rapazuela I e y V. que hizo ? Yo que bebia los
vientos por ella, y creia que siis calabazas eran cosa que no es-
taban en la cartilla, recurri a su padre, creyendo que el no me
negaria la mano de su hija.

12. I Y bien y que ? Que me lleve un solemne chasco, el
padre me rehuso la mano de su hija ni mas ni menos que ella lo
habia hecho.

13. i Pero que razon le dio a V. para ello ? Me dijo que su
hija, aunque pobre, era hija de un caballero y que ni ella querria
ni el la obligaria jamas a casarse con un especiero comun e igno-
rante ; que el dinero era una gran cosa, pero que no lo compraba
todo.

14. I Y V. que dijo ? Yo, por no andar en dares y tomares y
dimes y diretes, me calle el pico y sail de su casa a todo correr.

EXERCISE.

1. Would you not be more likely to obtain what you wish,
if you came to the point at once ? Perhaps I should ; but the
matter is an important one, and I considered it necessary to
enter into some explanation concerning it.

2. Do you think he would understand me ? Of course h©
would, at the slightest hint.

3. How did your cousin Charles succeed in that affair ?
Everything turned out according to his wishes.

4. How soon do you suppose this book will be published ? I
hope it will be published in a very short time ; I know they are
working at it with all possible speed.

5. Have you ever seen a more active man than that mer-
chant ? Never ; and I have never seen a less active man than
his brother ; he always floats with the stream, and troubles him-
self about nothing.

LUSSOJS- LXL 365

6. Ought you not to have shown that letter to your brother ?
I should have done so, of course, but I took for granted that he
had already heard the news.

7. You had better tell your friend to look out, and not get
into a quarrel with that man. That is his own business ; let him
look to it himself.

8. Is it possible that he could be capable of such an action ?
Yes, but the worst of all is, that he is not ashamed to acknowl-
edge it to every one he meets.

9. When is Peter to be married ? I cannot say certainly ; but
I suppose in about a month at the latest.

10. I don't know any one who has a better position than your
uncle ; plenty of money and scarcely anything to do. That is a
fact, his position is a real sinecure.

11. What has occurred to that gentleman ? he looks quite
crestfallen. Do not be astonished at that; he has been unfor-
tunate in business, and has lost almost all he possessed in the
world.

12. Are you trying to pick a quarrel with me ? No, I
assure you, jesting aside, that the matter stands exactly as
I say.

13. How was he received by the lady's father ? He was not
received at all, they shut the door in his face.

14. If you desire so anxiouly to see him, why do you not go
to his house ? I cannot make up my mind (decidirme) to do
that ; you know he is bursting with pride, and he would very
probably refuse to receive me.

15. Well, I hope we may soon meet again ; present my re-
spects to your family. With the greatest pleasure. — Please not
to forget the letter.

16. I care nothing about that; all I desire to know is if
he will be here in time. I think you may rely on his being
punctual.

17. I have been told that your brother was about to be mar-
ried to Miss Ramirez ; is it true ? I really cannot say how the
matter will turn out ; so far everything seems to be going ac-
cording to the desire of both parties.

366

LESSON LXIL

lesso:n^ lxii.

Aplicar.

Cebarse.

Echar a perder.

Errar.

Ocurrir.

Murmurar.

Madrugar.

Medir.

Montar.

Mudar.

Nacer.

Sazonar.
Reunirse.

Modificar.

To apply.

To feed, to gloat.

To spoil.

To err, to miss.

To occur.

To murmur, to grumble.

To rise early.

To measure.

To mount, to amount.

To change, to move.

To be born, to spring up, to

proceed.
To season, to ripen.
To unite, to collect together, to

assemble.
To modify.

Desprevenido.

Unawares, unprepared.

Intachable.

Unimpeachable, unquestion-

able.

Maldito.

Perverse, confounded.

Mayuscula.

Capital (letter).

Miniiscula.

Small (letter).

Numeral.

Numeral.

Noble.

Noble.

Nominativo.

Nominative.

Neutro.

Neuter.

Masculino.

Masculine.

Objetivo.

Objective.

Quieto.

Quiet, at rest.

Cumpleafios. Birthday.

Menoscabo. Detriment, lessen-
ing.

Pique. Point, verge.

Rayo. Thunderbolt.

Socio. Associate, partner.

Sabor. Taste, savor.

Menudo. Change, small

change.

Apariencia.

Bravata.

Botica.

Fiesta.

Centella.

Siesta.

Suerte.

Appearance.
Bravado.
Drug store.
Feast, holiday.
Spark, flash.
Siesta (afternoon

nap).
Luck, fortune,

chance.

LESSON LXIL

367

Meridiano.

Meridian.

Murmuracion.

Murmurings.

Metal.

Metal.

Malicia.

Malice.

Miembro.

Member.

Mente.

Mind.

Mineral.

Mineral.

Muestra.

Sample, sign.

Momento.

Moment.

Manera.

Manner.

Mozo.

Youth, waiter.

Manteca, or man- Butter.

Macho.

Male.

tequilla.

Maestro.

Master, teacher.

Medida.

Measure.

Manuserito.

Manuscript.

011a podrida.

Sort of mixed

Mar.

Sea.

dish.

Olor.

Smell, odor.

Ostra.

Oyster.

Olivar.

Olive ground.

Negacion.

Negation.

Ostion. (See

Oyster.

Mar.

Sea.

Ostra.)

Negativa.

Negative.

Palo.

Wood, stick.

Nota.

Note.

Polvo.

Dust, powder.

Zaga.

Rear-guard.

Pano.

Cloth.

Parabien.

Felicitation, con-
gratulation.

COMPO

3ITI0N.

De buenas a primeras.

Without ceremony.

De bueaa fe.

In good faith.

De mala fe.

Deceitfully.

De intento.

On purpose.

De oidas.

From hearsay.

Decir por decir

To talk for the sake of talking.

Dejar a uno colgado.

To frustrate one's

hopes.

Dejar a uno en

la calle.

To strip one of his all.

Dejar atras los vientos.

To go quicker than the wind.

Dejar correr.

To go with the world.

Dejar el campo

libre.

To yield to one's competitors.

Dejar en blancc

).

To leave blank.

Dejarse algiina cosa en el tintero.

To forget to say something.

Dia de cumpleanos.

Birthday.

Saber algo de buena tinta.

To know anything on good au-

thority.

De dia en dia.

From day to day.

De un dia para

otro.

From one day to another.

De hoy en ocho dias.

This day week.

Un dia si y otro no.

Every other day.

Hoy dia.

Now-a-days.

Dicho y hecho.

No sooner said than done.

368

LESSON LXIL

Dormir a pierna suelta.

Dormir la siesta.

Echar a perder algo.

Echar bravatas.

Echar rayos y centellas.

Echar la culpa a alguno.

Echar su'ertes.

Empenarse en hacer algo.

Empenarse por alguno.

En un abrir y cerrar de ojos.

Encenderse en colera.

Errar el tiro.

Erre que erre.

Escarmentar en cabeza agena.

Estar a pique de perderse.

Estar de casa.

Estar de fiesta.

Estar en ascuas.

Estar en lo que se dice.

Estar a sus anchuras.

Estar sobre si.

Estar desprevenido.

Estar mano sobre mano.

I Estas en tus cinco sentidos ?

To sleep at one's ease.
To take an afternoon nap.
To spoil anything.
To brag, to boast.
To be furious, enraged.
To throw the blame on any one.
To cast lots.

To insist upon doing anything.
To interest one's self for any one.
In the twinkling of an eye, in a trice.
To fly into a passion.
To miss one's aim.
Obstinately.

To take warning by others' misfor-
tunes.
To be within an ace of being lost.
To be in dishabille.
To be merry.
To be upon thorns.
To comprehend what is said.
To be at one's ease.
To be on one's guard.
To be off one's guard.
To be idle.
Are you in your senses ?

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. Senores, dejen Vds. el campo libre, que aqui viene Don
Pepito echando bravatas y rayos y centellas. — Bien venido, Don
Pepito, I que trae V. de nuevo, que parece estar fuera de si ?

2. No, seiior, yo estoy en mis cinco sentidos, pero hay gentes
de mala fe que hablan por hablar y se ocupan de criticar al pro-
jimo. — I Y eso a que viene ?

3. Yo no lo dig^o por V., Don Enrique, pero V. sabe que hay
muchos desocupados que se vienen a su botica de V. y critican a
todo el mundo. — ; Vamos, vamos ! Don Pepito, que a V. tambien
le gusta un poquito la murmuracion.

4. Ciertamente, porque si no e Que seria de la conversacion
sin un poquito de critica que la sazone y le de interes ? Muy
bien, pero entonces no eche V. la culpa a nadie de hacer lo mis-
mo que V. hace.

5. Si, pero yo hablo sin malicia, de buena fe y dig*© lo que
me ocurre por decirlo, nada mas. — Asi pueden decir los demas.

LESSON LXIL 369

6. Si, pero yo no soy como Don Carlos, que viene aqui de
dia en dia, y de la manana a la tarde hablando mas que un saca-
muelas y sin dejar a nadie hueso sano. — Si, pues apliquese Y. el
cuento.

7. No, senor, yo no soy ni tan hablador ni tan murmurador
como ninguno de los que se reunen aqui, y si no, observe V. un
poquito a cada uno de ellos, Don Gonzalo, por ejemplo, i ha ve-
nido hoy ? No, senor, no ha venido, ni vendra, porque es el dia
de su eumpleanos y lo celebra con su familia en el campo, por
consiguiente puede V. cebarse en el a su sabor.

8. Don Gonzalo es hombre de buenos sentimientos y hombre
honrado, no haya miedo que yo diga nada en menoscabo suyo,
pero tiene un maldito genio que le hace echar a perder toda con-
versacion.

9. Pues yo no habia observado eso. — i Como hombre ! pues si
viene aqui un dia si y otro no, a criticar a los que se reunen en la
botica de la esquina, y los dias que no viene aqui va a la botica
de la esquina a criticarnos a nosotros.

10. i Y que es lo que le hace echar a perder las conversaciones
como decia V. pocos minutos ha ? Que en un abrir y cerrar de
ojos se enciende en colera.

11. Bien, por Don Gonzalo, l y nuestro vecino, Don Alberto,
ese si que es intachable, no le parece a V. ? j Ho ! en efecto, es un
excelente hombre, lastima que errase el tiro.

12. I Que quiere V. decir con eso de errar el tiro ? Hablo con
respecto a sus negocios.

13. Y bien i que le sucedio ? Que escogio malos socios, y le

han dejado en la calle.

14. Pero eso no puede ser ; Don Alberto goza de muy buena
reputacion, V. habla de oidas.— No, senor, que lo se de buena tin-
ta, y hoy dia esta a pique de perderse.

15. Pues el parece dormir a pierna suelta. — Esta obligado a
hacerlo asi por guard ar las apariencias.

16. e No se ha dejado V. algo en el tintero ? Sin duda que me
he dejado, pero es tarde y voy a dormir la siesta.

EXERCISE.

1. Is the custom of taking an afternoon nap as common in
Spain now-a-days as in former times ? It is quite as common
now-a-days as it ever was, not only in Spain, but in almost every
country of Europe.
26

870 LESSON LXIL

2. Are you perfectly certain that he acted with sincerity in
that matter ? I am quite sure, as I know it on good authority.

3. Who told you that young man had acted deceitfully to-
ward your cousin ? I do not care to say much in the matter,
especially as all I know respecting it I only know from hearsay.

4. Can you tell me how that merchant's enterprise turned
out ? Very badly ; for shortly after he had engaged in it, he
heard of his brother's misfortune, which frustrated all his hopes.

5. Did Alexander manage to pay his debts after all ? No,
he did not; and although his intentions were strictly honor-
able, his creditors {acreedores) would wait no longer, and they
stripped him of all he possessed in the world.

6. What date do you wish me to put here ? Just leave a
blank, and Charles will put in the date before he sends off the
letter.

7. When do you think they will be able to give me some of
the papers ? Probably by this day week.

8. What did he say when he saw how the tailor had spoiled
his coat ? Fortunately for the latter he was in a merry mood,
and did not fly into a passion as he usually does when anything
occurs to displease him.

9. Are you in your senses, my dear friend ? are you not aware
that such a thing is impossible ?

10. Did he shut the door on purpose ? Yes, but he sent his
servant to take us into another room, for he was in dishabille, and
did not wish to be seen until he had dressed.

11. How often do you go to dine at your uncle's ? I generally
go every other day.

12. Have your friends returned yet from the country ? No,
they have been putting it off * from day to day for some time,
and I shall not be in the least astonished if they do not return
before November.

13. Why did you not bring your sister with you ? I did all I
possibly could to persuade her to come, but she insisted on stay-
ing at home.

14. How did they decide who should go first ? They cast
lots for it.

* Fosponer,

LESSON LXIIL

371

LESSON LXIII.

Eetirar.

Pegar.

Pescar.

Posponer.

Preceder.

Prometer.

Pazonar.

Resfriarse,

Regalar.

En frente.

Frente por frente.

De hito en hito.

De grado.

Por fas 6 por nefas.

J

Alarde.

Bulto.

Ganso.

To retire, to withdraw.

To stick, to adhere, to beat.

To fish.

To postpone.

To precede.

To promise.

To reason.

To take cold.

To regale, to present.

In front, opposite.

Fixedly, with open eyes.
By fair means.
Justly or unjustly.

i Cascaras !

Dear me ! Oh 1

Afortunado.

Fortunate.

Ageno.

Foreign, belonging to others.

Formal.

Formal, steady, respectable.

Pasivo.

Passive.

Perezoso.

Lazy.

Personal.

Personal.

Posesivo.

Possessive.

Potencial.

Potential.

Preciso.

Precise, necessary, obligatory.

Prelimina^.

Preliminary.

Preterito.

Preterit.

Puntual.

Punctual.

Partitivo.

Partitive.

Radical.

Radical.

Paro.

Rare, curious.

ReciprocOo

Reciprocal.

Reflexive.

Reflective.

Rubio.

Fair (of the hair and complex-

ion).

Ruin.

Mean.

Boast.

Bulk, bundle.

Goose.

Bulla.
Baza.

Noise, uproar.
Trick (card-
playing).

372

LESSON LXIIL

Bledo.

Straw.

Huespeda.

Hostess.

Diente.

Tooth.

Puntuacion.

Punctuation.

Desafio.

Challenge, duel.

Puntualidad.

Punctuality.

Espadachin.

Bully.

Paciencia.

Patience.

Estribo.

Stirrup.

Raja.

Straw.

Mequetrefe

Trifling fellow,

Polvora.

Gunpowder.

meddler.

Perseverancia.

Perseverance.

Pasaje.

Passage.

Porcion.

Portion, num-

Pedazo.

Piece.

ber.

Perro.

Dog.

Prenda.

Good quality,

Plazo.

Term.

jewel.

Plomo.

Lead.

Pronunciacion

Pronunciation.

Por que

Reason why.

Propiedad.

Propriety,

Publico.

Public.

property.

Principio.

Principle, begin-

Pulgada.

Inch.

ning.

Raiz.

Root.

Rasgo.

Trait.

Rebanada.

Slice.

Recado.

Message, errand.

Reforma.

Reform, refor-

Recibo.

Receipt.

mation.

Rector.

Rector, director.

Regla.

Rule.

Refran.

Proverb.

Reina.

Queen.

Relampago.

Flash of light-

Repeticion.

Repetition, re-

ning.

hearsal.

Relojero.

Watchmaker.

Resolucion.

Resolution.

Regalo.

Present.

Rosa.

Rose.

Reposo.

Rest, repose.

Rutina.

Routine.

Resfriado.

Cold.

Suma.

Sum.

Reumatismo.

Rheumatism.

Sutileza.

Subtilty, fine-

Reves.

Wrong side,

ness.

back.

Salida.

Departure.

Rincon.

Corner.

Silaba.

Syllable.

Ruisenor.

Nightingale.

Soledad.

Solitude.

Sustancia.

Substance.

,

Subida.
Sueerra.

Rising ground,

going up.
Mother-in-law.

Faltar d su palabra.
Guardarse de algana cosa.

COMPOSITION.

To break one's word.
To take care not to do a thing (not
to attempt to do a thing).

LESSON LXIIL

373

Hablar a bulto.

Hablar a tontas y a locas.

Hablar al aire.

Hablar al oido.

Hablar al alma.

Hablar entre dientes.

Hablar por boca de ganso.

Hacer a uno perder los estribos.

Hacer de las suyas. ^ H^'n*^. v (*

Hacer alarde de.

Hacer la cuenta sin la huespeda.

Hacer caso de.

Haberla {or haberselas) con alguno.

Irse de la memoria.

f rsele a uno la cabeza.

Van cien duros a que es cierto.

Llevar a raal.

Mai de su grado.

Mai que le pese.

Manos a la obra.

Meter bulla.

Meterse a caballero.

Meterse a sabio.

Meterse con alguno.

Meterse en camisa de once varas.

Meterse en todo.

Meterse en vidas agenas.

Mirar de hito en hito.

Mostrar las suelas de los zapatos.

Nacer de pies.

Nada se me da de ello.

No dejar meter baza.

No cabe mas.

No estar para fiestas.

No le pesa de haber nacido.

No se me da un bledo.

No tener arte ni parte en alguna

cosa.
Perder cuidado.
Por ce 6 por be.
Por fas 6 nefas.
No llegara la sangre al rio.

To speak at random.

To speak without rhyme or reason.

To talk vaguely.

To whisper into one's ear.

To speak one's mind.

To mutter.

To echo what another has said.

To make one lose his temper.

To show off one's tricks.

To boast of.

To reckon without the host.

To pay attention (or respect) to.

To dispute (or contend) with any one.

To escape one's memory.

To lose one's reason.

I wager a hundred dollars that it is
true.

To take anything amiss.

Unwillingly.

In spite of him.

To set about a work.

To make a noise, a bustle.

To assume the fine gentleman.

To affect learning and knowledge.

To pick a quarrel with any one.

To interfere in other people's busi-
ness.

To meddle in everything.

To dive into other people's affairs.

To look steadfastly at.

To take to one's heels.

To be born to good luck.

I care nothing about it.

Not to allow one to slip in a word.

Nothing more can be desired.

To be out of temper.

He has no mean opinion of himself.

I do not care a straw.

To have no hand in anything.

Not to fear, to make one's self easy.

Some way or other.

Right or wrong.

There is nothing to be feared.

374 LESSON l.XIIL

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. D. Pepito ha faltado a su palabra, 6 i cree V. que vendra
todavia ? i Que ha de venir ! Si el habla siempre a tontas y
a locas.

2. Pues yo crei que prometio formalmente venir hoy. — Don
Pepito no habla nunca formalmente.

3. I De que manera habla entonces ? De muchas, el habla al
aire, a bulto, al oido, entre dientes, por boca de ganso ; pero
nunca habla al alma.

4. Esto hara perder a cualquiera los estribos. — A esto le llama
el, haciendo alarde, hacer de las suyas.

5. Si ; pero el se las habra conmigo, porque ha hecho la cuenta
sin la huespeda. — D. Luis, no haga V. caso, es un mequetrefe, si
Vds. quieren yo ire a su casa y le hare venir mal de su grado, 6
mejor dicho, mal que le pese.

6. No, senor, no vaya V., es un hombre que se mete en todo.
— Y en eso tiene V. razon, porque el se mete con todo el mundo.

7. Y hasta se mete a sabio y a caballero. — Lo peor es que
mete mucha bulla.

8. Vamos, senores, i en que mas se mete el pobre D. Pepito ?
Se mete en camisa de once varas, en vidas agenas, &c.

9. Pero, seiiores, no olviden Vds. que si por ce 6 por be,
lo llegase a saber, D. Pepito, y por fas 6 por nefas hubiese un
desafio, no lo olviden Vds., vuelvo a repetir que D. Pepito es un
gran espadachin. i Vaya ! pierda V. cuidado, que no llegara la
sangre al rio.

10. I Don Pepito espadachin ! i Cascaras ! — Van cien pesos a
que si le miro de hito en hito, muestra las suelas de los zapatos.

11. V. no debe llevarlo a mal, aunque Don Pepito sea tan su
amigo ; pero es muy hablador y no deja a nadie meter baza. — Yo
no tengo arte ni parte en ello y no se me da un bledo.

12. I Se acordo V. de decir aquello a su vecino el Sr. Foster ?
No. seiior, se me fue de la memoria.

13. i Es un joven muy afortunado ? Si, senor, ha nacido de
pies ; pero se que no le pesa de haber nacido.

14. V. no debe criticarlo, porque ahora no esta para fiestas. —
A mi no se me da un bledo de que este 6 no de mal humor.

15. Hable V. bajo 6 hableme V. al oido, porque veo al Senor
Foster alii enf rente y V. debe guardarse de que le oiga hablar de
ese modo, porque lo llevaria a mal. — Pierda V. cuidado que
no llegara^la sangre al rio.

LESSON LXIll. 375

EXERCISE.

1. Does that man always keep his word ? I have never
known him to break his word on a single occasion.

2. Peter is very sorry that Alexander went away without him,
and I do not know what he would have done if John had left him.

3. John took good care not to start at the same time as his
elder brother, for he well knew that he would have been obliged
to show him everything worth seeing in the city.

4. He very often talks for hours together without rhyme or
reason, to the very great annoyance of those who have to listen
to him.

5. Believe me, it is no proof of talent to talk away at random
for an hour at a time, without saying anything that could be
called either new or agreeable.

6. I cannot endure a man who is so ignorant as to come and
whisper something in my ear while I am engaged in conversa-
tion with another.

7. Not one of those ideas is his own, he only echoes what he
has heard said by others.

8. I should advise you to pay no attention to anything he
tells you.

9. Judging by his manner of speaking, one would say that
he had lost his reason.

10. I am willing to wager fifty dollars that not one word of
all you have read and heard on that subject {sobre esa materia)
is true.

11. I suppose you have already heard of my good fortune ?
I have ; and I need not tell you how glad I was to know that you
had succeeded.

12. Did you hear all the president said ? Everything ; he
spoke very loud, so that all those that were present might not
lose a word.

13. Although he affects great learning and knowledge, I have
had occasion to know that he is a very ignorant man.

14. I know very well that he has no mean opinion of himself ;
but, after all, his greatest fault is to dive a little too deeply into
other people's affairs.

376

LESSON LXIV,

LESSON LXIV.

Alumbrar.

Soltar.

Suponer.

Situar.

Significar.

Saludar.

Sobrar.

Sonreirse.

Soplar.

Sonrojarse.

Sufrir.

Suplicar.

Suspirar.

Rasgar.

Hebajar.

Rebanar.

Recitar.

Recomendar.

Referir.

Regular.

Remendar.

Remediar.

Repasar.

Representar.

Resolver.

Zafar.

De gorra.

De perilla.

Cascos a la gineta.
A raya.
A solas.
Siquiera.
En suma.

Santo.
Sutil.

To light, shine.

To loose, to let go.

To suppose.

To situate.

To signify.

To salute, to bow to.

To remain over, to be too

much, too many.
To smile.

To blow, to prompt.
To blush.
. To suffer, to bear.
To supplicate, to beseech.
To sigh, to long after.
To tear.
To lower.
To cut in slices.
To recite.
To recommend.
To refer, to tell, to relate.
To regulate.
To mend.

To remedy, to help.
To look over (a lesson, &c.).
To represent, to lay before.
To resolve.
To disembarrass.

Sponging, at the expense of

others.
To the purpose, at the proper

time.
On one's high horse.
Within bounds, at bay.
All alone.
Even, only.
In a word, in fine.

Holy, saintly.
Subtile, fine.

LESSON LXir.

377

Silencioso. |

Silent.

Sordo.

Deaf.

Sustantivo.

Substantive.

Sucio.

Dirty, filthy.

Atrevimien-

Assurance, dar-

Blanca.

Mite.

to.

ing.

Bula.

Bull (of the

Cuerpo.

Body.

Pope).

Inconve-

Objection.

Flaqueza.

Weakness.

niente.

Grorra.

Cap, lady's

Esfuerzo.

Effort, endeavor.

bonnet.

Descaro.

Barefacedness.

Calzas (fern, pi.)

. Breeches.

Fondos {pi.).

Funds.

Pieza.

Piece.

Matrimonio.

Matrimony.

Trastienda.

Back shop.

Modismo.

Idiom.

Tienda.

Store, shop.

Provecho.

Profit, benefit.

Tijeras.

Scissors.

Yugo.

Yoke.

Tarjeta.

Card (visiting

Trapo.

Rag.

or business).

Saber.

Learning, knowl-

Traza.

Mien, appear-

edge.

ance.

Sacacorchos.

Corkscrew.

Trampa.

Trap, cheat.

Saldo.

Balance.

Traduccion.

Translation.

Salto.

Leap, jump.

COMPO

3ITI0N.

Quedarse en bianco.

To be left in the lurch.

Quedarse hecho una pieza {or he-

To be thunderstruck, to be trans-

lado).

fixed.

Querer decir.

To mean.

Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza.*

To make a virtue of a necessity.

Sacar provecho.

To turn to account.

Sacudir el yugo.

To shake off the yoke.

Salir a luz.

To be produced, to be published.

Salir con algo.

To gain one's end

Salir los colores a la cara.

To blush.

Saiga lo que saliere.

Come what may.

Salirse con la suya.

To have one's own way, to accom-

plish an object.

Santo y bueno

Well and good.

Sin mas aca ni mas alia.

Without ifs and ands.

' Racer de la necesidad virtud.

378

LESSON LX2V.

Sin que ni para que.

En nombrando al ruin de Roma

luego asoma.
Sobre la marcha.
Tan claro como el sol (or como el

agua).
Tener a menos hablar a uno.
Tener a uno a raya.
Tener algo en la punta de la lengua.

Tener buen diente.
Tener bula para todo.

Tener el pie en dos zapatos.
Tener los cascos k la gineta.

Tener su alma en su cuerpo.
Tomar el cielo con las manos.

Tomar la ocasion por lo^ cabellos.

Tomar las (calzas) de Villadiego.

Vamos claros.

Venir a menos.

Venir al caso.

Venir con las manos lavadas.

Venir de perilla.

Venir una cosa pintada.

Verse negro.

Vestirse con veinte y cinco alfileres.

Dicho y hecho.

Vivir de gorra.

Virir a sus anchas (ancburas).

Zafarse de alguna cosa.

Without rhyme or reason.
Speak of the devil, and his imps ap-
pear.
Off-hand (instantly).
As clear as daylight.

Not to deign to speak to one.

To keep one at bay.

To have anything on the tip of one's

tongue.
To have a good appetite.
To have permission to do what one

likes.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To be hare-brained, to have little

judgment.
To do what one thinks proper.
To be transported with rapture, to

be enraged.
To profit by the occasion.
To take to one's heels.
Let us understand one another.
To decline in any way.
To come to the point.
To wish to enjoy the fruit of an-
other's labor.
To come at the nick of time, or to

fit exactly.
A thing to suit (or fit) exactly.
To be afB-icted, embarrassed.
To be dressed in style, to be decked

out.
No sooner said than done.
To live at another's expense.
To live at one's ease.
To get clear (or rid of) anything.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Que quiere decir quedarse en bianco ? Quiere deeir lo
mismo que quedarse a la luna de Valencia, esto es, quedarse sin
nada.

2. I Y quedarse hecho una pieza 6 helado, que quiere decir ?
Bon modismos que indican admiracion 6 sorpresa.

LESSON LXIV. 879

3. I Quiere V. explicarme algunos modismos espanoles ? No
tengo inconveniente, pregiinteme V. el significado de los que no
comprenda V. — Muy bien.

4. Sacar f uerzas de flaqueza, i que quiere decir ? Yo creo que
es haeer esf uerzos ; pero tambien significa, hacer de la necesidad
virtud.

5. Sacar provecho, creo que no necesita explicacion y si la
ocasion se presenta, creo que sabre sacarlo. — i Y que me dice Y,
acerca de sacudir el yugo ? Que aquellos que tengan algiin mal
yugo que sacudir deben hacerlo sobre la marcha.

6. Santo y bueno, pero Y., e no tiene ningiin yugo que sacu-
dir ? No, senor, es verdad que estoy bajo el yugo del matrimo-
nio ; pero no deseo zaf arme de el, porque para mi aunque es yugo,
es un yugo santo que me ha hecho muy feliz y bajo el cual deseo
vivir todavia muchos anos.

7. ^ No le parece a V. que aquel hombre vive d^-gorra ? Si,
senor, aqui se venia todos los dias con sus manos lavadas y se nos
comia un codo.

8. I Y por que no lo echo V. de su casa ? ; Asi lo hice ayer, y si
y. lo hubiera visto ! parecia querer tomar el cielo con las manos j

9. I Yaya un atrevimiento ! Al fin me vi obligado a amena-
zarle con una silla, y entonces tomo las de Villadiego.

10. Creo que antes era rico, pero ahora ha venido a menos. —
No, lo que es tener, todavia tiene.

11. No hombre, si no tiene sobre que caerse muerto. — Perdone
v., si V. quiere que, para practicar en los modismos del verbo
tener, le diga a V. lo que ese buen senor tiene, se lo dire a V.

12. Santo y bueno. — Pues entonces alia va sin que ni para
que.

13. Pero hombre, i para que sacar a la colada los trapos de
ese buen hombre? Si eso es tan claro como el sol que nos
alumbra.

14. Yamos claros, e quiere Y. 6 no que le diga lo que ese senor,
que se viste con veinte y cinco alfileres, tiene ? Pero si no viene
al caso.

15. Entonces se acabara el ejercicio sin poder introducir en la
practica la mitad de los modismos que tenemos en la leccion. —
I Ah ! si, si, tiene Y. mil razones, escucho, i que es lo que ese buen
senor tiene ?

16. En primer lugar tiene buen apetito y buen diente. — I Cas-
pita ! que si lo tiene ! e y a quien se lo cuenta Y. ?

380 LESSON LXIV.

17. Tiene siempre algo en la punta de la lengua y nunca tiene
nada en el bolsillo.

18. Y segiin el descaro con que obra, parece tener bula para
todo ; tambien tiene los cascos a la gineta y con tanto tener creo
que es mas lo que le falta que lo que tiene.

19. Yo no se como tenerlo a raya, i no me hara V. el favor de
aconsejarle que no venga mas por aqui ? Amigo mio, digaselo
V. mismo, porque yo tengo a menos hablar a una persona de su
especie.

20. Y sin embargo, vea V., el tiene el pie en dos zapatos, i y
que mas tiene ?

21. Dejeme V. pensar, \ ah ! si, el pobre senor tiene tod a via
otra cosa mas. — Bien, pues, digala V., que se acaba el ejercicio.

22. Tiene su alma en su cuerpo. Hombre, calle V., que aqui
viene el en persona. — Si, en nombrando al ruin de Roma, luego
asoma.

23. Buenos dias, D. Juan. — Tengalos Y. muy buenos, D. Peri-
qui to, I que se ofrece ? Yengo a pedirle a Y. diez pesos presta-
dos, que me vendrian de peril la, ; porque me veo negro !

24. Hombre pidaselos Y. al Sr. de Y. que esta en fondos, en
cuanto a mi me encuentro sin blanca.

EXERCISE.

1. I understand that your brother was left entirely in the
lurch ? Not at all ; on the contrary, he came out much better
than I did.

2. How did he feel when he learned that I had heard of the
whole matter ? He was thunderstruck, and could not give me
any reply.

3. How are you going to manage in such a case as that ? I
simply have to make a virtue of necessity.

4. I think there is little danger of his not succeeding : what
do you think (what appears to you) ? Not the least ; he is very
prudent, and knows how to turn every thing to account.

5. Do you remember when that article was published ? I
do not remember exactly ; but it seems to me that it must have
been some time in last November.

6. You see that is what I told you the other day would take
place. Yes, that is true; but you seem to have forgotten the
condition I mentioned to your friend as he was going out.

7. Is not Mr. Martinez going to be here, as he promised ? I

LESSON LXV,

381

am expecting him. — We shall wait until seven o'clock ; if he
comes before that time, well and good ; if not, we shall go on
with the business of the evening without him.

8. Well, let us understand each other before going any
farther. It seems to me we understand each other perfectly ;
the thing is as clear as daylight.

9. Oh, Charles ! I am so glad to see you ! you have just
come at the nick of time ; we shall have the pleasure of your
company at dinner. You are very kind ; but really you must
excuse me ; I have a friend waiting for me.

10. You lost your coat ? how did you come home in the cold
without it ? Alexander lent me one of his that fitted me exactly.

11. No sooner said than done ; he took his hat and went out
in search of him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents.

12. You may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall
manage to get rid of him very soon.

13. I wish you would come to the point, for up to the present
I have been unable to find out what you mean.

14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was
(viendolo) decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a
ball instead of to the office.

LESSON LXV.

Aventurarse.

Apretar.

Cobrar.

Desafiar.

Escaldar.

Enhebrar.

Enzarzar.

Enfadarse.

Hilar.

Juntar.

Madrugar.

Prevenir.

Eelucir.

Sustentar.

Trasquilar.

To venture.

To tighten, to urge.

To collect.

To challenge.

To scald.

To thread (a needle), to link.

To sow discord.

To get angry.

To spin.

To join.

To rise early.

To warn, to inform.

To shine.

To sustain.

To shear.

382

LESSON LXV.

Tapar.

To cover up, to close up.

Trampear.

To impose upon, to deceive.

Tragar.

To swallow.

Trasnochar.

To sit up all night.

Termlnar.

To terminate.

Tolerar.

To tolerate.

Tornar.

To return, to do over again.

Tranquilizar.

To tranquillize, to make any

one's mind easy.

Tutear.*

To address any one in the second

person singular, to speak fa-

miliarly to.

Expresivo.

Expressive.

Justo.

Just.

Duro.

Hard.

Necio.

Silly, foolish.

Practice.

Practised, experienced.

Ciego.

Blind.

Tuerto.

Blind of one eye.

Trigueno.

Dark (of the complexion).

Tinto.

Colored, red.

Tonto.

Foolish.

Tramposo.

Deceitful, swindling.

Terminante.

Decided.

Tranquilo.

Tranquil, quiet

A borbotones.

Bubbling, hurriedly, confusedly

Palabras mayores.

Offensive words or expressions.

No ser rana.

To be able and expert.

i Caramba !

There is no English word cor-

responding to this ; though it

is used about as "Confound

it ! " might be used.

Asador. Spit (for roasting).

Cola. Tail.

Copo. Flake (of snow).

Danza. Dance.

* Tutear, composed of the two second person singular pronouns, tu
and te, with the termination of the first conjugation, ar, appended.

LESSON LXV,

383

Entendedor.

One who under-

Divisa.

Motto.

stands.

Familiaridad

. Familiarity.

Herrero.

Blacksmith.

Miel.

Honey.

Menosprecio

. Scorn, contempt.

Mona.

Monkey.

Hortelano.

Gardener.

Fama.

Fame, notoriety.

Dado.

Dye.

Moderacion.

Moderation.

Proverbio.

Proverb.

Oveja.

Sheep.

Sayo.

Sort of loose coat

Necesidad.

Necessity.

or jacket.

Pareja.

Pair.

Pecho.

Breast.

Rana.

Frog.

Raton.

Mouse.

Viga.

Beam.

Tio.

Uncle.

Tenacidad.

Tenacity.

Bebedor.

Toper, tippler.

Tos.

Cough.

{All these an

masculine,)

Soliloquio.

Soliloquy.

Trineo.

Sleigh.

SuegTO.

Father-in-law.

Tacto.

Touch.

Sujeto.

Person, individ-

Talento.

Talent.

ual.

Telegrafo.

Telegraph.

Sobrino.

Nephew.

Tenedor.

Fork.

Sinonimo.

Synonym.

Termino.

Term.

Silencio.

Silence.

Trigo.

Wheat.

Sentido.

Sense.

Termometro.

Thermometer.

Semblante.

Countenance,

Torno.

Lathe.

looks.

Toque.

Touch, ringing

Secreto.

Secret.

(of bells).

Trato.

Intercourse, treat-

Titulo.

Title.

ment.

Trago.

Draught, drink.

Traves.

Breadth (of a
thing).

Tirabuzon.

Corkscrew.

COMPO

SITION.

A buena gaim no hay pan duro.

A lo hecho pecho.

A qui en se hace de miel las moscas

se lo comen.
A quien madruga Dios le ayuda.
Al buen entendedor con media pa-

labra basta.
Al fin se canta la gloria.

Hunger is the best sauce.
What is done cannot be helped.
Smear yourself with honey, and you

will be devoured by flies.
The early bird catches the worm.
A word to the wise is sufficient.

Boast not till the victory is won.

384

LESSON LXY,

Antes que te cases mira lo que

haces.
Antes cabeza de raton que cola de

leon.
Aunque la mona se vista de seda

mona se queda.
Bien vengas mal si rienes solo.
Cada oveja con su pare j a {or Dios

los cria y ellos se juntan).
Cada uno juzga por su corazon el

ageno.
Cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.

Cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el

zapato.
Cobra buena fama y echate a dor-

mir.
Como el perro del hortelano, que ni

come ni deja comer.
Cuenta y razon sustentan amistad.
Del mal el menos.
Debajo de una mala capa se encuen-

tra un buen bebedor.
Dime con qui^n andas, y te dire

quien^ eres.
Donde fueres haz como vieres.
Lo mejor de los dados es no jugar-

los.
En boca cerrada no entran moscas.
En casa del herrero asador de palo.

En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey.

Gato escaldado del agua fria huye.
Ir por lana y volver trasquilado.
Hombre prevenido nunca fue veu-

cido.
La caridad bien ordenada empieza

por uno misrao.
La mucha familiaridad es causa- de

menosprecio.
La necesidad carece de ley.
La tenacidad es divisa del necio.

Look before you leap.

Better be the head of a mouse than

the tail of a lion.
A hog in armor is still but a hog.

Misfortune never comes alone.
Birds of a feather flock together.

Every man measures other people's

corn in his own bushel.
Every one may do as he likes with

his own.
Every one knows where the shoe

pinches him.
Get a name for early rising, and you

may lie a-bed all day.
Like the dog in the manger.

Short reckoning and long friends.

Of two evils, the lesser.

We should not judge the book by
the cover.

Tell me your company and I shall
tell you what you are.

When in Rome, do as Rome does.

The best throw at dice is to throw
them away.

A close mouth catches no flies.

Xo one goes worse shod than the
shoemaker's wife.

In the land of the blind, the one-
eyed man is king.

A burnt child dreads the fire.

The biter bitten.

Forewarned, forearmed.

Charity begins at home.

Familiarity breeds contempt.

Necessity has no law.
A wise man can change his mind ;
a fool never.

Lussoisr Lxr.

385-

jliO que no se puede remediar se ha

de aguantar.
Mas vale tarde que nunca.
Mas vale pajaro en mano que ciento

volando.
Mientras en mi casa estoy rey soy.
Nadie puede decir de esta agua no

bebere.
No es oro todo lo que reluce.
No hay mal que por bien no venga.

No la hagas no la temas.
Poquito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo.
Quien bien te quiere te hara llorar.
Quien mucho habla mucho yerra.
Vale mas rodear que rodar.

Quien no se aventura no pasa la mar.
Ya que la casa se quema calente-

monos.
Vemos la paja en el ojo a geno y no

la viga en el nuestro.
Tu enemigo es de tu oficio.

What can't be cured must be en-^

dured.
Better late than never.
A bird in the hand is worth two iiii

the bush.
A man's house is his castle.
One can never tell what the future

will bring.
All is not gold that glitters.
It's an ill wind that blows nobody

good.
Do no evil and fear no harm.
Rome was not built in a day.
Spare the rod and spoil the child.
Who speaks much often blunders.
The longest way round, the shortest

way home.
Nothing venture, nothing have.
Let us make the best of a bad job.

We see the mote in our neighbor's
eye, and not the beam in our own-
Two of a trade never agree.

CONVERSATION AND VERSION.

1. I Hay muchos proverbios en espaiiol ? Hay muchisimos ;
en tod as las lenguas los hay, pero en la espanola creo que hay
tantos que si se reuniesen todos formarian varios voliimenes.

2. I Le gustan a V. los proverbios ? Si, senor, son muy
expresivos, pero debemos usarlos, como decia D. Quijote, con
moderacion y no a borbotones como Sancho Panza.

3. En eso tiene V. razon, porque quien mucho habla mucho
yerra. — V. acaba de aplicar ese muy bien ; pero es imposible que
practiquemos con todos los que trae esta leccion, en este
ejercicio.

4. Sin embargo, al que madruga Dios le ayuda. — Y. dice bien,
y quien no se aventura no pasa la mar.

5. Espero que quien nos oiga conversar introduciendo tanto
refran, no diga de ellos lo que se dice de los males. — i Que dicen
de los males ? Bien vengas mal si vienes solo.

6. I Oh ! no, seiior, en primer lugar los proverbios no son
males, y en segundo lugar a nosotros nos gustan, y queremos-

27

386 LESSON LXV.

practicar con ellos, para aprenderlos. — Y. esta en lo justo, y
ademas, cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.

7. i Ola, amignito ! V. me parece practice en la materia, pero
no piense V. que yo soy rana, porque debajo de una mala capa
se encuentra un buen bebedor. — Caramba ; que no me deja V.
meter baza ! no se dira de V. aquello de, en boca cerrada no en-
tran moscas.

8. Yam OS amigo, ese refran vino por los cabellos. — Pues si
vino por los cabellos, a pelo vino, ademas, que Y. me parece ser
de aquellos que ven la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el
suyo.

9. No se enfade Y., amigo, que quien bien lo quiere le hara
llorar. — No, senor, no me enfado, pero ya veo que no es oro todo
lo que reluce.

10. i Bravo ! bravo ! ya va Y. aprendiendo a enzarzar refranes,
lo hace Y. cual otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi practica,
he ido por lana y he vuelto trasquilado. — Su ejemplo de Y. me
ira enseiiando ; poquito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo, y dime con
quien andas y te dire quien eres.

11. ; Que hombre ! si Y. va a ganara su maestro ! pero no hay
mal que por bien no venga ; Y. me hace reir con sus refranes. —
Bien, del mal el menos, pero D. Manuel, i es posible que le haya
de ganar su discipulo ?

12. No se, no puedo decir de esta agua no bebere, y lo que no
se puede remediar se ha de aguantar, y al fin se canta la gloria. —
] Zape, como los enhebra I pero yo no me doy por vencido, senor
maestro, porque yo ya se aquello de cobra buena fama y echate
a dormir.

13. La tenacidad es divisa del necio, y al buen entendedor
con media palabra basta. — Si, pero esas ya son palabras mayores,
y a quien se hace de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mientras en
mi casa estoy, rey soy.

14. Espero, D. Carlos, que no me quiera Y. poner fuera de su
casa. — No hombre, pero estos refranes son tan expresivos que le
hacen decir a uno mas de lo que quiere ; pero a lo hecho pecho y
ya que Y. me desafio, siga la danza.

15. Bueno, si Y. lo quiere, ya que la casa se quema calente-
monos : pero bien haria Y. antes que se case en mirar lo que hace,
porque cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. — Amigo mio, Y.
no sabe de la misa la media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo a torcer, y
antes quiero ser cabeza de raton que cola de leon.

LESSON LXY. 387

16. Si, senor, pero aunque la mona se vista de seda, mona se
queda, no sea V. como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni
deja comer, y acuerdese V. que cuenta y razon sustentan amistad
y lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos. — Basta, basta, hombre me
doy por vencido.

17. No la hagas no la temas ; tu enemigo es de tu oficio. —
Pero, D. Carlos, le repito. . . .

18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por si misma. — Pero si
repito que. . . .

19. Donde quiera que fueres haz como vieres. — Senor, me
rindo. — Mas vale tarde que nunca.

EXERCISE.

1. Well, Charles, so you have come at last. Yes, better late
than never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I should
not have come at all.

2. Are you going out ? I thought we were going together
to the theatre this evening. — I must go out now ; but should I
get back as soon as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the
theatre.

3. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your
companion. It is rather doubtful at present whether I shall ;
but if I do, I should be delighted to have your company.

4. If the directors establish that as a general rule, a great
many persons will suffer heavy loss.

5. The conditions were, that if he did not discover the error,
or if, after having discovered it, he could not rectify it, he should
lose his place.

6. He said he would have no rest until he might hear some
news of that poor young man.

7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his
power to procure it for me.

8. In case his efforts should not be attended with success,
you could rely upon me to do all in my power to advance {pro-
mover) your interests.

9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not
introduce some system of reasonable economy.

10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with such an appear-
ance of truth, that one is actually tempted to believe them.

11. They made so many conditions, that it was clear that they
had no wish to help us.

3.88 LESSON LXV.

12. Why did you not take that book ? I would not take it
because some leaves were wanting.

13. If there is anything within (in) my reach with which I
can serve you, just * let me know.

14. Whatever he may have been in his youth, he is now a re-
spectable man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him.

* English words in italics are not to be translated.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS

GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OF THE

SPANISH LANGUAGE, NOT HITHERTO TREATED

OF IN THE GRAMMAR.

In order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language,
it is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the
several parts of speech in the native language and in the one
proposed to be learned.

The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by
the suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or
a conjunction; by using one tense of a verb for another;
placing an adjective before its noun when, in order to con-
vey the idea intended, it should go after it ; and not unfre-
quently by translating a certain part of speech by a word
which, although its appearance would lead us to take it for
the equivalent of the word to be translated, bears in reality
no relation to the idea designed to be expressed.

We have deemed it wise, therefore, to devote a few pages
of our CoMBiiTED Method to such general remarks as are
necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively
observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con-
tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to write or speak
correctly and idiomatically in the Spanish language.

The Definite Article.

1. Illustrations have already been given in previous les-^
sons as to the more common use of the article; but there

390

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.

are many others which require nice discrimination to decide
as to its use or omission in Spanish, as in English, as may
be seen from the following examples, which may serve as
a general rule for all those of the same kind :
4 Esta el rey en palacio ?
Es costumbre en Espana.
Su tio firmo por el, en aiisencia de
su padre.

Is the king in the palace I
It is the custom in Spain.
His uncle signed for him,

absence of his father.
He told the truth.
On the 3d of June.
He had the courage to answer.
In the middle of August.

in the

Decia verdad.

A tres de Junio.

Tuvo valor para responder.

A mediados de agosto.

2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by a
preposition not required in English ; as,

Hace del caballero. | He plays the gentleman.

Indefinite Article.

3. The so-called indefinite article is, as has been stated
in one of the early lessons, frequently employed in English ;
and when translating from this language into Spanish, we
either suppress it entirely or render it by some other part
of speech ; as,

Tiene derecho sobre este caudal.

A. distancia de . . .

Cadiz es puerto de mar.

Es otro Alejandro.

En medio siglo {or dentro de medio

siglo).
Volveremos dentro de media hora.
Las obras de otro {or obras agenas).

Hubo tiempo en que . . .

He has a right to (or a claim upon)

this capital.
At a distance of . . .
Cadiz is a seaport (town).
He is another Alexander.
In half a century.

We shall return in half an hour.
The works of anoXhQV (or a^iother's

works).
There was a time in which . . .

Personal and Possessive Pronouns.

4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive
pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish;
and that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness
and precision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax,
owing to the completeness of the verb inflexions, does not

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES, 391

require a so lavish use of these forms, and they are omitted,
save where absence would occasion ambiguity, and where
they are used for sake of emphasis ; in other words, the pro-
nouns are omitted wherever possible, without injury to the
construction or style ; as.

Es verdad.

Llueve.

Hace frio.

j,Por que es menester?

fil mismo principe.

Su misma madre.

j61 mismo lo vi6.

It is true.

It is raining (or it rains).

It is cold.

Why is it necessary ?

The prince Aimself.

His mother herself.

He saw it Aimself.

5. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark
that the words one and ones^ so often used in English, to
avoid the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no equivalent
in Spanish, as they are usually expressed in some other way,
as, for instance, by adjectives, and hence are to be left out in
translating from the former language to the latter ; as,

I Tiene V. caballos ? I Have you horses (or any horses) I

Tengo dos buenos. 1 1 have two good ones,

6. Personal pronouns, when used redundantly in English,
as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish :

Am bos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost).

This, however, does not apply to such words as uno,, or
the cardinals generally, todo^ etc., as, uno de ellos, one of them,
todos ellos^ all of them.

7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unf requently,
suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as,

Todo no podia entrar en un elogio, I Alltjould not find place in a eulogy,
mas si en una satira. I but all could find place in a satire.

Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the
English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in
Spanish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in
the first member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at
once shorter and more energetic.

392

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.

Ellipsis.

8. There are certain short modes of expression, certain
grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language,
which are not admissible in Spanish ; the ellipses must in
such cases often be filled up ; as,

Jamas huho orador que hablase me-

jor.
De ahi dimanan estos errores.
'No puede pensar en hacer mal.
La ciudad reducida a cenizas.
2^0 va mal para ser nino.
Su madre baftada en lagrimas.
Aunque todos estuviesen juntos.
Esto es por lo que toca d su persona.

En pro y en contra.

•Con la espada en la mano.

Never did orator speak better.

Hence these errors.

He cannot think of evil.

The city in ashes.

Not bad for a child.

Her mother in tears.

They were all together.

So much for his person (or personal

appearance).
For and against.
Sword in hand.

N". B. — It is also correct to say, Espada en mano.

Inversion.

Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson LI,
on the subject of inversion, we take it for granted that the
student will not be displeased to meet here a few well-chosen
examples which will give him a still clearer idea of the order
followed in Spanish for the expression of ideas, and the con-
sequent difference of construction between that language
and English.

9. The substantive usually precedes its adjective ; as,

mas perfecto del He is the most perfect man in the
world.
False key.
False witness.
Her youngest son.

Es el hombre

mundo.
Llave falsa.
Testigo falso.
Su hi jo mas joven.

10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion taking
place in English, while the natural construction is followed
in Spanish ; especially in the case of past participles acting
as verbal adjectives ; as,

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.

393

Una vez destruido este
mento, todo se viene abajo.

funda-

Admitida esta libertad, el hombre
puede . . .

This foundation being once de-
stroyed, the whole (edifice) comes
to the ground.

This liberty (being) once admitted,
man can . . .

11. In all cases similar to that of the following example,
the possessives mio^ tuyo^ suyo are placed after the substan-
tive, and then, of course, they retain their final syllable ; as,
El otro hijo suyo. \ His other son.

12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented
in Spanish in an order very different from that followed in
English; as,

No ha venido para destruir, sino

para edificar.
Bien veo que . . .
Si tuviese V. que hacer una contrata.

It is not to destroy that he has come

but to build up.
I see (very) well that . . .
If you had an agreement to make.

{If you had to make an agreement would, of course, also be an allow-
able construction in English.)

No tenia razon aquel filosofo que

decia que . . .
Toca remunerar los servicios al que

los recibio.
Entre los griegos, los que . . .
fil que mas hablaba.
Cien veces mas quisiera yo que . . .

Solo Dios es inmutable.

That philosopher who said that . . .
was wrong.

It is for him who received the serv-
ices to reward them.

Those amongst the Greeks, who . . .

He who spoke the most.

I would prefer a thousand times
that . . .

God alone is unchanging.

Nouns.

13. There is a striking difference to be observed in the use
of nouns in the two languages ; we sometimes meet nouns in
the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in the
plural only, and vice-versa :

Plurah
Mirar con malos ojos,
Puso los ojos en mi.
Dar oidos 4 . . .
Prestar oidos.
Be pies a cabeza.

Singular,
To look with evil eye.
He set his eye on me.
To give ear to . . .
To lend an ear.
From head to foot

39i

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,

Por todas partes,
Juego de manos.
Se presento con los ojos en el suelo.

Singular,
A pie descalzo.
Estar en pie,
A remo y vela.
En toda suerte de negocios.
No son duenos de si.

In every direction.

Sleight of hand.

He came forward with downcast eye.

Plural.
With bare feet (or in (his) bare feet).
To stand on (one's) feet.
With oars and sails.
In all 5or/5 (or kinds) of business.
They are not masters of themselves^

One Part of Speecli for Another.

14. It is not uncommon, in comparing English and Span-
ish composition, to see adjectives translated by substantives,
adverbs by substantives, substantives by verbs, and vice-versa.
Sometimes, in translating, difficulties, appearing at first sight
almost insurmountable, are overcome by the simple substitu-
tion of one part of speech for another.

Adjectives for Substantives.

Pica de guapo {or presumido de

guapo).
Es aciisado de impio,
Se pone furioso.

He piques himself on his bravery.

He is accused of impiety.
He gets into a fury.

Substantives for Adverbs, and vice-versa.

Aunque idolatras de origen.
Come excesivamente.
Tuvo la dicha de salvarse.
For desgracia nada oyeron.

Although originally idolaters.
He eats to excess.
Happily for him he escaped.
Unfortunately they heard nothing.

Substantives for Verbs, and vice-versa.

Hablo lo mejor que pudo,
Debe probar su dicho,
Como acostumbra.
Despues de almorzar.
Antes de comer.

Hay historiadores
que . . .

que

He spoke to the best of his ability*
He must prove what he says.
According to his custom.
After breakfast.
Before dinner.

Verbs for Pronouns.

aseguran 1 Some historians assure us that . . .

Of Verbs in General.

15. We very often find verbs active with the indefinite se.,
and sometimes the passive verb with the particle se^ used in

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.

395

Spanish to express the same idea conveyed in English by
passive, and sometimes also by active verbs ; one tense trans-
lated by another different tense, one number substituted in
the place of another, one person for other persons, and at
times even the same person translated by any or all the
others, according to the sense desired to be conveyed.

Passive in Engrlish.

El concilio se celehraba en Pisa.
El libro que se le atribuye,
Esto se encierra en la proposicioti.
Esto debe contarse por nada.
Cuando se les ruega que respondan.

The council was held at Pisa.
The book which is attributed to him.
That is contained in the proposition.
This is to he counted for nothing.
When they are requested to answer.

Active in Engrlish.

Viene kjuntarse con su familia.
Se caso con la duquesa.
Se hicieron a la vela.

He comes to join his family.
He married the duchess.
They set sail.

The Indicative or Subjunctive for the Infinitive.

He ordered him to hold his tongue

(or to he silent).
He is supposed to possess nothing.

Lo mando que callase.

Es reputado por hombre que nada

Espero me responda V.

I expect you to answer me.

One Tense for Another.

I Te hahre yo dado un derecho. que

no tengo ?
I Por que solo los hombres habrdn

de degenerar ?
Cuanto mas hag an, menos ganaran.

Que un muerto resucite, no es cosa
comun.

Have I then given thee a right which
I do not possess myself f

Why must mankind alone degen-
erate I

The more they do, the less they will
gain.

It is no common thing for a dead
(man) to be resuscitated.

One Number for Another in Verbs.

Son las seis. I It is six o'clock.

No le quedan mas que tres hijos. I He has only three children left.

One Person for Another.

Nosotros somas los barbaros.
Si huhiesen sido ellos losvitupera-
dos.

It is we that are barbarians.
If it had been they that they had
blamed.

396 GRAM3IATICAL PECULIARITIES.

Mode of Asking: Questions and forming Negations with Verbs.

16. The auxiliary do^ used in English in asking questions,
whether negatively or positively, is to be lost sight of in
translating into Spanish, inasmuch as the simple form of the
verb contains all that is required for that purpose, as may be
seen in the following examples :

^ Van Vds. algunas veces a la opera ? Do you sometimes go to the opera?

^Sabia V que debiamos venir tan i)i6? you know that we were to come

temprano ? so early ?

No creia que debiesen Vds. venir I did not think you were to come

hasta las tres. until three o'clock.

17. Xor is it to be translated into Spanish when it stands
in the English sentence merely for the purpose of giving
more emphasis to the expression ; as,

Yo creia que no iban nunca al teatro. 1 1 thought they never went to the

theatre.
SI, senor, van a menudo. I Yes, sir, they do go often.

18. In English it sometimes takes the place of a verb, to
avoid the repetition of the latter ; in all such cases it is to be
rendered into Spanish by a simple particle (positive or nega-
tive, as required by the sense), or else the verb expressing
the action must itself be repeated ; as.

Do you write to your uncle every

month I
Yes, sir, I do.

J, Escribe V. todos los meses a su tio ?

Si, senor {or le escribo todos los
meses).

19. To what has already been remarked relative to con-
jugations, we have but a few words to add respecting a lim-
ited number of verbs of the third conjugation. Those which
have either of the letters ch, //, or /T, immediately preceding
the termination, make their past participle in eiido, instead
of iendo\ as, cifiendo, mullendo, rinendo, Mncliendo.hriinendo.,
grunendo, tanendo, instead of cimendo, mulliendo, rinie^ido,
hincJiie7ido^ hruniendo^ gnmiendo, tamendo.

For the same reason the i is also suppressed in the third
persons singular and plural of the preterit definite of the in-
dicative, and in all the persons of the second and third ter-

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES, 397

minations of the imperfect subjunctive, and of the future of
the same mood ; as, ciflo^ muUo, rineron^ hinchera, brunesey
grunere, instead of cinio^ muUio, rinieron^ hinchiera^ Iruftiese^
grufliere.

There is but one exception to this rule, and that occurs
in the verb henchir^ which generally retains the i in the third
singular, preterit indicative, making it Mnchio^ in order to
avoid confounding it with hincho^ same person and tense of
hinchar^ a regular verb of the first conjugation.

The reason of the suppression of the i in the cases pointed
out above is obvious, inasmuch as the letters cJi^ U, or n^ when
forming a syllable with e, cannot be sounded without the con-
currence of the i element to a certain extent. If, therefore,
the i were retained in those combinations, a forced and dis-
agreeable sound would be the result.

20. There are in English certain verbs of very frequent
occurrence, whose signification, if not determined by some
other part of speech, would often be difficult to explain.
Amongst this class, the verb to get plays a very important,
if not the most important part, and those of English speech
are sometimes at as great a loss to know exactly how to trans-
late it into a foreign language as foreigners are to know how
and when to use it idiomatically in English. This verb {to
get) has no exact equivalent in Spanish, but there are in that
language many verbs of something of a like nature, and by
which it may at times be correctly rendered, according to
the sense in which it is used. We venture to say that, in
the most difficult cases, a little thought, a moment's reflec-
tion would go far to remove all uncertainty.

Before making some uncouth makeshift of a translation,
pause a moment, and see what is the real meaning of to get
in the case before you ; then see what other verb would serve
in its place, or what other form of expression can be substi-
tuted for the one proposed to be translated. This you will
soon discover, for perhaps in no language can an instance be
found of the impossibility to express the same idea in more
than one way. For instance, let it be required to translate

398 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.

into Spanish, To get i]^ by the window ; here is a difficulty
just as great as any other case where the verb to get can
be used.

Let us now see how else we can express that idea : To go
IN, or to come in by the window ; that is to say, we have to
convey the idea of motion into. This same idea is to be
expressed thus : To ekter by the window = ei^'trar por la
ventana\ entrar then is the standard and usual verb ex-
pressive of motion into. Let us now change the preposition
and reverse the sense, for the preposition in determines the
signification of get in the case under consideration.

Eequired to translate : To get out by the window ; the
same process as above gives us motion out\ hence, salir
"por la ventana^ salir being the standard and usual Spanish
verb expressive of motion out.

This mode of reasoning will in all cases lead to the de-
sired end. Let your object be to find some verb in English
which used alone will mean the same thing as get and its
determining preposition.

Get, used in connection with adjectives, is no more diffi-
cult to be disposed of than when followed by prepositions,
and it may in general be turned into Spanish by one of the
three verbs ponerse^ hacerse^ or volverse (according to the
nature of the case), and an adjective corresponding to the
English one which governs get ; as,

Hacerse rico.

Volverse or ponerse rojo.

Ponerse furioso.

To get rich.
To get red.
To get furious.

These ideas in Spanish may be expressed by single verbs
derived from each of the adjectives respectively; as,

Enriquecerse.

Enrojecerse.

Enfurecerse.

To get rich.

To get red {i. e., to redden).

To get furious.

21. To GET, as an active verb, is usually translated into
Spanish by any of these: conseguir^ oltener^ procurar^ JiOr
cerse de, hacerse con, according to the sense ; as,

GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,

399

Consiguio lo que deseaba.

Ohtejidrdn el privilegio.

^ Puede V. conseguirme or procurar-

me un ejemplar de ese libro?
Se hizo de un caballo para el viaje.

He got what he wanted.

They will get the patent.

Can you get me a copy of that book 1

He got {i. e., bought) a horse for his
journey.

22. As for to get^ used redundantly with the verb to have^
it disappears in the Spanish translation ; as,

Tenemos uno. I We have got one.

23. The above remarks are equally applicable to all verbs
of the class alluded to, as for instance to become \ which
latter, as well as to get^ is often elegantly translated by
llegar a ser ; as.

Se hizo ciudadano de los Estados

Unidos.
Llego a ser hombre muy distinguido.

He became a citizen of the United

States.
He became a very distinguished man.

COMPLETE LIST

CONJUGATIONS OF ALL THE SPANISH VEKBS, AUXILIARY,

REGULAR, IRREGULAR, REFLEXIVE, 'IMPERSONAL,

AND DEFECTIVE, WITH AN EXAMPLE

OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.

AUXILIARY VERBS.

INFINITIVE.
PRESENT.

To have. To he.

Haber. Tener.^ A<^(iJ Ser. Estar.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Having. Being.

Habiendo. Teniendo. I Siendo. Estando.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

Had. Been.

Habido. Tenido. | Sido. Estado.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

I have.

I

am.

1. He.

Tengo.

Soy.

Estoy.

2. Has.

Tienes.

Eres.

Estas.

3. Ha.

Tiene.

Es.

Esta.

1. Hemos.

Tenemos.

Somos.

Estamos.

2. Habeis.

Teneis.

Sols.

Estais.

3. Han.

Tienen.

IMPEB

Son.

tFECT.

Estan.

I had.

I was.

1. Habia.

Tenia.

Era.

Estaba.

2. Habias.

Tenias.

Eras.

Estabas.

3. Habia.

Tenia.

Era.

Estaba.

400

CONJUGATIONS.

401

IMPERFECT—

-{Continued).

I had.

I was

'.

1. Habiamos.

Teniamos.

Eramos.

Estabamos.

2. Habiais.

Teniais.

Erais.

Estabais.

3. Habian.

Tenian.

Eran.

Estaban.

PRETERIT.

I had.

I was

i.

1. Hube.

Tuve.

Fui.

Estuve.

2. Hubiste.

Tuviste.

Fuiste.

Estuviste.

3. Hubo.

Tuvo.

Fue.

Estuvo.

1. Hubimos.

Tuvimos.

Fuimos.

Estuvimos,

2. Hubi^teis.

Tuvisteis.

Fuisteis.

Estuvisteis»

3. Hubieron.

Tuvieron.

FUT

Fueron.

[JRE.

Estuvieron.

I shall have.

I shall be.

1. Habre. ,

Tendre.

Sere.

Estore.

2. Habras.

Tendras.

Seras.

Estaras.

3. Habra.

Tendra.

Sera.

Estara.

1. Habremos.

Tendremos.

Seremos.

Estaremos.

2. Habreis.

Tendreis.

Sereis.

Estareis.

3. Habran.

Tendran.

IMPER

Seran.
ATIVE.

Estaran.

Have.

Be.

2. He (thou).

Ten (thou).

2. Se (thou).

Esta (thou).

3. Haya (he or

Tenga (he or

3. Sea (he or

Este (he or

you).

you).

you).

you).

1. Hayamos(we). Tengamos (we)

1. Seamos (we).

Estemos (weX

2. Habed (ye).

Tened (ye).

2. Sed (ye).

Estad (ye).

3. Hayan (they). Tengan (they).

3. Seian (they).

Esten (they).

SUBJIT]^

rcTIVB.

PRES

»ENT.

I may

have.

I may be.

1. Haya.

Tenga.

Sea.

Este.

2. Hayas.

Tengas.

Seas.

Estes.

3. Haya.

Tenga.

Sea.

Este.

1. Hayamos.

Tengamos.

Seamos.

Estemos.

2. Hayais.

Tengais.

Seals.

Esteis.

3. Hayan.

Tengan.

Sean.

Esten.

28

402

CONJUGATIONS, ,
IMPERFECT. — First Termination*

I would have.

1. Habria. Tendria.

2. Habrias. Tendrias.

3. Habria. Tendria.

1. Habriamos. Tendriamos.

2. Habriais. Tendriais.

3. Habrian. Tendrian.

I would he.

Seria. Estaria.

Serias. Estarias.

Seria. Estaria.

Seriamos. Estariainos.

Serials. Estariais.

Serian. Estarian.

Second Termination.
I would have. I would he.

1.

Hubiera.

Tuviera.

Fuera.

Estuviera.

2.

Hubieras.

Tuvieras.

Fueras.

Estuvieras.

3.

Hubiera.

Tuviera.

Fuera.

Estuviera.

1. Hubieramos. Tuvieramos.

2. Hubierais. Tuvierais.

3. Hubieran. Tuvieran.

Fueramos. Estuvieramos.
Fuerais. Estuvierais.
Fueran. Estuvieran.

Third Termination.
I should have. I should he.

1.

Hubiese.

Tuviese.

Fuese.

Estuviese.

2.

Hubieses.

Tuvieses.

Fueses.

Estuvieses.

3.

Hubiese.

Tuviese.

Fuese.

Estuviese.

1. Hubiesemos. Tuviesemos.

2. Hubieseis. Tuvieseis.

3. Hubiesen. Tuviesen.

Fuesemos. Estuviesemos.
Fueseis. Estuvieseis.

Fuesen. Estuviesen.

FUTURE.

I might or should have. I might or should he.

1.

Hubiere.

Tuviere.

Fuere.

Estuviere.

2.

Hubieres.

Tuvieres.

Fueres.

Estuvieres

3.

Hubiere.

Tuviere.

Fuere.

Estuviere.

1. Hubieremos. Tuvieremos.

2. Hubiereis. Tuviereis.

3. Hubieren. Tuvieren.

Fueremos. Estuvieremos.

Fuereis. Estuviereis.

Fueren. Estuvieren.

* It will be observed that, differing from almost all other grammars,
we give ria as the first termination, this order appearing to us more log-
ical and, above all, more grammatical, and more in accordance with the
signification and uses of the three terminations.

CONJUGATIONS.

403

MODELS OF THE THEEE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS.
FIRST CONJUGATION.

INFINITIVE.
Hablar. I To speak.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Hablando. I Speaking.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

Hablado. 1 Spoken.

r

Singular,

1. Hablo. I speak.

2. Hablas.
Habla.

1. Hablaba.

2. Hablabas.

3. Hablaba.

I spoke, was
speaking, &c

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

Plural,

1. Hablamos.

2. Hablais.

3. Hablan.

IMPERFECT.

1. Hablabamos.

PRETERIT.

Hable.

2. Hablaste.

3. Hablo.

I spoke.

Hablabais.
Hablaban.

Hablamos.
Hablasteis.
Hablaron.

FUTURE.

1. Hablare.

2. Hablaras.

3. Hablara.

I shall or will
speak.

1. Hablaremos.

2. Hablareis.

3. Hablaran.

^2. Habla.
8. Hable.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Hablemos. Speak (we).

Speak (thou).
Speak (he or you).

2. Hablad.

3. Hablen.

Speak (ye).
Speak (they).

c

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Hable.

2. Hables.

3. Hlble.

I may speak.

1. Hablemos.

2. Hableis.

3. Hablen.

404

CONJUGATIONS,

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.

1. Hablaria. I should or would

speak.

2. Hablarias.

3. Hablaria.

1. Hablariamos.

2. Hablariais.

3. Hablarian.

Second Termination.

1. Hablara. I might, would,

or should speak.

2. Hablaras.

3. Hablara.

1. Hablaramos.

2. Hablarais.

3. Hablaran.

Third Termination.

1. Hablase. I might, &x;.,

speak.

2. Hablases.

3. Hablase.

r*l. Hablare. I might, &c.,
\^ speak.

2. Hablares.
V-8. Hablare.

FUTURE.

1. Hablasemos.

2. Hablaseis.

3. Hablasen.

1. Hablaremos.

2. Hablareis.

3. Hablaren.

Aprender.

Aprendiendo.

Aprendido.

1. Aprendo. I learn.

2. Aprendes.

3. Aprende.

SECOND CONJUGATION,

INFINITIVE.

1 To learn.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

I Learning.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

I Learned.
INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Aprendemos.

2. Aprendeis.

3. Aprenden.

IMPERFECT.

1. Aprendia. I learned, was

learning, &c.

2. Aprendias.

3. Aprendia.

1. Aprendiamos.

2. Aprendiais.

3. Aprendian.

CONJUGATIONS.

405

PRETERIT.

1. Aprendi. I learned. 1. Aprendimos.

2. Aprendiste. 2. Aprendisteis.

3. Aprendio. 3. Aprendieron.

FUTURE.

1. Aprenderemos.

1. Aprendere. I shall or will
learn.

2. Aprenderas.

3. Aprendera.

2. Aprendereis.

3. Aprenderan.

2. Aprende. Learn (thou).

3. Aprenda. Learn (he or you).

IMPERATIVE.

1. Aprendamos. Learn (we).

2. Aprended. Learn (ye).

3. Aprendan. Learn (they).

1. Aprenda.

2. Aprendas.

3. Aprenda.

1. Aprenderia.

2. Aprenderias.

3. Aprenderia.

1. Aprendiera.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

I may learn. 1. Aprendamos.

2. Aprendais.

3. Aprendan.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination,
I would or
should learn.

1. Aprenderiamos.

2. Aprenderiais.

3. Aprenderian.
Second Termination.

I might, would,
or should
learn.

2. Aprendieras.

3. Aprendiera.

1. Aprendiese.

2. Aprendieses.

3. Aprendiese.

1. Aprendiere.

2. Aprendieres.

3. Aprendiere.

1. Aprendieramos.

2. Aprendierais.

3. Aprendieran.
Third Termination.

I might, (fee,
learn.

1. Aprendiesemos.

I might, &c.,
learn.

2. Aprendieseis.

3. Aprendiesen.

FUTURE.

1. Aprendieremos.

2. Aprendiereis.

3. Aprendieren.

406

CONJUGATIONS.

THIRD CONJUGATION.

INFINITIVE.

Escribir

1 To write.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Escribiendo. | Writing.

Escrito.*

PAST PARTICIPLE.

1 Written.
INDICATIVE.

1.

2.
3.

Escribo.

Escribes.

Escribe.

PRES

I write.

,ENT.

1. Escribimos.

2. Escribis.

3. Escriben.

1.

2.
3.

Escribia.

Escribias.
Escribia.

IMPEB

I wrote, was
writing.

IFECT.

1. Escribiamos.

2. Escribiais.

3. Escribian.

1.
2.
3.

Escribi.

Escribiste.

Escribio.

PRET

I wrote.

ERIT.

1. Escribimos.

2. Escribisteis.

3. Escribieron.

1.

2.
3.

Escribire.

Escribiras.
Escribira.

FUTl

I shall (or will)
write.

CTRE.

1. Escribiremos

2. Escribireis.

3. Escribiran.

IMPERATIVE.

2.
3.

Escribe.
Escriba.

Write (thou).
Write (he or you).

1. Escribamos.

2. Escribid.

3. Escriban.

Write (we).
Write (ye).
Write (they).

SUBJUNCTIVE.

1.
2.
3.

Escriba.

Escribas.

Escriba.

PRES

I may write.

ENT.

1. Escribamos.

2. Escribais.

3. Escriban.

* This is the only instance of irregularity in the verb Escribir.

CONJUGATIONS,

407

1. Escribiria.

2. Escribirias.

3. Escribiria.

1. Escribiera.

2. Escribieras.

3. Escribiera.

1. Escribiese.

2. Escribieses.

3. Escribiese.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.

1. Escribiriamos.

I would (or
should) write.

2. Escribiriais.

3. Escribirian.

Second Termination.

1. Escribieramos.

I might, would,
or should
write.

2. Escribierais.

3. Escribieran.

Third Termination.

1. Escribiesemos.

I might, would,
or should
write.

2. Escribieseis.

3. Escribiesen.

FUTURE.

1. Escribiere. I might, &;c.,

write.

2. Escribieres.

3. Escribiere.

1. Escribieremos.

2. Escribiereis.

3. Escribieren.

COMPOUND TENSES.

These are formed by joining the several tenses of the auxil-
iary haber to the past participle of the verb expressing the
action.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PERFECT.

I have spoken.
I have learned.
I have written.

1. He ) hablado.

2. Has > aprendido.

3. Ha ) escrito.

Yo he hablado.

Yo he aprendido.

Yo he escrito.
Hemos ^ hablado.

Habeis [• aprendido.

Han ) escrito.

408

CONJUGATIONS,

PAST PERFECT.

I had spoken.
I had learned.
I had written.

1. Habia j hablado.

2. Habias > aprendido.
S. Habia ) escrito.

Yo habia hablado.
Yo habia aprendido.
Yo habia escrito.
Habiamos ) hablado.

Habiais
Habian

aprendido.
escrito.

PRETERIT PERFECT.

I had spoken.
I had learnd.
I had written.

1. Hube J hablado.

2. Hubiste. > aprendido.
-3. Hubo ) escrito.

Yo hube hablado.

Yo hube aprendido.

Yo hube escrito.
Hubimos \ hablado.
Hubisteis > aprendido.
Hubieron. ) escrito.

I shall have spoken.
I shall have learned.
I shall have written.

1. Habre j hablado.

2. Habras > aprendido.
S. Habiu ) escrito.*

FUTURE PERFECT.

Yo habre hablado.
Yo habre aprendido.

Yo habre escrito.
Habremos ^ hablado.
Habreis > aprendido.

Habran ) escrito.

THE SEVEN PRINCIPAL CLASSES OF REGULAR
IRREGTJLAR VERBS.

ACERTAR.

FIRST CLASS.

I To hit the mark.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Acierto. I hit the mark.

2. Aciertas.

3. Acierta.

1. Acertamos.

2. Acertais.

3. Aciertan.

* The other compound tenses are conjugated in like manner.

CONJUGATIONS.

409

2. Acierta.

3. Acierte.

1. Acierte.

2. Aciertes.

3. Acierte.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Acertemos.

2. Acertad.

3. Acierten.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.

1. Acertemos.

2. Acerteis.

3. Acierten.

The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like

ACERTAR :

Acrecentar.

To increase.

Derrengar.

To break the back.

Adestrar.

To render skilful.

Despernar.

To cut off the legs.

Alentar.

To breathe.

Despertar.

To awake.

Apacentar.

To feed.

Desterrar.

To banish.

Apretar.

To squeeze.

Empedrar.

To pave.

Arrendar.

To hire.

Empezar.

To begin.

Asentar.

To place.

Encerrar.

To lock up.

Aserrar.

To saw.

Encomendar.

To recommend.

Aterrar.

To throw down.

Enterrar. .

To bury.

Atestar.

To stuff.

Escarmentar.

To take warning.

Atravesar.

To cross.

Fregar.

To rub.

Aventar.

To winnow.

Gobernar.

To govern.

Calentar.

To warm.

Helar.

To freeze.

Cegar.

To blind.

Herrar.

To shoe.

Cerrar.

To shut.

Invernar.

To winter.

Comenzar.

To commence.

Mentar.

To mention.

Concertar.

To agree.

Merendar.

To take a collation.

Confesar.

To confess.

Negar.

To deny.

Decentar.

To taste for the

Nevar.

To snow.

first time.

Pensar.

To think.

Quebrar.

To break.

Sosegar.

To quiet.

Recomendar.

To recommend.

Soterrar.

To bury.

Regar.

To water.

Temblar.

To tremble.

Reventar,

To burst.

Tentar.

To tempt.

Segar.

To cut down.

Trasegar.

To rake.

Sembrar.

To sow.

Tropezar.

To stumble.

Sentar.

To set.

410

CONJUGATIONS,

SECOND CLASS.

ACOSTAR.

To put or go to bed.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Acuesto.

I put or go to bed.

1. Acostamos.

2. Acuestas.

2. Acostais

5.

3. Acuesta.

3. Acuestan.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Acostemos.

2. Acuesta.

2. Acostad

3. Acueste.

3. Acuesten.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRES

JENT.

1. Acueste.

1. Acostemos.

2. Acuestes.

2. Acosteis

>.

3. Acueste.

3. Acuesten.

The following

r verbs, and their
Acos

compounds, an

>TAR :

I conjugated like

Acordar.

To agree.

Consolar.

To console.

Agorar.

To divine.

Contar.

To count.

Almorzar.

To breakfast.

Costar.

To cost.

Amolar.

To grind.

Degollar.

To behead.

Aporcar.

To hoe.

Demostrar.

To demonstrate.

Apostar.

To bet.

Descollar.

To surpass.

Aprobar.

To approve.

Desconsolar.

To discourage.

Asolar.

To waste.

Desolar.

To desolate.

Atronar.

To thunder.

Desollar.

To skin.

Avergonzar.

To shame.

Desvergonzarse.

To be impudent.

Colar.

To strain.

Emporcar.

To dirty.

Colgar.

To hang.

Encordar.

To string.

Comprobar.

To verify.

Encontrar.

To meet.

Engrosar.

To engross.

Resollar.

To breathe.

Forzar.

To force.

Rodar.

To roll.

Holgar.

To rest.

Rogar.

To entreat.

HoUar.

To tread.

Soldar.

To solder.

Mostrar.

To show.

Soltar.

To loose.

Poblar.

To people.

Sonar.

To sound.

Probar.

To prove.

Sonar.

To dream.

Recordar.

To remind.

Tostar.

To toast.

Recostar.

To lie down.

Trocar.

To barter.

Regoldar.

To belch.

Tronar.

To thunder.

Renovar.

To renew.

Volar.

To fly.

Reprobar.

To reprove.

Volcar.

To overturn.

Rescontrar.

To compensate.

CONJUGATIONS.

411

THIBD

CLASS.

Mover. | To move.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Muevo. 1. Movemos.

2. Mueves. 2. Moveis.

3. Mueve. 3. Mueven.

IMPER

2. Mueve.

3. Mueva.

ATIVE.

1. Movamos.

2. Moved.

3. Muevan.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRES

1. Mueva.

2. Muevas.

3. Mueva.

ENT.

1. Movamos.

2. Movais.

3. Muevan.

The following verbs, and their

Mo^
Absolver. To absolve.
Disolver. To dissolve.
Doler. To grieve.
Llover. To rain.
Moler. To grind.

'compounds, are conjugated h

Morder. To bite.
Retorcer. To twist again.
Solver. To solve.
Torcer. . To twist.
Volver. To turn.

FOURTH CLASS.

Atender. 1 To attend.

INDICATIVE.

PRES

1. Atiendo.

2. Atiendes.

3. Atiende.

ENT.

1. Atendemos.

2. Atendeis.

3. Atienden.

IMPER

2. Atiende.

3. Atienda.

ATIVE.

1. Atendamos.

2. Atended.

3. Atiendan.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRES

1. Atienda.

2. Atiendas.

3. Atienda.

ENT.

1. Atendamos.

2. Atendais.

3. Atiendan.

412

CONJUGATIONS,

The following verbs, and their compounds, have the same

irregularities as Atender :

Ascender

To ascend.

Entender. To understand.

Cerner.

To sift.

Extender. To extend.

Condescender. To condescend.

Heder. To strnk.

Contender. To contend.

Hender. To split.

Defender

To defend.

Perder. • To lose.

Desatender. To

neglect.

Tender. To stretch out.

Descender. To descend.

Trascender. To transcend.

Encendei

To

kindle.

Verter. To pour out.

FIFTH CLASS.

Sentir.

1 To feel
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.

1.

Siento.

1. Sentimos.

2.

Sientes.

2. Sentis.

3.

Siente.

3. Sienten.

PRETERIT.

1.

Senti.

1. Sentimos.

2.

Sentiste.

2. Sentisteis.

3.

Sintio.

3. Sintieron.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Si a tamos.

2.

Siente.

2. Sentid.

3.

Sienta.

3. SientaDu

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

1.

Sienta.

1. Sintamos.

2.

Sientas.

2. Sintais.

3.

Sienta.

3. Sientan.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.

1. Sentiria, &;c.

Second Termination.

1.

Sintiera.

1. Sintieramos.

2.

Sintieras.

2. Sintierais.

3.

Sintiera.

3. Sintieran.

Third Termination.

1.

Sintiese.

1. Sintiesemos.

2.

Sintieses.

2. Sintieseis.

3.

Sintiese

3. Sintiesen.

CONJUGATIONS.

413

FUTURE.

1. Sintiere.

1. Sintieremos.

2. Sintieres.

2. Sintiereis.

3. Sintiere.

3. Sintieren.

The following

verbs^ and their compounds, have the

irregularities as Sentir :

Adherir.

To adhere.

Digerir. To digest.

Advertir.

To advert.

Herir. To wound.

Arrepentirse.

To repent.

Hervir. To boil.

Asentir.

To assent.

Ingerir. To ingraft.

Conferir.

To confer.

Invertir. To invert.

Consentir.

To consent.

Pervertir. To pervert.

Controvertir.

To controvert.

Preferir. To prefer.

Convertir.

To convert.

Referir. To refer.

Deferir.

To defer.

Requerir. To require.

Diferir.

To differ.

SIXTH CLASS.

Pedir.

1 To ask.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Pido.

1. Pedimos.

2. Pides.

2. Pedis.

3. Pide.

3. Piden.

preterit.

1. Pedi.

1. Pedimos.

2. Pediste.

2. Pedisteis.

3. Pidio.

3. Pidieron.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Pidamos.

2. Pide.

2. Pedid.

3. Pida.

3. Pidan.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Pida.

1. Pidamos.

2. Pidas.

2. Pidais.

3. Pida.

3. Pidan.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Pediria, &c.

414

CONJUGATIONS.

Second Termination.

1. Pidiera.

1. Pidieramos.

2. Pidieras.

2. Pidierais.

3. Pidiera.

3. Pidieran.

Third Termination.

1. Pidiese.

1. Pidiesemos.

2. Pidieses.

2. Pidieseis.

3. Pidiese.

3. Pidiesen.

FUTURE.

1. Pidiere.

1. Pidieremos.

2. Pidieres.

2. Pidiereis.

3. Pidiere.

3. Pidieren.

The following verbs, and the

ir compounds, have the

irregularitie

s as Pedir:

Arrecir. To benumb.

Gremir. To groan.

Cenir. To belt.

Medir. To measure.

Colegir. To collect.

Regir. To rule.

Competir. To contend.

Rendir. To render.

Concebir. To conceive.

Refiir. To quarrel.

Constrefiir. To constrain.

Repetir. To repeat.

Derretir. To melt.

Seguir. To follow.

Desleir. To dissolve.

Servir. To serve.

Elegir. To elect.

Tefiir. To dye.

Embestir. To attack.

Vestir. To dress.

SEVENT3

I CLABS.

CONDUCIR.

1 To conduct.

INDIC.

iTIVE.

PRES

>ENT.

1. Conduzco.

1. Conducimos.

2. Conduces, &c.

2. Conducis, &c.

PRET

ERIT.

1. Conduje.

1. Condujimos.

2. Condujiste.

2. Condujisteis.

3. Condujo.

3. Condujeron.

CONJUGATIONS,

415

2. . Conduce.
3. Conduzca.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Conduzcamos.

2. Conducid.

3. Conduzcan.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.

1. Conduzca, &c. | 1. Conduzcamos, &:c.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Conduciria, &;c. I 1. Conduciriamos, &;c.

Second Termination.
1. Condujera, &c. I 1. Condujeramos, &;c.

Third Termination,
1. Condujese, &;c. | 1. Condujesemos, <fec.

FUTURE.

1. Condujere, &c. I 1. Condujeremos, &;c.

The following verbs are conjugated like Conducir :

Aducir. To adduce.
Deducir. To deduce.
Introducir. To introduce.

Producir. To produce.
Reducir. To reduce.
Traducir, To translate.

N. B. — Conocer^ and all verbs ending in cer^ of more than two syllables,
follow the irregularity of Conducir in the present indicative and subjunctive,
and in the imperative. Elsewhere regular.

416

<f0NJUGATI0NS.

J^ 1

fl

,

C3

c

c

j4

fl

c

o

d

C

p

o3

c8

03

^

.5

S

u

Ph

<»

a>

«>

^C

'u

^

«>

9

;-!

;^

•c

*2

3

^

p

S3

S3

=J

S

3

s

S3

cr*

cr*

cf

cr

O^

cr-

cr"

cr

cr

a*

-s

-%

^

5

'S

^

-§

^

^

^

w

ro

oT

r/T

sT

«r

Qi

iS

tf

vT

cS

g

2

rr

03

m

;^

:s

C

a>

a>

^C

^C

'C

•C

>l

^

^C

Ph

^

•G

^

fS

P

P

!3

13

=J

S3

S3

S3

cr

o*

cr"

cr*

cr*

cr

cr

O^

cr"

CT"

^

-s

S3

e3

'g

-s

08

-§

^

^

oT

sf

rrT

oT

25

O

o

O

o

8
S

s

i

8
a

O

i

E

eg

s

a

S

CO

so

vS

;-i

kJ

u

Ut

£

fc^

fc-

U

^

=3

;3

53

P

S3

a

s

P

3

S3

CT"

cr"

cr

o*

cr

a"

cr

cf

O^

cr<

'TS

•^

'TJ

'TJ

T3

^

nrl

"3

T3

T3

<5

<1

<3

<1

<i

<?

<5

<5

<5

<1

r ®

\i

.

VC8

c8

03

sS

2

®

2

(H

^O

(h

Ui

;.4

*^H

.2

.2

. 9

^C

*»^

'C

©

.2

'C

*S

•c

'C

,

CO '3

'3

*3

S3

'3

'5

'3

'5

;3

'3

^

cr"

o^

cr-

u*

cr"

CT-

O^

cr*

c^

cr"

.g

•^

1

1

t^

2

-§
4

1

o5

^

J

-§

§

e

£

e8

29

^

bl

^

2

.2

o

o

O

1-

. ®

S

;g

•c

.2

.2

'u

"S

'C

•g

HIA

o

04 '3

'3

*3

"3

'3

*3

'j3

':3

'3

*3

u

a>

n^

.s

cr

o*

cr

cr

CT"

cr

O^

cr

cr

o-

•g

!S

^

-3

%

-§

^

^

-§

'S

"i

-s

-i

S3

*3

S3

CJ-

cr"

O*

'd
<?

<1

^
<

2^

<s

if

i

2

.2

2
•2

S

'S

'S^

:g

2

'G

Ig

'C

*g

g*

H

l-H *3

'3

*3

'3

'3

*3

'3

'3

'3^

K

S

c

cr"

cr

u*

CT"

o^

cr

a^

D^

pS

■<

TS

T3

'TS

'd

•X3

^

^

ns

'd

s

p3

^ <

<J

<5

<1

<1

<

<1

<1

<

^

a5

H

l-H

H

s

OS

-<

Ui

;J

^

Pk

04

c:k

H

<i;

t

I

d; 'pd/uddiuj

S3

t3

CONJUGATIOJ^.

41T

1^

03

03

^
fl
(d

03 03

03

« «,

03

-e8

1

^

f

.2f

03

^

k

^

'TS

^

^

n^

'^

•d

•d

'd

^

fl

fi

fl

C

fl

C2

c

C3

C

fl

03

03

03

03

08

03

03

c3

s

c8

03

r

a
1

s

§
1

s

i

a

^c8
03

1

2

5

•^

T3

n3

^

'TJ

'd

'd

'd

-d

'd

a

&

C

C

a

c

0

C

a

c

<

^

<1

<;

<1

-<

<5

<1

<

<1

5^

<5

08 ^

08 08 S

'd -^ r^

S S S

^ o3 c8

03
-d

03

o
"d

s

'd

08 b3

^ ^

<1

(4

03

03

P
08

k

IS

i=!
03

08

i

53

^

1

oa'^

S

08

k

^

k

^

'd

•d

^

^

^

•d

^

'd

nd

c

a

p

c

p

P

C

c

P

03

c8

03

08

08

08

*

5

g

^

03

08

9

^

08-^

*M

•N

•N

1

k

sp"

k

k

k

o'

5

^

(iT

1

0

d

s

T3

^

-d

nd

'd

•T3

-r;

'd

^

C

a

c

fl

0

C

p

fl

PI

<5

<^

<^

<1

<1

<1

<

<i

<1

03

<1

^

^

^

'pd/u^diuj 1^

29

H

>

H

o

<

»

^

D

pa
0^

3

^,

p

1— 1

oa

418

CONJUGATIONS.

t
.1

I

T

C

. p

§

2

CO «

CO

'55

93

03

9i

-2 ^ a P

S 9 § S8

bfi U) .b .2

TO CO 03 W5

03 03 03 03

^1

rA a

^ '-a .** '•(D

-^ 08 CO M

oT .2 -2 .2

^ .52 .2 .2

CZl 'cO 'ot *IJD

o3 03 o3 flS

=3

<A < < <

I a a a s

if .Ju ^2 *2 ^2

CO 'm 'w M «n

<^ <H ^ <H <^

g

t— (

O
H

^

e

•«!»

•S

^

1

o

o

'^

fi

o

fS

(V

'S

• r^

^

OQ

*w

<

^

<5

H

g

>;

£2

{2^

TO

H

1

»

S

04

^

Pk

^

5S

m CO CO CO
-< <1 <1 <J

*- ^•'

<^ <j^ << <1

^- e

H H H

^ -§ I

<J; ^ t^

(i; 'pd/uddmj ^

2

!Z5

CONJUGATIONS.

419

1^

fl

fl

•

fl

s

2

c

c8

2

2

§

.^

«

.•5*

.•&

3?

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

•^

^

p

c

0

«

P

G

1=1

a

G

C

•2 tN tN

oT

•i

J5

oT

'2

nd

CO

2

8

g

S»

§

'§

s

.1?

.•;?

15^

'^

'd

'O

n3

'd

'H

'd

T3

•T3

^3

a

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

S

0)

a>

©

03

a»

O)

^

,a

^

' ^

^

^

^

^

^

^

«

a

i

1

3

2

of
O

a

1

1

1

0

J

u

t3

T^

^

T^

r^

^

^

^

-a

r2

G

G

G

G

•G

G

G

G

a

G

Wpqcqpqwpqwpqpup;

p^ -^

^

G

o'

u

.®

^

d

*o

*o

*o

-t*

o

•N

(V

•p4

TS

^

^3

'T^

G

G

G

G

03

©

(D

(V

m

«

M

w*

i

^.

£

:

•

^cB

J

.25

g

•

•

05

CO ^

eg

1

6

?

'73

«

4^
•T3

s

G

e

G

G

G

G

G

G

Z

^

^

J

^

^

^

r

^

««

^

i

«

5"

%

Wk

1

i

.2

1

3
•a

S

-a

G

G

13

G

G

s

G

G

G

^

^

^

J

^

S.

^

0

1

1

^•^
^U

1

5?

2

TS

'S

^

-a

•73

TS

Tj

-TJ

^

s

G

G

a

G

G

G

G

G

cq pq pq

pq W PQ PQ cq

V»

^

H H H

s*

«■

CO "d r^

i

5S

NO

1

th o;i CO

%

1

w

w

>►

^

H

H

Q

<

tz;

rt

P

»

>-»

Oi

pq

S

5

1— 1

02

420

CONJUGATIONS,

2^

00 jzi
o3

2

IS

u

01

PE^

i*

^

1

>

.1

P5

1

'g

<<

g

.5i

iJ

D

o

^

J

O

"**

•§

§

'«"

P5

1*^

O
^

S*^

P:h

^

^

Q

o"

^<

'TJ

&

tT

c

<»

o

Q

a>

^

3

3

od

08

33

^

o

O

o

M

•-H

1-3

H

.

H

P3

s

>-

^

PL,

g

n

p

HH

Pi

CO

I

TO J

1 s

4)

lii

fa

0*

S 03

eg

ft

.2^
'3

9)

.;ii

^

f

^

2

fi

^

^

as

«

^

c8

c8

C^

o

©

O

tn

0

S^

0

. §

1

1

S

C8

T-< g

•a

^

ft

S

c8

ft

fa

$

1

1

6

0

88

ft

2, s

^ OS

ft ^S
2 ^
5* O

OS

fa

ft

;;>

fa

9

ft

ft ft ft

0 0 0

V V g

* aR «

cs ^ g

fa « fa

g g g

•N tN tN

ft ft ft

0 0 0

guv

v^ \4J vg

tN "J •g

ft ft ft

0 0 0

g W g

2
£
ft

0

g

ft ft ft

0 0 0

g g g

ft ft ft
0 0 0

^ ^^ ^

^ ^ ^ ^

H H H

g ^ ^ ;^ ^

<» tH CQ CO ^

^ ^ ^ ^ "^

I

«3

CONJUGATIONS.

421

03

n

«

.S

B

^

O

o

o

s

c

fi

c

c3

ee

c3

eg

N

K

^

4)

^

<»

IS

P

8

■§

o
O

O

O

g

g

a

a

%

g

s

g

*2

"2

^2

*o

*o

o

o

o

O

O

O

o

o

o

el

o
O

Ph

'Q

o

g
^

p3

c^

^

©

w

1

s

IS

o

o

4)
IS

O

o

O

© .2

o
o

O

W QJ ^

^- S ^ ^

1

1

;§ s s

1

^

'pdj^j^ddmx

1

p4

»

t>

>;

S

H

o

5

5

P3

P

H

•-a

PL|

n

422

CONJUGATIONS.

•5

§

^

T

m

PQ

1^

>

tf

<

♦J

t)

K

^

i

*Ss

fe

^

c"

Oi

o

tT

r3

e8

08

08

Q

Q

Q

1-^

;?

en

H

H

OQ

03

-<

Oh

Ph

fl o c

'TS TS '^

CO

c8

o

s

c8

03
Q

.d

v2 ^

03 (N
T3 'TS

I

CO o8

-^ ^ ^

ra r^ r^

03 -^

08 W4
13 r3

03

08-^

0 e8 ^ 03

p Q O Q

o3

'd

a

c3

03

03
'd

03

'd

"O o3

v;)

P

n3

© « «

•^ 5? 5?

O P Q

H H H

^

t

^

^

^ ^

^

CONJUGATIONS.

428

I'

O

r a

u

&fi

a

c3

.7 4!^

•m •?

o i* « -^ "n "^

d) tN tN •« (N (rt

i

OQPQ QQQQAQ

g'

"hS

i«^

<»

1^

-i^

s

^

S'

o

.?.

o

"S*

•iS

^

(^

>i

e

'^

^

§

CO

•§

6

CO

^

^

J^

1

O

J?

"o

o

V

03

•N

(N

Q

«

P

g
^

1

s

02

H

H

S

£

p3

^ 2 iS ^ r4 ^ ^ ^ f-

05 »2 © W CS 03 irt (D o) (X)

•Pt O tp^ •N .H (P^ (N (PK tN (f^

^ J 5 i «« I I

^

P Q Q P

r; s '=^

I

•^ "n •?

tN trt •*

M> ft* "n "n •^

tN trt (N tN ni4
P P P P P

H S ^

f^ 'pd/uddmj fej

424

CONJUGATIONS.

e

5

^

§

^

T

«

P^

g^

>

<

1

o

1

■1

"^

H

'S

§-

§

00

4

C

1— 1

}^

a>

T3

O

1

1

0

H

Q

«

Q

c»

H-(

hq

H

g

^

>

-<J

»

g

^

p2

»

n

H

E

»

od

55

i*

-«J

HH

Pl^

PUi

.

C

^

,

.

C

G

2H

G

O

fl

a

s

08

s

o

*a

a

o

c8

c8

i

v2

1

a

'a

©

a

0

0

ss

0

o

0

IS

0

^

'IS

^13

'O

^

'TJ

n3

TS

'TS

^

«J'

08

g

a

^

o

O

^

^

o

.a

o
Q

CO ©

a s

. §

<^

CO ^

'a

0

o

^

n3

1

©

a

i

§i^

5i

0

o

CO

^3

TS

Q P

o

a «

Q P

^

o
P

^ I ^

o

o

a

03

a

s

p

0

13

-2" v^ ®

a a

.S a

o

vc8

a

u
0

a

08

a

u

0

p

a a

0

n3

0

0

P

0

P

03 03

0

'T3

a

0

08

a

0

P

a a

0 0

08

0

0

P

0

0

P

H H

a

0

13

a a

a

08

*'C "^^ r** ^■^

0

P

©
© •I—*

a §

2 P
©

a 5Z5

^

g

1^ 'T^ ^

<»

1

^

tH CQ CO

^

r

'p9/uddtuj

CONJUGATIONS,

425

CO ^

d

,

fl

G

2

-S

P

Oj

<u

S

^

6fi

3

s

J3

fa

bf)

bn

bo

tJD

^

0)

U

^

;3

^3

fa =^

0

■c

>^

•s

3

^

£?

J-.^

fa

a>

ai

•rt

>-»

s,

be

1

o

a

e3

a

i

1

'I

3

fl

^

^

^

gp

H W H W HH >^

0

I

If

>H H

bo

S,

o

6

o

6

2^

a

a

H

a

u

03

03

ay

<i>

^C

V(X)

bn

d

d

d

d

^

be

bo

bO

bO

S

^

I I

J ?3

d

0.

d

H

Ph

r^ fa

^08

es

03

s2

g

^

o

g

U)

60

IS

.2

•2

d

'd

08

fa

c3

fa

*d

'd

'd

bo

bo

&

«)

S)

s

bo

^P

^P

.S^

•^

S^

9\

^

<D

*c8

^

e3

J

t

m

'd

*d

t

«

^

'd

.2

'd

*d

bo

^

«

bo

«

be

^

^

{-1

fe

.*^

►»

;-i

k»

^
«

be

d
bo

d
bo

f-t (jj

WWW

W

d
bo

^

&

bo tlD

h5 PL,

^

~ -£. --s

I ^ ^

^

'pdj!uddiuj

5

426

CONJUGATIONS.

I

Si

c8

S -2 oT

c8 08 e8 c3

J-i *-i Jh ^^

»-i >^ t^ ^H

a? o ® o

o

s

eg

5

s

a

s

a

2

a

*

*

®

a T

ptiHWWiij Wwpqw

o

a

PS

u

•f

^

,

'Q*

P5

^

^

Ci3

<;i

<»

r

V

»-H

o

O

"**

T3

o"

o

i

§

1

Uk

»^

bM

H

H

^

w

£

3

H

H

H

PS

S

>

-<

-flj

2

P^

CL,

02

H

(d

S

Eu

PS

-<1

t— 1

Ph

Ph

08

■i

eg
Si
08

I

c8 08

i

F H H

>l ^

■£

t^ »^ tS;

08

u
u

^

^ »S a8 ® ©

^ e3 03 eS 08

5 t: t: t: t:

^ H w f^ w

^ ^ ^

4; 'pd^JLddmi f^

p

CONJVaATIONS.

427

.§

S

1

•

^

§

§

1

J

3

CO %

1

4i

S

s*

^

'%

.S

.s

rC

r4

43

rfl

A

4)

»;r

•s

*S

*3

'08

•s

12

1

^

1

1

S3

.2

1

m

0

s

s

^

0

a

0

§

1

of

0

i

0

0

0

08

<o

O

.a

1

s

i

f

a

(M

s

tH <»

§

u

^

U)

&fi

""C

V

;^

«

*N

c8

08

c8

•rt

tN

•rt

L m

cn

m

w

W

W

W

w

W

w

1

0

-§

0

^

A

V

0

1

^

s

w

H

H

S

i

>

S

w

H

(Z4

Pi3
Ci3

53

55
1— i

(In

Pk

.1

_ OP .S • 'g

.22 "S T
« 2 fe

^ ^ .^

^ ^

2 «N ip4

« 'S

V h

w w w w

^ ^

c8 o3 »rt (N «p4
2 ^ ^ ^ ^

W

Ch ^pdfjLddm]; ^

f

of

.s

61)

*s

;^

U

08

03

•N

•P(

m

w

w

w

^

;^

^7

H

0)

^

"g

TS

'd

i

t-H

<M

CO

•-a

n

D
CD

428

CON JUG A TIONS,

fl

•

CO 2

>

1

1
1

9>

^

. m

oT

•

C^m

*aj

•P<

t

1

5

_f

'

»"

a

1

es

eg

N— 1

s
fa

I?

m
0

i

i § g §

^ g s « s
k .^ € c; €

i I -2 •!

^ .g s s s

k .S € C €

0

s

es

« X tt

2 © 0

i s a

eS « o

h ai h

s© v^ \©

0 0 Si

.1^

C3

^ I— I

8

o

O

a2

o3

► S C .s

-s

I 5 I

eg

> & ^ ^

't

^ 1 1

^

es

68

I 5

I I

g s

h s

© 9

* ?

^ ^

u

. H H H .

"^ "^ :S ::^ S

^ -rH (M CO ^

|0 r T' ^

3

C3

CONJUGATIONS.

429

c3

fl

c

d

§

d

fl

d

^

s

^2

^

s

2

2

ti)

c3

S3

03

tJO

ei

flfi

4)

fcn

bn

bO

«

«

5fl

be

bo

bO

p

^^3

^;3

p

^S

^

p

•r-»

CO

i:

■^

^iii

^

0

;-i

t

m

U

^Trt

03

03

c3

03

03

bf)

bfi

bo

bo

bO

bO

bo

bn

bo

bo

^

3
•(-»

^3

3

•1— S

3

•r-a

.P»

^3

p

3

•r-»

3

•r-»

o

a

bo

3
1-3

a

eg
Si
^03

c3
bo

3

I

rr

o

w

r/!"

^

n

r!

o

O

O

n

eg

a

a

a

M

?n

8,

i

%

'S)

ri

3

3

3

3

^

»-a

1-5

»-3

1-5

5S»

R

^53^

•^

^

^

<»

8

r^

5»i

^

p

i

tS

3

^

«3

c8

oi

bO

bo

bo

3

3

3

Hs

^5

Ht.

i

J2i

cw

H

H

a>

55

bo

c3
bo

3

I

0

bo

03

03

^

c8

4)

bO

bo

bn

bO

3

3

3

3

3

bO

J

"tn

■g

^'^

P

rfl

c8

bo

eg

on

bO

bo

bO

«)

9

bn

bo

3

3

3

3

3

^

3

^

1

-g

^2

03

• 1

c3

g

eg

4)

bn

bn

bo

^

bn

bo

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1-3

•-9

t-5

►-9

1-5

t-9

H5

eg
bO

S

ft; I

dj 'pd/uddiaj f^

02

430

CONJUGATIONS.

o

2 d

O O

w

S2

O)

•d

©i

wT

[3

JO

^g

'o

*o

*o

o

1-H ®
S

O

61

^ ^C

s

o

o

o

s

o
E

S

c3

g

e

2

&fi

&i

"t

••^

o

o

o

o

O

o

c

"-fT^

*o8

i:

r^

!C

*^u '

h

^

o

O

o

O

o

^CO 02 ^03

o

6

o

B

S

a

g

s;

2

'■O

Kp

%o

►»

k

^

O

o

O

tf

<

h:;

t)

i*

jV]

*^

P5

i

1

1

KH

V

^

o

^

o

TS

<<

(^^

c

(D

o

u

t>>

S

5

o

O

h-(

J

<2

g
^

Jz;

02

H

t— 1

en

(4

^

w k» «

O

*0 ^c3

o o

O

O O

-• ^

<^

Q
^

c3

O

08

« of

o S

o

.^ :s ^

o

o

b^ b^ b^

o

o

*i:

^

"g

^ '^ :s

§

<»

^

1

tH CQ CO

^

1

•pd/uddmj

1

H

a

>►

K>-

H

H

O

<5

^

OS

t3

g

S

1-4

eg

CONJUGATIONS.

431

A

4)

44

W ^ sS ;^

. 'o o 'o

^

5

ftf

2

^S

rS

^S

<D

'o

'o

'o

CO .2

i-i §

O O ^ O O

o
B

O

o o

.g^

o

O O

P-l

oj

a5

• J

13

^2

1>

0

s2

^d

0

p4

'o

'o

3

.4

c8

S >-• o

tf 'o 'o

id 'o 'o

Boo

'a

.4

H

^ ;z; ;:h ;=3

O O O

^ b^ ^

^

fi^ 'p9^j,ddmx

^

<

iz;

pj

P

ps]

5

(l4

PQ

g

U

l-H

rjl

4:32

CONJUGATIONS,

i-!«^

08 .S C

^^ -§ ^

O P o

Ph Ch Dh

i

P^

I

O

O

o

a

o

t3

o

a.

t3

o

a

a

03

I

P-l

o

O

a

08

o 9

2

cu

1

1

^

6

13

.2

d

^

08-
•T3

tf

.

»•§

1

§

<J

t^

Cu

p,

&.

a.

p.

eu

ij

}

g

1

1

tf

«

•«!»
^

e
g

J

S

to

i^

1

-^

s

P5

d

c

1'

0

0

1

O

1

1

(2

'^

a.

C.

P.

&i

p4

a.

g

Oh

(S

HH

U^

5

00

1

o

-■1

1

1

0^

1

111

^

^"

V* -^

I ^

o

T3

J:- r3 'TS ^
o ? S g

P4 a a. Ol

0^

I

HH

Q

5

GQ

CONJUGATIONS.

433

G

g

G

G

g"

. O)

i

2

i

1

-«

2
_©

"»

n

2

CO c
o

1

G
o

G
O

§

G
O

s

s

I

Ph

P^

Ph

Ol

o.

P4

a.

&.

&I

&i

.2

r#r

.2

^oT

oT

Oi

V©

03

-^N

'^

*a)

*s

§

o

g

n3
o
G
o

■'1

G
O

fa
G

o

m

2
'«
9

I

P^

p^

P4

P4

P4

■P^

Ph

Ph

P.

p^

5

0

^

?f

wT

\

f

i

i

m

o

a

a

1

J'

o

O

a
0

I

■d

a

a

'd

'in

^
3
'«

G

o

'3

o

G
o

G

o

§

G

o

IS

d

s

P-.

S^

PM

a,

fin

Ah

PM

P4

(1^

Pk

G
o
CM

1^

G

;5

d

PU

EH

Ph

I'

G

o
Pu

g

T-i G

c8 0

§ S

p. P.

-d

G

I

G
o

P4

fa
'd

G

eg
C

p4

I

-d

G
O

Ph

eg

fa
'd

G
O

e8

U)

G
O
CL,

0

Ph

Ph P4

IS

Ph

d

p«

i;

o

'd

1!

«

Ob

G
o

d

0

d

P^

(^

p-i

Ph

PL,

^ -^

H H H

I

(^ 'pd^jLddmj; ^

80

eg

434

CONJUGATIONS.

li

3

?3

«

♦i
«

0

?3

*S fc

E3

=3

S *5

** rs 'SI 'S

r/T

X

»r

o

1

2

a

9

o

a

a
1

a>

a>

•N

9>

O)

O)

a>

3

^

f3

a

S

;3

s

D*

o»

o»

o»

G?

o»

o»

cr

« * «

•2 •S •«

o» o*

0

cr

02

PQ

05

»

>

P4

<1

u^

v>

«:>»

t3

^

l<f

1

1^

,

^

h

*s

§

00

1

03

o

o

1

s J

l-H

^

TJ

g^

fe

fe

.2

4

^

o

0>

•c

H

3

a*

§

K^l

t^

.

g

03

»

CQ

tH

E

»

M

1— 1

C<

-^

PLI

cu

2

C3

•
0

t

d

S

so

^

^

. «

*c

tt

C

o

(S

91

m

«

CO ^

a>

•n

a>

•N

mt

a>

*m

tN

•N

s

S

P

S

3

P

3

P

3

cr

cr

cr

cr

cr

cr*

cr

cr

cr

cr

•>

^

^

«

»r

03

. 1

J'

v2

£

1

08

•N

1

<M 3j

iZ

III

JlJ

(»

;h

X

«

«

•N

a>

•N

O)

•M

•N

(D

•N

•N

•P4

3

d

3

3

fl

3

p

3

3

cr

cr"

cy

cy

O*

cr

cr

cr

O^

a*

3

^cf

*

t

i

^

^

1

*s

»

c

a>

;-

«

X

SG

O)

•N

o

•rt

O)

•m

•pK

•rt

3

3

3

3

3

3

o»

o»

o»

<y

;-7

5*

o*

^»

03

a>

03

^

^

H

H

H

f-

•"H

^"

s

1^

:s

s

^

i

<%>

^

1

tH

c:^

CO

^

<i; ^

(^ 'pd/uddtuj ^

g

-<

z

Pi

u

g

S

g

13

hH

QQ

CONJUGATIONS.

436

ll

•2 ®
Q^ m ^ CO

r.

^

O) o « a>
Ph P5 P^ «

03

•fl 'a -a

•s n 'a

p^ D^ p^ pd; p^

>

=3

<e

1^

CJi

C

^

e

1

§»

^

t3

d

^

«

g
^

g
^

S5

55

H

PS

Ph

P^

c8 .a
'2 2

^-l *N <X> O ©

P^ « Ph P^

«N ® •'^ '^ •^

p:* p^ p- Q^ Q^

H H H

'f.

^ ^

(J^ 'pd^jLddmj

^

Ec]

»

>j

>

H

H

O

<J

^5

^

P

04

a

a

&

h-4

C»

436

CONJUGATIONS,

CO ®

CI ^

.2

03

c3

U

c3

a

08

.2 =8

d< d^ p<

^ 03 Gj 03

P* & 0(
0 0 0

1 i

.5 "i>

0 03

CZ2 CQ

oT

o

o

o

s'

oT

O

^

§

a

o

o

1

«

■1

va,

vS

^s

a

§4

'&

'&

&

4^

4^

0

0

0

m

CQ

QQ

02

M

CQ

:^

.2 t

or S -a

c8 c3 P

m m m

fa

c8

v3
fa

-i

c8

ft
4^

ft ft
0 0

ft
0

ft ^

ft ft ft
0 0 0

« ^ 0 0 0
m m ui ^ ^

■— (i; 51,

H H H

1

1

1

1

1

^ s §

'pd^jLddmj

»

H

>►

►
H

1

^

sz;

P3

P

»

5

0U|

m

H-4

eg

CONJUGATIONS.

437

08 03 08

§
U)

& 'S .2

«^'

c3

^c3

^C

bl)

-d

c8

c3

^- a

o

a

.2

02 j/:i

§^

a

0

a

c8

8
i

a

rJi

0

a
2

%

&£

s

^2

^0

^2

•— 2

li

c8

c8

OQ

CQ

02

m

w.

c^

"§*

.s^

"^

s

V

0

§>

s

^

^

"§ .

0

0

<:»>

^

•vs

'T^

g

a

0

i.«*

U

.2

3

^

tfl

CO

CO

;

^

g

ij

Ph

^

to

0^

E-i

(H

P4

PL,

00^

^2

03

fel »« .2

01 S v2 .2

^ 5? 5

o

-• e

03

'^ 'c3 '3

=3

c8

c8

S

r^ b^ ^

c8

^

^

Ci^ 'pd/u^ddrnj; (*,

g
s

CQ

438

CONJUGATIONS.

I

CO %

g 2

1

?

•s? ?

•? •?

o

. a

H H

o

g

7

o
S

o
S

61

•? •?!

H H H H E-i H

r

c

I?

H H

P-i

p3

o3

^3

CI cf

i;

0

7

*t I

C3

83

•? T?

EH Eh H H

't

I

03

61

0? 0? c? '

H H

H H H

^ O^ CO

cJ^ 'pdfjLddmj; ^ ©

H

g

-^

!25

Oi

P

g

S

S

t3

hH

C/2

CONJUeATIONS.

439

c8 e8

«r .§ ^

* ? k

O

o

o

a

o

a

^

be

13

o

a

(D r«

^c3 ^C

a
3d

1

'd ^2 -2

o

O

o

a

a

a

OS

9.

9

^ (2

.I"

o

^c;

n:3

^

o

©

TJ

08

ei)

k

>

g
^

i

m

H

W

C/2

«

^

Ph

p^

^ 13 IS

06

^d

13 c3 c«
l> > ^

V^ •£!

.^ ^

e8
>

^ ^ ^ ^

i

5

&

1

bfi *«

c8

U) 'd

13

^

c8

ce

IS

l>

>

k

t>

>

u

^

»J

r-*^

©

©

H

H

H

•^

CO

'^

nd

i

•I— 1

Q^

00

1

'pdJddduLj

I

w

»'

k

>;

H

H

O

^

fe

P^

t3

»

•-S

P^

n

&
m

440

CONJUGATIOJS^S.

.

§

1

c

d

c

u

03

CO S

»2

.2

f^

61

*s

'c

C

C

«P4

o

•N

<D

©

. ►

k

>

>

>

*§

.

.2

0)

^

i^

« ^

S

^co

^

c

*G

'c

a

^

o

o

•rt

<»

>►

>

>-

>

oT

o

o

v2

"S

^S

a>

©

>

>

o

a

C

61

QQ

03

^

^C

g8

w

6fi

-d

•2

•2

s

0

'g

c

0)

OJ

•N

•N

>►

>►

;>

>

wT

§

o
E
S

i

s

^

'd

3

^2

c

c

'S

*c

> t> ^ f>

>

.1"

o

> > >

OS

Si

• 2 =8

'd

G

c8

G

O

G

c3 ^

> > > >

I 1 1 i

'^ I ^ ^

I

Q

03

c8

'd 2 .2

G G G

P ^ ^ Ki

61 'd .2 .2

G C G G

> ^ t> >

H H

G

1

1g TS ^

^ (>} CO

h

'pd^jLddmj

1

»

^

t^

>►

H

H

O

<<

;z5

03

u

m

5

0^

n

CONJUGATIONS.

441

.

a

p

a

sS

03

03

a)

^

«

.2

>

>

V

.2 =8 c3

« ® .2
> > >■

o

"T

A

tn

. o

- a

■J

o

a

>

>

>

o

a

c8

O

a

03

« .in --S

;> t> > t>

.r

> > >

!>

H

Ert

g

en

H

^

03

A

-<

P^

PL|

k k f>

> > !>

c8

t> {> > >

H H H

^4^

^

(^ 'pdj^j^ddmx ^

S5

442

CONJUGATIONS,

CONJUGATION OF A VERB IN THE EEFLEXIVE FORM.

INFINITIVE.
Lavarse. ) To wash one's self.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Lavandose. | Washing one's self.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

Lavadose. I Washed one's seK.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Me lavo.

2. Te lavas.

3. Se lava.

I wash myself.

1. Me lavaba. I was washing,

washed, or
used to wash
myself.

2. Te lavabas.

3. Se lavaba.

1. Me lave.

2. Te lavaste.

3. Se lavo.

1. Nos lavamos.

2. Os lavais.
3.' Se la van.

IMPERFECT.

1. Nos lavabamos.

PRETERIT.

I washed my-
self.

FUTURE.

I. Me lavare. I shall wash

myself.
i. Te lavaras.
3. Se lavara.

2. Os lavabais.

3. Se lavaban.

1. Nos lavamos.

2. Os lavasteis.

3. Se lavaron.

1. Nos lavaremos.

2. Os lavareis.

3. Se lavaran.

IMPERATIVE.

1. Lavemonos. Let us wash
ourselves.

2. Lavate. Wash thyself. 2. Lavaos. Wash your-

selves.

3. Lavese. Let him wash 3. Lavense. Let them wash

himself, or, themselves,

Wash your- or, Wash

self. 1 yourselves.

CONJUGATIONS.

443

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Me lave.

2. Te laves.

3. Se lave.

1. Melavaria.

2. Te lavarias.

3. Se lavaria.

1. Me lavara.

2. Te lavaras.

3. Se lavara.

1. Me lavase.

I may wash my-
self.

1. Nos lavemos.

2. Os laveis.

3. Se laven.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
I would wash my- 1. Nos lavariamos.

self.

2. Os lavariais.

3. Se lavarian.

Second Termination.

I might, would,
or should wash
myself.

1. Nos lavaramos.

2. Os lavarais.

3. Se lavaran.

Third Termination.

2. Te la vases.

3. Se lavase.

I might, would,
or should wash
myself.

1. Nos lavasemos.

2. Os lavaseis.

3. Se lavasen.

FUTURE.
1. Me lavare. I might or should 1. Nos lavaremos.

2. Te lavares.

3. Se lavare.

wash myself.

2. Os lavareis.

3. Se lavaren.

INFINITIVE. •
Ayudarse. | To help each other.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Ayudandose. I Helping each other.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

Ayudadose. | Helped each other.

4:44

CONJUGATIONS.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Nos ayuda- We help each

mos. other.

2. Os ayudais.

3. Se ayudan.

PRETERIT.

1. Nos ayuda- We helped

mos. each other.

2. Os ayudasteis.

3. Se ayudaron.

IMPERFECT.

1. Nosayudaba- We used to

mos. help each

other.

2. Os ayudabais.

3. Se ayudaban.

FUTURE.

1. Nos ayudare- We shall help

mos. each other.

2. Os ayudareis.

3. Se ayudaran. •

IMPERATIVE.

1. Ayudemonos. Let us help each other.

2. Ayudaos.

3. Ayiidense.

Help each other.

Let them help each other.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

IMPERF. — First Termination,

1. Nos ayude- We may help

mos. each other.

2. Os ayudeis.

3. Se ayuden.

Second Termination.

1. Nos ayudara- We might,

mos. would, or

should help
each other.

2. Os ayudarais. •

3. Se ayudaran.

Nos ayuda-
riamos.

Os ayudariais.
Se ayudarian.

We would
help each
other.

Third Termination.

1. Nos ayudase- We might,

mos.

could, would,
or should
help each
other.

2. Os ayudaseis.

3. Se ayudasen.

FUTURE.

1. Nos ayudaremos. We might or should help

each other.

2. Nos oyudareis.

3. Se ayudaren.

CONJUGATIONS,

445

IMPERSONAL VERBS.

Amanecer. I To grow light.

INDICATIVE.

Present.
Imperfect.
Preterit.
Future.

Simple Tenses.

Amanece.
Amanecia.
Amanecio.
Amanecera.

It grows light.

It was growing light.

It grew light.

It will grow light.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect. Ha amanecido.

Past Perf. Habia amanecido.
Pret. Perf. Hubo amanecido.
Future Perf. Habra amanecido.

It has grown light.
It had grown light.
It had grown light.
It will have grown light

Amanezca.

IMPERATIVE.

I Let it grow light.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.

Present. Amanezca.

r Amaneceria.
Imperfect, k Amaneciera.

( Amaneciese.

Future.

Amaneciere.

It may grow light.

c might, \
It \ should, or >■ grow light.

k would )
It should grow light.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect. Haya amanecido.

r Habria j ama-
Past Perf. < Hubiera > ne-

( Hubiese ) cido.
Future Perf. Hubiere amane-
cido.

It may have grown light.
C might have, ^ grown
\ should have, or ^ Hg-ht.

It

( would have )
It should have grown light.

N. B. — Anochecer, to grow dark, is conjugated in the same
manner, and has the same irregularity.

446

Nevar.

CONJUGATIONS,

I To snow.

Present. Nieva.

Imperfect. Nevaba.

Preterit. Nevo.

Future. Nevara.

INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.

It snows.
It was snowing.
It snowed.
It will snow.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect. Ha nevado.

Past Perf. Habia nevado.
Pret. Perf. Hubo nevado.
Future Perf. Habra nevado.

It has snowed.
It had snowed.
It had snowed.
It will have snowed.

Nieve.

IMPERATIVE.

I Let it snow.

Present. Nieve.

r Nevaria.
Imperfect. < Nevara.

( Nevase.
Future. Nevare.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.

It may snow.
. r might,
It -< should, or

( would
It should snow.

snow.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect.
Past Perf
Fut. Perf.

Haya nevado.
( Habria \
^ Hubiera > nevado.
' Hubiese 3

Hubiere nevado.

It may have snowed.

r might have, \
It •< should have, or > snowed.

V would have )
It should have snowed.

N. B. — Helar, to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner,
and has the same tenses irregular

Tronar.

CONJUGATIONS,

I To thunder.

447

INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.

Present. Truena.

Imperfect. Tronaba.

Preterit. Trono.

Future. Tronara.

It thunders.
It was thundering.
It thundered.
It will thunder.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect. Ha tronado.

Past Perf. Habia tronado.
Pret. Perf. Hubo tronado.
Future Perf. Habra tronado.

It has thundered.
It had thundered.
It had thundered.
It will have thundered.

Truene.

IMPERATIVE.

Let it thunder.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.

Present. Truene.

c Tronaria.
Imperfect. } Tronara.

( Tronase.
Future. Tronare.

It may thunder.

r might, \
It ■< shou\d, or > thunder.

( would )
It should thunder.

Perfect. Haya tronado.

c Habria j .
Past Perf. } Hubiera >

( Hubiese ) ^^^^•
Future Perf. Hubiere tronado.

Compound Tenses.

It may have thundered.

r might have, \
It < should have, or > thundered.

' would have j
It should have thundered.

N. B. — Llover, to rain, belongs to the second conjugation, and
changes also the o into ue in the same tenses. Escarchar, to
freeze ; granizar, to hail ; lloviznar, to drizzle ; and relampa-
guear, to lighten, are all regular and impersonal.

448 CONJUGATIONS,

Hacer, to he (when employed in reference to time and weather).

INDICATIVE.

Simple Tenses.

Present.

Hace.

It is.

Imperfect.

Hacia.

It was.

Preterit.

Hizo.

It was.

Future.

Hara.

It will be.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect.

Ha hecho.

It has been.

Past Perf.

Habia hecho.

It had been.

Pret Perf.

Hubo hecho.

It had been.

Future Perf

'. Habra hecho.

IMPER

It will have been.
ATIVE.

Haga.

SUBJU>
Simple

Let it be.

ACTIVE.
Tenses.

Present.

Haga.

It may be.

' Haria. )

c might, \

Imperfect.

} Hiciera. >

It } should, or > be.

' Hiciese. ;

( would ;

Future.

Hiciere.

It should be.

Compound Tenses.

Perfect. Haya hecho.

c Habria \
Past Perf. < Hubiera > hecho.

( Hubiese j
Future Perf. Hubiere hecho.

It may have been.

r might have, )
It < should have, or >

( would have )
It should have been.

been.

Haber, when signifying thei^e to be.

Hay.

Habia.

Hubo.
Habra.

There is.
There are.
There was.
There were.
There will be.

T__ , ,., i There has been.
Ha habido. < rnu i i

( There have been.

Habia habido. There had been.

Hubo habido. There had been.

Habra habido. There shall have

been.

CONJUGATIONS.

449

Haya.

Let there be.

Haya habido.

There may

Haya.

There may be.

have been.

Habria.

r There might,

' There might,

Hubiera.

< would, or

Habria habido.

could,

Hubiese.

( should be.

Hubiera habido. ■

would.

Hubiere.

There might or

Hubiese habido.

or should

should be.

have been.

Hubiere" habido.

There might
or should
have been.

DEFECTIVES.

The following verbs are found used only in the tenses and
persons given in the annexed examples :

Placer.

I

To please.

INDICATIVE.

Pres., 3d per s. sing., Place.
Imperf. " " Placia.

Preterit, "" Plugo.

It pleases.

It was pleasing.

It pleased.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Pres., 3d per s. sing., Plegue.

^ -'' i Pluguiese.

Future Perfect, " Pluguiere.

SOLER.

It may please.
It would please.
It might please.
It should please.

To be wont.

INDICATIVE.

Suelo.
Sueles.
Suele.
Solemos.
Soleis.
Suelen.
31

PRESENT.

I am wont.
Thou art wont.
He is wont.
We are wont.
You are wont.
They are wont.

450

CONJUGATIONS.

IMPERFECT.

Solia.

Solias.

Solia.

Soliamos.

Soliais.

Soli'an.

Yacer.

I was wont.
Thou wast wont.
He was wont.
We were wont.
You were wont.
They were wont.

To lie dead.

No part of this verb is made use of except the third persons o^
the present indicative, yace and yacen, which ai'e generally in-
scribed on tombstones.

CONJUGATION OF A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.

INFINITIVE.
Ser perdonado. ] To be pardoned.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

Siendo perdonado. I Being* pardoned.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

Habiendo sido perdonado. | Having been pardoned.

INDICATIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned.

do.

2. Eres perdo-

nado.

3. Es perdonado.

1. Somos perdonados.

2. Sois perdonados.

3. Son perdonados.

IMPERFECT.

1. Era perdona- I was or used to

do. be pardoned.

2. Eras perdonado.

3. Era perdonado.

1. Eramos perdonados.

2. Erais perdonados.

3. Eran perdonados.

CONJUGATIONS.

451

PRETERIT.

1. Ful perdona- I was par-

do. doned.

2. Fuiste perdonado.

3. Fue perdonado.

1. Fuimos perdonados.

2. Fuisteis perdonados.

3. Fueron perdonados.

FUTURE.

1. Sere perdona- I shall be par-

do. doned.

2. Seras perdonado.

3. Sera perdonado.

1. Seremos perdonados.

2. Sereis perdonados.

3. Seran perdonados.

IMPERATIVE.
2. Se perdonado. Be pardoned. J 2. Sed perdonados.

1. Sea perdonado. I may be par-

doned.

2. Seas perdonado.

3. Sea perdonado.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PRESENT.

1. Seamos perdonados.

2. Seals perdonados.

3. Sean perdonados.

IMPERFECT. — First Termination.

1. Seria perdona- I would be

do. pardoned.

2. Serias perdonado.

3. Seria perdonado.

1. Seriamos perdonados.

2. Serials perdonados.

3. Serian perdonados.

Second Termination.

1. Fuera perdo- I might, could,

nado. would, or

should be
pardoned.

2. Fueras perdonado.

3. Fuera perdonado.

1. Fueramos perdonados.

2. Fuerals perdonados.

3. Fueran perdonados.

452

CONJUGATIONS,

Third Termination.

1. Fueseperdo- I might, could,

nado. would, or

should be
pardoned.

2. Fueses perdonado.

3. Fuese perdonado.

1. Fuesemos perdonados.

2. Fueseis perdonados.

3. Fuesen perdonados.

FUTURE.

1. Fuere perdo- I might or

nado. should be

pardoned.

2. Fueres perdonado.

3. Fuere perdonado.

1. Fueremos perdonados.

2. Fuereis perdonados.

3. Fueren perdonados.

Compound Tenses.
INDICATIVE.

PERFECT.

He sido per-
donado.

Has sido per-
donado.

Ha sido per-
donado.

1. Habia sido

perdonado.

2. Habias sido

perdonado.

3. Habia sido

perdonado.

1. Hube sido

perdonado.

2. Hubiste sido

perdonado.

3. Hubo sido

perdonado.

I have been
pardoned.

1. Hemos sido perdonados.

2. Habeis sido perdonados.

3. Han sido perdonados.

PAST PERFECT.

I had been
pardoned.

1. Habiamos sido perdona-

dos.

2. Habiais sido perdonados.

3. Habian sido perdonados.

PRETERIT PERFECT.

I had been
pardoned.

1. Hubimos sido perdonados.

2. Hubisteis sido perdonados.

3. Hubieron sido perdonados.

CONJUGATIONS,

453

FUTURE PERFECT.

1. Habre sido I shall have been

perdonado. pardoned.

2. Habras sido

perdonado.

3. Habra sido

perdonado.

1. Habremos sido perdonados,

2. Habreis sido perdonados.

3. Habran sido perdonados.

PERFECT.

1. Haya sido I may have been

perdonado. pardoned.

2. Hayas sido

perdonado.

3. Haya sido
perdonado.

PLUPERFECT. — Fivst Termination.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

)T.

1. Hayamos sido perdonados*

2. Hayais sido perdonados.

3. Hayan sido perdonados.

1. Habria sido I would have

perdonado. been pardoned.

2. Habrias sido

perdonado.

3. Habria sido

perdonado.

Second Termination.

1. Habriamos sido
perdonados.

2. Habriais sido perdonados.

3. Habrian sido perdonados.

1. Hubiera sido I might, could,

perdonado. would, or

should have
been pardoned.

2. Hubieras sido

perdonado.

3. Hubiera sido

perdonado.

Third Termination

1. Hubieramos sido
perdonados.

2. Hubierais sido perdonados.

3. Hubieran sido perdonados.

1. Hubiese sido I might, could,

perdonado. would, or

should have
been pardoned.

2. Hubieses sido

perdonado.

3. Hubiese sido

perdonado.

1. Hubiesemos sido
perdonados.

2. Hubieseis sido perdonados.

3. Hubiesen sido perdonados.

454

CONJUGATIONS.

1. Hubiere sido I might or

perdonado. should have

been pardoned.

2. Hubieres sido

perdonado.

3. Hubiere sido

perdonado.

FUTURE PERFECT.

1. Hubieremos sido
perdonados.

2. Hubiereis sido perdonados.

3. Hubieren sido perdonados.

LIST

OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE SPANISH
LANGUAGE.

N. B. — The figures placed after each verb refer to the page at which the model

conjugation for that verb is to be found. For instance^ the number 415

s/ioAjs that Aducir is conjugated like Conducir, /ownd at page 415.

Absolver, 411.
Abstraer, 438.
Acertar, 408.
Acordar, 410.
Acostar, 410.
Acrecentar, 409.
Adestrar, 409.
Adherir, 413.
AdquirJr, 416.
Advertir, 413.
Aducir, 415.
Agorar, 410.
Alentar, 409.
Almorzar, 410.
Amolar, 410.
Andar, 417.
Apacentar, 409.
Apostar, 410.
Aprobar, 410.
Apretar, 409.
Arrecirse, 414.
Arrendar, 409.
Arrepentirse, 413.
Ascender, 412.
Asentar, 409.
Asentir, 413.
Aserrar, 409.
Asir, 418.
Asolar, 410.
Atender, 411.
Aterrar (echar por tie-

rra), 409.
Atestar (rellenar), 409.
Atraer, 438.
Atravesar, 409.
Aventar, 409,
Aventarse, 409.
Avergonzar, 410.

Bendecir, 419.

Caber, 420.
Caer, 438.
Calentar. 409.
Cegar, 409.
Cenir, 414.
Cerner, 412.
Cerrar, 409.
Cocer, 421.
Colar, 410.
Colegir, 414.
Colgar, 410.
Comenzar, 409.
Competir, 414.
Concebir, 414.
Concertar, 409.
Condescender, 412.
Condolerse, 411.
Conducir, 414.
Conferir, 413.
Confesar, 409.
Conocer, 415.
Conseguir, 414.
Consentir, 412.
Consolar, 410.
Constrenir, 414.
Contar, 410.

Contener, like Tener.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Contender, 412.
Contradecir, 423.
Contraer, 438.
Controvertir, 413.
Convertir, 413.
Corregir, 414.

Dar, 422.
Decaer, 438.
Deoentar, 409.
Decir, 423.
Deducir, 415.

Defender, 412.
Deferir, 413.
Degollar, 410.
Demoler, 411.
Demostrar, 410.
Denegar, 409.
Denostar, 410.
Derrengar, 409.
Derretir, 414.
Desavenir, 440.
Descender, 412.
Descollar, 410.
Descordar, 410.
Descomedirse, 414.
Desembrar, 409.
Deshacer, 427.
Deshelar, 409.
Desleir, 414.
Desolar, 410.
Desollar, 410.
Desovar, 410.
Despedir, 413.
Despernar, 409.
Despertar, 409.
Desplegar, 409.
Desterrar, 409.
Desvergonzarse, 410.
Diferir, 413.
Digerir, 413.
Discernir, 412.
Discordar, 410.
Disolver, 411.
Divertir, 413.
Doler, 411.
Dormir, 424.

Elegir, 414.
Em bestir, 414.
Empedrar, 409.
Empezar, 409.

455

456

LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS.

Emporcar, 410.
Encender, 412.
Encerrar, 409.
Encomendar, 409.
Encontrar, 410.
Encordar, 410.
Engreirse, 413.
Engrosar, 410.
Enmendar, 409.
Enrodar, 410.
Ensangrrentar, 409.
Entender, 412.
Enterrar, 409.
Envestir, 414.
Erguir, 425.
Errar, 426.
Escarmentar, 409.
Escocer, 421.
Esforzar, 410.
EsTAR, 400. (See auxili-
ary verbs.)
Estrenir, 413.
Expedir, 413.
Extender, 412.

Forzar, 410.
Fregar, 409.

Gemir, 414.
Gobernar, 409.

Haber, 400. (See auxili-
aries and imperson-
als.)

Hacer, 427.

Heder, 412.

Helar, 409.

Henchir, 413.

Hender, 412.

Henir, 413.

Herir, 413.

Herrar, 409.

Hervir, 413.

Holgar, 410.

Hollar, 410.

Impedir, 413.
Incensar, 409.
Inducir, 415.
Inferir, 412.
Ingerir, 4] 3.
Inquirir, 416.
Introducir, 415.
Invernar, 409.
Invertir^ 413.
Investir, 413.
Ir,428.

Jugar, 429,

Llover, 411.

Maldecir, 423.
Manifestar, 409.
Mantener, like Tkner.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Medir, 414.
Mentar, 409.
Mentir, 412.
Merendar, 409.
Moler, 411.
Morder, 411.
Morir, 414.
Mostrar, 410.
Mover, 413.

Negar, 409.
Nevar, 409.

Oir, 430.
Oler, 431.

Pedir, 413.
Pensar, 409.
Perder, 412.
Pervertir, 413.
Placer, 449.
Plegar, 409.
Poblar, 410.
Poder, 432.
Poner, 433.
Preferir. 413.
Probar, 410.
Producir, 415.
Proferir, 412.

Quebrar, 409.
Querer, 434.

Raer, 438.
Recomendar, 409.
Recordar, 410.
Recostar, 410.
Reducir, 415.
Referir, 413.
Regar, 409.
Regir, 414.
Regoldar, 410.
Reir, 435.
Remendar, 409.
Rendir, 414.
Renovar, 410.
Reiiir, 414.
Repetir, 414.
Requebrar, 410.
Requerir, 413.
Rescontrar, 410.

ResoUar. 410.
Retentar, 409.
Reventar, 409.
Revolcar, 410.
Rodar, 410.
Rogar, 410.

Saber, 436.
Salir, 437.
Satisfacer, 427.
Segar, 409.
Seguir, 414.
Sembrar. 409.
Sentar, 409.
Sentir. 412.
Ser. 400. (See aux-
iliary verbs.)
Servir, 414.
Serrar, 409.
Soldar, 410.
Soler, 449.
Soltar, 410.
Solver, 411.
Sonar, 410.
Sonar, 410.
Sosegar, 409.
Soterrar, 409.
Sugerir, 412.

Temblar, 409.
Tender, 412.
Tener, 400. (See

auxiliary verbs.)
Teiiir, 414.
Tentar, 409.
Torcer, 411.
Tostar. 410.
Traducir, 415.
Traer, 438.
Trascender, 412.
Trascordarse, 410.
Trasegar, 409.
Trocar, 410.
Tronar, 410.
Tropezar, 409.

Valer, 439.
Venir, 440.
Ver, 441.
Verier, 412.
Vestir, 414.
Volar, 410.
Volcar, 410.
Vol ver, 411.

Yacer, 450.
Zaherir, 413.

VOCABULARIEa

EXPLANATIONS.

ABBREVIATIONS.

Act. part., Active participle.

Adj., Adjective.

Adv., Adverb.

Amer., American ; peculiar to the

Americas.
Conj., Conjunction.
F., Feminine.
Indef., Indefinite.
Interj., Interjection.
Interr., Interrogative.
Irr., Irregular.

Lat., Latin.

M., Masculine.

Num., Numeral,

Ord., Ordinal.

P. P., Past Participle.

Pers., Personal.

Poss., Possessive.

Pres. Part., Present Participle.

Pron., Pronoun.

Ref., Reflexive.

S., Substantive.

KEY TO PRONUNCIATION.
(These rules apply solely to the italicized words given as the approximate
pronunciation, and placed after those which follow the true Spanish orthog-
raphy. )

S, as in command.

a, as in father.

a (Spanish long e), as in mate.

c, as in cart.

5, as in men.

e (Spanish i), as in be.

g and gh, as in go.

h, as in host (the nearest approach which English affords to the Spanish
guttural g and j).

hr, used to represent the Spanish rr, and r following n, is but a makeshift ;
but the best to be obtained.

k, takes the place of the hard c sound at the end of syllables.

o (invariable), as in lord.

8, as the double s of pass.

th (the Castilian sound of soft c and of z), as in thin.

TH (the Spanish soft d), as in that.

u (invariable), as in rule.

All words containing soft c (i e., c before e and i), z and II, are given
two pronunciations ; the first, in italics, is the correct Castilian pronuncia-
tion ; the second [in brackets] is the common pronunciation in Spanish-
America, but is avoided by those wishing to speak Spanish correctly.

458

SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.

Note. — The references are made to the lessons of the Method where each
word is treated.

A, (J, prep., at, to, in, and sign of per-
sonal direct or indirect object. Voy
a Francia, I am going to France ; d
lo menos, at least ; d la verdad, in-
deed ; a la espanola, in the Spanish
fashion ; amo d mi amigo, I love my
friend. L. 4.

Abajo, d-bd'ho, adv., below, down,
down-stairs. L. 33.

Abalanzar, d-bd-ldn-thdr' CS-bS-iSn-sSr'],
to balance, to spring, to rush, to
hurl one's self. L. 57.

A}ia.iidona.T, d-bdn-do-ndr' , to abandon,
to give up, to leave, to desert. L. 58.

Abanico d-bd-iie'-co, s. m., fan. L. 52.

Abierto d-be^r'-to, p. p. irr. of Abrir
(which see). L. 52.

Abogado, d-bo-gd'-THo, s. m., lawyer,
advocate, attorney. L. 49.

Aborrecible, d-bo-hrd-the'-bld [S-bo-hra-
se'-bla], ad,]., hateful. L. 24.

Abril, d-brel\ s. m., April. L. 24.

Abrir, d-brer\ to open. Abrir se, to be
opened, to bloom {i. e., to open up).
L. 28.

Aca, d-cd\ adv., here. Acd y all^, here
and there. L. 18.

Acabar, d-cd-bdr\ to finish, to end.
Acabar de, to be or have just. Aca-
bar con, to kill, to put an end to, k)
destroy. L. 28.

Academia, d-cd-THd'-mea, s. f., acade-
my. L. 51.

Acaso, d-cd'-so^ adv., perchance, by
chance, perhaps. Si acaso, if at all.
For si acaso, in case that. L. 32.

Accidente, dc-the-d^n'-td [ac-se-d6n'-ta],
s. m., accident. L. 40.

Acoldn, d-theon' [ac-seon'], s. f., action,
share. L. 24.

Acento, d-tMn'-to [S-sSn'-to], s. m., ac-
cent. L. 47.

Aceptar, dth^p-tar' [S-sgp-tar'], to ac-
cept. L. 45.

Acerca, d-tMr'-ca [a-s^r'-ca], prep, {acer-
ca de, about). L. 49.

Acertar, d-tMr-tdr' [a-ser-t2r'], to make
out or find out, to hit the mark, to
succeed, to be right {i. e., to conjec-
ture rightly). L. 34.

Acierto, d-the^r'-to [S-seer'-to], s. m.,
success. . L. 52.

Acomodar, d-co-mo-ddr\ to accommo-
date, to suit. L. 31.

Acompanar, d-com-pdn-ydr\ to accom-
pany. L. 47.

Aconsejar, d-con-sd-hdr', to counsel, to
advise. L. 45.

Aoordar, d-cor-ddr\ to accord, to agree,
to tune. Acordarse, to remember.
L. 46.

Acostar, d-cos-tdr. to lay down. Acos-
tarse^ to lie down, to go to bed. L.
35.

Actual, dc-tMr, adj., present, actual.
L. 52.

Acudir, d-c4-THer\ to hasten, to run,
to turn (to), to refer (to). L. 49.

Acuerdo, d-cuir'-do^ s. m., agreement,
accord, decision (of a court). L.
42.

AcuUa, d-cul-yd' CS-cft-ya'], adv., there.
Aqui y aculld, to and fro ; here and
there. L. 18.

Adelantar, d-dd-ldn-tdr' , to advance, to
make progress. L. 36.

Adelante, d-dd-ldn'-td, adv., forward.
En adelante, henceforward. Ade-
lante ! go on, go forward, go ahead.
L. 43. ,

' 459

460

VOCABULARY.

Ademan, d-dd-mdn\ s. m., posture, air,
gesture. L. 44.

Ademas, a-da-mas, prep., besides; adv.,
moreover, besides. L. 37.

Adentro, d-d^n'-tro, adv., in, within,
inside. L. 47.

Adivinar, a-de-ve-ndr\ to guess, to di-
vine. L. 46.

Adjetivo, dd-hd-te'vo^ s. m., adjective.
L. 43.

Amirable, <?-me-ra'-6?a, adj., admirable,
wonderful. L. 51.

Admiracion, &d-me-rd-theon' [ad-me-rS-
seon'], s. f., admiration, wonder. L.
51.

Admirar, dd-me-rdr\ to admire, to won-
der at. L. 61.

Adonde, d-don'-dd (see Donde). L. 9.

Adquirir, dd-]ce-rer\to acquire. L. 42.

Adverbial, dd-v^r-bedl\a.dj., adverbial.
L. 50.

Adverbio, dd-v^r'-beo^ s. m., adverb.
L. 43.

Advertir, dd-v^r-t€r\ to advise, to men-
tion, to point out, to warn, to observe.
L. 43.

Aereo, dd'-rdo, adj., aerial. L. 48.

Afectacidn,<i-/^fc-<<t-</ieow'[5-f?k-ta-seon'],
s. f., affectation. L. 24.

Afectar, d-f^k-tdr', to affect. L. 45.

Afeitar, d-fde-tdr\ to shave, to paint
(the face). L. 33.

Afirmacidn, d-fer-md-theon' [2-fer-in5-
s6on'], s. f., affirmation. L. 24.

Afirmar, drfer-mdr\ to affirm, to make
firm, to strengthen, L. 48.

Afligir, d-jle-her\ to afflict. L. 48.

Afortunado, d-for-t'd-nd'-THO^ adj., for-
tunate. L. 63.

Ageno, (!-/ia'-720, adj., foreign, belong-
ing to others. L. 63.

Agitacidn, d-he-td-theon' [a-h6-t«-86on'],
s. f., agitation. L. 24.

Agradar, dgrd-THdr\ to please. L. 53.

Agradecer, d-grd-THd-tMr' [S-grS-rnS-
eer], to thank, to be obliged to, to be
grateful for. L. 39.

Agreg'ar, d-grd-gdr\ to add to, to unite.
L. 49.

Agrio, ^'-gfreo, adj., sour. L. 22.

Agua, a'-gita, s. f., water. L. 7.

Ag'nantar, a-guan-tdr\ to support, to
bear, to put up with, to bear with.
L. 53.

Aguardiente, a-gu^r-de^n'-td, s. m.,
brandy, rum. L. 50.

Agudeza, d-gu-THd'-tha [5-g<i-THa'-sa], s.
f., wit, or witty saying. L. 57.

AgUero, Q-gud'-ro^ s. m., augury, omen.
L. 45.

Ahora, ao'ra, adv., now. L. 27.

Aire, Q-erd, s. m., air. L. 46.

Ajedrez, d-hd-drdth' [S-ha-drSs'l, s. m.,

chess. L. 42.
Ala, d'-la^ s. f., wing. L. 58.
Alabanza, d-ld-bdn'-thg, [a-lS-ban'-sa], s.

f., praise. L. 53.
Alarde, dlar'-dd, s. m. Hacer alarde^

to boast. L. 63.
Alberto. dlMr'-to, s. m. , Albert. L. 38.
Alcance, dl-cdn'-thd [ai-cSn'-sa], s. m.,

reach. L. 53.
Alcanzar, dl-cdn-thdr' [Si-cSn-sSr'], to

reach, to overtake, to take up with,

to catch. L. 53.
Alegrar, d-ld-grdr\ to give joy, to make

glad. L. 37.
Alegre, d-ld'-grd, adj., joyful, glad,

merry. L. 21.
Alejandro, d-ldhdn'-dro, s. m., Alex-
ander. L. 3,
Aleli, d-ld-le\ s. m., gilliflower. L. 9.
Aleman, d-ld-mdn\ s. m., German (lan-
guage). L. 2.
Aleman, d-ld-mdn\ s. m., German; adj.,

German. L. 3.
Alemania, d-ld-md'-neQ^s. f., Germany.

L. 9.
Alfiler, dl-fe-ldr\ s. m. and f., pin. L.

46.
Algrazara, ^Z-gf^-</i^'-rg [5i-g2-8a'-ra], s. f.,

shouts of joy. L. 54.
Algoddn, ^Z-gfo-r^on', s. m., cotton. L.

5.
Alguien. dl'-ghe^n, pron., somebody,

anybody, some one, any one. L. 11.
Alguno, dl-gu'-no, adj., some. L. 11.
Algxino, dl-gu'-no, pron. ind. and adj.,

somebody, some one, anybody, any

one, some. L. 11.
Alhaja, d-ld'-kg, s. f., jewel. L. 57.
Alimentar, d-le-mhi-tdr\ to feed. Ali-

mentarse de esperanzas, to live on

hoi)e. L. 53.
Alimento, dle-m^n'-to^ s. m., food. L.

49.
Alia, dl-yd' [S-yS'], adv., there, yonder.

L. 18.
Alma, dl'-ma, s. f., soul. L. 47.
Almacen, dl-md-thdn' [al-ma-san'], s. m.,

store, warehouse. L. 62.
Almorzar, dlmor-thdr' [Si-mor-sSr'], to

breakfast, to take breakfast. L. 35.
Almuerzo, dl-mu^r'-tho [ai-mfigr'-so], s.

m., breakfast. L. 55.
Alrededor, dl-rd-THd-THor\ adv.,

around. L. 56.
Alteracion, dl-tdrd-theon' LSl-ta-rS-seon'],

s. f., alteration. L. 56.
Alto, dl'-to, adj., high, tall. L. 21.
Altura, dlM'-ra, s. f., height. L. 37.
Alumbrar, d-ldm-brdr', to light. L. 64.
Amable, d-md'-bld, adj., amiable, lova-
ble. L. 47.

rOCABULART.

461

Amador, <i-md-THor\ s. m., lover. L.
49.

Amanecer, d-md-nd-tMr' [a-ma-na-ser'], to
become morning, to dawn, to be in a
place at daybreak. L. 30.

Amante, d-mdn'-td, act. p. and s., lov-
ing, lover, sweetheart. L. 38.

Amar, d-mdr', to love. L. 21.

Amarillo, d-md-rel'-yo [S-ma-re'-yo],adj.,
yellow. L. 54.

Ambicidn, dm-be-theon' CSm-bg-sgon'], s.
f., ambition. L. 60.

Ambos, dm' -bos, pron., both. L. 28.

Amenasar, d-md-nd-sdr\ to menace, to
threaten. L. 59.

Amenidad, d-mdne-THdTH\ s. f., amen-
ity. L. 32.

Amigra, d-me'-ga, s. f., friend. L. 13.

Amigro, d-me'-go, s. m., friend. L. 13.

Amis tad, d-mes-tdTH', s. f., friendship.
L. 61.

Amor, d-mor\ s. m., love. L. 45.

Amplio, dm'-pleo, adj., ample. L. 52.

Ampo, dm'-po, s. m., whiteness (of
snow). L. 61.

Aiialitioo,^-n^-ie'-<e-co, adj., analytical.
L. 35.

Anaranjado, d-ndrdng-hd'-THO^ adj.,
orange (color). L. 54.

Ancho, dn'-cho, adj., wide, broad.
L. 47.

Anchura, dn-chU'-rf^^ s. f., width,
breadth. L. 61.

Anciano, dn-thed'-no [5n-8S2'-no], adj.
and s., old, old man. L. 48.

Andar, dn-ddr\ to walk, to go. L. 44.

An^cdota, d-nW -do-tg,, s. f, anecdote.
L. 44.

Angel, g,ng'-Ml, s. m., angel. L. 60.

Ang-ulo, dn'-gu-lo^ s. m , angle. En
dngulos rectos, at right angles. L.
60.

Animal, d-7ie-mdr , s. m., animal. L. 62.

Animar, d-nemdr', to animate, to en-
courage. L. 38.

Anoche, d-no'-chd, adv., last night. L.
28.

Anochecer, d-no-chd-tMr' [^-no-cha-sSr'],
to become night, to be here or there
at nightfall. L. 30.

Antagonista, dn-tdgo-yies'-tg,, s. m., an-
tagonist. L. 36.

Ante, dn'-td, prep., before, in presence
of. L. 16.

Anteayer, dn-tdd-y^r\ adv., the day be-
fore yesterday. L. 16.

Antecedente, dn-td-thd-dPn' -td [an-ta-sa-
d?n'-ta], s, m., antecedent. L. 61.

Antenoche, dn-td-no'-chd, the night be-
fore last. L. 23.

Anteojo, dn-tdo'-ho, s. m., eye-glass.
Anteojos, spectacles. L. 53.

Antepeniiltimo, dn-td-pd-nuV -te-mo, adj*

and s. m., antepenultimate, ante-
penult.
Anterior, dn-td-reor\ adj., preceding,

foregoing, previous, former. L. 49.
Antes, dn'-tes, prep. Antes de, before.

L. 42.
Antes, dn'-t^s, 9,dy., rather, first, sooner

than, but. L. 16.
Antepuesto, dn-td-puds'-to, p. p., pre-
fixed ; s. prefix. L. 52.
Antiguo, dn-te'-guo, adj., ancient, old.

L. 52.
Antisocial, dn-te-so-thedV Can-te-so-seal'],

adj., antisocial. L. 50.
Antojo, dn-to'-ho, s. m., whim, long-

mg. L. 63.
Anadir, dn-yd-THer\ to add to. L. 49.
Anil, dn-yeV, s. m., indigo (color). L.

54.
Aio, dn'-yo, s. m., year. L. 16.
Apariencia, d-pd-re^n'-thea [a-pS-rggn'-

sea], s. f., appearance. L. 53.
Apeg-ar, d-pd-gdr', to stick, to attach,

to paste, to adhere. L. 54.
Apenas, d-pd'-nds, adv., scarcely, hard-
ly. L. 29.
Aplicar, d-ple-cdr\ to apply. L. 62.
Apostar, d-pos-tdr', to bet, to wager.

L. 63.
Apoyar, d-po-ydr', to support, to lean,

to protect, to aid. L. 50.
Apreciable, d-prd-thed'-bld [S-pra-seS'-

bia], adj., appreciable, respected. L.

56.
Apremiar, d-prd-medr', to press, to urge.

L. 45.
Aprender, d-pr^n-d^r' , to learn. L. 6.
Apretar, d-prd-tdr\ to tighten, to press,

to urge. L. 65.
Aprisa, d-pre'-sa, adv., quickly. L. 6.
Aprobacion, d-pro-bd-theon' [a-pro-bS-

seon'], s. f., approbation. L. 24.
Aprobar, d-pro-bdr', to approve. L.

35.
Aprovechar, d-pro vd-chdr' , to progress,

to improve, to make the most of. L.

52.
Aproximar, d-proTc-se-mdr' , to approxi-
mate, to approach. L. 44.
Apto, dp' -to, adj., apt, fit. L. 51.
Apurado, d-pu-rd'-THO, adj . , straitened,

embarrassed. L. 44.
Aquel, d-MV, pron., that one, he, the

former. L. 18.
Aqui, d-M', adv., here.^ L. 18.
Arbol, ar'-bol, s. m., tree. L. 49.
Arboleda, cir-bo-ld' -tslq^ s. f., grove.

L. 49.
Arenal, d-rd-ndV, s. m., sandy ground.

1.. 49.
Arguir, Qr-guer', to argue. L. 34.

462

VOCABULARY,

Aristocracia, H-res-fo-crd-the'a [a-res-to-
crS-se-'a], s. f., aristocracy. L. 60.

Aristooratico, d-res-to-crd'-te-co, adj.,
aristocrat. L. 35.

Aritmetioa, &-ret-me'-te-ca, s. f., arith-
metic. L. 21.

Armar, ar-mdr', to arm. L. 59.

Arpa, ar'-pQ, s. f., harp. L. 15.

Arquitecto, ar-ke-Uk'-tOj s. m., archi-
tect. L. 48.

Arquitectura, ar-he-t^k-tu'-ra, s. f., ar-
chitecture. L. 51.

Arreglar, a-hrd-gldr', to arrange, to
regulate, to settle. L. 60.

Arrepentirse, d-hrd-pen-ter'-sd, to re-
pent. L. 38.

Arrestar, d-hrh-tdr\ to arrest. L. 37.

Arriba, ^7ire'-6a, adv., above, upstairs.
L. 33.

Arte, ar'-td, s, m. and f., art. L. 31.

Articuio, (ir-te'-cu-lo, s. m., article. L.
43.

Artificial, ar-te-fe-ihedV [ar-te-fg-8521'],
adj., artificial. L. 49.

Artista, (ir-tes-tg,, s. m., artist. L. 36.

Asador, d-sdTHor\ s. m.,spit (for roast-
ing). L. 65.

Ascender, ds-thH-d^r' [S-85n-d?r'], to
ascend, to go up, to mount. L. 37.

Ascension, ds-thtn-seon' [S-sen-seon'J, s.
f., ascension. L. 49.

Asegurar, ^sa-ptt-r^r', to secure, to as-
sure. L. 38.

Asesino, d-sd-se'-no, s. m. , assassin. L.
59.

Asi, d-se\ adv., so, thus. L. 20. Asi
que, so that, as soon as. L. 29. Asi
asi, so so. L. 39.

Asiento, d-sehi'-to, s. m., seat. L. 39.

Asir, d-ser', to seize, to make the most
of. L. 42.

Asno, ds'-no, s. m., ass. L. 61.

Asombro, ^.som-&ro,s.m., amazement.
L. 46.

Astronomia, ds-tro no-me'-dy s. f., as-
tronomy. L. 49.

Atencidn, d-thi-theon' [3-t?n-s5on'], s. f.,
attention. L. 56.

Atender, d-Un-der . to attend. L. 37.

Atlantico, dt-ldn'-te-co, s. m. and adj.,
Atlantic. L. 46.

Atolladero, d-toI-yd-THd'-ro rs-to-ya-
THa'-ro], s. m., difficulty. L. 60.

Atraccidn, d-trdk-theon' [a-trak-se-on'],
s. f., attractiqn. L. 24.

Atras, drtrds\ adv., behind, ago. L.
58.

Atreverse, d-trd-vtr'-sd, to dare. L. |
48.

Atrevimiento, d-trd-ve-mehfi'-to. s, m.,
daring, hardihood, assurance. L.
64.

Atrocidad, d-tro-the-THdrn' [S-tro-sg^
thSth], s. f., atrocity. L. 36.

Atropellar, d-tro-pdl-ydr' [a-tro-pa-yar],
to trample, to run over. L. 51.

Anllar, aul-ydr' [a(i-ySr'], to howl. L.
44.

Aumento, qu-mhi'-to, s. m., augment,
augmentation, increase. L. 59.

Aun, Qun\ adv., still, yet. L. 25.

Annque, aun'-kd, adv., although,
though. L. 36.

Ausencia, Q,vrS(^n' -theQ, [afi-sen'-se^], s. f.,
absence. L. 35.

Ausente, Qu-sH'-td, adj., absent. L.
59.

Alitor, gu-tor',s. m., author. L. 47.

Autoridad, g,u-to-re-THdTH' , s. f., au-
thority, p. 59.

Auxiliar, auk-se-ledr' , s. m. and adj.,
auxiliary. L. 57.

Auxiliar, auk-se-ledr' , to help, to aid.
L. 62.

Auzilio, ailk-se'-leo, s. m., help, assist-
ance. L. 55.

Avenida, d-vd-ne'-THQ, s. f., avenue.
L. 15.

Aventurarse, d-vht-tHirrdr'-sd, to ven-
ture. L. 65.

Avisar, d-ve-sdr', to let know, to in-
form. L. 45.

Ay, Q-e, intj., alas. L. 46.

Ayer, 5-2/?r', adv., yesterday. L. 16.

Ayudar, d-yu-THdr\ to aid, assist, to
help. L. 38.

Azul, d-thul' [2-861'], adj., blue L. 54.

Bailar, hae-ldr\ to dance. L. 28.
Baile, ba'-e-ld, s. m. , dance, ball. L. 30.
Bajar, bd-hdr\ to go or come down, to

lower. L. 53.
Btyo, bd'-hOy adj., low, base, mean. L.

51.
Banco, bdn'-co, s. m,, bank. L. 31.
Bandera, bdn-dd'-rg,. s. f., flag, stand-
ard, banner. L. 58.
Banar,65w-yar', to bathe. L. 49.
Barato, bd-hrd'-to, adj., cheap. L. 13.
Barba. bar'-ba, s. f., chin, beard. L. 59.
Barberia, bar-bd-re'-a, s. f., barber's

shop. L. 50.
Barbero, bar-bd'-ro, s. m., barber. L.

33.
Barbilampino, bdr-be-ldm-pen'-yo, adj.,

thin bearded. L. 50.
Barco, bar'-co, s. m., barque, vessel,

boat. L. 60.
Barbn, bd-ron\ s. m., baron. L. 51.
Barrer, ba-hrer', to sweep. L. 24. """^
Basta, bds'-ta, intj., enough ! L. 3C.
Bastante, &as-<an'-^a, ad v., enough. L.

25.
Bastar, bds-tdr', to be enough. L. 30.

VOCABULARY.

463

Bastdn, hds-ton', s. m., walking-cane.
L. 10.

Baza, bd'-tha [ba'-sa], s. f., trick (at
cards). No dejar meter 6a2;a, not to
let one put in a single word. L. 63.

Bebedor, bd-hd-THor', s. m., tippler,
toper, drinker. L. 65.

Beber, bd-ber', to drink. Beber los vien-
tos por algo, to solicit with much
eagerness, to desire ardently. Beber
como una cuba, to drink like a fish.
L. 7.

Belleza, bM-yd'-th^ [bS-ya'-sa], s. f.,
beauty. L. 51.

Bello, bW-yo [b6'-yo], adj., beautiful,
handsome, fine. L. 31.

Bendecir, bH-dd-ther' LbSn-da-ser'], to
bless. L. 41.

Bendito, b^n-de'-to, adj., blessed. L.
52.

Besar, bd-sdr', to kiss. L. 39.

Beso, bd'-so, s. m., kiss. L. 39.

Biblioteca, be-bleo-td'-ca, s. f., library.
L. 52.

Bien, be^n', adv., well. L. 3. Est^
bien, very well, all right. No bien,
scarcely, no sooner. L. 29.

Bienhechor, be^n-d-chor' , s. m., bene-
factor. L. 50.

Bienvenida, beM-vd-ne'-THn^, s. f., wel-
come. L. 45.

Billete, bel-yd'-td [bg-yS'-ts], s. m., note,
bill, bank-note. L. 7.

Blanoa, bldn'-cci, s. f. Encontrarse sin
blanca, to find one's self without a
cent. L. 64.

Blanco, bldn'-co, adj., white. L. 58.

Blanco, bl&n'-co, s. m., mark, target,
bull's-eye. Quedarse en bianco, to
be left in the lurch.

Bledo, bld'-THo, s. m., straw. No se me
da un bledo, I don't care a straw. L.
63.

Boca, bo'-CQ, s. f., mouth. L. 44. Ha-
blar por boca de ganso, to repeat
what another has said. L. 63.

Bocado, bo-cd'-THo, s. m., mouthful,
bite. Bocado sin hueso, a sinecure.
L. 61.

Bolsa, bol'-sq, s. f., purse. L. 45.

Bolsillo, boi-seV-yo [bol-se'-yo], s. m.,
pocket, purse. L. 47.

Bondad, bon-d&TH', s. f., goodness,
kindness. L. 39.

Bondadoso, bon-dd-Tuo'-so, adj., good,
kind. L. 54.

Bonito, bo-ne'-to, adj., pretty. L. 58.

Borboton, bor-bo-ton', d borbotones, bub-
bling, hurriedly, confusedly. L. 63.

Bosque, bos' -led, s. m., woodland. L.
40.

Bota, bo'-tQ, s. f., boot. L. 10.

Botica, bo-te'-ca, s. f., drug-store. L.

62.
Boticario, bo-te-cd'-reo, s. m., druggist.

L. 49.
Bravata, brd-vd'-ta, s. f., bravado.

Echar bravatas, to boast. L. 62.
Bravo, brd'-vo, adj., daring, fierce. L.

44.
Bravo ! brd'-vo, intj., bravo ! L. 48.
Brazo, brd'-tho [bra'-so], s. m., arm. L.

44.
Bribdn, bre-bon', s. m., scoundrel, ras-
cal. L. 32.
Brnto, bru'-to, s. m., brute, ignorant

person. L. 48.
Bruto, bru'-to, adj., brutish, crude,

ignorant. L. 48.
Bueno, bud' -no, adj., good. L. 7. De

buenas i, primeras, all at once. L. 62.
Buey, bud'-e, s. m., ox. L. 58.
Bula, bu'-la, s. f. Tener bula para todo,

to act according to one's fancy. L. 64.
Bulla, bul'-yOf [bfi'-ya], s. f., noise. Me-
ter bulla, to make a noise. L. 63.
BuUicio, bul-ye'-theo Lbfi-ye'-seoJ, s. m.,

bustle, noise, uproar. L. 64.
Bulto, bid' -to, s. m., bundle. Hablar

a bulto^ to talk at random. L. 63.
Burla, bur'-la, s. f., jest, joke. Hablar

d burlas, to speak in jest. L. 33.
Burlar, bur-ldr', to jest. Burlame de

alguno, to make fun of, to laugh at

any one. Burla burlando, half jest,

half earnest. L. 33.
Burldn, bur-Ion', s. m., wag, jester.

L. 44.
Busca, bus'-CQ, s. f., search. En btisca

de, in search of. L. 55.
Buscar, bus-cdr', to search, to look for.

L. 4. Buscar cinco pies al gato, to

pick a quarrel. L. 4.

Caballejo, cd-bdl-yd'-ho [cjC-bS-ya'-hb], s.
m., (dim. of Caballo), nag, miser-
able horse. L. 49.

Caballero, cd-bdl-yd'-ro [cS-bS-ya'-ro], s.
m., sir, gentleman, knight, horse-
man. L. 2.

Caballo, cd-bdl'-yo [ca-ba'-yo], s. m.,
horse. L. 4.

Cabello, cd-bW-yo [cS-bS'-yo], s. m., hair.
L. 33. Tomar la ocasion por los ca-
bellos, to profit by the occasion, to
take time by the forelock. L. 61.

Caber, cd-b^r', to hold, to contain. No
caber de gozo, to be overjoyed.
i Puede cciber en tu imaginacion ?
Can such a thing enter into your
imagination ? No cabe md,s, nothing
more can be desired. L. 42.

Cabeza, cd-bd'-tha [cS-ba-sa'],s. f., head.
L. 28.

464

VOCABULARY.

Cable, cd'-hli, s. m., cable. L. 46.
Cabo, cd'-bo, s. m., end. Al caho, at

last. L. 54.
Cada, c&'-THa, pron. , each, every. Cada

vez, every time. Cada una, each,

every one. L. 43.
Caer, cd-iir', to fall, to see, to under-
stand, to be, to fall due. L. 41. Caer

de pies, to fall on one's feet. Ya cai-

go en ello, now I see, understand.

Las ventanas caeyi i> la plaza, the

windows look on the square. L. 59.
Cafe, cd-fd', s. m., coffee, coffee-house.

L. 14.
Caja, cd'-ha, s. f., box, case, cash (com-
mercial). L. 60.
Cal, cdl, s. f., lime. De cal y canto, of

solid masonry. L. 48.
Calabaza, cd-ld-bd'-tha [cS-iS-bS'-sa], s. f.,

pumpkin. Dar calabaza^, to give

the mitten. L. 61.
Calcular, cM-cH-ldr', to calculate. L.

51.
Caldo, cdl'-do, s. m., broth. L. 44.
Calducho, cdl-dii'-cho, s. m., thin or

poor broth. L. 44.
Calentar, cd-lH-tdr\ to heat, to warm.

L. 34.
Calentura, cd-lH-tu'-rQ, s. f., fever. L.

60.
Caliente, cd-leH'-td, adj., hot, warm.

L. 44.
Callado, cdl-yd'-THo [cS-yS'-THo], adj.,

silent, taciturn. L. 20.
Callar, cdl-ydr' [cS-ySr'], to keep silence.

Callar su pico, to hold one's tongne,

to say nothing. L. 42.
Calle, cdl'-yd [ca-y5], s. f., street. De-
jar ^ uno en la calle, to strip one of

his all. L. 15.
Calor, cd-lor', s. m., heat, warmth. L.

25.
Calva, cdl'-va, s. f., baldness, bald place.

L. 45.
Calvo, cdl'-vo, adj., bald. L. 45.
Calza, cdl'-iha [cSi'-sal. s. f., stockings.

Tomar las cahasde Villadiego, to

make off, to make a hurried escai)e.

L. 50.
Cama, cd'-md, s. f . , bed. Guardar cama,

to be confined to the bed. L. 14.
Cambiar, cdm bedr', to change. L. 59.
Cambio, cdm'-beo, s. m., change. L.

46.
Camino, cd-me'-no, s. m., way, road.

L. 60.
Camisa, cd-me'-sa, s. f., shirt. Meterse

en camisa de once varas, to interfere

in the affairs of others. L. 46, |

Campo, cdm'-po, s. m., field, country,

camp. Dejar el campo libre, to leave ;

the field to one's competitors. L. 59. (

Canasto, cdrnds'-to, s. m., basket. L,

58.^
Candidamente, cdn'-de-THd-m^n-td, adv.,

candidly. L. 48.
Cansado, cdn-sd'-THO, adj., tired, tire-
some. Estar cansado, to be tired.

Ser cansado, to be tiresome. L. 20.
Cansar, cdn-sdr', to tire, to fatigue.

L. 33.
Cantar, cdn-tdr', to sing. L. 15.
Cantatriz, cdn-td-treth' [can-ta-tres'], s.

f., singer (female). L. 15.
Ca,ntida,d., cdn-te-THdTH' , s. f., quantity,

sum. L. 60.
Canto, cdn'-to, s.m., singing, cut stone.

L. 48.
Cantor, cdn-tor', s. m., singer. L. 15.
Canon, cdn-yon', s. m., cannon or deep

ravine. L. 44.
Canonazo, cdn-yo-nd'-tho [can-yo-nS'-so],

s. m., cannon shot, gun shot. L.44.
Capa, cd'-pa, s. f., cloak. Andar de

capa caida, to be crestfallen. L. 60.
Capacidad, cd-pd-the-THdrn' [ca-pa-se-

thSth'], s. f., capacity, capability.

L. 36.
Capaz, cd-pdth' [c5-p&'], adj., capable.

L. 59.
Capitan, cd-pe-tdn', s. m., captain. L.

52.
Capricho, ed-pre'-cho, s. m., whim, fan-
cy, caprice. L. 60.
Cara, c4'-ra, s. f., face Dar d, alguno

con la puerta en la cara, to shut the

door in one's face. L. 60.
Caracter, cd-rdk'-t^r (ifr. plural, carac-

teres), s. m., character, disposition.

L. 40.
Caramba ! cd-rdm,'-ba, intj., strange!

zounds ! confound it ! L. 65.
Carcajada, car-ca-hd'-THd, s. f., horse

laugh, burst of laughter. L. 54.
Carcel, car'-fhH [car'-sel], s. f., prison.

L. 34.
Carga, cqr'-ga, s. f., load, burden,

charge. L. 60.
Cargrar, car-i dr', to charge, to load, to

heap. L. 47.
Cargo, car'-go, s. m., load, charge, em-
ployment, office. L. 60.
Caridad, c^-re-THdTH' , s. f., charity.

L. 41.
Cariredondo, cd-re-hrd-don'-do, adj.,

round-faced. L. 59.
Came, car'-nd, s. f., flesh, meat. L. 7.
Carnero, car-nd'-ro, s. m., mutton,

sheep. L. 40.
Carniceria, car-ne-thd-re' a [car-ifg-sS-

re'-a], s. f., meat market, butcher-
shop. L. 11.
Carnicero, car-ne-thd'-ro [car-ne-Ba'-ro],

s. m., butcher. L. 11.

VOCABULARF.

465

Carnuza, car-nH'-tha [car-nft'-sa], s. f.,
bad or spoiled meat. L. 49.

Caro, ca'-ro, adj., dear, costly, beloved.
L. 13.

Carpintero, car-pen-td'-roj s. m., car-
penter. L. 33.

Carrera, cd-hrd'-ra, s. f., course, career,
race, profession. L. 48.

Cairo, c(i'-hro, s. m., car, wagon. L.
58.

Carmaje, ca-hrHiji'-hd, s. m., carriage.
L. 51.

Carta, cqr'-tQ,, s. f., letter. L. 7.

Cartilla, car-tel'-yg, [car-te'-ya], s. f.,
primer. Cosa que no est^ en la car-
tilla, something strange or uncom-
mon. L. 61.

Casa, ca'-sa, s. f., house. L. 9.

Cascaras ! cds'-cd-rds, intj., oh! An
exclamation expressive of astonish-
ment or admiration. L. 63.

Casero, cd-sd'-ro, adj., domestic, home-
like. Comedia casera, household
play, parlor play. L. 59.

Casi, cd'-se, adv., almost. L. 32.

Caso, cd'-so, s. m., case, event. No
haga usted caso de eso, take no no-
tice of it. L. 60.

Castana, cds-tdn'-yq, s. f., chestnut.
L. 40.

Castellano, cds-tdl-yd'-no [cSs-ta-yS'-no],
s. m., Castilian language. L. 55.

Castellano, cds-tdl-yd'-no [cSs-ts-yS'-no],
adj., Castilian. L. 55.

Castillo, cds-tel'-yo [cas-te'-yo], s. m.,
castle. Hacer castillos en el aire, to
build castles in the air. L. 48.

Casualidad, cd-sM(i-le-THdTH, s. f., ac-
cident, chance, casualty, hazzard.
L. 60.

Casucha, cd-su'-cha, s. f., miserable
house. L. 44.

Catolicismo, cd-to-le-thes'-mo [cS-to-is-
ses'-mo], s. m., Catholicism. L. 49.

Catorce, cd-tor'-thd [cS-tor'-sa], num.
adj., fourteen. Luis Catorce, Louis
the Fourteenth. L. 14.

Causa, cau'-sa, s. f., cause. A causa
de, on account of. L. 40.

Causar, cau-sdr', to cause. L. 51.

Caza, cd'-iha [cS'-sa], s. f., chase, hunt.
Ir ^ la caza, to go hunting. L. 58.

Cazar, cd-thdr' [cS-sar'], to chase, to
hunt. L. 58.

Ceoa, thd'-ca [sa'-cal. De Ceca en Meca,
to wander from pillar to post. L. 61.

Celebraci6n, thd-ld-brd-theon' [sa-ia-bra-
se-on'], s. f., celebration. L. 39.

Celebrar, thd-ld-brdr' [sa-ia-brar'l, to
celebrate. Celebro que usted haya
venido, I am glad you have come.
L. 39.

32

Celeste, thd-les'-tdlBsi-iSs'-tsil^adj., heav-
enly, celestial. L. 49.

Celestial, thd-Us-tedV [sa-ies-teal'], adj.,
celestial, heavenly. L. 49.

Celioo, thd'-le-co [sa'-ie-co],adj., heaven-
ly (used in poetry only). L. 49.

Celo, thd'-lo [sS'-io], s. m., zeal, jealousy.
L. 55.

Cena, thd'-na [sa'-na], s. f., supper. Last
Supper. L. 52. "

Cenar, thd-ndr' [sa-nar'], to sup, to take
supper. L. 39.

Centavo, tMn-td'-vo [sgn-tS'-vo], s. m.,
cent. L. 14.

Centella, tMn-tW-ya [sen-tg'-ya], s. f.,
flash, spark. Echar rayos y cente-
llas, to foam with rage. L. 62.

Centena, then-td'-na [sgn-ta'-na], s. f.,
about a hundred. L. 40.

Centenar, then-td-ndr' [s5n-ta-nar'], s. m.,
a hundred. L. 40.

Cerca, th^'-cg, [sSr'-ca], adv., near, close
by. Cerca de su casa, near his house.
L. 31.

Ceremonial, thd-rd-mo-nedl' [sa-ra-mo-ne-
51], adj., ceremonial, ceremonious.
L. 54.

Cerrar, the-hrdr'^ [se-hrar'], to shut, to
close. L. 34.

Cerrojo, tM-hro'-ho [sa-hro'-ho], s. m.,
bolt. L. 59.

Cerveza, tMr-vd'-thg, [sgr-va'-sa], s. f.,
ale, beer. L. 7.

Chaleco, chd-ld'-co, s. m., vest. L. 10.

Chancear, chdn-thedr' [chSn-sSSr'], to
jest, to joke. L. 58.

Chanza, chdn'-tha [chSn'-sa], s. f., jest,
joke. L. 58.

Char la, chqr'-la, s. f., chat, chit chat,
pi-attle. L. 60.

Charlar, char-ldr', to chat, to prattle.
L. 37.

Chasco, chds'-co, s. m., disappointment.
Llevarse un chasco solemne, to be
greatly disappointed. L. 46.

Chelin, chd-len', s. m., shilling. L. 61.

Chico, che'-co, adj., little, small. L. 44.

Chiquito, che-ke'-to, dim. adj., very
small, very little, little one. L. 44.

Chito, che'-to, intj., hush! silence! L.
46.

Chocolate, cho-co-ld'-td, s. m., choco-
late. L. 14.

Ciegro, thed'-go [sea'-go], adj. and s. m.,
blind. A degas, blindly, in the
dark. L. 48.

Cielo, thed'-lo [sea'-io], s. m., heaven,
sky, ceiling. Tomar el cielo con las
manos, to be transported with joy,
grief, or passion. L. 45.

Cien, the-^n' [se-en'l, num. adj., a hun-
dred. (See CiENTO.) L. 14.

466

VOCABULABY.

Ciencia, the-^n'-theg, [se-en'-sea], s. f.,

knowledge, science. L. 45.
Ciento, the-^n'-to [se-Sn'-to], num. adj., a

hundred. (See Cien.) L. 14.
Cierto, the-^r'-to [se-Sr'-to], adj., certain.

L. 48.
Cimiento, the-me-hi' -to [se-me-en'-to], s.

m., foundation. L. 59,
Cinco, then'-co [sen'-co], num. adj., five,

fifth. L. 14.
Cincuenta, then-ku^n'-ta [sen-kuen'-ta],

num. adj., fifty, fiftieth. L. 14.
Circunspeccion, ther-cun-spek-theon'

[ser-cun-spek-seon'], s. f., circumspec-
tion. L. 24.
Circunstancia, ther-cun-stdn'-thea [ser-

cftn-stan'-sea], s. f., circumstance. L.

40.
Cita, the' -fa [se'-ta], s. f., appointment,

quotation. L. 60.
Citar, the-tdr' [se-tSr'], to make an en-
gagement, to quote. L. 52.
Ciudad, theu-THdTH' [sea-THS^n'], s. f.,

city. L. 9.
Ciudadano, theu-THd-THd'-no [seii-THS-

TH5'-no], s. m., citizen. L. 47.
Civilizacidn, the-ve-le-thd-theon' [se-vg-

le-sS-seon']. s. f., civilization. L. 60.
Claridad, cld-re-THdTH\ s. f., clearness,

perspicuity. L. 36.
Claro, cld'-ro, adj., clear, bright. L. 59.
Clase, dd'-sd, s. f., class, kind. L. 54.
Clasico, cld'-se-co, adj., classic, clas-
sical. L. 35.
Clasificacidn, dd-the-fe-cd-theon' [ci5-

se-fe-ca-seon'], s. f., classification. L.

24.
Clima, de-ma, s. m., climate. L. 40.
Cocer, co-tMr' [co-s5r'], to cook, to boil.

L. 42.
Coche, co'-chd, s. m., coach, carriages

in general. L. 42.
Cocinero, co-the-nd'-ro [co-se-na'-ro], s.

m., cook. L. 11.
Cofre, co'-frd, s. m., chest, trunk, cof-
fer. L. 60.
Coger, co-hPr\ to catch, to take, to pick

up. L. 46.
Cojear, co-hddr', to limp, to walk lame.

L. 39.
Cojo, CO' -ho, adj. and s. m., lame. L.

44.
Colada, co-Id' -THa, s. f., stiffening of

clothes, Todo saldr^ en la colada,

all will be brought to light. L. 65.
Colectivo, co-Uk-te'-vo, adj., collective.

L. 40.
Collar, col-gdr', to hang, L. 59.
Colina, co-l'e'-na, s. f., hill, L. 58.
Colocacion, co-/o-c^-f /ieo»r[co-io-ca-8eon'],

s. f., employment, place, i)osition,

situation. L. 60.

Colocar, co-lo-cdr', to place, to put, to
arrange, to employ. L. 4ff.

Colorado, co-lo-rd'-THo, adj., red. L.
54.

Colorido, co-lo-re'-THo, s. m., coloring
(painting). L. 52,

Color, co-lor', s, m., color, L. 52.

Combatir, com-bd-ter', to combat, to
fight. L. 54,

Combinacion, com-be-nd-theon' [com-be-
n2-seon'], s. f,, combination. L, 24.

Combinado, com-be-nd'-THo, p, p. and
adj., combined, mixed. L. 58.

Combinar, com-be-ndr', to combine, to
compound, to mix. L. 58.

Comedia, co-md'-Tnea, s. f., comedy.
L. 52.

Comer, co-m^r', to eat, to dine. L. 7.

Comerciante, co-m r-thedn'-td [co-m§r-
sean'-ta], s. m., merchant. L, 5.

Cometa, co-md'-tq, s. m., comet; s. f.,
kite, toy. L. 60.

Cometer, co-md-th-', to commit. L.
43.

Cdmico, co'-me-co, s. m., actor, come-
dian. L, 63.

Comico, co'-me-co, adj., comic, comical.
L, 35.

Como, CO' -mo, adv., how, as. L. 15.

Comodidad, co-mo-THe-THdwH' , s. f.,
commodity, convenience, comfort.
L. 49.

Cdmodo, co'-mo-THo, adj,, commodious,
convenient, comfortable. L. 29.

Companero, com-pdn-yd'-ro, s. m., com-
panion, comrade. L, 60.

Compjmia, com-pdn-ye'-g,, s. f., company.
L. 60.

Comparativo, com-pd-rd-te'-vo, adj,,
comparative. L, 61.

Compasion, com-pd-seon' , s. f., compas-
sion. L, 45.

Complacencia, com-pld-thPn'-thea [com-
pia-86n'-seal, s. f., pleasure, compla-
cency. L. 39.

Complemento, com-ple-m^n'-to, s. m.,
complement. L, 51.

Componente, com-po-nhi'-td, act. part.,
component. L, 49.

Componer, com-po-nh-', to mend, to ar-
range, to compound, to compose. L.
49,

Composicion, com-po-se-theon' [com-po-
se-seon'], s, f,, composition. L. 24.

Comprar, com-prdr', to buy, to pur-
chase. L. 4,

Comprender, com-prhi-d^' , to compre-
hend, to understand, to comprise.
L. 50.

Con, con, prep., with, by. L. 10

Concebir, con-thd-ber' [con-sS-ber'], to
conceive of. L. 54.

rOCABULABT.

467

Conceder, con-tM-d^r' Ccon-se-dgr'], to

grant, to concede. L. 53.
Concertar, con-tMr-tdr' [con-sSr-tar'], to

concert, to agree. L. 58.
Conciencia, con-the^n'-theq, [con-seen'-

sea], s. f., conscience. L. 40.
Conoierto, con-the^r'-to [con-segr'-to], s.

m., concert, agreement. L. 17.
Conoluir, con-duer', to conclude, to fin-
ish, to be over with. L. 58.
Conoordanoia, con-cor-ddn'-theq, [con-

cor-dan'-sea], s. f., concordance, agree-
ment. L. 50.
Condescender, con-d^s-tMn-d^r [con-de-

sen-dSr'], to condescend, to agree. L.

48.^ .
Condioidn, con-de-theon' [con-de-seon'],

s. f., condition. L. 43.
Condicional, con-de-theo-ndV [con-de-seo-

nSl'], adj., conditional. L. 59.
Conducir, con-du-ther' [con-d(i-s6r'], to

conduct, to convey, to lead. L. 40.
Confesar, con-fe-sdr\ to confess, to

acknowledge, to avow. L. 34.
Confuso, cow-/?t'-«o, adj., confused, con-
founded. L. 54.
Conjugacion, con-hu-gd-theon' [con-hCi-

gS-seon], s. f., conjugation. L. 43.
Conjugrar, con-hii-gdr' , to conjugate.

L. 43.
Conjuncidn, con-hun-theon' [con-hlin-

seon'], s. f., conjunction. L. 43.
Conmigo, con-me'-go, pron., with me,

with myself. L. 26.
Conooer, co-no-tMr' Cco-no-sgr'], to know,

to be acquainted with. L. 25.
Conocimiento, co-no-the-me^n'-to [co-no-

se-meen'-to], s. m., knowledge, bill of

lading. L. 43.
Conseouencia, con-sd-Jctihi'-theQ, [con-sa-

kftgn'-sSa], s. f., consequence. L. 34.
Consegruir, con-sd-gher' , to obtain, to

get, to succeed. L. 42.
Consejo, con-sd'-ho, s. m., counsel, ad-
vice. L. 53.
Consentir, con-s^n-ter\ to consent, to

agree to. L. 38.
Consistir, con-ses-ter\ to consist. L.

52.
Cousolar, con-so-ldr', to console. L. 35.
Constancia, con-stdn'-thea [con-stan'-sea],

s. f., constancy, steadiness. L. 46.
Construccidii, con-struTc-theon' [con-

strtik-seoii'], s. f., construction. L.

51.
Contante, con-tdn'-td, s. m. and adj.,

ready money. L. 38.
Cental, con-tdr', to count, to relate, to

tell. L. 35.
Contener, con-td-ntr\ to contain, to

retain, to restrain, to stop, to check.

L. 49.

Contenido, con-td-ne'-THO, s. m., con^

tents. L. 49.
Contentar, con-t^n-tdr' , to make con^

tented, to make glad. L. 33.
Contento, con-Un'-to^ adj., content,

contented, satisfied. L. 33.
Contigo, con-te'-go, pron., with thee»

L. 26.
Continuar, con-te-nudr' , to continue.

L. 54.
Contra, con'-tr^, prep., against. L. 41.
Contradecir, con-trd-dd-ther' [con-tra-da.

ser], to contradict. L. 41.
Contrario, con-trd'-reo, adj., contrary.

Al contrario, on the contrary. L.

53.
Convencer, con-vhi-tMr' [con-vgn-ser'],

to convince. L. 48.
Convenir, con-vd-ner\ to suit, to be

fitting, to agree. L. 30.
Couversacidn, con-v^r-sd-theon' [con-v6r-

sa-seon'], s. f., conversation. L. 24.
Conversar, con-v^r-sdr' , to converse.

L. 55.
Convertir, con-v^r-ter', to convert. L.

45.
Convicto, con-vek'-to, irr. past. part.

(convencer), convicted. L. 52.
Convite, con-ve'-td, s. m., invitation.

L. 56.
Copulative, co-pH-ld-te'-vo, adj . , copula-
tive. L. 59.
Coqueta, co-Tcd'-ta, s. f., coquette. L.

32.
Corazdn, co-rd-thon' Cco-ra-son'], s. m.,

heart. L. 56.
Corbata, cor-hd'-tii, s. f., cravat. L. 10.
Corona, co-ro'-na, s. f., crown. L. 56.
Correoto, co-hrik'-to, adj., correct. L.

29.
Corredor, co-hrd-rnor' , s. m., corridor,

broker. L. 49.
Corregir, co-hrd-her\ to correct. Co-

rregirse, to mend. L. 59.
Correo, co-hrd'-o^ s. m., currier, post,

mail. Casa de correos, post-office.

L. 29.
Correr, co-hr^r\ to run. Correrse, to

be ashamed or confused, to blush.

L. 51.
Corretear, co-hrd-tddr' , to run about.

L. 53.
Correveidile, co-hrd-vde-THe'-ld, s. m.,

tale-bearer, tattler. L. 50.
Corriente, co-hre^n'-td, adj., current ;

s. m., al corriente de, aware of, s. f.,

current, stream. L. 56.
Corrientemente, co-hrePM-td-m^n'-td,

adv., currently, fluently. L. 49.
Corro, co'-hro, s. m., circle of people

collected together for talking. L.

44.

468

VOCABULARY.

Cortante, cor-tdn'-td, adj., cutting,
edged, sharp. L. 38.

Cortaplumas, cor-td-pW-mas, s. m.,
pen-knife. L. 9.

€ortar, cor-tdr', to cut. L. 33.

Corto, cor' -to, adj., short. ^L. 21.

€osa, co'-sa, s. f., thing. A cosa de las
seis, about six o'clock. L. 11.

Coser, co-s^r', to sew. L. 24.

Cosmopolita, cos-mo-po-le'-tQ, s. m.,
cosmopolite. L. 51.

Costa, cos'-ta, s. f., coast, cost. A casta
de, at the expense of. L. 60.

Cost&do, cos-td'-THo, s. m., side. L. 61.

Cos tar, cos-tdr\ to cost. L. 61.

Costnmbre, cos-tHm'-brd, s. f., custom,
habit. L. 54.

Creacidn, crdd-theon' [cra2-86on'], s. f.,
creation. L. 41.

Crear, crd^r', to create. L. 41.

Credito, crd'-THe-to, s. m., credit, cre-
dence. L. 57.

Creencia, crdhi'-theg, [crSSn'-sea], s. f.,
belief. L. 49.

Creer, crdh-\ to believe, to think (a
thing). L. 27.

Creyente, crd-yhi'-td, act. part, and s.
m. and f., believing, believer. L. 38.

Criado, cred'-THo, s. m., servant. L.
17.

Criar, credr', to breed, to rear, to bring
up. L. 51.

Criatura, cred-tu'-rQ, s. f., creature, in-
fant. L. 60.

Crimen, cre'-mhi, s. m., crime. L. 59.

Criticar, cre-ti-cdr', to criticise. L. 48.

Critico, cre'-te-co, s. m., critic. L. 45.

Cronolog-ista, cro-no-lo-hes'-tQ, s. m.,
chronologist. L. 36.

Crueldad, cru^l-ddrH', s. f., cruelty.
L. 36.

Cuaderno, cu{i-TH^r'-no, s. m., copy-
book. L. 4.

Cual, cuul', pron., which. L. 10.

Cnalidad, cuQ-le-THdm' , s. f., quality.
L. 36.

Cualquiera, cuaJ-hed'-rQ, pron. and
adj., any one, whosoever, some one.
L. 34.

Cuan, cuQn\ adv., how, as (used only
before adjs. and other advs. \ L. 14.

Cnando, ciiQn'-do, adv., when. L. 9.

Cuanto, cuqn'-to, adj., how much, how
many. Cuanto antes, at once, imme-
diately. Por cuanto, inasmuch as.
L. 14.

Cuarto, cuar'-to, ord. adj. and s. m.,
fourth, room, chamber. L. 40.

Cnatro, cii(i'-tro, num. adj., four. L.
15.

Cuba, cH'-ha, s. f., cask, tub. Cuba (is-
land of).' L. 61.

j Cubrir, cH-hrer', to cover. L. 59.
! Cuchara, cvrchd'-rq, s. f., spoon. L. 60.
Cuchillo, cu-chel'-yo [ct-che'-yo], s. m.,

knife (tablej. L. 33.
Cuello, cuW-yo [ctig'-yo], s. m., neck,

collar. L. 60.
Cuenta, c&hi'-tQ, s. f., account, bill.

L. 46.
Cuento, c^n'-to, s. m., story, tale. L.

44.
Cuerpo, cMr'-po, s. m., body. L. 64.
Cuervo, cuer'-vo, s. m., crow.^ L. 45.
Cuesta, cuis'-tq, s. f., hill. A cuestas,

on one's back or shoulders. L. 63.
Cuestidn, cu^-teon', s. f., question. L.

40.
Cuidado, cue-TH^'-^HO, s. m., care. Es-

tar de cuidado, to be dangerously ill.

Estar con cuidado, to be very anx-
ious. L. 28.
Cuidar, cue-THdr', to care, to take care.

L. 44.
Culpa, ciil'-pQ, 8. f., fault, blame, guilt.

L. 60.
Culpar, cul-pdr', to blame. L. 60.
Cultivar, c^-te-vdr', to cultivate. L.

60.
Cumpleanos, cum-plddn'-yos, s. m.,

birthday. L. 62.
Cumplimieiito, cumr-ple-me^n'-to, s. m.,

complement, fulfilling.
Cumplir, cum-pler', to accomplish, to

fulfil. L. 57.
Cuuado, cUn-yd'-THO, s. m. and f.,

brother-in-law, etc. L. 64.
Curioso, cii-reo'-so,adj., curious, worthy

of note. L. 51.
Curso, CMr'-so, s.m., course. L. 64.
Custodia, cus-to'-Tneg^, s. f., custody.

L. 53.
Cutis, cu'-tls, s. m. and f., skin. L. 64.
Cuyo, cu'-yo, pron., of whom, whose,

of which, which. L. 17.

Dale, dd'-ld, intj., have at it, go at it

or him. L. 64.
Dama, dd'-mg,, s. m., dame, lady. Da-
mas, draughts or checkers. L. 58.
Danza. ddn'-tha [d5n'-sa], s. f., dance.

L. 64.
Danar, ddn-ydr', to damage, to hurt, to

harm. L. 47.
Dano, ddn'-yo, s. m., danger, harm.

L. 42.
Dar, ddr, to give. Dares y tomares,

disputes, ifs and ands. Darse a la

vela, to set sail. L. 26.
De, dd, prep., of, from. De dia, by

day. De intento, on purpose. L. 4.
Deber, dd-b^r', s. m., duty. L. 28.
Deber, dd-b^r', to owe, must, ought

L. 28.

VOCABULAMY.

469

Decena, dd-thd'-ng, [dS-sa'-na], s. f., about
ten. L. 59.

Decidir, dd-the-^uer' [de-se-^HSr'], to de-
cide. L. 60.

Decimo, dd'-the-mo [da'-sg-mo], ord. adj.
and s. m., tenth. L. 15.

Decir, dd-ther' [da-sSr'], to say, to tell.
L. 27.

Declarar, dd-cld-rdr', to declare. L. 48.

Dedal, dd-THdl', s.m.., thimble. L. 24.

Dedo, dd'-THO, s. m., finger. L. 59.

Defective, dd-f^k-te'-vo, adj., defective.
L. 63.

Defecto, dd-fW-to, s. m., defect, fail-
ing. L. 55.

Defender, dd-fhi-d^r', to defend. L.
37.

Definicidn, dd-fe-ne-theon' [da-fg-ne-
seon'], s. f., definition. L. 59.

Definir, dd-fe-ner', to define. L. 59.

Dejar, dd-hdr', to leave, to let, to per-
mit. L. 44.

Delante, dd-ldn'-td, prep. Delante de,
before, in the presence of. L. 16.

Deleitar, dd-lde-tdr', to delight. L. 47.

Delicado, dd-le-cd'-^no, adj., delicate.
L. 39.

Delicioso, dd-le-theo'-so [dfi-lg-eSo'-so],
adj., delicious. L. 35.

Delincuente, dd-len-ku^n'-td, s. m., de-
linquent, transgressor. L. 34.

Delinquir, dd-len-ker', to transgress.
L. 34.

Delito, dd-le'-tOf s. m., fault, crime.
L. 51.

Demds, dd-mds', adv., over and above,
too much ; adj. (generally used with
lo, los, las), the rest, others. L. 43.

Demasiado, dd-md-sed'-THo, adj. and
adv., too much, too. L. 25.

Dentro, d^n'-tro, prep., in, within, in-
side ( always followed by de) . L. 31 .

Derecho, dd-rd'-cho, adj., straight,
even, right. L. 50.

Desafiar, dd-sd-fedr', to challenge. L.
65.

Desafio, dd-sd-fe'-o, s. m., challenge,
duel. L. 63.

Desanimar, dd-sd-ne-mdr' , to disheart-
en, to discourage. L. 38.

DescaxLsadamente, dds-cdn-sd-Ti:d-
m^n'-td, adv., easily, at one's ease.
L. 33.

Desoansado, dds-cdn-sd'-THo, adj . , easy,
quiet, refreshed. L. 33.

Descansar, dds-cdn-sdr' , to rest. L. 33.

Descanso, dds-cdn'-so, s. m., rest, re-
pose, ease. L. 33.

Descaro, dds-cd'-ro, s. m., barefaced-
ness. L. 64.

Descender, dds-tMn-d^r' [ds-s5n-d6r'], to
descend. L. 37.

Descomponer, dds-com-po-n^r' , to dis-
arrange, to discompose, to put out of
order. L. 53.

Descompuesto, dds-com-puds'-to^ adj.,
disarranged, out of order. L. 53.

Desconfiar, dds-con-fedr' , to distrust^
to mistrust. L. 43.

Desgrracia, dds-grd'-thea [das-gra'-sea], s.
f., misfortune, ill-luck. L. 48. *

Deshacer,das-^ii^^r'[das-a-ser'J,toundo,,
to destroy, to take to pieces. L. 57.

Desierto, dd-se^r'-to, s. m., desert,
wilderness. L. 54.

Desigual, dd-se-giiQl^ adj., unequal,
uneven. L. 55.

Desocupar, dd-so-cd-pdr' , to quit, evac-
uate, to empty. L. 56.

Despacio, dds-pd'-theo [das-pS'-seo], adv.,
slowly. L. 6.

Despedir, dds-pd-rner', to dismiss, to
say farewell, to send or put away.
L. 59.

Despertar, dds-p^r-tdr' , to awake, to
awaken, to arouse, to rouse. L. 34.

De spier to, dds-pe^r'-to, adj., awake,
brisk, lively. L. 52.

Desproporcionadisimaniente,ofas-pro-
por-theo-nd-THe'-se-md-mPn-td[asis-\yro~
por-6eo-ng-THe'-se-mS-m6n-ta], adv., dis-
proportionately. L. 50.

Despues, dds-puh', prep, and adv.>
after, afterward. L. 16.

Determinante, dd-Ur-me-ndn' -td, adj.,
determiuing. L. 53.

Determinar, dd-t^r-me-ndr' , to deter-
mine. L. 53.

Detras, dd-trds', prep, and adv., be-
hind. L. 33.

Deudor, ddu-dor\ s.m., debtor. L. 45.

Devolver, dd-vol-v^r\ to return, to
give back. L. 43.

Dia, de'-a, s. m., day. L. 9.

Diablo, dea'-blo, s. m., devil. L. 65.

Dialecto, ded-Uh'-to, s. m., dialect. L.
55.

Dialogo, ded'-lo-gOj s. m., dialogue. L.
59.

Diantre, dedn'-trd.s. m., deuce. L. 46.

Dibujo, de-bu'-ho^ s. m., design, draw-
ing. L. 51.

Diccionario, dek-theo-nd'-reo [dek-seo-
na'-reo], s. m., dictionary. L. 49.

Dicha, de'-cha, s. f., happiness, good
fortune. L. 64.

Dioho, de'-cho, s. m., saying. L. 54.

Dioiembre, de-theem'-brd fde-segm'-bra],
s. m., December. L. 24.

Diente, de^n'-td, s. m., tooth. ITablar
entre dientes, to mumble, to mutter.
L. 63.

Diez, dedth' [deas'l, num. adj., ten. K
14.

470

VOCABULABY.

Diferencia, de-fd-rH'-iheQ [de-fa-r?n'-
sea], s. f., difference, L. 48.

Oiferenciar, de-fd-r&n-thedr' [de-fa-r^n-
seSr'], to differ, to distinguish. L.
48.

Dificil, di-fe'-thel [de-fe'-sel], adj., diffi-
cult. L. 21.

Dificultad, de-fe-cHl-tilTH' , s. f., diffi-
culty. L. 36.

Digrno, dig' -no, adj., worthy, deserv-
ing. L. 53.

Dilnviar, de-lu-vedr\ to pour, to rain
in deluge. L. 30.

Dimes, de'-m^s. Andar en dimes y di-
retes, to hum and haw. L. 47.

Diminutive, di-me-nu-te'-vo, s. m., di-
minutive. L. 44.

Dinero, de-nd'-ro, s. m., money. L.
13.

Dios, deos', s. m., God. L. 31.

Diptongo, dep-ton'-go, s.m., diphthong.
L. 57.

Direccion, de-r^k-theon' [de-rgk-seon'], s.
m., direction. L. 24.

Direct©, de-rSk'-to, adj., direct. L. 51.

Director, de-r^k-tor', s. m., director.
L. 50.

Dirigir, de-re-her'. to direct ; dirigirsCj
to apply. L. 63.

Discipulo, de-the'-pu-Io [de-se'-pti-io], s.
m., pupil, disciple. L. 18.

Discrete, des-crd'-to, adj., discreet, cir-
cumspect. L. 39.

Discnlpa, des-cul'-pQ, s. f., apology, ex-
cuse. L. 60.

Discurso, des-cur'-so, s. m., discourse,
speech. L. 53.

Disg-nstar, des-gm-tdr' , to disgust, to
displease. L. 50.

Disgusto, des-gus'-to, s. m.," disgust,
displeasure. L. 50.

Disponer, des-po-nh-\ to dispose, to lay
out, to arrange, to prepare. L. 48.

DisposicidxL, des-po-se-theon [des-po-se-
seon'], s. f., disposition, arrange-
ment, distribution. L. 33.

Distancia, des-tdn' -thea [des-tan'-sea], s.
f., distance. L. 51.

Distante, des-tdn'-td, adj., distant. L.
38.

Distar, des-tdr', to be distant, to be far
from. L. 53.

Distinguir, des-ten-gher' , to distin-
guish. L. 43.

Divertir, de-ver-ter', to divert, to
amuse. L. 39.

Dividir, de-ve-THer', to divide. L. 51.

Divisar, de-re-sdr\ to descry, to per-
ceive, to make out. L. 42.

Doble, do' -hid, adj., double. L. 40.

Doce, do'-thd [do'-sal, num. adj. and s.
m., twelve, twelfth. L. 14.

Docena, do-thd'-nQ [do-sa'-na], s. f., doz-
en. L. 40.

Doler, do-lh-', to ache, to have pain.
L. 36.

Dolor, do-lor', s. m., pain. L. 50.

Domingo, do-men' -go, s. m., Sunday.
L. 9.

Donde, don'-dd, adv., where. L. 9.

Dona, don'-yg, s. f., lady, madam, Mrs.
L. 2.

Dormir, dor-mer', to sleep. L. 41.

Dos, dos, num. adj., and s. m., two,
second. L. 14.

Drama, drd'-mg, s. m., drama. L.
52.

Drama tico, drd-md'-te-co,2idj., dramat-
ic. L. 52.

Duda, du'-THa, s. f., doubt. L. 43.

Dndar, du-rndr', to doubt. L. 28.

Dnrable, du-rd'-bld, adj., durable. L.
58.

Durante, du-rdn'-td, act. part., during.
I L. 59.

I Durar, du-rdr', to last, to endure, to
continue. L. 59.

Daro, du'-ro, adj., hard ; s. m,, dollar.
L. 60.

Ea ! ^'-g, intj., say ! hallo ! L. 46.
Echar, d-chdr', to throw, to put out, to

cast. Echar de ver, to notice. L.

53.
Econdmico, d-co-no'-me-co, adj., eco-
nomical, economic. L. 35.
Edad, d-THaTH', s. f., age. L, 53.
Edicidn, d-de-theon' [a-dg-seon'], s. f.,

edition. L. 60.
Edifioar, d-de-fe-cdr' , to edify, to build.

L. 48.
Efecto, ^-f^k'-to, s. m., effect. L. 47.
Hjecutar, ^-hP-cii-tdr' , to execute, to

put into practice. L. 60.
ijjemplo, d-hhn'-plo, s. m., example.

L. 32.
IJjercer, d-Mr-tMr' [a-her-ser'l, to exer-
cise, to practise. L. 60.
ijjercicio, d-Mr-lhe'-theo [a-her-se'-seo],

s. m., exercise. L. 8.
El, la, lo, los, las, def. art., the. L. 1.
^1, 2?, i)ers. pron., he, it. L. 1.
Eleccion, d-lek-theon' La-lek-seon'], s. f.,

election, choice. L. 24.
Elegancia, d-ld-gdn'-thea [a-la-gSn'-sea],

s. f., elegance. L. 52.
Elegante, d-ld-gdn'-td, adj., elegant.

L. 65.
Elegir, d-ld-her', to elect, to choose.

L. 39.
Elemento, d-ld-m^n'-to, s. m., element,

constituent part. L. 60.
Elena, d-ld'-riQ, s. f., Helena, Ellen.

L. 19.

rOCABULART.

471

Eliptico, d-lep'-te-co, adj., elliptic, ellip-
tical. L. 60.

Embarcadero, ^m-bg,r-c&-THd'-ro, s. m.,
landing, ferry. L. 58.

Embargo, ^m-har'-go, s. m., embargo.
Sin embargo, notwithstanding. L.
48. ^

Empenar, ^m-pdn-ydr' , to engage, to
pledge, to bind, to pawn. L. 45.

Empero, Im-pd'-ro, conj., yet, how-
ever, but. L. 60.

Emplear, ^m-plddr\ to employ. L. 44.

Empleo, ^m-pld'-o, s. m., employ, em-
ployment, position. L. 57.

En, ^n, prep., in, at, on. L. 8.

Enamorar, d-nd-mo-rdr' , to enamor,
to court, to make love to. L. 39.

Encargo, H-car'-go^ a. m., charge,
command, commission. L. 57.

Enoargar, ^n-car-gar, to charge, to or-
der, to commission. L. 58.

Encender, ^n-th^n-d^r' [5n-8gn-d5r'], to
light, to kindle. L. 37.

Encerrar, ^n-tM-hrdr' [gn-sS-hrSr'], to
close, to shut up, to contain, to com-
prehend. L. 65.

Encima, hi-the'-m^ [gn-ss'-ma], prep,
and adv., above, over. L. 33.

Encontrar, ^n-con-trdr' , to meet, to
find. L. 35.

Enemigo, d-nd-me'-go, s. m., enemy.
L. 51.

Enemistar, d-nd-mes-tdr' , to set at en-
mity, to antagonize. L. 60.

Energia, d-n^r-he'-fi, s. f., energy. L.
61.

Enfermar, ^n-f^r-mdr', to make sick,
to become sick. L. 38.

Enfermo, ^n-/gr'-mo, adj., sick, ill. L.
48.

Enf rente, hi-frhi'-td, adv., opposite,
in front. L. 51.

Enganar, ^n-gdn'-ydr, to deceive, to
cheat, to take in. L. 32.

Enhebrar, H-d-hrdr\ to thread, to link.
I L. 65.

I Enhorabuena. ^n-o-ra-bud'-n(i, s. f.,
congratulation, felicitation. L. 39.

Enrique, ^n-hre'-hd, s. m., Henry. L.
15.^

Ensenar, H-sdn-ydr\ to show, to teach.
L. 27.

Ensuciar, hi-su-thedr' [gn-sft-sear'], to
soil, to daub. L. 60.

Entendedor, ^n-thi-dd-THor\ s. m., one
who understands. L. 65.

Entender, ^n-Un-d^r\ to understand.
L. 31.

Entonces, ^n-ton'-thes [en-ton'-sSs], adv.,
then. L. 23.

Entrambos, ^n-trdm'-bos, pron. pi.,
both. L. 60.

Entrar, ^n-trdr', to go in, to enter, to
begin, to come in. L. 28.

Entre, ^n'-trd, prep., between, in the
course of, among. L. 19.

Entretanto, ^n-trd-tdn'-to, adv., in the
meantime. L. 60.

Entre tener, ^n-trd-td-n^r' , to entertain,
to occupy, to divert. L. ,40.

Entusiasmo, ^n-tu-seds'-mo, s. m., en-
thusiasm. L. 54.

Enviar, ^n-vedr\ to send. L. 14.

Envidiar, en-ve-THedr' , to envy. L.
40.

Equivocacidn, d-M-vo-cd-theon' [a-kg.
vo-cS-seon'], s. f., mistake, misconcep-
tion. L. 50.

Eqnivocar, d-ke-vo-cdr' , to make a mis-
take, to mistake. L. 47.

Erguir, ^r-gher', to hold erect (as the
head, etc.). L. 42.

Errar, ^-hrdr\ to err, to miss. L. 41.

Erndicidn, d-rH-de-the-on' [a-rfi-de-se-
on']. s. f., erudition. L. 52.

Escaldar, ks-cdl-ddr\ to scald. L. 65.

Escena, Ps-the'-riQ, [g-sa'-na], s. f., scene.
L. 65.

Eso^ptico, h-tMp'-te-co [g-sgp'-tg-co],
adj., skeptical. L. 45.

Esooba, ^s-co'-bQ, s. f., broom. L. 49.

Escobajo, h-co-bd'-ho, s. f., miserable
stump of a broom. L. 49.

Esooger, ^s-co-Mr', to choose. L. 65.

Escribano, ^s-cre-bd'-tio, s. m., notary.
L. 19.

Escribiente, i^s-cre-be^n'-td, s. m.,
amanuensis, clerk. L. 38.

Escribir, ^s-cre-bcr', to write. L. 8.

Escritor, ^s-cre-tor', s. m., writer, au-
thor. L. 19.

Escritura. h-cre-tu'-rg,, writing, docu-
ment, conveyance ; las escrituras,
the Scriptures. L. 19.

Escnchar, Ps-cH-chdr' , to hearken, to
listen. L. 60.

Esouela, ^s-hud'-la, s. f., school. L. 21.

Egcultor, ^s-cHl-ior', s. m., sculptor.
L. 31.

Escultura, ^s-cul-tu'-ra, s. f., sculpture.
L. 31.

Esforzar, ^s-for-thdr' [es-for-sar'], to
strengthen, to exert, to make effort.
L. 60.

Esfuerzo, U-fu^r'-tho [es-ffier'-so], s. m.,
endeavor, effort. L. 47.

Espacio, h-pd'-theo [es-pS'-seo], s. m.,
space. L. 48.

Espada, es-pd'-Tna, s. f., sword. L. 57.

Espadachin, ^s-pd-wnd-chen' , s. m.,
bully. L. 63.

Espalda, ^s-pdl'-d§, s. f., shoulder; pi.
back. L. 59.

Espana, ^s-pdn'-yg,, s. f., Spain. L. 9.

472

VOCABCLAEY.

Espanol, ^-pdn-yoV, s. and adj., Span-
ish language and Spanish. A la es-
paiiola, in the Spanish fashion. L. 2.

Especie, (^s-pd'-thed [gs-ps'-sea], s. f.,
species, sort, kind. L. 40.

Especiero, ^s-pd-thed'-ro [es-pa-sea'-ro],
s. m., spicer, grocer. L. 65.

Espejo, ^s-pd'-ho, s. m., looking-glass.
L. 60.

Esperanza, Is-pd-rdn'-thg, [Ss-pa-ran'-sa],
s. f., hope. L. 27.

Esperar, h-pd-rdr', to hope, to expect,
to await. L. 32.

Espiritu, ^-pe'-re-tu, s. m., spirit. L.
45.

Esposa, (^s-po'-sa, s. f., wife. L. 39.

Esposo, ^-po'-so, s. m., husband. L.
39.

Esquela, ^-hd'-lg,, s. f., note. L. 56.

Esquina, is-ke'-na, s. f., corner. L. 51.

Establecer, es-td-bld-th^r' [gs-ta-bia-sgr'J,
to establish. L. 42.

Estacion, ^s-td-theon' [?s-ta-seon'], s. f.,
season, station. L. 60.

Estado, h-td'-THo, s. m., state. L. 19.

Estar, ^s-tdr', to be, to understand.
Estar para salir, to be about to set
out. Estar por alguno, to be for one.
i Estd usted ? do you understand ?
L. 22.

Este, ^s'-td, s. m., east. L. 22.

Este, Esta, Esto, ^s'-td, ^'-t^, ^s'-to,
dem. pron., this, this one, he, she,
it. L. 18.

Estilo, Ps-te'-lo, s. m., style. L. 52.

Estimable, ^-te-md'-hld, adj., estima-
ble. L. 39.

Estimar, ^-te-mdr'^ to esteem, to esti-
mate. L. 39.

Esto, ^s'-to (see Este). L. 18.

Estocada, h-to-cd-THQ, s. f., thrust,
stab. L. 53.

Estratagrema, h-trd-t4-hd'-mu, s. f.,
stratagem, ruse. L. 44.

Estrechar, ^-trd-chdr', to tighten, to
squeeze, to press, to make narrow.
L. 60.

Estrecho, ^-trd'-cho, adj., narrow,
straitened, close, intimate. Estre-
cho, s. m., strait. L. 60.

Estribo, U-tre'-bo, s. m., stirrup. L.
38.

Estudiante, (^-tip-Tnedn'-td, s. m., stu-
dent. L. 38.

Estudiar, ^-tH-THe&r', to study. L. 3.

Estudio, ^s-tu'-THeo, s. m., study. L.
25.

Eternidad, d-thr-ne-rudTH' , s. f., eter-
nity. L. 36.

Eterno, d-t^r'-no, adj., eternal. L. 41.

Evidencia, d-vd-d^n'-theq fa-va-dgn'-sea],
s. f., evidence. L. 59.

Evitar, d-ve-tdr', to avoid, to keep

from. L. 47.
Exagreracion, ^k-sd-hd-rd-theon' [ek-sS-

ha-ra-seon'], s. f., exaggeration. L.

48.
Exagerar, ek-sd-hd-rdr' , to exaggerate.

L. 60.
Examen, ^k-sd'-mtn, s. m., examina-
tion. L. 38.
Examinar, ^-sd-me-ndr' , to examine.

L. 41.
Exceder, ^ks-thd-TH^r' [?k-sa-THer'], to

exceed, to overstep, to surpass. L.

53.
Excelente, ^ks-ihd-lH'-td [gk-sa-i^n'-ta],

adj., excellent. L. 53.
Ezcepcidn, ^ks-tMp-theon' [gk-sep-secn'],

s. f., exception. L. 45.
Exceptuar, ^ks-tMp-tudr' CSk-sep-tMr'],

to except. L. 60.
Exclamacion, eks-cld-md-theon' [eks-cla-

ma-8eoii',s. f., exclamation. L. 24.
Exclamar, ^ks-cld-mdr' , to exclaim.

L. 60.
Exousa, ^ks-cu'-sa, s. f., excuse, apol-
ogy. L. 60.
Excusar, ^ks-cu-sdr', to excuse, to apol-
ogize. L. 27.
Exhibicidn, ^ks-e-be-theon' [gks-g-be-

aeon'], s. f., exhibition. L. 48.
Exhibir, ^ks-e-ber', to exhibit. L. 60.
Exigir, ^k-se-her', to exact, to require,

to demand. L. 38.
Existencia, ^k-ses-ten'-thea [ek-sgs-tgn'-

sea], s. f., existence (pi. stock). L.

52.'
Existir, ^h-ses-ter' , to exist. L. 40.
Exito, ^k'-se-to, s. m., result, issue.

Buen exito, success.
Experiencia, eks-pd-rehi'-fhea [eks-pa-

reen'-sea], s. f., experience. L. 41.
Explicacidn, ^ks-ple-cd-tkeon' [eks-pie-

cS-seon'], s. f., explanation. L. 48.
Explicar, ^ks-ple-cdr' , to explain. L.

45.
Exponer, eks-po-nh'', to expose, to ex^

pound. L. 51.
Expresar, ^ks-prd-sdr' , to express. L.

52.
Expresion, ^ks-prd-seon' , s. f., expres-
sion. L. 56.
Expresivo, ^ks-prd-se'-vo, sidy, expres-
sive. L. 65.
Exterior, ^ks-td-reor' , s. m., outside,

exterior. L. 48.
Extra, Sks'-tra, adv., extra. L. 60.
Extranjero, ^ks-trdng-hd'-ro, s. m.,

foreigner. L. 60.
Extranar, ^ks-trdn-ydr' , to wonder at,

to find strange. L. 60.
Extrano, ^ks-trdn'-yo, adj., strange.

L. 48.

VOCABULARY.

473

Extraordinario, ^ks-trdor-de-nd'-reo,
adj., extraordinary. L. 46.

Extremado, eks-trd-md'-THo, adj., ex-
treme. L. 55.

Fabricar, fd-bre-cdr\ to build, to make,

to manufacture. L. 48.
Faccidn, fdk-theon' Lfak-seon'], s. f.,

feature, faction. L. 35.
Facil, fd'-thel [fa'-sel], adj., easy. L.

21.
Pacilidad, fd-the-le-THdrn' Cfa-se-le-

thSth], s. f., facility, ease. L. 36.
Eacilitar, fd-the-le-tdr' Cfa-se-le-tSr'], to

facilitate, to make easy, to procure.

L. 49.
Eacilmente, fd-thel-m^n'-td [f^-sei-mSn'-

ta], adv., easily. L. 49.
Faotura, fdk-tu'-rg,, s. f., invoice. L.

63.
Facultad, fd-cul-fdTH', s. f., faculty,

power to do anything, liberty to do

anything. L. 63.
Falso, fdl'-so, adj., false. L. 45.
T aXta., fdl'-ta, s. f., want, fault, lack.

L. 27.
Faltar, fdl-tdr', to want, lack, to be

lacking in. L. 31.
Pama, /a'-m(j, s. f., fame, reputation,

repute. L. 65.
Fcmilia, fd-me'-lea, s. f., family. L.

23.
Eamiliar, fd-me-ledr', adj., familiar.

L. 49.
Eamiliaridad, fd-me-led-re-THdTH', s.

f., familiarity. L. 65.
Famoso, fd-mo'-so, adj., famous. L.

45.
Panatico, fd-nd'-te-co, adj., fanatical.

L. 35.
Fas, fds, por fas 6 por nefas, right or

wrong ; justly or unjustly. L. 63.
Fastidio, fds-te'-THeo, s. m., trouble,

annoyance. L. 47.
Favor, fd-vor', s. m., favor, mercy,

help. A favor de, in behalf of. L.

39.
Favorecer, fd-vo-rd-th^r' [fS-vo-ra-sgr'],

to favor. L. 56.
Favorite, fd-vo-re'-to, adj., favorite.

L. 54.
Fe,/a, s. f., faith. L. 45.
Febrero, f^-hrd'-ro, s. m., February.

L. 24.
Fecha, fd'-cha, s. f,, date. L. 20.
Felicidad, fd-le-the-THdrH' [fa-le-se-

thSth'], s. f., happiness, felicity. L.

48.
Felicitar, fd-le-the-tdr' [fa-lg-se-tSr'J, to

felicitate, to congratulate. L. 61.
Feliz, fd-leth' [falls'], adj., happy, for-
tunate. L. 21.

Felizmente, fd-leth-m^n'-td [fa-ies-men'-
ta], adv., happily, fortunately. L.
49.

Femenino, fd-md-ne'-no^ adj., feminine.
L. 47.

Feo, fd'-o, adj., ugly. L. 7.

F er oz, fd-roth' [ffi-ros'], adj., ferocious,
fierce, ravenous. L. 54.

Ferrocarril, f^-hro-cd-hrel\ s. m., rail-
road. L. 60.

Fiado, fed'-THo, adj., confident, trust-
ing. Al fiado, on credit. L. 61.

Fiar, fedr', to trust, to go bail. L.
61.

Fiel, fedV, adj., faithful. L. 21.

Fiesta, feds' -td, s. f., feast, festival,
fete. Dia de fiesta, holiday. L. 62.

TigVLTQ., fe-ffu'-rci, s. f., figure, form,
shape. Hacer figura, to make or cut
a figure. L. 63.

Fig-urado, fe-gu-rd'-FHO, adj., figura-
tive. L. 51.

Filosofastro, fe-lo-so-fds'-tro, s. m.,
philosophaster. L. 49.

Fii6sofo,/e-Zo'-so-/o, s. m., philosopher.
L. 49.

Fin, fen, s. m., object, end, point. A
fin de, in order to. L. 45.

Final, fe-ndV, s. m. and adj., end, ter-
mination, final. L. 61.

Finalmente, /e-?i^^?w^n'-<a, adv., final-
ly. L. 49.

Fino, /e'-MO, adj., fine, clever, hand-
some, refined. L. 56.

Firma,/e?''-wa, s. f., signature. L. 56.

Fisonomia, fe-so-no-me'-a, s. f., physi-
ognomy. L. 45.

Flaqueza, fid-kd'-tha [flS-ka'-sa], s. f.,
leanness, weakness, foible, frailty.
L. 64.

Fondo, fon'-do, s. m., bottom, ground
(of colored articles) ; pi. funds, cash,
money. L. 60.

Formal, for-mdV, adj., formal, reliable,
respectable. L. 45.

Formalidad, for-md-le-THdrn', s. f.,
formality, reliability. L. 45.

Formal, for-mdr\ to form, to shape.
L. 43.

Fortuna, for-tu'-na, s. f., fortune, luck.
L. 42.

Fragrata, frd-gd'-tc^, s. f., frigate. L.
60.

Fraile, fr^'e-ld, s. m., friar. L. 41.

Frances, frdn-thds [frSn-sas'l, s. m. and
adj., French, Frenchman. L. 3.

Franoia, frdyi'-thea [fran'-seal, s. f.,
France. L. 9.

Francisco, frdn-thes'-co [fran-ses'-co], s.
m., Francis. L. 44.

Franco, f ran' -co, adj., frank, candid,
intimate. L. 34.

474

VOCABULARY.

Franqueza, frdn-M'-tha [fran-ka'-sal, s.

f., frankness, intimacy. L. 48.~
Frase, fra'-sdy s. f., phrase, sentence.

L. 51.
Fray, frd'-e, s. m., friar. L. 41.
Frecuente,/ra-fc?tgn'-^, adj., frequent.

L. 29.
Freir, frder\ to fry. L. 52.
Frente, fren'-td, adj., front, s. f., fore-
head. En frente, opposite. L. 45.
Fresco, frP^'-co, adj., fresh, cool. Pin-

tura al fresco, fresco painting. L.

46.
Fresco, fr^s'-co. s. m., cool breeze;

fresco (painting). L. 46.
Frio, fre'-o, adj., cold. L. 25.
Friolera, freo-ld'-ra, s. f., trifle. L.

37.
Frnta, fru'-ta, s. f., fruit. L. 31.
Yruto, frU'-to, s. m., fruit (produce).

L. 40.
Fuego, fild'-go, s. m., fire. L. 34.
'FueJite,fuH'-td,s. f., fountain, spring,

source. L. 52.
Fnera, fUd'-rQ, adv., out. Fuera de

que, besides. L. 31.
Fuera! fud'-r^, inlj., out! begone!

away ! L. 31.
Fuerza, fder'-tha [fftgr'-sft], s. f., force,

strength. A. fuerza de, by dint of.

L. 58.
YjL^dL, fu'-ga, s. f., flight, escape. L.

57.
Fulano, /w-Z^'-no, s. m., so and so, such

a one. L. 55.
Fumar, fu-mdr', to smoke. L. 42.
Fusil, fu-seV, s. m., gun. L. 49.
Fusilar, fu-se-ldr', to shoot (mil.) L.

45.
Future, ffi-tu'-ro, s. m., future (tense).

L. 43.
Future, fii-tu'-ro, adj., future. L. 43.

Galan, gd-Mn', s. m. and adj., gallant,
actor ; gallant. L. 58.

Galante, qd-ldn'-td, adj., gallant, court-
ly. L. 58.

iTalicismo, gd-le-thes'-mo, s. m.. Galli-
cism. L. 61.

Galleg-o, gdl-yd'-go [gS-ya'-go], s. m.,
Galician. L. 55.

Gallina, gdl-ye'-na [ga-y€'-na], s. f., hen.
L. 5.

Gana, gd'-na, s. f., desire, will, appe-
tite. L. 59.

Ganapierde, gd-nd-pe^r'-dd, s. m., a
gave-away game of checkers. L.
50.

Ganar, gd-ndr', to gain, to win. L. 27.

Ganso, gdn'-so, s. m., goose. Hablar
por boca de ganso, to repeat what
has been said by others. L. 63.

Garrotaso, gd-hro-id'-so, s. m., blow
with a cudgel. L. 44.

Garrote, gd-hro'-td, s. m., cudgel. L.
44.

Gas tar, gds-tdr', to waste, spend, to ex-
pend. L. 50.

Gatillo, gd-tel'-yo [ga-ie'-yo], s. m. dim.,
little cat, trigger of a gun. L. 53.

Gato, gd'-to, s. m., cat. L. 46.

Gemido, hd-me'-THo, s. m., groan,
moan, lamentation. L. 59.

General, hd-nd-rdl', s. m. and adj.,
general. L. 45.

Genero, hd'-nd-ro, s. m., gender, genus,
kind, sort, cloth. L. 57.

Gentilicio, Mn-te-le'-theo [h?n-ts-i6'.
86o], adj., peculiar to a nation. L.
49.

Geutio, Mn-te'-o, s. m., great crowd,
multitude. L. 40.

Gentualla, Mn-tual'-yg, [hgn-tfla'-ya], s.
f., rabble, mob. L. 49.

Gigantesoo, he-gdn-t^'-co, adj., gigan-
tic. L. 49.

Gineta, he-nd'-ta, tener los cascos d la
gineta, to be hare-brained. L. 64.

Globo, glo'-bo, s. m., globe, balloon. L.
37.

Gobernante, go-Mr-ndn'-td, act. part,
governing ; los gobernantes^the rulers.
L. 38.

Gobernar, go-Mr-ndr', to govern. L.
34.

Gobierno, go-be^r'-no, s. m., govern-
ment. L. 40.

Goce, go'-thd [go'-sa], s. m., enjoyment.
L. 54.

Golpe, gol'-pd, s. m., blow, stroke. L.
61.

Gonzalez, gon-thd'-Uth [gon-sS'-ies], s.
m., Gonzalez. L. 49.

Gorra, go'-hra, s. f., bonnet. Vivirde
gorra, to live at others' expense ; to
sponge. L. 64.

Gozar, go-thdr [go-sSr'l, to enjoy. L.
25.

Gozo, go'-tho [go'-so], s. m., joy, pleas-
ure. L. 51.

Grabado, grd-bd'-rno, s. m., engrav-
ing, cut (picture). L. 52.

Grabar, grd-bdr', to engrave. L. 52.

Gracia, grd'-thea [gra'-sea], s. f., grace,
favor, pardon, gracefulness. L.
51.

Gracias, grd'-theas [gra'-seas], s. m.
pi., thanks, thank you. L. 23.

Grade, grd'-wHo, s. m., grade, degree.
L. 60.

Gramatica, grd-md'-te-ca, s. f., gram-
mar. L. 5.

Gramatical, grd-md-te-cdV , adj., gram-
matical. L. 51.

VOCABULARY.

475

Grande, grdn'-dd, adj., large, grfeat.

L. 7.
Granizar, grd-ne-thdr' [grjt-ne-82r'], to

hail. L. 30.
Grato, gr&'-to,&d2., grateful, pleasing,

agreeable. L. 56.
Grito, gre'-to, s. m., cry, shout, scream.

L. 59.
Guerra, gM'-hra, s. f., war. L. 56.
Guinada, ghen-yd'-THa^s. f., wink. L.

54.
GuipTizcoa, ghe-pHth'-cog, [ghe-pfts'-coa],

s. f., Guipuscoa (a province in Spain).

L. 55.
Gustar, gus-tdr', to like, to please, to

taste. L. 31.
Gusto, gUs'-to, s. m., taste, pleasure.

L. 23.

Habana, d-bd'-nci, s. f., Havana. L. 12.
Habanero, d-hd-ne'-ro, adj. and s. m.,

Havanese. L. 49.
Haber, d-Mr\ to have (used only as an

auxiliary verb with this significa-
tion. See L. 66). Impersonal verb,

there to be. L. 12.
Habil, ^'-6e^adj., able, skilful, expert,

clever. L. 21.
Habilidad, d-be-le-THdrn' , s. f., ability,

skilfulness, expertness. L. 36.
Habitante, d-be-tdn'-td, s. m., inhabit-
ant. L. 40.
Hablador, a-bld-wnor', adj. and s. m.,

talkative and talker. L. 20.
Hablar, a-bldr\ to speak, to talk. L. 1.
Hacer, d-tMr' [S-ser'J, to do, to make.

Hacerde, to act as. L. 19.
Hacia, d'-thea [S'-sea], adv., toward.

L. 19.
Hallar, dl-ydr' [S-ySr'], to find. L. 37.
Hambre, dm' -bra, s. f., hunger. Te-

ner hambre, to be hungry. L. 25.
Hasta, ds'-ta, adv., until, till, as far

as, even. L. 19.
Hazmereir, dth-md^der' [Ss-ma-raer'], s.

m., laughing-stock. L. 50.
He! a, intj., oh! what! what is it!

L. 44.
Hecbo, d'-cho, s. m., fact, event. L.

52.
Helar, d-ldr', to freeze. L. 30.
Helena, d-ld'-n§, s. f., Helena, Ellen.

L. 19.
Hermanastro, ^r-md-nds'-tro, s. m.

aug., step-brother, half-brother. L.

49.
Hermano, er-md'-no, s. m., brother.

L. 6.
Hermoso, ?r-mo'-so, adj., beautiful,

handsome. L. 7.
Hermosura, ^r-mo-su'-r<^, s. f., beauty,

handsomeness. L. 53.

Herrero, ^-hrd'-ro, s. m., blacksmith.

L. 65.
Hielo, ed'-lo, s. m., ice, frost. L. 30.
Hierba, y^r'-ba,s. f., herb, grass. L. 60.
Hierro, e^'-hro, s. m., iron. L. 61.
Higo, e'-go, s. m., fig. L. 40.
Hijastro, e-hds'-tro, s. m., stepson. L. 49.
Hijo, e'-ho, s. m., son. L. 6.
Hilar, e-ldr', to spin. L. 65.
Hilo, e'-lo, s. m., thread. L. 24.
Hinchar, en-chdr\ to swell. L. 53.
Historia, es-to'-rea, s. f., history. L.

15.
Hoja, o'-ha, s. f., leaf (of a tree or a

book). L. 59.
Hola, o'-Iq, intj., hallo ! L. 46.
Holg-azan, ol-gd-thdn' [oi-gS-sSn'], adj.

and s. m., idle, lazy, loiterer, idler.

L. 6.
Hombre, om'-brd, s. m., man. Es mds

hombre que su hermano, he is more

of a man than his brother. L. 6.
Honor, o-nor', s. m., honor. L. 39.
Honroso, on-hro'-so, adj., honorable.

L. 52.
Hora, o'-ra, s. f., hour. L. 23.
Homo, or' -no, s. m., oven. Cocer en

homo, to bake. L. 60.
Horrendo, o-hr^n'-do, horrible (poet.).

L. 55.
Hortelano, or-td-ld'-no, s. m., gardener.

L. 65.
Hospital, os-pe-tdl', s. m., hospital.

L. 47.
Hotel, o-tM', s. m., hotel. L.17.
Hueso, Hd'-sd, s. m., bone. L. 61.
Hu^sped, uh'-p^TH, s. m., host. Echar

la cuenta sin la huesped, to reckon

without the host. L. 63.
Huir, H-er', to flee, to make off. L. 34.
Humano, ii-md'-no, adj., human. L.

48.
Humor, H-mor'^ s. m., humor, wit. L.

27.

Idea, ^-THd'-g,, s. f,, idea, thought. L.

54.
Ideal, e-THddV, adj., ideal. L. 48.
Idioma, e-Tneo'-ma, s. m., language.

L. 55.
Idiota, e-THeo'-ta, s. m., idiot. L. 48.
Idiotismo, e-Tneo-tes'-mo, s. m., idiom.

L. 49.
Iglesia, e-gld'-sea, s. f., church. L.

16.
Ignorancia, eg-no-rdn-thea [eg-no-ian'-

seaj, s. f., ignorance. li. 52.
Ignbrante, eg-no-rdn'-td, adj., ignorant.

L. 61.
Ignorar, eg-no-rdr', to be ignorant of,

not to know. L. 61.
Igual, e-gilal', adj., equal, alike. L. 48.

476

VOCABULARY.

Igrnaldad, e-gual-TH(iTH\ s. f., equal-
ity. L. 55,

Ilasidn, e-lu-seon', s. f., illusion. L.
48. ^

Imagrinacioii, e-md-he-nd-theon' [e-mS-
he-na-seon'], s. f., imagination. L.
58.

Impedir, em-pd-THer' , to impede, to
hinder. L. 43.

Imperative, em-pe-rd-te'-vo, adj. and s.
m., imperative, imperative mode.
L. 43.

Imperfeccidn, em-p^r-felc-theon' [em-
per-fek-seon'], s. f., imperfection. L.
55.

Imperfecto, em-p^r-f^lc'-to, adj., imi)er-
fect. L. 43.

Impersonal, em-ph'-so-ntU\ adj., im-
personal. L. 61.

Imponer, em-po-n^r', to impose, to in-
form, to acquaint. L. 44.

Importante, em-por-tdn'-tdy adj., im-
portant. L. 38.

Importar, hn-por-tdr', to import, to be
of importance, to amount to. L. 31.

Imposible, em-pose' -hid, adj., impossi-
ble. L. 31.

Impreso, eni-prd'-so, p. p. of Impri-
MIR, to print. L. 61.

Imprimir, em-pre-mer', to print. L.
61.

Improvisar, em-pro-ve-sdr' , to impro-
vise, to extemporise. L. 58.

Improvise, em-pro-ve'-so. De improri-
so, unexpectedly, on a sudden. L.
62.

Imprudencia, em-pru-dhi'-thea [em-pra-
den'-seal, s. f., imprudence. L. 43.

Imprudente, em-pni-den'-id, adj., im-
prudent. L. 20.

Impuesto, em-puds' -to, p. p. of Impo-
ner. L. 52.

In, en, Lat. prep., used in Spanish as
a prefix only, and generally with a
negative signification. L. 50.

Incendiar, en-thhi-dedr' [en-sen-dear'],
to set fire to a house. L. 51.

Incluir, en-duer', to include. L. 49.

Incdmedamente, en-co'-mo-TnS-mH-td,
adv., inconveniently, uncomfort-
ably. L. 29.

Incemedar, en-co-mo-THdr' , to put out,
to incommode. L. 47.

Incomodo, en-co'-mo-THo, adj., incom-
modious, inconvenient. L. 29.

Incomplete, en-com-pld'-to, adj., in- i
complete. L. 48. j

Inconveniente, en-con-vd-ne-hi'-td, s. ■
m. and adj., difficulty, obstacle, in- i
convenient. L. 64. :

Increible, en-crde'-bld, adj., incredible.
L. 61. 1

Indefinide, en-dd-fe-ne'-THo, adj., in-
definite. L. 61.

Independencia, en-dd-phi-dhi' -theg, [9n
da-pgn-den'-8ga], s. f., independence.
L. 35.

Indicative, en-de-cd-te'-vo, adj., indic^
, ative. L. 43.

Indice, en'-de-thd [en'-de-sa], s. m., in-
dex. L. 61.

Indigne, en-deg'-no, adj., unworthy,
, undeserving. L. 53.

Indig'O, en'-de-goy adj. (See Anil.)
L. 54.

Indirecte, en-de-r^k'-to, adj., indirect.
L. 51.

Individue, en-de-ve'-THuo, s. m., in-
dividual. L. 51.

Industrioso, en-dus-treo'-so, adj., in-
dustrious. L. 35.

Inepte, e-nPp'-to, adj., unfit, inept.
L. 51.

Inexplicable, e-n^ks-ple-cd'-bld, adj.,
inexplicable. L. 61.

Infancia, en-fcfn'-ihea [en-fan'-sea], s. f.>
infancy. L. 54.

Inferior, en-fd-reor', adj., inferior. L.

, 21.

Infime, en'-fe-mo, adj., lowest. L. 21.

Infinidad, en-fe-ne-THdTH\s. f., infini-
ty. L. 40.

Infinitive, en-fe-ne-te'-vo, adj., infini-
tive. L. 43.

Infinite en-fe-ne'-to, adj., infinite. L.
39.

Inflnir, en-fluer', to influence. L. 48.

Infertnnie, en-for-tu'-neo, s. m., mis-
fortune. L. 41.

Ingenie, en-hd'-neo, s. m., genius. L.
61.

Ingeniese, en-hd-neo'-so^ adj., ingeni-
ous. L. 61.

Inglaterra, eng-la-W-hrg, s. f., Eng-
land. L. 9.

Ingles, eng-lds', s. m. and adj., Eng-
lish. L. 2.

Inicial, e-ne-thedl [e-ne-seai'], adj., ini-
tial. L. 56.

Injusticia, en-Ms-te'Ahea Een-hus-te'-
sea], s. f., injustice. L. 45.

Inmediate, en-md^Tneii'-to, adj., im-
mediate, near. L. 61.

Inmemerial, en-md-mo-redV , adj., im-
memorial. L. 55.

Inecente, e-no-then'-td [e-no-sen'-ta],
adj., innocent. L. 34.

Inquietar. en-ked-iar', to disquiet, to
make uneasy. L. 61.

Inqniete, e»-A:ea'-fo, adj., uneasy, rest-
less. L. 61.

Insecte, en-sek'-io.s. m., insect. L. 61.

Inspirar, en-spe-rar' , to inspire. L.
58.

VOCABULARY.

477

Instante, en-stdn'-td, s. m., instant.
Al instante, immediately. L. 42.

Instinto, en-sten'-to, s. m., instinct.
L. 61.

Instruccidn, en-striik-theon' [en-8tr<ik-
seon'], s. f., instruction, learning.
L. 52.

Instruido, en-strue'-Tuo, adj., in-
structed, learned, educated. L. 49.

Instruir, en-struer', to instruct, to
teach. L. 47.

Instrumento, en-strH-m^n'-to, s. m., in-
strument. L. 61.

tntachable, en-td-chd'-bld, adj., unim-
peachable, irreproachable. L. 62.

Intencidil, en-t^n-theon' [gn-tSn-seon'],
s. f., intention. L. 61.

Intentar, en-t^n-tdr', to attempt. L.
61.

Interns, en-td-rds', s. m., interest. L.
54.

Interesante, en-td-rd-sdn'-td, adj., in-
teresting. L. 47.

Interesar, en-td-rd-sdr', to interest.

, L. 61.

Interin, en'-td-ren, adv., in the mean-
while. L. 61.

Interior, en-td-reor', adj., interior. L.
48.

Interior, en-td-reor', s. m., interior.
L. 45.

Interjeccidn, en-t(ir-h^k-theon' [gn-t5r-
hgk-seon'], s. f., interjection. L. 43.

Interrogacidn, en-t^-hro-gd-theon' [gn-
tS-hro-ga-seon'J, s. f., interrogation.
L. 61.

Interrogante, en-t^hro-gdn'-td, s. m.,
note of interrogation ; act. part, of
interrogar.

Interrogar, en-t^-hro-gdr\ to interro-
gate, to question. L. 61.

Interrnmpir, en-t^-hrHm-per' , to inter-
rupt. L. 64.

Intimidad, en-te-me-THdTH', s. f., inti-

^ macy. L. 56.

Intimo, en'-te-mo, adj., intimate. L.
56.

Introducir, en-tro-dH-ther [en-tro-dfi-
ser'], to introduce. L. 40.

Inutil, e-nH'-tel, adj., useless. L. 50.

Invariable, en-vd-red'-bld,2Ldj., invari-
able. L. 56.

Inversidn, en-v^r-seon' , s. f., inver-
sion. L. 61.

Invertir, en-vtr-ter', to invert. L. 61.

Invierno, en-ve^r'-no, s. m., winter.
L. 24.

Invitar, en-ve-tdr\ to invite. L. 56.

Ir, er, to go. L. 18.

tris, e'-res, s. f., rainbow. L. 61.

Irlanda, er-ldn'-da, s. f., Ireland. L.
40.

Irregular, e-hrd-gu-ldr' ^ adj., irregular.

L. 43.
Irregularidad, e-hrd-gil-ld-re-THdTH',

s. f., irregularity. L. 55,
Isabel, e-sdMV, s. f., Isabel. L. 55.
Isla, es'-la, s. f., island. L. 61.
Italia, e-td'-leOf, s. f., Italy. L. 40.
Italiano, e-td-led'-no^ s. m. and adj.,

Italian. L. 61.
Izquierdo, eth-ke^r'-do [es-keer'-do], adj.,

left, left side. L. 50.

Jabdn, hd-hon', s. m., soap. L. 5.

Jamas, hd-mds'^ady., never. L. 25.

Jaque, hd'-kd, check (in playing chess).
L. 42.

Jardin, har-den\ s. m., garden. L. 18.

Jardinero, har-de-nd'-ro, s. m., gar-
dener. L. 34.

Jose, ho-sd', s. m., Joseph. L. 43.

Joven, Tio'-ijgw, adj., young. L. 13.

Juan, hiian', s. m., John. L. 17.

Juana, hua'-na^ s. f., Jane. L. 17.

Juego, hud' -go, s. m., game, play, set.
L. 61.

Jueves, hud'-v^s,s. m., Thursday. L.
9.

Juez, Math' ChMs'], s. m., judge. L. 9.

Juprar, hu-gdr', to play. L. 41.

Jnioio, hUe'-theo [hlie'-seo], s. m., judg-
ment, sense, trial. L. 53.

Julio, hu'-leo, s. m., July, Julius. L.
24.

Jnntar, h4n-tdr', to join, to gather
together. L. 65.

Junto, hiln'-to, adv., near, close to.
L. 39.

Juramento, hUrrd-mhi'-to, s. m., oath,
affidavit. L. 53.

Justicia, hiis-te'-thea [hfts-te'-sea], s. f.,
justice, righteousness. L. 61.

Jnsto, hiis'-to, adj., just, right. L. 61.

Juventud, hu-vhi-tixTH' , s. f., youth.
L. 48.

La, l(jL, def. art., f. sing. L. 5.
La, Iq,, pron. f. sing., her, it. L. 8.
Lacdnico, Za-co'-ne-co, adj., laconic. Jj.

38.
Laboriosidad, Id-ho-reo-se-THdTH, s. f.,

industry. L. 51.
Lacre, Id'-crd, s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5.
Lado, Id-THO, s. m., side. L. 18.
Ladrdn, ld~dron', robber, thief. L. 44.
Lago, Id' -go, s. m., lake. L. 40.
Lagrrima, la'-gre-ma, s. f., tear. L. 51.
Lapiz, Id'-peth [la'-pes], s. m., pencil.

L. 51.
Largro, l(ir'-go, adj., long. L. 21.
Lastima, Ids'-te-ma, s. f., pity. L. 25.
Lastimar, Ids-fe-mdr', to hurt, wound,

to offend. L. 61.

478

VOCABULARY.

Latin, ld-ten\ s. m., Latin. L. 61.

Latinajo, la^te-nd'-ho, s. m. aug., dog-
Latin. L. 49.

Latitud, ld-te-tuTH\ s. f., -width, lati-
tude. L. 61.

Lavandera, Id^vdn-dd'-rQ, s. f., washer-
woman. L. 5.

Lavar, Id-vdr', to wash. L. 24.

Le, Id, pron., him, it, to him, to it.
L. 10.

Leocidn, Uh-theon' [lek-seon'j, s. f., les-
son. L. 8.

Leohe, Id'-chd, s. f., milk. L. 7.

Leotura, l^k-tu'-rg,, s. f., reading. L.
38.

Leer, Id^r', to read. L. 7.

Legna, Id'-gtiQ, s. f.. league. A Span-
ish league is 2^ English miles.
L. 61.

Leido, Ide'-THO, adj., bien leido, well
read. L. 52.

Lejos, W-hos, adv., far, distant. A lo
lejos, in the distance. L. 31.

Lengna, l^n'-qfia, s. f., tongue, lan-
guage. L. 23.

Lenguaje, IH-guQ'-ha, s. m., language.
L. 66.

Lento, IH'-to, adj., slow, tardy, quiet.
L. 61.

Ledn, Idon, s. m., lion. L. 54.

Letra, Id'-trQ, s. f., letter (of the alpha-
bet), letter (of credit) ; pi., letters
(literature). L. 61.

Levantar, Id-vdn-tdr', to raise, to lift
up. Lerantarse, to arise, to get up.
L. 33.

Levita, Id-ve'-t^, s. m., Levite ; s. f.,
frock-coat. L. 61.

Ley, Id'-e, s. f., law. L. 8.

Liberal, le-hd-rdV, adj., liberal. L. 62.

Libertad, le-b^r-tdwH' , s. f., liberty.
L. 40.

Libra, le'-bvQ, s. f., pound. Libra es-
terlina, pound sterling. L. 47.

Librar, le-brdr', to free, to deliver, to
draw on (commercial). L. 45.

Libre, le'-brd, adj., free. L. 59.

Lisonja, Ze-songr' -?irt, s. f., flattery. L.61.
Lisonjear, le-song-hddr' , to flatter. L.

61.
Lisonjero, le-song-hd'-ro, adj. and s.

m., flattering, flatter. L. 61.
Lista, les'-ta, s. f,, list. L. 61.
Listo, les'-to, adj., ready, sharp, quick.

L. 46.
Literate, le-td-rd'-to, s. m., man of let-
ters, literateur. L. 51.
Literatura, le-td-rd-tu'-ra, s. f., litera-
ture. L. 52.
Litre, le'-tro, s. m., litre. L. 60.
Lo, lo, neut. art., the. L. 8.
Lo, lo, pron., him, it. L. 26.
Local, lo-cdV, adj., local. L. 54.,
Loco, lo'-co, adj., mad, crazy. A ton-

tas y d locos, inconsiderately. L. 61.
Loco, lo'-co, s. m., madman. L. 61.
Lodo, lo'-THO, s. m., mud, mire. L. 45.
Lograr, lo-grdr', to succeed, to reach,

to obtain. L. 38.
Londres, lon'-drSs, s. m., London. L,

12.
Longitud, long-he-tHTH' , s. f., length,

longitude. L. 61.
Loteria, lo-td-re'-a, s. f., lottery. L. 65.
Lucir, lH-ther' lifi-sgr'], to shine, to glit*

ter. L. 65.
Luego, liid'-go, adv., by-and-by, pres'
ently ; conj., then, therefore. L. 33*
Lngar, lu-gdr', s. m., place, village*

En lugar de, instead of. L. 29.
Luis, lues', s. m., Louis. L. 15.
Lnisa, liie'-sa, s. f., Louise, Louisa*

L. 2.
Lnna, lu'-nQ, s. f., moon, L. 61.
Luto, lu'-to, s. m.. mourning. L. 60.
Luz, lulh' [1(18'], s. f., light. Dar i luZf

to publish, to bring to light. L. 61.

Llamar, lyd-mdr' [ya-mSr'], to call, to

knock. L. 27.
Llave, lyd'-vd [y5'-va], s. f., key. L.

59.
lileg'ar, lyd-gdr [yS-gSr'], to arrive. Lie- i

gar i, hacer, to become. L. 37.

Libreria, le-brd-re'-a, s. f., book-store J^ Llenar, lyd-ndr' [ya-nar], to fill, to ful'

L. 11. ^ fil. L. 54.

Librero, le-brd'-ro, s. m., book-seller. iLleno, Zya'-no [ya'-no], adj., full. L. 54.

L. 11. /Llevar, lyd-vdr' [ya-var], to carry, to f

Libre, le'-bro, s. m., book. L. 4.
Ligero, le-hd'-ro, adj., light, swift. L.

46.
Limosna, le-mos'-na, s. f., alms. L. 61.
Limpiar, lem-pedr', to clean. L. 64.
Limpieza, lem'-ped'-tha [lem-pea'-saJ, s.f.,

clea,nliness. L. 61.
Limpio, lem'-peo, adj., clean, cleanly.

L. 20.
Linea, le'-nda, s. f., line. L. 61.
Lisboa, les-bo'-Q, s. f., Lisbon. L. 55.

bear, to bring forth. L. 14.
Llorar, lyo-rdr' [yo-rSr'], to cry, to weep.

L. 51.
Lloro, lyo'-ro [yo'-ro], s. m., tear, act of

crying, weeping. L. 54.
Llover, lyo-v^r' [yo-ver'], to rain. LIo-

ver d c^ntaros, to pour down. L. 30.
Llovisnar, lyo-ves-ndr' [yo-ves-nSr'], to

drizzle. L. 30.
Lin via, lyu'-v^q [yt'-vga], s. f., rain, L.

30.

VOCABULAHr.

479

Macho, md'-cho, s. m., male ; mule. L.
62.

Madera, md-THd'-vQ, s. f., wood, tim-
ber, lumber. L. 4.

Madras tr a, md-drds'-trg,, s. f., step-
mother. L. 49.

Madre, mg,'-drd, s. f., mother. Lengua
madre, an original language. L. 6.

Madrid, md-dreTH', s. m., Madrid. L.
12.

Madrileno, md-dre-ldn'-yo, s. m., a na-
tive of Madrid. L. 49.

Madrugada, md-drH-gd'-TH^, s. f., the
night hours between midnight and
sunrise. L. 65.

Madruirar, md-drii-gdr\ to rise very-
early. L. 62. ^

Madurez, md-THu-rdth' [mS-THft-rSs'], s.
f., maturity, ripeness. L. 51.

Maestro, mg,ds'-tro, s. m., master,
teacher. L. 62.

Magnifico, m^gf-ne'-/e-co, adj., magnifi-
cent. L. 58.

Mai, mdl, s. m., evil, harm, disease.
L. 48.

Mai, mdl, adv., badly. Mai de su gra-
do, in spite of him. L. 3.

Maldito, mdl-de'-to, adj., accursed, per-
verse. L. 62.

Malicia, md-le'-theg, [ma-is'-sSa], s. f.,
malice, wickedness. L. 62.

Male, md'-lo, adj., bad, ill, wicked. L. 7.

Mama, md-md\ s. f., mama. L. 5.

Mandar, mdn-ddr', to send, to com-
mand, to order. L. 17.

Manera, md-nd'-ra, s. f., manner. De
manera que, so that. L. 42.

Mania, md-ne'-^, s. f., n^ania, whim.
L. 57.

Manifestar, md-ne-fh-tdr\ to mani-
fest, to show. L. 51.

Manifiesto, md-ne-fe<^s'-to, adj., mani-
fest. L. 52.

Mano, md'-no, s. f., hand, quire (of pa-
per;. L. 28.

Manteoa, mdn-td'-c^, butter ; in the
Americas, lard. L. 62.

Mantequilla, mdn-td-kel'-ya [mSn-ta-kS'-
ya], s. f., butter. (Amer.) L. 62.

Manuel, md-nix-W, s. m., Emanuel.
L. 2.

Manusorito, md-nus-cre'-to, s. m.,
manuscript. L. 62.

Manzana, mdn-thd'-na [mSn-sS'-na], s. f.,
apple, block (of houses). L. 31.

Manzanar, mdn-thd-ndr' [mSn-sa-nar'],
s.^m., apple orchard. L. 49.

Manana, mdn-yd'-na, s. f., morning,
to-morrow. Pasado manana, the day
after to-morrow. L. 30.
j Mar, mgiV, s. m. and f., sea. Alta mar,
high sea. L. 62.

Marca, mg/V'-ca, s. f., mark, brand. L.
42. * " .

Marcha, mar'-chg, s. f., march. Sobre
la marcha, off-hand, on the spot. L.
51.

Marchar, mar-chdr', to march. L. 19.

Margarita, mg,r-gd-re'-ta, s. f., Marga-
ret. L. 3.

Maria, md-re'-a, s. f., Maiy. L. 44.

Martes, mar' -Us, s. m., Tuesday. L. 9.

Marzo, mar'-tho [mar'-soJ, s. m., March.
L. 24.

Mas, mds, adv., more. L. 16.

Mas, mds, conj., but.

Mascara, mds'-cd-ra, s. f., mask. L. 60.

Masculine, mds-cu-le'-no, adj., mascu-
line. L. 47.

Matar, md-tdr', to kill. L. 52.

Matemdtico, md-td-md'-te-co, s. m.,
mathematician ; adj., mathematical.
L. 60.

Materia, 7nd-td'-reQ, s. f., matter, sub-
ject, affair. L. 54.

Material, md-td-re-dV , adj., material.
L. 48.

Materialista, md-td-red-les'-t^, s. m.,
materialist. L. 36.

Matrimonio, md-tre-mo'-neo, s. m.,
matrimony, marriage. L. 64.

Maullado, mg,iil-yd'-THO [mafi-yS'-THo],
s. m., mew (of a cat). L. 46.

Mizimo, mdk'-se-mo, adj. (supl. of
grande), chief, principal, very great.
L. 21.

Mayo, md'-yo, s. m.. May (month). L.
24.

Mayor, md-yor', adj., greater, larger.
El mayor, the greatest, largest, old-
est. L. 20.

Mayiiscula, md-yus' -cu-la>, adj., capital
(letter of the alphabet). L. 62.

Me, md, pron., me, to me. L. 26.

Meca, md'-CQ,, s. f. De Ceca en Meca,
from pillar to post. L. 61.

Media, md'-TueQ,, s. f., stocking. L. 10.

Medianamente, md-THed-nd-mhi' -td,
adv., middling, fairly. L. 39.

Mediania, ind-Tned-ne'-g,, s. f., modera-
tion, mediocrity. L. 52.

Mediano, md-Tned'-no, adj., medium,
moderate. L. 39.

Medico, -md'-Tne-co, s. m., physician,
doctor. L. 19.

Medida, md-wne'-Tna, s. f., measure.
L. 55.

Medio, md'-THeo, adj., half, middle.
Medianoche, midnight. L. 30.

Medio, md'-THeo, s. m., middle, means.
In America a half real, or six and a
quarter centavos. L. 37.

Mediodia, md-Tueo-de' -a, s. m., noon,
midday, south. L. 30.

480

VOCABULARY.

Medir, md-THer', to measure. L. 39.

Mexicano, m^-he-cd'-no, s. m. and adj.,
Mexican. L. 47.

Mexico, m^'-he-co, s. m., Mexico. L. 20.

Mejor, Tod-hor', adj. and adv., better.
L. 25.

Melocot6n, mMo-co-ton' , s. m., peach.
Compare durazno, peach. (Amer.)
L. 31.

Melon, m^-Zon', s. m., melon. L. 31.

Memoria, md-mo'-rea, s. f:, memory.
Aprender de memoriay to leam by
heart. L. 38.

Memorias, md-nw'-reds, s. f. pi., re-
membrances, compliments. L. 39.

Mencion, mhi-fheon' [mgn-seon'], s. f.,
mention. L. 52.

Mencionar, mhi-theo-n&r' [m5n-seo-nSr'],
to mention. L. 45.

Menester, md-n^-Ur', s. m., need,
want, necessity. L. 30.

Menor, md-nor', adj., less, smaller,
minor, younger. L. 20.

Menos, im'-nos, adv., less. A lo me-
nos, at least. L. 16.

Menoscabo, md-nos-cd'-bo, s. m., dete-
rioration. L. 62.

Menosprecio, md-nos-prd'-theo [ma-nos-
pra'-seo], s. m., scom, contempt. L.
65.

Mente, rn^'-td, s. f., mind. L. 62.

Mentir, men-ter', to lie. L. 45.

Menndo, md-nu'-THo, adj., small, slen-
der, mean. A menudo, often. L.
25.

Mequetrefe, md-kd-trd'-fd, s. m., trifler,
jackanapes. L. 63.

Mercader, m^r-cd-TH^' , s. m., dealer,
trader, shop-keeper. L. 52.

Mercado, mhr-cd'-THo, s. m., market.
L. 17.

Mercantil, mer-cdn-teV , adj., mercan-
tile. L. 56.

Merecer, md-rd-tMr' [ma-ra-ser'], to
merit, to deserve. L. 52.

Merendar, vm-rH-ddr', to lunch. L.
34.

Merienda, md-re-hi'-dQ, s. f., lunch.
L. 34.

Meridiano, md-re-Tsed'-no, s. m., me-
ridian. L. 62.

Merino, md-re'-no, s. m., merino
(sheep). L. 40.

Merito, m^'-re-to, s. m., merit. L. 55.

Mes, mas, s. m., month. Al mes, by
the month. L. 16.

Mesa, md'-sa, s. f., table. L. 14.

Metal, m^-tiil', s. m., metal. L. 62.

Meter, md-Ur\ to put in, to introduce
into. L. 46.

Metodico, md-to'-THe-co, adj., method-
ical. L. 35.

M^todo, md'-to-THo, s. m., method.
L. 47.

Metrdpoli, md-tro'-po-le, s. f., metrop-
olis. L. 51.

Mi, me, pron., me. L. 25.

Mi, me, poss. pron., my. L. 5.

Miedo, med'-THO, s. m., fear. L. 25.

Miel, me-dV, s. f., honey, syrup. L. 65.

Miembro, me^m'-bra, s. m., member,
limb. L. 62.

Miercoles, me^r'-co-Us, s. m., Wednes-
day. L. 9.

Mil, mel, num. adj. and s. m., a thou-
sand, one thousand. L. 14.

Milla, mel'-yg, [me'-ya], s. f., mile. L.
62.

Millar, mel-ydr [me-ySr'], s. m., a thou-
sand. L. 40.

Milldn, mel-yon' [m6-yon'], num. adj.
and s. m., million. L. 40.

Mineral, me-nd-rdV, s. m., mineral.
L. 62.

Mimiscula, me-nus'-cu-la, adj., small
(letter, not capital). L. 62.

Minuto, me-nH'-to, s. m., minute. L.
23.

Mio, mi'-o, poss. pron. and poss. adj.,
mine. L. 13.

Mirar, me-rdr', to look, to behold, to
observe. L. 29.

Mismo, mes' -mo, adj., same, self, self-
same. El mismo, he himself. L. 27.

Mi tad, me-tdTH, s. f., half. L. 40.

Moda, mo'-THa, s. f., fashion. L. 25.

Modelo, mo-THd'-lo, s. m., model. L. 55.

Moderacidn, mo-THd-rd-theon' [mo-THS-
rS-th6on'], s. f.. moderation. L. 65.

Moderno, mo-rner'-no, adj., modern.
L. 52.

Modificar, mo-THe-fe-cdr' , to modify.
L. 61.

Modo, mo'-THo^ s. m., mode, manner,
means. De ningtin modo, by no
means. L. 42.

Molestar, mo-Us-tdr', to molest, to dis-
turb, to trouble. L. 43.

Momento, mo-m^n'-to, s. m., moment.
L. 62.

Mona, mo'-ng,, s. f., female monkey.
L. 65.

Mondrqnico, mo-nar'-ke-co, adj., mon-
archical. L. 35.

Moneda, mo-nd'-THa, s. f., coin. Pa-
pel moneda, paper money. L. 13.

Montar, mon-tdr', to mount, to ride
(horseback). L. 62.

Montaraz, mon-td-hrdih' [mon-t5-hrSs'J,
adj., mountain, wild. L. 54.

Monte, mon'-td^ s. m., mountain.
Monte de piedad, pawn-shop. L. 40.

Morder, mor-d^', to bite, to nip. L.
36.

rOCABULABY.

481

Moribundo, mo-re-hiin'-do, adj., dying.

L. 37.
Morir, mo-rer', to die. L. 44.
Mosoa, mos'-ca, s. f., fly. L. 44.
Mostrar, mos-trdr', tx) show. L. 35.
Motive, mo-te'-vo, s. m., motive. L.

34.
Mover, mo-vhr', to move. L. 36.
Mozo, mo'-tho [mo'-so], s. m., youth,

young man, waiter. L. 62.
Muohacha, mu-chiX'-chg,^ s. f., girl. L. 6.
Muohacho, mix-chW-cho^ s. m., boy. L.

6.
Muoho, mH'-cho, adj. and adv., much,

a great deal, very. L. 8.
Mudable, mii-THd'-bld, adj., mutable,

changeable, fickle. L. 49.
Mudar, mH-THdr', to change. L. 62.
Mnela, mud' -la, s. f., molar, back

tooth. L. 50.
Muerte, mu^r'-td,, s. f., death. L. 38.
Muerto, mMr'-to, p. p. of Mobie, dead,

killed. L. 52.
Muestra, mu^'-tr^, s. f., sample, sign.

L. 62.
Mujer, mu-hdr'f s. f., woman, wife.

L. 6.
Multitud, mul-te-tuTH' , s. f., multi-
tude. L. 40.
Mundo, mun'-do, s. m., world. L. 35.
Murmuraoidn, mur-mii-rd-theon' [mftr-

mti-ra-seoii'], s. f., murmuring, back-
biting. L. 62.
Murmur9,r, mur-mu-rdr' , to murmur,

to backbite. L. 62.
Museo, mu-sd'-o, s. m., museum. L.

51.
Miisica, mu'-se-c(i, s. f., music. L. 15.
Mtisioo, mu'-se-co, s. m., musician.

L. 15.
Muy, mu'-e, very. L. 6.

Nacer, nd-th^r' [nS-sgr'l, to be bom.
Nacer de pies, to be born to good
luck. L. 62.

Naoidn, nd-theon' [nS-sSon'], s. f., na-
tion. L. 24.

Nada, nd'-Tna, adv., in no degree.
L. 11.

Nada, nd'-Tua, s. f., nothing, nonen-
tity. L. II.

Nadar, nd-THdr', to swim. L. 53.

Nadie, nd'-THed, ind. pron., nobody,
no one. L. 11.

NApoles, nd''po-l<^, s. f., Naples. L.
47.

Naranja, nd-rdng'-ha, s. f., orange. L.
31.

Natural, nd-t^-rdV, s. m. and adj., na-
tive, natural. L. 44.

Naturaleza, nd-tH-rd-ld'-th^ [nS-tti-rS-ls'-
Ba], s. f., nature. L. 40.
33

Naturalista, nd-tii-rd-les'-tQ, s. m., nat-
uralist. L. 36.

Navarra, nd-vq,'-hrQ, s. f., Navarre.
L. 55.

Navarro, nd-v^'-hro, s. m., Navarrese.
L. 55.

Navegaoidn, nd-vd-gd-theon' [nS-vS-gS-
86011'], s. f., navigation. L. 24.

Navidad, nd-ve-THdrn' , s. f., Christ-
mas, nativity. L. 43.

Navio, nd-ve'-o, s. m., ship. L. 53.

Neoesario, nd-thd-sd'-reo [nS-sa-sS'-rSo],
adj., necessary. L. 27.

Neoesidad, nd-thd-se-THdrn' [nS-eS-sS-
THaTH'], s. f., necessity. L. 44.

Neoesitar, nd-thd-se-tdr' [nS-sa-sg-tSr'], to
need, to require. L. 5.

Necio, nd'-theo [na'-seo], adj. and s. m.,
foolish, fool. L. 65.

Nefas, nd'-fds. Por fas 6 por nefas,
right or wrong. L. 63.

Negraoidn, nd-gd-theon' [nS-gS-sgon'], s.
f., negation. L. 62.

Negrar, nd-gdr', to deny, to refuse. L.
34.

Ne^ativa, nd-gd-te'-vo, a. f., negation,
refusal, negative. L. 62.

Negrligrente, n^g-le-h^'-td^ adj., negli-
gent. L. 50.

Negrocio, nd-go'-theo [n5-go'-86o], s. m.,
business, affair, matter. L. 27.

Negro, nd-gro, s. m. and adj., negro,
black. L. 62.

Neutro, ndH'-tro, adj., neuter. L. 62.

Nevar, nd-tdr', to snow. L. 30.

Ni, ne, cong., neither, nor. L. 8.

Nieve, ned'-vd, s. f., snow. L. 30.

Ningruno, nen-gu'-no, pron., no one, no-
body. Ninguna cosa, nothing. L.
11.

Nina, nen'-ya, s. f., babe, child, little
girl, maiden. L. 17.

Nino, nen'-yo, s. m., babe, little boy.
L. 17.

No, no, adv., no. L. 1.

Noble, no' -bid, adj., noble. L. 62.

Nobleza, no-bid' -tha [no-bia'-sa], a. f.,
nobleness, nobility. L. 55. *

Noche, no'-chd, s. f., evening, night.
Noche buena, Christmas eve. L. 23.

Nombrar, nom-brdr', to appoint, to
name. L. 48.

Nombre, nam' -bra, s. m., name, noun.
L. 40.

Nomina tivo, no-me-nd-te'-voy s. m.,
nominative. L. 62.

Nono, no'-no, see Noveno. L. 15.

Norte, nor'-td, s. m., north. L. 22.

Nos, nos, pers. pron., us, to us. L. 26.

Nosotros, no-so'-tros, pron., we, our-
selves. L. 1.

Nota, no'-t^, s. f., note. L. 62.

482

VOCABULARY.

No tar, no-tdr', to note, to observe. L.

58.
Notioia, no-te'-theg> [no-te'-sea], s. f., no-
tice, news (pi. ) L. 27.
Notorio, no-to'-reo, adj., notorious. L.

45.
Novecientos, no-vd-the^n' -tos [no-v6-

s6gn'-to8], num. adj., nine hundred.

L. 14.
Novedad, no-vd-TH&TH' , s. f., novelty,

news. L. 39.
Novela, no-vd'-la, s. f., novel, romance.

L. 52.
Noveno, no-vd'-nOf ord. adj. and s. m.,

ninth. L. 15.
Noventa, no-vH'-ta, num. adj., ninety.

L. 14.
Noviembre, no-ve^m'-hrd, s. m., No-
vember. L. 24.
Nuestro, nu^'-tro, poss. pron., ours.

L. 13.
Nueva, nud'-vQ, s. f., news (generally

used in the plural). L. 60.
Nueva York, nud'-vgryork, s. f., New

York. L. 9.
Nueve, nud'-vd, num. adj., nine. L.

14.
Nuevo, nud'-vo, adj., new. De nuevo,

anew. L. 21.
Nuez, nudth' [ntias'], s. f., walnut^ nut.

L. 40.
Numeral, nH-md-rHi', adj., numeral.

L. 14.
Niimero, nu'-md-ro, s. m., number. L.

14.
Nunca, niln'-ccL, adv., never. L. 25.

0, 0, conj., or, either. L. 8.

Obedecer, o-bd-Tud-th^r' [o-M-THa-sSr'],
to obey. L. 48.

Objetivo, ob-hd-te'-vo, adj. and s. m.,
objective. L. 62.

ObjetO; ob-hd'-to, s. m., object. L. 48.

Obligacion, ob-le-gortheon' [ob-ie-ga-
seon'], s. f., obligation, duty. L. 24.

Oblig'ar, ob-le-gdr', to oblige, to force,
to compel. L. 61.

Obra, o'-bra, s. f., work. L. 15.

Obrar, o-brdr', to work, to operate.
L. 40.

Observar, ob-s^r-vdr\ to observe, to re-
mark. L. 48.

Obstante, ob-stdn'-td, see No obstan-
te. L. 54.

Obvio, ob'-veo, adj., obvious. L. 43.

Ocasidn, o-c&seon', s. f., occasion, op-
portunity. L. 39.

Occidente, ok-the-d^n'-td [ok-se-den'-ta],
s. m., the West. L. 51.

Ochenta, o-cMn'-tg, num. adj., eighty.
L. 14.

Ocho, o'-cho, num. adj., eight. L. 14.

Ochocientos, o-cho-the^n'-tos [o-cho-

segn'-tos], num. adj., eight hundred.

L. 14.
Octavo, oh-td'-vo, ord. adj., eighth. L.

15.
Octubre, oh-tu'-brd, s. m., October. L.

24.
Ocultar, o-cul-tdr\ to hide. L. 48.
Oculto, o-cul'-to, adj., hidden, secret.

L. 52.
Ocupacidn, o-cu-pd-theon' [o-ca-pa-seon'J,

s. f., occupation, business. L. 54.
Ocupar, o-cil-pdr', to occupy, to engage

in. L. 47.
Ocurrir, o-cu-hrer', to occur, to strike.

L. 62.
Oeste, o^'-td, s. m., west. L. 51.
Ofender, o-f^n-der', to offend. L. 27.
Oficio, o-fe'-theo [o-fe'-seo], s. m., office,

trade, business. L. 38.
Ofrecer, o-frd-TH^r' [o-fra-ser'], to offer.

L. 39.
Oh, 0, oh ! exclamation. L. 46.
Oido, oe'-THo, s. m., hearing, ear. L.

61.
Oir, oer\ to hear. Oiga, hist, listen,

L.41.
Ojala, o'-hd-la, intj., would that! oh

that ! L. 37.
Ojo, o'-ho, s. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler, o-l^r\ to smell. L. 41.
Olfato, ol-fd'-to, s. m., the sense of

smell. L. 61.
011a, ol'-yg, [o'-ya], s. f., earthenware-

pot. L.'62.
Olor, o-lor', s. m., odor, scent, smell

L. 62.
Olivar, o-le-vdr', s. m., olive grove. L

62.
Olvidar, ol-ve-THdr\ to forget. L.

Omnibus, om'-ne-bus, s. m., omnibus.
L. 51.

Once, on'-thd [on'-sS], num. adj., eleven.
L. 14.

Opera, o'-pd-rq,, s. f., opera. L. 25.

Opinion, o-pe-neon', s. f., opinion. L.
42.

Oponer, o-po-n^r', to oppose. L. 51.

6ptimo, op'-<e-mo,adj., best, extremely
good. L. 21.

Opuesto, o-piids'-to, adj., opposed, op-
posing, opposite. L. 52.

Oracidn, o-rd-theon' [o-ra-seon'], s. f.,
prayer, speech, discourse. L. 45.

Orden, or'-d^n, s. m. andf., order. L.
39.

Ordenar, or-dd-ndr', to ordain, to com-
mand. L. 51.

Organista, or-gd-nes'-tg,, s. m., organ-
ist. L. 36.

Oriente, o-re^n'-td, s. m., east. L. 51.

rOCABULART.

483

Oro, o'-ro, s. m., gold. L. 8.

Os, OS, pron., you (objective case). L.
26.

Osti6n, 08-teon', s. m. See Ostka. L.
62.

Ostra, os'-tra, s. f., oyster. L. 62.

Otono, 0-ton' -yo, s. m., autumn. L. 24.

Otro, o'-tro, indef. pron., other, an-
other. L. 18.

Oveja, o-vd'-h(i, s. f., sheep. L. 65.

Ox ! oTcs, intj., exclamation used to
frighten off fowls. L. 46.

Paca, pd'-cii, s. f., Fanny. L. 44.

Paciencia, pdrthe^n'-theQ [pa-sggn'-sea],
s. f., patience. L. 63.

Paco, pd'-co, s. m., contraction of Fran-
cisco, Frank. L. 44.

Padecer, pd-THd-th^r' [pS-Tna-sgr'], to
suffer. L. 47.

Padrastro, pd-drds'-tro, s. m., step-
father. L. 49.

Padre, pa'-drd, s. m., father. L. 6 and
45.

Pagar, pd-gdr', to pay. L. 14.

Pagare, pd-gd-rd\ s. m., promissory
note. L. 54.

Pagina, pd'-he-na, s. f., page (of a
book). L. 50.

Pais, i)(i-es', s.m., country. L. 19.

Paisano, p(^e-sd'-no, s. m., country-
man, compatriot. L. 50.

T a^a., pd'-hQ, s. f., straw. L. 63.

Pajaro, pd'-hd-ro, s. m., bird. L. 48.

Pajarraco, pd-hd-hrd'-co, s. m. (aug. of
pdjaro), an ugly, clumsy bird. L. 49.

Palabra, pd-ld'-br^, s. f., word, word
of promise. Falabras mayores, of-
fensive words. L. 15 and 65.

Palacio, pd-ld'-theo [pS-i2'-8go], s. m.,
palace. L. 48.

Palangana, pd-ldn-gd-na, s. f., wash-
bowl. L. 46,

Palo, pd'-lo, s. m., stick of wood, pole.
L. 62.

Pan, pdn, s. m., bread, loaf. L. 7.

Panaderia, pd-nd-THd-re'-a, s. f., bak-
ery. L. 11.

Panadero, pd-nd-Tud'-ro, s. m., baker.
L. 11.

^2JitB\.6n,pdn-td-lon\ s. m., pantaloon,
trousers. L. 17.

Pano, pdn'-yo, s. m., cloth. L. 62.

Panuelo, pdn-yud'-lo, s. m., pocket-
handkerchief. L. 5.

Papa, pd-pa', s. m., papa. L. 5.

Papel, pd-pU'y s. m., paper, part (in a
play). Hacer^opeZ de, to cut a fig-
ure, to take a part. L. 4.

Paquito, pd-que'-to, s. m. (contraction
of Francisco, Francis), Franky. L.
44.

"PsLT, pdr, s. m., pair, couple. Al par,
at par. L. 40.

Para, pd'-rcb, prep., for, to, in order to,
toward. L. 19.

Parabien, jp^-ra-6e^n', s. m., congratu-
lation, compliment. L. 62.

Paragnas, _pa-r(j'-^w(is, s. m., umbrella.
L. 50.

Parar, pd-rdr', to stop, to stand, to
stand up, to end in. L. 51.

'Pa.T&sol, pd-rd-sol' , s. m., parasol. L.
50.

Parecer, pd-rd-tMr' [pa-ra-sgr'l, to ap-
pear, to seem. L. 30.

Pared, pd-r^rn', s. f., wall. L. 50.

Paris, pd-res\s.Tn., Paris. L. 12.

Parque, pQ,r'-kd, s. m., park, caliber.
L. 17.

"PsLite, par'-td, s. f., part; s. m., mes-
sage, despatch. L. 27.

Partioipar, pg/r-te-the-pdr' [par-t6-se-
pSr'], to participate, to partake of.
L. 57.

Participio, par-te-the'-peo [par-te-sg'-
peo], s. m., participle. L. 43.

Particnla, pQr-te'-cH-la, s. f., particle.
L. 50.

Particular, p^r-te-cA-ldr' , adj., particu-
lar, private. L. 49.

Partida, j)ar-<e'-spH^, s. f., departure.
L. 42.

Partir, pq,r-ter', to depart, to set out,
to divide. L. 19.

Parti tivb, par-te-te'-vo, adj., partitive.
L. 63.

Pasaje, pd-sd'-hd, s. m., passage, fare.
L. 58, 63.

Pasar, pd-sdr', to pass, to go in, to enter.
Pase usted, senor, come in, sir. L. 16.

Pasoua, pds'-cHQ, s. f., Easter. E. 59.

Paseante, pd-sddn'-td, s. m., passer-by,
promenader. L. 38.

Pasearse, pd-sddr'-sd, to take a walk,
to promenade. L. 24.

Paseo, pd-sd'-o, s. m., walk, prome-
nade. L. 57.

Pasiva, pd-se'-vQ, s. f., the passive
voice. L. 50.

Pasivo, pd-se'-voy adj., passive. L. 63.

Paso, pd'-so, s. m., step, pace. L. 54.

Patio, pd'-teo, s. m., yard, pit (in the-
atres). L. 46.

Patronimico, pd-tro-ne'-me-co, adj.,
patronymic. L. 49.

Paz, path [pas], s. f., peace. L.^43.

Pecho, pd'-cho, s. m., breast. A lo he-
cho pecho, what is done cannot be
helped. L. 65.

Pechug'a, pd-chu'-gg,, s. f., breast of a
fowl. L. 68.

Pedazo, pd-dd'-tho [pa-dS'-so], s. m.,
piece, morsel, bit. L. 63.

4:84

VOCABULARY.

Pedir, pd-wHer', to ask, to demand, to
ask for. L. 39.

Pedro, pd'-dro, s. m., Peter. L. 19.

Pegar, pd-gdr', to stick, to paste, to
beat. L. 63.

Peinar, pde-ndr\ to comb. L. 46,

Peine, pd'e-nd, s. m., comb. L. 46.

VeligTO, pd'le'-gro, s. m^., danger, peril.
L. 51.

Pelo, pd'-lo, s. m., hair. Apelo, to the
purpose, fitting. En pelo, bareback
(to ride). L. 33, 44.

Pelota, pd-lo'-ta, s. f., ball (for play-
ing). L. 54.

Pena, pd'-na, s. f., pain, penalty. A
duras penas, with much difficulty.
L. 59.

Pensamiento, phi-sd-me^n'-to, s. m.,
thought. L. 48.

Pensar, p^n-sdr', to think, to intend.
L. 34.

Pentiltimo, pd-nHl'-te-mo, adj., penul-
timate, penult. L. 50.

Penasco, pdn-yds'-co, s. m.,* a large
rock. L. 56.

Peer, pd-or', adj. and adv., worse. L.
20.

Pepa, pd'-pQ, s. f., Josie. L. 44.

Pepe, pd'-pd. (See Pepito. ) L. 44.

Pepito, pd-pe'-to, s. m. (contraction of
Jose, Joseph), Joe. L. 44.

Pequeno, pd-hdn'-yo, adj., little, small,
young. L. 7.

Per-,p^, Lat. prep, used in Spanish as
a prefix only. L. 50.

Pera, pd'-rQ, s. f., pear. L. 59.

Peral, pd-rill\ s. m., i)ear-tree. L.
59.

Perder, p^-dh^', to lose. L. 37.

Perdonar, p^r-do-n&r\ to pardon. L.
27.

Perezoso, pd-rd-tho'-so [pS-rS-so'-so],
adj., lazy, slothful. L. 38.

Perfecoionar. p^-f^k-theo-n&r' [pgr-f 5k-
seo-nar'], to perfect, to improve. L.
38.

Perfecto, pi^r-f^k'-to, adj., perfect. L.
29.

Perilla, pa-rer-3/flt[pa-re'-ya], s. f., small
pear. Venir de perilla, to suit exact-
ly. L. 64.

Periddioo, pd-reo'-Tne-co, s. m., news-
paper. L. 8.

Permanecer, p^-md-nd-th^' [pgr-mS-
na-ser'], to remain, to stop, to stay.
L. 45.

Permanencia, ph'-md-n^n' -fhea [pSr-mS-
ngn'-sea], s. f., permanence, duration,
stay. L. 51.

Permitir, per-me-fer', to permit, to al-
low. L. 44.

Pero, pd'-ro, conj., but. L. 3.

Perpendicular, p^r-phi-de-dir-ldr\ adj.,
perpendicular. L. 51.

Perro, p^'-hro, s. m., dog. L. 63.

Perseverancia, per-sd-vd-rdn'-theg, [per-
sa-va-ran'-sea], s. f., perseverance. L.
63-. . " ^

Persistir, p^r-ses-ter' , to persist. L.
50. cs

Persona, p^r-so'-na, s. f., person. L.
38.

Personal, ph-so-ndl', adj., personal.
L. 63.

Pesa, jpa'-sa, s. f., weight (for weigh-
ing). L. 55.

P^same, pd'-sd-md, s. m., condolence.
L. 59.

Pesar, pd-sdr', to weigh, to regret.
No le pesa de haber nacido, he has
an excellent opinion of himself. L.
31.

Pesar, pd-sdr', s. m., regret, grief, sor-
row. A pesar de, in spite of, not-
withstanding. L. 31.

Pescado, p^-cd'-THo, s. m., fish. L. 7.

Pescar, p^s-cdr', to fish. L. 63.

P^simo, pd'-se-mo, adj., worst, very
bad. L. 21.

Peso, pd'-so, s. m., weight, heaviness,
dollar. L. 14.

Pianista, ped-nes'-tQ, s. m., pianist.
L. 15.

Piano, pe^'-no, s. m., piano. L. 15.

Picante, pe-cdn'-td, adj., piquant, high-
ly seasoned, pungent, pointed (say-
ing). L. 54.

Picar, pe-cdr\ to prick, to bite, to
pique, to thrust. L. 46.

Picaresoo, pe-cd-rh'-co, adj., roguish.
L. 49.

Pioaro, pe'-cd-ro, adj., rogue, rascal,
knave. L. 32.

Pico, pe'-co, s. m., beak, bill. Callarse
el pico, to hold one's tongue. L. 61.

Pie, pea', s. m., foot. A pie, on foot.
Nacer de pies, to be born with good
luck. L. 39.

Pierna, pe^r'-na, s. f., leg. L. 33.

Pieza, ped'-tha [pea'-sa], s. f., piece. L.
64.

Pinar, pe-ndr', s. m., pine-grove. L.
49.

Pino, pe'-no, s. m., pine. L. 40.

Pintar, pen-tdr', to i)aint, to represent.
L. 54.

Pintor, pen-tor', s. m., painter. L. 31.

Pintura, pen-tu'-rg,, s. f., painting. L.
31.

Pipa, pe'-pa^ s. f., pipe. L. 42.

Piqne, pe'-kd, s. m., pique, offence.
Estaba pique de perderse, he was on
the brink of ruin. L. 62.

Piropos, pe-ro'-pos, s. m., sayings.

VOCABULARY.

485

sweet phrases addressed to women.
L. 58.

Pisaverde, pe-sd-v^r'-dd, s. m., fop,
coxcomb. L. 50.

Piso, pe'-so, s. m., floor, story (of a
house). L. 53.

Pistola, pes-to'-lQ, s. f., pistol. L. 44.

Pistoletazo, pes-to-ld-td'-tho [pes-io-ia-
ta'-8o], s. m., pistol-shot. L. 44.

Placer, pld-tMr' [piS-sSr'], to please.
L. 31.

Placer, pld-th^r' CpiS-sgr'], s. m., pleas-
ure, gold-diggings. L. 31.

Plata, pld'-t^, s. f., silyer. L. 8.

Plato, pld'-to, s. m., plate, dish (of
food). L. 57.

Plaza, pld'-thg, [plS'-sa], s. f., place, situ-
ation, square, market-place. Plaza
de toros, arena for bull-fights. L.
17, 54.

Plazo, pld'-tho [piS'-8o], s. m., term (of
payment). L. 63.

Plomo, plo'-mo, s. m., lead. L. 63.

Pluma, plu'-ma^ s. f., feather, pen. L. 5.

Plural, plu-r&i, adj., plural. L. 57.

'P\vL80Tia.m]peTfeoto,plu8-kuam-p^r-f<^k'-
io, s. m., pluperfect, past perfect.
L. 43.

Pobre, po'-brd, adj., poor, needy,
wretched. L. 13.

Pobreza, po-hrd'-thg, [po-brs'-sa], s. f.,
poverty. L. 59.

Poco, po'-eo, adv., little; pi., few.
Poco i. poco, slowly, gently, softly.
L. 32.

Poco, po'-co, s. m., little. L. 6.

Poder, po-TH^r', to be able. No poder
mds, to be exhausted. L. 32.

Poder, po-TH^r', s. m., power, author-
ity, possession. L. 35.

Poesia, pod-se'-a, s. f., poetry, poesy.
L. 31.

"PoetB., pod'-tg,, s. m., poet. L. 31.

Poetastro, ^oa-Ms'-<ro, s. m., poetaster.
L. 44.

Portico, po^'-te-co, adj., poetic, poeti-
cal. L. 35.

Polca, pol'-ca, s. f., polka. L. 33.

Politica, po-le'-te-cci, s. f., politics, po-
liteness. L. 52.

Politico, po-le'-te-co, adj., political, po-
lite. L. 52.

Politico, po-le'-te-co, s. m., politician.
L. 52.

Polio, pol'-yo [po'-yo], s. m., chicken.
L. 5.

"Polvo, pol'-vo, s. m., powder, dust. L.
62.

Pdlvora, pol'-vo-ra, s. f., gunpowder.
L. 63.

Ponderar, pon-dd-rdr', to exaggerate,
to cry up. L. 54.

Poner, po-n^r', to put, to place, to lay,
to set (as the sun ) . Ponerse, to be-
come, to get. Se puso serio, he be-
came serious. L. 41.

Por, por, prep., by, for, in behalf of, in
favor of, about, through. L. 19.

Porcion, por-theon' [por-seon'], s. f., por-
tion, part, lot, number, quantity.
L. 63.

Pormenor, por-md-nor', s. m. (general-
ly used in the plural). Pormenores,
details, particulars. L. 50.

Porque por'-kd, conj., because. L. 18.

Por que, por-fca', conj., why? for what
reason? s. m., reason wherefor. L.
18.

Portarse, por-tdr'-sd, to behave, to con-
duct one's self. L. 55.

Portugal, por-tu-gdl', s. m., \Portugal.
L. 60.

Portugues, por-tu-ghds' , s. m. and adj.,
Portuguese. L. 44.

Poseer, po-sd^r', to possess. L. 34.

V OBesiv 0, po-sd-se'-vo, a^., possessive.
L. 63.

Toaible, pose' -bid, adj., possible. L. 31.

Positive, po-se-te'-vo, adj., positive.
L. 48.

Posponer, pos-po-n^r', to postpone, to
place after. L. 63.

Potencial, po-thi-thedl' [po-tSn-sSSi'],
adj., potential. L. 63.

Practica, prdk'-te-cg, s. f., practice.
L. 23.

Practicante, prdk'-te-cdn'-td, s. m.,
practitioner. L. 38.

Practical, prdk-te-cdr' , to practise. L.
23.

Practice, adj., practical. L. 65.

Pre-, prd, Lat. prep, used in Spanish
as prefix only. L. 50.

FiecedeT, prd-thd-TH^r' [pr5-sa-THgr'], to
precede, to go before. > L. 63.

Precepto, prd-tMp'-to [pra-sgp'-to], s.
m., precept. L. 53.

Precio, prd'-theo [pra'-seo], s. m., price,
prize. L. 50.

Precise, prd-the'-so [pra-se'-so], adj., ne-
cessary, obligatory, precise. L. 63.

Preferir, prd-fd-rer', to prefer. L. 38.

'Piegvinta., prd-gun'-ta, s. f., question,
inquiry. L. 33.

Preguntar, prd-giin-tdr' , to ask ques-
tions, to question, to inquire. L. 33.

Preliminar, prd-le-me-ndr' , adj., pre-
liminary. L. 63.

Premiar,^ra-mc^r', to reward. L. 62.

Premie, prd'-meo, s. m., premium, re-
ward, prize. L. 59.

Prenda, pr^n'-da, s. f., pledge, jewel;
pi. endowments, talents, parts. L.
41, 63.

4:86

VOCABULARY.

Prender, pr^n-d^r\ to take up, to ar-
rest. L. 39.
Freposioddn, prd-po-se-theon' [pra-po-se-

seon'], s. f., preposition. L. 43.
TTeBencitL, prd-s^n'-thea [pra-sen'-sea], s.

f., presence. L. 63.
Presentar, prd-sH-tdr', to present, to

introduce, to offer. L. 39.
Presente, prd-shi'-td, adj., present.

Tener presente, to bear in mind. L.

43.
Presidente, prd-se-d&a'-td, s. m., presi-
dent. L. 46.
Presidio, prase' -thIo, s. m., prison.

L. 59.
Presidir, prd-se-THer' , to preside. L.

54.
Preso, prd'-so, irreg. p. p. (of Peen-

dek), taken. Estd preso, he is

taken (prisoner). L. 52.
Prestar, pr^-tar', to lend. L. 59.
Presto, pr^'-to, adj., quick, ready,

prompt. L. 20.
Presto, pr^'-to, adv., soon, quickly.

L. 20.
Pretender, prd-t^n-d^r\ to pretend, to

lay claim to, to claim, to solicit.

L. 48.
Pretensidn, prd-t^n-theon' , s. f., pre-
tention, claim, thing solicited. L.

57.
Preterite, prd-W-re-to, adj., preterit.

L. 63.
Pretexto, prd-Uhs'-to, s. m., pretext.

L. 58.
Prevenir, prd-vd-ner', to prevent, to

foresee, to warn, to prepare. L. 65.
Prever, prd-ver', to foresee. L. 69.
Primavera, pre-m(i-vd' -r^, s. f., spring.

L. 24.
Primero, pre-md'-ro^ adj., first ; adv.,

first, rather, sooner. L. 15.
Prime, pre: -mo, s. m., cousin. L. 13.
Principal, pren-the-pdl' [pren-se-pSl'],

adj., principal, chief. L. 36.
Principiante, pren-the-pedn'-td [pren-se-

pean'-ta], act. part., beginner. L.

38.
Principiar,pren-<^e-pe^r'[prgn-8€-p6Sr'],

to begin, to commence. L. 23.
Principle, pren-the'-peo [pren-8e'-peo], s.

m., beginning, commencement, prin-
ciple. L. 63.
Prisa, pre'-sa, s. f., haste, si)eed, hurry.

L. 30.
Prisionero, pre-seo-nd'-ro, s. m., pris-
oner. L. 48.
Prisma, pres'-ma, s. m., prism. L. 54,
Probable, pro-bd'-hld, adj., probable.

L. 29.
Probar, pro-hdr', to try, to prove, to

taste. L. 35.

Procesidn, pro-th^seon' [pro-sS-seon'], a.,
f., procession. L. 46.

Procurar, pro-cu-rdr\ to procure, to
endeavor, to try to. L. 51.

Produccidn, pro-duk-theon' [pro-diik-
seon'], s. f., production. L. 40.

Preducir, pro-du-ther' [pro-du-ser], to
produce. L. 40.

Proeza, prod'-thg, [proa'-8a],Ai^f., prow-
ess. L. 54.

Profecia, pro-fd-the'-g, [pro-fa-se'-alr^ s.
f., prophecy. L. 45.

Profesi6n,pro-/2-«eon',s. f., profession.
L. 38.

Profesor, pro-fd-sor', s. m., professor.
L. 18.

Prohibir, pro-e-her', to prohibit. L.
53.

Prdjimo, pro' -he-mo, s. m., neighbor.
L. 28.

Promesa, pro-md'-SQ, s. f., promise.
L. 57.

Prometer, pro-md-Ur', to promise. L.
54.

Pronombre, pro-nom'-brd, s. m., pro-
noun. L. 43.

Pronominal, pro-no-me-ndl' , adj., pro-
nominal. L. 61.

Prontitud, pron-te-tuTH' , s. f., prompt-
ness, promntitude, quickness. L.
43.

Pronto, pron'-to, adj., prompt, quick,
ready ; adv., soon, promptly, quick-
ly. L. 20.

Pronnnoiaoidn, pro-nHn-thed-theon'
[pro-n^n-sea-seon'], s. f., pronuncia-
tion. L. 63.

Pronunciar, pro-nun-thedr' [pro-n^-
sear'], to pronounce. L. 15.

Propiedad, pro-ped-THdTH' , s. f., pro-
priety, property. L. 63.

Propio, pro'-peo, adj., proper, own,
selfsame, same. L. 49.

Pr opener, pro-po-n^r' , to propose. L.
51.

Prosa, pro'-sq, s. f., prose. L. 31.

Proporcionar, pro-por-theo-ndr' [pro-
por-seo-nSr], to proportion, to proi
cure, to offer. L. 48.

TTOtest&nte, pro-t^s-tdn'-td, s. m., Pro
testant. L. 49.

Protestantismo, pro-Us-tdn-tes'-mo, s
m.. Protestantism. L. 49.

Provecho, pro-vd'-cho. s. m., profit^
benefit. L. 64.

Proveer, pro-vd^r', to provide. L. 34.

Proverbio, pro-v^r'-beo, s. m., proverb.
L. 65.

Provincia, pro-ven'-thea, s. f., province.
L. 19.

Provisto, pro-ves'-to, p. p. (of Peo-
veee), provided. L. 52.

VOCABULARY.

487

Frdximo, proh'-se-mo, adj., next, near-
est. L. 23.

Frudencia, pr4-d^n'-thea [prft-dgn'-sea],
s. f., prudence. L. 34.

Prudente, prii-d^n'-td, adj., prudent.
L. 20.

Prueba, prM'-bQ, s. f., proof. L. 46.

Prusia, prU'-se^, s. f., Prussia. L. 46.

Publicar, pu-Me-cdr', to publisli. L.
48.

Piiblico, p4'-ble-co, s. m. and adj., pub-
lic. L. 51.

Pudrir, pH-drer'^ to rot. L. 41.

Pueblo, pUd'-blo, s. m., town, people.
L. 50.

Puerta, pu^r'-tf^, s. f., door. L. 27.

Pues, puds', conj., then, therefore, in-
asmuch as, since, because ; intj . , well !
Pues que? well, what of it? L. 41.

Pulgada, pHl-gd'-TH^j s. f., inch. L.
63.

Punta, pUn'-ta, s. f., point, stitch. L.
50.

Puntapl^, pUn-t^-ped' , s. m., kick. L.
50.

Puntilla, pJin-tel'-ygL [pftn-te'-ya], s. f.,
small point. De puntillas, on tip-
toe. L. 44.

Funto, pun' -to J s. m., point (of time or
space), spot, place. L. 51.

Puntuacidn, piin-tud-theon' [pftn-tM-
seon'], s. f., punctuation. L. 63.

Funtual, pun-tudV, adj., punctual, ex-
act, accurate. L. 63.

Funtualidad, pUn-tud-le-rndTH', s. f.,
punctuality. L. 63.

Furista, pu-res'-t^, s. m., purist. L.
63.

Que, hd, rel. pron., that, which, that

which, he who ; interr. pron., what,

that ; conj., that. L. 3, 16, 17.
Quebrar, kd-brdr', to break, to smash.

L. 34.
Quedar, hd-THdr', to stop, to stay, to

remain, to become. El campo quedo

por los americanos, the Americans

were victorious. L. 38.
Quejarse, kd-Mr'-sd, to complain, to be

vexed, to moan. L. 38.
Quemar, hd-mdr', to burn. L. 32.
Querer, Tcd-rer', to wish, to desire, to

will, to love, to like, to be willing,

L. 13.
Querido, Icd-re'-THO, adj., dear. L. 13.
Queso, hd'-so, s. m., cheese. L. 7.
Quien, ke-^n', rel. and interr. pron.,

who, whom. L. 17.
Quienquiera, ke^n-hed'-vQ, indef.

pron., whosoever. L. 50.
Quieto, ked'-to, adj., quiet, still, at rest.

L. 62.

Quejada, kd-hW-Tsa, s. f., jaw. L. 50.

Quince, ken'-thd [ken'-sa], num. ac^.,
fifteen. L. 14.

Quinientos, ke-ne^n'-tos, adj., five hun-
dred. L. 14.

Quinto, ken' -to, ord. adj. and s. m.,
fifth. L. 15.

Quitar, ke-tdr', to remove, to take
away, ofl", out, to prevent. L. 53. .

Quitasol, ke-t^soV, s. m., parasol. L.
50.

Quiza, ke-thg,' [ke-sa'], adv., perhaps.
L. 34.

Eadical, ^ra-sH6-c^Z', adj., radical. L.

63.
Baiz, hrg^-eth' [hra-es'], s. f.,root, sweet

potato. (Amer!) L. 63.
Bama, hrd'-ma, s. f., branch. L. 61.
Ramillete, rhd-mel-yd'-td [hra-me-ya'-ta],

s. m., bouquet. L. 27.
Bamo, hrd'-mo, s. m., branch depart-
ment. L. 53.
Bana, hrd'-n^, s. f., frog. No ser rana,

to be wide-awake, expert. L. 65.
Bapaza, hrd-pd'-th^r [hra-pa'-sa], s. f.,

little girl. I Miren la>rapazuela ! look

at the little vixen. L. 61.
Baro, hrd'-ro, adj., rare, odd, curious,

scarce. L. 63.
Basgrar, hrds-gdr', to scratch, to tear.

L. 64.
Basgo, hrds'-go, s. m., trait, stroke,

instance. L. 63.
Bato, hrd'-lo, s. m., while, moment.

A ratos, from time to time. L. 44.
Bat5n, hrd-ton', s. m., mouse. L. 65.
Baya, hrd'-ya, s. f., stroke, dash. L. 64.
Bayo, hrd'-yo, s. m. , ray, flash, thunder-
bolt. L. 62, 63.
Bazdn, hrd-thon' [hra-son'], s. f,, reason,

right. Tener razon, to be right. L.

25.
Bazonar, hrd-tho-ndr' ChrS-so-nSr'], to

reason. L. 63.
Be-, hrd, used as a prefix. L. 50.
Beal, hrd-dr, adj., real, royal ; s. m.,

real, Spanish coin, usually about

twelve cents. L. 47, 48.
Bealidad, hrdd-le-THdTu' , s. f., reality.

L.48.
Bebajar, hrd-bd-hdr' , to reduce, to

abate, to lower, to beat down

(prices). L. 64.
Bebanada, hrd-bd-nd'-Tna, s. f., slice,
piece (of bread). L. 63.
Bebanar, hrd-bd-ndr', to slice, to cut

(bread). L. 64.
Bebano, hrd-bdn'-yo, s. m., flock of

sheep. L. 40.
Beoardo, hrd-car'-do, s. m., message,

errand. L. 63.

488

VOCABULABY.

Eecepci6ii, hrd-tMp-theon' [hrS-sgp-
seon'], s. f., reception. L. 64.

Eecibimiento, hrd-ihe-be-meH'-to [rha-
Be-be-meSn'-to], s. m., act of receiv-
ing, reception. L. 55.

Becibir, hrd-the-ber' [hra-se-bSr'], to re-
ceive. L. 8.

Becibo, hrd-the'-bo [rhS-se'-bo], s. m.,
receipt. L. 63.

Beciproco, hrd-the'-pro-co [hrS-se'-pro-
CO], adj., reciprocal. L. 63.

Eecitar, hrd-the-tdr' [hra-8e-t2r'], to re-
cite. L. 64.

Eecomendacidn, hrd-co-m^n-dd-theon'
[hra-co-mgn-dS-seon'], s. f., recom-
mendation. L. 60.

Becomendar, hrd-co-m^-ddr' , to rec-
ommend. L.,64.

Beconocer, hrd-co-no-tMr' [hra-co-no-
sgr'], to recognize, to acknowledge.
L. 39.

Becordar, hrd-cor-ddr' , to remember,
to remind. L. 35.

Becto, hrW-to, adj., right. L. 55.

Bector, hrek-tor', s. m., rector, direc-
tor. L. 63.

Beourrir, hrd-cu-hrer' , to recur, to
have recourse. L. 50.

Becurso, hrd'cHr'-so, s. m., recourse,
resource. L. 40.

Beducir, hrd-du-ther' [hrS-dd-ser'], to
redTuce. L. 54.

Beferir, hrd-fd-rer', to refer, to re-
late. L. 64.

Beflexivo, hrd-jWc-se'-vo, adj., reflex-
ive, reflective. L. 63.

Beflexionar, hrd-fi^lc-seo-ndr\ to re-
flect, to think. L. 48.

Beforma, hrd-for'-ma, s. f., reform,
reformation. L. 63.

Beformar, hrd-for-mdr' , to reform, to
form anew, to discharge (from an
employment or office). L. 48.

Befran, hrd-frdn', s. m., refrain, prov-
erb. L. 63, 65.

Begalar, hrd-gd-ldr\ to regale, to pre-
sent with, to make a present of. L.
63.

Begalo, hrd-gd'-lo, s. m., gift, present.
L. 63.

B^grimen, hrd'-he-mH, s. m., regimen,
government. L. 57.

Begimiento, hrd-he-meH'-to, s. m.,
regiment. L. 19.

Begir, hrd-her', to govern. L. 57.

Begla, hrd'-gla, s. f., rule, ruler. L. 63.

Beg-ular, hrd-gil-ldr', adj., regular,
tolerable, moderate, ordinary; adv.,
tolerably, fair, middling. L. 27, 57,
64.

Beg-nlaridad, hrd-gu-ld-re-THdwH' , s.f.,
regularity. L. 55.

Regularizar, hrd-gu-ld-re-thdr' [hr^-gt-
la-re-sSr'], to regulate. L. 48.

Behusar, hrd-u-sdr', to refuse. L. 61.

Beina, hrd'e-na, s. f., queen. L. 63.

Beinante, hrde-ndn'-td, act. part.,
reigning. L. 38.

Beinar, hrde-ndr\ to reign. L. 15.

Beino, hrd'e-nOy s. m., kingdom. L.
45.

Beir, hrd-er', to laugh. L. 21.

Belacidn, hrd-ld-theon' [hra-iS-sSon'], s.
f., relation, account, recital. L. 43.

Belampago, hrd-ldm'-pd-go, s. m., flash
of lightning. L. '63.

Belampaguear, hrd-ldm-pd-ghddr' , to
lighten. L. 30.

Belatar, hrd-ld-tdr', to relate. L. 45.

Beligidn, hrd-le-heon' ^ s. f., religion.
L. 35.

Beligioso, hrd-le-heo'-so, adj., reli-
gious. L. 35.

Beloj, hrd-loh'f s. m., watch, clock.
L. 28.

Belojero, hrd-lo-hd'-ro, s. m., watch-
maker. L. 63.

Belucir, hrd-lu-ther' [rhS-ifi-s^r'], to
sparkle, to glitter. No es oro todo
lo que reluce, all is not gold that
glitters. L. 65.

Bemediar, hrd-mdrrHedr' , to remedy.
L. 64.

Be medio, hrd-rm'-Tneo, s. m., remedy.
L. 53.

Bemendar, hrd-m^n-ddr\ to repair, to
mend. L. 64.

Bemnnerar, hrd-rnvrnd-rdr'^ to remu-
nerate. L. 52.

Bendir, lirhi-der\ to render, to sub-
due. Eendirse, to surrender. L. 39.

Benir, hrdn-yer\ to quarrel, to dispute,
to scold. L. 39.

Eeo, hrd'-Oy s. m., culprit, ofiender.
L. 53.

Bepartir, hrd-par-ter' , to divide. L. 58.

Bepasar, hrd-pd-sdr', to repass, to ex-
amine, to glance over. L. 64.

Bepaso, hrd-pd'-so, s. m., revision, the
act of going or looking over. L. 61.

Bepente, hrd-p^'-td. De repente, sud-
denly, on a sudden. L. 54.

Bepeticidn, hrd-pd-te-theon' [hrS-pa-t6-
seon'], s. f., repetition. L. 63.

Bepetir, hrd-pd-ter', to repeat. L. 39.

Beposar, hrd-po-sdr\ to repose, to rest.
L. 39.

Beposo, hrd-po'-8o, s. m., repose, rest.
L. 63.

Eeprender, hrd-prhi-d^', to repre-
hend, to reprimand. L. 42.

Bepresentar, hrd-prd-s^n-tdr' , to rep-
resent, to make appear, to perform
(a part), to enact. L. 64.

VOCABULARY.

489

Reprobar, 7ird-pro-bdr'j to reprove, to
upbraid. L. 60.

Bepublioa, hrd-pu'-ble-ca, s. f., repub-
lic. L. 65.

Beputaoidn, hrd-pii-td-theon' [hrS-pft-tS-
8§on'], reputation. L. 24.

Besarcir, hrd-SQ,r-ther' [hra-sar-sgr'], to
indemnify, to compensate, to make
up for. L. 59.

Resentirse, hrd-s^n-ter'-sd, to resent,
to feel tbe effects of. L. 59.

Besfriado, hrds-fred'-THo, s. m., a cold.
L. 63.

Resfriarse, hrds-fredr''Sd,to catch cold.
L. 63.

Residente, hrd-se-dM'-td, adj., act.
part, (of Eesidib), resident, resid-
ing. L. 38.

Residir, hrdrse-THer\ to reside. L. 9.

Resistir, hrd-ses-ter', to resist. L. 51.

Resolucidn, hrd-so-lii-theon' [hra-so-m-
B6on'], s. f., resolution. L. 63.

Resolver, hrd-sol-vtr' , to solve, to re-
solve. L. 64.

Respeoto, Jird-spW-to, s. m., respect,
as, in this respect. L. 51.

Respetable, hrd-spd-td'-bld, adj., re-
spectable. L. 39.

Respetar, hrd-spd-tdr' , to respect. L.
36.

Respeto, hrd-spd'-to, s. m., respect, re-
gard. L. 56.

Responder, hrd-spon-d&r' y to respond,
to answer, to reply to. L. 33.

Responddn, hrd-spon-don\ adj., ready
or quick to reply. L. 33.

Respuesta, hrds-puds'-ta^ s. f., re-
sponse, reply, answer. L. 30.

Restante, hr^-tdn'-td, s. m., act. part,
(of Restae), remainder, rest, re-
maining. L. 46.

Resnltar, hrd-sHl-tdr' , to result, to turn
out, to occur. L. 43.

Retirar, hrd-te-rdr' , to retire, to with-
draw, to retreat. L. 63.

Retrato, hrd-trd'-to, s. m., portrait,
likeness. L. 17.

Renmatismo, hrdu-md-tes'-mo, s. m.,
rheumatism. L. 63.

Reunir, hrdii-ner', to unite, to reunite,
to assemble. L. 52.

Revds, hrd-vds\ s. m., back part, wrong
side. Al reves, on the contrary, up-
side down. L. 63.

Revoltoso, hrd'vol-to'-so, adj., turbu-
lent, rebellious. L. 44.

Rey, hrd'-e, s. m., king. L. 15.

Reyezuelo, hrde-thiid'-lo [hrae-sfiS'-lo], s.
m. (dim. of Eey), petty king, king-
ling. L. 44.

Rioacho, hre-cd'-cho, adj., very rich,
new rich. L. 49.

Rico, hre'-co, adj., rich. L. 13.
Ridiculez, hre-de-cu-ldth' thre-de-cCl-l5s'],

s. f., ridicule. L. 45.
Ridiculizar, hre-de-cvrle-tMr' [hrg-de-

cft-le-sSr'J, to ridicule. L. 48.
Ridicule, hre-de'-cd-lo, adj. and s. m.,

ridiculous, ridicule. L. 5.
Rigoddn, hre-go-Tson' , s. m., rigadoon,

country dance. L. 23.
Rincdn, hren-con', s. m., comer. L. 55.
Rio, hre'-o, s. m., river. L. 40.
Riqueza, hre-hd'-thQ, [hre-kS'-sa], s. f.,

riches. L. 48.
Risa, hre'-sQ, s. f., laugh, laughter.

L. 48.
Rivalizar, hre-vd-le-thdr' [hrg-vJ-is-eSr'],

to rival, to vie with. L. 51.
Robar, hro-bdr\ to rob, to steal. L. 44.
Rodar, hro-THdr', to roll. L. 54.
Rodear, hro-THddr', to go around, to

surround, to revolve. L. 54.
B,odesido,*hro-THdd'-THo, adj. and p. p.

(of Eodear), surrounded. L. 58.
Rodilla, hro-THel'-yg, [hro-THg'-ya], s. f.,

knee. De rodillas, on the knees.

L. 59.
Rodriguez, hro-dre'-gMth [hro-dr6'-ghgs],

s. m., Eodriguez. L. 49.
Rogar, hro-gdr'j to beg of, to pray. L.

35.
Rojo, hro'-ho, adj., red. L. 54.
Romano, hro-md'-no, adj., Eoman. L.

54.
Romper, hrom-p^r\ to break, to tear.

L. 46.
Ropa, hro'-pQ, s. f., clothes, under-
clothes, inner wearing apparel. L.

28.
Rosa, hro'-SQ,8. f., rose. L. 63.
Roto, hro'-to, irr. p. p. (of Eomper),

broken, out of order. L. 52.
Rubio, hrH'-beo, adj., ruddy. L. 63.
Ruido, hrue'-THO, s. m., noise. L. 46.
Ruin, hr4-en\ adj., mean, churlish,

villanous. L. 63.
Rnindad, hrHen-THdrn', s. f., meanness,

churlishness, villany. L. 48.
Rnisenor, hrHe-sdn-yor', s. m., night-
ingale. L. 63.
Rumor, hr4-mor\ s. m., rumor. L. 54.
Rutina, hrii-te'-n^, s. f., routine. L.

Sabado, sd'-bd-Tso, s. m., Saturday.

L. 9.
Saber, sd-b^r', to know, to hear from,

to savor, to taste ; s. m., learning,

knowledge. L. 21 and 42.
Sabio, sd'-beo., adj., wise, sage, learned.

L. 21.
Sabor, sd-bor', s. m., savor, taste. L.

62 and 66.

490

VOCABULAEY.

Saoamtielas, sdrc^mud'-las, s. m.,
tooth-drawer, dentist. L. 50.

Sacar, sd-cdr', to draw out, to take
out, to pull out. L. 50 and 66.

Saco, sd'-co, s. m., sack, bag, sack-
coat. L. 66.

Sacudir, sd-cu-rner', to shake off, to
shake. L. 54.

Sal, sdl, 8. f., salt, wit. L. 55.

Saldo, sdl'-do, s. m., balance (of ac-
counts). L. 64.

Salida, sd-le'-wna, s. f., going out, de-
parture, start. L. 63.

Salients, sa-Ze^»'-fa, adj. and act. part.,
projecting, salient. L. 38.

Salir, sd-ler', to go or to come out, to
set out, to leave, to start, to finish,
to rise (as of the sun). Salio i, su
padre, he resembled his father. L.
20.

Saldn, sd-lon', s. m., parlor, saloon,
hall. L. 58.

Saltar, sdl-tdr', to jump, to leap. L.
58.

Salto, sdl'-to, s. m.. leap, jump, fall
(water-fall). L. 59.

Salud, sd-luTH', s. f., health. L. 25.

Saludar, sd-lu-THdr', to salute. L. 64.

Sanchez, sdn'-cMth [sSn'-ch^s], s. m.,
Sanchez. L. 49.

Sangre, sdn'-grd, blood. L. 64.

Santificar, sdn-te-fe-cdr' , to sanctify.
L. 45.

Santo, sdn'-to, adj., holy, saintly. L.
64.

Sastre, sds'-trd, s. m., tailor. L. 11.

Sastreria, sds-trd-re'-Q, s. f., tailor-
shop. L. 11.

Satirico, s6i-^'-re-co, adj., satirical. L.
35.

Satisfaoer, sd-tes-fd-tMr' CsS-tes-fS-sgr'],
to satisfy- L. 42.

Satisfecho, sd-tes-fd'-cho, adj. and p. p.
(of Satisfacee), satisfied. L. 44
and 52.

Sayo, sd'-yo, s. m., a loose coat or
jacket. L. 65.

Sazonar, sd-tho-ndr' [s^-so-nSr'], to sea-
son. L. 62.

Se, sd, per. pron. (instead of Le, Les,
to him, to her, to them, to you), L.
26 ; pron. (used to form the passive
voice), L. 32; ref. pron., L. 33.

Se-, sd, Lat. prep, prefix. L. 50.

Secrete, sd-crd'-to, s. m., secret, se-
crecy. L. 65.

Sed, s^TH, s. f., thirst. L. 25.

Seda, sd'-THQ, s. f., silk. L. 5.

Segnir, sd-gher', to follow, to con-
tinue. L. 39.

Segun, sd-qun', prep., according to.
L. 40 and 66.

Segnndo, sd-gHn'-do, ord. adj. and s.

m., second. L. 15 and 23.
Segnro, sd-gii'-ro, adj., sure, secure.

L. 43.
Seis, sd'-es, num. adj., six. L. 14.
Seiscientos, sdes-the&n'-tos [sae-se?n'-

tos], num. adj., six hundred. L. 14.
Semana, sd-md'-nq, s. f., week. L. 8.
Semblante, sem-bldn'-td, s. m., counte-
nance, face, aspect, look. L. 59.
Sentar, s^n-tdr' , to sit, to sit down, to

set down, to enter (in a book), to fit,

to be becoming to. L. 34.
Sentencia, sen-Un'-thea [sen-tgn'-sea],

s. f., sentence. L. 43.
Sentido, shi-t^'-'^uo, s. m., sense, idea.

L. 65.
Sentir, shi-ter', to feel, to regret. L. 38.
Senor, sdn-yor'. Sir, Mr., Lord. L. 1.
Senora, sdn-yo'-ra, s. f., lady, madam,

Mrs., wife. L. 2.
Senorita, sdn-yo-re'-tcL, s. f., young

lady. Miss. L. 2.
Senorito, sdn-yo-re'-to, s. m., young

sir^ young gentleman, Mr. L. 2.
Septimo, 8^p'-te-mo, s. and ord. adj.,

seventh. L. 15.
Ser, 8^r, s. m., to be, to exist (compare

with Estae). L. 11 and 22.
Ser, 8^, s. m., being, existence. L.

54.
Servidor, 8h'-ve-THor' , s. m., servant.

Servidor de usted, your servant. L.

39.
Servir, 8^r-ver', to serve, to oblige.

S€rvir8e, to be good enough, to be

kind enough, to be pleased (to do).

L. 39.
Sesenta, sd-sen'-tQ, num. adj., sixty.

L. 14.
Setenta, sd-t^n'-tg,, num. adj., seventy.

L. 14.
Setecientos, sd-td-thehi'-tos [sa-ta-se^n'-

tos], num. adj., seven hundred. L.

14.
Septiembre, s^p-te^m'-brd, s. m., Sep-
tember. L. 24.
Sexo, s^h'-so, s. m., sex. El bello sexo,

the fair sex. L. 58.
Sexto, s^k'-to, ord. adj. and s. m.,

sixth. L. 15.
Si, se, adv., yes. L. 1.
Si. se, indef. pron., self, one's self. L.

26.
Si, se, conj., if, but. L. 23.
Siempre, se^m'-prd, adv., always. Por

siempre jamd.s, forever and ever. L.

25.
Siesta, seh'-ta, s. f., siesta, afternoon

nap. L. 62!'
Siete, sed'-td, num. adj., seven. L. 14.
Siglo, se'-glo, s. m., century. L. 52.

rOCABULAHF.

491

Significado, seg-ne-fe-cd'-THo, s. m.,

signification, meaning. L. 49.
Signiflcar, seg-ne-fe-cdr' , to signify.

L. 64.
Silaba, se'-ld-hijb, s. f., syllable. L. 63.
Silencio, se-lhi'-theo [se-iSn'-seo], s. m.,

silence. L. 65.
Silencioso, se-Un-theo'-so Cse-ign-seo'-

so], adj., silent. L. 64.
Silla, sel'-y^ [8e'-yaJ,s. f., chair, saddle.

L. 14.
Simpatizar, sem-pd-te-thdr' [sem-pS-tg-

sSr'J, to sympathize. L. 51.
Simple, sem'-pld, adj., simple, single,

silly. L. 43.
Sin, sen, prep., without. Sin embargo,

notwithstanding. L. 19.
Sinceridad, sen-thd-re-THdrM' [sen-sa-

re-THETH'], s. f., sincerity. L. 45.
Sinoero, sen-thd'-ro [sen-sa'-roj, adj.,

sincere. L. 40.
Singular, sen-gu-ldr', adj., singular.

L. 57.
Sino, se'-no, conj., but, if not. L. 3.
Sindnimo, se-no'-ne-mo, s. m., syno-
nym. L. 65.
Sinrazdn, sen-rd-thon' [sen-rS-son'], s. f.,

wrong, injustice. L. 50.
Siquiera, se-Tced'-rQ, conj., even, at

least. L. 40.
Sitio, se'-teo, s. m., place, position,

siege. L. 58.
Situado, se-iUd'-THo, p. p. (of Situar).

L. 20.
Situar, se-tddr', to situate, to be situ-
ated. L. 64.
So-, so, prep., under. So pretexto de,

under pretext of. L. 41.
Sobrar, so-brdr', to be over and above.

L. 64.
Sobre, so'-brd, prep., upon, on, over,

above, about; s. m., envelope. L.

41.
Sobreesorito, so-bra-h-cre'-to, s. m.,

superscription, address (of a letter).

L. 56.
Sobrina, so-bre'-na, s. f., niece. L. 65.
Sobrino, so-bre'-no, s. m., nephew. L.

65.
Sooialismo, so-thed-les'-mo Cso-sea-lgs'-

mo], s. m., socialism. L. 50.
Sociedad, so-thed-THdrH' [so-sea-THaTH'],

s. m., society, company, a firm. L.

32.
Socio, so'-theo [so'-seo], s. m., partner,

companion, member of a firm. L.

62.
Sofa, so-fd\ s. m., sofa. L. 34.
Sol, sol, s. m., sun. L. 45.
Solas, so'-lds, all alone. L. 64.
Soldado, sol-dd'-THo, s. m., soldier. L.

52.

Soledad, so-ld-THdTs' , s. f., solitude,

loneliness. L. 63.
Solemne, so-Um'-nd, adj., solemn, thor-
ough, downright. L. 61.
Soler, so-Ur\ to be accustomed to, to

be wont. L. 41.
Solicitar, so-le-the-tdr' [so-is-se-tSr'], to

solicit. L. 47,
Soliloquio, so-le-lo'-keo, s. m., solilo-
quy. L. 65.
Solo, so'-lo, adj., alone; solo, adv.,

only, merely. L. 25.
Soltar, sol-tdr', to untie, to loose, to

liberate, to let go free. L. 64.
Soltero, sol-td'-ro, s. m., bachelor, un-
married man. L. 51.
Sombra, som'-brQ, s. f., shade, shadow.

L. 58.
Sombrero, som-brd'-ro, s. m., hat. L.

10.
Son, son, s. m., sound. Sin ton y sin

son, without rhyme and without

reason. L. 47.
Sonar, so-ndr', to sound. L. 45.
Sonido, so-ne'-THOf s. m., sound. L.

47.
Sonreirse, son-rder'-sd, to smile. L.

64.
Sonrisa, son-re' -sq,, s. f., smile. L. 54.
Sonrojar, son-ro-hdr', to make one

blush. L. 64.
Sonar, son-ydr', to dream. L. 35.
Sopa, so'-pQ,, s. f., soup. L. 44.
Sopetdn, so-pd-ton', s. m. De sopeton,

unexpectedly. L. 44.
Soplar, so-pldr', to blow, to prompt.

L. 64.
Sordo, sor'-do, adj., deaf. L. 64.
Sorprender, sor-prin-d^r' , to surprise.

L. 42.
Sorpresa; sor-prd'-s^, s. f., surprise.

L. 51.
Sospeohar, sos-pd-chdr' , to suspect. L.

60.
Su, sH, poss. adj., his, her, its, their,

your. L. 5.
Sub-, siib, Lat. prep., prefix. L. 50.
Subida, su-be'-THQ, s. f., rising, rise,

ascent. L. 63.
Snbir, su-ber', to go or come up, to

ascend, to mount, to rise. L. 50.
Subjuntivo, sub-hun-te'-vo, adj., sub-
junctive. L. 43.
Substancia, sub-stdn'-thea [stib-stSn'-sea],

s. f., substance. L. 63.
Suceder, su-thd-TH^r' [sfi-sa-qpHSr'], to

happen, to take place, to succeed

(to come after). L. 45.
Sucesivo, su-thd-se'-vo [sii-sa-sS'-vo], s.

m., future. L. 32.
Sucio, su'-theo [sti'-ceo], adj., soiled,

dirty. L. 64.

492

VOCABULAET.

Snd, suTH, s. m., South. L. 26.
Suegra, sM'-gr^, s. f., mother-in-law.

L. 63.
SuegTO, sud'-gro, s. m., father-in-law.

L. 63.
Suela, sud'-lQ, s. f., sole. L. 61.
Suelo, sM'-lo, s. m., ground, floor, soil.

L. 54.
Suelto, sHW-io, adj. and p. p. (of Sol-

tae), loose, free. L. 64.
Sueno, sUdn'-yo, s. m., sleep, dream.

L. 25.
Suerte, suir'-td, s. f., luck, chance,

sort. Echar svsrtes, to cast lots. L.

58.
Stificiente, su-fe-the^n'-td [sfi-fe-seSn'-ta],

adj., sufficient. L. 49.
Sufrir, su-frer', to suffer, to bear with,

to undergo. L. 64.
Btgeto, sii-hd'-to, s. m., individual, per-
son, topic, matter, subject. L. 27.
Sujetc, 8u-hd'-to, adj., subject.
Buma, su'-ma, s. m., sum. En swma,

in short. L. 63 and 64.
Superior, su-pd-reor', adj., superior.

L. 21.
Buperlativo, sH-p^r-ldrte'-vo, adj., su-
perlative. L. 50.
Bnpersticioso, su-phr-ste-theo'-so [sfi-per-

ste-seo'-so], adj., superstitious. L. 45.
Suplicar, su-ple-cdr', to supplicate, to

beg, to crave. L. 64.
Suponer, sH-po-nh'', to supjKJse. L. 64.
Supremo, su-prd'-mo, adj., supreme,

highest. L. 21.
Supuesto, su-pUds'-to, p. p. (of Supo-

neb). Por supuesto, of course. L.

64.
Bur, sur (see Sud). L. 66.
Bus, sUs, intj., holloa, exclamation.

L. 46.
Bnspirar, sus-pe-rdr', to sigh. L. 64.
Sustantivo, siis-tdn-te'-vo, s. m. and

adj., substantive. L. 64.
Sustentar, sus-tH-tdr', to sustain. L.

65.
Sutil. su-teV, adj., subtle, thin, slender.

L. 64.
Sutileza, su-te-ld'-thg, [sii-te-la'-sa], s. f.,

subtlety, cunning, slendemess. L.

63.
Suyo, su'-yo, poss. adj., his, hers, its,

theirs, yours, one's. L. 13.

Tabaco, td-bd'-co, s. m., tobacco, cigar.

L. 42.
Tablero, td-hld'-ro, s. m., a smooth

board, chess or checker-board. L. 51.
Tacto,<afc'-to, s. m., the sense of touch.

L. 65.
Tal, tM, adj., such, so. Tal vez, per-
L. 32.

Talento, tH-Un'-to, s. m., talent, ability;

L. 65.
Tambien, tdm-be^n', conj. and adv.,

also, as well, moreover. L. 29.
Tampoco, tdm-po'-co, adv., neither, not

either, nor. L. 29.
Tan, tdn, adv., so, so much, as, as.

much. L. 20.
Tan to, tdn' -to, adj., so, in such a man-
ner. Tanto mejor, so much the bet-
ter. Por lo tanto, therefore. L. 20.
Tapar, tdrpdr', to cover up, to stop up.

L. 65.
Tapete, td-pd'-td, s. m., table-cover.

L. 61.
Tardar, t^r-ddr', to delay, to put off.

L. 60.
Tarde, t^r'-dd, s. f., afternoon ; adv.,

late. L. 20.
Tarea, td-rd'-a, s. f., task. L. 58.
Tarjeta, tar-hd'-ta, s. f., card, visiting

card. Tarjeta postal, postal card.

L. 64.
Tate, td'-td, intj., easy there ! take

care ! L. 46.
Taza, td'-thQ [tS'-sa], s. f., cup. L. 55.
Te, td, s. m., tea. L. 55.
Te, td, pers. pron., thee, to thee. L.

26.
Teatro, tdd'-tro, s. m., theatre. L. 17.
Teja, tl^'-ha, s. f., tile. De tejas abajo,

humanly speaking. L. 61.
Telegrafico, td-ld-grd'-fe-co, adj., tele-
graphic. L. 65.
TelegT&fo.td-ld'-grd-fo, s. m., telegraph.

L. 46.
Tema, te'-ma, s. m., theme, exercise ;

s. f., dispute, contention. L. 57.
Temer, te-m^r', to fear. L. 28.
Temerario, td-md-rd'-reo, adj., rash,

foolhardy. L. 54.
Temor, td-mor', s. m., fear. L. 54.
Temprano, t^m-prd'-no, adv., early,

soon. L. 20.
Tenacidad, td-nd-the-THdwH' [ta-n2-8&

THaTH], s. f., tenacity. L. 65.
Tenedor, td-nd-Tuor', s. m., fork. L.

65.
Tener, td-n^r', to have, to hold, to be,

to take place. L. 10.
Tentacion, thi-tdr-theon' [tgn-tS-sgon'], s.

m., temptation. L. 61.
Tenir, tdn-yer', to dye. L. 39.
Teoria, tdo-re'-a, s. f., theory. L. 23.
Tercero, t^r-thd'-ro [ter-sa'-ro], ord. adj.

and s. m., third. L. 15.
Tercio, t^r'-theo [ter'-seo], s. m., third,

third part. L. 40.
Terminacidn, t^r-me-nd-theon' [t5r-me-

na-seon], s. f., termination. L. 49.
Terminante, t^r-me-ndn'-td, adj., con-
clusive. L. 65.

VOCABULARY.

493

Terminar, t^r-me-ndr', to terminate.

L. 65.
Termino, t^r'-me-no, s. m., termina-
tion, term. L. 65.
Termdmetro, Ur-mo'-me-tro, s. m., ther-
mometer. L. 60.
Terrenal, t^-hrd-ndl\ adj., terrestrial.

L. 49.
Terrene, tt-hrd'-no, s. m., ground. L.

55.
Terrible, <^7ire'-6Za, adj., terrible. L.

53.
Terrdn, U-hron\ s. m., a clod, upturned

earth. L. 49.
Terroso, U-hro'-so, adj., earthy. L.

49.
Terrestre, U-hr^s'-tra^ adj., terrestrial,

earthly. L. 49.
Tertulia, t^-tu'-leQ, s. f., party, soiree.

L. 39.
Ti, te, pers. pron., thee, following a

prep. L. 26.
Tiempo, te^m'-po, s. m., time, weather.

L. 23.
Tienda, tehi'-dQ, s. f., store, shop. L.

64.
Tierra, tW-hr^^ s. f., earth, land, na-
tive land, L. 45.
Tijeras, te-hd'-ra^s, s. f. pi., scissors.

L. 64.
Tinta, ten'-t^, s. f., ink. L. 5.
Tintero, ten-td'-ro, s. m., ink-stand.

Dejarse algo en el tintero, to leave

something unsaid. L. 4.
Tinto, ten' -to, adj., red. Vino tinto,

claret wine. L. 65.
Tic, te'-o, s. m., uncle. L. 65.
Tirabuzdn, te-rd-bti-thon' [tg-rS-bft-son'],

s. m., cork-screw. L. 65.
Tiranioo, te-rd'-ne-co, adj., tyrannical.

L. 35.
Tirar, te-rdr', to throw, to cast, to

shoot. Tire usted por aqui, take

this road. L. 64.
Tiro, te'-ro, s. m., throw, cast. A tiro

de pistola, within pistol shot. L.

53.
Titulo, te'-tii-lOy s. m., title. L. 55.
Tooante, to-cdn'-td, prep., concerning,

relating to, touching. L. 38.
Tocar, to-cdr', to touch, to play (on an

instrument). L. 15.
Todavia, to-THd-ve'-q, adv., yet, still.

L. 25.
Todo, to'-THO^ adj., all. Todos los dias,

every day. Del todo, entirely. Con

todo, however, notwithstanding. L.

11.
Todo, to'-THO, s. m., the whole. L. 61.
Tolerar, to-ld-rdr', to tolerate. L. 65.
Toma ! to'-m^, interj., indeed ! L. 45.
Tomar, to-mdr', to take. L. 14.

Tomo, to' -mo, s. m., volume. Un libro

de tres tomos, a book in three vol-
umes. L. 15.
Tonel, to-nW, s. m., cask, barrel. L.

60.
Tonto, ton' -to, adj., foolish. A tontos

y d, locos, at random. L. 60.
Tontera, ton-td'-ra,s.f., foolish action.

L. 60.
Toque, to'-hd, s. m., roll (of a drum),

ringing (of bells). AM est^ el to-
que, that is where the difficulty

lies. L. 65.
Torero, to-rd'-ro, s. m., bull-fighter.

L. 53.
Tornar, tor-ndr', to return, to begin

anew. L. 65.
Tomo, tor' -710, s. m., lathe. En torno^

round about. L. 65.
Toro, to'-ro, s. m., bull. L. 53.
Tos, tos, s. f., cough. L. 65.
Trabajador, trd-bd-hd-THor' , adj., and

s. m., hardworking, worker. L. 17.
Trabajar, trd-bd-hdr' , to wor^, to labor.

L. 17.
Trabajo, trd-bd'-ho, s. m., work, labor,

occupation. L. 17.
Traducci6n, trd-duk-theon' [tra-dftk-

seon'Jj s. f., translation. L. 64.
Traducir, trd-du-ther' [trS-dti-ser'], to

translate. L. 40.
Traer, trd^r', to bring, to carry, to

wear. L. 42.
Tragar, trd-gdr', to swallow. L. 65.
Tragedia, trd-hd' -THe§, s. f., tragedy.

L. 52.
Tra^co, trd'-he-co, adj., tragic. L. 35.
Trago, trd'-go, s. m., draught, drink.

Echar un trago, to take a drink. L.

59.
Traje, trd'-hd, s. m., dress, costume.

L. 54.
Trampa, trdm'-pa, e. f., trap, swindle.

Caer en la trampa, to fall into the

snare. L. 64.
Trampear, trdm-pddr', to swindle, to

impose upon. L. 65.
Tramposo, trdm-po'-so,&d^., deceitful,

swindling ; s. m., cheat, swindler.

L. 65.
Tranquilidad, trdn-Tce-le-THdTH' , s. f.,

tranquility, peace, quietness. L. 46.
Tranquilizar, trdn-ke-le-thdr [trSn-ke-lg-

sSr'], to tranquilize. L. 65.
Tranquilo, trdn-Tce'-lo, adj., tranquil,

quiet, i)eaceful. L. 60.
Trapo, trd'-po, s. m., rag. L. 64.
Tras, trds, prep., behind, after. L. 41.
Trascurso, trds-cur'-so, s. m., course,

process (of time). L. 51.
Trasnochar, trds-no-chdr' , to sit up all

night. L. 65.

494

VOCABULARY.

Trasquilar, trds-lce-ldr' , tx) shear
(sheep). Ir por lana y volver tras-
quilado, the biter bitten. L. 65.

Trastienda, trds-teen'-dg,, s. f., a room
back of shop or store. L. 64.

Tratado, trd-td'-THo, s. m., treatise,
treaty. L. 46.

Tratante, trd-tdn'-td^ s. m., dealer. L.
38.

Tratar, trd-tdr\ to treat, to have in-
tercourse with or relations with, to
trade, to deal, to traffic, to try. L. 32.

Trato, trd'-tOj s. m., treatment, deal-
ings, intercourse. L. 65.

Traves, trd-vds', prep. Al traves de,
through. L. 65.

Travesura, trd-vd-su'-ra, s. f., trick,
mischief, naughtiness. L. 53.

Travieso, trd-ved'-so, adj., tricky,
naughty, mischievous. L. 52.

Traza, trd'-thg, [trS'-sa], s. f., trace.
Tener buena traza, to look well. L.
64.

Trece, trd'-thd [tra'-ss], num. adj., thir-
teen. L. 14.

Treinta, trd'en-t^, num. adj., thirty.
L. 14.

Tres, trds, num. adj., three. L. 14.

Tribunal, tre-bu-ndl', s. m., tribunal,
court of justice. L. 53.

Trigo^ <re'-go, s. m., wheat. L. 65.

Trigeno, tre-gdn'-yo^ adj., brown, dark
(complexion). L. 65.

Trinchar, tren-ch^r', to cut up, to
carve. L. 50.

Trineo, tre'-ndo, s. m., sleigh. L. 65.

Trinidad, tre-ne-TudTs' , s. f.. Trinity.
L. 21.

Triptongo, trep-ton'-go, s. m., trij)-
thong. L. 57.

Triste, tres'-td, sad, mournful, dull.
L. 21.

Tristesa, tres-td'-sa, s. f., sadness, dlil-
ness. L. 41.

Tronar, tro-ndr', to thunder. L. 30.

Tropa, tro'-pa, s. f., troop. L. 40.

Trneco, trud'-co, s. m., barter, ex-
change. A triieco, provided that.
L. 61.

Trueno, trud'-no, s. m., thunder, clap
of thunder. L. 30.

Trueqne, trim' -led (seeTRUECo). L. 48.

Tn, tu, pers. pron., thou ; poss. adj.,
thy. L. 1.

Tnerto, tH^r'-to, adj., blind of one eye.
L. 65.

Tntear, tH-tddr', to thou and thee, to
speak familiarly (in the second per-
son singular). L. 65.

Tnteo, tu-td'-o, s. m., theeing and thou-
ing. L. 65.

Tuyo, tu'-yo, poss. pron., thine. L. 13.

V, 4, conj., used instead of 6 before
words beginning with o or ho. L. 8.

Jf, ilf, inter)., ugh ! L. 46.

Ultimo, ul'-te-mo, adj., last. Por Ulti-
rao, at last, finally. L. 61.

Un, un, adj. and indef. art., one, a
(always used before, never after,
words). L. 4.

Una, li'-ng, fem. of Uno, which see.
L. 5.

Universidad, ^i^ner-v^r-se-THdTM' , s. f.,
university. L. 55.

TJno, u'-no, indef. art. and adj., a, one.
Uno i, uno, one by one. L. 14.

"Dna,ttn'-2/a, s. f., finger-nail. L. 33.

TJsar, -dirsdr', to use. L. 62.

Uso, a'-so, s. m., use. L. 61.

TTsted, u-st^TH', s. m. and f., you (con-
traction of VUESTRA MEECE17, your
worship). L. 1.

Util, H'-tel, adj., useful. L. 13.

TTva, u'-va, s. f., grape. L. 40.

Vaoa, vd-ca, s. f., cow, beef. L. 55.

Vacio, vd-the'-o [vS-sg'-o], adj., empty.
L. 58.

Valencia, vd-lhi'-theg, [vS-ign'-th6a], s. f.,
Valencia. L. 55.

Valentia, vd-lhi-te'Q, s. f., valor, brav-
ery. L. 54.

Valer, vd-Ur', to be worth, to be good
for. Mds vale tarde que nunca, bet-
ter late than never. / Vdlgame Dios !
bless me ! L. 41.

Yaliente, vd-lehi'-td, adj., valiant,
brave. L. 47.

Valor, vdrlor', s. m., valor, bravery,
worth, value. L. 25.

Vals, vgls, s. m., waltz. L. 23.

VamoB ! vd'-mos, intj., come! come
along ! L. 46.

Vapor, vd-por', s. m., steam, steam-
boat, steamer. L. 37.

Vara, vd'-ra, s. f., rod ; yard measure.
L. 47.

Vario, vd'-reo, adj., various, variable;
pi., several. L. 43.

Vardn, vd-ron\ s. m., man, male, hu-
man being. L. 62.

Vascongradas, vds-con-gd'-THds (Las
Provincias), s. f. pi., the three
Spanish provinces of Alava, Guipuz-
coa and Biscay. L. 55.

Vascuence, vds-ku^n'-thd [vas-k1i6n'-8a],
s. m., the Biscayan dialect. L. 55.

Vasija, vd-se'-h^, s. f., cask for liquors.
L. 52.

Vaso, vd'-so, s. m., vase, glass (for
drinking), tumbler. L. 61.

Vaya, vd'-ya, intj., come now! indeed!
L. 42.

Vecino, vd-the'-no [vS-se'-no]. L. 28

VOCABULARY.

495

Veinte, vd'en-td, num. adj., twenty.

L. 14.
Vela, vd'-la, s. f., sail (of a ship),

candle. L. 53.
Veneer, v^n-tMr' [ven-ser'], to van-
quish, to overcome, to conquer. L.

59.
Vender, v^n-d^r', to sell. L. 6.
*-► Venir, vd-ner', to come, to suit, to fit.

Venir i, pelo, to be just the thing.

No hay mal que por bien no venga,

it's an ill wind that blows good to

nobody. L. 18.
Ventaja, v^n-t&'-ha, s. f., advantage.

L. 43.
Ventana, v^n-td' -tiq, s. f., window. L.

28.
«-• Ver, v^, to see, to look. A ver, let us

look. Verse negro, to be in great

distress. L. 29.
Verano, vd-rd'-no, s. m., summer. L.

24.
Verbal, v^r-bdl\ adj., verbal. L. 49.
Verbo, v^r'-bo, s. m., verb. L. 41.
Verdad, ver-ddTH\ s. f., truth. A la

ver dad, truly, indeed. L. 43.
Verdaderamente, v^r-dd-THd-rd-m^n'-

td, adv., truly, veritably. L. 32.
Verde, v^r'-dd, adj., green. L. 54.
Verdura, v^r-du'-rg,, s. f., verdure,

vegetables. L. 34.
Vergiienza, v^r-gu^n'-thg, [v5r-g\i5n'-sa],

s. f., shame. Tener vergiienza, to be

ashamed. L. 25.
Versidn, v^r-seon', s. f., version. L. 64.
Verso, v&'-so, s. m., verse, line of

poetry. L. 52.
Vestido, vh-te'-THo, s. m., dress, wear-
ing apparel. L. 39.
Vestir, v^s-ter', to dress, to clothe. L.

25.
V Vez, vdth [vas], s. f., time. Una vez,

once. Dos veces, twice. En vez de,

instead of. Hacer las veces de, to

act as, to serve as. Tal vez^ perhaps.

A mi vez, in my turn. A veces, at

times.
Viajar, ved-hdr', to travel. L. 21.
Vicerector, ve-thd-r^1c-tor' [ve-sa-rgk-tor'],

s. m., vicerector. L. 50.
Viceversa, ve-thd-v^r'-sa [ve-sa-vSr'-sa],

vice versa. L. 47.
Vicio, ve'-theo [ve'-seo], s. m., vice. L.

41.
Victoria, veh-to'-rea, s. f., victory. L.

46.
Vida, ve'-THa, s. f., life. L. 50.
Viejo, ve^'-ho, adj., old. L. 13.
Viena, ve^'-na, s. f., Vienna. L. 12.
Viento, vein' -to, s. m., wind. L. 30.
Viernes, veir'-nU, s. m., Friday. Vier-

nes santo, Good Friday. L. 9.

Viga, ye'-ga, s. f., beam. L. 65.

Villadiegro, vel-ya-ded'-go [ve-ya-dea'-go],
s. m. Tomar las de Villadiego, to run
away, to take to one's heels. L. 50.

Vinacho, ve-nd'-cho, s. m., bad wine.
L. 49.

Vino, ve'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7.

Violado, veo-ld'-THo, s. m. and adj.,
violet (color). L. 54.

Violeta, veo-ld-ta, s. f., violet. L. 54.

Violin, veo-len', s. m., violin. L. 15.

Violinista, veo-le-nes'-ta, s. m., violin-
ist. L. 36. ^

Virtud, ver-tuTH', s. f., virtue. En
virtud de, by virtue of. L. 41.

Visita, ve-se'-ta, s. f., visit. L. 28.

Visitar, ve-se-tdr', to visit, to examine.
L. 52.

Vista, ves'- ta, s. f., sight, view. A vista^
at sight. Perder de vista, to lose
sight of. L. 29 and 51.

Visto, ves'-to, past. part, (of Veb),
seen. L. 52.

Vistoso, ves-to'-so, adj., conspicuous,
showy. L. 54.

I Viva! ve'-va, intj., long live! hur-
rah ! huzza ! L. 46.

Viviente, ve-veln'-td, s. m. and act.
part., living being ; living, animated.
L. 38.

Vivir, ve-ver', to live. L. 9.

Vivo, ve'-vo, adj., alive, lively, spright-
ly. L. 20.

Vizcaino; veth-cg'-hno [ves-ca'-S-no], s.
m. and adj., Biscayan. L. 55.

Vizcaya, veth-cd'-yq, [vSs-cS'-ya], s. f.,
Biscay. L. 55.

Vocabnlario, vo-cd-bH-ld'-reo^ s. m., vo-
cabulary. L. 58.

Vocal, vo-cdV, adj. and s. m., vocal,
vowel. L. 58.

Volar, vo-ldr', to fly. L. 45.

Volumen, vo-lu'-men, s. m., volume.
L. 15.

Voluntad, vo-lun-TsdTH' , s. f., will.
L. 45.

Volver, vol-vlr', to come or go back, to
return, to do again, to turn. Volver
en si, to recover one's senses. Vol-
ver i, las andadas, to return to one's
old habits. L. 36.

Vos, vos, pers. pron., you. L. 66.

Vosotros, vo-so'-tros, pers. pron., you,-
ye. L. 1.

Voz, voth [vos], s. f., voice, word, ru-
mor, report. Corre la voz que . . . ,
it is rumored that ... L. 58.

Vuelta, vuW-ta, s. f., return, turn,
trip. A vuelta de correo, by return
mail. Dar una vuelta, to take a
walk. Dar la vuelta al parque, to g^
round the park. L. 46.

496

VOCABULAEY.

Vnelto, vHM'-to, past. part, (of Vol-

vee), returned. L. 52.
Vuestro, vu^'-tro, poss. adj., your. L.

13.
Vulgar, vvl-gdr', adj., vulgar. L. 59.

Y, e, conj., and. L. 3.

Yc, yd^ adv., already, yet, sometimes.
Ya lo uno, ya lo otro, sometimes
one, sometimes the other. L. 25 and
37.

Yacer, yd-tMr [yS-sgr'], to lie. L. 41.

Yemo, ypr'-no, s. m., son-in-law. L. 60.

Yo, yo, pers. pron., I. Yo mismo, I
myself. L. 1.

Yugo, yu'-go, s. m., yoke. L. 64.

Zafarse, thd-fdr'-sd [sa-far'-sa], to es-
cape, to get rid of. L. 64.

Zaga, thd'-gg, [sa'-ga], s. f., rear. No

irle a uno en zaga, not to be far be-
hind any one. L. 44.
Zapateria, thd-pd-td-re'-Q [sa-p2-ta-re'-a],

s. f., shoe trade, shoemaker's shop.

L. 17.
Zapatero, thd-pd-td'-ro [sS-pS-ta'-ro], s.

m., shoemaker. L. 8.
Zapato, thd-pd'-to [sS-pS'-to], s. m., shoe.

L. 10.
Zape, thd'-pd [sS'-pa], intj., used to

frighten away the cats ; God forbid !

L. 46.
Zas, thds [sas], intj., used to imitate

the sound of repeated knocks or

blows. L. 62.
Zntano, thu-td'-no [sfi-ta'-no], s. m., such

a one. L. 55.

ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY

Note. — The references are to the lesson, and to the sentence of the
English exercise in that lesson, in which the word or phrase is required.

A, an, indef. art., un(o) ; day,

month, etc., al dia, al mes, etc.;

yard, la vara.

Able, to be, poder.

About, prep., de ; acercade; concer-

niente de ; (before number) unos ;

(of time) por, d ; to he to, estar

para, ir d.
Absence, s., ausencia, f. ; falta, f.
Absent, adj., ausente.
Academy, s., acaderaia, f.
Accent, s., acento, m.
Accept, aceptar.
Accident, s., accidente, m.
Accompany, acompanar.
Accomplishment, s., prenda, f.
According to, prep., segun ; i, me-

dida de.
Account (for), creer que es la causa.
Account of, on, prep., ^ causa de.
Accuse, acusar.
Ache, doler ; my head aches ^ me duele

la cabeza.
Acknowledge, acusar (56, 9).
Acquainted(with), to become, cono-

cer.
Acquire, adquirir.
Acquisition, s., adquisici6n, f.
Act, obrar ; toward, obrar con ;

— — in om^s place, representar.
Action, s., acci6n, f.
Active, adj., activo.
Actor, s.. actor, m.
Add, v., anadir.
Address, s., direcci6n, f.
Admire, admirar.
Admit, admitir.
Advance, promover.
Adventure, s., aventura, f.
Advice, s., consejo, m.

34

Advise, aconsejar.

Aerial, adj., aereo.

Affair, s., negocio, m.

Affect learning, meterse ^ sabio.

Affectation, s., afectaci6n, f.

Affidavit, to make, prestar jura-

mento.
Affirm, afirmar.
Afraid of, to be, temer ; tenermie-

do de.
After, prep., despues de, tras ;

all, al fin.
Afternoon, s., tarde, f.
Afternoon nap, to take, dormir la

siesta.
Afterwards, adv., despues.
Again, adv., otra vez.
Agitation, s., agitacion, f.
Ago, hacer (impers.) ; two days ,

hace dos dias.
Agree, concordar; estar de acuerdo

en.
Agreeable, adj., agradable.
Ah, interj., ah.
Aid, s., ayuda, f.
Air, s., aire, m.
Albert, s., Alberto.
Ale, s., cerveza, f.
Alert, to be on the, abrir el ojo.
Alexander, s., Alejandro.
All, adj., todo*, of, (omit of);

about, todo lo concerniente A ;

on hands, torlos; with one's

heart, con mucho gusto.
Allow, permitir.
Almost, adv., casi.
Alone, adj., solo.
Already, adv., ya.
Also, adv., tambien.
Although, conj.. aunque.
497

498

VOCABULABT,

Always, adv., siempre.
Amazing, adj., pasmoso.
America, s., America, f.
American, adj., americano.
Amiable, adj., amable.
Amongst, prep., entre.
Amuse, divertir.
Analytical, adj., analitico.
And, conj., y, e.
Andalusia, s., Andalucia, f.
Anecdote, s., anecdota, f.
Animal, s., animal, m.
Animated, adj., animado.
Annoyance of, to the, fastidiando.
Another, adj., otro.
Answer, s., respuesta, f. ; contesta-

cion, f.
Answer, contestar, respond er d.
Antagonist, s., antagonista, m.
Anxiously, so, adv., tan to (61, 14).

Any, adj., alguno ; not , ningiino.

Any, pron., alguna parte.
Anybody, s., alguien.
Anyone, s., cualquiera.
Anything, s., algo, alguna cosa ; not

but, sine (42, 5).

Apology, s., excusas, f. pi.
Appear, parecer, presentarse.
Appearance, s., aparencia, f. ; to all

s, segun las aparencias.

Appetite, s., apetito, m.
Apple, s., manzana, f.

Apply, pretender; /or, solici tar.

Approbation, s., aprobaci6n, f.

April, s., abril, m.

Arab, s., d.rabe.

Aragon, s., Arag6n.

Architect, s., arquitecto, m.

Arithmetic, s., aritmetica, f.

Arm, s., braze, m.

Army, s., ej^rcito, m.

Arrange, disponer, arreglar.

Arrest, arrestar.

Arrested, p. p., preso.

Arrival, s., llegada, f.

Arrive, llegar ; in possession of,

adquirir.
Art, s., arte, m.
Article, s., articulo, m.
As, adv., como ; porque ; en el estado

que ; for, en cuento ^ ;

to, en cuento d ; much ,

tanto como.

Ashamed, to be, caerse la cara de

verguenza ; of tener vergu-

enza de.
Ask (for), preguntar (about = acerca

de) ; i>edir ; invitar ; question,

hacer pregunta.
Assure, asegurar.
Astonished, to be, sorprenderse ;

at, admirarse de.

Astronomy, of, astronomico.

At, prep., en ; a time ( = whole},

entero ; all (neg.), de ningun

modo ; home, en casa.

Atlantic, s., Atlantico.
Attack, combatir con, atacar.
Attend, servir, atender.
Attended with success, to be, tener

exito.
Attention, s., atencion, f.
Attentively, adv., con atencion, aten-

tamente.
Augmentative, adj., aumentativo, m.
Augury, s., augiiero, m.
August, s., agosto, m.
Aunt, s., tia, f.
Austria, s., Austria, f.
Author, s., autor, m.
Authority, on good, de buena tinta.
Autumn, s., otono, m.
Auxiliary, s., auxiliar, m.
Avenue, s., avenida, f.
Avoid, evitar.
Aware of, to be, saber.

Bachelor, s., soltero, m.

Back, to be, volver.

Bad, adj., malo; too , malisimo ;

limn, picaro ; to be on terms

withy no tratar.
Badly, adv., mal.
Baker, s., panadero, m.
Bakery, s., panaderia, f.

Bald, adj., calvo ; place, calva, f.

Balloon, s., globo, m.

Barber, s., barbero, m.

Barber's shop, s., barberia, f.

Baron, s., baron, m.

Basket, s., canastro, m.

Basque, s., Vascuence, m.

Basque, adj., vascongado.

Battle, s., batalla, f.

Be, to, ser ; estar ; haber (impers.).

Bear (up under), aguantar, soportar ;

(with), aguantar, sufrir.
Beardless youth, s., barbilampino, m.
Beauty, s., hermosura, f. ; belleza, f.
Because, conj., porque.
Become, quedar, hacerse.
Bed, s., cama, f. ; to go to , acos-

tarse.
Beer, s., cerveza, f.
Before, adv., antes.
Before, conj., antes que.
Before, prep., antes de.

Beg, suplicar ; of, suplicar d.

Begin, principiar (d).
Beginner, s., principiante, m.
Beginning, s.,principio, m. ; (of

month), principios. m. pi.
Behind, prep., detr^s de.
Being, s., ser, m.

rOCA.JiULAJiY.

499

Belief, s., creencia, f.

Believe, creer.

Belong, pertenecer.

Beloved (by), p. p., amado de.

Berth, s., camarote, m.

Beside, prep., al lado de.

Besides, adv., ademas; adem^ de

(before infin.).
Best, adj., el mejor, m^s (47, 23).
Better, adj., mejor; mds; to be ,

vale m^s ; had , haria mejor en

(before infin.) ; late than never ^

mas vale tarde que nunca.
Between, prep., entre.
Beyond, prep., m^s de.
Bill, s., cuenta, f.
Bird, s., pajaro, m.
Bite, morder ; one on the hand^

morderle la mano.
Blank, s., bianco, m. (62, 6).
Bludgeon, s., garrote, m. ; blow with

, garrotazo, m.

Blue, adj., azul.

Body, s., cuerpo, m.

Bolt, s., cerrajo, m.

Book, s., libro, m. ; contemptible old

, libraco, m.

Bookseller, s., librero, m.

Bookstore, s., librerla, f.

Boot, s., bota, f.

Born, to be, nacer.

Both, adj., ambos, entrambos ;

of us (omit of).
Bouquet, s., ramillete, m.
Boy, s., muchacho, m.
Branch, s., ramo, m.
Brazil, s., Brasil.
Bread, s., pan, m.
Break, romper ; one^s word, faltar

^ su palabra.
Breakfast, s., almuerzo, m.
Breakfast, almorzar.
Bring*, traer.

Broom, old stump of a, s., escobajo,m.
Broth, s., caldo, m.; poor cal-

ducho, m.
Brother, s., hermano, m.
Build, edificar, fabricar.
Building, s., edifico, m.
Bull-fight, s., corrida (f.) de toros.
Bull fighter, s., torero, m.
Burden, s., carga, f.
Burn, quemar ; to be — ed, quemarse.
Burst with pride, no caber en si.
Business, s., negocios, m. pi. ; that's

his own , con su pan se lo coma ;

letters, cartas de negocios ; in

what is one, curies son sus ne-
gocios.
But, conj., pero, sino (after neg.);

not anything , nothiyig , sino,

solo.

Butcher, s., carnero, m.

Buy, comprar.

By, prep., por ; para ; one's watch^

en su reloj ; to mean , querer

decir por ; steamer, en el va-
por.

C, s., f., thee, lac (36, 26).
Cable, s., cable, m.
Cage, s., jaula, f.

Call, llamar ; in, llamar.

Called by, p. p., que tienen (44, 13).

Can, poder.

Capable, adj., capaz.

Capacity, s., capacidad, f.

Captain, s., capitdn, m.

Care, take, {of), tenercuidado de;

(with), tener cuidado, con.
Care (for), querer; not to -^— ,

no darse nada por.
Carelessness, s., descuido, m.
Carriage, s., carruaje, m.
Carry (on), llevar.

Case, s., caso, m. ; in , si acaso.

Cask, s., baril, m.
Cast lots, echar suertes.
Castillo, s,, Castilla, f,
Castilian, adj., castellano.
Castle, s., Castillo, m.
Catalonia, s., Cataluna, f.
Catalonian, adj., cataUn.

Catch, coger ; up with, alcanzar.

Catholic, adj., catolico.

Cause, producir.

Cease, cesar, parar.

Celebrated, adj., celebrado, celebre.

Cent, s., centavo, m.

Central, adj., central.

Certain, adj., cierto, seguro.

Certainly, adv., ciertamente, sin

duda.
Chair, s., silla, f.
Change, s., cambio, m.
Change, cambiar.
Chapter, s., capitulo, m.
Characteristic, adj., caracterlstico.
Charge, llevar (por).
Charity, s., caridad^ f.
Charles, s., Carlos.
Charlotte, s., Carlota.
Charming, adj., discreto; amable;

encantadoro.
Chat, to have a, charlar.
Cheap, adj., barato.
Cheerful, adj., alegre.
Cheese, s., queso, m.
Chess, s., ajedrez, m.
Chicken, s., polio, m.
Child, s., nino, m.
Chocolate, s., chocolate, m.
Choose, escoger.
Church, s., iglesia, f.

500

VOCABULABT,

Cigrar, s., cigarro, m.; tobaco, m.;

poor man^s , cigarro de pobre.

Cig-arette, s., cigarillo, m.
Circumspect, adj., circunspecto.
Circumspection, s., circunspecci6n,

f.
Circumstance, s., circunstancia, f.
Citizen, s., ciudadano, m.
City, s., ciudad, f.
Civilization, s., civilizacion, f.
Class, s., clase, f.
Classical, adj., cldsico.
Classification, s., clasificaci6n, f.
Cleanly, adj., limpio.
Clear, adj., claro; evidente ; as

daylight, tan claro como el sol.
Clerk, s., escribente, m.
Clever, adj., habil.
Climb, subir.
Clock, s., reloj, m.; church , reloj

de la iglesia.
Close, terminar.
Cloth, s., pano, m.
Co., Ca. (Compania).
Coat, s., casaca, f.; levita, f.
Coffee, s., cafe, m.
Cold, s., resfwado, m.; (of weather)

el frio ; in the , con el frio que

hace.
Cold, adj., frio ; to he , tener frio;

(of weather) hacer (impers.) frio.
Collect, cobrar, colecter.
Color, s., color, m.
Coloring, s., colorido, m.
Columbus, s., Colon.
Comb, s., peine, m.
Comb, peinar.
Combine, combinar.
Combined, p. p., combinado.
Come, venir ; llegar ; and, venir

d ; nearer, acercarse ; off,

salir (impers., ind. obj. of pers.,

64, 1) ; out, salir ; up,

subir ; to agreement^ acordarse

con.
Come now, interj., calle.
Comfortable, adj., c6modo.
Commence, principiar i. ; (of season)

entrar.
Commencement, s., principio, m.
Commit, cometer ; mistakes, equi-

vocarse.
Common, adj., comtin, general.
Communicate, comunicar.
Companion, s., companero. m.
Company, compania, f. ; in with,

en compania de.
Compel, apremiar.
Complain of, quejarse de.
Complement, s., complemento, m.
Complete, adj., completo.
Completely, adv., completamente.

Complication, s., complicacion, f.
Composition, s., composicion, f.
Conceive of, concebir.
Concerning, prep., tocante; con re-

specto d.
Concert, s., concierto, m.
Condition, s., condicion, f. ; on

that, con la condicion que.
Conductor, s., conductor, m.
Confess, confesar.
Confused, adj., confuso.
Conjugate, conjugar.
Conjugation, s., conjugaci6n, f.
Conquest, s., conquisto, m.
Conscience, s., conciencia, f.
Consent, consentir ; permitir.
Consider, considerar.
Considerably, adv., mucho.
Console, consolar.
Construction, s., construccion, f.
Contain, contener.
Contented, adj., contento.
Continually, adv., continuamente.
Continue, continuar.
Contradict, contradecir.
Contrary, on the, al contrario; de

ningun modo.
Conversation, s., conversacion, f.
Converse, conversar.
Conveyance, s., escritura, f.
Convicted, p. p., convicto.
Cook, s., cocinero, m., cocinera, f.
Cook, cocinar.
Cooking, s., cocina, f.

Cool, adj., fresco; in the ., al freso.

Copy-book, s., cuaderno, m.

Coquette, s., coqueta, f.

Corner, s., esquina, f.; on the , la

esquina (in directions).
Correct, adj., correcto.
Correct, corrigir.
Correctly, adv., correctamente.
Correctness, s., correccion, f.
Correspondence, s., correspondencia,

f.
Correspondent, s., corresponsal, m.
Cosmopolitan, s., cosmopolito, m.
Cost, costar.
Cotton, s., algodon, m.
Cotton, adj., de algodon.

Count, contar ; upon, contar con.

Countenance, s., semblante, m.
Country, s., campo, m.; pais, m.;

house, casa de campo.
Courage, s., valor, m.
Court, s., tribunal, m.
Cousin, s., prime, m.; prima, f.
Credit, s., credito, m.; on , al

fiado, a credito.
Creditor, s., acreedor, m.
Crestfallen, to be, ir de capa caida.
Crime, s., crimen, m.

VOCABULARr.

501

Criticise, criticar.
Cross, atravesar.
Crow, s., Cuervo, m.
Crowd, s., gentio, m.
Crown, s., corona, f.

Cruelty, s., crueldad, f.; to, cru-

eldad con (36, 9).
Cry, V. llorar.
Cup, s., taza, f.
Cure, curar.

Curiosity, s., curiosidad, f.
Custom, s., costumbre, m.
Cut, cortar ; get , hacerse cortar.

Dance, bailar.

Danger, s., peligro, m.

Dare, atreyarse d.

Date, s., fecha, f.

Date, fechar.

Daug-liter, s., hija, f.

Day, s., dia, m.; hef ore yesterday,

anteayer ; antes de ayer ; from

to , de dia en dla.

Daybreak, s., amanecer, m.

Deal, a good, s., mucho, muchisimo.

Dealer, s., mercador, m.

Dear, adj., caro; querido; sir,

senor mlo ; fellow, querido

amigo.
Death, s., muerte, f.
Deceitfully, adv., de mala U,
Deceive, enganar.
December, s., diciembre, m.
Decided, adj., grande.
Decked (out), adj., vestido de veinte

y cinco alfileres.
Decompose, decomponer.
Degree, s., grado, m.
Delicious, adj., delicioso.
Delight, deleitar.
Delighted, to be, ser un gran placer

para.
Deny, negar.
Departure, s., partida, f.
Depend on, depender de.
Desert, s., desierto, m.
Desert, desertar.
Desertion, s., deserci6n, f.
Deserve, merecer.
Desire, s., deseo, m.; with the to,

con el deseo de.
Desire, desear.
Desirous of, to be, desear.
Despicable, adj., despreciable.
Detail, s., pormenor, m.
Deteriorate, deteriorar.
Determined manner, in a, con todas

sus fuerzas.
Detestible, adj., feo, detestable.
Dexterity, s., habilidad, f.
Dialect, s., dialecto, m.
Dictionary, s., diccionario, m.

Die, morir.

Differ, diferir, diferenciarse.

Difference, s., diferencia, f.

Different, adj., diferente.

Difficult, adj., dificil.

Difficulty, s., dificultad, f.

Diminutive, s., diminutive, m.

Dine, comer.

Dinner, s., comida, f.

Director, s., director, m.

Disappointed, to be, llevar cbasco;

to be terribly , llevar un gran

chasco.
Discover, descubrir.
Discovery, s., descubrimiento, m.
Dish, s., plato, m.
Dishabille, to be in, estar de casa.
Dishearten, desanimar.
Dispatch, s., despacho, m ; telegraphic

, parte telegrdfico.

Dispatch, despachar, enviar.
Displease, no hacer d. medida de sus

deseos.
Dissatisfied (with), adj., disgustado

de.
Distance, s., distancia, f.; in the ^

d lo lejos.
Distinct, adj., distinto.
Distinguish, distinguir.
Distrust, desco^fiar de.
Disturb, molestar.
Dive into other's affairs, meterse en

vidas arenas.
Divert, divertir.
Divide, dividir.
Do, hacer ; (of health) estar ; eor-

respondence, escribir ; right,

obrar bien ; wrong, obrar mal,

hacer mal, no hacer bien ; all

in one's power, hacer todo lo que

estd, d su alcance.
Doctor, s., doctor, m.
Dog, s., perro, m.; Latin, lati-

najo, m. (49, 16).
Dollar, s., peso, m.
Done with, to have, servirse de.
Door, s., puerta, f.
Doubt, s., duda, f.
Doubt, dudar.
Doubtful, adj., dudoso.
Doubtless, adv., sin duda.
Down town, aba jo de la ciudad.
Dramatist, s., dramdtico, m.
Draughts, s., damas, f. pi.
Draw, tirar de ; sacar ; {bolt\

echar.
Dream, sonar.
Dress, s., vestido, m.
Dress, vestir, vescirse.

Drink, beber ; (a toast), echar.

Drizzle, lloviznar.
During, prep., durante.

502

VOCABULARY.

Duty, s., deber, m.

Dye, tenir.

Dying, pres. part., moribundo.

E, s. f., an e = una e (36, 26).

Eacli, adj., cada; one, cada uno;

other, el uno el otro.

Early, temprano.

Earn, ganar.

Earnest, in, de veras.

Earth, s., tierra, f.

Ease, s., facilidad, f.; to be at ,

vivir d, sus anchas.
Easily, adv., facilmente.
East, s., este, m.
Eastern, adj., del este.
Easy, adj., Mcil, to, fdcil de ;

to be read, f dcil de leer.
Eat, comer.
Echo what has been said, hablar por

boca de ganso.
Economy, s., economia, f.
Education, s., educacion, f.
Effect, s., efecto, m.
Effort, s., esfuerzo, m.
Eight, num. adj., ocho.
Eighteen, num. adj., diez y ocho.
Eight hundred, num. adj., ochoci-

entos.
Eighty, num. adj., ochenta.
Eleven, num. adj., once.
Either, not, tampoco.
Elect, elegir.
Elegance, s., elegancia, f.
Elegant, adj., elegante.
Eloquence, s., elocuencia, f.
Else, adv., de otro modo.
Emanuel, s., Manuel.
Embarrassed, adj., apuradillo.
Embarrassment, s., dificultad, f.
Employed by, to be, colocarse con.
Employment, s., empleo, m.
Enabled, to be, poder.
End, s., fin, m.; objecto, m.
End, acabar.
Engage in, emprender.
Engaged in, to be, estar (followed by

gerund of verb).
England, s., Inglaterra, f.
English, adj., ingles.
Englishman, s., Ingl6s, m.
Engraving, s., grabado, m.
Enjoy, gozar de.

Enough, adj., bastante ("que" be-
fore in fin.).
Enter, entrar.
Enterprise, s., empresa, f.
Enthusiastic, to get, entusiasmarse.
Entirely, adv., enteramente ; (with

neg. ) de ninguna especie.
Entrance, s., entrada, f.
Epitaph, s., epitafio, m.

Equal to, not to be, ser superior i,

sus esfuerzas (thing as subject).
Equally, adv., igualmente.
Erect, adj., erguido.
Error, s., error, m.
Erudition, of, erudito.
Especially, adv., especialmente.
Esq., s., Don.

Establish, fundar ; establecer.
Esteem, estimar.
Esteemed, p. p., estimado; favore-

cido ; to be , tener aceptacion.

Europe, s., Europa, f.

Even, adv., hasta; not , ni (40,

22); though, aunque.

Evening, s., tarde, f. ; noche, f.; last

, anoche.

Event, s., hecho, m.; at all events, de

todos modos.
Ever, adv., jamds ; sierapre.
Every, adj., cada; todos los; (dis-

tributively of periods of time) d;

body, todos ; other day, un

dia si y otro no.
Evidence, s., evidencia, f.
Exact, adj., exacto.
Exactly, adv., exactamente.
Exaggeration, s., exajeracion, f.
Examination, s., examen, m.
Examine, examinar.
Example, s., ejemplo, m.
Exceed, exceder d.
Exceedingly, adv., muchisimo;

muy ; sobremanera.
Excellent, adj., excelente.
Except, prep., menos.
Exception of, with the, exceptuando.
Exciting, adj., excitante.
Excuse, dispensar ; excusar.
Exercise, s., ejercicio, m.
Exist, existir.
Expect, esperar.
Experience, s., experiencia, f.
Explanation, s., explicacion, f.
Expose, exponer.
Express, expresar.
Expression, s., representacion, f . ;

expresion, f. ; memoria, f.
Expressive, adj., expresivo.
Extract, sacar.

Extraordinary, adj., extraordinario.
Eye, s., ojo, m.

Facilitate, facilitar.

Fact, s., becho, m.; that is a , eso

es verdad.
Fair, adj., bello.
Faith, s., fe, f.
Fall, s., otono, m.
Fall, caer ; in love with, enamo-

rarse de.
Familiar, adj., familiar.

rOCABULART.

503

Family, s., familia, f.

Fanny, s., Paca.

Far, adv., lejos; from it, ni con

mucho ; as as, hasta donde.

Fare,s., pasaje, m.

Fashion, s., moda, f.; in the French,

Spanish , ^ la francesa, espa-

nola ; in de moda ; that goes out

of , la moda de eso pasa.

Fashionable, adj., de moda.

Fast, adv., aprisa.

Father, s., padre, m.

Fatigue, s., fatiga, f.; cansancia, f.

Fault, s., culpa, f.; falta, f.; defecto,

m.
Favor, s., favor, m.; ( = letter) carta,

f . ; in of, por.

Fear, s., miedo, m.; for , por

miedo, por temor.
Fear, temer.
February, s., febrero, m.
Ferocious, adj., furioso.
Few, adj., pocos.
Field, s., campo, m.
Fifteen, num. adj., quince.
Fifth, num. adj., quinto.
Fifty, num. adj., cincuenta.
Fill (office), proveer.
Find, encontrar ; hallar ; out,

acertar, encontrar, conocer, des-

cubrir ; to go and , ir i, buscar.

Fine, adj., bello ; hermoso ; bueno.
Finish, concluir ; to be finished,

acabado.
Fire, s., fuego, m.
First, num. adj., primero ; at , al

principio ; rate, de primera

clase.
Fish, s., pescado, m.
Fit exactly, venir pintado (with ind.

obj. of person, 64, 10).
Fit for, adj., proprio para.
Five, num. adj., cinco.
Five hundred, num. adj., quinientos.
Flatter, lisonjear; adular.
Flight, s., vuelo, m.
Flock, s., rebano, m.
Floor ( = story), s., piso, m.
Florence, s., Florencia, f.
Flower, s., flor, f.
Fluently, adv., fluidamente ; equally

, con igual fluidez.

Fly, s,, mosca, f.; poor little ,

mosquita, f.
Fly into passion, encenderse en

colera.
Follow, seguir; followed by, j des-

pues (39, 4); to be followed by, usarse.
Fond of, to be, gustar (impers., ind.

obj. of pers.).
Foot, s., pie, m.; (of measure) palmo,

m.

Fop, s., pisaverde, m.

For, prep., para (destination); por (/or

sake of); en cuanto jC ( = ''as to ");

entre (44, 13) { = '' among"); de

( = ''of"); durante ( = *' among").
For, conj., porque.
Forehead, s., f rente, m.
Foreign, adj., extrangero.
Forever, adv., siempre.
Forget, olvidar.
Form, s., forma, f.; formula, f.;

estilo, m.
Form, formar.
Former, adj., otro ; former latter j

aquel este.

Formerly, adv., anteriormente.

Fortunate, adj., afortunado.

Fortunately, adv., afortunadamente.

Fortune, s., fortuna, f.

Forty, num. adj., cuarenta.

Four, num. adj., cuatro.

Fourteen, num. adj., catorce.

Fourth, num. adj., cuarto.

France, s., Francia, f.

Freeze, helar.

French, adj., f ranees.

Frenchman, s., Frances, m.

Frequently, adv., frecuentemente.

Fresh, adj., fresco.

Friday, s., viernes, m.

Friend, s., amigo, m.

From, prep., de ; desde.

Fruit, s., fruta, f.

Frustrate, echar ^ pique.

Fry, freir.

Fun of, to make, hacer burla de;

burlarse de.
Furious, adj., furioso.
Further, adv., mds.
Future, in, en lo sucesivo.

Gain, ganar; knowledge, in-

struirse.

Galicia, s., Galicia, f.

Galician, adj., gallego.

Gallant, adj., galante.

Gallantry, s., galanteria, f.

Game, s., partida, f.

Garden, s., jardin, m.

Gender, s., genero, m.

General, s., general, m. ; in , en

general, generalmente.

Generally, adv., generalmente.

Gentleman, s., caballero, m. ; senor, m.

Genius, s., genio, m.

German, adj. and s., alem^n.

Germany, s., Alemania, f.

Get, obtener ; coger ; conseguir ; lle-

gar ; to be, hacerse ; along

well, adelantar ; back, volver ;

better, quedar bueno ; cuty

hacerse cortar; enthusiastic,

504

VOCABULARY.

entnsiasmarse ; in, entrar ;

into favor, caer en gracia i

alguien ; married, casarse ;

on, hacer adelantos en ; seguir ;

out of order, descomponerse ;

rid of, deshacerse de ; zafarse

de ; to ( = ''arrive at'^), llegar

en ; up, levantarse.

Gilly-flower, s., aleli, m.

Girl, s., muchacha, f.

Give, dar; (reception), hacer;

(play), representar; back, de-

volver ; instruction, instruir ;

up, dejar, abandonar ; cesar ;

it up, dejarse por vencido.

Glad, to be, alegrarse ; to, ale-

grarse de (with infin. ).

Go, ir; llegar; pasar; ( = " assist"),

acudir ; (of watch) an dar ; and,

ir d ; away^ ir, irse, marcharse ;

further, pasar mds adelante ;

into, entrar ; on, adelan-

tar ; on with, continuar ;

out, salir ; through, recorrer ;

to bed, acostarse ; up,

ascenderse ; with the stream,

bailar al son que se toca.

Gold, s., oro, m.

Good, bueno ; evening, buenas

tardes ; many, muchos ;

morning, buenos dias ; to say

morning, dar los buenos dias ; to be

for nothing, no servir para

nada ; to be enough to, tener la

bondad de ; to do , hacer bien.

Goodness, s., bondad, f.; to have the
to, tener la bondad de.

Govern, gobernar.

Government, s., gobierno, m.

Grammar, s., gramdtica, f.

Grape, s., uva, f.

Great, adj., grande ; many, mu-

chisimo ; er, mayor.

Green, adj., verde.

Grieved, to be, sentir (lo).

Groan, s., ay, m.; gemido, m.

Groan, dar gemidos.

Ground, s., terreno, m.

Guess, adivinar.

Guilty (of misdemeanor), adj., delin-
cuente.

Guitar, s., guitarra, f.

Habit, s., habito, m.; old habits, an-

dadas, f. pi.
Hail, granizar.
Hair, s., pelo, m ; cabello, m.
Half, s., mitad, f.
Half, ad j . , medio ; an hour, una

media hora ; dead with, muer-

tecito de ; past (of time of day),

y media.

Hand, s., mano, f.; hy the of, i,

manos de ; shake with, dar la

mano d ; have at , tener d mano.

Hand, presentar.

Handkerchief, s., panuelo, m.

Handsome, adj., hermoso.

Happen, suceder.

Happiness, s., felicidad, f.

Happy, adj., feliz ; ( = ''faithful " )

fiel ; to be , alegrarse de, tener

gusto en ; to wish one a Easter,

dar las pascuas.
Hard, dificil ; to, dificil de (with

infin.).
Hat, s., sombrero, m.
Hate, aborrecer.
Hateful, adj., aborrecible.
Hatter, s., sombrerero, m.
Havana, s.. la Habana.
Have, haber ; tener ; to to, haber

de ; tener que ; done with, ha-

berse servido de.
Head, s., cabeza, f.
Headache, s., dolor (m.) de cabeza;

to have , tener dolor de cabeza,

doler (3rd. pers.) la cabeza (ind.

obj. of pers.).
Health, s., salud, f.
Hear, oir; (by hearsay) o'ir hab-

lar ; from or of, saber de ;

news of, saber de.
Hearsay, by, de oidas.
Heart, s., corazon, m.; by , de

memoria.
Heat, s., calor, m.

Heaven, s., cielo, m.; Dios, m. (41, 6).
Heavenly adj., celesto.
Heavy, adj., pesado; ( = "deep,'^

"strong") fuerte.
Heels, to take to one's, tomar las de

Villadiego.
Heigrbt, s., altura, f.
Help, ayudar ; cannot , no poder

menos de (with infin.).
Hen, s., gallina, f.
Henry, s., Enrique.
Here, adv., aqui.
Hidden from, oculto d.
Hide, ocultar.
Higrh, adj., alto ; grande ; caro ;

er, mas.
Hill, s., collina, f.
Hint, at the slightest, d media pa-

labra.
History, s., historia, f.
Hold, caber; hacer ( = ''to con-
tain"); tongue, csllaT.

Home, at, en casa.
Honor, s., honor, m.
Honorable, adj., honrado.
Honorably, adv., con honor.
Hope, s., esperanza, f.

VOCABULARY.

505

Hope, esperar.

Horror, oh (interj.), I Que horror !

Horse, s., caballo, m.

Horseback, on, d caballo ; rid-
ing, el pasear i, caballo.

Hospital, s., hospital, m.

Hot, adj., caliente.

Hotel, s., hotel, m.; fonda, f.

Hour, s., hora, f.; half , media

hora ; lesson , hora de la lec-

cion.

House, s., casa, f.; little , casita, f.;

miserable , casuca ; at one's ,

en su casa ; to one's , i, su casa.

How, adv., como; icomo?; quetal;

(exclam. before adj.) que;

far, hasta donde ; much, cu-

dnto ; many, cudntos ;

often, cudntos veces ; so, I como

es eso ? ; soon, cudndo.

Howl, aullar.

Human, adj., humano; del hombre.

Humor, s., humor, m.; in , de

humor ; in to, de humor para.

Hundred, s., cien; ciento; a

(omit a).

I, pron., yo.

I, s., i, f. ; an , una i (36, 26).

Ice, s., hielo, m.

Idea, s., idea, f.

Idiom, s., idioma, m.

If, conj., si.

Ignorant, adj., ignorante ; to he

of ignorar.

Ill, adj., malo.

Illness, s., enfermedad, f.

Imagriue, pensar.

Imperfect, adj., imperfecto.

Important, adj., importante.

Impossible, adj., imposible.

Imprudent, adj., imprudente.

In, prep., en ; (after superl. and with
specific time of day) de; { = ''ac-
cording to") segun ; ( = ^'through,"

of country) por, de ; case,

(conj.), en caso que.

Incommode, incomodar.

Incomplete, adj., incompleto.

Indeed, adv., de veras ; verdadera-
mente ; el hecho es que.

Independence, s., independencia, f.

Indicative, adj., indicativo.

Indigo, adj., anil.

Induce, determinar d.

Infancy, s., infancia, f.

Infinitive, s., infinitivo, m.

Infinity (of), muchlsimos.

Inform of, informar acerca de.

Inhabitant, s., habitante, m.

Initial, s., initial, m.

Injure, danar.

Injury, s., dano, m.

Ink, s., tinta, f.

Inkstand, s., tintero, m.

Inquire, preguntar ; of, pregun-

tar d.

Inquisitive (person), s., pregun-
ton, m.

Insist upon, empenarse en.

Instance, for, por ejemplo.

Instant, s., momento, m.; ( = "pres-
ent month ") del corriente.

Instead of, prep., en lugar de.

Intend, iutentar ; pensar.

Intention, s., intencion, f.; to have
honorable s, obrar de buena fe.

Interest, s., interes, m.

Interesting", adj., interesante.

Interior, s., interior, m.

Interrupt, interrumpir.

Introduce, presentar ; introducir ;
introducing ( = "introduction"), la
presentacion.

Invite, invitar.

Irregular, adj., irregular.

Isabella, s., Isabel.

Italian, adj., italiano.

Italy, s., Italia, f.

James, s., Diego.

Jane, s., Juana.

January, s., enero, m.

Jest, burlarse ; in , de burlas.

Jester, s., burlon, m.

Jesting aside, chanzas aparte.

John, s., Juan.

Journey, s., viaje, m.

Joy, s., gozo, m.

Judge, s., juez, m.

Judge, juzgar.

July, Julio, m.

June, junio, m.

Just, adv., justamente; (of exact

time) enT)unto; to have , aca-

bar de ; now, ahora mismo, por

ahora.

Justly, adv., justamente.

Keep, tener ; (a secret), guardar ;

{a promise), cumplir ; good

time (of watch), andar bien;

one's word, cumplir con su palabra.

Kick, s., puntapie, m.

Kill, matar.

Killed, p. p., muerto.

Kind, s. , clase, f . ; of weather^

tiempo, m.; what of weather?

I que tiempo ?

Kind, adj., bueno ; to be enough

to, tener la bondad de.

King, s., rey, m.

Kingdom, s., reino, m.

506

VOCABULARY,

Knock, tocar ; llamar.

Know, saber ; conocer ; not that I

, no que yo sepa.

Know (how), saber.
Knowledg-e, s., conocimiento, m.

Lady, s.. senora, f.

Lame, adj., cojo.

Languag-e, s., lengua, f. ; idioma, m. ;

lenguaje, m.
Large, adj., grande-
Last, adj., pasado; ultimo; (= '^last

time'^), la ultima vez; year,

month, el ano, mes, pasado, year be-
fore , hace dos anos.

Last, at, en fin, al fin.

Late, adj., tarde ; how ? (of time

of day), I que hora? ; of years,

en estos ultimos anos.

Latin, s., latino ; dog , latinajo, m.

Latter adj., este; e«d (of month),

los ultimos.
Langrh at, reirse de.
Langhingr-stock, s., hazmereir, m.
Law, s., ley, f.
Lawyer, s., abogado, m. ; 's, casa

del abogado.
Lay (a cable), colocar ; tender.
Lazy, adj., perezqso.
Lead (= ''indtice "), hacer; ( = ''con-
duct^'), conducir.
Leaf, s., hoja, f.
Learn, aprender ("d" before infin.);

o'ir; saber.
Learned, adj., instruido.
Learning, s., saber, m. ; conocimien-

tos, m. pi.
Least, at, al menos.
Leave, partir de ; salir de ; marcharse

de ; dejar ; word, dejar dicho.

Left in lurch, to be, quedarse en

bianco.
Leg, s., pierna, f.
Lend, prestar.
Less, adj. and adv., menos.
Lesson, s., leccion, f. ; to he at one's

lessons, estudiar.
Let, dejar ; permitir ; hacer ; one

know, participar ; off, poner en

libertad ; off unpunished, per-

donar.
Letter, s., carta, f. ; letra, f.

Lie, yacer ; in bed, estar en cama.

Life, s., vida, f.

Light, s., luz, f.

Light, adj., ligero.

Light, encender.

Lighten, relampaguear.

Lightning, s., relampajos, m. pi.

Like, gustar (impers., ind. obj. of

pers.) ; best, gustar mds ; should

, quisiera.

Like, to be, parecer ^ ; to be more like

to do, hacer mas facilmente.
Line (of letter), linea escrita, f.
Lion, s., leon, m. ; hunt, caza de

leones.
Lisbon, s., Lisboa.
List, s., lista, f.
Listen (to), oir.
Literature, s., lit^ratura, f.
Litre, s., litro, m.
Little, adj., pequeno ; poco.
Live, vivir ; in the hope of, ali-

mentarse de la esperanza de ;

on, vivir de.
Lively, adj., vivo.
Living, s., vivir, m. ; vida, f.
Living, adj., viviente.
Lock, echar la Have a.
London, s., Londres.
Long, adj., largo; (of time), mucho

tiempo; {= '" late''^) tarde; how

?, icuanto tiempo?; so ,

tanto tiempo ; ago, hace ya

tiempo.

Longer, no, no ya.

Look, mirar ; at, mirar en ;

for, buscar ; let him to that, alia

se los haya.
Lose, perder ; one^s reason, irsele

la cabeza.
Losing-game, s., ganapierde, m.
Loss, s., perdida, f.
Loud, adj., alto.
Louis, s., Luis.
Louisa, s., Luisa.
Love, amar.
Lover, s., amante, m.
Loving, adj., amante ; que te ama.
Low, adj., bajo,
Lunch, merendar.

Madam, s., senora, f.

Madman, s., loco, m.

Magnificent, adj., magnifico.

Make, hacer ; (condition), poner;

living or money, ganar ;

acquaintance of conocer ; affi-
davit, prestar juramento ; fun

of, hacer burla de, burlarse de ;

most of, aprovecharse de ;

object of study, estudiar ; out,

encontrar : up one's mind, de-

cidirse ; virtue of necessity, sa-

car fuerzas de flaqueza.

Malaga, s., Malaga, f.

Mama, s., mamd, f.

Man, s., hombre, m. ; litiJe , hom-

brecito, m.

Manage to, hacer ; saber ; poder ;
acertar a.

Mankind, s., humanidad, f.

Manner, s., modo, m. ; manera, f. ;

VOCABULARY.

507

from the in which one does, etc.,

viendole hacer ; in such a , de

esa manera.

Many, adj., muchos.

March, s., marzo, m.

March, marchar.

Margaret, s., Margarita.

Market, s., mercado, m.

Married, adj., casado.

Marry, casarse.

Masks, in, de mdscara.

Materially, adv., mucho.

Matter, s., asunto, m. ; materia, f. ;

negocio, m. ; no , no importa ;

to be the with, tener.

May, s., mayo, m.

May, poder.

Mean, querer decir.

Meaning, s., significacion, f. ; senti-
do, m. ; lo que quiere decir.

Meanness, s., ruindad, f.

Means, s., medio, m. ; recursos, m.
pi. ; by no , de ningun modo.

Measure, f., medida, f.

Meat, m., came, f.

Medicine, s., medicina, f.

Meet (with), encontrar ; (='^ hap-
pen") suceder (with ind. obj. of
person).

Melon, s., mel6n, m.

Member, s., miembro, m.

Memory, s., memoria, f.

Mention, s., m>enci6n, f.

Mention, mencionar ; nombrar.

Merchant, s., mercador, m. ; comer-
ciante, m.

Mere nothing, a, un nada.

Merit, merecer.

Messrs., Senores (or omit).

Method {='' grammar"), s., gramd-
tica, f.

Metropolis, s., metr6poli, f.

Mexico, s., Mejico, m.

Mexican, adj., mejicano.

Middle (of month), medidos, m. pi.

Midnight, s., media noche.

Milan, s., Mildn.

Mile, s., milla, f.

Milk, s., leche, f.

Million, s., millon, m.

Mine, adj., mio; friend of , ami-
go mlo.

Minute, s., minuto, m.

Misdemeanor, s., delinquir, m.

Misfortune, s., desgracia, f.

Miss, s., senorita, f.

Mistake, s., equivocaci6n.

Mistaken, to be, equivocarse.

Model, s., modelo, m.

Moment, s., momento, m.

Monarchical, adj., mondrquico.

Monday, s., lunes, m.

Money, s., dinero, m.

Month, s., mes, m.

Mood, s., modo, m. ; in jesting ,

de buen humor.

More, adv., mds.

Morning, s., manana, f. ; (before sun-
rise) madrugada, f.

Most, s., la mayor parte.

Mostly, adv., generalmente.

Mother, s., madre, f.

Mourning, to be in, ir de luto.

Mr., s., Senor, m. ; Don, m.

Mrs., Senora, f.

Much, s., mucho; too , demasia-

do ; of a, muy.

Murderer, s., asesino, m.

Music, s., mtisica, f. ; book, libro

de mtisica.

Musician, s., musico, m.

Must, deber.

My, poss. pron., mi; mio.

Name, s., nombre, m.

Named, to be, llamarse.

Naples, s., Napoles.

Nation, s., nacion, f.

Native, s., natural, m.; nativo, m.

Natural, adj., natural.

Naturalist, s., naturalista, m.

Nature, s., naturaleza, f.

Navigation, s., navegaciou, f.

Near, prep., cerca de.

Near (by), adv., proximo.

Nearly, adv., cerca de ; casi.

Necessary, adj., necesario.

Necessity, s., necesidad, f.; for,

necesidad de.

Need, necesitar.

Needle, s., aguja, f.

Needless, to be, no ser necesario.

Neglect, s., negligencia, f.

Negligent, adj., negligente.

Neighbor, s., vecino, m.

Neither, conj., ni el uno ni el otro ;

neither nor, ni ni ; he

does, es verdad que no, etc. (37, 22).

Never, adv., nunca; jamas;

mind, no importa.

New, adj., nuevo ; estrano ; it is noth-
ing , no es estrano.

News, s., noticias, f. pi.

New York, s., Nueva York.

Newspaper, s., periodico, m.

Next, adj., pr6ximo; que viene.

Next, adv., despues; luego.

Next to, prep., junto i, ; inmediato i.

Nick of time, in, de perilla.

Niece, s., sobrina, f.

Night, s., noche, f.; last , anoche ;

before last, anteayer noche.

Nightfall, s., anochecer, m.

Nine, s., nueve.

508

VOCABULABT.

Nineteen, s., diez y nueve.

Ninety, s., noventa.

No, adj., ninguno.

No, adv., no; matter, no im-

porta ; sooner, apenas.

Nobody, s., nadie.

Noise, s., ruido, m.

None, pron., ningano.

Noon, s., medio dia, m.

North, s., norte, m.

Northern, adj., del norte.

Not, adv., no ; at all, de ningtin

modo.
Notary, s., escribano, m.
Note, s., billete, m.; at three

months, un pagare d tres meses

plazo.
Nothing, s., nada ; ninguna cosa ; to

be more than, no ser otra cosa

que.
Notwithstanding", conj., no obstante;

sin embargo de que; ilpesar de que ;

aunque.
Novel, s., novela, f.
November, s., noviembre, m.
Now, adv., ahora; and then, de

cuando en cuando.
Now-a-days, adv., ahora.
Number, s., numero, m.

Obedient servant, yonr most, S.S.S.,

Q.S.M.B.
Oblig-ed, to be, agradecer, estar obli-

gado d, ser agradecido por.
Obscurity, s., obscuridad, f.
Observe, observar.
Observed, adj., usual.
Obtain, obtener ; lograr.
Occasion, s., ocasion, f.
Occupation, s., ocupacion, f.
Occur, suceder, ocurrir.
O'clock, s., hora, f.; what , ique

hora?
October, s., octubre, m.
Of, prep., de.

Of course, adv., por supuesto.
Offend, molestar, ofeuder.
Offender, s., delincuente, m.; reo, m.;

acusado, m.
Offer, prometer ; ofrecer.
Office, s., posicion, f.; oficio, m.; escri-

torio, m.; oficina, f.
Officer, s., oficial, m.
Often, adv., a menudo : frecuente-

mente; how ?, icuantas veces?

Old, adj., viejo; how ?, 6 que

edad tener ?
Omen, s., agiiero, m.
On, prep., en; { = *^ concerning'^)

sobre, acerca de; (omitted before

days of week).
On account of, d causa de.

On condition that, con la condicion

que.
Once, adv., una vez ; at , al mo-

mento ; inmediatamence.
One, num. adj., uno ; o'clocTc, una

hora ; (omitted after adjective ; use

form of el or agw^i before relatives).
Only, adj. and adv., solo; tinico;

solamente ; no mas que ; no

sino.
Open, abrir.
Open, adj., abierto.
Opera, s., opera, f.
Opinion, s., opinion, f.; to have a fine

of oneself, no pesarle de haber

nacido.
Opposed to, to be, oponerse d.
Opposite, prep., en f rente de.
Opposition, s., oposicion, f.
Or, conj., 6 or u.
Orange, s., naranja, f.
Orange, adj., anaranjado.
Orchard (of apples), s., manzanar, m.
Order, s., orden, m.
Order, ordenar.
Order to, in, prep., para.
Organist, s., orgauista, m.
Original, s., original, m.
Other, pron., otro.
Otherwise, adv., de otro modo.
Our(8), poss. pron., nuestro ; friend

of , amigo nuestro.

Out, to be, estar fuera ; of town,

estar en el campo.
Over there, alU.
Overtake, alcanzar.
Owe, deber.

Owing to, prep., d causa de.
Own, tener.
Own, adj., proprio.

Page, s., pagina, f.

Pain, s., dolor, m ; in, dolor de.

Pain, doler (ind. obj. of person).

Painful, to be, doler.

Painter, s., pintor, m.

Painting, s., pintura, f.

Palace, s., palacio, m.

Pantaloons, s., pantalones, m. pi.

Papa, s., papa. m.

Paper, s., pa pel, m. (= ''newspaper'^)
I periodico, m.
i Pardon, perdouar ; dispensar.
; Parents, s.. padres, m. pi.
j Paris, s., Paris.
! Park, s., parque, m.
i Parlor-play, s.. comedia casera, f.

Part, s., parte, f.

Participle, s.. participio, m.

Particular, adj., particular; in ,

en particular.

Particularly, adv., particularmente.

VOCABULAEY,

509

Party, s., parte, f ; tertulia, f.

Pass, pasar ; for, pasar por.

Passage, s., pasaje, m.

Passenger, s., pasajero, m.

Past, y (of time of day, placed after

hour passed, 44, 1).
Pay, pagar; attention, poner

atencion ; no attention to, no

hacer caso de ; visit, liacer

visita.
Peace, s., paz, f.
Peach, s., melocot6n, m.
Pen, s., pluma, f.
Pen-knife, s., cortaplumas, m.
Pencil, s., Mpiz, ni.
Peninsula, s., peuinsula, f.
People, s., geute, f.
Perfect, adj., perfecto ; to become ,

perfeccionarse.
Perfect, perfeccionar.
Perfectly, adv., perfectamente.
Perform, Uevar i cabo.
Perhaps, adv.. tal vez; quizd.
Persist, persistir.
Person, s., persona, f.
Persuade, persuadir.
Peter, s., Pedro.
Philadelphia, s., Filadelfia.
Philosophaster, miserahle, s., filo-

sofastro, m.
Philosopher, s., fil6sofo, m.
Philosophical, adj., filosofico.
Phrase, s.< sentencia, f. ; frase, f.
Phrase-book, s., libro (m.) de frases.
Physician, s., medico, m.
Piano, s., piano, m.
Pianist, s., pianista, m.; 's, d la

tienda del pianista.
Pick quarrel with, buscar cinco pies

al gato.
Piece, s., pedazo, m.; (theatrical)

pieza, f .
Pin, s., alfiler, m.
Pine-grove, s., pinar, m.
Pipe, s., pipa, f.
Pistol-shot, s., pistoletazo, m.
Pity, tener lastima de.
Place, s., lugar, m.; ( = '^position'')

colocacion, f.; in the first , en

primer lugar.
Play, s., comedia, f.
Play (on instrument), tocar ; (a

game), jugar.
Player, s., jugador, m.
Please, gustar ; agradar ; if you ,

si le gusta, si V. quiere.
Pleased, adj., contento.
Pleasure, s., gusto, m.; placer, m.;

do to, hacer el favor de ; for

, para divertirse ; have the

to, tener el gusto de ; take in,

tener gusto en.

Pocket-handkerchief, s., panuelo de

bolsillo, m.
Poem, s., poesia, f.
Poetical, adj., poetico.
Poetry, s., poesia, f.
Point, s., punto, m. ; come to the ,

venir al caso ; not to come to the ,

andarse por las ramas.
Politics, s., pblitica, f.
Poor, adj., pobre.
Port; s., puerto, m.
Portrait, s., retrato, m.
Portugal; s., Portugal.
Portuguese, adj., portugues.
Possess, poseer.
Possible, adj. and s., posible ; to do

all , hacer todo lo posible.

Post-office, s., correo, m.
Pound, s., libra, f.
Power, s., poder, m.
Practitioner, s., practicante, m.
Practise, practiciir ; on, prac-

ticar.
Praise, aplaudir.
Precisely, adv., precisamente ; (of

time) en punto.
Prefer, preferir.
Preferred, to be {= ''preferable^^),

preferible.
Prepare, preparar (para).
Present, adj., actual (55, 7).
Present, at, al presente.
Present, presentar ; respects, dar

memoria de parte i.

Preside (atj, presidir en.
President, s., presidente, m.
Pretension, s., pretension, f.
Preterite definite, preterite definido.
Pretext of, under, con pretexto de.
Pretty, adj., bonito ; hermoso.
Pretty, adv., bastante.
Price, s., precio, m.
Principal, adj., principal.
Principally, adv., principalmente.
Prism, s., prisma, m.
Prismatic, adj., prism^tico.
Prison, s., c^rcel, f.
Private, adj., privado.
Private individual, s., aficionado, m.
Probably, adv., probablemente.
Procession, s., procesion, f.
Procure, procurar.
Produce, producir.
Profession, s., profesi6n, f.
Professor, s., profesor, m. ; 's,

casa del profesor; Spanish, French

, profesor de espanol, de fran-

ces.
Profound, adj., profundo.
Project, s., proyecto, m.
Promenade, s., paseo, m.
Promise,' s., promesa, f.

510

VOCABULAFT.

Promise, prometer.

Promotion, s., ascenso, m.

Pronounce, pronunciar.

Pronunciation, s., pronunciaci6n, f.

Proof, s., prueba, f.

Proper, adj., bueno.

Prophecy, s., profesia, f.

Proportion to, out of (= ''dispropor-
tionately ' ' ), desproporcionadisima-
mente (caro) en respecto d (50, 7).

Propose, proponer.

Prose, s., prosa, f.

Prove, probar.

Provided that, con tal que.

Province, s., provincia, f.

Prudent, adj., prudente.

Prussia s., Prusia, f.

Public, adj., publico.

Publish, publicar; to be published,

: salir a luz.

Punctual, adj., puntual.

Punish, castigar.

Pupil, s., discipulo, m.

Purchase, s., compra, f.

Purist, s., purista, m.

Purpose, s., proposito, m. ; on ,

de intento.

Put, poner ; in, poner ; off,

jwsponer ; up, erigir.

Quality, s., calidad, f.

Quantity, s., cantidad, f.

Quarrel, s., rina, f. ; to get into a

with, andar en dares y tomares

con ; pick a , buscar cinco pies

al gato.
Quarter, cuarto, m. : past, y

cuarto ; to, menos cuarto.

Queen, s., reina, f.
Question, s., pregunta, f.
Quickly, adv., aprisa ; pronto.
Quietness, s., tranquilidad, f.
Quixote, s., Quijote.

Kailroad, s., camino (m.) de hierro;

ferrocarril, m.
Bain, Hover ; in torrents, dilu-

viar. Hover i, cantaros.
Random, at, ^ bulto.
Earely, adv., rara vez.
Eascal, s., picaro, m.
Rash action, temeridad, f.
Rather too, algo.
Ray, s., rayo, m.

Reach, within one's, d su alcance.
Read, leer.
Reader, s., lector, m.
Reading, s., lectura, f.
Ready, adj., pronto.
Real, adj., verdadero; reaL . *
Reality, in, en realidad.

Really, adv., realment« ; verdadera-

mente.
Reason, s., causa, f.; razon, f.
Reasonable, adj., razonable.
Receipt, s., recibo, m.
Receive, recibir.
Reception, s., recepci6n, f.; recibimi-

ento, m.
Recover, recobrar.
Rectify, rectificar ; remediar.
Red, adj., rojo.
Reduce, reducir.
Refuse, negar.
Reg^imen, s., regimen, m.
Regiment, s., regimiento, m.
Regret, pesar (impers., ind. obj. of

person. )
Regular, adj., regular.
Reign, s., reinado, m.
Relative to, relativo i. ; acerca d.
Religious, adj., reHgioso.
Rely on, contar con ; fiarse de ; (of

things) dar por supuesto.
Remain, estarse ; quedar.
Remember, acordarse de ; recordar.
Remuneration, s., remuneracion, f.
Repeat, repetir.
Represent, representar.
Reprove, reprender.
Republican, adj., republican©.
Reputation, s., reputacion, f.
Require, necesitar ; exigir ; to be re-
quired, necesitarse.
Required, adj., necesario.
Resemble, haber salido d (60, 15).
Reside, residir.
Residence, s., residencia, f.
Resolve, resolver.
Respect, s., concepto, m.; in every

, en todo.

Respectable, adj., respe table.
Respected, adj., respetado.
Respecting, prep., acerca de.
Rest, s., descanso, m.; resto, m. (46,

10); to have , tranquilizarse.

Rest, descansar ; descansarse.

Retain, retener.

Return, volver (intrans.); devolver

(trans.).
Revive, revivir.

Reward, recompensar ; premiar.
Rhyme or reason, without, d tontas

y a locas.

Rich, rico; fellow, ricacho.

Ridicule, s., ridiculo (preceded by

"lo").
Ridicule, ridiculizar.
Riding, s., pasear i, caballo ; to be out

, salir a caballo.

Right, justo ; derecho ; to be ,

tener razon ; hacer bien de ; estar

bien.

rOCABULASY.

511

Rise, levantarse ; (of sun) salir.
River, s., rio, m.; by the side, i>

lo largo del rio.
Robber, s., ladron, m.
Rogue (little), s., picaruelo, m.
Rome, s., Eoma.
Room, s., cuarto, m.
Round-faced, adj., carirredondo.
Royal, adj., real.
Rule, s., regla, f.
Run, ir ; about, corretear ; correr

por.

Sad, adj., triste.

Sadness, s., tristeza, f.

Sale, to be for, estar de venta.

Same, adj., mismo.

Satirical, adj., satirico.

Satisfied (with), adj., contento (con).

Saturday, s., sdbado, m.

Say, decir.

Scarcely, adv., apenas; casi.

Scene, s., espect^culo, ra.

Scholar, s., discipulo, m.

School, s., escuela, f. ; fellow, con-

discipulo, m. ; mistress, maes-

tra, f.
Science, s., ciencia, f.
Scold, reiiir.
Score, on that, con respecto d eso;

sobre esa materia.
Sculptor, s., escultor, m.
Sealingr-wax, s., lacre, m.
Search (for), buscar ; in of, en

(su) busca.
Seat, s. (of war), teatro, m. ; to take a

, sentarse.

Second, s., segundo, m.

Second, num. adj., segundo.

Secret, adj., secreto, m.

See, ver ; again, volver i ver ;

how, ver que.

Seem, parecer.

Seldom, adv., raras veces.

Sell, vender.

Send, mandar; enviar; for,

mandar por ; in, pasar ;

off, enviar.
Senses, to be in one's, estar en sus

cinco sentidos.
Separately, adv., separadamente.
Separation, s., separacion, f.
September, s., setiembre, m.
Servant, s., criado, m.
Serve, servir.
Set, poner ; face against, opo-

nerse; fire to, poner fuegoa;

foot, poner los pies ; in (of

season ), entrar ; comencer ; ont,

partir ; out on, emprender ;

sail, darse d la vela.

Seven, num. adj., siete.

Seventeen, num. adj., diez y siete.
Seventy, num. adj., setenta.
Seventy-five, num. adj., setenta y

cinco.
Several, adj., varios.
Sew, coser.
Sex, s., sexo, m.

Shake hands with, dar la mano ^.
Shaved, to be, afeitarse.
Sheep, s., carnero, m.
Ship, s., navio, m.
Shoe, s., zapato, m.
Shoemaker, s., zapatero, m.
Shoemaker's (shop), s., zapateria, f.
Shoot, fusilar.

Short, adj., corto; (of time) poco.
Shortly, adv., poco ; poco tiempo.
Shout, s., dar gritas.
Shouts, s., algazara, f.
Show, ensenar ; mostrar.
Shut, adj., cerrado.
Shut, cerrar ; oneself up, ence-

rrarse ; door in one' s face, darle

con la puerta en la cara.
Sick, adj., enfermo ; to be , enfer-

marse.
Sickly, adj., enfermizo.
Side, s., costado, m. ; by the of

(zz " along''), i> lo largo de.
Side with, ir con.
Sight, s., vista, f.
Sig-n, celebrar (46, 6).
Silence, s., silencio, m.
Silent, adj., callado.
Silk, adj., de seda.
Silk, s., seda, f.
Silver, s., plata, f.
Simple, adj., simple.
Since, adv., despues ; mds ; ever ,

desde entonces.
Since, conj., que ; desde que.
Since, prep., hace (impers., also =

''ago'').
Sincerity, s., sinceridad, f. ; with ,

de buena fe.
Sinecure, s., bocado (m.) sin hueso.
Sing, cantar.

Singer, s., cantor, m. ; cantatriz, f.
Single occasion, never on a, nunca

(63, 1).
Singular, adj., singular.
Sir, s., seiior, m. ; caballero, m.
Sister, s., hermana, f.
Sit down, sentarse.
Sitting, to be, estar sentado.
Situated, p. p., situado.
Six, num. adj., seis.
Sixteen, num. adj., diez y seis.
Sixty, num. adj., sesenta.
Size, s., tamano, m.
Skillful, hdbil.
Skin, s., cutis, m.

512

VOCABULAEY,

Sky, s., cielo, m.

Sleep, s., sueno, m.

Sleep, dormir.

Sleepy, to be, tener sueno.

Slightly, adv., ligeramente.

Slowly, adv., despacio.

Small, adj., pequeno.

Smell, oler ; like, oler d.

Smoke, fumar.

So, adv., tan; { = ''it'') lo; ( =

" also ") tambien ; (= " thm ") asi,

de ese modo ; (as assent after

verb) que si; long as, hasta

que ; much, tanto.

Soap, s., jabon, m.

Society, s., sociedad, f. ; go into ,

visitar la sociedad.
Sofa, s., sofa, m.
Soldier, s., soldado, m.
Sold, to be, venderse.
Solicit, solicitar.
Some, adj. and pron., alguno (sing.) ;

algunos or unos (plur.) ; one,

alguuo.
Something, algo ; to be of a, tener

algo de, ser un poco ; a , uu no

se que (48. 10).
Sometimes, adv., algunas veces.
Son, s., hijo, m.
Song, s., cancion, f.
Soon, adv., pronto ; as as, lo m^s

pronto.
Sooner, adv., m^s pronto ; or

later, tarde que temprano ; no ,

apenas ; no said than done, dicho

y hecho.

Sore, adj., loalo ; to he , doler.

Sorry for, to be, sentir.

Sort, s., especie, f.

Soul, s., alma, f.

South, s., sur, m.

South Africa, s., Africa (f.) del

Sur.
South America, s., America (f.) del

Sur ; el Sur de America.
South American, adj., del Sur de

America.
Spain^ s., Espana, f.
Spaniard, s., Espanol, m.
Spanish, adj., espanol.
Speak, hablar; to be spoken (of lan-
guage), hablarse.
Spectacles, s., anteojos, m. pi. ; espe-

juelos, m. pi.
Speed, with all, ^ todo correr.
Spell, escribir (53, 3).
Spend (time), pasar.
Spirit, s., espiritu, m.
Spoil, perder.
Spring, s., prima vera, f.
Stand, hallarse.
Start, marchar ; partir.

State, s., estado, m.

State-prison, s., presidio, m.

Stay, s., permanencia, f.

Stay, quedar.

Steal, robar.

Steamer, s., vapor, m.

Stepson, s., bijastro, m.

Still, adv., todavia.

Stocking, s., media, f.

Stone, s., cal y canto (^48, 4).

Stop, pararse.

Store, s., tienda, f.

Story (of house), s., piso, m.

Strange, adj., extrano; singular.

Stranger, s., extraugero, m.

Street, s., calle, f.; Broome ,

Walker , la calle de B., de W.

Strength, s., fuerzas, f. pi.

Strip one of his possessions, dejar
en la calle.

Strong, adj., fuerte.

Student, s., estudiante, m.

Studious, adj., estudioso.

Study, s., estudio, m.

Study, estudiar.

Subject, s., materia, f.; sujeto, m.

Succeed, conseguir ; lograr ; tener
buen exito ; salir con ; in ob-
taining, lograr.

Success, s., buen 6xito, m.

Successful, to be, tener buen exito.

Such, adj., tal.

Sudden, of a, de repente

Sue for, pretender.

Suffer, sutFrir.

Suffering, s.. sufriraiento, m.

Sufficient, adj., suficiente.

Suit action to word, decir y hacer.

Suitable, adj., conveniente ipani =
''for").

Suited to, to be, acomodarse.

Summer, s., verano, m.

Sun, s., sol, m.

Sunbeam, s., rayo (m.) del sol.

Sunday, s., domingo. m.

Superior, adj., superior.

Superstitious, adj., supersticioso.

Supper, s., cena, f.

Support, aguantar.

Suppose, suponer ; pensar.

Sure, adj., seguro.

Surpass, pasar.

Surprise, sorprender.

Surprised, to be, sorprenderse.

Surprising, pres. part., sorprendente.

Sustain, sustener.

Swear, jurar.

Sweep, barrer.

Sweet, adj., grato.

Swollen, adj., hinchado.

Sword, s., espada, f.

System, s., sistema, m.

VOCABULAET.

513

TablCi s., mesa, f.

Taciturn, adj., callado.

Tailor, s., sastro, m.

Tailor's shop, s., sastreria, f.

Take, llevar; tomar ; { = ^'lead^')
conducir ; ( = "<o be necessary^')

necesitar ; afternoon-nap, dor-

mir la siesta ; care, tener cui-

dado ; care to, guardar bien de,

tener cuidado de ; for, creer

ser ; for granted, dar por supu-

esto ; one to be, dar d, ;

out, quitar ; place, tener lugar ;

seat, sentarse ; to one^s

heels, tomar las de Villadiego ;

(trip, exercise, etc.), hacer.

Talent, s., talento, m.

Talk, hablar ; (or speah) of,

decir.

Talkative, adj., hablador.

Tall, adj., alto.

Task, s., tacha, f.

Taste, s., gusto, m.

Taste, probar ; of, like,

saber d,.

Teacher, s., maestro, m.; 's, casa

del maestro ; English , miisic

, piano , etc. , ; maestro

de ingles, de musica, de piano, etc.

Teleg-raph-cable, s., telegrafo, m.

Telegraphic, adj., telegr^fico.

Telemachus, s., Telemaco.

Tell, decir ; (story), con tar.

Tell-tale, s., correveidile, m.

Tempt, hacer (with infin.) (65, 10).

Ten, num. adj., diez.

Tense, s., tiempo, m.

Termination, s., terminaci6n, f.

Than, conj., que; de (before numer-
als); cuando (after "apenas").

Thank, agradecer ; you, gracias.

That, adj. and pron., ese, aquel.

Theatre, s., teatro, m.

Then, adv., entonces; (interj.) pues.

There, adv., alii ; ail^.

Therefore, adv., por consiguiente.

Thimble, s., dedal, m.

Thing, s., cosa, f.

Think, creer ; pensar.

Third, num. adj., tercero ; tercera
parte.
.►Thirsty, to be, tener sed.

Thirteen, num. adj., trece.

Thirty, num. adj., treinta.

This, adj. and pron., este.

Thoroughly, adv., completamente.

Though, conj., aunque.

Thought, s., pensamiento, m.

Thousand, s., mil.

Thread, s., hilo, m.

Threaten, amenazar.

Three, num. adj., tres.
35

Throne, s., trono, m.

Throug'h, prep., por.

Throw down (sword), tirar (57, 6).

Thunder, s., trueno, m.

Thunder, tronar (impers.).

Thunderstruck, to be, quedarse

hecho una pieza.
Thursday, s., jueves, m.
Thus, adv., asi.
Time, s., tiempo, m.; vez (f.);

(of day) hora, f. ; have to, tener

tiempo de.
Tire, cansar.
Tiresome, adj., cansado.
To, prep., d; (purpose) para; to go

anyone's, ir ^ casa de.

Toast, s., brindis, m.

Today, adv., hoy ; 's, las de hoy

(21, 7).
Together, adv., reunidos; juntos;

hours , boras enteras.

Tomorrow, adv., manana, f.;

morning, manana por la maiiana;

day after , pasado manana.

Too, adv., tambi^n ; much, dema-

siado.
Tooth, s., muela, f.
Toothache, s., dolor de muelas.
Top, s., cima, f.
Towards, prep., hacia.
Town, s., ciudad, f.
Trade, s., oficio, m.
Tramping" of feet, rumor de pasos.
Transgressor, s., delincuente, m.
Translate, traducir.
Travel, s., viaje, m.
Travel, viajar.
Treat, tratar.
Treatise, s., tratado, m.
Treaty, s., tratado, m.
Trial, s., juicio, m. ; causa, f.
Trifle, s., friolera, f.
Trimmings, s., guarnicia, f.
Trinity-Church, s., la Iglesia de la

Trinidad.
Trip, s., viaje, m. ; to take a , ha-
cer un viaje.
Trouble, s., trabajo, m. ; molestia, f.,

take the to, tomar trabajo de.

Trouble, molestar ; oneself about

nothing, no darse nada por nada.
True, adj., verdadero; verdad ; it is

, es verdad.

Trunk, s., baul, m.

Truth, s., verdad, f.

Try, probar.

Tuesday, s., martes, m.

Tune, templar.

Turn (direction), tomar (50, 4) ;

out, salir (61, 3 ; 62, 4) ; out to

be, salir ; up for, salir ; to

account, sacar provecho de ; how

514

VOCABULARY,

matters will out, cudl serd el

resultado.
Twelve, num. adj., doce; at , i>

las doce.
Twenty, num. adj., veinte.
Twice, adv., dos veces.
Two, num. adj., dos.

Umbrella, s., paraguas, m.

Unable, to be, no poder.

Uncle, s., tio, m.

Understand, entender ; comprender ;

creer ; pensar ; one another, ir

claros.
Undertake, emprender ; hacer.
Undertaking s., empresa, f.
Undoubtedly, adv., sin duda.
Unfortunate, adj., desgraciado.
Unfortunately, adv., desgraciada-

mente.
Union, s., union, f.
Unite, unirse.
United-States, s., Estados-Unidos,

m. pi.
Unless, conj., i, no ser que (followed

bysubjunc).
Until, prep., hasta.
Until, conj., hasta que.
Unwell, to be, no estar bueno.
Up, to be,- levantarse.
Up, interj., i arriba !
Upon, prep., ^.
Upper part, s., parte alta, f.
Upstairs, adv., arriba.
Use, s., uso, m.
Use, usar ; servirse de ; (of cigars, =

"swiofce ") fumar.
Used to (translate by imperfect

tense).
Useful, adj., util.
Useless, adj., inutil.
Usually, adv., de costumbre.

Value, s., valor, m.

Vegetation, s., vegetaci6n, f.

Verb, s., verbo, m.

Very, adv., muy; this day, hoy

mismo ; much, muy ; much

of a, muy.
Vest, s., chaleco, m.
Victory, s., victoria, f.
Vienna, s., Viena.
Violet, adj., violado.
Violin, s., violin, m.
Virtue, s., virtud, f.
Visit, s., visita, f.
Vivifying, pres. part., viviente.
Volume, s., tomo, m.
Voyage, s., viaje, m.

Wager, ir (followed by substantive
indicating amount wagered, 63,
10.)

"Wait, esperar; for, quedar ^

(with infin.).

Wake up, despertar.

Walk, s., paseo, m.

Walk, pasear ; andar.

Waltz, s., valz, m.

Want, querer ; necesitar ; exigir ; fal-
tar (65, 12).

Want of, for, por falta de.

Wanting, to be, faltar.

War, s., guerra, f. ; to he at with,

estar en guerra con.

Warm, adj., caliente ; to he , tener

calor.

Warm, calentar.

Warn, aconsejar.

Wash, lavar.

Wash-basin, s., palangana, f.

Washerwoman, s., lavandera, f.

Watch, s., reloj, m.

Water, s., agua, f.

Way, s., camino, m. ; on one^s ,

yendo.

Wear, usar ; llevar ; gastar.

Weather, s., tiempo, m.

Wednesday, s., miercoles, m.

Week, s., semana, f. ; hy this day ,

de hoy en ocho dias.

Weigh, pesar.

Weight, s., pesa, f.

Welcome, adj., bienvenido.

Well, adj., bien ; to he , estar

bueno ; and good, en hora bue-

na, santo y bueno.

West, s., oeste, m.

Western, adj., del oeste.

What, inter, pron., ique?; (as com-
pound rel.), lo que; but, que

sino ; for f, I porque ? ;

little money, el poco dinero (44, 6).

Whatever, s., cualquiera.

When, adv. and conj., cuando.

Where, adv. and conj., (of rest) don-
de, en donde ; (of motion) d donde.

Wherever, adv. and conj., donde
quiei-a.

Whether, conj., (interrog.) si ; (con-
cess.) whether or, ya ya ;

they he, ya scan.

Which, pron., cud-1; el cudl ; que
(9, 9).

While, s., tiempo, m.

Whim, s., capricho, m.

Whisper, hablar al oido.

Who, pron., quien ; iqui^n? ; que.

Whole (the), s., todo el ; the of,

todo el ; the night over, todita

la noche.

Whose, interr. pron., cuyo ; ictiyo?

Why, (interr. pron.,) i porque? ; (ex-
clam.) I como !

Wife, s., senora, f.

VOCABULARY,

515

Will, s., voluntad, f.

Will, querer ; or the future tense.

Window, s., ventana, f.

Windy, to be^ hacer (impers.) viento.

Wine, s., vino, m.; very poor ,

vinacho, m.
Winter, s., Inviemo, m.
Wise, adj., sabio.
Wish s., deseo, m.; intencion, f.
With, prep., con; { = '' among")

entre ; to do , hacer de.

Within, prep., en ; (of time) de

i, esta parte ; one's reach, d, su

alcance.
Without, prep., sin.
Woman, s., mujer, f.
Wonder, no saber (53, 12).
Wooden, adj., de madera.
Word, s., palabra, f.
Work, s., trabajo, m.; obra, f.

Work, trabajar ; at, trabajar en.

World, s., mundo, m.

Worn, p. p., llevado; usado (see

"wear"); to be worn out with, estar

rendido de.
Worth, to be, valer ; seeing,

valer la pena de ver.
Worse, adj., peor.
Worst, adj., el peor; of all, lo

peor de todo.
Write, escribir.

Writer, s., escritor, m.

Writingi s., escritura, f. (24, 3; 27,

29).
Writing", pres. part., escribiendo;

escribir.

Yard, s., ( = ''court") patio, m.; (of
measure) vara, f.

Year, s., ano, m.; last , el aiio

pasado ; next , el ano que viene ;

before last, hace dos anos ; of late
s, en estos tiltimos aiios.

Yellow, adj., araarillo.

Yesterday, adv. and s., ayer ; day
before , anteayer, antes de ayer.

Yet, adv., aun ; todavia; sin em-
bargo ; not , todavia no.

You, pron., tu ; Usted ; vos ; voso-
tros.

Young* adj., j6ven ; lady, seno-

rita, f.; gentleman, caballerito,

m.; man, j6ven, m.

Your(s), poss. pron., tu ; el tuyo ; de
Usted ; el de usted ; vuestro ; el
vuestro ; etc., your most obedient
servant, or yours very truly, Queda
de V. or Manda V. cuanto guste d.
S.S.S., Q.S.M.B. (Su seguro servi-
dor, que su mano besa).

Z, s. f., the z, la z (36, 26).

(84)

O'

THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW

AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS

WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.

.Sfr

•'■■■^ fUj__

Zl'^.'^'^'^,..

^IS'Sllu

21Maj'52Kl

yJUX i iS;

>'.iv

"^6^

f^

6osr

21JUL'

y o

■-UQ:^cj

LD 21-1007/1-12, '43 (8796s)

U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES

uy \j^K^

coemiiaiM